• Home
  • Who We Are
    • Our mission
  • Our Services
  • Blog
    • Blog Index
  • Podcast
    • Podcast Index
  • Resources
    • PCN Plus Conference: The Future of PCNs 2025
    • TV documentary
    • The Future of General Practice: Book
  • Contact Us

No products in the basket.

  • Home
  • Who We Are
    • Our mission
  • Our Services
  • Blog
    • Blog Index
  • Podcast
    • Podcast Index
  • Resources
    • PCN Plus Conference: The Future of PCNs 2025
    • TV documentary
    • The Future of General Practice: Book
  • Contact Us

14
may
0

Why Engage with Neighbourhoods?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Neighbourhoods can be a frustrating concept.  Noone seems to be able to define what they are, and they have the feel of the latest initiative, one that will inevitably come and then go, like so many of its predecessors.  Given this, why should PCNs and practice engage with neighbourhoods?

It is an important question.  Too often local areas jump into what neighbourhoods should be doing (risk stratification etc), without taking the time to articulate why the work is important for general practice in the first place.  I understand the frustration with yet another new concept coming along, but I think there are four reasons why practices and PCNs do need to take neighbourhoods seriously.

  1. To join up care for the local population. The frustration of many practices for many years now has been the increasing distance between themselves and community teams such as district nurses and community midwives.  The opportunity that neighbourhoods presents is to bring back those linkages, and ensure all of the local community service provision is joined up.

At present the scope of influence of practices and PCNs is very much limited to the work of the practices themselves.  Neighbourhoods provide an opportunity to shape how all of the services working in the community can operate to deliver the best possible outcomes for the local population.

  1. To shape service delivery models. Too often in recent years practices have been on the receiving end of centrally defined enhanced service specification that they know are not going to achieve the outcomes that are being sought for their own patients.  These one-size-fits-all specifications fail to take into account the nuances of the local care homes, or local population groups, or whatever it is that is specific to the local area.

The opportunity of neighbourhoods is not only to be able to join up care delivery across providers but also to design and tailor service delivery models to the needs of the local population.  The whole point of neighbourhoods is enabling those front-line staff that best understand the needs of their population to create the service models that will have the biggest impact.

Just as a side note on this, not everywhere seems to have grasped this yet.  If your local ICB are still pushing one-size-fits-specifications to be implemented across all the emerging local neighbourhoods then do push back.  Establishing the freedom and autonomy of each neighbourhood to design its own care delivery models is an important first step that needs to be taken as early as possible.

  1. To ensure general practice leads the work. Like them or not, neighbourhoods are coming, and GP practices and PCNs are going to be part of them.  The choice is either to engage early and establish the leadership role that general practice should be playing within them, or to ignore them and let others take up the leadership mantle.

Unsurprisingly, community trusts, mental health trusts, acute trust and councils are all very keen to play a leading role in neighbourhoods.  If practices and PCNs choose not to engage then there are plenty of others who will.  This will result in others controlling how the neighbourhood works and (importantly) how resources are deployed, with potentially hugely negative implications for general practice.

  1. To shape the shift from hospitals to communities. Neighbourhoods are being established as a vehicle to enable the government’s promised shift of services from acute to community.  PCNs and practices need to be at the forefront of their development to prevent a continuation of the unfunded and unthought through shedding of activity by hospitals and turn it into an opportunity to create a prosperous future for general practice.

It very much feels like the future of general practice will be inextricably linked to neighbourhoods and how they develop.  This means the stakes feel too high for them to simply be ignored, and the sensible move right now is to take an active role in shaping them.

30
apr
0

How Can PCNs Prepare for Neighbourhoods?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

It is a difficult period for PCNs as all the talk is about neighbourhoods, while PCNs themselves are not getting much of a look in.  This in turn is serving to create question marks around the very future of PCNs and creating additional pressure for PCN leaders who are having to manage (yet another) period of uncertainty.

Given this situation, what is the best way for PCNs to prepare for neighbourhoods?

While neighbourhoods still remain largely in the realm of the conceptual, with very few being able to adequately define what they are or what their purpose is, it is easy for PCN leaders to adopt the ‘head in the sand’ approach and ignore them until something more concrete comes along.

But the government has been clear that the development of a ‘Neighbourhood Health Service’ is central to their plans, and there is no doubt that they are going to feature front and centre in the forthcoming 10 year plan (which is now expected in June).  Equally they have been clear that they want their development to be locally led, tailored to local needs, and not be a one size fits all top down imposition.

With this in mind, ignoring their development, and potentially missing out on local conversations as to how they will take shape, runs the risk of allowing others to mould them to their own needs and to diminish the influence of PCNs and practices.

There are two actions I would recommend PCNs take right now.  The first is to identify how they can free up as much of their PCN Clinical Director’s time as possible to build relationships and influence externally.

In the majority of PCNs the CD tends to focus on internal issues and relationships.  They work to maintain the goodwill of the member practices and ensure the delivery of services such as enhanced access and ARRS initiatives like home visiting.  But now CDs need to be freed up from this work by other clinical leads and managers in the PCNs so that they can focus externally.

Exactly how this can happen will vary greatly from PCN to PCN.  But the stage of development that PCNs need to reach is one that some have got to already where there is enough of a leadership infrastructure that means the whole PCN enterprise is not dependent on the CD.

CDs in turn need to focus their efforts on building relationships with other organisations and local leaders across the neighbourhood.  It is not a case of simply attending the ICB-driven meetings (although where they are making decisions about how the neighbourhoods are to develop locally these are important!), but more about building the personal relationships across the local provider network that will strengthen the influence of the PCN in local decision making.

The second action I would recommend is for local PCNs to work with each other, the local federation (if there is one) and the LMC to establish what the NHS Confederation term a primary care collaborative.

While it is not possible for one PCN or CD to do this on their own, it is possible to choose to invest time in building this joint forum for PCNs and practices that once in place can maximise the influence of general practice in the development of neighbourhoods.

Where these fora have developed, sometimes the impetus has come from the PCN CDs, sometimes from the federation, sometimes from the LMC and sometimes even the ICB.  Wherever the energy comes from for PCNs it is about getting behind this, recognising its importance in shaping how the neighbourhoods develop, and investing the time to make it succeed.

While the final shape of neighbourhoods remains outside the control of PCNs, the ability to influence this does not.  This development period that we are in now is the most important as it is when decisions are made that have lasting consequences, and so the immediate priority must be making the influence on these decisions by PCNs and practices as strong as possible.

9
apr
0

Advice and Guidance: Centralised Micromanagement at its worst

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

A wiser man than me noted that every NHS reorganisation over the last 20 years promised to decentralise power to the front line but actually resulted in more centralisation than existed before.  So, will the newly announced changes to NHS England and ICBs result in the same?

When the government explained its decision to scrap NHS England it said, “The changes will crucially also give more power and autonomy to local leaders and systems – instead of weighing them down in increasing mountains of red tape, they will be given the tools and trust they need to deliver health services for the local communities they serve with more freedom to tailor provision to meet local needs.”

It is a pretty stark promise of more local autonomy, but one that sets off alarm bells in those concerned that yet again this will result in even more centralised control.

The first articulator of this concern was, surprisingly, former Health Secretary of State Patricia Hewitt, who also announced that she was stepping down from her current role as ICB Chair for health reasons.  She said, in an interview with the HSJ, “The real problem is combining the abolition of NHSE with hugely increased micromanagement from the centre”, concluding “it’s one more tightening of the screw, I fear”.

In response a DHSC spokesperson said, “We aren’t going to replace micromanagement from NHSE with micromanagement from DHSC”, which is a pretty firm rebuttal, but not enough to reassure sceptics (like me).  Instead, these words need to translate into action.

It is into this context that the Advice and Guidance Operational Delivery Framework for ICBs has just been published.  This is of material interest to general practice, who at the same time have received their own Enhanced Service specification for advice and guidance.

Unsurprisingly, the framework does not give any of the promised freedom for local areas.  Instead, it provides a list of more than 20 indicators and over 70 minimum standards that ICBs need to achieve. These are not outcomes, but rather a huge list of process actions that are very specific, such as “complete clinically led audits quarterly at specialty level” and “agree and develop a peer learning programme to address identified learning needs”.

Not only is it disempowering, but it is hugely time consuming.  ICBs are “required to review the key indicator and related minimum standards and assess the level of implementation within their system for the quarter being completed”.  Just think of the work involved in trying to complete the template against the 70+ minimum standards every quarter.  All effort shifts from making advice and guidance actually work locally to complying with the demands of the centre and reporting upwards.

The document also contains what it terms “guiding principles of accountability”.  These state that general practice has responsibility to “reduce unwarranted variation in the use of Advice and Guidance”, and that GP Partners are accountable for this(!).  However, a quick cross check to the DES and there is no mention of “unwarranted variation”.  Indeed, there the focus is solely on when advice and guidance is actually being used, with zero on an expectation of overall usage.

As a result, many practices will end up being questioned about their rate of usage of advice and guidance, which is not included in any contract they have signed up to.  I doubt it would take much of this type of inappropriate pushing for many practices to turn their back on the DES altogether.

It could, of course, be totally different.  If the national teams had resisted the urge to micromanage, then local teams could have brought primary and secondary care clinicians together to have productive conversations that could move the whole process away from box ticking into one with an education focus to improve the service for local patients.  But, sadly, we are where we are.

This is material for general practice.  While practices can ultimately ignore their ICB and focus on delivering the contract they have signed up to, there is wider talk (including from new NHS CEO Jim Mackey) about integrating general practice into the NHS via local care organisations and the like.  Should this happen, while the current system remains, there would be no escaping the top down NHS pressure, and practices would undoubtedly face constant questions not just about their usage of advice and guidance but also about their access times, e-consultation rates, rate of A&E attendances etc etc.

The message for general practice must surely be that unless there is a demonstrable commitment to devolve decision-making (particularly about how to do things like advice and guidance) to local providers then the independent contractor status, and the protection it affords from this NHS madness, must remain sacrosanct.

26
mar
0

What do the Changes to NHS England and ICBs mean for General Practice?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

In a tumultuous couple of weeks for the NHS the government announced that NHS England is to be abolished, and that Integrated Care Boards (ICBs) are to reduce costs by 50% by October.  What will these changes mean for general practice?

The BMA does not come out either in favour or against the abolition of NHS England, seeing the potential of the removal of a layer of bureaucracy but expressing concern about the disruption such a change will bring.

The staff affected have already not been well treated by the way the communication has been handled, and the political point scoring around reducing bureaucrats has exacerbated this.  It is inevitable that the changes are going to cause a huge amount of disruption, and I very much feel for those caught up in the middle of all this.

My sense, however, is that the biggest impact on general practice will not be just the turmoil of the coming months.  In the medium to longer term these changes could impact the freedom of local areas, fundamentally change local contracting arrangements and potentially have significant implications for the future of the independent contractor model.

  1. The Freedom of Local Areas

The Department of Health insists the changes will lead to more devolution of powers and responsibilities to local areas.  However, concerns have been raised in certain quarters (in particular outgoing ICB Chair and former Secretary of State Patricia Hewitt) that overbearing performance management by ICBs and NHS England regional teams will simply be replaced by (worse) micromanagement direct from the centre.

What remains to be seen is whether as part of these changes the government is prepared to relinquish the notion of “grip” that came to the fore 20 years ago and support local innovation and autonomy, or whether it will simply seek to centralise the mechanism for exercising control.

The status of general practice as independent contractors has largely protected it from the control the NHS machinery inflicts on front line providers and local area teams.  Those GPs who have engaged with CCGs and ICBs will have experienced it, and it is something that has undoubtedly contributed negatively to both NHS performance and staff experience in recent times.

However, it is likely to become much more relevant to general practice because this freedom (or control) will apply to the new neighbourhoods that emerge from the forthcoming 10 year plan, to which the future of general practice seems inextricably linked.  Even in his letter to the GPC confirming the government’s commitment to securing a new substantive GP contract Secretary of State Wes Streeting said he was committed to, “deliver meaningful reform to establish a modern general practice at the heart of a neighbourhood health service”.

The desire for central control has stifled local innovation and freedom to act, and diverted huge amounts of time, resources and energy away from driving local change.  The changes could be positive and mean neighbourhoods have a freedom to shape services to meet local needs that has been absent in recent times, or it may have the opposite impact. We will have to wait and see to find out.

  1. Local Contracting Arrangements

The biggest direct role of NHS England and ICBs concerning general practice has been contract management and support via the local primary care teams.   After their dismantling in 2013 when responsibility was shifted from PCTs to NHS England, and then shifted to first CGGs and subsequently ICBs, it is not a surprise these have not been in great shape in recent years (although some have done remarkably well despite all of this).

There has been more of a focus by the centre on the contract itself in recent years, e.g. when primary legislation was passed in May 2023 changing the contract to require practices to respond to patient requests on the day the request is received.  In this year’s planning guidance NHS England promised a new “Commissioning and Transformation Support Programme” to support ICBs to “create the right conditions for improving general practice, including contractual management and transformation”.  This was backed up by Secretary of State condemning “unwarranted variation” in GP performance and exhorting ICBs to target practices who are “coasting”.

So, the question is whether these latest cuts mean all of this will fall by the wayside, or will we see a more distant, impersonal and potentially harsher contract management approach being taken towards general practice?

Meanwhile it is neighbourhoods that have been tasked with improving access to general practice.  What we need to look out for is whether it will be neighbourhoods as they emerge who take on the role of local general practice contract support, or whether we will see a shift to a more formal style of GP contract management from larger more remote ICB teams.

The demise of NHS England and shrinkage of ICBs may even lead to local providers taking on the GP contracting role.  The HSJ has suggested that the changes will inevitably lead to the rise of “local care organisations”, with a lead provider responsible for neighbourhood services.  The predominance of acute trust CEOs on the NHS England transition executive, along with the model already operating in new NHS CEO Jim Mackey’s home patch of Northumbria, may signal a shift to these being led in many places by the local acute trust.

  1. The Independent Contractor Model

The lack of anyone to manage the GP contract even raises the question of what the consequences could be for the independent contractor model.  In what is unlikely to be coincidental timing, the Nuffield Trust have just published a report questioning the longer term viability of the partnership model, and called for alternatives to be urgently explored.  The Secretary of State has seemed more positive in recent weeks about the model, but has in the past suggested a wider range of options also need to be considered.

Even if the core national contract remains into the longer term, it does seem there is the very real possibility that local enhanced service contracts will be picked up and managed by lead local providers overseeing the new neighbourhoods.  This in turn could well accelerate the development of other models for general practice, as local areas seek to replicate the type of model in existence in Northumbria.

12
mar
0

5 Things we can learn from the New GP Contract

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

I am sure you have had chance to see the changes to the GP contract for next year by now, the headline of which is an increased investment into general practice for the first time in what feels like a very long time.  But what can we learn from the new contract?  Here are 5 initial observations.

  1. This government wants to invest in general practice

Last year when the Labour government came into power they increased the global sum by 7.4% to fund GP and practice staff pay rises worth 6%, and this has been followed up with a 7.2% cash growth on the total contract funding envelope in this year’s settlement.

This is in stark contrast to the previous administration, who steadfastly refused to release any additional funds beyond those agreed in the 2019 contract, despite inflation running into double figures.  Not only that, but overall money is extremely tight, both in the NHS and more widely across government, and so this injection of funding is not in line with what is happening in most other areas.

The government has pledged to shift care from hospitals to the community, and to increase the percentage share of NHS funding that primary care receives, and this settlement indicates that they are looking to make good on these promises.  This is good news for general practice, and holds promise for the future.

  1. Life is not going to improve quickly for practices

The less good news is that all of the new investment is likely to get swallowed up by either new or existing cost pressures.  Of the global sum increase of £743M, it is estimated that £300M will be swallowed up by the new employer national insurance contributions and increase in the national living wage, and a further £300M to fund a 2.8% pay uplift for staff.  This only leaves £143M to fund any other new cost pressures, and to try and start to make a dent in the backlog of unfunded cost pressures from previous years.

So while at least things will not get worse financially for practices this year (which in itself is a change from previous years), they also are unlikely to get much better.

  1. Access is the priority for general practice

For all the talk about neighbourhoods in recent times, these changes reinforce the priority that the government gives to improving GP access.  The key inclusion into the contract is the requirement for practices to keep their online consultation tools on for the duration of core hours from the 1st October.

The delayed implementation date and the multiple references to “necessary safeguards” indicate this was a tough part of the contract changes to agree, but one that NHS England was not prepared to back down on.  Given improvements to GP access is also a key priority for the emerging neighbourhoods for this year we should not expect the pressure in this area to ease any time soon.

  1. PCNs are not going anywhere

For the GPC’s part, they have clearly worked hard to negotiate more flexibility to the ARRS pot.  A number of concessions have been made such as the caps on numbers of staff being removed, the pot for new GPs no longer being separate, the maximum reimbursable salary for GPs being increased, and the addition of practice nurses to the roles that can be employed.

However, what the GPC really wanted was for the £1.6bn of ARRS funding to be shifted into the core contract.  This was not agreed by NHS England.  There is to be a “joint review on the future of ARRS” through 25/26, but that really just points to an inability to get to an agreement within these contact discussions.

The reality is that while it would have been cost neutral for NHS England to meet this demand, they know that the majority of PCN funding is within the ARRS pot, and that dismantling it would most likely effectively precipitate the demise of PCNs.  PCNs clearly form an important component of the neighbourhoods that we will find more out about in the 10 year plan, and having fought so hard and invested so much in their establishment over the last 6 years NHS England is not prepared to simply let them go.

  1. Much bigger change for general practice is on the way

This contract very much has the feel of a holding contract, one that is designed to keep things going, remove the cloud of collective action and suggest positive intent without introducing any major changes.

However, GPC England has been clear that acceptance of this contract is conditional on a commitment from the government to a “full renegotiation of the new national contract, beginning within this parliament”.  The government, meanwhile, is closing in on the publication of its much-touted 10 year plan, and for the shifts it is seeking to achieve changes in general practice are going to be required.

This all points to much bigger changes ahead.  At least now the two sides are talking and have been able to come to an agreement for this year, but any trust that has been built is likely to be needed in the even trickier negotiations that await in the years to come.

26
feb
0

Neighbourhoods: 6 Things to Look Out For

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

While we know the impact of neighbourhoods could potentially be hugely significant for general practice and PCNs, the recently published neighbourhood health guidelines told us very little about them.  This is because the powers that be want them to be locally developed rather than nationally imposed.

But this in itself is important.  It means all of the most important decisions about neighbourhoods are going to be taken locally.  Neighbourhoods in one area could look very different to neighbourhoods in another.  The devil will be in the details.

It almost goes without saying, then, that general practice needs to make sure it is directly involved in the decision making about the local development of neighbourhoods.  According to the guidelines there needs to be, “a mechanism for joint senior leadership, such as a joint neighbourhood health taskforce, in each place to drive integrated working, comprising senior leaders from the constituent organisations across health and care, including the acute hospital”.  General practice needs to make sure it is on whatever this looks like in their local area.

But getting on this group or taskforce is only step one.  Once there, what do general practice leaders need to be seeking to influence?  Here is an initial list of 6 things to look out for:

  1. The Configuration of PCNs. The Neighbourhood Health guidelines avoid the question of what the configuration of neighbourhoods should be, instead leaving this for local areas to decide.  While some areas may end up with a configuration that matches the current PCN configuration, many areas will not.  A key question will be how, then, any misalignment between the two should be handled, and whether attempts will be made to alter the configuration of PCNs as a result.

 

  1. Control of PCN Resources. While we may see an investment in the neighbourhood infrastructure via the forthcoming 10 year plan, as it stands the current guidelines do not suggest that there will be any.  Given the lack of additional resources there is a real risk that the system will try to treat PCN resources, and in particular the ARRS staff, as neighbourhood resources rather than resources that belong to general practice.

 

  1. Improving GP Access. It seems somewhat incongruous that neighbourhoods, that are supposedly about joint working between organisations, are to have a focus on improving the performance of one of these organisations (general practice) as an initial priority (“NHS England regional teams… should work with systems to agree locally what specific impacts they will seek to achieve during 2025/26. We expect these to include, as a minimum, improving timely access to general practice”).

One question this raises is how neighbourhoods will seek to achieve this.  The risk to watch out for is that systems via neighbourhoods may choose to adopt a top-down, performance management approach, rather than one that seeks to reduce pressure on practices by maximising the contribution of other local agencies.

  1. The Role of PCN CDs. If PCNs are to form one component of neighbourhoods alongside a range of other local providers, an important question will be where PCN CDs end up sitting within the neighbourhood leadership infrastructure (if anywhere).  Will PCN CDs be able to play an influential role in shaping and leading neighbourhoods, or will the local system attempt to sideline them in favour of giving power to others?

 

  1. The “Integrator” Function. All the indications are that an at-scale organisation will be sought to take on what has so far been termed an “integrator” function (for example in North West London – here).  This is where one organisation takes on responsibility for bringing all the providers in the neighbourhood together, which in turn could bestow considerable control of the neighbourhoods to that organisation.  While theoretically this could be a primary care organisation, a community health provider or a local authority, what is important is which of these it ends up being locally.

 

  1. Funding Streams (and link to GP funding streams). If neighbourhoods are to have any kind of authority then they will need to have clear funding streams.  The guidelines, however, do not make clear what these will be.  The concern might be that some systems may choose to set neighbourhoods up as commissioning style organisations, that hold all of the local funding for the local providers, but with the freedom to move it around to “best meet local needs”.  This could potentially put GP and PCN funding at risk.

The other funding stream risk GP leaders will need to be aware of is where finances are predicated on a series of “invest to save” business cases, designed to shift resources from secondary care to the new neighbourhoods.  These have a terrible record of success, largely due to fixed capacity in secondary care and the ongoing increase in overall demand (Joe McManners explained this well on our podcast last year), and so such a design would most likely be setting neighbourhoods up to fail.

These are just some of the initial things for GP leaders to be looking out for.  The most important thing at this stage is to ensure that general practice is represented on the local neighbourhood development group, and that there is effective two way communication between this representation and practices and PCNs.

12
feb
0

What is in Store for General Practice Next Year: Change is Coming

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

A whole new raft of documents was published by the government and NHS England at the end of January, and they have significant potential implications for general practice.  What can we learn from this latest batch?

These new publications include the latest “mandate” from the government for NHS England, which outlines the government’s expectations for next year, the Planning Guidance for 25/26 from NHS England to the service, NHS England’s new operating model, and the new Neighbourhood Health Guidelines which outline how neighbourhoods are to develop next year.

There is a consistent theme throughout these documents which will come as no surprise: improving GP access.  The planning guidance lays down the target for systems to improve patients’ access to general practice, including patient experience.  While it does not set out a numerical target it does state that GP access will now be measured by a regular Office for National Statistics survey.

Of the 5 government Mandate objectives for the NHS, one is to “reform to improve primary care access”.  What does this “reform” entail?  In part it is the “tackling unwarranted variation” mantra that never gets anybody anywhere.  Wes Streeting said in an interview with the HSJ that he wants ICBs to target practices “who are coasting at the expense of those who are striving hard”.  According to Wes there are “some practices who are not working as hard as they could and driving improvements as they could for their patients”.

Let’s put aside (if we can) the fallacy of diagnosing variation in access performance as a pure function of individual practice effort, and how offensive this is to all of those practices doing their best with inadequate funding for the vastly different practice populations they serve.  What is more worrying is that NHS England appear to have taken this to heart.

In their new Operating Model NHS England promises that “in the Spring we will provide you with details of a new Commissioning and Transformation Support Programme for GP commissioners that will support ICBs to create the right conditions for improving general practice, including contractual management and transformation leading to benefits for patients and the workforce”.  This has the heavy whiff of using blunt contractual and performance management to tackle variation (based on the diagnosis that the issue is lack of effort).  It is noteworthy that practices themselves are not listed as one of the supposed beneficiaries of this new approach.

In turn in the new Planning Guidance all ICBs are to, “put in place action plans by June 25 to improve contract oversight, commissioning and transformation for general practice, and tackle unwanted variation”, i.e. outline how they will put this new guidance into practice locally.

The other main element of the government’s mandate for the NHS to reform to improve primary care access is that it should, “develop approaches with relevant partners to improve financial flows within health and social care to provide more coordinated services to patients as a step towards building a new neighbourhood health service”.  What does this mean?

Well this is not as clear, because the mandate does not elaborate any further.  The new guidelines on neighbourhoods lack specificity.  They do not say what a neighbourhood is, what size it should be, what population it should cover, or how it should align with existing ICB or PCN structures.  While the official line is that this is to leave freedom for local teams to develop the model that will work best locally, it would be a huge surprise if the 10 year plan once it arrives does not fill in at least some of these blanks.

The neighbourhood guidelines do, however, make a couple of relevant things clear for general practice.  The aim of neighbourhoods (at least in the short term) is to both reduce the pressure on acute hospitals and to help with the immediate financial challenges systems are facing.  This means no new investment has (so far) been identified for them, and (one can’t help feeling) that they are therefore being set up to fail (Joe McManners eloquently explains in this episode of the podcast why neighbourhoods need to be seen as a long term investment in reducing growth in activity rather than a mechanism for reducing activity in the short term).

The relationship between neighbourhoods and general practice is also noteworthy.  General practice is not portrayed as a co-creator of neighbourhoods but rather as a recipient of them.  One of the initial six “core components” of neighbourhoods is “modern general practice”, as something for neighbourhoods to implement.  General practice appears more as a target of neighbourhood activity than as something they will be an integral part of.

This is further reinforced by the fact that it is ICBs and local authorities that are asked to jointly plan a neighbourhood health and care model for their local population.  There is a requirement for, “a mechanism for joint senior leadership such as a joint neighbourhood health taskforce in each place”.

It could even be that neighbourhoods end up being tasked with the role of tackling unwarranted variation in access between practices.  They could potentially then end up being the performance managers of practices and take on a much more directive relationship than we have been expecting.  There is a hint of this in the mandate which states, “improving primary care is essential to support a move to a neighbourhood service”.

PCNs, meanwhile, are conspicuous by their absence.  At this point it seems highly unlikely PCNs will evolve into neighbourhoods, but rather that they will exist within them (and be subservient to them).  Where PCN and neighbourhood boundaries do not align I don’t think it will even be a question when it comes to which one will have to change.

All this points to “reform” of general practice being high on the agenda.  We don’t yet know what the reference to improving financial flows for general practice means from the Mandate.  We don’t yet know what the relationship between practices, PCNs and neighbourhoods will be.  There is, however, quite significant room in what has been said in these documents for big changes to be proposed, but we will only get more clarity on these once next year’s contract and the 10 year plan have been published.

If there is one actionable take away for general practice from these documents, it is this: make sure you are as involved as you can be in the development of neighbourhoods locally.  Make sure that general practice is on the “joint neighbourhood health taskforce” or whatever it is called locally.  Freedom exists for local areas to determine the final nature of neighbourhoods, so it is crucial that general practice is around the table shaping how this should be.  This will be the best (and maybe only) way of mitigating the potential negative impacts of whatever the final guidance ends up being, and once local plans are made it will most likely be too late to do anything about them.

29
jan
0

The Shift from Primary to Secondary Care: Threat or Opportunity for General Practice?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The shift of activity from secondary to primary care is starting to pick up pace.  Does this represent a threat or an opportunity for general practice?

This government has been clear that it wants to see a shift of activity from hospitals to the community, listing this as one of the three big shifts it is seeking to achieve.  These are intended to form the foundation of the forthcoming 10 year plan for the NHS, but there are early indications of what is to come in the recent Reforming Elective Care for Patients document (which we discussed in a recent podcast here).

This contains the ambition for the number of advice and guidance requests to be increased from 2.4M to 4M, along with more patient initiated follow ups, greater use of the NHS App, and GPs to support patients activating choice of treatment provider.

All of these have workload implications for general practice.  Funding has only been identified for the advice and guidance requests (although even then the £20 per request feels inadequate given the amount of work each request entails), but we await details of the 25/26 GP contract.

It is not just elective care.  A similar plan for reforming urgent and emergency care is due out (a draft has already been leaked to the HSJ), and it is hard to see a scenario in which this does not have further workload implications for general practice.

More is likely to follow once the full 10 year plan is released.

Practices, however, are operating at full capacity.  There is not the workforce or space within practices to cope with the existing work, let alone take on more.  Practices are already undertaking collective action in protest at the underfunding and underinvestment in the service in recent years.  One of the things that has irked the service most has been the unfunded shift of work from hospitals to practices.

The threat that this poses to the existing model of general practice is real.  The government is not going to suddenly reverse its push to shift care from hospitals to the community, and practices cannot magic capacity out of thin air.  Something is going to have to give.

General practice could respond to this threat by scaling up collective action to attempt to make the government reverse its plans to increase the workload on general practice in this way.

But given the government has already announced its intention to invest in general practice beyond the levels it will invest into other sectors, it is hard to see a scenario where choosing to do this ends well for the service.  The government has been insistent on the need for reform to go alongside on additional investment, and clearly has question marks about the current model of general practice.

Instead, are there any opportunities that potentially lie within the shift from secondary to community care for general practice?

The most obvious opportunity lies in the funding.  Even with any uplift that is given, the core GP contract is never going to be funded sufficiently again.  All new money now comes with additional expectations, which means general practice is highly unlikely to ever be able to really thrive again if it is relying solely on this contract.

But funding for the shift of secondary care activity is new.  If general practice can find a way of both working this at a profit and of scaling it sufficiently then it does hold out the promise of a secure new future.

The question, of course, is how can it do this?

Each practice can’t do this on its own.  There is not the physical or workforce capacity.  But by working together or at scale, by accessing the resources that come via the PCN, and by developing an infrastructure beyond that which exists within practices and most PCNs, then the capacity can be put in place.

Historically federations and even PCNs have operated too independently from practices for this type of model to be effective in securing individual practice sustainability.  But if practices can develop a model whereby the at-scale work is a core component of the practice business model, and at the same time the at-scale work can develop to make the most of the coming shift of activity, then there is a scenario where general practice can once again thrive.

The shift of activity from hospitals to the community could end up being the final nail in the coffin for the existing model of general practice.  If the elective reform plan is anything to go by then this could come sooner rather than later.  This threat is real.  But it may also be an opportunity for a brighter future for an evolved model of general practice, where a proper support infrastructure enables practices to make the most of this shift in activity.

15
jan
0

4 Important Questions for PCNs in 2025

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The new government, the end of the 2019 contract and the push for neighbourhoods means the future and role of PCNs is more up in the air than ever before.  Here are four important questions currently facing PCNs.

  1. How will the 2025/26 GP contract affect PCNs?

PCNs are not hugely popular with many rank and file GPs, understandably so given we have seen huge amounts of contract funding redirected away from practices and into PCNs.  The push from the GPC is for PCN monies to be shifted into the core contract.

However, it does not seem likely that there will be a whole new general practice contract for next year.  Back in 2019 the introduction of PCNs followed extremely rapidly on from the publication of the NHS Long Term Plan which came out in January of that year.  As the 10 year plan is not due out until “Spring” it is hard to envisage any large scale contractual change in 2025/26 following on from it, which means a modified version of what we currently have is most likely.

This in turn means PCNs continuing, although it would not be a surprise for the contract to at least contain some pointers as to what is on the way.

  1. How will the forthcoming 10 Year Plan affect PCNs?

A much bigger (albeit medium term) impact on PCNs is likely to come as a result of the 10 year plan.  We are fully expecting neighbourhoods to feature heavily (given the government’s consistent determination to introduce a neighbourhood health service), and it does seem inevitable that the future of PCNs will be linked in some way to neighbourhoods.

A key question will be the nature of the relationship between PCNs and neighbourhoods, along with the extent to which neighbourhoods might be established as NHS entities and what powers/responsibilities/funding they will be given.

Will PCNs need to become neighbourhood-sized?  What will the role of the ARRS workforce be within neighbourhoods, and will general practice maintain the level of control they have over PCNs they have now?  Whatever the answers, it is hard to see PCNs continuing exactly as they currently are once the new plan is out.

  1. Will all PCNs need to form Primary Care Collaboratives?

The NHS Confederation has written quite a lot about primary care collaboratives.  Rather than a PCN or GP federation they mean by this primary care providers coming together to operate at a system level, often as primary care boards.

At present, some PCNs are part of primary care collaboratives (where they exist) but many are not, largely because no such collaborative is in operation in their area.  As ICBs continue to mature, however, the importance of a voice that can articulate how general practice can contribute to and even lead the integration agenda is only increasing.

A key question for PCNs, then, is if they do not yet have a primary care collaborative in place do they need to be working to establish one?  Or if one exists is it effective, and if not what needs to change?

  1. What can PCNs do now to prepare for what comes next?

Faced with so much uncertainty, making any form of preparation is difficult.  But that is not to say nothing can be done.  It is highly likely that the next phase of PCNs will be much more externally focussed.  As such it makes sense for PCNs to both ensure they have strong internal foundations in place (HR, finances, governance etc), and to be developing effective relationships with the other local providers and teams in their area.

If you are struggling with the uncertainty of how to prepare for what comes next for PCNs then the good news is that help is at hand.  I have teamed up once again with PCN Expert Tara Humphrey, and Dr Hussain Gandhi and Dr Andy Foster from the e-GP learning podblast, and we for the third year in a row are holding a PCN conference.

The purpose of this conference it explicitly to provide insights for those working in or with PCNs on what the future holds for PCNs and practical steps on how best to prepare for it.  It is taking place in Nottingham on the 23rd April – for more information on how to book you place click here.

18
dec
0

A New Opportunity for GP Federations?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

GP federations have not had much luck in recent years.  Many were set up with the Prime Ministers Challenge Fund and set up services to deliver enhanced access, and there was a time when the system seemed to be moving towards working with GP practices at scale via GP federations.  Many ICBs even started commissioning their local enhanced services through federations, and for a while the future looked bright for them.

But things took a turn for the worse when PCNs came along with the new GP contract in 2019.  This meant the unit of at-scale working legitimised by the system suddenly became the PCN.  Whilst PCNs were not NHS statutory bodies their basis in the national contract meant they were a recognised part of the NHS architecture.

Many federations, however, were able to adapt accordingly.  Local PCNs often turned to their federation for support with their infrastructure, in particular hosting the ARRS staff with their ability to offer limited liability, and the role of federations evolved.

However, things took another turn for the worse when responsibility for enhanced access shifted from local commissioners to PCNs.  This happened at the same time as NHS England stopped negotiating the annual contract and instead imposed the terms agreed in 2019 despite record inflation figures, leading to significant financial challenges at practice level.

While enhanced access represented the lifeblood for many federations, PCNs and practices were now forced into thinking about how they might be able to provide this service directly themselves.  Now life is even more difficult for federations, as they have sought to adapt and find a way to add sufficient value to their local practices, PCNs and commissioners to be able to survive.

But a new opportunity for GP federations may be around the corner.  We first got an inkling of this in the Fuller Report of 2022.

This report is over 2 and half years old, but it is only now that we are starting to see a real push for the development of the integrated neighbourhood teams that formed the centrepiece of it.  No doubt this is because of how well it aligns with the new government’s desire for a neighbourhood health service.  The report was clear that these teams will require support from at-scale providers,

“System-level expertise on primary care should go beyond contracting to building relationships and developing capabilities within systems as they build their new teams. We heard throughout the stocktake of the importance of a core set of capabilities to support improvement and transformation, with quality improvement; digital, data and analytics; understanding local communities and user experiences; physical infrastructure; workforce planning and transformation; service design; and the development of the primary care provider landscape coming up most frequently.

These key primary care capabilities need to be in place for all systems, but not all need to be provided in-house – some may be brokered or commissioned from other providers at scale: eg GP federations, acute, community or mental health providers, or commissioning support services.” p30

This idea has since developed.  Local manifestations of integrated neighbourhood teams (e.g. NW London ICB) have started to be accompanied by the notion of an “integrator” function.  This is an entity to provide the kind of infrastructure support envisioned by Fuller, as well as play a key role in enabling the different providers within these teams to work effectively together and become more integrated over time.

This may prove to be a make-or-break moment for GP federations.  If they can take on this role there are potentially huge benefits.  The federation will once again become firmly established in the NHS infrastructure, with a line of funding to secure its future.  For general practice it means the role GPs and their leaders within the new neighbourhood teams will be much greater than it would be if this role lands with another provider.  And for the system it means buy in to the new teams from general practice (arguably the most important contributors) is likely to be much greater than with any alternative arrangement.

But if GP federations miss out it is unclear what role will remain for them.  The support services they provide to PCNs will doubtless ultimately be taken on by the new support provider, which will leave the federations in a very difficult place indeed.

The question is whether the GP Federations that remain can adapt and develop sufficiently to be able to take on this integrator function.  The window of opportunity is now for them to work with their PCNs and practices and prepare and actively work so that they are in a position to take on this role whenever it comes up locally.  It is vital federations get themselves ready as quickly as possible, and do all they can to grasp this opportunity with both hands.

11
dec
0

The PCN Neighbourhood Relationship

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Neighbourhoods are on the way.  Ever since integrated neighbourhood teams formed the centrepiece of the Fuller Report this has been clear, but it is now even more so with the Labour government’s repeated statements about a “Neighbourhood Health Service”.  But what do neighbourhoods mean for PCNs, and what will the relationship between the two look like?

Just to be clear right at the outset, PCNs and neighbourhoods are not the same thing.  Maybe the original intention behind PCNs was for them to evolve into some form of multi-agency community organisation, but the reality of where we are now is that the two are very different.  PCNs are groups of GP practices in a neighbourhood area working together, whereas neighbourhoods comprise all the different local NHS, social care and voluntary organisations.

This means PCNs will be just one element of many within neighbourhoods.  For those concerned (or even hopeful!) that neighbourhoods will mean the end of PCNs I don’t think there is any chance of this.  Neighbourhoods need all the GP practices working together and will not want to return to the situation where each GP practice is operating individually.  PCNs will continue, but the question is what the relationship between the PCN and the neighbourhood will be.

We don’t yet know the detail of the plan for neighbourhoods, and will most likely have to wait until the new NHS 10 year plan is published in the Spring to find this out.  But the all the signs are that they will be actual entities (as opposed to the loose collaboration that is perhaps the best description of practices working together in a PCN).  This means that they will be able to hold budgets and have some degree of organisational infrastructure, beyond that which we currently see with PCNs.

The plan for neighbourhoods is that they will be enablers of effective joint working between the different providers in the local area.  So where a PCN might currently run up against a brick wall if it is trying to form an effective partnership with, say, the local mental health provider, the neighbourhood will be able to unblock any barriers and ensure that in this situation the PCN and the mental health provider can find a way of working together.

The question is what levers the neighbourhoods will have to unblock these barriers.  It could be some form of accountability framework, whereby leaders from all the provider organisations form the neighbourhood leadership team and are accountable there for ensuring their organisation participates effectively in partnership working.

This seems unlikely to be sufficient on its own, as partnership arrangements based on goodwill only ever get you so far.  More likely, then, is that there will be some financial levers.  If the neighbourhood controls access to any neighbourhood funding that is announced as part of the new plan, then it can use this to ensure providers participate in neighbourhood working.

These levers may be even more pronounced for PCNs.  It is not beyond the realms of possibility that PCN funding will shift from being a DES in the national contract to being held by the new local neighbourhood entities.  If this does end up being the case then this will mean the neighbourhood effectively becomes the commissioner of the PCN, with huge implications for the relationship between the two.

Another lever neighbourhoods may have is management, operating at a neighbourhood level across all of the different provider organisations.  While the role of this management will be to enable effective collaboration across the different provider organisations, the style of management employed, in particular how directive it ends up being, will directly impact the neighbourhood PCN relationship.

What is clear is that while it may take one of several forms, the relationship between the PCN and the new neighbourhood will be very important.  While at present the PCN’s accountability is contractual for delivering the PCN DES, it could be that in future the PCN may have a direct line of accountability to the new neighbourhood entity.

What this in turn means is that having as much influence as possible now on how neighbourhoods develop locally should be a priority for PCNs.  Neighbourhoods are likely to develop differently in different places, as the whole ethos is that they reflect local need.  Waiting until the 10 year plan is finally published and more national clarity is provided may be too late, because by then many of the important decisions may already have been taken.

27
nov
0

Building Resilience through Collaboration

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Here is a question to consider: will GP practices be more resilient if they focus internally and on core services only, or if they invest time in collaborating with others?  The implications of the response are significant, but the answer is not as straightforward as it may seem.

The natural response when under pressure is to focus internally.  There is a limited amount of organisational resource, and so by prioritising the use of this internally it maximises the impact it has upon the practice where it is needed.  Ensuring internal operational efficiency and making the most of the available resources by focussing them on the core business are sensible responses in times of pressure.

This is part of the rationale for the collective action across general practice.  The service has been underfunded for the third consecutive year, and so the response to focus only on those things that are funded and deliver only those in order to remain viable moving forward (alongside building pressure for more resources) is logical.

However, resilience can also come from collaboration.  In the first instance this can come from collaboration with other practices in the PCN.  Where practices in a PCN are working to support each other, the benefits can extend far beyond those of access to the shared PCN staff and resources.

I was talking to a PCN recently where a practice shared how their computer system had gone down and a neighbouring practice from within their PCN had stepped in to support them so that they were still able to access their patient records.  This would not have happened pre-PCN.

In the same PCN the practices had recognised the resilience challenges turnover of practice managers causes, and as a result have implemented a practice manager mentoring scheme, whereby any new practice managers entering the PCN are allocated a practice manager mentor from another practice who dedicates time to support them as they get to grips with their new role.

The scale of most practices makes them very vulnerable when events such as IT failures and practice manager departures occur, but they can be much more resilient when collaborating effectively with other local practices.  This does not happen automatically as a result of working within a PCN, but resilience benefits such as these exist when the practices within the PCN collaborate effectively.

The business environment that GP practices operate in is also changing.  Previously the GP contract on its own enabled practices to thrive, but now the world has changed.  We already have huge amounts of GP income tied up in PCNs, and the new government’s focus on neighbourhoods means that even though there may be some shoring up of the core contract it is never going to revert to how it was.  Instead, more and more GP funding is going to be tied up in neighbourhood working, i.e. a scaling up of PCNs to include a much wider range of stakeholders.

This means that future income will be dependent on relationships not just with other practices, but with a wider group of local providers.  Effective collaboration with these providers will be key to both accessing this and making the most of potential future opportunities and funding.

So while an internal focus may bring some short term stability, if it is done at the cost of developing productive external relationships it may ultimately end up being damaging.  Longer term resilience will be much more likely to come from collaboration, because this is where both effective support and future funding opportunities are most likely to lie.

20
nov
0

5 Actions to Prepare for Neighbourhoods

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

All the signs point to “neighbourhoods” as the next priority area of focus for the NHS.  The new government has spoken repeatedly about creating a “neighbourhood health service”, and at the recent NHS providers conference Secretary of State Wes Streeting stated that the role of ICBs should no longer be performance management but instead he said,

“I want ICBs to focus on their job as strategic commissioners and be responsible for one big thing: the development of a new neighbourhood health service.”

So while we await whatever is to be included in the promised 10 year plan, one thing we can be relatively certain of is that neighbourhoods are going to feature front and centre.  At the same time PCNs are getting less and less of a mention, so it also pretty reasonable to assume that while practices operating together at a PCN level will continue, primacy will shift from PCNs to neighbourhoods.

The question, then, is what does this mean for PCNs and practices, and what (if anything) should they be doing now to prepare for this shift?

Here are 5 actions I would recommend:

  1. Strengthen PCN working. General practice will still hold a pivotal role in neighbourhood working.  PCNs as group of GP practices within a neighbourhood will be very important and will need to be strong together to be able to shape how the neighbourhood functions.  While there is a temptation right now for practices to retreat into core service delivery and away from PCN working, doing so would fracture the unity of local general practice and reduce its influence within the new neighbourhoods.

 

  1. Match PCNs to neighbourhood boundaries. In recent years the pressure has been on community teams and others to match to PCN boundaries, but the nature of neighbourhoods mapping to both local communities and existing community and social care teams means that the pressure will most likely now come for PCNs to change rather than vice versa.  We have seen this already in the NW London Integrated Neighbourhood Team  It would be sensible where there is not an existing alignment for PCNs to start to think about how they could make this happen in the least disruptive way, before the system imposes its own inevitably heavy-handed approach.

 

  1. Focus on building strong relationships across the local area. Neighbourhood working ultimately relies on local relationships.  Just as effective PCN working requires strong relationships and trust across the practices, the same is true for all the different organisations working across a neighbourhood.  Relationships take time to build, so early investment in them now will pay big dividends in the future.

 

  1. CDs take on a leadership role for cross-organisation working initiatives. Lots of pilots and MDTs are already springing up in local areas, as systems start to gear themselves up for neighbourhoods.  PCNs playing an active role not only within these initiatives but in leading them is extremely sensible preparation for the future, as it will position primary care as the natural leader for these emerging neighbourhoods.

 

  1. Support local at-scale general practice to prepare to become an “integrator”. GP federations have been in and out of favour over the last 10 years, but one important emerging theme in all the publications about neighbourhoods (going right back to the Fuller report) is that there will need to be some form of at-scale support for them.  This could be from general practice (i.e. a federation) or from an NHS or local authority organisation.  If general practice is keen to both be able to influence the way neighbourhoods develop and is keen to protect its on ongoing independent contractor status then there would be a lot of value in the local federation taking on this integrator function.  To do this, however, local PCNs and practices will need to actively support it now so that when the time comes it is in a position to be able to take on this role.
13
nov
0

Why Deliver More Care in the Community?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

One of the questions that is often not explicitly answered is that of why care needs to be delivered outside of hospital, and why we are trying to effect with this so-called “left shift” from secondary to primary and community care.  In the past, lack of clarity as to what constitutes success has caused huge problems with sustaining any efforts to make this happen.

The challenge is essentially an expectation from some that success is achieved when system savings are made.  This is based on the assumption that it is cheaper to deliver care in community settings rather than in hospitals, and therefore shifting care will result in lower levels of system expenditure.

The big problem with this in practice is that whatever care is delivered in the community is always in addition to the work carried out in hospitals.  The size of the waiting lists and (necessary) tolerances for admission based on bed availability means there is no way that carrying out work in the community will actually reduce hospital activity.  Hospital activity is more a function of hospital capacity than of demand, because the demand exceeds the available capacity.

As a result, initiatives that have been put in place get stuck in analyses of individual patients or cohorts of patients to prove lower hospital utilisation to demonstrate the value of the work.  This is ultimately futile because even demonstrating a reduction in expenditure at a patient cohort level does not produce an overall saving as there is no commensurate reduction in acute activity.  If the measure of success is short term system savings then shifting care out of hospital will inevitably fail.

Sometimes the aim (explicit or implicit) is not financial but to reduce the strain on hospitals by shifting routine work to local providers so that they can focus on the acute and complex cases.  Unfortunately, taking away the relatively straightforward work and leaving only the more acute and complex cases actually increases the strain on acutes.  It increases the pressure on staff as there is no balance between routine and complex work, and at the same time can create financial difficulties as often income generating procedures are replaced by loss-making ones.

So in the NHS world of increasing financial and workload pressure it is easy to understand why shifting care out of hospital has never actually happened.  But that is not to say it should not.

There are real benefits that this left shift of activity can realise.  Outcomes for patients can be improved by delivering care outside of hospitals, through offering greater continuity of care in community settings, through enhanced or proactive chronic disease management.  Care delivered in local communities is more accessible, convenient and personalised, which all contribute to improved outcomes for an important cohort of patients who otherwise will place increasing demands on the NHS in the future as their conditions worsen.

Ultimately, delivering care outside of hospital now can prevent the health needs of patients becoming greater in future, creating a more sustainable NHS.

But to have a chance of success, we need to be clear that this is the aim of shifting care from hospitals to the community.  It won’t save money within the financial year.  It won’t reduce short term pressure in hospitals.  It will require additional community capacity and it is a medium to long term investment in improving outcomes.  The explicit (and implicit) measures of success need to reflect this, so that expectations are managed accordingly.  If they are not, we will stay in the same cycle of failure that we have been in for at least the last 20 years.

6
nov
0

Does the Budget Show Where this Government’s NHS Priorities Really Lie?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

On the podcast recently Joe McManners highlighted that the more government and policy makers talk about shifting resources out of hospital and into primary and community care the less it happens.  Well, we have had the talk in the form of the Darzi report, and now does the budget simply prove his point?

On the bright side, the Chancellor did at least announce new money for the NHS.  £22.6bn was announced over 2 years, but the narrative that she used to go with it was painfully familiar, “Because of this record injection of funding, because of the thousands of additional beds that we have secured, and because of the reforms that we are delivering in our NHS, we can now begin to bring waiting lists down more quickly and move towards our target for waiting times to be no longer than 18 weeks by delivering on our manifesto commitment for 40,000 extra hospital appointments a week.”

It seems the chancellor didn’t get the memo from Darzi.  When we look at the detail of what the money is for (although the Kings Fund have indicated the majority of it will be needed to fund the already published workforce plan) there are specific capital projects identified:

  • 40,000 extra operations and acute sector appointments a week
  • £1.5 billion for capital for new surgical hubs and scanners and new beds
  • £70 million for radiotherapy machines
  • Fixing RAAC (reinforced aerated autoclaved concrete) hospitals
  • £2 billion to invest in NHS technology and digital – contingent on 2 per cent productivity next year
  • A dedicated fund to deliver around 200 upgrades to GP surgeries (£100M “earmarked”)
  • £26 million to open new mental health crisis centres

 

The majority of these are secondary care focussed.  The primary care and mental health items at the end look very much like someone noticed this and added them on at the last minute.  Anyone who has been involved in the development of new GP surgeries will know that half a million does not get you very far, and even 200 developments isn’t going to touch the sides of the need across the 6000+ practices out there.  And of course no one is going to be surprised if even that money comes with caveats about “neighbourhood working”, or if it gets forgotten when NHSE decide they need the money for something else.

In fact general practice does not even get a single mention in the budget.  This does not inspire hope that the service will then be at the front of the queue for investment when the much touted 10 year plan arrives in Spring.

The new government has talked about shifting care from hospital to the community and shifting from treatment to prevention, and has raised our hopes via the Darzi report which called for a “hardwiring of financial flows” to lock in the shift of care closer to home.  So it is somewhat depressing to then receive a budget which ignores this altogether and goes back to funding more activity in hospitals.

But the Prime Minister has continued to insist that the government will focus on reforming public services rather than simply spending more on what we currently have.  It may be that this budget is what is needed as a short-term fix to prevent the NHS deteriorating further, before the promised reform plan is published next year.

Let’s hope that what it is.  If we are being honest we are seeing an early gap develop between the rhetoric and the action, but it feels too early to give up just yet, and hope still remains that this government will provide the investment for primary and community care in future that is needed to prevent the NHS becoming even more hospital-centric.

30
oct
2

The Neighbourhoods are Coming

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog2 Comments

The new government is a fan of “neighbourhoods”.  They continually talk about how the NHS will become a “neighbourhood health service”.  A few weeks ago I considered the potential impact on practices and PCNs of neighbourhoods, based on the NHS Confederation’s report on the same.  But now some more concrete proposals have emerged.

North West London ICB have published a Board Paper entitled “Development of Integrated Neighbourhood Teams in North West London”, which outlines its plan to put these teams in place over the next few years.  This is the first of its type that we have seen, and so what can we learn about the potential impact of these teams on general practice and PCNs?

Before we get into that we should bear in mind that this is the same ICB that wanted to mandate the introduction of same-day access hubs for urgent primary care appointments separate from GP practices, and only backtracked in the face of significant pubic and professional resistance to the plan.  So this is not an ICB that has the needs of general practice anywhere near the forefront of its thinking.

As with many NHS Board papers, it is not easy to distil exactly what is intended.  The Integrated Neighbourhood Teams are apparently an alignment (whatever that means) of what are termed “core services” around geographical neighbourhoods.  These core services include general practice, along with mental health, community nursing, social care, health visiting and a whole range of other services, with the expectation that there will be over 100 professionals working in each team.

It appears that these teams won’t become organisations in their own right but will have a “dedicated integrator function” that will be a person or small team from one organisation (either a primary care organisation, community health provider or Local Authority) working with all such teams in each place area.  These are expected to be in place by March next year.

I don’t know the at-scale general practice set up in NW London, but it seems there are very few primary care organisations across the country with the capacity to take on this integration function.  This in turn means that ultimately control of neighbourhood teams will lie outside of primary care, which could have huge implications for the future independence of the service, especially if the collaboration of these teams turns into something more formal in future years.

The ambition of the plan is then to have population health management, interoperable IT and an estates plan allowing single neighbourhood hubs to be in place by 2026, joint workforce planning and co-location by 2027, and then shared budgets and integrated funding streams by 2029.

What the plan does not explain is how independent organisations (like GP practices) and their staff will function as a single team.  The responsibility for this seems to lie with the integrator function, and organisations are instructed to create plans to “enact the vision of INTs” and align operational teams to neighbourhoods, but these levers on their own seem insufficient to create what is envisioned.

The document recognises (but does not seem overly concerned by) the fact that PCN boundaries do not align to the INT boundaries.  While in previous national documents the onus has always been on community services to ensure they align with PCN boundaries, the new focus on neighbourhoods makes this much more unlikely. It is hard to envisage a future where PCN boundaries will not have to flex to accommodate recognised local authority/community services neighbourhoods.

The model also appears to lack any significant additional funding.  Dr Joe McManners explained very eloquently in a recent podcast that investing in neighbourhoods will not make the NHS cheaper, but will prevent it from getting worse in the future.  There is no invest to save business case that can fund these teams.  But getting these teams to work does require investment and an element of double running at least in the short term, yet in North West London there is no additional funding provided even for the pivotal integrator function.  The risk, of course, is that funding for this is taken from the core teams themselves, which in turn will simply serve to make these services worse.

The danger is that neighbourhood teams, as the flavour of the day, will be imposed (like in NW London) without the required investment, incentives and support to make them effective.  The government has hinted at additional funding for primary and community care, but we need to see it before embarking on this neighbourhood journey which otherwise seems destined to fail.

23
oct
0

Making the Shift of Resources from Secondary to Primary Care a Reality

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

I had a fascinating conversation with Dr Joe McManners on the podcast this week, where he shared some helpful insights into what is required to make the shift of resources from secondary to primary care a reality.

The first point he made is that the more government and policy makers have spoken about shifting investment from secondary care to prevention, primary and community care the less it has happened. What this has made clear is that simply stating this change as a desired direction of travel on its own will not be enough to make it a reality, and that a much more structured approach is required.

For primary care, there needs to be a scaling up of infrastructure – of systems, data, digital capability, physical and workforce capacity – in order to enable this shift to happen.  Even if there was a sudden flow of money into primary care tomorrow, the infrastructure does not currently exist to be able to convert this into more activity.

The point Joe makes is that there needs to be a more sophisticated organisational infrastructure that can provide these things than currently exists across practices and PCNs.  PCNs are an essential part of the infrastructure – if they didn’t exist, we would be looking to invent them – but so far they have only fulfilled a fraction of their potential.  The infrastructure support is what is needed to help them get there.

What this organisational infrastructure will actually look like is something that policy makers will have to decide.  It does not need to replace practices and PCNs, but rather to exist alongside them, maybe as an umbrella organisation, with some nationally-driven development programme to support the implementation of this infrastructure across the country.

There is also the thorny issue of actually making the shift of resources a reality.  Although attempts to do this in past have failed, there can be learning taken from them.  For Joe the starting point is acknowledging not that changing the financial flows will be cheaper (it won’t, and many previous attempts have failed once this has become apparent), but rather that it will avoid a more expensive system in the future.  From this starting point there will need to be some initial double running, and then as evidence of success is developed longer term funding streams put in place.

For general practice this movement in the policy direction represents a huge opportunity.  The available funding for core service delivery is inadequate and needs to be addressed, but the potential for investment in the delivery of core general practice will always be limited.  However taking a leading role in building productive partnerships across local neighbourhoods to deliver better outcomes for specific populations (which may be outside of core contractual work) is not only hugely satisfying but is also the type of work that will ultimately make the shift of resources from secondary to primary care a reality.

You can listen in to everything that Joe said (which I strongly recommend you do!) on the podcast here.

16
oct
0

PCNs versus Neighbourhoods

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

With the new government coming to power, the collective action, and the lack of any real pointers as to what is to come in the existing, rolled-over contract there is a lot of uncertainty as to the future for general practice.  A key question is whether PCNs will continue.

However, we do know that the new government is very keen on what they term a “neighbourhood health service”.  For PCNs this brings hope, because they are the closest existing NHS structure to what might be meant by a neighbourhood, but at the same time uncertainty because the government rarely mention PCNs and do not seem to them as synonymous with neighbourhoods.

So what is a neighbourhood, and how are they different from PCNs?

There are some insights into this question in the NHS Confederation’s recent publication “Working Better Together in Neighbourhoods”.   This does acknowledge that neighbourhoods are difficult to define, and starts with the premise that the closest recognised structure to neighbourhoods is not PCNs but rather the Integrated Neighbourhood Teams outlined within the Fuller Report.  These teams bring together professionals from health and care providers as well as voluntary, community and social enterprise organisations – i.e. a much wider range of professionals than currently exist within PCNs.

The report, “supports the Darzi review findings that INTs, in a statutory context, are essential to health and care services being more proactive, preventative and person-centred. This requires organisations within neighbourhoods to be able to integrate their structures and relationships.”

The push, then, is very likely to be for PCNs to develop into Integrated Neighbourhood Teams (INTs), but not as loose collaborative constructs like PCNs but rather as a formal part of the NHS.  Exactly how this may happen is not something that is explicitly addressed by the report.

The NHS Confederation document goes even further and argues that neighbourhoods need to be more than the bringing together of local health and care providers into some form of statutory entity.  It emphasises the need for an active role for communities within neighbourhoods.  It argues that successful neighbourhood working exists “somewhere in the middle of a spectrum that ranges from wholly community-led to wholly statutory led”.

The report explains more about what it means by this, “INTs and related approaches to working with communities will need to align to, but are not the same thing as, community-led development… A PCN-led model may have a principal goal of expanding the ability of the practices to meet patient needs, whereas a community group may focus on building social capital and community connectedness.”

So while PCNs are owned and controlled by GP practices, neighbourhoods will not be.  According to the report they will encompass a range of local health and care providers and will need to be built in partnership with local communities.  The report ends up by recommending that the GP contract be reformed so that general practice can play a leading role in neighbourhood health models.  It also recommends that primary care resources should be aligned around neighbourhood priorities.

While the document has no formal status it is indicative of the direction of current thinking.  How this will play out remains to be seen but the implications are significant.  For general practice the independent contractor model may be more at risk than ever, and PCNs are likely to see a rapid evolution into one of the building blocks of this new neighbourhood health service.

9
oct
0

The Risks of Collective Action

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

In his speech to the RCGP Secretary of State for Health Wes Streeting called again last week for general practice to end its collective action.  Should general practice simply ignore him and continue down the path it is currently on, and if it does what risks is it taking?

The new government is clearly keen to end the existing disputes with the NHS.  They have managed to come to a speedy resolution with both the junior doctors and the Consultants, and they are clearly keen to add GPs to this list.  Their belief is that the dispute general practice has is with the previous government, and that by meeting the recommendation of the DDRB and providing £82M to ensure the employment of newly qualified GPs, as well as stating that funding for primary and community care will rise as a percentage of total NHS spend every year for the next 10 years, they have done more than enough to at least be given a chance.

In his speech to the RCGP Wes Streeting instead asked for GPs “to work with us to rebuild the NHS together”.  He seems genuine enough, and so while I don’t think it was intended as a threat (i.e. if you don’t stop collective action then you won’t have the opportunity to work us), the voice of general practice is unlikely to be strong in the discussions as to what will end up in the 10 year plan if collective action continues.

Worse, the overall sense that general practice in its current form is “difficult to do business with” is reinforced by its seeming intransigence over collective action.  There is clearly a debate as to the future of the independent contractor model, and whether such a model is compatible with the government’s stated priority of shifting care from hospitals into the community.  A key part of the collective action is focusing only on core contract activity and stopping any work for the system, which of course will reinforce the view that it is having a core contract at all that is the problem.

That is not to say the collective action should necessarily be paused.  While the 6% uplift and the new ARRS contract for GPs are welcome, they do not end the challenges to practices caused by 3 years of disinvestment (and in the case of the scheme for new GPs will probably end up costing practices money).

While the government may want to do business with general practice, there has been no hint of any inclination by NHS England to do the same, who instead seem set on limiting any new money to the service (the failure to uplift the ARRS budget to accommodate the pay awards being the latest example).  The NHS is in dire financial straits, and general practice continues to be regarded as an easy option when it comes to making savings.  If the threat of collective action is taken away things could easily end up becoming even worse.

Collective action, as the GPC regularly point out, is a mechanism by which practices can start to control their workload given the cards that they have currently been dealt.  With no offer of additional in-year funding or support many practices feel that there is no alternative but to take matters into their own hands.

The problem is that the reasons to continue collective action are short term, and focus on what is happening now.  What is important it that the long terms risks general practice is taking by continuing collective action are understood – that it may alienate itself from discussions and reduce its ability to influence the forthcoming 10 year plan for the NHS (despite the key role that primary and community care will need to play in it), and that it may make fundamental change to the independent contractor model more likely as that becomes seen as the problem.  If collective action is to continue then these longer term risks need to be mitigated, to ensure that this short term measure does not end up inadvertently inflicting lasting damage on the profession.

2
oct
1

The Details of the Additional Role Reimbursement Scheme for GPs

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

The PCN DES has been reissued to include the addition of GPs to the Additional Role Reimbursement Scheme.  This contains the details of the new £82M funding that the government previously announced for GPs to be added to the scheme.  What do the details mean for the difference this funding will be able to make?

The good news is that there are relatively few strings attached to the funding.  There were concerns that there would be a relatively tight specification on exactly what these new GPs could be employed to do, but PCNs have been given a relatively free hand in choosing how to make the most of these GPs once they are employed.

It is also good news that PCNs are not being asked to produce a baseline on how many GPs they had, to prove that any employed via this scheme are additional (as, you will no doubt recall, was the case with pharmacists).  The funding cannot be used to continue to fund someone already in post pre-October 2024, but that is more or less the limit of the additionality test.

The bad news is that any GP employed with this funding has to be within their first two years since qualification (at the point at which they start with the PCN).  If they are more than two years post-qualification then this funding cannot be used to employ them.  These GPs cannot be employed as locums, and must be employed or engaged on terms or conditions that are no less favourable than the model terms and conditions for salaried GPs (B.19.4).

This terms and conditions requirement means that there is no chance of PCNs being able to reduce the on-costs of the additional GPs, and raises the important question of what it means in terms of how much funding each PCN will receive.  PCNs will receive £1.303 per weighted population, which means that a PCN with a population of 50,000 will receive an indicative amount of £65k for the six remaining months of 24/25 (that can only be spent on these newly qualified GPs).

The (annual equivalent) maximum reimbursable amount per GP is £92,462 (£95,233 with London weighting).  This falls more or less at the mid-point of the NHS Employers current salaried GP range of £73,113-£110,300, but of course this doesn’t take into account on-costs.  If we assume 9 sessions per week and 28% on-costs it means the maximum reimbursable amount is just over £8,000 per session.

Unfortunately, the available newly qualified GPs are not evenly distributed across the country.  This level of funding is unlikely to be enough on its own to persuade them to move to areas that may already by under-doctored.  Equally where there is competition amongst local PCNs in areas where there are GPs it seems highly possible that PCNs limiting themselves to the maximum reimbursable amount may find it difficult to secure a GP, and may need to dip into (already overstretched) PCN coffers to do so successfully.

When £82M arrives nationally at a single point in time and can only be used for one specific purpose (employing newly qualified GPs) then demand is always likely to exceed supply and so it should not be a surprise if it leads to prices going up.  Good for the newly qualified GPs, bad for the practices.

Overall, the issue with the scheme is that it seems designed to support and help the newly qualified GPs by securing them employment, but not GP practices with the challenges they are facing.  The call for the profession had been that if there is no new funding they need to be able to use some of the ARRS funds for GPs (the more experienced the better) rather than additional roles.  What this does is still maintain the protection on the existing ARRS money, limit the employment of GPs to those who are newly qualified, and most likely create an additional drain on PCN funds.  Of course new money is welcome, but it feels like the challenges practices are experiencing are still neither understood nor being taken seriously at a national level.

25
sep
0

Does the Infrastructure Exist?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The new government has been very clear in its desire to shift resources out of hospitals and into communities, to increase the focus on prevention, and to establish a “neighbourhood NHS”.  But the question we are very much left with, and one that seems to be at the heart of what the government is grappling with, is whether the infrastructure exists in primary and community care for this so-called “left-shift” to take place.

The parlous state of the general practice estate was highlighted by the Darzi report.  The government recognise there can’t be a wholesale shift of activity if there is neither the space nor the facilities for this activity to be carried out in.

Equally, the need for a new operating model was stressed.  Ever since the Darzi report was published with its promise of a greater share of NHS funding for primary and community care the government has been insistent that there will be no new money without reform.

PCNs and GP federations, despite being the place where practices work together to enable just the kind of shift the government has been looking for, have been largely ignored.  They hardly get a mention in the Darzi report, and while Mr Streeting has been keen to stress that independent GP practices will still have a role to play, he has been less forthcoming about PCNs.

We may have the first inkling as to why in the recent IPPR report.  This was reportedly warmly welcomed by Wes Streeting, and it calls for the government to, “Create Neighbourhood structures: PCNs are not working to put primary and community care in the lead of the NHS’ future. We need to found the neighbourhood NHS – by investing in a hub and spoke model of general practice, and by setting up Neighbourhood Care Providers to lead strategy, invest in population health and revitalise the NHS’ relationship with real communities.” (Summary report, p37)

This report argues that GP practices being outside of the NHS means they are rarely a priority for investment, encourages them to operate at small scale, creates a barrier between primary and secondary care, shifts too much risk onto GP partners, and makes the profession unpopular to junior doctors (Full report, p99).  It argues for a shift away from the “loosely federated partnerships” that are PCNs, and towards a model of what it terms “Neighbourhood Care Providers”, which are to be accompanied by Neighbourhood Health Centres requiring a capital outlay of £12.5bn(!) spread over 10 years.

The report ends up in more or less the exact same place the Fuller Report did when talking about Integrated Neighbourhood Teams, “NCPs could either be newly created or formed by existing community trusts, more advanced PCNs or multi-speciality community providers (MCPs). Over time these NCPs should take on the contracts for primary, mental health and community care.”  (Full report, p101).

The IPPR report is not a policy document.  But IPPR is a left-leaning think tank, and it was set up in the 1990s to “provide theoretical analysis for modernisers in the UK Labour Party”.  Given Labour’s manifesto pledge was to set up a neighbourhood health service, this report has the feel of one designed to provide ideas as to how this could be achieved, and it would not be a surprise to see at least some of this thinking appear in the forthcoming 10 year plan.

What all this means is that the policy question is not whether the independent contractor model is good or bad, but rather how the necessary infrastructure in the community can be developed to enable the desired shift of activity to occur.  This report raises the question of whether the independent contractor model is in fact a barrier to the development of this infrastructure.  This needs to be actively refuted, and what general practice should be doing (rather than setting itself against a government that has clearly stated it wants to invest in and support general practice) is come up with its own view of how this shift could be achieved in a way that builds on the core strengths of independent general practice rather than destroying it.

18
sep
0

What does the Darzi Report Mean for General Practice?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Lord Darzi has carried out his “investigation” into the NHS, and recently published his findings.  It is a meaty tome at a 163 pages, but what does it mean for general practice?

Unlike some other NHS reports, general practice features heavily throughout, and is not added on as an afterthought.  In the summary letter the second issue highlighted (after the NHS not being able to keep its promises) is that people are struggling to see their GP:

“GPs are seeing more patients than ever before, but with the number of fully qualified GPs relative to the population falling, waiting times are rising and patient satisfaction is at its lowest ever level. There are huge and unwarranted variations in the number of patients per GP, and shortages are particularly acute in deprived communities.”(Summary, 6)

This kind of positioning is not going to be followed by a lack of action.

Does this mean more money?  Well, there is a clear recognition that there has been a failure to invest in general practice, “We have underinvested in the community. We have almost 16 per cent fewer fully qualified GPs than other high income countries (OECD 19) relative to our population” (Summary, 13).

However, there are also criticisms of the GP contract, “the current GP standard contracts are complex and can mean that doing the right thing for patients can require doing the wrong thing for GP income. That cannot be right.” (5, 36).  And when it comes to primary care estate, “It is just as urgent to reform the capital framework for primary care as for the rest of the NHS.” (5, 37)

The idea that pervades the report when it comes to general practice is that it needs to be invested in but it also needs to change.  The basis for this change centres around the need for community based multidisciplinary team working.

In chapter 3, on quality of care in the NHS, when discussing long terms conditions it states, “As the disease burden has shifted towards long-term conditions, multidisciplinary team working has become more important. Yet NHS structures have not kept pace. GPs are expected to manage and coordinate increasingly complex care, but do not have the resources, infrastructure and authority that this requires.” (3, 32)

Again in Chapter 5, “People with two or more conditions (whose prevalence is growing over 6 per cent) may require care from different specialists and the expertise of GPs and others to understand the interactions between their conditions, treatments, and medicines. Since healthcare is organised around groups of professionals with similar skills (such as GP practices, mental health or community trusts, and hospitals), it requires organisations to work well together.” (5, 8)

The report calls this shift of resources out of hospitals and into the community a “left shift”.  However, the report is clear that such a shift must come alongside a change to the operating model, “Changing both the distribution of resources and the operating model to deliver integrated, preventative care closer to home will be strategic priorities of the NHS in the future because they are derived from the changing needs of the population.” (5, 21)

The report calls much of what has happened so far within integrated care systems as “collaboration”, but not “integration”.  It clarifies the difference between the two, “Collaboration and integration are often conflated, but they are not the same. Service or clinical integration is about a fundamental change in the way health services are organised for patients rather than the degree to which NHS organisations cooperate with one another as institutions.” (5, 23).  The report raises a concern that current collaborations are not effective and states that, “there is a real risk that they amount to displacement activity from the strategic priorities of delivering integrated, preventative care closer to home” (5, 25).

Primary Care Networks, interestingly, receive only one mention in passing in the entire report.  They are certainly not presented as the solution to the need for effective multidisciplinary team working.  So even though PCNs would seem to tailor perfectly with the Labour idea of a neighbourhood NHS, it may be that they are viewed more as “collaboration” than “integration”.

In his conclusions, the themes Darzi pulls out include these:

“Lock in the shift of care closer to home by hardwiring financial flows. General practice, mental health and community services will need to expand and adapt to the needs of those with long-term conditions whose prevalence is growing rapidly as the population age. Financial flows must lock-in this change irreversibly or it will not happen.

Simplify and innovate care delivery for a neighbourhood NHS. The best way to work as a team is to work in a team: we need to embrace new multidisciplinary models of care that bring together primary, community and mental health services.” (Conclusion, 6)

These two recommendations sit alongside each other.  So the good news is there will be new investment, but the bad news is that it will almost certainly come with a requirement for a whole new way of working.  What this will look like remains to be seen, but the government has been very keen indeed since the launch of this report to stress that any new investment will be accompanied by a requirement for reform.

11
sep
0

Should Practices Leave the PCN DES?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The BMA has published its Safe Working in General Practice Guidance, which is in effect its guide to collective action.  It does not appear to be full of any major surprises, and rather provides practical guidance for practices on how they can implement the changes that they have already described.  However, it includes a section on the PCN DES, which raises the question of whether it would be better for practices to leave the PCN DES altogether.

To be clear, the guidance does not come out and outright say that practices should leave the PCN DES.  Instead it is implied.  It states, “Many feel that the requirements of the DES outweighed the benefit brought by the investment into practices and ARRS (Additional Roles Reimbursement Scheme) staff.”  It then states, “Practices will need to consider if the PCN DES enables them to offer safe and effective patient care within the context of their wider practice and their present workforce” before going on to outline the mechanism by which practices can choose to opt out.

“Many” is a vague term.  It implies the majority of people, but it can simply mean a large but indefinite number.  If it was true that the majority really thought the requirements of the DES outweighed the benefits the current sign up rate to the PCN DES would not be over 99%.  Many dislike the requirements of the DES, but that is not the same as considering that their practice would be better off financially by not being part of it.

The problem of leaving the PCN DES is not just about losing the resources (both the financial income streams and the ARRS staff).  It would also mean GP practices ceding control of the PCN and these staff.  As the BMA guidance points out, ICSs are obliged to continue to provide PCN services to practice populations, and so the most likely scenario in the event of general practice refusing to take this on is a neighbouring PCN or another provider such as a community or acute trust taking the PCN on.

Strategically, this would be a terrible outcome for local general practice.  While the BMA sees a very clear distinction between investment in core general practice and overall primary care funding (i.e. including PCN funding and other non-core general practice funding), the government do not.  The government has committed to increasing the percentage share of NHS funding that primary care receives, but if general practice loses control of PCN resources it could end up receiving very little if the additional funding comes through that channel.

The BMA don’t believe that another provider would be able to take on the PCN responsibilities if practices withdrew.  But ultimately it is not their livelihoods that they are gambling with if they are wrong.  The BMA wants the funding that goes into PCNs to be shifted to core contracts.  But national policy is firmly against this, and so practices that resign from the DES will be taking a huge personal risk that this is what will happen when the likelihood is that it will not.  There are clearly divisions within general practice as to the value of PCNs, and so there is not going to be a mass resignation from PCNs, meaning those that do leave are going to be very exposed.

At present, practices can work with their PCN to find mutually beneficial ways of ensuring PCN requirements are managed alongside supporting practice sustainability, both through direct financial flows and through PCN services like pharmacists and home visiting teams that support practice work.  But if ties were to be severed, then this link and these opportunities would be lost, and practices in a far worse position than they are now.

NHSE and the government like PCNs, which is why from the BMA perspective resignations from the PCN DES are desirable as a leverage for negotiation.  But the risk to those that take such a step, when the BMA have not come out and explicitly said that this is what they want, is extremely high.  Rather than leaving altogether and losing the opportunity to access the existing and (potentially larger) future resources, it would seem a much more sensible stance for practices to stay within the PCN, keep control, and campaign to be able to access more of the PCN resources in future.

4
sep
0

Are PCN CDs Due a Pay Rise?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

There is a lot of talk at present about pay rises for practice staff and ARRS staff but what about PCN Clinical Directors?  Should PCNs and practices also be considering a pay rise for this important group of staff?

Many PCN Clinical Directors have been in the role for many years, some since the inception of PCNs back in 2019.  While a minority of more progressive PCNs have actively considered the notion of pay progression for their Clinical Director, the majority have not.  In part, this is because prior to this year the funding allocated to the Clinical Director role was always specified in the PCN DES as 72.9p per patient, and so this was the amount paid.  In part, it is because the only people who pay real attention to the incomings and outgoings of the PCN are the Clinical Directors, and it is very difficult for them to suggest a pay rise for themselves.

But while the reimbursement has not changed, the role of the PCN Clinical Director has grown considerably over the last five years.  Many now have overall responsibility for an army of ARRS staff as well as a range of joint service provision such as extended access and vaccination services.  From operating initially as a one-man band many CDs now lead a significant PCN team and have a range of external responsibilities on behalf of the PCN.

It would make sense, then, if the reimbursement for the role kept pace with the growth in responsibility.  Not only that, but retention of PCN CDs is an important issue.  High quality PCN Clinical Directors are in relatively short supply.  Most PCNs do not have a queue of suitably skilled individuals who could just step into the role.   Just because your PCN CD has not mentioned a pay rise does not mean that they are happy without one.  Failure to provide a pay rise may ultimately lead to PCN CDs walking away from the role, primarily because of the lack of recognition that it signals for the work they are doing.

In theory the shift away from a separate Clinical Director payment (£0.729 per patient), PCN leadership and management payment (£0.684 per patient), and core PCN funding payment (£1.50 per patient) into a newly combined core PCN funding payment of £2.916 per patient this year should have provided much more flexibility for PCNs to re-consider the payment for their CD.

However, the reality is that the core funding element of PCN monies has always come under much more scrutiny and control than any other element, as practices are mindful that any amount unspent in this pot can be returned to practices.  As such the purse strings of the new combined pot have in many places become much tighter now than they were previously on the leadership and management payment, making practice agreement to a proposed rise much harder to achieve.

So PCN CDs who are desperate to either recruit or retain their management support will often prioritise uplifts for these staff over themselves (and will often struggle to get those through), and the issue of whether the CD should have a pay rise never even gets consideration.  I am yet to hear of a PCN that has a separate renumeration committee (although I am sure you are out there, but do get in touch if you are and it is working!).

My advice to PCNs, especially those with an effective CD in place that they want to keep in the job just as long as they are willing to do it, is at this time of salary reviews and changes to make sure that the PCN Clinical Director does not get overlooked, and to consider an uplift to their remuneration as a tangible recognition of how the role has developed and grown over the past few years.

24
jul
1

Diseconomies of Scale

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

The NHS mantra that bigger is better and that the best thing for general practice is for it to grow in size is one that mostly goes unchallenged.  Surely it is obvious that if we want to join up care around the needs of the patient then it can’t possibly make sense for there to be 6500 individual practices, as this is far too many for the NHS to sensibly do business with.  But what if the issue is that the NHS is too big, not that general practice is too small?

Most of us are familiar with the concept of ‘economies of scale’.  These are the cost advantages organisations can gain from increasing their size, which come from both spreading the fixed costs such as management, accounts, HR and IT more widely (and so for general practice result in less of the £ per patient received being spent on them), and from reducing the variable costs by enabling a greater skill mix, more specialisation, more investment in IT and lower procurement costs (so that actual cost to the practice per patient can be reduced).

However, it is does not follow that the greater the size the lower the costs.  What happens is that another concept – ‘diseconomies of scale’ – kicks in.  Diseconomies of scale happen when a company grows so large that the costs per unit (in our case per patient) actually increase.

Costs grow with size for a number of reasons.  Practices become too large to be properly coordinated, which in turn creates more work and issues than when everyone knew everything that was happening.  Diseconomies of scale also occur because of the difficulties of managing a larger workforce. Communication is less effective, staff don’t feel listened to and don’t feel part of the organisation, and this in turn affects productivity.

The biggest issue with scale in the NHS is the distance it creates between those delivering front line care and those making decisions about the organisation.  In GP practices the partners for the most part also work on the front line delivering direct patient care.  They understand the challenges, and the decisions they make are intended to resolve them.

Once a practice covers multiple different sites then a distance is created between the challenges at any individual practice and the decision making of those in charge.  When this distance becomes too great, diseconomies of scale can kick in.

Think how hard it is for a PCN CD to manage the needs of each of the member practices and meet the requirements of the PCN DES.  For NHS organisations this issue is magnified.  Not only are the leaders a huge distance from the front line of care delivery (consider the executive offices running a group of NHS hospitals, as is increasingly becoming the NHS norm), the motivation behind decision making is distorted from improving the delivery of frontline care.  Instead, it is replaced with an upward-looking agenda, seeking to meet the wishes of regional and national NHS leaders and politicians.

Operating as a single, national, political NHS creates huge diseconomies of scale as external pressures consistently pull against local decision making made in the local interest.  The only part of the NHS that has been able to resist this and operate effectively and efficiently for its own patients is general practice.

The integration agenda assumption that what general practices needs is to be bigger and a more formal part of the NHS in order to join up care around the patient is one that needs to be seriously challenged.  Real integration requires decision making by those with a direct understanding of local needs, and the existing model of general practice is far more suited to that than the way the rest of the NHS operates.

17
jul
1

The Future of ARRS

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

Wes Streeting pledged to review the ARRS scheme should he become health secretary, and now that he is it seems highly likely that the rules around this funding will be relaxed.  What might such a change mean?

The GPC is adamant that the ARRS scheme should be changed.  I have written previously about the absurdity of the NHS position that any use of the ARRS funding must prove additionality when core funding has been so drastically cut.  This has created the current situation where practices cannot afford the GPs they need (even when, for the first time in recent years, there are actually GPs available) because of the financial pressure on the core contract.  Meanwhile, the ARRS funding is protected and so can only be used for new/additional roles.

So it feels like this is an easy quick win for the incoming government.  Changing the rules won’t cost them anything (because the money is already there), and with no investment for general practice seemingly identified in Labour’s fiscal plan then some concessions will be needed if Wes Streeting really does want to prevent any potential industrial action by the profession.

However, making such a change does not come without its challenges.  Many of these have been eloquently identified by my PCN Plus colleague Tara Humphrey.  If core funding is replaced by PCN funding we might simply be masking the overall practice underfunding issue, creating a short term solution that although it may be welcome may serve to actually undermine the partnership model.  It could potentially make practices unsustainably dependent on PCNs (or are we there already?), which in turn could increase any existing tensions between practices and PCNs.

The other issue is the potential impact on the existing additional roles.  The ARRS funding is largely spent, as for the first time this year there is no growth in the ARRS pot.  So where will the money for the GPs and practice nurses (should they be added to the scheme) come from?  Will it be from any underspends that remain, plus any in year turnover (but how many GPs will that fund?), or would it actually result in some of the existing staff in post losing their jobs so that they can be replaced by GPs and practice nurses?

We could very easily end up in the situation where practices and PCNs are forced into some difficult decisions about which of the existing ARRS staff they want to keep and which are the ones they want to lose in order to fund GPs and nurses.  Some PCNs are likely to be more radical in the changes that they would be willing to make than others, and uncertainty and anxiety would undoubtedly spread across all of the ARRS roles.

But there could a significant upside for the existing ARRS staff if GPs were added to the scheme.  Whereas now in some places ARRS staff shift from practice to practice trying to add value where they can, they could be galvanised into a high-functioning team with the addition of dedicated GP leadership.  Instead of patchy, inconsistent supervision the addition of GPs could lead to the quality and quantity of support that these roles need to be able to come into their own.

The devil will be in the detail of any revisions to the guidance.  The extent to which “additionality” rules are still applied, any restrictions on practice-specific versus PCN-wide work, along with any financial limitations are all likely to shape how any changes to the scheme play out in future.  What is clear, however, is that any changes will need to be delicately handled in order to maximise the potential benefits without creating greater problems elsewhere.

10
jul
0

Is the NHS Approaching Integration Backwards?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The big policy question of the moment is how general practice can be “integrated” with the rest of the NHS.  But I wonder if this is the wrong way round, and whether the question should really be how the rest of the NHS can be integrated with general practice.

The first problem is of course that it is not universally clear what integration actually means.  While most of us would sign up to integration meaning joining up the delivery of services across organisational boundaries, the term retains a looseness beyond that.

For some it means joining up delivery by removing organisational boundaries, and we see that increasingly across the acute sector with a whole raft of joint Chair and CEO appointments followed by formal merger.  For others it means  operating at a larger scale across organisations, which leads to thinking like mandatory urgent care centres across a whole ICB area.  And for yet others it means putting services in place to cater for those that fall between the gaps between organisations, although sometimes with an assumption that this can somehow be done with no additional investment and so at the expense of the existing core organisational services.

Underlying all of the policy thinking to integrate general practice is the assumption that the independent contractor model operates against it.  This has played out since the inception of Integrated Care Systems in 2022, which was the exact point in time at which any investment into the core contract ceased.  Since then the only new funding for practices has come via PCNs, accompanied with active disinvestment into the core contract with below inflation imposed settlements.

This ‘NHS good, independent general practice bad’ thinking seems to me to be fundamentally flawed.  The NHS is beset by waiting lists and overspends, none of which exist in general practice.  Plenty of organisations exist within the NHS that fail to collaborate or ‘integrate’ with each other.  And you can’t merge them all.

In fact, if what policy makers are really seeking is a ‘Neighbourhood health service’, then the scale at which nearly all NHS organisations operate at actively works against this.  Any practice or PCN that has started to build relationships with their local district nursing team will tell you how one day critical team members get moved to another area because of staffing shortages or issues elsewhere.  Local managers tell you it is outside of their control, and the work either has to start again or (more commonly) collapses.

The scale that NHS organisations work at, and the environment they operate in, means the need for efficiency outweighs the need for effectiveness.  They will always choose to move resources around at the expense of continuity of care and relationships in any local neighbourhood, as the alternative is to incur additional costs for the organisation as a whole.

The only way this can be stopped is if the organisational units delivering joined up care at a neighbourhood level are neighbourhood-sized.  The organisation itself has to have the health of the neighbourhood as its sole focus.  This can’t be done through a series of expensive NHS organisations.  Instead it needs general practice-style organisations, dare I say it independent contractors, who can then use the speed and innovation that are core components of general practice to join up care delivery and achieve the outcomes that an NHS organisational model never could.

Two years in and the integration agenda of ICBs has delivered very little.  While the overriding concept is laudable, many of the underpinning assumptions are flawed, in particular that the independent contractor model of general practice is preventing integration and that NHS organisational models enable it.  But reversing the thinking to consider how NHS services can be integrated with the existing model general practice would be much more likely to deliver real outcomes.

3
jul
0

Labour on General Practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

It was illuminating to listen to Labour Party’s Wes Streeting talk about his party’s plans specifically when it comes to general practice in this Talking General Practice podcast episode.  While firm promises were kept to a minimum, there was at least a recognition of the current situation and a willingness to address these over time.

When it comes to funding for general practice the overall message was that this would rise over the term of the next government rather than immediately, and this was a theme that he returned to on a number of occasions.  There is a firm promise that the share of GP funding within the NHS budget would grow over the next 5 years.  Given overall NHS funding will rise, this is positive for general practice.

But that investment will not come straight away.  When asked about the recommendation of the doctor and dentist review body (DDRB), which is in effect the last scheduled opportunity for whoever is in government to increase the in year funding for GPs, Wes Streeting’s response was that he would, “look at what he can do”, and that he was mindful of the “risk of industrial action by GPs”.

Then when asked directly about the industrial action he talked about wanting to end the industrial action across the NHS, and that he “wants to hit the reset button if Labour win the election”, but with the caveat that he would need time and that he could only resolve the issues working in partnership with the profession.

On the one hand this is good news in that an incoming Labour government will take the concerns of general practice seriously (something that appears to have been lacking over the last 3 years of the outgoing government).  But on the other hand the likelihood of a satisfactory financial in year solution being offered to general practice looks remote, and instead there is likely to be some short term olive branch funding backed up with promises of additional funding in the medium term.

This could potentially lead to some difficult decisions for general practice.  Will the profession accept less than adequate short term funding in an attempt to work in partnership with a new government based on promises of further future investment? Or will it stick to its current course of industrial action and demand greater resources in the short term, potentially putting it at odds with the government that will hold the purse strings for the next 5 years?

There were some other positive messages for general practice.  When asked about the future of the partnership model, Mr Streeting said he did not regret starting the debate about it, but that it was genuinely a consultation, and there are now no plans to end or overturn the partnership model.

There is almost a promise to relax the ARRS rules so that this funding can be used for GPs and practice nurses.  He claims the existing rules are “too restrictive” and that he would “seriously consider” a modification of the scheme, but stopped short of a firm commitment.

He did, however, commit to reducing what he termed “accountability measures” and for this funding to be redirected towards incentivising continuity.  He talked positively about continuity being good for patients, good for retention of GPs and good for outcomes.  It is inevitable that the focus on access will continue, but if this can at least be accompanied by a focus on continuity it will be a step in the right direction.

Whoever comes into power there is unlikely to be a huge investment into general practice, given the overall financial situation.   But even if there is no immediate resolution to the challenges the impression I was left with from Wes Streeting was that there would be a willingness to improve the situation going forward, which would be a welcome change from what the profession has had to endure over the last few years.

26
jun
0

Whole System Working is about Relationships not Meetings

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

It can be a daunting thing to be tasked with leading whole system working on behalf of general practice.  It is not a role that falls to many, but either PCN CDs or LMC leaders or federation leaders or even appointed GP ICB leaders end up getting tasked with this, often without any support or training into how to take this on.  What approach should these leaders take?

There are a couple of mistakes that are commonly made.  The first is to think that whole system working is simply attending a lot of system meetings.  It may well be the case that this is true, but if all that the leader is doing is attending these meetings, then most likely most of the meetings will pass the leader by, and the end result will be hard to differentiate from what would have happened had the leader not attended at all.

The second mistake is, once an individual has become overwhelmed by the sheer number of meetings, to divide up the responsibility of attending across multiple GP leaders.  This is even worse because those leaders will have even less idea what is going on in the meetings, will be unable to identify any themes or inconsistencies, and the ‘voice’ of general practice becomes even more diluted.

My experience is that whole system working is primarily effective through individual personal relationships.  The starting point is to develop four or five key relationships with senior leaders in relevant organisations (so for general practice this might be the local ICB, the community trust, the local council, the hospital and public health, but this will vary from place to place).

Now this is easy to say, but in practice takes time to achieve.  It is important to note that directors and senior individuals from the same organisation can be completely different.  One can be frosty, uncommunicative and unwilling to invest time in building a relationship with general practice, when another can be the opposite – warm, approachable and always willing to listen.  The trick is to find the right individual in each organisation. Better sometimes to trade a bit of power (e.g. the Director of Strategy instead of the Chief Executive) if the result is constructive, ongoing relationships that are mutually useful.

Of course the individuals have to have sufficient internal sway for the conversations to actually turn into action, but demanding to only meet the Chief Executive can actually limit the influence you are able to have when others could prove much more valuable.

The first objective of these meetings is to listen and to learn.  The better we understand the organisations that we are trying to work with, the more likely we will be able to do so successfully.  Aligning agendas is a much more effective strategy for delivering our goals than trying to compete.

What we are aiming to do is develop strong personal relationships.  We want someone who we can call if there is an issue with their organisation, who we can link with to develop stronger relationships between our two organisations, and who we can ally with in system meetings.

The system meetings are the set pieces where these individual discussions (everyone is having them) are formalised across organisations.  Sometimes in full whole system discussions two or more organisations start talking together on an issue, because they have already determined to do so in advance.  We can use the relationships we have in place to do this ourselves.  But this is also why if you only attend the meeting without any underpinning relationships it is very difficult to have any real influence.

In the past general practice has been able to let the NHS get on with whole system working without really needing to get involved.  But the strength of focus now on integrating primary care and establishing integrated neighbourhood teams means that developing skills in this area is now more important than ever.

19
jun
0

Neighbourhood Health Centres

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The Labour party’s manifesto chapter on health does not have a section on general practice.  Instead it has a section on “healthcare closer to home”, and featured within this is the promise to trial “Neighbourhood Health Centres”.  What will this mean should, as expected, the Labour party come to power?

It is disappointing that no explicit recognition is given to the current challenges general practice is experiencing.  This does not bode particularly well for any hoped for increases to the current GP contract.  That said, there is a promise in a manifesto that acknowledges the current state of relations between NHS staff and the government, “Too many patients have seen their treatment affected by strikes. Labour will reset relations with NHS staff, moving away from the Conservatives’ failed approach.”  Whether that means action to prevent industrial action by general practice, however, remains to be seen.

The “healthcare closer to home” section starts with this, “The National Health Service needs to move to a Neighbourhood Health Service, with more care delivered in local communities to spot problems earlier. To achieve this, we must over time shift resources to primary care and community services”.

We currently have “primary care network” and “place” within our health ecosystems.  Where “neighbourhood” fits between these two is uncertain, but the likelihood is it will be one of the two.  What is clear is that the current drive for integration, for bringing services closer and closer together, will continue under Labour.

The section closes with this paragraph, “The principle of integrating health and care services will improve the treatment patients receive. We know that more of this care needs to happen outside hospitals. Therefore, we will trial Neighbourhood Health Centres, by bringing together existing services such as family doctors, district nurses, care workers, physiotherapists, palliative care, and mental health specialists under one roof.”

Back in the 1990s, when a “primary care led NHS” was all the rage, as a junior manager (obviously…), I was involved in an initiative called the Meadows Resource Centre, which was a new building in a deprived area of Salford called Weaste.  The aim of this was to bring together primary and community services under one roof (in something remarkably similar to the planned Neighbourhood Health Centres).  We had a GP surgery, district nurses, physiotherapists, art therapists, local voluntary groups like Citizens Advice, and more all either based in or providing services out of the building.

What I learnt from this experience was that co-location under one roof does not lead to integration.  I am sure the services have developed beyond recognition in the time since I left, but when I was there each of the services operated in isolation from each other.  They all had their own spaces or were booked into their own rooms, and the GP surgery in particular operated at one end of the building more or less in isolation from everyone else.

I am sure that if the goal of the centre had been explicitly to integrate these services, rather than have them all provided out of a single location, and some joint work on what integration could actually mean in practice had taken place, then more integration could have been delivered.  But we have many examples up and down the country where GP surgeries and community services share a base, and it is still rare for this to lead to any form of joint working.

Many of us will also remember Darzi centres, or polyclinics, that were introduced under the last labour government in 2008.  These were not popular in general practice.  They faced criticism for being expensive to run, and the programme was scrapped in 2011 by the incoming government because they were too expensive and had delivered little.

Whether the lessons of the past have been learned remains to be seen.  Ultimately, the integration of services requires good relationships.  Where these exist, more conversations happen, which in turn can lead to joint problem solving and more joined up services for patients.  Having services under one roof can facilitate stronger relationships, but it is not a necessary consequence (many GP practices can tell you that having all of their partners co-located under one roof does not mean that they all get on!).

So under Labour it seems very likely that PCNs will remain, even if they are rebadged as neighbourhoods.  The reality is there is not the capital funds available for the widespread construction of new neighbourhood health centres, and let’s hope we don’t see a rerun of the Darzi centre disaster.  But what we are likely to see is a continued push for much more joint working between primary and community care, which in turn may lead to bigger changes in the way general practice is contracted.

12
jun
0

GP Federations in 2024

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

It has been a rocky few years for GP federations as the emergence of PCNs has relegated them to second class citizens in most places when it comes to at scale general practice.  What does the future hold now? Is there a still place for GP federations, or have they reached the end of their natural life?

The context, of course, is the parlous state of practice finances.  General practice funding already has to cover the PCN infrastructure, and so the question is whether a continued investment in a federation infrastructure is a sensible one.  Can the benefits the federation delivers outweigh the costs they necessarily incur?  This is a question largely for practices as the days of the system covering federation infrastructure costs in nearly every area seem to be behind us.

The main role that federations play is the delivery of at-scale services.  The logic of this is that for some services it will be cheaper for them to be delivered  at scale rather than at the level of the individual practice or PCN.  If a service is being organised and delivered once across a wider area the costs can be lower than if it is being organised multiple times at a smaller scale.

Previously the motivation for asking federations to take on some of this work for practices was that practices did not want to do this work themselves, and so it was a way of ensuring the delivery requirements were fulfilled without placing an additional workload burden on practices.  The federation would receive the funding available and carry out the work, and use any surplus to fund the organisational overhead that would then allow it do other work.

The problem that many federations are coming up against now is that the financial situation means that practices do not have the luxury of outsourcing this work simply because they do not want to do the work.  Practices need the margin they can generate from doing this work themselves.

The principle still holds, however, that it can be cheaper for some services to be delivered at a federation scale.  But federations now need to find a way of making sure that there is a return to practices and PCNs at least in the ball park of what they would gain if they delivered the service themselves.  The numbers can still work, but federations will need to cut their cloth accordingly.

Federations need to be alive to this issue, and be willing to adapt accordingly.  Discussions between PCNs/practices and federations about service delivery often manifest in ones focussed on unhappiness with the offering being provided.  But the real issue is the money, and so being upfront and having a discussion about this is vital.

Federations can play other roles, but the problem with these is that they don’t generate income directly.  They can provide HR, finance and other support for PCNs, but only at cost.  They can host the local network of PCNs that encourages and enables learning between them.  They can hold relationships with the local ICB and NHS organisations so that each PCN does not have to do this individually.  They can influence and negotiate on behalf of PCNs with the ICB and the place-based boards.  They can work to ensure that any shift of services from secondary to primary care is appropriately funded.  And, maybe most importantly, they have the ability to hold contracts, which in effect is future proofing general practice should it come to a place where “integrated contracts” across a place area are to be awarded that include swathes of general practice funding.

But despite the importance of these other roles, PCNs and practices have to be convinced about their value.  As these roles have no clear return on investment (other than maybe keeping PCN infrastructure costs to a minimum), then the challenge for federations is convincing PCNs and practices to buy into the need for them.

This is not an easy challenge.  Real practice financial challenges today are by and large going to overrule potential future strategic challenges tomorrow.  So federations will need to provide tangible value now for practices and PCNs, as well be convincing about the need to keep on working as a collective if they are to continue to have a future.

5
jun
0

Are Practices Making the most of PCN Resources?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Roughly 20% of the total resource for general practice is tied up in PCNs.  But are practices making the most of this resource?  And is the need for equity across practices preventing this opportunity from really being taken?

Practice finances are tight across the country this year as a result of the third consecutive imposed contract by NHS England.  With so much of the resource (£2.5billion+) for general practice now tied up in PCNs, practices have no choice but to find ways of accessing it.

Interestingly, the PCN DES now defines one of the core functions of the PCN as, “To coordinate, organise and deploy shared resources to support and improve resilience and care delivery at both PCN and practice level. (This could also include the PCN delivering practice-level contractual requirements such as vaccinations, screening and health checks, provision of personally administered items, QOF and IIF-related activity during core hours).”

So the contract is actually encouraging practices to consider how the PCN can support individual practice resilience.  But the reality is that there are not many PCNs where the PCN (or a practice within the PCN) is carrying out core practice activity on behalf of other practices.

There are a number of reasons for this.  The first is that for most practices the independence of the practice is sacrosanct, and that includes from the PCN.  So while the practice may be prepared to participate in joint PCN ventures, it is quite another thing to give up some of the core practice activity so that it can be provided by the PCN.

This is one of the reasons why there is so much resistance to the attempted imposition by some ICBs of mandatory same day access hubs at a PCN level.  Most practices regard delivering on the day urgent care to their patients as a core part of what they do, and they are not prepared to give this up  to the PCN.

So if a PCN is going to get into some of the core practice activities suggested by the PCN DES then the first thing it will have to do is overcome the innate resistance that exists to this from member practices.  Practices will need to believe that the PCN is not taking away the things that make up the core practice identity, but instead is offering a new more efficient and effective mechanism by which these things can be carried out.  This is no easy challenge.

The second barrier that prevents provision at a PCN versus a practice level is the implicit belief that exists in nearly all PCNs that any split of resources or activity between practices needs to be equal.  If a PCN service is set up, it needs to be equally available to the patients of each practice.  Where PCN staff are employed, each practice needs to receive their fair share of time of clinician time or appointments.

But practices do not have an equal need for the same staff.  They don’t have the same amount of space available.  They don’t have the same need for the PCN services that are provided.  They don’t have the same practice populations, or practice staffing profiles.  It doesn’t actually make sense then for all the PCN resources to be divided equally, if the goal is to ensure that they add the maximum amount of value.

So for example it may make sense for the PCN to set up a home visiting for 3 of the practices in a PCN, while the other two continue to do their own (if the two practices have a good system for visits in place, enjoy and want to continue doing them, but the other three are struggling with the capacity and time to carry these out).

But what happens is the need for the services to be “fair” overrides everything, and so the two practices who don’t need the service object and it never gets set up.  Rather than spending time working out what the different needs of those two practices are and how those could be met, instead the only things that get agreed are those where all practices can benefit. This is significantly limiting the benefits PCNs can bring to practices.

The financial situation facing general practice is such that practices may need to start being more flexible and creative in their thinking as to what the PCN do, if they are really to make the most of the resource that is tied up within them.

29
may
1

Is it time for Mass Resignations?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

The UK LMC Conference passed a motion last week that “being prepared to walk away may be more effective than industrial action”, and that empowered the GPC to “use the threat of mass resignation to improve the NHS offer to practices”.  So what should we make of this idea of mass resignations?

General practice has a history when it comes to the threat of mass resignations.  The episode that most stands out was in 1965 when the profession was in crisis with morale and earnings low, at a time when consultant career earnings were reportedly 48% higher than that of a GP.  As a result, 18,000 of the then 22,000 GPs signed undated resignation letters from the NHS.  Consequently the GPC was able to negotiate the 1966 contract which addressed the major grievances of the profession.

But that was nearly 60 years ago, and only 17 years after the NHS was formed.  There was talk of mass resignations in 2001 and the new GP contract of 2003 followed, and also in 2016 prior to the GP Forward View being published.  But on neither of these occasions did the action go as far as collecting undated resignation letters.  The political context was also different then – these were both during a time when the NHS wanted an internal market with general practice driving the purchasing side.

What is different now is that there is a possibility that the resignation letters could be accepted.  The total primary care medical spend is in the region of £13bn.  If practices resigned and provided services privately to the population, and (if we take dental services as the best example we have of the impact that would have on spending) just over half of this funding could potentially come directly from patients.  This means the government/NHS could save in the region of £6-7bn by simply accepting the GP resignation letters.

While such a move would be deeply unpopular with patients, there may be a belief that the “blame” could be focussed on the (greedy) GPs choosing to leave, and there are not many ways to come up with that kind of additional funding.  It is hard to see how a largely private general practice service fits with the policy agenda of integration, but it may be that the financial advantages would outweigh the inevitable internal challenges, and many other countries function with a hybrid funding model for general practice.

I don’t believe any incoming government would want a shift from an NHS to a privately funded arrangement, but my point is that general practice should not offer undated resignation letters unless it is prepared for its bluff to be called.

I am sure it is with this in mind that the conference motion that was passed also mandated, “the GPCs to develop viable alternatives to GMS, including actively supporting GP practices to work outside the NHS”.   What would a direct funded alternative look like?  How will it prioritise continuity of care, prevention and all the other aspects that are important to general practice in a way that the current NHS contract does not?  How can it work in a way that doesn’t immediately exacerbate health inequalities but can support attempts to tackle them?

To date there has not been enough serious thought given to what this alternative could look like.  Professional negotiators use the term “BATNA” – the best alternative to a negotiated agreement.  This is what they use as their walk away option, and refuse to agree anything that is not better than this.  One of the reasons that the GPC has suffered in recent years is that their BATNA has been the continuation of the existing contract, which has worked very well thank you for the government and NHS England.

It is only by creating a more powerful BATNA (mass resignation from the NHS contract with a clear plan for what would come instead) that general practice will be able to wield any real negotiating power in the current climate.  But it is risky, because it will only work if practices really are prepared to walk away and accept that this is what it may come to, and this can only happen if we develop a much clearer picture of what this alternative future would look like.

22
may
0

Communicating Across a PCN

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Nearly all PCNs struggle with effective communication across the member practices of the PCN.  Despite each practice having representatives in PCN meetings, frequently practice staff beyond the practice representative are oblivious to much of what the PCN is doing.  How, then, can PCNs make their communication effective?

When considering this question most PCNs come up with a range of transactional responses. For example, we will add a section to the PCN website that all practice staff can access, with ‘how to’ guides for all the PCN services.  We will create a monthly newsletter to go out to all practice staff.  Or we will set up some additional WhatsApp groups so that people can learn about what is happening directly.

But despite the good intention, what happens is that these things make little or no difference to the awareness and understanding of practice staff of what is going on across the PCN.

The reason that these things don’t work is that communication is far more effective when it is directly between people.  Communication relies not just on the information being passed on, but also the person receiving it engaging with it.

This means that the PCN meeting is by far the most important when it comes to communicating.  The first question for PCNs to consider is whether attendees are engaging with what is being communicated in those meetings.  It is hard to believe that this is the case if the meeting is full of attendees on mute with cameras off.  Actively seeking feedback from all on issues that are raised is one way of building engagement with them.

The second step is to consider the practice representatives.  Who is coming?  Are they the right people to be attending from the practice?  Do they have influence back at the practice?  How likely are they to be feeding information back into the practice?  We may be getting information through to the PCN meetings attendees, but is it going any further?

Where this is identified as the issue, a good strategy is for the Clinical Director to attend a round of member practice meetings.  Here they can feedback the work of the PCN.  They can also stress that this should not be news to the practice as you would expect the practice representative to be feeding this back to them.  If they are open to it, you can then ask how they would like to receive this information more regularly.

Another key set of individuals when it comes to effective communication across practices are the practice managers.  A strategy that is proving increasingly popular across PCNs is for the PCN manager or Digital and Transformation lead to meet regularly (often weekly) with the practice managers.  This is particularly good because it keeps this key group of individuals engaged and up to date with what it going on across the PCN, and they in turn are best placed to ensure anything important gets onto practice meeting agendas.

The third area that can be targeted is PCN all practice events.  These can be held quarterly or bi-annually, and are best done on a face to face basis.  These are not a luxury, but should rather be considered as a vital component of PCN working.  They allow the wider membership of PCNs to review progress and agree a way forward, and (more importantly than anything else) they strengthen and renew engagement of member practices in the work of the PCN.  These events should always include a reminder of everything the PCN is doing/has done – while PCN CDs feel that practices know all this anyway, the reality is they often either do not or have forgotten and so a reminder is always useful.

Ultimately effective communication is a result of strong engagement from practices in the PCN.  Where engagement is good, communication is relatively straightforward.  It is where engagement is poor that communication is often difficult, and so rather than treat the symptom (poor communication) it is much better to treat the cause (lack of engagement).

15
may
0

It is time to bring back face to face meetings

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Back in 2019 it was normal for meetings between practices to be face to face.  Protected learning time sessions (or academic half days, or whatever they are called locally) were normally carried out face to face.  But then in 2020 everything changed.  The pandemic meant that face to face meetings were no longer an option, and suddenly every meeting was on Zoom or Teams.

4 years later most PCN meetings are still virtual.  It is much more convenient for practice leads to meet regularly with the other practice leads via a Team meeting than face to face.  There is no travel time and the time out of the day caused by these meetings is massively reduced.  Plus it allows opportunities for multi-tasking when agenda items lack any obvious relevance…

But this is having a negative impact on relationships between practices.  When people are not meeting face to face relationships inevitably suffer.  Maintaining relationships requires at least some face to face meetings.  We know if we need to have a difficult conversation it is better to do it face to face, yet PCNs will often have these conversations in an online environment.  We miss nonverbal communication cues that help us understand what people are saying when we meet remotely (especially when cameras are off!), and as a result misunderstandings and conflict are much more common.

The interpersonal connections that are vital to building trust are missing when we only meet online, and without trust PCNs run into serious problems.  With practices now under such financial and workload pressure relationships are inevitably going be strained, and the virtual meeting environment is making this worse.

Protected learning time events have suffered the same fate.  It is a source of consternation for some that their ICB do not support these, but that aside and for those areas where they do happen the majority still take place virtually.  This used to be the time when all the GPs and practice staff in an area connected, and developed their sense of collective identity.  With the turnover and changes in personnel that we have had in the last five years there will now be many staff who know almost no-one from any other practice outside of their own PCN, because they have not had the chance to meet regularly together.

This in turn creates tension between PCNs.  Whereas previously local GP leaders could cultivate and call on a sense of collective identity, now if a PCN decides to go its own way regardless of the impact on the rest of local general practice there are often no longer the relationships in place to enable sensible local cohesion.

The simple reality is that given the political context that general practice is operating in right now the biggest support available for GP practices lies within general practice itself.  To get through this current set of challenges practices need to stand together and support one another.  By continuing to only meet virtually we are making this harder to achieve, exacerbating tension and conflict within and between PCNs.  So even though it might feel inconvenient it is important that at least some of the time we bring back face to face meetings.

8
may
0

What to make of NHS England’s latest General Practice Initiative?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Last week NHS England announced a new initiative in which it plans to test new ways of working in general practice to “optimise the general practice operating model”. But is there any sense that this initiative will help with the challenges GP practices are currently facing?

There has been a growing divide between the profession and the policy makers, and sooner or later things are going to come to a head.  The issue is that the problems practices want to solve (practice financial sustainably and workload) are not the problems NHS England is interested in.

Let’s start with some recent historical context.  Back in 2016 the GP Forward View was published.  This was manifestly an attempt to support general practice and provide it with the resources and support it needed to recover from the perilous financial position it found itself in at that point in time.

Then in 2019 (3 years through the 5 years of the GP Forward View period) this plan was superseded by the 2019 5 year contract that introduced PCNs.  This promised new investment into general practice in return for practices signing up to form part of PCNs.

The first year of this contract went reasonably well, but then Covid struck.  It was after general practice had been lauded for its role during the pandemic and throughout the vaccination programme that things started to change for the worse.

The PCN money never really found its way through to practices, and then in April 2022 we had the first of what has become three consecutive below inflation contract impositions upon the service.  In May 2022 the Fuller Report was published, which manifestly does not seek to address sustainability issues at practice level but rather how general practice can be “integrated” into the rest of the system, and despite that has become the default strategy for general practice at both a national and local level.

A series of NHS England personnel changes has not helped.  First Simon Stevens, who to be fair to him had always clearly articulated the importance of a strong general practice, left his role as Chief Executive of NHS England in July 2021 and was replaced by Amanda Pritchard.  Dr Nikki Kanani, who had been a strong advocate for general practice and supporter throughout the pandemic, departed from NHS England a year later.  Dr Amanda Doyle arrived as National Director for Primary Care, and Dr Claire Fuller herself was eventually appointed as the new Medical Director for Primary Care in place of Dr Kanani.

So ever since Amanda Pritchard, Amanda Doyle and Claire Fuller have been in post we have had three consecutive imposed contracts, disinvestment in core general practice, and a system focus on integrating general practice with the rest of the system via PCNs, with seemingly little or no concern as to whether practices are able to remain viable.

This is the context into which this new initiative to “test new ways of working in general practice” has been announced. The mindset appears to be one of how general practice can support the rest of the system, e.g. how integrated care teams can prevent admissions to reduce pressure on the urgent care system, with little or no attention being paid to the important direct contribution of general practice itself.

This latest initiative is symptomatic of the recent approach NHS England has been taking to general practice.  It starts with an assumption that the things that need to change are obvious, yet there is clearly a gap between what practices and what the system believe these things to be.  It continues to focus on “integrated neighbourhood teams” with no clarity (either within NHS England or outside it) as to what these are intended to be.  It bypasses traditional lines of communication with general practice (i.e. the GPC), instead choosing to unilaterally announce a series of pilots in a random set of ICBs.  And (as ever) it refuses to provide any funding, instead saying that ICBs should “commit reasonable resource” to the pilots.

So my prediction is that these pilots will end up alongside other recent pilots (multispecialty community providers anyone?) as something that gets talked about for a little while but that are ultimately ignored once policy makers decide what they are actually going to do.  In the meantime the challenges to the delivery of core general practice remain, and unless NHS England appoints leaders who take these seriously it is hard to see this changing any time soon.

1
may
0

The Impact of Practice Financial Challenges on PCNs

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

This year is going to be tough for GP practices financially.  What will the impact of these financial challenges be on PCNs?  Will PCNs finally come into their own as a (now necessary) mechanism for joint working between practices and enabling economies of scale, or will tensions between practices and PCNs simply rise?

The scale of the financial challenge facing GP practices this year is unprecedented.  The 2% contract uplift takes no account of the rise in the minimum living wage, and the inflationary uplift of 1.65% bears no resemblance to the inflationary pressures practices are facing.  Whilst this is the third consecutive time a contract with real terms cuts has been imposed, it is the first time it has not been at least partially offset by increased investment in the PCN (the funding of which has similarly been frozen).

The impact of these financial challenges will not be limited to practices.  PCNs will also be affected.  When the finances of any organisation come under pressure then there is frequently a knock on impact on collaborative working.

How will practices respond? They will understandably prioritise core activities over any collective PCN activities.  Where resources are limited practices will focus internally and if something has to go then it will be most likely be the PCN work.

The tolerance for ARRS staff carrying out PCN work as opposed to supporting practices with their core work will most likely reduce.  It is already increasingly common to find practices calling for ARRS staff to be allocated on a ‘per practice’ basis rather than working as teams on PCN work.

Many ARRS staff were employed during and immediately after covid which, along with the lack of available space in GP practices, meant that many were employed to work virtually for some or all of the time.  But the usefulness to practices of staff working remotely is generally less than those delivering in-person services, and so now we are seeing a push for less of these virtual working arrangements.

When resources are limited organisations generally become more risk averse.  So while the opportunity for joint working and initiatives for collective benefit via the PCN still exists, the willingness of practices to put time and resource into a new way of working with an uncertain outcome is likely to be less.

Shared ventures require some form of shared overhead in order to be effective.  But practices will increasingly see this as being an unnecessary expenditure, with a growing belief that it would be cheaper (more profitable) for the service to be delivered in house by the practice.  As a result practices who were previously supportive of PCN or federation delivered services (like enhanced access) are now starting to consider providing these services directly themselves.

Financial instability also impacts trust.  When practices doubt whether the other practices in the PCN can fulfil their obligations or contribute meaningfully to shared goals then when times are tough commitment can wane quickly.  Practices that have this sense that they are “carrying” some of the other practices in the PCN are likely to pull back from PCN activities when they come under financial pressure themselves, with obvious consequences for the PCN as a whole and its ability to function effectively.

So the natural tendency of such an environment is to impact negatively on collaborative working, but this does not mean that it is inevitable.  It makes good logical sense for practices to pool resources and to share the burden of financial constraints as together they can achieve more than they can individually.

But PCNs will need to be focussed.  Ignoring the financial challenges faced by member practices will not work.  Instead, PCNs will need to take a much more practice focussed approach to collaboration, focusing on measurable outcomes and making a tangible impact. Activities and investments will need to be aligned with objectives and priorities agreed with practices in advance.

A tough financial environment is difficult for everyone.  Working together in PCNs is a viable strategy for practices to cope with this environment, but it will not happen by itself and PCNs will need to work hard to prevent the default option of practices withdrawing from collaborative work and focussing on themselves.

24
apr
0

3 Things to Watch out for in 24/25

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Whilst there is not a whole lot of change in the GP contract for next year, there are a few things that are different and worth watching out for.  All the headlines have (rightly) been about the lack of any additional funding, but that doesn’t mean practices and PCNs should not pay attention to some of the changes that have been squeezed in.  I highlight 3 things it would be wise to keep an eye on below.

  1. PCNs to Performance Manage Practices?

One of the changes presented in this year’s PCN DES is that PCN Clinical Directors are now to determine whether the PCN member practices have met the key components of Modern General Practice Access.  It states:

“10.4A.3. The PCN Clinical Director must, prior to 31 March 2025, apply the assessment criteria and determine whether each improvement has been achieved (i.e. whether all assessment criteria for an improvement has been met). When applying the assessment criteria, the PCN Clinical Director must apply the criteria across all Core Network Practices of the PCN.”

This potentially puts Clinical Directors in a tricky position.  Practices will be pushing for them to claim the funding as early as possible, and yet it is down to the Clinical Director to determine whether the practices are eligible.  Without working this through carefully with practices (e.g. how will the PCN make the decision that practices are eligible?) the Clinical Director could unwittingly end up being the performance manager of practices.

  1. How will the Digital Telephony data be used?

Alarm bells are also ringing with the new requirement outlined in the contract letter for practices to provide digital telephony data from October:

“In 2024/25 the GP Contract will be amended to require practices to provide data on eight metrics through a national data extraction, for use by PCN Clinical Directors, ICBs and NHS England.  These eight metrics are:

  1. call volumes
  2. calls abandoned
  3. call times to answer
  4. missed call volumes
  5. wait time before call abandoned
  6. call backs requested
  7. call backs made
  8. average call length time”

 

While the claim is that this will be used by NHS England and ICBs to “support service improvement and planning” it would not be a huge surprise if the system came down hard on outliers.  What will be interesting will be whether this pressure is exerted on practices directly, or whether it comes via the PCN.

In fact, the subsequent Update and Actions for 24/25 to the delivery plan for recovering access to primary care states,

“Our goals for 2024/25 are … for PCNs to review the key telephony metrics across their practices (including number of calls, average wait, abandonment time, average call length) to support quality improvement in demand management and planning of care navigation. …Separately, we plan to share data on the number of calls to 111 in core hours with PCN clinical directors to support quality improvement.”

If “support quality improvement” really means “performance manage” (because that is how NHS England operates), then pressure on PCN CDs to performance manage their practices really does look like it could become a theme for the year ahead.

  1. Neighbourhood Teams: PCN-shaped or community services shaped?

In the 2024/25 Planning Guidance, that was finally released at the end of March, it was no surprise to find access as the priority for general practice.  However, integrated neighbourhood teams also feature, and the guidance states,

“As a step to building integrated neighbourhood teams and to support the integration of primary care and community services, we ask systems to help improve the alignment of relevant community services to the primary care network footprint.” p18

There is a heavy scepticism amongst some as to whether in reality this will mean PCN footprints being forced to align to community service footprints (as opposed to vice versa).  Certainly it is something to watch out for, as the guidance is written with an apparent primacy of the PCN footprint.

But this is not the end of it.  The last page of the planning guidance states,

“We will work with ICBs to ensure that each system has a plan that shows over 3 years how primary care and community organisations will work to shape integrated neighbourhood teams.” p35

While at present integrated neighbourhood teams appear to be random joint working initiatives looking at specific patient cohorts e.g. frail elderly, patients with diabetes etc, the plan for the future seems to be something more substantial.  “Integrated neighbourhood teams” may actually be a euphemism for general practice and community services operating as part of the same organisation, or at least a structured partnership between the two.  Aligning PCNs and community teams looks like it may be the first step on that journey.

27
mar
0

PCN Plus: A Professional Development Course for Leaders of General Practice at Scale

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Introduction

General practice is at a transition point.  The 2019 5 year contract has come to an end, the newly imposed 24/25 contract will make things worse, and Integrated Care Systems are prioritising the integration of general practice via the implementation of the Fuller Report.  Practices are struggling to meet the workload and access requirements, and are increasingly coming under financial pressure.

This means those tasked with providing leadership to groups of GP practices, whether within a PCN, a federation, or across an integrated care system are facing a huge challenge.  The need for at scale general practice to support individual member practices, make the most of an increasingly large and disparate workforce, build productive external relationships, and navigate through a constantly changing environment, is making these leadership positions potentially the most challenging roles there are in general practice right now.

There is precious little support available for these leaders.  PCN Plus is a professional development course designed specifically for PCN Clinical Directors, PCN managers, federation leaders and those leading general practice within integrated care systems.  It will help you to develop the skills and understanding you need to be successful in these roles, as well as enable you to become part of a cohort of individuals in a similar position to learn from and with together.  

Who is it for?

If you are a PCN Clinical Director, a senior leader within a PCN, a leader of a GP federation or have leadership responsibility for general practice within an ICS seeking training and development support to better undertake the role, then this course is for you.  It is specifically designed for leaders of at-scale general practice to better understand the requirements of their role, how to cope with it, how to prioritise, how to navigate through all the challenges, and most importantly how to make it a success.  

What outcomes will the course achieve?

This course will provide expert input and teaching, as well as increasing your network of support from the other general practice leaders learning alongside you.  It is specifically designed to help you to:

  1. Develop your understanding of the environment you are operating within
  2. Agree a vision, and clarify and articulate the reasons for working at-scale
  3. Put an effective medium term strategy in place
  4. Build member practice engagement in the organisation 
  5. Make the most of the opportunity of the additional PCN roles
  6. Establish a robust financial strategy
  7. Improve and strengthen your delivery ability
  8. Develop productive external relationships 
  9. Understand and capitalise on integrated neighbourhood teams
  10. Strengthen the voice of general practice within the local system
  11. Improve your chairing, facilitation  and conflict resolution skills
  12. Create a succession plan for the future
  13. Learn from the experiences of others in similar roles

 

What is on the course and how does it work?

The programme will start in June 2024 and run until March 2025 and run across 10 sessions.  Each month there is a live 2 hour teaching and learning session that will take place on a Thursday evening from 7-9pm.  These sessions will cover the following areas:

Session 1 Understanding Integrated Care & Operating within the new system

Understanding different levels of integrated working 

  • Level 1: Between general practice
  • Level 2: Networks collaborating with networks
  • Level 3:Primary care networks and wider community health services
  • Level 4: Primary care networks/ Networks of Networks and hospital/social care services
  • Understanding your network’s maturity
Session 2 Vision and Strategy

  • The importance of establishing a vision
  • How to agree a vision across practices
  • Agreeing, clarifying and communicating role
  • Using the vision to be build practice engagement
  • Revisiting the vision
  • The future of federations, PCNs and at-scale general practice
  • Building a medium term strategy
Session 3 Engagement and Co-production 

  • Building a golden thread between practices, PCNs and at-scale general practice
  • All practice meetings
  • Making decisions
  • Creating effective communication channels
  • Working with disengaged practices
  • PCN and federation relationships
Session 4 Financial principles 

  • Understanding the income streams
  • Practice funded or ICB funded?
  • Prioritising expenditure
  • Budget setting
  • At-scale viability vs practice finances
  • Managing over and underspend 
  • Financial planning 
Session 5 Workforce

  • Building effective support teams for general practice
  • ARRS Recruitment and retention
  • Clinical supervision and line management
  • Team building
  • Hosting multi-disciplinary/multi-agency teams
Session 6 Business management, operations and productivity

  • Delivering benefits of at-scale working
  • Creating delivery plans
  • Implementing change
  • Project management
  • Monitoring performance
Session 7 Integrated Neighbourhood Teams

  • Understanding integrated care and operating in the new system
  • Learning from others
  • Building productive relationships with other providers
  • Hosting integrated neighbourhood teams
  • What’s working well
  • Areas for development
Session 8  Data, Digital and Transformation 

  • Understanding the difference between digital, data and transformation
  • Identifying your data sources 
  • Getting clear on the problem you are trying to solve 
  • Presenting and positioning your information to maximise engagement 
  • Using data to drive continuous improvement 
Session 9 Building General Practice Influence within the system

  • Joint working across PCNs, federations and LMCs
  • Establishing an executive function
  • Setting priorities
  • Representation process
  • Creating a single point of access
Session 10 Personal leadership and Resilience Skills

  • Understanding strengths and weaknesses
  • Chairing and facilitation
  • Creating a complementary leadership team
  • Internal versus external focus
  • Managing conflict
  • Personal resilience
  • Creating a succession plan

 

As well as the live monthly sessions participants will receive a range of additional resources, information and useful materials, as well as access to an exclusive membership community only for programme participants.  

Who will deliver the course?

Experienced PCN Clinical Directors Dr Hussain Gandhi and Dr Andy Foster from eGPLearning, Ben Gowland, former NHS Chief Executive and host of the General Practice Podcast, and Tara Humphrey, an experienced PCN Manager and host of the Business of Healthcare Podcast have joined forces to bring you PCN Plus.  Together they have a proven track record in leading general practices, primary care services and PCN Networks, and have combined their expertise to bring you a leadership programme that speaks to the heart of the challenges and opportunities you will face as a primary care leader in this changing environment.

How much does the course cost?

  • The cost of the course if £3,000 plus VAT per person
  • When completing our registration form you will have a tentative place on our programme, a formal place will only be confirmed after we have received FULL payment of the course
  • No refunds will be issued after a payment is made

How do I book?

To reserve your place, or if you have any queries about the course, please contact Sarah on pcnplus@outlook.com.  The total number of places on the course is limited and applications will be accepted on a first come first served basis.  The deadline for receiving applications is the 31st May 2024. 

 

20
mar
0

Insights from the Chair of the GPC

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Dr Katie Bramall-Stainer is the current Chair of the BMA’s GP Committee in England, and has led the negotiations on this year’s contract.  It is her first year in the role, and she has been much more visible than many of her predecessors.  Recently she gave an interview on the Talking General Practice podcast, where there were some very interesting insights into the recent contract negotiations.

The first is that on numerous occasions she referred to the reason for the underfunding of the core GP contract and the refusal to consider cost neutral suggestions as “ideological”.  At different points in the interview she stated that it was “not logical” and the decisions were “intentional and predetermined”, that there was a “perverse ideology behind it”, and that it was an “ideological dismantling” of the profession.

So something  more than just a lack of available of funding is going on, although frustratingly there was no further probing on the exact nature of this different ideology.  It is, however, hard to think that this is anything other than a belief that general practice should operate at a larger scale as a full part of the NHS, and that the partnership model (despite being the most productive part of the NHS) has somehow run its course.

The second insight was that there is much more hope nationally that the DDRB (Doctors and Dentists Review Body) will recommend a positive uplift for general practice.  Dr Bramall-Stainer reported that they were able to put forward a very cogent case for the 8.7% uplift the GPC has calculated as being necessary to return the profession to 2019 funding levels, and that this was well received.

The caveat on this is that the DDRB recommendations are not made until the end of June, and even if these are positive they then rely on the government accepting them, which it may not be inclined to do given the competing priorities for government funds in the run up to a general election.

However, if sufficient noise is generated by the result of the current referendum, along with any media coverage of the LMCs conference and GPC face to face roadshows planned for early in the new financial year, then the government may be more open to the DDRB recommendations.  As Dr Bramall-Stainer herself explains, the strategy is to give the government every opportunity to change the course this is moving without the need for industrial action.

But industrial action is on the cards, and what Dr Bramall-Stainer also gave was an insight into what this would entail.  She acknowledges that industrial action is difficult for GP practices, who rely upon a trusting relationship with their patients.  Damaging this trust in the pursuit of additional funding is a pill many practices would find hard to swallow, and so she is at pains to say that any action must be designed to hurt NHS England and the government, not the patients practices serve.

But this is a hard balance to strike, because ultimately if the changes do not affect patients then they do not affect the government.  What the GPC are clearly leaning towards is a mass movement across practices of only treating a safe number of patients a day.  They hope that if this is backed up by a clear enough campaign that stresses that practices are only seeing the patients that they can with the number of GPs and nurses they have then practices will be protected from any backlash, and that any ire will be directed nationally rather than locally.

Is this enough that the prospect of it will deter the government from continuing on the current course of underfunding the profession, and is it possible to enact and at the same time protect practices from any backlash?   The GPC knows it has to be prepared for its bluff to be called and to be able to follow through, so it has to get this balance right.  Understanding this is why the GPC wants to engage the profession as far as it can in designing the final shape of the industrial action it ultimately puts forward.

13
mar
0

Why?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

It is hard not just to be extremely angry with the 24/25 GP contract.  It not only fails to make up for the real terms cuts in funding practices have suffered in recent years, but also introduces further cuts for the year ahead.  Why would the government and NHS England do this?

There must be something deeper at play than a lack of understanding of the pressures general practice is facing.  Even NHS England national director of primary care Dr Amanda Doyle admitted that the contract would “only make a tiny difference to practices”.  So if the problems practices facing are understood, the further underfunding must be a deliberate policy.

I am not a conspiracy theorist, but this really does not make any sense unless there is some form of agenda at play.  What could the reason be?  I do not know, but here are some potential rationales.

  1. General practice has fallen down the NHS pecking order. The introduction of Integrated Care Systems marked the end of the purchaser provider split and the end of the pivotal role of general practice in directing NHS resources.  Instead the priority has more explicitly turned to secondary care, and as a result resources are being re-directed in that direction.

 

  1. Funding cuts are required and general practice is a soft target. The NHS is under huge financial pressure, exacerbated by the consultant and junior doctor strikes, with huge overspends across all integrated care systems.  The money has to come from somewhere and general practice never overspends on the budget set for it, and so is one of the few places that real savings can be made.

 

  1. The government believe GP partners are fat-cats. You do get the sense sometimes that, despite everything general practice went through during the pandemic, at a national level there is a lingering belief that GP partners milked the system and did very well financially thank you.  They also seem to think that any investment into general practice simply ends up in practice profits and does not find its way through to patient care (hence all the additionality bureaucracy around ARRS roles).  So continually reducing the funding for practices is a way of redressing the balance.

 

  1. General practice cannot do anything about the cuts. Whilst consultants and junior doctors can strike, it is very difficult for GPs to take similar direct action.  Even the GPC are saying that they are not proposing contractual action and instead are looking at a range of non-compliance measures that look like they will be difficult to enact and relatively easy for the government to endure.  This impotence is understood, and makes targeting general practice relatively pain-free for the system.

 

  1. There is a deliberate strategy to undermine the partnership model. If the only constraint on the government negotiators was the funding envelope, and they were committed to the ongoing sustainability of the partnership model, the funding tied up in PCNs (and in particular the additional roles) could have been freed up for practices.  Funding for GPs and practice nurses could have been included and the ring-fencing of these already existing funds could have been relaxed, so that the benefits for practices would be much more tangible.  This would have been cost neutral for the government but they decided not to do it, which suggests that there is no desire at a national level to keep the model sustainable.

There has been a lot of talk about the future of the partnership model, but the government cannot afford to buy partners out of their contracts.  Instead, they can make the existing contract so financially unattractive that partners are left with no choice but to move to any new arrangement that is proposed.

  1. The government want to soften up general practice for bigger changes next year. PCNs were accepted five years ago by general practice as a necessary evil in return for securing the additional funding that came with them.  Similarly, by creating a situation whereby general practice has been starved of funds for three years the government will be in a much stronger position next year to make major change a requirement of any additional investment, with the profession then in no position to refuse.

The truth is I don’t know why the government have decided to impose such an inadequate contract this year, but there must be elements of at least some of these reasons behind the decision.  Getting underneath it and calling it out is something national GP leaders need to prioritise, because if general practice wants to be successful in any action it takes it needs to know what it is up against.

28
feb
0

The Power of Collective Negotiation

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Even though general practice is made up of thousands of individual business partnerships it operates collectively through the GPC, which in turn negotiates the national contract.  It is important the power and value of this ability to operate collectively is understood, so that the most can be made of it moving forward.

It was over a 100 years ago that statutory recognition was granted for local committees of ‘panel doctors’ in the 1911 Insurance Act. These became LMCs, and once these had been set up the BMA established a national committee in 1912 to represent their combined interests in negotiations with the Government, which became the General Practitioners Committee (GPC).

Ever since then general practice has negotiated as a collective, and this has secured some important wins for the profession.

Right at the outset of the NHS it was the power of this committee that resulted in general practice remaining outside of the NHS on its formation in 1948 and retaining its independent contractor status.

In 1965 the profession was in crisis with morale and earnings low, and consultant career earnings reportedly 48% higher than that of a GP.  As a result, 18,000 of the then 22,000 GPs signed undated resignation letters from the NHS.  Consequently the GPC was able to negotiate the 1966 contract which addressed the major grievances of the profession.

In 2004, the biggest change to the GP contract in the history of the NHS was introduced.  Following negotiations by the GPC GPs voted on the deal, and voted overwhelmingly in support. In a BMA ballot, nearly 80% of the 31,945 doctors who voted backed it.

But the GPC has not always come out on top.  In 1990 the GP contract which linked GP pay more strongly to performance was imposed by Kenneth Clarke after it was rejected in a ballot.  In 2008 there was a contractual row between the GPC and the Government over evening and weekend opening, which led to the GPC being forced to accept the imposition of an extended hours deal.

But overall working as a collective has been positive for general practice.  The GPC has been at its most powerful when it has had a clear mandate from the profession, most often in terms of a vote.  It has not always worked, but it has always given the GPC an even stronger mandate going into negotiations.

Now we are in the unprecedented position of two contracts having been imposed in the last two years.  What the GPC is asking for in terms of its referendum (now scheduled for March) is for a stronger mandate, even if the result is a third consecutive contract imposition.  This in turn will not only strengthen their hand in future negotiations, but also pave the way for possible industrial action, and enable the GPC to turn up the heat on the government even further.

In many ways the outcome of this year’s ‘stepping stone’ contract will be less important than the outcome of next year’s ‘major changes’ contract, once the new government has been formed.  What general practice has to do right now is demonstrate that it has muscles it can flex, and make taking the profession on something the next government will be unwilling to do.

The only way that general practice can do this is by standing together.  The stronger the mandate the GPC has from practices (which means the higher the percentage of practices that are members, and the clearer the support it has for its position from those members) then the greater its influence will be.  So if you are not a member of the BMA, sign up now.

21
feb
1

GPs or Additional Roles?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

There is increasing animosity developing across general practice towards the additional roles, but it is largely misplaced.  Here is why.

The misconception is that the additional roles have been introduced to replace GPs.  This has been exacerbated by recent stories where GP practices have reduced their numbers of salaried GPs and replaced them with additional roles.  Equally locum GPs are reporting that they are finding it harder than ever to secure work, and the increased numbers of GPs in training are starting to be concerned that they will have no jobs to take up once they qualify.

In all of these cases practices are using the additional roles (funded via the PCN additional role reimbursement scheme) to cover the work that these GPs would historically have undertaken.  So it is not surprising that the conclusion that is being jumped to is that these additional roles are here to replace GPs, and it is from this belief that animosity within general practice towards them has developed.

But what this misses is the change in context.  In 2019 the biggest challenge practices were facing was workload.  There were not enough GPs to undertake all of the work required.  This in turn meant GPs were overwhelmed and as a result were reducing the number of sessions that they worked, exacerbating the problem even further.  More capacity was urgently required.

There were calls for more GPs.  First 5,000 then 6,000 additional GPs were deemed necessary to meet the workload requirements.  Despite an increase in the number of GPs in training no dent has been made in the number of GPs needed because GPs are retiring and leaving faster than the new ones arrive.  There are now 2,000 less GPs than there were in 2015.

With no increase in the number of GPs, and an ever increasing workload, general practice desperately needed more capacity.  This is the point at which the additional role reimbursement scheme (ARRS) came along.  What these roles did was provide an injection of much needed additional capacity into general practice.

Practices have needed to adapt and find ways of working that make the most of the skills of each of the new roles.  This kind of change is not easy, but gradually practices are working out how to make the most of this new resource.

But what has happened at the same time has been a squeeze on general practice finances.  Two years of imposed contracts and real terms cuts have led to a huge fall in practice profits, and if the purported contract offer of 1.9% for next year is anything to go by then the financial challenges  for practices are only going to get worse.

70% of practice expenditure goes on staff, so inevitably practices are having to look at ways of reducing this spending.  The additional roles are fully reimbursed via the ARRS, and so it is no surprise that practices are having to be creative about making the most of these roles to be able to stay afloat financially.

The additional roles provide a welcome source of additional capacity for general practice, particularly given the insufficient numbers of GPs available.  But the it is the financial situation that has driven practices into a choice between either these roles or GPs.  So our ire shouldn’t be directed towards the additional roles.  Instead it should be directed at NHS England and the government, whose failure to provide enough funding for general practice to employ the (insufficient) number of GPs that currently exists is the real problem.

It is really important that with all the pressures in general practice the service does not turn on itself.   It is not the paramedics or physiotherapists fault that practices have not been resourced properly, that the core contract is insufficient to cover the cost of GPs, or that the ARRS funds cannot be used to employ GPs.  We need the additional roles, not as a replacement for GPs but as well as GPs, and the service needs to work together to secure the funding it requires.

14
feb
0

It is Time to Stand Together

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

One of the big complaints the system has with general practice is that they say it is impossible to do with business with 6,500 different individual businesses.  Indeed, one of the main rationales around PCNs was to reduce that number down and create units of general practice that mapped onto local neighbourhoods.

But the reality is the system does not have to deal with 6,500 GP practices individually.  There is one contract for all of those practices, and so dealing with general practice is far more efficient than all of the local contract negotiations that take place individually with each of the provider trusts.

While general practice absorbs its own risk and never returns a deficit to the system, the rest of the NHS is running up debts of £1.5bn a year.  What general practice has to do is absorb its costs, often by partners, GPs and the staff working in practices having to do so much that their own health starts to be affected.  Despite the year on year cuts to funding with the recent below inflation contract impositions, activity across general practice has continued to rise.

An outsider might expect the system to be grateful.  At least one part of the system is living within its means and not adding to the wider financial woes of the NHS.  But that is not how the system is reacting.  Instead what we have is a purported offer to increase the core contract by 1.9% next year. This is well below inflation, and so represents a further cut on top of all those experienced in recent years.

A local commissioner would not get away with such an offer to its local hospital trust.  Threats of cuts to essential services and (if necessary) some gentle winding up of the local MP and newspaper would soon force the commissioner into a more reasonable offer.  Yet for some reason NHS England thinks it can get away with making this offer to general practice.

Why is that? Is it because each practice is so small that individually they are not able to make the kind of noise that actually matters?  Is it because the dispersal across 6,500 different practices means the individual impact is hard to quantify and turn into patient stories?  Is it because the pain of the junior doctor and consultant strikes is worse than any that is likely to be caused by GPs, and so general practice is seen as a soft target?

The government’s response to criticisms of its failure to invest in general practice is to point to its overall increase in investment in the NHS.  While the overspend is so big not everyone can receive additional money, and so it very much looks like general practice has been identified as an area where spending can be tightened to relieve pressures elsewhere.

So general practice has to stop being a soft target.  At present it is too easy to cut money from the service, because while it is the pain is only going to continue.

The way to do that is to stand together.  A voice that is spread across 6,500 practices is not powerful.  But a single voice across those practices is.  The system might think general practice is a diverse group, but practices come together every year via the GPC to negotiate a single contract.  And the stronger the unity across the group, the greater the negotiating power.

The system wants to move to local negotiation for general practice because it understands the latent power the national collective holds.  It has been quite some time since the service has exercised this power, but now is the time.  Practices need to make sure they are all members of the BMA (whatever they think of the BMA, because unity is power), and back Katie Bramall-Stainer and the leaders of the GPC to the hilt.  Now is the time to stand together, and demonstrate to the NHS that general practice is not a soft target.

7
feb
0

Who Should Fund GP Representation in ICSs and Neighbourhoods?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The question of who should fund GP representation in ICSs and neighbourhoods was raised with me recently, in the context of concerns that locally the funding for this currently provided by the ICS might be reduced or even stopped.  If ICSs won’t fund it should practices or PCNs fund this themselves?

The immediate reaction to a question like this is that there is insufficient capacity at practice level as it is, and so any other demands are unlikely to be able to be met, especially if they are not funded.  It is hard enough meeting the time demands PCNs place on practices, let alone anything beyond that.

But I am not sure it is quite so simple.  Taking a head in the sand approach to anything that happens outside of the walls of the practice could end up meaning that the practice is not able to survive as it is into the medium or longer term.  We know there is a push for more general practice funding to be held and controlled within local systems (rather than via the national contract), and part of neighbourhoods is about how the system and general practice work together.  Leaving decisions to others about how funding is to be used and how this integration should develop feels extremely risky indeed.

Part of the problem is that many of the ‘primary care leadership groups’ that have been set up up and down the country have been established by the ICS rather than by general practice itself.  The group has an ICS legitimacy, but not one that runs from practices up to the people sitting round the table ‘representing’ general practice.  The danger with this scenario is that it becomes a group where general practice is informed of decisions that the ICS has made (rather than actively participating in the decision making), and a place where the rest of the system can come and tell general practice all of things it wants general practice to do.

So actually any reduction or cessation of funding by the ICS for this work may represent something of an opportunity.  The choice is not a binary one of either continuing to attend system meetings or not.  If general practice is going to have to pay for this itself (most likely through development, PCN or federation resources) then it can design for itself how this is going to work.

This is unlikely to continue to involve mass attendance at ICS-controlled meetings.  Instead it is more likely to be meetings that bring general practice itself together (PCNs, LMC, federation etc) to identify priorities and coordinate (likely much smaller) representation elsewhere.

Funded or otherwise there is a need for general practice within each local area to find a way of working together as a collective and organising itself.  Since the demise of CCGs there are no longer any obvious system advocates for general practices outside of practices themselves, and a collective strategy of hoping the system sees sense is not going to be sufficient.

Ultimately it also works in the system’s interest to have a collective general practice voice so I would still expect the majority of places to be open to providing at least some level of funding for this.  But if they don’t then local GP leaders need to access whatever resources they can and get creative in building mechanisms to ensure the local GP voice is heard.

 

31
jan
0

Additionality

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Katie Bramall-Stainer gave us an interesting insight into the state of contract discussions when she revealed that the push back on including GPs in the Additional Role Reimbursement Scheme (ARRS) is because of the challenge of demonstrating that these GPs are “additional”.  The quote from the Pulse interview is this,

“The challenge that is given back [from the Government and NHSE] is: how does that prove additionality? The comeback to that is that GPs aren’t additional. Then let’s describe a number of GP roles which will absolutely be additional and which would bring [NHSE] what they want from a neighbourhood integrated team angle and what we would need, for the work that we’re already doing in practices, but that actually falls outside the contract.”

At the same time GP partner income has fallen 20% this year and the financial challenges GP partners are experiencing is leading some to the position where they are even having to lay off GPs.   So now we are in the position where there are insufficient GPs (6,000 short by the government’s own reckoning), but practices cannot afford to employ the ones they have.

I am not sure there is any need to rehearse here the reason for the current financial situation, but suffice to say the last two annual contracts have been imposed on general practice with an inflationary uplift agreed in 2019 of less than 3% when actual inflation was running at over 10%.  Less money has been invested into general practice than any other part of the NHS in the last three years, to the extent that now the general practice percentage of NHS expenditure is lower than it has been since 2015 (ie the disinvestment has undone any of the 2016 GP Forward View and 2019 contract investment and we are now back at a worse position than when the crisis in general practice was first acknowledged 8 years’ ago).

The idea of demonstrating ‘additionality’ can only be relevant in the context of overall investment.  It comes from the (unfounded yet persistent) fear government/NHS England have that any investment into general practice will end up as additional profits for practice partners rather than in benefits for patients.  But in the context of disinvestment the notion of additionality becomes redundant, as the most that practices can do is try and maintain service provision within the reduced resource envelope.

70% of GP practice costs are staff costs.  Inevitably, then, when practices need to reduce costs they need to review staffing and skill mix (like any organisation).  A significant amount of funding for staffing is now contained within the ARRS, which cannot currently be used for GPs and instead can only be used for a determined list of additional roles.  No surprise then that practices are starting to have to replace GPs with the cheaper, funded roles.

Allowing practices to use ARRS funding for GPs would put a stop to this crazy situation.  Demonstrating we have additional numbers of pharmacists and physiotherapists to the numbers we had before is not additionality if at the same time we are having to sacrifice GPs and other members of the core practice team.

Without investing additional funds the concept of additionality is null and void.  Money is required not for GPs identified as being additional to practice work, but just for GPs full stop.  What is really needed is sufficient investment into the core contract to the point where it really is additional (as opposed to replacing recent cuts).  Enabling the ARRS funding to be used for GPs is just common sense given how unlikely such a rise is, and should come without any additionality caveats.

24
jan
1

Integrated Neighbourhood Teams: A lesson in how the NHS functions

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

The idea of integrated neighbourhood teams (INTs) was introduced over 18 months ago as the centrepiece of the Fuller Report.  Since then this report has gone on to become de facto national policy for general practice, and yet we are seeing little progress when it comes to the development of these teams.  Why is that?

The reason is because this is the way the NHS works.  General practice has been largely shielded from many of the issues that how the NHS operates causes (with the exception of those who worked in CCGs), but INTs provide an example of how the top down nature of the NHS and the many layers within it conspire to stifle innovation and new ways of working.

The Fuller Report introduces INTs as a concept, but without a detailed blueprint of what they are to be.  The closest it gets to a definition is stating that in neighbourhoods of 30-50,000 they are where “teams from across primary care networks (PCNs), wider primary care providers, secondary care teams, social care teams, and domiciliary and care staff can work together to share resources and information and form multidisciplinary teams (MDTs) dedicated to improving the health and wellbeing of a local community and tackling health inequalities.”

The intention is that local areas will develop their own blueprint of an INT to match local needs, as opposed to assuming a one size fits all model will work.  This is difficult for NHS teams, now in the form of ICB teams, because they in turn are unclear of what an INT is, and so are unsure what it is they are supposed to be implementing.  Many PCNs have had the experience of asking their ICB exactly what an INT is and been unable to obtain a clear answer.  Indeed it is not uncommon for practices and PCNs to attend ICB workshops on INTs and still come out none the wiser!

But pressure for progress at the top of the ICB has been building.  ICB primary care leads are asked to report on their ‘progress on Fuller’ with INTs at the top of the list, and performance management down the line becomes increasingly heavy handed with the lack of progress.  So at this point ICB leads have started to pick anything that is happening locally with a vaguely multi-disciplinary feel and calling it ‘their’ INT, so that they can report back up the line about the progress that is being made. It may have been a pre-existing local enhanced service, or a small pilot project that a PCN was undertaking, but before you know it it is being held up as a shining example of integrated neighbourhood working.

As an example a PCN Clinical Director friend of mine was leading a local frailty project, and was surprised to discover that this is now being held up by the ICB as being at the forefront of local INT development.  Across the patch pre-existing projects have suddenly found themselves re-labelled as INTs, and INT development seems to have become more an exercise in communications than improvement.

Up and down the country huge effort is being expended feeding information and progress updates about INTs up and down the NHS line, but with relatively little support for local teams to innovate.  When I worked in a CCG this was exactly what happened, all of the time.  The ability the same group of GPs had had to innovate and implement change before we became a CCG was lost when the layers of NHS England were imposed above us.

For general practice the lessons are twofold.  One is that if anyone can turn the concept of INTs into something that will make a difference for local populations it is front line teams and not those who operate at a distance from care delivery.  If money and resources are going to be put into INTs (whatever they are), then it may be a good idea to identify for yourselves what changes might make the biggest difference locally rather than letting the opportunity be squandered. Two is that the freedom that general practice has, and its ability to act quickly, is one of its greatest strengths, and this is what will be lost if general practice ever does lose its independence and become permanently weighed down by the heavy layers of NHS bureaucracy.

17
jan
0

Guest Blog: Paul Conroy: The Danger of Making GP Practices LLPs

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The NHS Confederation document Supporting General Practice At Scale: Fit for 2024/25 and beyond recommends that Limited Liability Partnerships (LLPs) should be able to hold GMS and PMS contracts and limit GP partner liability “helping to modernise the partnership offer”.  But this, and the document’s use of the use of the word ‘devolution’, got me thinking.

In 1985 the optical market was deregulated – meaning that you no longer had to be an optician to run an optical business, and Doug and Mary Perkins set up Specsavers. By 2012 they represented 42% of the UK market, and the top three multiples held 66% of the market. With a growing online offer, independent businesses had already shrunk to 28% of services.

In 1999 the same thing happened to Vets, with Vets4Pets, the in-store service for Pets at Home, scooping up a vast market share amid a scramble of venture capital investment.

In 2003 Dentists were next, and Oasis Dental consolidated much of the market, aided by a team of senior leaders and investors who’d cut their teeth in the earlier professional market consolidations.

Similar stories play out in Pharmacy, Accountancy and Solicitors, with traditional models swept aside by larger corporates with a near identical structure;

  • A Joint venture partnership model at local branch level, where the professionals delivering the service are partners with the ‘head office’ in owning and sharing the profits of the site, often as an LLP.
  • A powerful head office function, with a strong brand, buying power to drive the cost of stock and consumables down and a franchise-like approach, drawing profits from being a partner at local level.
  • Separate estates arms held as a real estate investment trust (REIT), allowing the property element of the business to be funded by stock exchange investors.

In 2013 it appeared our time in General Practice had come. The shift in NHS pensions directions and a decision by NHSE that all future contracts would go out as APMS, rather than GMS certainly looked like a deregulation event. Plenty of corporates have tried in the decade since. A number of major players have come and gone, though none with joint venture partnership models to retain the professional involvement at practice level. Some have seen pretty ugly examples of quality and safety. The number of practices owned by ‘multiples’ has grown, the average size of practices has doubled in the last decade, and the number of practices open in England has slumped by a quarter in the last five years. Is this a slow burn or a false dawn? We would do well to watch for signs of history repeating itself, and whether LLPs might be the spark.

But context is everything. The Confed piece is overwhelmingly more focused on vertical integration with existing NHS providers – the acute trusts that make up the traditional core of their membership. And Acute trusts are as likely to benefit from LLPs and indeed, the Specsavers approach as corporates, with JVPs as a useful way for Foundation Trusts to extract value, leverage their purchasing power and burnish their brands. The approach doesn’t stipulate who the consolidator will be, just how it has previously been structured. Perhaps the theoretical independence of Foundation Trusts will come to the fore at this point – ironically when we are supposed to be moving away from the internal market.

But it was the use of the word ‘devolution’ that really caught my eye. Call me a cynic, but it seems to me the political examples of devolution in Wales, Scotland and the English cities and regions have largely been about outsourcing the blame for financial control that doesn’t follow with the responsibility. As talk of localising the GP contract and removing QoF in favour of local priorities grows, we must keep an eye on who becomes the scapegoat for the cuts that inevitably follow from stalling investment in services.

 

Paul Conroy

Practice Business Manager, Denmark Street Surgery, Darlington

10
jan
0

Preparing for What is Next for General Practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

We enter 2024 without a clear steer as to what is coming next for general practice.  We know the existing 5 year contract, the one that created and developed PCNs, expires at the end of March, but what we still don’t know is what will be replacing it.  Faced with such uncertainty, how do practices and PCNs prepare?

A key part of getting ready is being able to respond quickly to any new changes that are announced.  NHS England is well known for delaying the production of guidance and then expecting general practice to respond within very short timescales to what are often major changes with far-reaching consequences, e.g. signing up to PCNs or establishing a Clinical Commissioning Group.

There are, however, a couple of things that can assist with this type of rapid decision making.  One is to read the detail of what is being proposed.  I am always surprised whenever I talk to groups of GPs how few actually read the documents in question.  While the documents are generally (deliberately?) inaccessible, relying solely on the interpretation of others can lead to skewed views about what is actually being put forward.

When digesting the new proposals the main questions to consider are what is the detail of what is being proposed, what will the impact of such changes be (on the practice, on the PCN), along with what the big picture implications of the changes are.  We might not have liked the details of the PCN proposals but the big picture implication was always that this was going to be the only way the practice could access new resources in the foreseeable future.

As a sidenote, a good preparation for what might be coming would be to read the Fuller Stocktake report.  This has become the de facto general practice strategy document (despite it being a report on integrating general practice with the rest of the system, but let’s not get into that again), and the author has since been appointed the National Primary Care Medical Director at NHS England.  Last year’s contractual changes around access were signposted in the Fuller Report, and it would be a surprise if whatever new emerges has not at least been mentioned in this document.

For an even more thorough preparation read the NHS Confederation’s document entitled, “Supporting General Practice At Scale: Fit for 2024/25 and beyond”.  In it they have, “identified a set of tangible recommendations for the upcoming GP and primary care network (PCN) contracts for 2024/25”, and whilst we would not be expecting the NHS Confederation to be determining the future of general practice, I explain why the document is important here.

The second action that can help prepare for what is coming is to find out from those people already doing the type of thing that is being suggested what the reality is actually like.  Unless the new proposals are one man’s crackpot scheme (CCGs may fall into that category) then there is normally always a predecessor, like the primary care homes that preceded PCNs.  Learning from the real life experiences of others can provide valuable clues to identifying the best way forward for ourselves.

Of course this requires the details to be published, but again there are emerging examples of some of the things included in the Fuller Report (like Integrated Neighbourhood Teams) developing across the country.

The good news is that help with all of this is at hand.  For the last two years I have been working alongside eGP Learning GPs Dr Hussain Gandhi and Dr Andy Foster and PCN expert Tara Humphrey in delivering PCN Plus, a training and support programme for PCN leaders.  Together, we are putting on a conference on Wednesday April 17th in Nottingham which is free for all practice and PCN staff to attend, when we will be both giving our take on what is coming (we think that even NHS England will have published the plan for 2024/2025 by April!), and be showcasing examples from those already further down the track.

If you want to make sure that you are ready for next year when the time comes then you can sign up for our free conference here (places are available on a first come first served basis) – I look forward to seeing you there!

6
dec
0

Is Nationalisation of General Practice Inevitable?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The new NHS obsession is integration.  How can we join everything up so that it better meets the needs of patients?  But could this obsession spell the end of the independent contractor model for general practice?

The shift to integrated care systems is not helping general practice.  The internal market was the prevailing system in the NHS from 1991 when it was first introduced, right through until 2019 when the Long Term Plan was published.  Technically it continued until the new legislation was enacted last year, but to all intents and purposes we have been working under the new system for the last 4 years.

While the internal market was in place the system wanted to find a way to make general practice the “purchaser”.  Numerous different mechanisms to make this happen were attempted, starting with GP fundholding (remember that?) back in the 1990s, right through Primary Care Groups, practice based commissioning and then finally Clinical Commissioning Groups.

But the shift to Integrated Care Systems has stopped all of that. The strategic question the system is trying to answer is no longer how do we make general practice effective purchasers.  Instead the question now is how do we integrate general practice with the rest of the system.

The NHS Long Term Plan proudly states as its number one action in chapter one:

“We will boost ‘out of hospital’ care, and finally dissolve the historic divide between primary and community health care”

The problem with general practice (according to the system) is that it is too separate, too independent and not linked up enough with community and hospital services.

Plan number one to tackle this problem was the introduction of Primary Care Networks (PCNs).  The NHS Long Term Plan, the first place the idea of PCNs appeared, introduced them like this,

“GP practices – typically covering 30-50,000 people – will be funded to work together to deal with pressures in primary care and extend the range of convenient local services, creating genuinely integrated teams of GPs, community health and social care staff”

I sometimes wonder if the first part of that description (“to deal with the pressures in primary care”) has been forgotten, but that aside it is clear the intention of PCNs is as an enabler of integration.  The original PCN DES stated that after one year a requirement to include collaboration with non-GP providers would be added to PCNs, but then Covid came and this never happened.  Instead the Fuller report (which as you recall was entitled, “Next Steps for Integrating Primary Care”, another clear pointer to the goal the policy makers are now trying to achieve) introduced the idea of Integrated Neighbourhood Teams, as the new souped-up PCN model to enable integration in a way that PCNs so far have not.

But will networks and neighbourhoods succeed in the goal of integrating general practice with the rest of the NHS?  If they don’t then the default is most likely a structural solution.  The structural solution would be to nationalise general practice and make it part of the NHS.  Then the integration box could be considered ticked.

This is why politicians on both sides of the political divide in recent years have suddenly started talking about the end of the independent contractor model.  Sajid Javid when he was Secretary of State got the ball rolling when he claimed in a Times article that nationalising general practice was a way to reduce hospital admissions.  Then earlier this year Keir Starmer said the GP partnership model was “coming to the end of its natural life”.  They, along with certain NHS leaders, are attracted to structural integration solutions because they are clear and can be imposed, even if they do nothing to develop the relationships that are required to make integration effective.

The last we heard there was not going to be any forced nationalisation of general practice.  But the question of how to integrate general practice remains uppermost in the minds of policy makers, and unless PCNs and integrated neighbourhood teams start making more progress soon a heavier push for general practice to be made a full part of the NHS seems inevitable.

29
nov
0

5 Key Relationships for PCNs to Review

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

2024 is going to be a challenging one for PCNs.  The 5 year contract completes at the end of March next year, and while we know PCNs are to continue the pressure upon them is likely to be greater than ever.  Making sure the relationships they have in place now are where they need to be should be a priority for the coming months.  Here are 5 key relationships for PCNs to review.

  1. PCNs and their member practices

Over a quarter of all resources coming in to general practice now come via PCNs.  With all the wage and inflationary cost pressures the future of practices depends on PCNs more than at any point previously, and as we move forward this will become more not less important.  As a result, relationships can go two ways.  Either practices can start fighting with each other and the PCN leadership in a desperate bid to secure the resources they need, or practices can work together and attempt to make the most of the opportunity the PCN presents.

Practices within a PCN can ill afford to be at each other’s throats.  PCNs will increasingly have to take on the role of representing their practices in system discussions.  Rightly or wrongly, more and more the system is looking to PCNs as the unit of general practice that it wants to deal with.  Obtaining the best possible outcomes will require the practices within each PCN to be working together.

  1. PCNs and their local federation

I understand that not every area has a federation in place, but for those who do they could be a really important asset in the coming years.  The Fuller Report has pointed to the infrastructure underpinning PCNs and Integrated Neighbourhood Teams needing to be scaled up to be of the quality required in terms of HR, estates, finance and technology.  The local federation could be the provider of this infrastructure and the enabler of general practice controlling its own destiny.

The alternative is that the support for the PCN will be provided in future by one of the local NHS trusts.  With what I would euphemistically call “structural integration solutions” being very much on the agenda for general practice at the moment (i.e. making practices part of NHS trusts), then this would be a very risky road to travel down for those committed to a future for independent general practice.

  1. PCNs and the other local PCNs

It is hard enough for the practices in a PCN to all get along, never mind all the PCNs in a local area!  But the reality is that moves are afoot to shift more and more decision making about general practice, and potentially resources, from a national to a local level.  When this happens general practice in a local area needs to have influence and be able to speak with a united voice to ensure that any deals that are made locally serve the best interests of the practices and their patients.

But this requires PCNs to be able to work effectively with each other.  There need to be trusting relationships in place, an ability to represent each other in system discussions, and a way of making decisions together.  This takes time, and so time is running out to get this to where it needs to be.

  1. PCNs and the local system primary care group

System primary care groups are odd creations.  In many places they have been formed by the system rather than by general practice, the agendas are set by the system teams, and the membership is generally appointed rather than representative.  Yet the likelihood is that these groups will be the place where decisions about general practice  are made, which could have huge resource, workload and strategic implications for PCNs and practices in future.  Now is the time for PCNs to review whether these groups are working, whether their voice is really being heard, and to push for changes so that these groups are fit for purpose moving forward.

  1. PCNs and local community providers

For the last 18 months the spectre of integrated neighbourhood teams has loomed over PCNs, with the Fuller report saying that these are what PCNs would ‘evolve’ into.  But more and more it is becoming clear that PCNs will be the general practice partner within these new teams, rather than them being a new future for PCNs themselves.  That said, the system focus remains very heavily on bringing primary and community care closer together, and so PCNs getting on the front foot in building these relationships will put them in the best possible place as these new teams develop.

22
nov
0

The Changing Role of the PCN Clinical Director

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Four and half years into PCNs and it is no surprise that in that time things have not stayed the same.  One thing that has changed more than anything is the role of the PCN Clinical Director.  But has it evolved far enough?  What does the role need to be going forward to ensure future success?

When PCNs first started the role of the PCN Clinical Director was very much about start up, about getting the practices engaged in the PCN and enabling the PCN to take its first steps as a collective unit.  A whole raft of seemingly endless recruitments followed, liberally interspersed with responding to a global pandemic, setting up a vaccination programme, and an ever-increasing set of demands upon these fledgling organisations.

For much of that time the focus of the PCN Clinical Director out of necessity had to be internal.  In many PCNs no other capacity existed, so for anything to get done it was down to the PCN Clinical Director to do it.  But over time, gradually, this has changed.  PCN managers have been appointed, and more recently these have been supplemented by more senior Digital and Transformation Leads.  Throw in some administrative support and some PCNs can now even lay claim to having management teams in place.

With the rapid expansion of the additional roles many PCNs have introduced clinical leads, e.g. to look after the supervision, training and development of the clinical pharmacists or the physiotherapists or the social prescribing link workers, or to lead on some of the many operational components of the PCN DES such as the IIF or the new access requirements.  Meanwhile the role of the PCN Clinical Director has been evolving into one supporting this range of management and clinical leaders, as opposed to one directly delivering the work.

Some PCNs are much further down this road than others, but it is an important journey to take.  Looking into the future what practices will need from their PCN Clinical Director is a much clearer external focus.

The future direction for PCNs is to be part of Integrated Neighbourhood Teams (INTs).  As these have started to develop we can see that the PCN is the unit of general practice operating within these local teams.  A key part of these being successful, or making any form of difference, will be the relationships between the different organisations that are involved.  For PCNs this means that someone has to have the time to invest in building these external relationships, and that in most instances means the PCN Clinical Director.

At the same time the ability of general practice to operate effectively as a collective unit within a local area is becoming more important than ever.  Increasingly we are seeing decision making about general practice being shifted from a primarily national locus to a local one.  It is highly likely that in the coming months much more of the funding for general practice and for PCNs will come through local systems.  PCNs (like it or not) are the main units of general practice within an integrated care system, and so the voice and influence of the PCN Clinical Directors will be hugely important.

PCN Clinical Directors need to have the capacity to build the relationships with external organisations and wider local general practice to be effective going forward.  They will not be able to do this if they are stuck managing the day to day operations of the PCN.  While many have started the journey of releasing the capacity of their CD, for many there is still a long way to go.  Getting as far as possible by March next year is likely to be of critical importance both for the future success of the PCN and of local general practice.

15
nov
1

What if the PCN DES was commissioned locally?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

One of the potential scenarios for next year is that the funding for the PCN DES will be shifted from the national contract and given to local Integrated Care Boards (ICBs) to commission locally.  What impact would this have?

I should start by saying I don’t know what is going to happen next year, although as I wrote last week we know more than we sometimes think we do.  I don’t have any inside track or knowledge beyond what anyone else has, but based on what we do know it is possible to hypothesise about what next year might bring.  So to be clear this is a thought experiment on what might happen, not a statement about what will happen.

We know the system is pushing for is greater local control of GP funding.  While there have been some ideas floated previously around QOF potentially being commissioned locally, it would seem to me that a much more likely target would be the PCN DES.  PCNs are the basic unit of integration for local systems, and as such it would actually be surprising if systems did not want more control over them.  PCN DES money is not technically core contract money (despite it now constituting more than a quarter of all funds coming into general practice), and so it may actually be easier to shift to local control than other parts of the contract.

What would happen if such a change was to occur?  The first thing we would see would be an increase in variation across the country.  The national contract brings a degree of standardisation which would be lost with such a shift.  We would most likely see some areas add additional local investment to the PCN DES pot to accelerate the local development of PCNs and the shift to neighbourhood working, while others would most likely view it as another source of funds that could be accessed to cut costs so that the system could get closer to its financial savings targets.

We would probably also see variation in how the PCN DES funding is treated.  Some ICBs would understand the funding to be primarily general practice funding, and be mindful of the role this funding plays in supporting the sustainability of general practice.  Others would see the funding as system funding for neighbourhoods, with general practice being only one part of what constitutes a neighbourhood.  One suspects in those areas it would not be long before the resources within the DES started to be shared across a wider group of providers.

Then there is the ‘infrastructure’ question posed by the Fuller Report.  The report stated that PCNs’ “lack of infrastructure and support has held them back from achieving more ambitious change”.  So where does this infrastructure come from?  According to the Fuller Report this would come from an at scale general practice provider or existing NHS Trust.  Would it be wholly unexpected, then, if ICBs then contracted the PCN DES money via one of these providers?

If you take into account the new provider selection regime, which is due to come in place in the new year (watch out for my forthcoming podcast with Ross Clark from Hempsons for more details on this), then actually making this happen would be relatively easy for ICBs.  Having PCNs being directly contracted by the local community or acute trust does provide the type of structural integration ‘solution’ that the NHS heavily favours.

It all feels like a high risk scenario for general practice.  While it may create local opportunities in some areas, it clearly comes with huge risks.  Of course it may not happen, but it is exactly because scenarios like this are not unrealistic that it is critical general practice in local areas work together to develop their local system voice and influence.  This way at least it is in a position to mitigate some of the bigger risks that such a change would cause.  Even if it does not happen next April the chances are high that this will come at some point, and so being prepared is essential.

8
nov
0

Tackling the End of PCN DES Uncertainty

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Many PCNs are finding the proximity to the end of March when the PCN DES comes to end a real challenge.  Practices are disengaging from the PCN because of the uncertainty as to what is coming next, and it is difficult for PCN leaders to coral the practices into any form of collective action.  Given this situation is a period of limbo inevitable, or can a more productive use of the time remaining be found?

Well the reality is that we are not surrounded only by uncertainty.  There are some things that we do know.  We know that next year there will be a one year “stepping stone” contract, in which we will see a continuation of PCNs more or less as they are, along with some “pointers” as to what may be to come.  There will be an election next year, and so any major changes will not happen until after a new government is in place.

We know that the funding for the ARRS roles will continue.  While we do not know exactly the form that this will take, given that PCNs are to continue then most likely is that the ARRS funding will also continue more or less as is.

We know that there is not going to be any backtracking on the funding for general practice that comes through PCNs.  At present over 25% of funding comes via PCNs, and because the system’s number one goal is to “integrate” general practice with the rest of the system then it is not going to revert from 1250 units (PCNs) to 7000 units (practices).  It simply is not going to happen. We also know financial pressure on individual practices will continue, and there will not suddenly be more GPs.

We know that what is coming next is going to be some version of PCNs working more closely with the other health and social care providers in the local neighbourhoods.  The original PCN DES back in 2019 said that the DES would be “amended from 20/21 to include collaboration with non-GP providers as a requirement”.  While this never happened because of Covid, the Fuller report (now de facto national primary care policy) has outlined exactly this in its description of Integrated Neighbourhood Teams, and it has become clear since that PCNs will operate as the general practice part of these teams rather than become them.

We are also aware of a couple of reasonably significant risks for general practice.  There is pressure in the system for more general practice resource to be controlled locally rather than nationally.  It is also likely that systems will seek to access PCN resources for the sole purpose of neighbourhood working, disregarding their additional function of supporting core general practice.  Both represent significant risks if general practice is not able to influence effectively in local systems.

Given we know all these things there are two actions that are sensible.  The first is for PCNs to create their own plan to manage the end of the PCN DES.  This would include getting the relationships between the practices to a place where the opportunity of the PCN can best be maximised by all (see last week’s blog), and freeing up some of the PCN leadership time to both start the process of building relationships with local providers and to engage in work to strengthen the voice of general practice within the local system.

The second is to refresh the vision for the PCN (if there is one).  I have written previously about this, but essentially unless the practices in the PCN have their own vision for what they want the PCN to achieve then the system is highly likely to impose is its own priorities for the PCN.  With the system changes around integrated care and integrated neighbourhood teams this is more of a risk than ever, so it is critical that practices are clear on the direction they want to take together so that they can shape any future changes into this direction, rather than allowing these changes to determine where they are going.

Working together to create a plan that focusses on those things that you can control and on mitigating the biggest risks is extremely empowering.  It is a much better way of dealing with the uncertainty than taking no action and waiting for a new direction to be imposed, and is one that is much more likely to achieve a better result for both the PCN and its practices.

1
nov
1

PCNs and Practices

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

We have a problem in general practice.  The system wants to work with units of general practice that are PCN-sized.  Practices, however, are (in the main) not PCN-sized and have no intention of becoming so.  The system is carrying on regardless.  What does this mean for practices?

Dr Steve Taylor recently posted on X that while the global sum for GP practices stands at £104 per person, PCN funding is now at £38 per person.  So over a quarter of all the funding coming into general practice now comes via PCNs.  The system’s desire to work through PCN-sized units of general practice means that the amount of funding coming through PCNs is going to continue to rise.

If we know that this is how things will develop in the future (regardless of the rights and wrongs of the policy), what is the most sensible way for practices to respond?

An increasingly common response is for practices to focus on ensuring that the practice receives its share of the funding that comes into the PCN.  The practice has no real interest in the collective of practices that is the PCN or its joint work, but does everything it can to ensure as much resource as possible is directed to individual practice level.

For PCN Clinical Directors this can be hugely frustrating.  They constantly feel like they are having to battle to ensure the PCN is able to fulfil its requirements alongside meeting these requests from practices.   The PCN and the practices end up feeling like they are disconnected and are frequently at odds with each other.

This scenario has lost sight of one really important fact.  The only people who are supporting general practice right now is general practice itself.

There is no other support available.  The system has become distant, remote, and preoccupied with access and system working.  There is the CQC with its new practice inspection framework, alongside a system that has introduced legislative changes to force practices to work differently.  Noone else is on the side of practices.

The most accessible form of support is actually from the other practices in the PCN, alongside the PCN itself (and local federation if there is one).  The opportunity exists to learn from and support each other.

The problem with the “give everything to the practices” approach to PCNs is that it misses this opportunity for support.  Instead, it deepens the historic sense of divide between practices and entrenches the barriers around each practice, despite the challenges that nearly all practices are facing.

To maximise the value of the total of the funds coming into general practice, both now and in the future, practices in the PCN should consider what is best done individually at the level of the practice, and what is best done collectively at PCN level.  Regardless of what some might say, there is value in some things been done once across the group of practices in a PCN.  Equally some things need to be done at individual practice level.  Even then, there is value in each practice taking the time to learn from the other practices on how actions at a practice level are carried out, and in supporting each other to ensure the best systems and processes are in place at each practice.

The PCN has a key role in enabling this.  The current focus on access is a perfect example.  The role of the PCN is not to put together a PCN plan that the system will sign off on, and leave the practices to work on their own to meet the new access requirements.  Instead, it is to ensure that the best balance of PCN provision and practice provision is agreed and put in place, and that practices are given the opportunity to share and learn from each other so that they are each equipped as best they can be to meet the new requirements.  Practices can and should be supporting each other because they are in this together.

PCNs can either be a barrier to practices receiving their share of the funding, or they can be an enabler of efficiency, innovation and support.  Practices are not in competition with each other, and treating PCNs as a practice competition for resources will ultimately mean that all the practices in the PCN suffer as a result.  For practices to survive in this new world of integrated care systems, they must work together and support each other wherever and whenever they can, and it is the PCN that creates the opportunity for this to happen.

25
oct
0

Beware Distance from Practices

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

At-scale working in general practice has a chequered past.  While there are obvious economy of scale benefits, the reality is that many attempts to function at-scale have floundered.  What can we learn from the past, and what might the implications be for PCNs and their development?

Although PCNs are only approaching their 5th birthday, at-scale working in general practice has been around for much longer.  Federations, super-practices and even CCGs have all attempted to bring practices together in different ways.

The key lesson from all of these is that a dissonance, or even a perceived dissonance, between the at-scale organisation and the practice unit causes challenges and impacts the ability to work collectively.  Where there is a perfect unity of the at-scale entity and the individual practice units then much can be achieved, but where cracks between the two appear then the ability to deliver the benefits of working at-scale quickly dissipate.

We see this with federations.  The most successful federations have a strong relationship between the practices and the federation, and a high level of trust between the practice partners and the federation directors.  Conversely, federations struggle where the practices have concerns that the federation may be in competition with its practices (for example over the delivery of enhanced services or a local APMS practice), may be working for its own ends rather than those of the member practices, or may be taking on a performance management rather than support function for its members.

Super-practices may be one organisation but in some tensions can exist between the individual practice units and the ‘centre’.  While the ability to make collective decisions is certainly easier as a single entity, if trust between the practice units and those running the wider entity break down cohesiveness is still difficult to achieve.

CCGs, meanwhile, really had no chance.  Right from the outset the CCG authorisation process made clear that CCGs had to prioritise the wider health economy over general practice, and put in place systems to ensure that CCGs did not make any decisions that might favour general practice.  It was no surprise, then, that practices quickly worked out that the CCG was something separate from them and paid little attention to requests for collective action.

PCNs have two advantages that these previous attempts at at-scale working did not.  First is that they are an extension of the GP contract.  They are formed out of a shared enhanced service contract (the PCN DES) and as such are firmly rooted in core general practice.  They are not a separate entity that exists in addition to the practices , but rather are an extension of the practices themselves.  This means the sense that PCNs are somehow in competition with the practices does not exist, as the separation that particularly federations intrinsically begin with is not present for PCNs.

This brings a word of warning for PCNs that choose to incorporate.  While incorporation brings a protection for individual practices from PCN liabilities, it also creates a new distance between the PCN as an entity and the practices themselves.  Once incorporated the PCN is very clearly something different from its practices, which could in time lead to more of a separation between the two.

The second advantage that PCNs have is the limit to their size.  It is much easier to maintain trust, aligned values and strong communication across a small number of practices and GP partners over (say) a 50,000 population than it is for those at-scale entities serving 100,000+ populations.  The more people involved and the wider the geography served the harder it is to maintain the alignment needed for practices to move together as one.

The most successful PCNs are groups of practices working together to be able to better serve their population both collectively and individually.   They trust each other and identify where working at a PCN or a practice scale is better for any given situation.  Other PCNs either have a divide between the work of the PCN and the work of the practices and a conflict between the two, e.g. in the deployment of ARRS roles, or have no sense of the collective and instead have a constant pull for any PCN resources to the individual practice level.

For many PCNs getting this right remains a work in progress.  The danger is this journey may be derailed by changing what PCNs are too quickly.  If the system becomes impatient for Integrated Neighbourhood Teams (INTs) that pull the focus of PCNs into whole system working and away from their practices too quickly, they risk ending up the same way as many previous attempts of at-scale working, i.e. disconnected from practices and not able to take the service with them.

18
oct
0

A Glimpse Into Next Year’s Contract?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The NHS Confederation has published a new document entitled, “Supporting General Practice At Scale: Fit for 2024/25 and beyond”.  In it they have, “identified a set of tangible recommendations for the upcoming GP and primary care network (PCN) contracts for 2024/25”.  What are they saying, and what might this mean for next year’s contract?

The first question is why the NHS Confederation are producing such a document at all?  It seems the answer to this lies somewhere in the midst of the fact that discussions between NHS England and the BMA/GPC have not progressed over the last two years (hence two years of imposed contracts) and so NHS England has started to turn elsewhere to have conversations about the future.

Whether the NHS Confederation, an NHS membership organisation that within primary care has PCNs and GP Federations as its members, has legitimacy to talk on behalf of core general practice is questionable, but that hasn’t prevented the publication of this report, and someone, somewhere is funding this work.  The NHS Confederation Primary Care Network is clear that its aim is to “drive the future direction of primary care”, and the report explicitly states that NHS England and DH participated in its production (p9).

The report talks about contracts for practices and PCNs, as if the two are separate.  At present the PCN DES is a part of the national GMS contract, but without explicitly calling for the two to be separated the report does treat them separately.   Are PCNs a group of practices operating together and so an extension of practices, or are they separate entities in their own right?  The gap between at-scale GP organisations and their member practices is what ultimately has caused most of them to fail, and such a separation will likely have disastrous consequences for both practices and PCNs.

The report reinforces the now prevailing belief that next year (2024/25) will be a “stepping stone” contract (p8), ie one with limited change but which will start to point towards a future direction.  It talks about having “Pathfinder” PCNs in 2024/25 to model new ways of working for PCNs that can “demonstrate a level of maturity and innovation” (p19).

The document lays out the “asks” that it says will underpin the future direction for general practice.  Some of these are very specific, including to explore limited liability partnerships holding PMS and GMS contracts, and the contract to rise with a new pay uplift clause.  It also has this as a short term ask, “Explore proven delivery models that will improve practice resilience and sustainability, enabling a mixed economy that continues to support access to services for patients” (p13).  It is not clear what this actually means, but it could be read as a pointer to NHS organisations running practices.

There is also an ask that, “National primary care contracts should be streamlined, retaining a core national focus on areas of high impact” (p19).  Again, it is not clear what this means.  It could mean less prescription on what is required, or it could mean shifting funding out of the national contract and into local contracts, and the problem is people will hear what they want it to mean.

The report contains many of these “asks”.  The report is worth reading to see what they all are.  Many are sensible, some less so, and some have an obvious bias towards at-scale general practice.  The biggest problem, greater than the lack of clarity as to what some of the asks actually mean, is understanding who is asking whom for these things.  Implicit is that primary care is asking NHSE/DH, but there is some considerable distance between the asks in this report and the ‘Call to Action’ document produced by the BMA earlier this year.  I suspect a substantial number of these asks would struggle to gain support if they were presented at the national LMC conference.

But NHSE and the DH want to move forward with their plans for general practice, and if the BMA will not engage with them in a conversation about these plans it is hardly surprising that they are turning to those that will.  This in turn means that despite the mandate issues around this document it potentially could have very significant implications for next year’s contract, and this is probably our first glimpse of the types of things we can expect to see coming.

11
oct
0

Look After Your Physician Associates

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

It is a difficult time for physician associates right now.  The current barrage of criticism from across the media continues to scale up, and being in the midst of it must be extremely disconcerting and isolating.

The current storm appeared to start back in July, when Pulse magazine reported how a practice in North London had decided to stop employing physician associates following an incident in which a patient died after seeing their physician associate.  This incident was then picked up by Labour MP Barbara Keeley, who raised the issue in parliament.

Since then the media criticism of physician associates has been unrelenting (e.g. this, published on Saturday, where a reporter has trawled though the Physician Associate podcast episodes to create a negative story, or this in the ever-unhelpful Daily Mail).

The medical profession has concerns about physician associates.  This BMJ article explains them pretty well, that patients can be confused as to who they have seen, and the amount of supervision required to ensure safe care.  The safety concerns are particularly great in general practice, where the partners are ultimately liable for the decisions made by all of those in their clinical team.  The problem is that the current (negative) media coverage has prompted these concerns to be liberally aired, which in turn has served to fuel the fires.

Imagine you are a physician associate working in general practice in the midst of all of this.  It cannot be easy.  I spoke to physician associate James Catton recently on the podcast about what it is like, and he said, “I have never seen the backlash or the level of issues being brought up across social media that are anti-PA.  It’s been pretty brutal these last few months to see… It’s not a great time to be a PA.  A lot of PAs feel there is sometimes a target on our back at the moment”.

You probably would not know it, but this week (w/c 6/10) is physician associate week.  This was the fanfare surrounding the week last year on the Faculty of Physician Associate’s website.  This year there is nothing.  Unsurprisingly physician associates want to keep a low profile.  So just at the time when normally there would be some additional national support there isn’t any.  Just the constant media criticism.

Maybe you have your own reservations about physician associates.  That is understandable.  It is a relatively new profession, that still does not have regulation in place, and that is still trying to find its place in the wider health system.

But physician associates are not a luxury.  There are not enough GPs to manage the (growing) workload, and there never will be enough.  In 2016 the government pledged 5,000 additional GPs, and in 2019 this target was upped to 6,000.  Despite a huge investment in training numbers the amount of GPs remains static, as the number leaving continues to match the numbers entering the profession.  In an ideal world there would be enough GPs, but given that is not a realistic possibility different roles are now a necessity.  For its own sake, general practice needs to make these new roles work.

And, ideologies aside, there are people in these roles now – an estimated 2,000 currently working across general practice.  The concerns about their role are largely outside of their control.  They have taken on a role in good faith, and now feel like they are being pilloried for it.  They feel under fire.  They need help, support and encouragement.

Maybe we should approach physician associate week differently this year.  Maybe it should be about taking time out to provide some support to those physician associates that are working with us, to say that we recognise the personal challenge the current situation must present, and to let them know their efforts are appreciated.  A little support now could go a long way in future.

4
oct
0

General Practice Funding

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

One of the challenges that representatives of general practice are often given, whether it is explicitly or implicitly, is to increase the funding general practice receives.  But are they going about this the right way?

The system is pushing for more and more of general practice funding to come via Integrated Care Boards (ICBs).  The Fuller report was accompanied by a letter signed by all of the 42 ICB CEOs asking for exactly this, and now Claire Fuller herself has been made Medical Director of Primary Care at NHS England.  It will come of something of a surprise if we don’t see at least signs of this shift when details of whatever is to succeed the current 5 year contract are finally published.

At the same time, many ICBs are now starting to get their heads around their own local enhanced services (LESs), and we are beginning to see changes to how these services are commissioned. The desire for more activity to take place ‘downstream’ (ie outside of the acutes) means potentially more activity for general practice.

What all this means is that the role of the system representatives for general practice is becoming increasingly important, and is likely to have real financial consequences for the service.  But how should these representatives be approaching these discussions?

System funding has for many years been weighted in favour of NHS and in particular acute organisations.  If a hospital trust spends more money than it has then it shows up as a deficit, and funding has to be found to pay for this deficit.  In this way acute expenditure has risen year on year for many years – not because it was agreed in advance, but because during the year more money was spent than was available.

Of course, general practice does not have this luxury.  Liability for any overspend does not revert back to the system, but rather falls on the partners themselves.  The net result is that general practice absorbs its own pressures, right up until practices reach breaking point and have to hand back their contract.

We are in a situation now where there has been activity growth in core service delivery in both the acutes and general practice, but much more of that growth has been funded in the acutes because of the way the system works.  A key part of the issue is that the growth in activity within the acutes is much more visible.  Every A&E and outpatient attendance, admission and operation is individually recorded and reported into the system.

In general practice, this activity remains largely invisible.  Hard as it may be to believe not only does the system not see it, some believe the pressures the rest of the system is experiencing are due to general practice not pulling its weight.

The first challenge for the general practice system representatives is to make this activity visible.  Not additional activity, core activity.  Not as a one off, but regularly and consistently.  Instead of wondering what general practice is up to, the system needs to be as clear on the pressures in practices as they are on those in A&E.

The system has a tendency to look at any growth in general practice funding as requiring something additional in return.  There is always more work attached.  This is the mindset that has to change.  What local general practice leaders need to do is establish that the core general practice workload is both unsustainable and continuing to rise.

This requires organisation, coordination and effective joint working.  General practice representatives cannot do this on their own.  Practices need to work together more effectively with their representatives if they are to exert any real influence into the system.  Because very soon this influence will start to have direct financial consequences for practices.

27
sep
0

Is PCNs running practices the future?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

An article appeared in the Health Services Journal last week (here, although paywalled) which reported that Hertfordshire and West Essex ICB are replacing the APMS contract with a private provider with a GMS contract to be held by the local PCN.  What are the implications of such a move for general practice?

This is definitely a change in the direction of primary care commissioning.  While we do not know the extent to which this may become common practice amongst commissioners (and it could of course be a one off), it represents quite a significant U-turn from how such events have recently been handled.  Previously they would have either re-tendered the APMS contract or dispersed the list.

It does seem that tendering APMS contracts may no longer be much of an option for commissioners.  There is so little funding in the core contract that the historic providers of APMS contracts are now moving away, for example Centene is reportedly in the process of trying to offload its chain of nearly 60 Operose Health surgeries (formerly AT Medics).  Equally, in this new world of integrated care systems the emphasis is on GP practices working together in PCNs, and many PCNs with APMS providers as members have found it hard to engage them fully in the work of the PCN.  Hertfordshire and West Essex ICB cited the short term nature of APMS contracts, and the challenge this poses to PCN development, as one of the reasons for their action.

In the past some commissioners have sought help from local federations with the running of practices, but these have been almost exclusively APMS contracts.  The difference here is that the commissioner is awarding a GMS contract, i.e. one that exists in perpetuity, to the PCN.

Whilst responsibility for the practice does shift to the other practices in the PCN, it is not the same as dispersing the list.  In a dispersal practices have to take on their share of the patients on the dispersed list, but in this scenario the responsibility (and accountability) comes via their membership/ownership of the PCN.  It does make PCN resources (both clinical and managerial) more directly accessible to the struggling practice which may help, but of course this will equally be a distraction from the core PCN work plus from the PCN support to the other practices.

We have seen practices merging and becoming coterminous with their PCNs, making the PCN work simply an extension of the core GMS work.  But this approach of a PCN taking on a core GMS contract to me is more surprising and unexpected.

Not everyone shares my surprise, however.  Healthcare policy expert Nigel Edwards said “surely it was always the intention”.  Is it inevitable?  Does the current policy environment of integration mean that where we are heading is PCN-shaped or PCN-run practices?  Should we be expecting this to be just the start rather than a one-off anomaly?

PCNs up and down the country vary considerably in their state of maturity.  Some have now reached the point where taking on a practice is a viable option, although many (the majority?) are probably still some way off this.  But the system has been piling responsibility onto PCNs regardless of their ability to take it on, so readiness may not act as any kind of barrier to a roll out of this approach.

But equally commissioners vary.  At the same time as this ICS is awarding a GMS contract to a PCN, another is offering contracts on a ‘branch-only’ basis.  So I don’t think we have reached the point where this now represents the new system approach to commissioning contracts.

It is an interesting development, and one it is worth keeping an eye on to see whether it is a one-off or whether other systems follow suit.  It does seem extremely likely that any new resources for general practice will continue to come via PCNs, and that practices’ dependence on their PCNs will continue to grow.  Whether this then means that ultimately practices end up operating collectively as PCN units, as either a single contract or a collection of contracts held at PCN level, I don’t think is quite as clear cut.  But if we take nothing else away from this is should be that practices operating together as PCNs represents a cornerstone of the new NHS architecture, and it is one that is not going away any time soon.

20
sep
0

What is the Plan?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

When we are trying to understand the future for any individual service (like general practice) it is wise to try and understand what the future for the wider NHS looks like, as a framework to understand any potential changes.  So, what is the plan for the NHS?

The existing NHS Plan was entitled the NHS Long Term Plan, and it was published in January 2019.  While the headlines around it talked about it being a 10 year plan for the NHS, the document itself reads like a 5 year plan.  All of the specific commitments are limited to a 5 year time period, and anything else is described as “and beyond” (e.g. “It provides the framework for local planning for the next five years and beyond” p110).

The NHS Long Term Plan is of particular importance to general practice because it was the document that introduced Primary Care Networks (PCNs).  While there is a tendency in the wider NHS to think of PCNs as a general practice initiative, the reality is they were introduced as a cornerstone of the Long Term Plan ambition to “boost out of hospital care and finally dissolve the historic divide between primary and community care services” p12.

Importantly, PCNs were introduced so that, “GP practices – typically covering 30-50,000 people – will be funded to work together to deal with pressures in primary care and extend the range of convenient local services, creating genuinely integrated teams of GPs, community health and social care staff” p6.  As an aside, and regular readers of this column will know is a personal gripe of mine, the dealing with pressures in primary care part of this does seem to get lost in many ICBs’ interpretation of the role of PCNs.

Much has changed since 2019.  Matt Hancock has gone from being Secretary of State for Health to appearing in Celebrity SAS.  Simon Stevens has been replaced by Amanda Pritchard as Chief Executive of the NHS.  Covid happened.  We are now only 6 months from the end of the 5 year planning horizon indicated by the Long Term Plan, and from the end of the agreed period of the PCN DES.  Is the plan published in 2019 still the one the NHS is working to in September 2023?  Are PCNs still the plan to dissolve the divide between primary and community care services?

What the Long Term Plan was actually signifying was a closing of the internal market chapter of the NHS, that had been running since 1990.  It heralded the legislative changes that marked this closure, along with the formal creation of Integrated Care Systems (ICSs).  The new post-internal market system of ICSs is one based on collaboration and one that seeks to “deliver the ‘triple integration’ of primary and specialist care, physical and mental health services, and health with social care” (p10).

The fact that since the Long Term Plan was published Claire Fuller was asked to produce a document entitled “Next Steps for Integrating Primary Care” tells us a number of things.   It tells us the overall ambition to break down the perceived divide between primary care and both community and specialist care remains firm and an overriding priority.  It also tells us that the progress towards this so far via PCNs has been deemed as insufficient.

Meanwhile the NHS finds itself in something of a predicament.  The usefulness of the 2019 Long Term Plan has effectively run its course (or will have by March next year), and nothing yet has been produced to succeed it.  A general election is due before January 2025 (and therefore will probably take place next year) which makes the publication of any major new NHS plans (such as a new five year forward view/long term plan) unlikely in the intervening period.

So in this period of limbo most likely is that the status quo will more or less prevail, hence the widespread predictions for a one year rollover contract or similar for general practice next year.  When we look beyond that, the big strategic goal to bring primary care and community care closer together is highly unlikely to change.  This means more (not less) focus on groups of practices working together at PCN/neighbourhood scale, more focus on those groups working with other agencies across those neighbourhoods, and a continued shift away from any kind of focus of working at an individual practice level.

13
sep
0

Why Is Practice Sustainability Being Ignored?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

When even private providers start backing out of delivering the GP contract, as now Operose Health has done, it does point to a lack of sufficient funding in the contract.  Indeed, it begs the question as to how GP partnerships are able to make a living from the resources that are on offer.

The sustainability of GP practices is more precarious than it has ever been.  The 2019 contract has not served practices well, as it did not provide sufficient funding to cover the inflationary increases of recent years, and most practices are not set up to be able to make the most of the additional resources which are all going via PCNs.  We are now seeing real financial challenges biting in many practices.

The last time this happened in 2016 there was a national response in the form of GP forward view, which did inject some much needed additional funding into the service.  At least the government and NHS England felt the need to act.  Worryingly, we are seeing no such signs now.  The final 2 years of the 2019 contract were imposed on the service by NHS England.  Zero concern has been shown for the financial challenges this would inevitably cause practices.

Why is this situation being allowed to develop?  For as long as I can remember there has not been an imposed, non-agreed contract for general practice, and then suddenly we have two in a row.  What is behind this unwillingness to fund core general practice properly?

I can only hypothesise as to the cause.  The only reasons I can think of are these:

  1. The government may believe general practice has been overfunded. There exists a school of thought that general practice made money out of Covid and the vaccination programme in particular, that the 2019 contract has invested significant funds into the service at a time when very few areas were receiving any new funding, and that additional resources given to practices serve only to line the pockets of practice partners.  It may be that there are some in senior office who, incredulous as it may be to those trying to keep practices afloat, are genuinely holding onto this as a belief, which in turn has led to the lack of any additional monies coming into general practice.

 

  1. Policy makers may believe by squeezing funding at an individual practice level they can force practices to operate at larger scale. The Fuller Report action on supporting sustainability of primary care states, “Support primary care where it wants to work with other providers at scale, by establishing or joining provider collaboratives, GP federations, supra-PCNs or working with or as part of community mental health and acute providers” p36.  Maybe we have entered an era of stick not carrot for practices to operate at a larger scale, by reducing funding at the level of the individual practice and making the need for shared services unavoidable.

 

  1. It may be part of an agenda to nationalise general practice. We have seen politicians of both persuasions in recent months declare that the partnership model is coming to the end of its life and that new options need to be introduced. Equally we know that the NHS cannot afford to buy partners out of their existing contracts, and so maybe the plan is to make delivering the existing contract so unattractive and so financially difficult that they create an environment in which partners will choose to willingly give these contracts up.

 

  1. The centre may want to reduce the amount of funding that has to be transferred to ICBs when general practice funding shifts from national to local. Now there are some pretty big ifs included in this, but we know that the push from the Integrated Care Boards is for general practice funding to come via them (as evidenced by the Fuller Report and accompanying letter) as opposed to via the national contract.  If NHS England is seriously considering this it is likely to want to ensure the amount of funding it has to transfer is minimised, and so squeezing the contract ahead of any such transfer makes sense.

 

  1. Senior leaders may have confused integrating primary care with the sustainability of core general practice. The Fuller report is striking in that it works to solve a problem that general practice does not know it has (how it is ‘integrated’ with the rest of the system), and explicitly does not concern itself with the level of funding general practice requires (“the existing legislative, contractual, commissioning, and funding frameworks …were out of scope for this stocktake” p27).  Yet when asked what the plan for general practice is, senior leaders will always refer you to the Fuller report.  Somehow the sustainability question may have got lost underneath the current focus on access and neighbourhoods.

I cannot think of any other possible reasons (but do let me know if you can!), so it must be one or a combination of these reasons.  Generally faced with a choice between cock up and conspiracy I generally lean towards the former, as the top of the NHS is not well known for having (never mind delivering) clear strategies.  On the other hand the recent contract impositions and using parliament to enforce changes to the GP contract does seem to signify intention.

Whatever the cause, the reality is that practice sustainability is not a current priority for politicians and senior leaders.  If this does not change in the near future the number of practices getting into financial difficulties is going to escalate.  Maybe that is the point that we will find out the real reason behind the current situation.

6
sep
0

What is an Integrated Neighbourhood Team?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

This is one of those questions that you feel like you really ought to know the answer to, but I am finding it very difficult to pin down exactly what an integrated neighbourhood team is.

All of the presentations I have seen about integrated neighbourhood teams outline their aims rather than what they are.  I find this unhelpful because while it might describe the problem they are trying to solve it does not actually help me understand what they are.  What I am trying to understand is who is in the team? Who leads the team? Who does the team report to?  Who sets the work programme for the team? Where does the funding for the team come from? What is its relationship to the PCN?  These are the questions I struggle to get answers to.

Even the aims of these teams seem to vary somewhat, with (for example) some places claiming they will improve access to primary and community care for local citizens and others stating they will keep people well and out of hospital.  If each area is coming up with its own definition of what they will achieve it already seems highly unlikely that what they are will be consistent across the country.

Maybe the place to start is the Fuller Report where they were first introduced, as the “heart of the new vision for integrating primary care” (p6).  Despite their proposed importance, the report does not explicitly define what an integrated neighbourhood team is.  The closest it gets is stating that in neighbourhoods of 30-50,000 “teams from across primary care networks (PCNs), wider primary care providers, secondary care teams, social care teams, and domiciliary and care staff can work together to share resources and information and form multidisciplinary teams (MDTs) dedicated to improving the health and wellbeing of a local community and tackling health inequalities.”

I am not sure that clears it up for me.  I remain uncertain whether an integrated care team is a concept that is designed for local interpretation (and so will result in a whole range of different manifestations) or whether it is something more tangible that at some point in the future we will all be able to look at and immediately recognise as being an integrated neighbourhood team.  If it is the former surely that should be explicit, and surely each ICS would then be clearer on its own definition.

Here is what I am most uncertain about.  Are integrated neighbourhood teams supposed to take on the whole gamut of services that each of the member teams carry out?  So by that I mean if we are bringing primary care, social care, community care (etc) together does that mean we are bringing all of the work they do together (i.e. those services in totality)?  Or does it mean we are bringing work on the edges of each of their core functions together where there is overlap between them (e.g. individuals with multiple long term conditions, requiring community services, with social care needs)?

If the answer is the latter (and I remain unconvinced that there is consistency on this across ICSs) then it means the work of these teams is in addition to existing work.  We have the core work that each team is doing, and now we have the additional ‘joined-up’ work that is the remit of this new integrated neighbourhood team.  I understand the principle that by doing this additional joined up work together the overall work in the system may fall, e.g. less exacerbations of long term conditions, but there is no immediate reduction in the core function of the participating members of these new teams.

This would mean that the work in integrated neighbourhood teams is in addition to the day job for team members.  But what I haven’t seen is any significant funding streams for these new teams, so what am I missing?  Are PCNs the existing significant funding stream?  Is this what “evolving” PCNs into integrated neighbourhood teams means?

Integrated neighbourhood teams still feel conceptual rather than tangible to me.  Whilst at a national level I understand the desire to stimulate rather than stifle local innovation and therefore why you might start with something conceptual, what I don’t understand is the reticence to define what they actually are at a local level.  It feels like what integrated neighbourhood teams are and how they work will be a big deal for general practice in the future, and so it seems entirely reasonable that at this point we should be pushing for much clearer local definitions.

30
aug
2

Too Much Liability

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog2 Comments

One of the main arguments for giving up the independent contractor model is that the level of liability it requires partners to take on has become intolerably high.  Partners would be able to sleep much more easily in their beds at night if they were relieved of this burden in a nationalised model.  But is it really such a black and white choice?

Partners of GP practices take on unlimited liability.  This means that the costs of any successful claims against the practice that are not covered by any insurance that is in place will need to be met by the partners.  This includes via the personal funds and assets of the partners, i.e. including their homes and savings.

In recent years the level of exposure for individual partners has gone up.  There are less partners and so the total value of the businesses is divided between fewer individuals, making personal exposure higher.  Property costs have risen, which means as well as the buy-in costs being much higher now than 20 years ago so too are the associated liabilities.  And lurking away in the background is the risk that any individual partner may become the ‘last man standing’ and be left on their own holding all of the practice liabilities.

Then there is the emergence of PCNs.  Partners remain ultimately liable for the extended work that the PCN takes on (unless the PCN has incorporated), as well as for the actions of the much extended workforce with the introduction of the additional roles.

It is no surprise, then, that this level of liability facing individual GP partners is putting many new GPs off from the prospect of becoming a partner.  This is at just the time when the service desperately needs GPs to take on partnership roles.  So surely moving away from the independent contractor model and bringing GPs into the full indemnity protection of the NHS is the obvious solution?

But freedom to operate independently is a function of taking on liability.  If someone else is ultimately liable then it is their prerogative to determine the actions we must take.  Hence the lack of freedom that many hospital clinicians complain about when working in that environment.  The cost of not having the liability is giving up independence.

So is the independence worth it?  The questions for partners to consider is whether they are being properly compensated for the liabilities they are exposing themselves to, and whether they are prepared to give up the freedom that a reduction in their liability would mean?

But it does not have to be quite so black and white.  Outside of general practice things have evolved considerably.  Now when entrepreneurs in this country set up new companies, they do so under the protection of a limited company, which means their liability is always limited to the level of their capital contribution to the firm.   The personal assets of the entrepreneurs are protected.  Now while there are costs and complications of using a limited company model, traditional partnerships in other sectors such as accountants and solicitors have been replaced by limited liability partnerships, where the liability is similarly limited as for limited companies but with less technical complications.

At present limited liability partnerships are not permitted business vehicles for those holding a GMS or PMS contract.  This seems an archaic and unnecessary restriction, and one that it is encouraging to see the incoming Chair of the GPC already being vocal against.  Making technical changes that enable the liabilities that partners face to be in line with those faced by those working in other sectors feels is not just a step in the right direction, but one that is long overdue.

 

The level of liability that partners of GP practices are currently faced with is too great.  It is a problem that needs to be addressed, both to support existing partners and to make the profession more attractive to potential new entrants.  The most obvious solution is to enable GP practices to become limited liability partnerships.  A far less obvious solution, and one that would be both more expensive and disruptive to implement, would be to nationalise the service, and it makes no sense for the liability issue to be the main driver for such a move.

23
aug
0

Does the Independent Contractor Model Mean More or Less Resources for General Practice?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

One question that is largely ignored in the debate as to whether the independent contractor model has run its course for general practice is what the impact of its existence is on the totality of GP resources.  Does the model increase or decrease how much funding goes into the service?

This is a different question from that of whether sufficient resources are being invested into core general practice.  Overall underfunding aside, the question for today is whether the total amount invested would be more likely to go up or down if we were to move away from the independent contractor model.

At present there is national contract for general practice that is agreed with the BMA and the funding at a national level is then ringfenced.  Local areas can introduce local enhanced service contracts that are in addition to the national funding that has been agreed.  For the last two years there has been no negotiated agreement between the BMA and NHS England, but instead the agreement reached in 2019 has stood, and so there remains a ringfenced fund for the service.

Without the independent contractor model this national ringfencing of resources for general practice would be lost.  The funding instead would be transferred to local ICS areas, who would then in turn decide how much of that funding to pass on to general practice.  Or, the funding would go to the host organisation of local general practice, and they in turn would decide how much to pass on to the local practices.

Of course, in both these scenarios the amount passed on to general practice could be greater than the nationally identified total.  The ICS and local plans for a shift of resources from the acutes into primary and community care could result in an even greater investment in general practice, and should such a change occur I am sure promises of this ilk would be made.

However, it has long been a complaint of the system that when system savings have to be made (remember there is now a system financial control total that has to be delivered, rather than ones for individual organisations) that general practice has been exempt from taking “its share of the pain”, because of the way its national funding is protected.  Once this is removed it seems highly likely that cuts to general practice funding would form part of local financial recovery plans, given the system financial pressures that exist.

We have seen this scenario play out with community services many times over the years.  Originally acute and community services were in unified organisations, but were separated in many places when NHS trusts came into being because the resources intended for community services were being sucked in by the hospital services.  Even now as they start to come back together we are yet to see any big new investments into community services, and doubtless that wheel will have to turn again.

While the totality of the investment into general practice through the national contract is clearly lacking, the argument that this investment will be increased with a shift to a model of funding via the local NHS does not hold water.  The ringfencing would be lost, and the system pressure to use the funding elsewhere would be hard to resist.

If the independent contractor model was abandoned individual practices would no longer have the pressure to sustain themselves as organisations.  However, that pressure would still exist up the line at the level of a bigger and more distant organisation, and the most likely result would be a stripping of resources from local practices to meet a corporate cost pressure elsewhere.

16
aug
0

The Grass isn’t Greener

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

One of the questions I am most regularly asked is why I am so supportive of the independent contractor model of general practice.  Wouldn’t life be easier and simpler for GP partners if they were free to operate as clinicians, without the almost full time distraction of trying to run a small business?

For many the grass does look particularly green on the other side of the fence, where GPs as part of NHS organisations could work reasonable hours, take annual and sick leave like any other employee, and be free from all the stresses of income, cash, staff, property, and unreasonable partners.  Life looks like it would be so much simpler.

Why, then, do we prize the independent contractor model so highly?  Well, as with any situation where we are looking to move away from problems instead of towards something we want, life on the other side will always contain its own set of (albeit different) problems.

Peter Muchie summed it up really well when he described his own experience of making this transition,

“And then I surrendered my independent contractor status to become a salaried employee with an NHS out-of-hours service. To me this now equates to a surrender of power and the right to self-determination. I can no longer organise my work to best meet competing demands. I can no longer negotiate with equal partners, but must accept the impositions of a cost-cutting management which seems to work toward the lowest common denominator. I can no longer decide what to accept and reject…

I no longer have total freedom to develop my skills according to personal interest or to best meet the demands I perceive. I must instead undertake ordained ‘mandatory’ training on such delights as information governance, and diversity in the workplace. This is boring, irrelevant, and time-consuming, the main purpose appearing to be to protect the monolith for which I work, not to improve the care I give.

When I identify a real opportunity for workplace improvement I have no real power to address it. I pass it up a non-responsive bureaucratic chain to a distant and removed manager, focused on budgets and generalities. My concern is either ignored or cursorily acknowledged and placed at the bottom of a list of priorities with cost cutting, and not service improvement, at the top.” Peter Muchie, BJGP Should General Practice Give Up the Independent Contractor Status 2015.

It is easy to think that we would just turn up for work, see the patients we were asked to and then leave at the appointed hour.  But what we miss is how soul destroying this lack of autonomy will feel, how frustrating the constant interference of a middle manager with a corporate agenda and no insight into the needs of our population will be, and how being at the receiving end of decisions made at an organisational level many layers away will make us want to scream.

The independent contractor model offers freedom for practices to choose how they operate, to flexibly adapt to meet the needs of the patients they serve, and to respond quickly to any new situation that arises and requires action.  This has been a key strength of general practice, one that is not well understood, but one that would be lost if the model was replaced.  It not only enables practices to adapt and thrive in even the most testing circumstances, but also provides partners that Maslowian need for self-determination that a salaried model would take away forever.

9
aug
0

The Danger of Integrated Primary Care

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

General practice is currently being swept along on a tide of change, all based on the premise that what we need is ‘integrated primary care’.  But what is integrated primary care, and is it really what we need?

Despite the status of the Fuller Report not being clear when it was first published over a year ago, it is now being treated as the policy document for general practice.  If you ask anyone working in the system what the plan is for general practice they will say it is to implement the recommendations of the Fuller Report.  But when you read the Fuller Report it is a wordy document that is light on analysis and heavy on pushing ideas, with little clarity on how these new ideas will make things any better.

At the heart of all this lies the idea of integration.  We have moved away from the internal market and now have integrated care systems.  The four stated aims of this new system are to improve outcomes in population health and healthcare; tackle inequalities in outcomes, experience and access; enhance productivity and value for money; and help the NHS support broader social and economic development.  Having reiterated these aims Fuller states,

“The ICS CEOs believe that achieving these aims will only be possible if we support and develop a thriving integrated primary care system” p4.

And that is the only rationale that is given.  Primary care needs to be integrated because ICS CEOs believe that is what is needed, and this apparently should be enough because no other justification is given throughout the whole document.  All the NHS CEOs even put their signatures to the report, an act Fuller describes as, “an extraordinary and welcome display of common purpose across health and care” p3.

But could it be that the enthusiasm of the NHS CEOs for this report comes not from a passionate belief in unlocking the power of local communities, but rather because it would increase the span of their direct control to include primary care?  NHS CEOs do not like primary care because the independent contractor status prevents them being able to tell it what to do, so it is not surprising they are all in favour of any move to give them more control over it.  This hardly feels like a sound justification for making such major changes.

A key problem is that nowhere is ‘integrated primary care’ defined.  Without definitions we are in trouble because what I think it means, what you think it means, what Claire Fuller thinks it means, what the 42 NHS CEOs who signed the document think it means, and what the government think it means are all likely to be very different.

Does it mean primary care working effectively in partnership with local health, social care and voluntary sector colleagues in local neighbourhoods?  Does it mean general practice becoming a formal part of the NHS?  Does it mean GP practices becoming part of existing NHS organisations?  We know that this whole range of views already exists.

I am actually a fan of integration, where it means all health and social care providers working more closely together.  It makes sense.  But the notion of “integrated primary care” is actually very dangerous, because it is so nebulous.  It is behind the calls for the nationalisation of general practice, and the end of the independent contractor model.  It is an enabler for centralist CEOs who want to expand their empires.  It is also creating a system blindness to the challenges being faced at an individual practice level.

So what do we do?  In local conversations push for clarity as to what is trying to be achieved and how will we know that we have got there, before getting into the details of actions.  “Implementing Fuller” should not be an end in itself.  If we are implementing an integrated neighbourhood team then what success measures are we using?  What outcomes will it achieve?  Simply ticking the box that we have one does not constitute success.

Challenge the idea of integrated primary care when it is used without clarity of meaning, and push for a local definition that everyone can sign up to.  General practice can support integration, but it mustn’t come at the cost of the service itself.

2
aug
0

A Cause for Concern: the Government response to the HSCC Future of General Practice Report

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

One of the few slithers of hope that we have had in general practice in recent months came from the most unlikely source.  Jeremy Hunt, in his stint as the Chair of the Health and Social Care Committee, commissioned an Inquiry into the future of general practice, and the report the committee published was surprisingly sensible.

The report contained a call for the government to acknowledge the crisis general practice faces, to recognise and prioritise the importance of continuity of care, and to strengthen rather than undermine the partnership model.  You can read the full report here.

The report was published in October last year, and the usual requirement is for the government to respond to such reports within 2 months.  However, in an indication of what was to come, the response took 9 months to arrive, and if I was to use one word to summarise the response it would be “disappointing”.

Maybe it was unrealistic to have any expectation that the report would carry any real influence, but it did seem to have been championed by Jeremy Hunt, who then went on to become Chancellor of the Exchequer, so there were some legitimate grounds for hope.

Unfortunately, you don’t need to get far into the report to realise that it is going to result in no actual change of direction.  Recommendation 1 was that the government acknowledge there is a crisis in general practice.  The response?  The Department “partially accepts” this recommendation, only in so far as some people are facing challenges in accessing an appointment, and the Delivery Plan for Recovering Access to Primary Care has been published to address this.  And that’s it.  If the problem won’t be acknowledged, you can be pretty sure there will be no support to follow.

Essentially the response says that if you take the Fuller Report, the Plan for Recovering Access, the Hewitt Review and the Long Term Workforce Plan, everything that needs to be done for general practice is already being done, and no further action is required.

It explicitly rejects the call to prioritise continuity of care (the main call of the initial report), and responds with, “we note that continuity of care needs to be pursued alongside a parallel focus on access” p13.  The government’s prioritisation of access over continuity isn’t going anywhere soon.

In response to recommendation 26 that the government should reaffirm its commitment to the GP partnership model, it says “The Government confirms there is currently no policy to abolish the partnership model” p21, but then goes on to say, “we wish to support a range of models of primary care provision, including the partnership model”.

In the introduction to the report (p2) it goes a bit further and states, “Realising this broader vision may require significant changes to the way general practice operates and is contracted today. Over the course of the year, we aim to engage with the professions, patients, ICSs, and key stakeholders, on a broad range of themes including contracts, operating models, funding of GP IT and estates, to help inform how to shape general practice for the future.”

There is no doubt, it seems, that further change for general practice is on its way.  The document continually refers back to the Fuller Report as the blueprint for this change.  The Fuller report called for “national partners/DHSC and NHS England” to undertake changes to “the existing legislative, contractual, commissioning, and funding framework, which were out of scope for this stocktake”, and it looks like this process is about to begin.

What this response really highlights is that we are about to have a problem.  Its authors don’t believe a sustainability problem exists in general practice.   They do not value personal lists, continuity of care, or manageable list sizes.   Instead the issues they want to address are those of integration and access. This dissonance as to the issues that need to be tackled between the profession and policy makers is where the root of the conflict to come will lie.

26
jul
0

End of Contract ARRS Staff Planning

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

As the end of the 5 year contract draws closer, and with it the (potential) end of the PCN DES, it is time to ensure your PCN has a plan in place for the ARRS staff.

First of all, what are the questions the plan needs to answer?  Well the key ones are how to maximise the associated recurrent funding, how to ensure the staff are not lost to other providers, and what to do about the ‘additional’ funding that the PCN has contributed.  We should probably also try to work through any future issues that we might be able to foresee.

While NHS England has committed on a number of different occasions to ensuring that the cost of the ARRS staff is met recurrently regardless of what happens to the PCN DES post-March 2024, it has not been clear on how this will happen nor how the amount that will be reimbursed will be calculated.  But if history is anything to go by it seems likely that an arbitrary date will be given with relatively little notice (which could potentially come as early as December this year) and expenditure at that point used as the level that will be continued into the future.

Despite the obvious flaws in such a methodology, using actual committed expenditure seems a much more likely choice for NHS England than committing to the final allocation totals for each PCN.  While this would be a fairer and more equitable choice, it would be more expensive (as there remains an underspend on ARRS budgets) and as such is unlikely.

The recent NHS Long Term Workforce Plan indicated that further investment in additional roles would be at a much slower rate than we have seen over the 5 years of the PCN DES, only introducing half as many of the roles again over the next 13 years.  It therefore seems wise for PCNs to ensure that they are maximising the use of their allocation wherever possible.  Some PCNs have said they are not yet ready for any more roles, but this may be a decision they come to regret in years to come when additional funding for the roles has all but dried up.

Whilst PCNs have been recruiting ARRS roles at a breakneck pace in recent years, other community providers who have not received such extra funding have been looking on enviously.  It seems inevitable to me that once ‘integrated neighbourhood teams’ with a much wider community engagement than PCNs shape up there will be calls for the ARRS staff to take on more of a community centred role and less of a practice based one.

While ARRS staff have an important role to play in improving the health and outcomes of local neighbourhoods, through the PCN DES they were also given an important role in ensuring the sustainability of local practices.  Practices and PCNs would be wise to ensure staff are sufficiently embedded into the practice work alongside the PCN-wide work to make their extraction from it impractical.

An obvious concern is where funding for roles has been topped up with funds outside of the ARRS.  It may be that while the ARRS funding is made recurrent, other funding sources (such as the £1.50 core funding) could potentially cease.  PCNs can work out contingency plans for this scenario, beyond hoping for replacement funding sources.  It may be that ARRS staff are deployed in the delivery of services that are income generating and unlikely to stop (such as enhanced access).  This funding could then be used for any excess beyond the ARRS.

Alternatively it may be that the roles can be redeployed out of existing PCN work and into more focussed practice activities.  Practices may be prepared to fund any additional cost of the roles as is, but this would be more likely if they had more direct control over their time and deployment.

Other factors to bear in mind are the push for NHS terms and conditions for these staff, the move to bring primary and community care workforce planning together, and the expectations those involved in Integrated Neighbourhood Teams (whatever these end up being) may have for ARRS staff outside of GP practices.

The key point from all of this is that working this through now, and coming up with a clear plan to mitigate the risks and maximise the longer term impact of these roles is likely to pay significant dividends beyond March next year.

19
jul
0

Are we simply waiting for PCNs to pass?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

For those who have been around a long time it is hard not to get cynical, as every couple of years there is a new scheme for general practice that is heralded as the big ‘new thing’ but then fizzles out, and disappears as quickly as it arrived.  Are we not headed the same way with PCNs, and so shouldn’t we be keeping our heads down and simply focussing on the day job?

Bear with me as I take a short trip through recent history.  Back in the early 1990s (voluntary) GP fundholding was introduced, but no sooner had it been embraced by more than half of the practices across the country than it became politically unpopular over concerns of a two-tier service, and it was quickly abolished by the incoming Labour government in 1998.  By this point some practices had become heavily invested in the scheme and its removal represented something of a kick in the teeth.

The Blair government replaced GP fundholding with primary care groups (PCGs).  Here groups of practices were to work together to provide the universal coverage that fundholding had not, with the idea of an indicative budget at each practice level.  However, by 2001 these PCGs were deemed too small and it was announced they were to be replaced by a smaller number of larger more powerful Primary Care Trusts (PCTs), who it was hoped would have more purchasing power.

Of course this meant practices were once again removed from any actual commissioning decisions, and so practice based commissioning was introduced in 2005.  This quickly came beset by implementation challenges, and was ultimately itself replaced (having never really taken off) by Clinical Commissioning Groups (CCGs) when the now infamous Health and Social Care Act was published in 2012.

The death knell for CCGs was sounded in 2016 when Sustainability and Transformation Plans were introduced, as the NHS started on its journey towards integration.  Even though they limped on until the latest Health and Social Care Act had been passed in 2022 they had already effectively been replaced by Integrated Care Boards.

It is not surprising, then, that against such a backdrop of continuous change that many practices are sceptical about Primary Care Networks (PCNs) and their chance of any long or even medium term sustainability.  PCNs were introduced as part of the 5 year GP contract in 2019, immediately after the publication of the NHS Long Term Plan in January of that year, and face an uncertain future as that particular contract draws to an end.

However, when it comes to PCNs there are some important differences.  One is that all the previous incarnations were attempts to place primary care at the centre of the purchasing arm of the internal market model.  PCNs, in contrast, are the first attempt to enable general practice to integrate with the wider system, in this new way of NHS working.

While there were always arguments about the scale required for effective commissioning, there is less debate about the scale needed for integration.  All seem to agree that integration has to start at the local neighbourhood level, and even if you consider Labour’s current shadow health policy they are promoting a ‘neighbourhood health service’.  The pseudo-primary care policy that is the Fuller Report recommends integrated ‘neighbourhood’ teams.

The concerns with PCNs seems to be less about their scale and more about the extent to which they have enabled wider integration.  The debate is also as much about the independent contractor status of general practice (something that never really featured during the purchaser provider era) as it is about PCNs, as this status is regarded as a blocker to integration.

Here is where we get into the real difference of the current situation.  Previously the changes were nothing to do with the core delivery of general practice, but attempts to harness practices as commissioners.  Now the changes are attempts to join up core general practice with the rest of the NHS.  It is not scale that policy makers want to change (the size of PCNs seem about right to them), but the function of general practice behind that scale.

This is important because while for the past 20 or so years a strategy of ‘watch and wait for the latest fad to pass’ has been largely successful, there are warning signs now that such a strategy for individual practices could result in some very unwelcome changes at practice level.

12
jul
1

The Missed Opportunity of PCNs

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

The requirements imposed on practices by PCNs can feel cumbersome and unmanageable.  It is already difficult for practices to cope with all the demands of the core contract, without having the extra demands of the PCN to contend with.  But is there an opportunity in PCNs that many practices are missing?

Most practices have grappled with the question of what is the right size for the practice.  The average practice list size now stands at over 8,500 patients, and there are about 6,500 GP practices.  Over time, the list size is getting larger and the total number of practices is falling.  The financial, workforce and workload challenges faced by individual practices pushes them to need to operate in bigger units to ensure a critical size of workforce is in place and to manage costs effectively.

As a result, many practices consider merger.  Mergers (in theory) allow a larger, more flexible workforce, a stronger and more resilient leadership team, and the opportunity to create back office economies of scale as well as efficiencies in how services are delivered.

But the reality with mergers is that simply merging on its own does not create these benefits.  Delivery of these benefits requires considerable hard work beyond the challenge of merging in the first place.  Indeed, there are many merged practices where not only have none of these benefits been realised, but there is now also an additional tension (and sometimes open hostility) between the two sides that merged which makes the day to day experience of working much more unpleasant than it was previously.

As a result there are many practices with list sizes of well under 10,000 that will not countenance the idea of merger, and will (rightly) point to the strong, cohesive culture they have in their practice and the fantastic results this generates both in experience and outcomes for their patients.

The question, then, is whether there is another way for practices to experience the benefits of operating at greater scale, without having to take the often irreversible step of merging?

This is where PCNs (potentially!) come in.  Could we consider PCNs not as a contractually-imposed burden that redirects both time and resources away from the core contract, but rather as an opportunity to work at-scale with our surrounding practices and explore how the benefits of joint working can be realised free from the legal tethers of merger while at the same time maintaining our individual practice identities?

Prior to PCNs there was no such option available.  But PCNs have a leadership resource, an additional staffing budget, and additional income generating opportunities all in one place.  The PCN construct allows practices to work together and share the potential benefits within a light touch governance framework, and with (crucially) the ability for each practice to maintain its own practice culture and way of working.

The opportunity existing does not mean it is easy to take (as evidenced by the lived experience of many PCNs across the country).  The need to develop trust and build a willingness to cede individual decision making on certain issues is required for a merger to succeed, and this is equally the case in PCNs.  The investment in relationships that successful mergers require is not negated by the maintenance of practice boundaries within a PCN.  PCNs increase in effectiveness as the level of trust grows.

The environment that GP practices are in is tough and it is not going to become more supportive of individual practices any time soon.  There is still at least 9 months of PCNs to go, and most likely another 12 months on top of that, and so now may be the last chance for practices to start working together to make the most of the opportunity that these unique constructs present.

5
jul
0

What does the NHS Workforce Plan Mean for General Practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The NHS Long Term Workforce Plan was finally published last week.  It came in at a meaty 151 pages, but what does it mean for general practice?

Well as with most NHS documents, there is a lot of talk and sell and so it is not easy to get underneath what is actually written.  Equally, it is important to consider what is not being said as well as what is in the document.  But despite all that there are some important takeaways for general practice, as well as clues as to what is planned for the future.

There is no mention of the previously promised 5,000 (which became 6,000) additional GPs.  However, the current problem is at least acknowledged, “the model assumes some boost in GP numbers as a result of interventions in recent years, but the projected growth over the long term fails to keep up with expected demand. In 2022/23 the overall FTE GP workforce (including GPs in training) grew by 1.4%; however, there were 512 (1.8%) fewer FTE fully qualified GPs in April 2023 compared to April 2022. The shortfall in fully qualified GPs is projected to be around 15,000 by 2036/37 without intervention” p35.

The plan to close this gap appears to be threefold.  First to train more GPs:

“To meet the demand for GPs, this Plan outlines a need to increase the number of GP specialty training places by 45–60% by 2033/34. Our ambition is to increase the number of places by 50% to 6,000 by 2031/32. In 2018 the government expanded the number of medical school places by 1,500 and the first of these graduates are now starting to join the workforce. This Plan commits to initially growing GP specialty training by 500 places in 2025/26, timed so that more of these newly qualifying doctors can train in primary care. Further expansion of GP specialty training places will then take place with 1,000 additional places (5,000 in total) in 2027/28 and 2028/29. This will offer the same opportunity to a bigger pool of doctors graduating as a result of the increase in undergraduate places outlined in this Plan.” p41

Second, the use of more specialty and associate specialist (SAS) doctors, with a modelled increase “particularly targeted” towards general practice.  Third, to continue the introduction of new roles into general practice.  The document contains this very interesting paragraph about the ARRS:

“In general practice, we will seek to extend the success of the Additional Roles Reimbursement Scheme (ARRS), which has delivered an additional 29,000 multiprofessional roles in primary care. This would build extra capacity and free up available appointments by increasing the number of non-GP direct patient care staff by around 15,000 and primary care nurses by more than 5,000 by 2036/37.” p95

Extending the success of the scheme is not quite the same as extending the scheme, but it does point to there being some continued growth of funds for additional roles into the future (albeit at a much slower rate, introducing approximately half as many new staff again over an extended 13 year time period).

This also appears to be separate from a further increase in “personalised care roles”, with this expansion quantified as follows (p98):

  • Care co-ordinators: Increase from over 4,000 current posts (September 2022) to 12,000 by 2036/37
  • Health and wellbeing coaches: Increase from over 1,000 current posts (September 2022) to 6,000 by 2036/37
  • Social prescribing link workers: Increase from over 3,000 current posts (September 2022) to 9,000 by 2036/37
  • Peer support workers (mental health services) 4,730 staff in post by the end of 2023/24. Extend growth so there are over 6,500 by 2036/37 (NHS Mental Health Implementation Plan)

Whether or not this is the same thing being reported twice is unclear, but the promised increases do not match up so they could well be separate.  It may also point to a future separation of these personalised care roles from the other roles within the ARRS.

We also get a hint in the document that plans are being developed behind the scenes to bring general practice and the delivery of community services much closer together.  It states, “ICSs will be encouraged to work with partners to support the recommendations of the Fuller Stocktake for innovative employment models and adoption of NHS terms and conditions in primary care” p62.  This does have the feel of wanting general practice to come under the wider NHS umbrella, which would suggest a move away from the independent contractor model (although our current understanding of this is that it will be an option as opposed to mandatory).

It also talks about bringing primary and community care workforce development together, “In 2023/24, NHS England will work with partners to develop a national, multiprofession, integrated community and primary care core capability and career framework to support workforce development” p67.  Whether this is to be applied via PCNs, integrated neighbourhood teams, or some other form remains to be seen.

What appears to be most lacking from the document is any concrete plan to deal with the retention of staff that has proved the biggest challenge in general practice in recent years.  Despite the widespread strike action by NHS staff there is no commitment to improve pay.  There is no recognition that much of the cultural problems in the NHS come from the top and how performance management and regulation are implemented.  Instead, when it comes to retention, the document is full of platitudes like,

“However, there is much more to do to make progress through systematic improvements to recruitment and promotion practices, leadership diversity, disciplinary processes, governance and accountability, and training and education. The NHS must embed a compassionate culture built on civility, respect and equal opportunity” p60

Overall, the document does consistently recognise the increasing role that general practice will have to play in the NHS in future, and has some welcome plans to increase training and capacity.  But as we have seen over the last few years increasing the numbers coming in only helps if we can reduce the numbers leaving, and there is precious little to suggest that this will be changing any time soon.

28
jun
0

PCNs are not the Enemy

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

There is a lot of hate for PCNs at the moment.  Not least the BMA which has just produced its “call to action for general practice” (essentially its wish list for the new contract) and in which it says, “Because it has proven to be a failed project that results in a postcode lottery for patients and patchy staff recruitment for providers, abolish the PCN DES and move all funding and resources into core GMS”.

This is pretty harsh, not least for the thousands of GPs who have worked over the last 5 years in Clinical Director or leadership roles to make PCNs a success.  And (whatever the BMA says) PCNs have not been all bad.  The problem has been an underinvestment in core general practice, not anything that PCNs have or have not done.

The struggles of general practice pre-date PCNs.  Back in 2016, as many of you will recall, the government of the day produced the GP Forward View, which sought to address the challenges general practice was facing.  At the same time I reviewed the options available to practices to create a sustainable future.  Long story short, the main things practices could do was work at scale, introduce new roles, and build partnerships with other organisations in the health care system.

The interesting thing about PCNs is that they provide the opportunity for practices to do each of these things.  They create an infrastructure for practices to work together and achieve the benefits of scale without having to merge, they provide a (fully funded) route into introducing new roles, and they enable a wider set of supportive partnerships with other healthcare organisations to be built that would be much more difficult at the level of the individual practice.

So while I understand the challenges of practices with different cultures working together, and the frustration that all the investment for general practice not coming directly causes, that does not mean that PCNs are all bad, or that there are not opportunities for core general practice within them.

Right now there is precious little support available for practices.  A new contractual requirement has been imposed to respond to patient contacts to the practice on the same day.  Whilst maybe we shouldn’t expect support from the government or NHS England, they simply announced the change on the day it was made driving a slew of calls to practices from patients demanding their “right” to be seen that day be upheld.

The BMA’s response has been to push their safe working guide for general practice.  This is essentially a call for practices to do the contractual equivalent of work to rule as a response to the imposition of the contract changes.  It includes limits such as a maximum of 25 patient contacts per day and 15 minute appointments, with the unmet demand being either referred to 111, A&E or placed on a waiting list.  For many practices deprioritising the needs of their patients in this way is not something they are prepared to do.

The relatively newly formed Integrated Care Boards remain in flux and the majority are able to provide precious little support to practices.  They push the access agenda locally but when it comes to offering tangible support very little has been forthcoming.

All of which (somewhat ironically) means that for most practices right now the major and most fruitful source of practical support is their own PCN.  The best source of support for general practice is general practice, and PCNs provide a simple (and resourced) framework that enables this.  Across PCNs practices can share learning, experiences, ways of working and even, through the ever increasing ARRS teams, staff.  They can access resources to make changes.  They can build shared infrastructure where it can make a difference to local practice delivery.  They can free up leadership time to provide support where it is most needed.

At a time when general practice is under such significant pressure it is not helpful for the service to turn on itself.  PCNs are not the enemy of general practice.  The partnership model seems unlikely to be able to continue on its own, and if PCNs are not in place to support it then the alternatives look a whole lot worse.

21
jun
0

How likely is it that PCNs will go?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Many PCNs are finding themselves increasingly hamstrung by the lack of certainty as to what is coming next.  We know the 5 years of the PCN DES comes to an end in March next year, and so the question that many have is whether it is worth investing time and effort into the PCN given the chance that things may all change again in a little over 9 months’ time.

Life for PCN Clinical Directors, managers and leaders is difficult enough, without having this additional uncertainty to contend with.  But how real is this uncertainty, and how likely is it that PCNs will be replaced by something new in just a few months’ time?

The first place to start is the wider NHS environment.  The NHS has entered the new world of Integrated Care Systems (ICSs).  It is fair to say that even those working in these new bodies are finding it hard to fully get their heads round what they are supposed to be doing, but the government’s response to the Hewitt report on ICSs suggests that they are going to remain the overall direction of travel for the NHS into the foreseeable future.

ICSs are premised on all of the different parts of the NHS system working together in partnership to improve the delivery of care for patients. General practice is one of these system parts.  Historically the system has found it impossible to partner with the 7000+ GP practices across the country, which was the main driver behind the introduction of what is now 1250 PCNs around neighbourhood areas.

Given the ongoing push for partnership working across the NHS, it therefore seems highly unlikely that there will be a rowing back from the joint working between practices that PCNs have created.  While this will undoubtedly be much to the disappointment of the many GPs and practices who dislike the requirement to work with other practices through PCNs, this unpopularity will not result in a national reversion to practices as the primary unit for the delivery of resources into general practice.

Instead what we will most likely see is a move to strengthen the joint working between practices across neighbourhood areas that has been developed over the last 5 years by PCNs.

The question is whether this will remain as PCNs per se, or whether these will be changed into something else.  The biggest clue we have as to that question is in the Fuller Report, which states that PCNs are to “evolve into” integrated neighbourhood teams.  It describes these in this way,

“This is usually most powerful in neighbourhoods of 30-50,000, where teams from across primary care networks (PCNs), wider primary care providers, secondary care teams, social care teams, and domiciliary and care staff can work together to share resources and information and form multidisciplinary teams (MDTs) dedicated to improving the health and wellbeing of a local community and tackling health inequalities.” Fuller report p6.

The Fuller report was published over a year ago, and yet still now no one seems any the wiser as to what an integrated neighbourhood team actually is.  While many ICSs have groups looking at this, the timescale set in the report that these integrated neighbourhood teams would up and running in the “Core20PLUS5 most deprived areas by April 2023” has clearly been missed.

The key question appears to be whether an integrated neighbourhood team replaces the PCN, i.e. once there is an integrated neighbourhood team there is no longer a PCN, or whether the PCN represents the group of GP practices that are participating as a group in the local integrated neighbourhood team, which has a much wider group of participants than the PCN.  This latter option appears to be the one being adopted by those places that do claim already to have integrated neighbourhood teams (e.g. Suffolk).

So it would seem that the most likely outcome is that PCNs remain.  Even Labour’s health policy, despite all the noise they have made around nationalising general practice, is to create a “Neighbourhood Health Service”, which very much looks like it has PCNs at the centre.  In fact, given the current policy environment, it is hard right now to envision a future in which there is not something PCN-shaped that continues to be the conduit for the majority of additional resources coming into general practice.

While none of us know for sure what the future holds, it does seem a safe bet that NHS England and the government will want to build on the progress they have made through PCNs beyond March 2024.  There is a chance that the name will change (it is still the NHS after all), but it seem extremely unlikely that the scale of working will alter as there have been no pointers in any other direction.  The pressure for the PCN unit to build more effective partnerships with system partners will undoubtedly grow, but the core unit of the group of practices as a PCN seems destined to remain.

Given this, the most sensible course for practices right now is to continue to invest in the PCN, and ensure that the collection of practices that form the PCN are as solid and secure as possible so that they are as ready as they can be for whatever the evolution is that they will have to collectively face next year.

7
jun
0

What Happens After We Make a Change?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Many practices are in the process of making changes to the way their access systems work right now, in response to the contractual changes imposed upon them this year.  But what happens after a change has been made?  What doe we need to do to make the most of the changes we are making?

Once a change has been made the worst thing you can do is file it in the “finished” folder and move on to whatever is next.  Nicola Bateman carried out research following the various stages of an improvement activity and considered the different outcomes in terms of the sustainability at each phase.  She found that any initial gains can be lost, and that there are three actions that determine longer term success, post the initial implementation of a change.

The first action is to stick with the new way of working.  It is quite common for  a new way of working to be introduced, but then when problems occur, or resistance from certain individuals becomes too high, the new system is abandoned and things revert to the way they were previously.  Any gains initially achieved are quickly lost.

The second important action is to close out any technical issues.  So for example when we change our access systems the messages on the telephone system may need tweaking until they are right, or the allocation of slots to different clinicians may need to be adapted so that it matches real demand, or the training and support the reception staff need to be effective as care navigators may need to be updated so that the best possible use of the available capacity can be made (etc).

However, we often introduce a change and do not make time to resolve the technical issues that inevitably occur when we are trying something for the first time.  This limits any improvement we will see from a change to that which is achieved at the point of the initial implementation.  It is hard making changes, so when we invest time in doing so we need to make the most we can out of the new system.  It is worth closing out any technical issues to maximise the overall benefit.

The third action is to work on continuously improving the new system.  While the second action is about closing out any issues preventing the newly identified way of working from being as effective as it can be, this action is about finding new changes that can make it work even better.  So, for example, if we take the case of St Lawrence Surgery in Worthing they found that having a clinician physically based alongside the patient services team undertaking the care navigation made the system work even better for them.

What do we need to do to make sure that continuous improvement takes place?  The research identifies a number of specific enablers.

The first is making sure the whole team is bought in to and understand the changes that are being made.  Taking time to work through the resistance (that there will inevitably be) from certain quarters, and ensuring that everyone, especially those not directly involved in the design of the change, is fully aware of the new ways of working is vital.

The second enabler is making sure the change is part of an overall strategic direction for the practice.  Where does the practice ultimately want to get to with access?  This prevents the change being a one-off reaction to a contractual change, and makes it a step towards wherever it is the practice wants to get to.

The final enabler is making sure that all of the partners in the practice are bought into and involved in the change, that they visibly support it, and that there is a clearly identified lead for coordinating both this change and the ongoing improvement work.  This level of focus from the top creates clarity across the practice and helps build a culture of continuous improvement.

Ultimately, it is often not the change itself that determines the overall level of improvement that is achieved, but the way the change is made.

31
may
0

How the PCN Practice Relationship Has to Change

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The focus on access in this year’s contract mean that the relationship between PCNs and their member practices need to change.  The PCN leadership needs to take on a much more supportive role while practices must become more active in shaping the work of the PCN.

Things are different this year.  Despite the government’s claims that it has simply imposed year 5 of the existing contract, the reality is it hasn’t.  They took legislation through parliament to be able to change the core GP contract, which placed a new requirement on practices to respond to contacts made by patients on the day the contact is made (full details here).

What has then happened is that PCN funding has been used to support the change.  The IIF has largely been scrapped, being reduced to just five indicators worth £59 million, with the remaining IIF-committed funding of £246m for 2023/24 now becoming a Capacity and Access Payment.

‘National Capacity and Access Support Payment: 70% of funding (£172.2m) will be unconditionally paid to PCNs, proportionally to their Adjusted Population, in 12 equal payments over the 2023/24 financial year’ (PCN DES).

This is not really unconditional money.  It is money to enable practices to make the changes they need to become compliant with the new terms of the contract (without that ever having explicitly been said).

There are some explicit overlaps, e.g. the contractual requirement for practices to use digital telephony and its inclusion within the PCN access improvement plan.  Indeed, the PCN plan has to, “set out the current position across the PCN, by each practice in the PCN, according to the table below” according to the NHSE guidance.  The capacity and access work of the PCN is (intentionally) inextricably linked to the introduction of the imposed contract changes on individual practices.

The payment of the remainder of the IIF money, i.e. the other 30% of the national capacity and access support payment, is based on the PCN demonstrating improvements made by its practices in this area, e.g. have all the practices scheduled a date to shift to digital telephony, are all the practices accurately recording appointments.

This represents a pretty fundamental shift.  In the past the dynamic between PCNs and practices was essentially one where the PCN led the delivery of work, and this work was supported by the member practices.  For example the PCN had to ensure that all the care homes were receiving regular ward rounds, and each of the practices had to play their part.  Or the PCN had to ensure the IIF indicators were being delivered and each practice had to play its part.  But each time the responsibility lay with the PCN, and the practices had very much a support role.

This feels different.  For one thing, how on the day demand is managed during core hours is very much core contractual work for practices, which up until now had very much been none-of-the-PCN’s-business.  All of a sudden how practices are run has become of mutual concern.  And the funding to enable practices to deliver their (albeit new) contractual requirements is being given to the PCN (via the capacity and access payment), when previously core contractual funding had always come directly to the practices.

For this work, it is hard to see how the common PCN-led, practice-supported model of delivery is going to be effective.  PCNs can’t for example be telling practices how to run their on the day demand, or demanding project plans from each of their practices.

Instead the PCN delivery model needs to change, and become one that is more practice-led and PCN-supported.  There can be rich learning across practices within a PCN as to how they do things and what works and what does not.  There can be mutual support from practices who have introduced digital telephony sharing the opportunities and pitfalls with those doing it for the first time.  There can be practice-led conversations as to how ARRS staff need to be deployed to enable the right range of care navigation opportunities for them to be able to meet their contractual responsibilities, which the PCN can support.

This year’s changes mean the relationship between PCNs and practices needs to evolve, with the PCN leadership taking on a much more supportive and enabling role, creating a sharing and learning environment, while practices become much more active in designing and shaping the specific changes that need to be made.

24
may
0

Is it Time to Make our Practices PCN-sized?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

As the direction of travel looks more and more like it is PCN-shaped and geared towards general practice at bigger scale, should practices within a PCN be considering whether remaining as separate entities is really the best course of action?

There are some heavy hints in the Delivery Plan for Recovering Access to Primary Care document that whatever comes next will be a further push to at-scale working in general practice, in particular the rather unambiguous, “Integrating primary care requires general practice to operate at a larger scale either as part of PCNs or at place level” (p41).

Whatever comes next, don’t expect it to be an end to PCNs and a reversion to receiving funding directly at a practice level.  What is clear is that the wider NHS integrated care agenda is seeking to create bigger, more partnership-friendly units of general practice, and this is not going to change simply because PCNs are not hugely popular with core general practice.

We don’t know the detail of what is coming next.  I don’t think anybody does, even NHS England.  But I do think there are some principles that we can be relatively sure of, and these are that whatever changes are agreed (or imposed) they will be supporting at-scale general practice, more local commissioning of general practice (i.e. less via the national contract), and enabling easier partnerships between general practice and other local providers.

What can practices do now?  Is there anything, because the uncertainty as to what is coming next can be stifling, and indeed for many is creating a reluctance to take any action at all.

I think this is a mistake.  What we have is 10 months of certainty, as we know exactly what is in this year’s contract.  By now we know what we are doing with PCNs (by and large), and so there is almost a sense of this year being the calm before the (next) storm. To me this represents the perfect opportunity to make any big or strategic changes that the practice is considering.

What would these changes be?  Well, the most obvious change is for practices within a PCN to merge and become a single practice.  At present the PCN funding, and ARRS staffing, is separate from practice funding and staffing.  Except it is not in those practices that are single practice PCNs.  In those practices what happens is the PCN requirements simply become another part of the practice’s contractual requirements, and the practice is able to use all of the resources (funding and staffing) as flexibly as it wishes to meet the totality of the requirements.

You can listen in to the Swan practice/PCN explaining how it works for them as a single practice PCN here.  It was no accident that the case study used on p41 of the Access Recovery Plan discussing the future of general practice is that of the Foundry – another single practice PCN.

While I understand the challenges that merging practices creates, and the resistance that many GPs have to the loss of individual autonomy that comes with it, I am not convinced that practices can continue to be sustainable whilst PCN funding and core practice funding remain separate.  Bringing the two together feels like a smart move because of how it enables a longer term sustainability for the practice.  It certainly seems preferable to that funding (PCN, or whatever its successor is) being held by an NHS provider, and the practice constantly having to fight to access it (which seems like one of the alternatives being considered).

It is true we do not know what the future holds, and so there is always an element of risk.  But doing nothing also contains risks, and given that we know the funding flow is much more likely to be PCN-shaped than practice-shaped, making our practices PCN-shaped while we still have the chance feels like an option we should be giving much more time to considering.

17
may
0

What do the Changes to GMS Contract Symbolise?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

This year the government took the unusual step of laying legislation before parliament to change the core GMS contract.  Why would they do this, and what does it mean for general practice?

In 2019 a 5 year deal was agreed between the GPC and NHS England.  Pressures on the service, in large part brought about by inflation running at over 10%, meant the GPC has tried to renegotiate this contract (without success) in the last 2 years.  The result has been the negotiated terms of the 2019 agreement have been imposed on the service without agreement.

But this year that is not the only thing that happened.  The publication of the core GMS contract was delayed, and it turns out this was because the government laid legislation before parliament to make changes to the core GMS contract that came into effect on the 15 May.

These changes are in relation to access, and stipulate how practices are to respond to contacts made by their patients.  The GPC have summarised the changes here if you have not seen them.

Why would the government choose to take the unusual step of putting legislation before parliament to change the core GMS contract?

We can only speculate as to the motivation, but it may have been because the only way of the government directing general practice is through the contract.  The GPC had refused to negotiate any changes, but (it turns out) it is within the government’s gift to use parliamentary legislation to make any changes it wants to the core contract.

Of course, changes to the core contract are only meaningful if they are enforced by local commissioners (i.e. the ICBs).  The way that contract management takes place does vary around the country, but generally commissioners try and partner with general practice rather than use heavy handed contract management techniques.  An important question is whether this legislative change will in turn lead to a much heavier handed contract management approach by local ICBs.  Only time will tell if this is the case, but more local disputes seem inevitable.

Meanwhile, the legislative change has already (unsurprisingly) provoked a backlash from the profession.  The GPC response has been to reassert their safe working guidance, which is to move to 15 minute appointments, undertake a maximum of 25 patient contacts per day, and to introduce a waiting list system for appointments.   It says, “any excess demand beyond this being signposted to other settings such as 111, overflow hubs, or urgent treatment centres. This is permitted within the contract which says that patients should be offered assessment of need or be signposted to an appropriate service”.

As ever, the combative BBO LMC have been quick out of the gates in offering guidance to their practices.  You can find it here, and it is unsurprisingly defensive in light of the contractual nature of the change being imposed.   They believe the contractual changes, “will likely result in practices diverting extremely large numbers of patients to 111 and A&E for fear of being held in contract breach, due to the unclear meaning of this clause’.

So it is already clear that imposing contractual changes is not going to lead to service improvement.  This has not happened in the past and it won’t happen now.  It is simply creating bad blood, and a hardening of respective positions, when what the service really needs is support.

Much of the reaction to the Delivery Plan for Recovering Access to General Practice has centred on whether the changes will indeed improve access, and is using that as a marker to determine the value of the paper.  But this misses the fundamental problem that creating a focus on access into general practice deepens the discord between what the government consider the purpose of general practice to be (easy access for patients) and what the profession considers its own purpose to be.  If you haven’t already please read Jonathan Tomlinson’s recent publication The Future of Primary Care – Threats and Opportunities, in which he surmises, “The value of general practice is health gain achieved, illness prevented and, holding-work – the supportive partnerships that enable patients with long-term conditions, especially mental illnesses, to keep going”, which, he argues, is undermined by the detrimental impact on relationship-based care that the ‘taskification’ of general practice work across a team creates.

It also sidesteps (ignores?) the key issue of the pressure created by the funding cuts to the service because of the government’s refusal to at least match inflation.  The document itself is clearly not (as it is sometimes referred to) a recovery plan for general practice.  It is explicitly a delivery plan for recovering access to general practice.  These are two different things, and the concern is that one may be at the expense of the other.

The changes to the GMS contract demonstrate the clear lack of a national relationship between the service and the government, and potentially mark a shift towards a more combative, contract-based style of interaction.  This is not good for general practice.  It will inevitably lead to tensions at a local level.  With the GPC talking about industrial action, and NHS England talking about ‘longer term reform’, my fear is things may get worse before they get better.

10
may
0

The Delivery Plan for Recovering Access to Primary Care

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Six months after the Chancellor first announced it, the ‘Delivery Plan for Recovering Access to Primary Care’ was finally published.

It is a national document which aims to solve the problem that is access to general practice.  It does this by using the preferred NHS methodology of identifying a one size fits all solution, and then trying doing everything possible to impose it across the service.

This solution is termed ‘Modern General Practice Access’.  What it is is essentially encouraging online contact with the practice using an online tool.  If anyone rings up or walks in the same tool should be used and completed by receptionist.  The forms should then be assessed by a care navigator who should direct appointments to the most appropriate service or team.

The document describes this Modern General Practice Access as having three components: better digital telephony, simpler online requests, and faster navigation, assessment and response (p20).  We have already seen the focus on these areas in the PCN DES.  Practices are all to use the NHS App, introduce digital telephony and there will also be a new group of fully funded online consultation products available from July 2023 (p25).

The model relies heavily on effective care navigation.  Those of you with medium term memories will recall this featured as a key part of the 2016 GP Forward View, which resulted in limited uptake across the service.  Nevertheless NHS England, “will invest in a new National Care Navigation Training programme for up to 6,500 staff, rolling this out from May 2023” (p26).

The problems in general practice run deeper than simply how calls are managed at 8am.  Capacity is undoubtedly a problem.  The document tries to claim that capacity has increased by 44% since 2019 (p10), but of the 34,700 additional staff that are delivering patient care 32,200 are ARRS or administrative staff.  Meanwhile the claimed number of additional GPs (an extra 2,200) includes doctors in training, and the reality is that the number of fully trained doctors has gone down. No additional capacity is provided as part of this plan (forgive my scepticism that simply writing ‘more new doctors’ actually means anything).

There is no new funding.  There is simply funding that has been ‘re-targeted’.  Bear in mind that inflation has not been funded in general practice for over 2 years, which means that at an individual practice level this is all taking place in the context of less overall funding.

There are nods to estates (‘government will update planning obligations guidance to ensure that primary care infrastructure is addressed by local planning authorities as they do for other infrastructure demands, such as education’ p33) and bureaucracy (where they are going to be “Building on the Bureaucracy Busting Concordat”!), and there is even mention of a national communications campaign.  But nothing that makes you believe anything will be any different this time.

So essentially there is no new money, no additional capacity, and nothing tangible.  There is only ‘Modern General Practice Access’ and some contractual changes.  What, then, is the plan for getting this one size fits all solution implemented across the service?

The answer to this come at the end of the document, where we get into performance management.  First, expect NHS England to hold ICBs to account for delivery (“ICBs are accountable to NHS England for the commissioning of general practice services and delivery against the contract”).  Accountability won’t stop there.

Next, a reminder that contractual and financial levers have been put in place, “To reinforce the ICB role as commissioner and in driving improvement, each element of the plan is supported by one or a combination of: (i) a new 2023/24 contract requirement; (ii) a new 2023/24 contractual incentive; (iii) reprioritised national funding; (iv) greater transparency of outcomes at system, PCN and practice level; or (v) the ability to leverage the existing standard trust contract” (p36).  This is code for, ‘we expect ICBs to manage GP contracts’.

Finally there will be ‘transformation support’, in the form of a National General Practice Improvement Programme (p38), which will include an intensive programme to “help practices in the most challenging circumstances or those that simply feel they do not have the capacity or bandwidth to plan a path towards a Modern General Practice Access approach”.  Practices will be selected for this based on “need and ICB nomination”.  It already has a remedial feel to it.

Contract and performance management appears to be the primary route of choice for implementing Modern General Practice Access.  We will have to see how that plays out.

However, even the authors do not think this is not going to solve the challenges general practice is facing.  Instead they frame Modern General Practice Access as the first step in implementing the reforms in general practice outlined by the Fuller Report.  It introduces the next steps by saying that, “Integrating primary care requires general practice to operate at a larger scale either as part of PCNs or at place level” (p42), which suggests quite a specific direction of travel.  It also says that NHS England will, “explore alternative approaches that can work alongside the partnership model and explore additional opportunities to better align clinical and financial responsibilities in primary care” (p42).

Contracts aside, this is probably the most directive document we have seen when it comes to general practice.  One fears it may be a sign of things to come.

26
apr
0

The National Influence of General Practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

General Practice is in a difficult place.  Worse is that politically it is being backed into a corner, and without action things are likely to become more difficult still.  What influence does general practice have, and can it impact national decisions about its own future?

In 2019 a five year deal was agreed including above inflation increases in funding for the service, alongside significant new investment via PCNs.  All was fine until inflation skyrocketed beyond 10% and what seemed like a reasonable deal in 2019 with hindsight now looks like a very bad deal indeed.

The GPC arm of the BMA tried to negotiate further increases to match the inflationary pressure, but the government/NHS England response was simply to impose the terms of the previously agreed contract.  This happened in 2022/23, and then again this year for 2023/24.  Last year there was no concrete reaction from the profession, and so far this year there has equally been zero response.

2023/24 marks the final year of the 5 year deal agreed in 2019.  NHS England has already made it clear that should no new deal be agreed then the terms of this current deal will simply be carried forward.  Would the service be able to survive taking a real terms cut of over 5% for a third consecutive year?

Which begs the question of whether a new deal can be agreed.  The behaviour of NHS England and the government in years 4 and 5 of this contract should make the service extremely reticent to enter into another 5 year deal, but one suspects that is what will be on offer.  Once again it will no doubt be front loaded to make the initial offering attractive (or at least more attractive than continuing with the current deal), but the pain will inevitably come as the time of the agreement progresses.

We know from the Fuller Report that the national direction is for PCNs to ‘evolve into’ Integrated Neighbourhood Teams.  This carries with it the huge risk that the additional investment gained over the last 5 years into general practice through PCNs could be lost as that resource is shifted sideways into NHS trusts and out the control of practices.  We also know from the Hewitt Review that the push is to move funding away from the national contract and into local contracts.  More on why that will be ultimately detrimental to general practice can be found here.

So if the service would generally be against another 5 year deal, a shift of PCN resources out of general practice, and a move away from a national GP contract when we know all of these things are most likely on their way, what action is general practice taking nationally now?  While we all hope that behind the scenes furious preparations are underway, at present there is no visible action in train.

What about on the NHS England and government side?  Well, there is the national media campaign against general practice and the ‘inability’ to book a face to face appointment.  Instead of backing the service the government is announcing rescue plans and ‘firm action’ which implicitly lays the blame at the feet of practices.  As a result public support for general practice is at an all-time low.

Then there is the mandate for GPs to publish any earnings above £159,000.  Why would this requirement, that was dropped 3 years ago, be reinstated now?  It seems highly likely to be pre-emptive, so that any complaints the profession make against the proposed new deal when it comes can be countered with a point to whatever the number of declarations ends up being, ignoring the fact that huge numbers are earning less and that their earnings have gone down.  It is not hard to see the government using the ‘greedy GPs simply wanting more’ argument in any public dispute (just look at how they are handling the dispute with the junior doctors).

There is also the insidious emerging national rhetoric that the national GP contract is ‘broken’ and no longer fit for purpose.  It is not evidence based, but the NHS works by acting on whatever the perceived current wisdom is.  It is not an accident that this rhetoric has become fashionable just as the current contract is coming to an end.

So NHS England and the government have been taking active steps to prepare, while it seems the service has not.  There are plenty of actions the profession could be taking.  There could be some visible protest action against this year’s imposed contract.  Even if it doesn’t get anywhere it would be a marker in the sand for next year.  There could be a collective refusal to publish the requested earnings information, because why would you give your political opponent a stick to beat you with.  And there could be some form of concerted media campaign highlighting the growth in attendance numbers, the failure to increase the number of GPs, the impact of the imposed contract on practice staff (etc etc).  These are just a few, and of course there are many more actions that could be in train.

Something has to change.  General practice has to get its house in order nationally.  What general practice is really crying out for is some strong national leadership.  The service needs to unite behind a national figure, someone trusted by the profession and the public alike.  At present this seems to be lacking, and unless this is rectified quickly there could be some very dark days ahead.

19
apr
0

The Hewitt Review and the National GP Contract

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The Hewitt Review was published on the 4th April, and the key takeaway for general practice from the review is that the national GP contract is now very much under threat.

There is an important distinction between the independent contractor model, i.e. GP practices working under a contract with the NHS, and the single national contract, which means that the majority of the work of GP practices is negotiated and agreed via one nationally negotiated contract.

The Hewitt Review, and I would suggest at present the majority of the NHS in general, does not like either of these things.  The independent contractor model prevents the NHS being able to dictate to practices what they have to do (the way it operates with all other NHS organisations).  Instead terms have to be put into a contract in order for a change to take place.

But the review does not go as far as both Wes Streeting and Sajid Javid (when he was Secretary of State) have previously gone in calling for the independent contractor model to be abolished.  Instead it turns it sights more squarely on the single national contract.

This move against the national contract featured heavily in the Fuller Report, which called for more general practice resources to come under the control of local Integrated Care Boards (ICBs).  The Hewitt Review picks up this mantle,

“The contract held by GP contractors for ‘general medical services’, which is negotiated nationally between government and the BMA, provides far too little flexibility for ICSs to work with primary care to achieve consistent quality and the best possible outcomes for local people.” 4.11 p66.

What is it about the national contract that local leaders dislike so much?  The example given in the document is illuminating.  It reports that pharmacists choosing to work in general practice in some areas is now exacerbating shortages in local pharmacies and acute hospitals.  So, one assumes, the argument is that left to local discretion the ARRS role that the majority of practices find is adding the most value would not be permitted in certain areas.

The question, then, is whether shifting from a single national contract to locally negotiated contracts would make things better for general practice, or would it simply prevent any shift of resources into general practice ever taking place?

The reality is that the national contract ringfences resources for general practice.  If a local system is under financial pressure it cannot remove resources that have been agreed within the national contract.  It can (and some areas have) stop any locally agreed resources, such as local enhanced services, but at present that is the limit of what it can do.  Many local system leaders think general practice is unfairly protected from taking its share of system ‘pain’ when local cuts need to be made.

Most local system leaders do not understand general practice, and how it operates.  The majority would have no clue what an enhanced service or an APMS contract is.  There is no understanding that while NHS trusts can simply post a deficit (that is underwritten by the NHS) and continue on pretty much as normal, GP practices have to remain as going concerns to be able to keep the lights on.

Given this environment in the majority of local areas, I do not believe that promises of local flexibility from locally agreed contracts would be worth the risk that giving up the protection that the national contract affords to general practice resources would entail.

The main recommendation of the Hewitt review when it comes to general practice is “that work should be undertaken to design a new framework for General Practice (GP) primary care contracts” (p8).  The national contract, and all the protection it affords, is very much now under threat. NHS leaders want the un-ringfencing of general practice resources, and the ability to be able to dictate directly to practices what they do and don’t have to do (particularly when it comes to access).  The national GP contract is the best protection the service has against this, and I would suggest the profession would be wise to strive hard to protect it.

5
apr
0

What to Make of the PCN DES?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The revised PCN DES was published on 30th March, 2 days before it was due to go live.  What are we make of the changes that have been made?

The first thing to say is that the PCN DES cannot be understood in isolation from a number of other documents.  The first, and probably most important, is the updated GP contract.  This still has not been published (as of the 3rd April), but what we do know about it is that it has been imposed (i.e. not agreed by the BMA) and the funding contained within it has been increased at the rate agreed in 2019, i.e. below 3% while the cost of living remains at over 10%.

Bear in mind then that the additional funding coming into general practice is only coming via the PCN DES, hence its importance, particularly its financial importance, is greater than ever.

NHS England published a letter outlining the main changes to the GP contract.  The letter also points to a ‘Plan for Recovering Access to Primary Care’.  It states, ‘The Chancellor in his Autumn Statement set out a commitment to publish a recovery plan for General Practice access in early 2023. The Delivery Plan for Recovering Access to Primary Care will be published shortly and sets out how practices and PCNs can be supported to improve access during 2023/24’.

This letter was published on the 6th March, and yet here we are 4 weeks later with nothing out yet.  But it is safe to say that improving perceived access to general practice remains the number one political, and hence NHS England, goal.

This then frames the ‘big news’ in the PCN DES, which is the reduction in the size of the IIF to just five indicators worth £59 million, with the remaining IIF-committed funding of £246m for 2023/24 now becoming a Capacity and Access Payment.

However, the detail within this means it is not as bad as it might sound on the surface.

PCNs will basically receive 70% of this capacity and access payment just for participating (very roughly £140k per PCN for the year):

‘National Capacity and Access Support Payment: 70% of funding (£172.2m) will be unconditionally paid to PCNs, proportionally to their Adjusted Population, in 12 equal payments over the 2023/24 financial year’  

All PCNs seem to have to do for this is develop an access improvement plan that is agreed with the ICB by 12 May.

The other 30% will be paid based on improvements made in three areas: patient experience of contact; ease of access and demand management (use of cloud based telephony and online consultations); and accuracy of recording in appointment books:

‘Local Capacity and Access Improvement Payment: part or all of 30% of the funding (£73.8m) will be paid to PCNs based on commissioner assessment of a PCN’s improvement in three areas over the course of 2023/24.’

What is really interesting about all of this is that none of these payments are based on how long patients actually have to wait for an appointment.  Now, the IIF contains a single indicator (of the 5 that remain) that actually does measure waiting times (ACC-08: Percentage of appointments where time from booking to appointment was two weeks or less).

But this IIF indicator (the only one with actual measure of waiting time) is worth 71 out of the 262 points available, and worth £14,058 for the year to an average PCN (out of £51,876 for the IIF as a whole).

So, just to break the finances down, PCNs will receive c£140k for participating in the capacity and access scheme, and could receive up to c£60k for improvements in the three areas above, with no measure of actual reduced waiting time.  But they can only earn £14k for achieving the IIF target of patients seen within 2 weeks (the only actual waiting time measure).  And of course the IIF targets are voluntary.

This is why the GP contract itself is more important here than the PCN DES.  PCNs can earn virtually all of the money available without changing how long it takes for a patient to get an appointment.  We just need to make sure there are no horrors hidden away in the main contract when it is published.

There is a hint of what may be to come with the local capacity and access improvement payment being based on “commissioner assessment” of improvements made.  We saw from the Fuller report the desire to put more of GP funding within the control of the Integrated Care Boards, and this does seem to signal a step (albeit small) in that direction.  For example, it means the chances of a consistent approach to what constitutes local ‘improvement’ across the country is zero.

The changes outlined here also does set general practice up for potential waiting time targets in the future, but I am not sure that is avoidable.  What we do have here is a relatively straightforward way for PCNs to earn the IIF funds, and one that is probably going to be easier than if there had been an extensive range of IIF targets instead.

Overall the PCN DES for this year is fine.  The PCN DES is where the extra money and resources are for general practice.  What is not fine is the GP contract for this year and the refusal of the government to fund the cost of living rise for practices and their staff.  What is important for general practice is not to confuse the issues, and end up losing the resources in the PCN DES because the core contract has not been properly funded.

29
mar
0

Holding Practices in a PCN to Account

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

A problem that PCN leaders will often raise is how they can hold their member practices to account.  With all the delivery requirements that are now placed on PCNs there is an inevitable trickle down to delivery requirements on practices within the PCN (e.g. IIF requirements), but what can a PCN leader do if a practice simply is not pulling their weight?

It is a difficult issue.  IIF targets are such that it can easily be that if one practice does not get anywhere close to the target then the whole PCN can miss the target, despite the hard work to achieve it of all of the other practices.  No funding will be forthcoming despite potentially the majority of practices doing the required work.

It is an issue that sits at the heart of why PCNs are so unpopular in some quarters.  The NHS does not want to do business with 7000+ individual practices and instead wants to transact with 1200+ PCNs, but this in turn means it is the PCNs who have manage across their member practices.  This causes internal disputes and division across the profession, by setting it against itself.

There are a number of responses to the issue that have been taken that I wouldn’t recommend.

Some PCNs have tried to explore the idea of financial penalties for practices.  The idea is that if one practice ends up costing the other practices money because their poor performance has resulted in funds not being received, then they have to reimburse the other practices out of their own pocket.  The idea here is that rather than the practice simply not receiving any money for doing no work they actually incur a financial penalty (justified because the other practices have done the work for no reward), which in turn will act as an extra incentive for them to perform.

It is not hard to predict how such a system would be both hard to implement and lead to a serious breakdown in trust across the PCN.  And more fundamentally general practice should not be allowing the introduction of PCNs to set the practices against each other.

Other PCNs have taken even more drastic action.  Some practices have identified that they cannot rely on the other practices in the PCN to perform and so have petitioned to be able to set up their own separate PCN.  We have seen a number of PCN reconfigurations across the country where this issue is at least close to the centre of what is going on (although it is never that explicit).

But PCN reconfigurations themselves are always painful.  They generally end up being even more acrimonious than when financial penalties are introduced!  It is hard to believe this is the best action for practices in a PCN.

What action, then, can PCNs take?

The starting point has to be first and foremost the mindset that the main support general practice has in this new environment of Integrated Care Systems and a not-negotiating NHS England is general practice itself.  A primary role of PCNs must be to support its member practices, not penalise them.  There is precious little support available for practices outside of general practice itself.

What really helps here is a PCN vision, i.e. where the practices in the PCN have come together and agreed exactly what they are trying to do through the PCN, including the role it is to play in supporting practice sustainability.  Having this agreement is very helpful as a reference point in discussions about individual practice performance.

The starting mindset should be how do we help all of the practices in our PCN to deliver.  If one practice has identified ways of effective delivery how are we facilitating them being able to share this with other practices, and supporting those practices when they are struggling.  We are bad in general practice at learning from and supporting each other, and PCNs actually present an opportunity to put this right.

It may be that a practice cannot deliver one of the PCN requirements.  Then the PCN can agree whether a different practice might deliver this for them (and potentially receive any associated funding as well) or agree an alternative solution.  The key here is developing the trust required across the practices to be able to first of all share that a particular aspect of delivery is a challenge, and then to be able to have a sensible conversation as to how to tackle this together.

The job of PCNs is not to hold practices to account.  Rather it is for the group of practices that make up the PCN to ensure that they work together to maximise the benefit that the PCN brings to each of the member practices and their patients.  It is this mindset that can enable PCNs to work for practices not against them.

22
mar
0

More Changes to the NHS Pension!

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

In the podcast published on 13th March I spoke to NHS pensions expert Paul Gordon.  He explained all the changes that are coming as a result of the recent consultation.  You can listen to everything he had to say here.  But then the Chancellor of the Exchequer announced further changes in his March budget!  I caught up again with Paul with more questions about what it all means, and he gives his answers below.

Were you expecting all the recent changes to the NHS Pension?

What an amazing few weeks for those with NHS Pensions, two consultations and a Budget which left many, including me, staggered.  Normally the pace of change when it comes to the NHS pensions is, at best, glacial, so it is incredible for so much change to have been packed into such a short space of time!

What changes are being made to the Annual Allowance?

The Annual Allowance is the amount you are able to grow your pension by each year without incurring any tax charge.  This amount has been increased from £40,000 to £60,000 per annum.  At first glance, this is excellent news but please note, there could still be tax charges and so the review of your existing benefits is paramount.  Those with higher incomes will still see the standard allowance reduced as a result of the Tapered Annual Allowance which is to remain.

What about changes to the Lifetime Allowance?

The Lifetime Allowance is the value your total pension pot is allowed to reach before it incurs any tax charges.  Once this value is breached tax charges then start to apply.  However, the Chancellor has just announced that the Lifetime Allowance is to be abolished.  This could lead to the saving of thousands of pounds throughout retirement with the maximum tax-free lump sum remaining at £268,275, although those with Lifetime Allowance Protection already in place may be able to access a higher level.

Is it true that the need for 24-hour retirement has been abolished?

We now have the feedback regarding the December 2022 consultation which removes the need for 24-hour retirement.  This is called the Partial Retirement option, and will be implemented from October 2023.  This will allow access to the NHS Pension for GPs, partners and all NHS staff without the requirement for 24-Hour retirement, which for single-handed practices or those in dispute with the ICB could prove to be extremely useful!

Has the inflation issue been fixed?

A huge cause of concern was that the growth of individuals’ pension pots would exceed the Annual Allowance in 2022/23 simply because of the inflationary rise it would receive.  This is because historically the ‘allowed’ growth for inflation was based on the rate from a different year to that in which the growth was incurred.  There has now been adjusted in a way that will effectively allow the use of the higher CPI figure for the current year by delaying the addition of the growth until the 6th April, thus nullifying the issue.  However, it is imperative to secure updated Annual Allowance Growth histories from NHSBSA and to ensure membership details are correct ahead of the various changes ahead.

Where can people find out more information about their own pension position?

I strongly recommend everyone obtains a statement from the Total Rewards Statement website: www.totalrewardsstatements.nhs.uk

15
mar
0

Changes to the 23/24 GP Contract – What is Missing is What is Important

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

NHS England has issued an update on next year’s contract.  For the second year running no deal has been reached between the GPC and NHS England, and as a result the 5th year of the contract agreed in 2019 will be imposed on the service. The update essentially outlines the changes within that contract that NHS England is able to make without it being a formal variation of the contract.

The changes that have been made by NHS England are not the real issue.  What is important is what is missing from the contract.  It is easy to be distracted by the headline noise around access, but the main problem with this contract is the lack of a funding uplift.

The 5 year contract was agreed at the start of 2019.  The inflation rate at the time was 1.8%, and at that point inflation had been low and relatively stable for some time.  The rises to the core practice contract (ie excluding the PCN DES) were set as follows (p51), based on predicted inflation levels:

  • 2019/20 – 1.4%
  • 2020/21 – 2.3%
  • 2021/22 – 2.8%
  • 2022/23 – 2.5%
  • 2023/24 – 2.7%

Of course what has happened over that time period is that the cost of living has risen significantly beyond what was predicted back in 2019.  Inflation had risen to 8.5% in March 2022, peaked at 11% in October 2022 and currently remains above 10%.

The number one and overriding issue is that the imposition of the contract last year meant a 7-8% real terms cut in funding for the service last year, and means a similar cut this year (because of the difference between the rate of inflation and the agreed rise to the core contract).

The agreed NHS pay rise this year was 4.5%-9.3%, depending on your starting salary.  The little over 2% that was provided to general practice does not cover this kind of rise.  So it is not just GP partners it is all practice staff who are suffering as a result of the refusal of NHS England to negotiate a reasonable level of uplift.

I am sure the counter argument will have been that additional funding beyond the increase to the core contract has been provided via the PCN DES.  But practices know better than anyone else that PCN funding does not pay the staff, or any of the other eye-watering practice bills that are dropping through the surgery door.

General practice cannot survive this year on year cut in funding levels.  All the discussion about access is just noise, obscuring this core issue.  General practice is agile and nimble and can manage the access changes. There are plenty of solutions out there (e.g. here).  The bigger risk is that the access issue, for which general practice will have little or no public support, is allowed to obscure the lack of funding to meet inflation issue, for which support is likely to be much greater.

It is up to the BMA team and national GP leaders to keep the issue focussed on the money, and away from discussions about access.  Losing sight of this is the biggest error general practice could make right now.

A lesson for general practice must also be that 5 year deals have to become a thing of the past.  NHS England have demonstrated quite clearly that they cannot be trusted with the level of variables that 5 years creates.  A trustworthy contract partner would have recognised the discrepancy between predicted and actual inflation and made good on the gap.  Now we know this won’t happen all future deals need to be kept short term.

We wait to see how the GPC and national GP leaders encourage the service to respond to the imposition of next year’s contract.  I don’t think the same quiet acceptance that we saw last year is likely this time round.  A key part of getting the response right will be making sure that whatever it is it is clear, simple to understand and focussed on the cut in funding.

8
mar
0

Do you have a mandate?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The success of any at-scale general practice organisation is determined by the extent to which it has a mandate from its practices.  But if you have one how do you keep it, and if you don’t how do you get one?

Simply existing as an at scale general practice organisation does not automatically confer success, even when there may originally have been a contractual basis for its existence (e.g. a PCN) or even a financial buy-in (e.g. a federation).

There is a significant difference between a PCN that has a mandate to carry out activities and establish shared services on behalf of its member practices, and a PCN with no such mandate whose practices simply spend their time seeking to ensure they receive their ‘fair share’ of PCN resources.

A federation with a mandate can often speak on behalf of its member practices and even negotiate local enhanced services for local general practice, and practices will be grateful for what they have done.  But a federation without a mandate will be accused of undermining the local LMC, siding with the commissioners and top-slicing funding meant for practices when undertaking the exact same course of action.

Even LMCs experience this variation. Despite their statutory role some LMCs have very limited influence in the local health economy because they have no clear mandate from their practices, whereas others are hugely influential and commissioners would not dream of attempting to introduce new services without running them via the LMC first because they know of the extent of their mandate with their practices.

So how do at scale organisations establish this elusive mandate, and once they have it how do they hold on to it?

When new at-scale organisations are being set up there is generally a lot of communication and conversation as to what the new organisation is to do, how it will work, and what its mandate is.  But the mistake leaders commonly make is to underestimate the need to constantly and continually reaffirm both the mandate they have been given and their success in carrying it out.

Practices will quickly lose sight of the rationale behind the assignment of any mandate.  4 years on practices no longer remember the original conversations about the role and function of the PCN, and the PCN itself has evolved significantly over this time.  At-scale leaders have to keep this conversation alive.  This relies heavily on communication, the prime purpose of which is to maintain and strengthen the previously agreed mandate.

Mandate relies heavily on trust, in particular the trust that exists between the leadership of the at scale organisation and the practices.  When there is a change in leadership of the at-scale organisation, e.g. a new PCN CD or a new federation leader, the mandate is not automatically conferred onto the new leader.  Rather, the new leader has to ensure that they still have the mandate that previously existed and work hard to build the trust quickly to keep it in place.

There is a type of mandate common in general practice which is that of “silent assent”.  A practice silently goes along with the leadership of the at scale organisation, without ever really engaging.  This is fine while it lasts, but many PCNs are now finding this a problem because some of those practices who were previously giving silent assent have recognised the scale of resources tied up in PCNs and all of sudden want more involvement, and PCN leaders find the mandate they thought was in place no longer is.

If the mandate has gone, then what does the at scale organisation do?  There is no real choice but to work to rebuild the mandate.  As well as conversation and communication this requires a willingness of the at scale organisation to reduce the work it carries out on behalf of the practices, in order to then build it up in future once the required trust has been established.

Start with something small, build trust, and then scale up from there.

It is easy to forget but at scale organisations only exist as an enabler for their practices.  If they have no mandate from them they are not able to serve their primary purpose, and so priority must always be giving to securing this mandate and continually ensuring it is in place.

1
mar
0

PCN Progressions

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

When I am not working with general practice I spend much of my time playing tennis.  It is fair to say I am something of an addict!  One of the key principles we use in tennis when learning something new (for example improving your backhand) is the idea of “progressions”.

Progressions are where you break down a complex task (your backhand) into a series of easier steps working up to the final result.  You start with something relatively simple, and then when you can do that task consistently you move onto something slightly more difficult, and then focus on that until you can do that well.  For example, first you hit a ball that is dropped next to you, then one that is fed to you from a coach’s basket, then one that is hit in a friendly, collaborative rally etc etc.  You continue to progress until ultimately you can hit your new improved backhand on a regular basis.

But if you start off by watching Roger Federer’s backhand on YouTube and then immediately try and hit it like Federer at full speed in a match situation you will inevitably fail, and revert to your old (not very good) backhand.  You have to work through the progressions so that you learn how the shot feels, what adjustments you have to make, and make them habits that you can rely on in a match situation.

This idea of progressions applies equally to PCNs and joint working between practices.  If a group of practices start off by trying to run a shared urgent care service across core hours without ever having worked together before it would most likely run into serious problems very quickly and the project would have to be shelved.

Instead the group of practices in the PCN need to learn how to work together by using a series of progressions, steps of increasing difficulty and complexity, so that they can learn ways of working together that will enable them to do more and more together.

What, then, might these progressions be?

There is no set answer to this question (the principle being only that it should be a series of actions of increasing difficulty where each progression is more difficult than the last).  An example of what these progressions could be is (and let’s assume here a PCN of 4 practices):

  1. The 4 practices share a resource, e.g. a pharmacist. They adapt how they do this until they can do it in a way that means that all the practices feel they are benefitting from the shared resource, no practice is feeling hard done by, and the pharmacist is happy.
  2. The 4 practices work together on a shared project that creates additionality for the practices, e.g. a first contact physiotherapy service. The practices find a way of working together so that they can agree on the location and operation of the new service, how it is organised, how they can use it, and how they can benefit from it.
  3. The 4 practices work together on a project where there is individual accountability for each practice, e.g. delivery against a key IIF indicator. This is more difficult than the previous step because the practices have to work out how accountability and support will work across the practices, i.e. what happens if one practice is not able to fulfil its delivery requirements.
  4. The 4 practices work together on a project that impacts how each practice operates, e.g. a shared document management hub. Here the individual autonomy of the practices has to be replaced with a standardised way of operating across all 4 of the practices, which creates a new layer of complexity and difficulty.
  5. The 4 practices work together on a project that impacts how core clinical services are delivered in each practice, e.g. a shared in-hours urgent care hub. Now the practices have to work out how they can work together on the delivery of clinical services that have always historically been the domain of individual practices.

This is only an example set of progressions, but hopefully you can understand the idea.  As the 4 practices in the PCN work through the progressions they work out what clinical and managerial leadership they need for each type of new initiative, what communication across the practices is required, what the data and reporting requirements are and how these need to work, how support for individual practices within the group should best function, how to deal with differences of opinion without it derailing projects etc etc.

PCNs cannot expect to be effective at delivering core clinical services together if they have not worked through some progressions.  Just like we will revert to our old backhand because the new shot is too difficult, so the practices will simply try to find ways of continuing to work in their own autonomous ways if the starting point is too difficult.

Where PCNs are struggling to work together the starting point needs to be something that they can do together (however small) and then build progressions from there.

1
feb
2

Should System Clinical Leads be on GP Leadership Groups?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog2 Comments

A common challenge that many areas are having is working out who should be on the local leadership group for general practice.  A specific question is whether this should include the (often newly appointed) system clinical leads, especially where they are GPs.  So, should they be included?

To answer this question we need to go back to our understanding of what an Integrated Care System (ICS) is.  As I am sure you know, an ICS is the new NHS infrastructure that aims to bring together providers from all areas including (but not limited to) primary care, secondary care, community care, mental health, social care and the voluntary sector, so that they can collectively agree how care is organised and how resources are deployed.

This is different from the previous system of Clinical Commissioning Groups (CCGs).  In this (old) system the CCG as a commissioning organisation, with a membership of all the local GP practices, was tasked with deciding how care should be organised and how resources deployed on behalf of the local population.

In the new system there is no commissioning organisation, and no special place for general practice.  General practice is simply one of the number of providers that have to work together to agree on how care should be organised and resources deployed.

The problem that general practice now faces is that the single membership organisation that could speak on its behalf into these system discussions (the CCG) no longer exists.  General practice is multiple individual organisations, along with a set of at scale organisations including PCNs, LMCs, and (in some places) federations, and so is left at something of a disadvantage when it comes to system discussions.  While the other organisations in an area are generally single entities with a clear leadership structure, such as the local hospital, general practice (and therefore its voice) is much more dispersed.

As a result general practice in many areas is creating a local general practice leadership group.  The role of this group is to provide a united general practice voice into these system discussions.

At the same time the ICS is working to find ways of bringing the different provider organisations together and organise pathways of care across these organisations.  To this end the system is appointing pathway leads (for areas such as planned care, urgent care, long term conditions etc etc) along with clinical leads for these areas.

These clinical lead roles could be taken on by any type of clinician from any type of provider organisation.  But of course the clinicians with the most recent experience of this type of work are GPs, particularly those who worked in CCGs.  So in many places we find that there are quite a number of GPs who have been appointed into these new system clinical lead roles.

While historically these same individuals may have been able to operate as system clinical leads on behalf of the commissioning organisation owned by GP practices (and so have a link into some form of leadership role for general practice), but now this is no longer the case.  The system clinical leads have to operate on behalf of the system as a whole, and not on behalf of one single provider part of the system (such as general practice).

There is a clear difference, then, between the GPs on the local general practice leadership group, working to ensure the voice of general practice is heard in the system, and the system clinical leads (even if they are GPs) who are working on behalf of all providers within the system.  When it comes to working in the best interests of general practice the system clinical leads are necessarily conflicted and should not be core members of the group.

There is of course a value to general practice of having GPs as system clinical leads.  It can be valuable for these leads to attend the GP Leadership group meetings to ensure the group understand the work that is being carried out, how partnership work is progressing and the context in which they are operating.

But this is different from them being core members determining the actions general practice should take as it seeks to partner effectively with the rest of the system.  This should be limited to those who operate on behalf of their practices, i.e. the PCN, LMC and federation leaders.

25
jan
0

PCN vs Practice Independence

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

PCNs are not popular in some quarters of general practice primarily because they are seen as a threat to the independence of the individual practice.  But is there a bigger threat to practice independence than PCNs, and could it even be that PCNs may become key to maintaining practice independence?

Funding and resources are increasingly coming to practices via the PCN route (as opposed to directly via the contract).  Inevitably alongside any additional funding and resources are increased delivery requirements.  It is the lack of direct control of the resources alongside the additional work which is behind much of this growing practice resentment of PCNs.

But more changes are coming.

Since October PCNs have taken over responsibility for enhanced access.  We are seeing a mixed picture of delivery across the country.  Some PCNs have taken over this delivery from the local provider, others have simply come to their own arrangements with the local provider and yet others have created all sorts of hybrids in between with mixed models of delivery and even whole new providers in place.

Now, we know from the Operating Framework that a “General Practice Access Recovery Plan” is on its way.  While we don’t know what will be in it, there are some elements we can predict.  Most likely is the number one action outlined in the implementation plan from the Fuller Report, which was to:

“Develop a single system-wide approach to managing integrated urgent care to guarantee same-day care for patients and a more sustainable model for practices.  This should be for all patients clinically assessed as requiring urgent care, where continuity from the same team is not a priority” p34.

Specifically, the report says that it is for, “primary care in every neighbourhood to create single urgent care teams and to offer their patients the care appropriate to them” (p11).

Very quickly, it appears, we may be in a place where PCNs are expected not just to offer extended hours across all of its member practices, but also a system for delivering all urgent appointments across core practice hours.

Let’s leave aside the mechanics of how the centre might expect to impose a system that takes away activity that is core contract activity (and, one assumes, also the funding that goes with it), and for arguments sake assume that this is what happens.  In this situation does a PCN really want to be outsourcing the delivery of these appointments to a third party provider?

It is one thing for a third party to be providing additional appointments on top of those that a practice has traditionally been expected to provide.  But it is another for such a provider to take on responsibility for delivering in hours appointments that have always been part of the core contract.

Even putting aside the impact this would have on the practices’ ability to deliver effective continuity of care, the threat to practice independence at this point surely becomes much more real.  If a practice is not responsible for one aspect of its population’s core primary care, what is to stop other responsibilities being taken off it?  Where does that road end up?

Meanwhile, the PCN remains a contractual entity owned entirely by it practices.  While individual practices may not be able to retain control of this agenda, groups of practices working together as a PCN can.  If the group can work together they can find a way through this that protects their collective independence.

So while there is a loss of control at an individual practice level in operating across the PCN, the group of practices can retain collective control by working together.  What the PCN provides is additional running costs, staff and resources to enable this joint working to be effective.   Now may well be the time for practices working together as PCNs to start considering how they can ramp up their in-house delivery abilities and reduce any reliance on external providers, as a means of protecting their collective independence.

18
jan
1

The End of Independent General Practice?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

The Labour party has launched an offensive against general practice in recent days.  First the Shadow Health Minister Wes Streeting says he wants to “tear up” the “murky, opaque” GP contract, and now Labour leader Keir Starmer has doubled down on the comments and said he wants to take away the GP contract and make GPs direct employees of the NHS.

Now we are in the odd position of the Conservative party defending the GP partnership model.  In Prime Minister’s Questions on 11th January Rishi Sunak said, “‘I’ll tell you what the NHS doesn’t need. What they don’t need is Labour’s idea – Labour’s only idea – which is for another completely disruptive, top-down, unfunded reorganisation buying out every single GP contract”.

Maybe Labour’s position is not surprising.  They wanted to nationalise general practice back in 1948, and only reluctantly agreed to the current situation in order that they could push ahead with introducing the NHS.  Since then GPs have maintained such huge popularity ratings with the general public that it has been impossible for them to challenge the independent contractor model, and to press ahead with any plans to nationalise general practice and bring it in line with the rest of the health service.

But now things have changed.  The popularity of GPs has fallen sharply as access challenges have risen and the media campaign demanding immediate access to an in-person appointment with a GP has continued largely unchecked.

Labour has pounced on this opportunity and is now portraying GPs as money-grabbing private contractors, who undertook the vaccination programme for no other reason than personal financial gain, in an attack that they would have not even considered only a few years ago.

Of course, this flies in the face of any reasonable analysis of what is going on.  The recent Health and Social Care Committee Inquiry Report into general practice (an all party document!) reported that, “Historically one of the key drivers of innovation and improvement in general practice has been the GP partnership model, which gives GPs the flexibility to innovate with a focus on the needs of their local population. We know there are significant pressures on GP partners at the moment but the evidence we received was clear that the partnership remains an efficient and effective model for general practice if properly funded and supported… Rather than hinting it may scrap the partnership model, the Government should strengthen it” (p4).

There is a belief amongst some that others (“professional NHS managers”) would be able to manage general practice better than GP partners.  But only last week a hospital in Swindon returned the contracts of two GP practices so that they could have “more opportunities to draw upon shared learning and best practice” from nearby practices.  It turns out running practices needs its own expertise, and this is not one that currently exists in other NHS organisations.

The idea that introducing the very NHS bureaucracy to the service that the government has consistently said it is trying to cut from the health service would be somehow a solution to the challenges facing general practice can only be described as political, and never as either pragmatic or realistic.

But ultimately the NHS is political.  General practice at a national level is not functioning as an effective political operator.  So while the logic of Labour’s political position is not intellectually defensible, unless general practice gets its act together nationally it may well be that the GP partnership model will end up as a political casualty, should Labour maintain its current lead in the opinion polls and win the next election which will take place within the next two years.

11
jan
1

What the 2023/24 Operating Guidance Means for General Practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

Every year the powers that be produce “operating guidance” for the NHS for the forthcoming year. It is published at around Christmas time (happy Christmas…) so that NHS organisations and Integrated Care System (ICS) partners can build the guidance into their plans for the forthcoming year.  True to form, this year the guidance was published on 23rd December.  What implications does it have for general practice?

General practice features right from the outset.  The immediate priority for the NHS is to “recover our core services and productivity” and along with ambulance, A&E and elective waits the document prioritises “make it easier for people to access primary care services, particularly general practice” (p3).  No surprise that it is GP access that takes centre stage.

There are three specific general practice targets (p7):

  • Make it easier for people to contact a GP practice, including by supporting general practice to ensure that everyone who needs an appointment with their GP practice gets one within two weeks and those who contact their practice urgently are assessed the same or next day according to clinical need
  • Continue on the trajectory to deliver 50 million more appointments in general practice by the end of March 2024
  • Continue to recruit 26,000 Additional Roles Reimbursement Scheme (ARRS) roles by the end of March 2024

The guidance further notes that an ominously titled “general practice access recovery plan” is being produced and will need to be implemented when published.  It certainly feels like this document will contain more of the actual detail of what systems are expected to impose on practices next year.

There is an annex that, “sets out the key evidence based actions that will help deliver the objectives set out above and the resources being made available to support this” (p8).  I looked forward to turning the page and finding out what these were, but was somewhat deflated to discover that for general practice these are to, “ensure people can more easily contact their GP practice (by phone, NHS App, NHS111 or online)” and “transfer lower acuity care away from both general practice and NHS 111 by increasing pharmacy participation in the Community Pharmacist Consultation Service”.

Disappointing, but not surprising.  Things don’t improve when it comes to the money.  Essentially there is no new money.  Instead, there is an overall 2.2% efficiency target.  Systems are expected to pay acute providers payment for activity performed (no block contracts), and every ICS has to come up with a balanced plan.  For general practice we are told funding has already been agreed in the existing 5 year deal (so don’t expect any more), and if local systems have to stick with payment by results there is very little possibility of any new local investment into primary care.

The challenge when it comes to general practice is that the Operating Framework is always published before the GP contract has been finalised.  In the only nod to Fuller (the Health and Social Care Committee Inquiry report is ignored completely) the document states, “Once the 2023/24 contract negotiations have concluded, we will also publish the themes we are looking to engage with the profession on that could take a significant step towards making general practice more attractive and sustainable and able to deliver the vision outlined in the Fuller Stocktake, including continuity of care for those who need it. The output from this engagement will then inform the negotiations for the 2024/25 contract.” (p10).

This leaves us basically where we thought we were, i.e. that the NHS has no intention of doing anything other than imposing year 5 of the 2019 deal for 23/24, and anything new will have to wait for the next contract that will start in 2024.

All of this is hugely depressing given the challenges the service is experiencing.  Any hopes that the Health and Social Care Select Committee Report would mark a shift of emphasis from access towards continuity have been firmly dashed.  Even the mention of continuity of care feels like it has been done as a concession to the profession, as a subtext to the “real” NHS agenda of GP access.

We will wait and see what (if anything) comes out of the contract negotiations, and what horrors await in the ‘access recovery plan’, but all signs are already pointing to a very difficult 2023 for general practice.

14
dec
0

PCN Plus Live Event!

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Despite how difficult and challenging it is to lead a PCN there are very events that are directly and uniquely for PCN Clinical Directors and leaders, but I am delighted to say that we are putting on just such an event in the New Year – and you can attend for free!

Let me take a step back to explain the context for this event.  A year ago I got together with three amazing colleagues: Dr Hussain Gandhi, PCN CD and co-presenter of the eGPlearning podblast and all round advocate for general practice and in particular technology in general practice; Dr Andy Foster, former PCN CD and also co-presenter of the eGPlearning podblast; and Tara Humphrey, PCN management expert and presenter of the Business of Healthcare podcast.

Our combined experience of both directly leading and supporting PCNs led us to the realisation that there is very little available for those leading PCNs by means of learning and guidance, and that we were best placed to put that right.  We came up with a brand new course specifically designed for PCN leaders, and PCN Plus was born.

We launched the PCN Plus programme back in April this year with just under 30 PCN leaders.  The group have met every month since then, and we have covered a whole range of topics including how to establish a vision for what you want your PCN to achieve, how to engage your practices effectively and deal with any conflict that comes up, how to make the most of the ARRS roles, and how to manage your PCN operations and finances effectively.

It has been great working with such a dedicated group of PCN leaders who have been so keen to find out more about how they can be more effective in their leadership role, and not only learn from us as a group of facilitators but also learn from each other and share their own experiences to the benefit of everyone else.

But as we reach the end of the course there was one thing we all felt was missing – actually meeting up in person!  It is fantastic being able to meet online and there is a great convenience to it, but there is something special about meeting up in person, even more special now we do it so infrequently.  So we agreed that we will hold an event where everyone who attended the course can come in person, and all finally meet with each other and with the four of us who run the course.

The great news is that if you are leading a PCN you too can attend this event!  As well as learning from the experiences of those who have been on the course so far, we will be focussing specifically on the future of PCNs, on what PCNs can do to be effective within the new Integrated Care System, on what is next for PCN CDs and how can PCN leaders prepare for the challenges ahead.

The event is totally free, but places are extremely limited (there are only 40 available in total) and will be allocated on a first come first served basis.  The event will take place on Wednesday 1st March in Nottingham and runs from 1pm to 4.45pm with lunch (also free!) available from 12.30.  You can reserve your place here – I look forward to seeing you there!

7
dec
0

The PCN Manager

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

PCN managers can be annoying.  As if the practice does not already have enough to do, without the PCN manager constantly ringing up or emailing and asking where the practice is up to with this or making sure the practice does the other by the end of the day.  So where does the real value of a PCN manager lie?

Of course the question is really whether it is the PCN itself that is annoying rather than the PCN manager per se.  Is it really the PCN manager’s fault that the IIF has 1,153(!) points available?  Someone has to monitor it.  And if the PCN agrees to a project or way of working, someone has to be in contact with the practices to make sure that everything that is needed is getting done.

It does, however, beg the question of what we really want from our PCN managers.  Is the job of the PCN manager to be the administrator constantly badgering practices to make sure they are doing what they said they would do?  Or if a practice says it is going to do something is it their own responsibility to make sure it is done, and should the focus of the PCN manager lie elsewhere?

The scale and opportunity of PCNs means that they are now at the point where the PCN manager needs to be something more than glorified admin.  They need to be the ones providing strategic leadership support to the Clinical Director and the PCN.

What does that actually mean?  It means that the role of the manager should be supporting the PCN to ensure that it has a clear vision, and that it has a plan in place to deliver that vision.  It means building relationships within and outside of the PCN to enable that plan to be delivered.  It means finding and securing new opportunities for funding and support to help move the PCN forward.

In too many PCNs all of this responsibility falls on the PCN Clinical Director, who has a myriad of PCN things to attend to in very few sessions each week.  Strategy, strategic planning, relationship building and external opportunities are often the first things to go when there are operational and staff issues that need sorting.

The PCN manager is the key.  They are the ones with the capacity to keep the focus on the important as well as ensuring the urgent is dealt with.  The ability of the PCN to establish and maintain its strategic direction is in a large part down to the PCN manager.  The Clinical Director needs their PCN manager to be working with them to keep the PCN on track.

The problem is that many places do not recognise that this is what is needed of the PCN manager.  Instead they actively seek someone to monitor the IIF targets and PCN DES delivery.  They look for someone junior who can “do the doing”, and do not value the strategic and relationship building skills that are actually the ones that have become the most important.

Equally, many PCNs are not prepared to pay for these skills. The reality is that a manager with these skills will be more senior and have more experience.  They may even earn more than the practice managers (which can be a problem in itself).

PCNs are at a critical point.  The resources and opportunity of PCNs have become really significant, but so have the operational and delivery requirements.  One of the keys to making sure that PCNs add value rather than becoming a drain on resources is finding the right PCN manager with the right skills to ensure the full potential of the PCN is realised.

30
nov
1

Allies or Neighbours? Practice relationships within a PCN

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

One of the key questions facing all practices is how much effort they should expend in collaborative working through their PCN, and how much they should strive to retain their independence and own way of doing things.  But the choice between the two is not as binary as it at first appears.

This Harvard Business Review article maintains that all work relationships fall into one of five categories:

  1. Collaboration (allies) – Merging self-interests with the interests of others
  2. Cooperation (friends) – Maintaining self-interests while also advancing joint interests
  3. Maximum possible independence (neighbours) – acting to neutralise the impact of others on self-interests
  4. Competition (rivals) – working to deter another in order to protect or advance self-interests
  5. Conflict (enemies) – trying to defeat or deny another’s interest

There are some important distinctions between these relationships.  Collaboration involves parties investing in the relationships to help each other.  The benefits of these relationships are the greatest for GP practices, because it means the maximum value can be derived from shared assets, such as ARRS staff and back office teams.  It means practices can potentially realise benefits beyond those that come simply from accessing PCN resources.  The drawback is that these relationships are hard to disengage from should interests change.

Cooperation is a step down from collaboration, where practices choose to work together on specific issues where interests (e.g. availability of PCN funding) align, but simply not to compete where they don’t.  This limits any potential benefits of joint working to those that come from (in our case) PCNs but nothing more.  Should PCNs end then there will still be things that need to be unravelled, but nothing too problematic.

Neighbours is where what practices are actually trying to do is maintain the maximum possible independence.  Practices deliberately reduce their reliance on others as much as they can.  This is where practices want control of their own ARRS staff, and don’t want them grouped into functioning PCN teams.  It limits the benefits that can be derived from PCN resources, but maintains practice independence.

It seems to me that in the vast majority of places now the challenges facing general practice have reached the point where practices no longer feel in competition or even in conflict with each other.  Maybe we sometimes still see it when APMS providers arrive on the patch, but other than that practices generally recognise that practices are in this together, and there is little value in making things even harder by fighting with each other.

The problem many PCNs face is that different practices within the PCN are at different places on this spectrum.  While some may be up for full collaboration, others are striving to maintain their independence.  It is very difficult for a PCN to be effective when what some of the practices are doing is rebuffing any attempts at cooperation, let alone collaboration.

What is needed is to try and get all the practices to agree on the same approach.

The critical point to understand here is that the independence question for GP practices is inextricably linked to the question of sustainability.  If a practice is not sustainable, ultimately it will lose its independence, at the point at which it is either forced to close or is taken over by another provider.  The best chance a practice has of being sustainable into the medium term is by collaborating with other practices, and making the most of the scarce resources that are available to practices.

While it feels counter-intuitive for practices, not to mention risky, the best way to maintain their independence is through collaboration.  For those leading PCNs and joint working initiatives across practices the starting point has to be building a shared understanding this is true, along with the trust needed to mitigate the risk.  How will the practice survive for the next 5 years? How will it navigate the challenges we know are coming down the line, on top of the rising demand and falling GP workforce?  How will it be able to maintain its independence within this context?  What role can the PCN and collaboration play in answering these questions?

Building a shared understanding that collaborative working is the key to maintaining individual practice independence, rather than a fast-track to losing it, is the starting point for successful PCN working.

23
nov
0

What is General Practice Trying to Achieve?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

For general practice there have been some important documents written this year.  The three that particularly stand out for me are: The Fuller Review; the Future of General Practice (Health and Social Care Committee (HSCC) Inquiry Report); and Side Effects by David Haslam.

I have written about the Fuller Review and the HSCC report, and had the good fortune to be able to interview David Haslam about his book for the General Practice podcast.

While Side Effects is about the system as a whole, it is extremely useful for general practice as it seeks to better articulate its role as a provider within Integrated Care Systems.  David Haslam’s key question for the health system as a whole is what is the healthcare system really trying to achieve?  This, he claims, is a question that most of those responsible for healthcare systems are unable to answer.  Infinite demand and limited resources means systems cannot be universal, high quality and comprehensive, so what is the goal of the system?

We could apply this question to general practice.  Are we really clear as to what general practice is trying to achieve?  Are those leading general practice able to articulate clearly the purpose and role of general practice?

I remember even in my role as a CCG Accountable Officer that I was not crystal clear on the role of general practice in the system, and not fully able to articulate it effectively to acute trust Chief Executives and other system leaders.

It isn’t just me.  Ben Allen, a  Sheffield GP and Clinical Director, recently posted on Twitter,

💥Primary Care has no clarity on:
🌟Why we exist
🌟What matters most
🌟What ‘good’ looks like
🌟Our responsibilities in the system
(Shared vision & Purpose)
So priorities & expectations constantly conflict: Gov, staff, public & media

We need agreement on such FOUNDATIONAL issues

— Ben Allen (He/Him)💙 (@BenAllenGP) November 14, 2022

The Fuller Review seems to distil the aim of general practice as to provide rapid access to care, to provide continuity of care for those who need it, and to play a role in prevention and tackling health inequalities (in partnership with others).

Is this right?  Is this what general practice is there to achieve?

The HSCC Report again is not explicit, but does use this quote, “[T]here are two characteristics of general practice which distinguish the GP from every other professional: first, access and, secondly, continuity of care. That is all there is and everything else supports that.” (p19).  The report broadly states that access has been over-prioritised over continuity of care and that this balance needs to be redressed.

So is the HSCC report right?  Is the role of general practice to provide access and continuity of care, and is the challenge to get the balance between the two right?

David Haslam did not explicitly address the question as to the role of general practice, but he is clear that the challenge for general practice is that much of what it does is not glamorous enough for politicians and the system.  The system does not value the heart attacks and strokes that general practice prevents, because it is not as glamorous as the service that treats a patient who has had a heart attack or stroke.  Even the patient whose heart attack or stroke has prevented does not know that general practice did this!

What he does say is that by investing in primary care health inequalities are reduced and health outcomes are improved.  Is this what general practice is trying to achieve?  And if it is, are we clear exactly how this happens?

Even now I am not sure I can fully articulate the answer myself.  However, the assumptions in the recent publications feel insufficient and inadequate to me.  I am sure that general practice as a profession is not articulating its purpose and role clearly enough.  I don’t even believe there is a shared clarity within the service itself on where the true value of general practice lies.

In the vacuum, the system and politicians just work with their own assumptions.  Acute trust leaders believe many of the patients in A&E are there “because they couldn’t get to see a GP”.  The assumption is that the prevention work of general practice is linear, that general practice stops the need for further care directly and only as a result of its accessibility.  Politicians believe that the aim of general practice is simply to be available when patients want it – hence the obsession with access.

We can´t let these misconceptions continue.  There is a pressing need for general practice, both at a local and national level, to be able to articulate the role of general practice in the system and what it is trying to achieve.  The advent of Integrated Care Systems means it is more important than ever that general practice is clear on the value it brings to the system and exactly how this is achieved.

16
nov
0

Integrated Neighbourhood Teams: Where are we now?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Since the publication of the Fuller Report in May the idea of Integrated Neighbourhood Teams has come to the fore, specifically as the report indicated that Primary Care Networks would “evolve” into these new teams.  But what actually is an Integrated Neighbourhood Teams and what impact will they really have?

A helpful starting point is to consider the Integrated Neighbourhood Teams that already exist.  There are a number of different examples of these now working in practice, so what can we learn from them, their operation and their relationship with general practice?

This example from Manchester is typical in that it focusses on the bringing together and co-location of the social work and community nursing teams.  The link with general practice is less clear.  It seems a GP is the ‘locality director’ but the nature of the relationship between practices (and the PCN) and the Integrated Neighbourhood Team appears to be a voluntary one (they “work closely” together) rather than anything more formal.

Integrated Neighbourhood Teams also exist in Suffolk.  They are described here as staff working together from, “a number of different teams/ professions: social care for adults and children/families, health, police, mental health, district and borough teams, along with the voluntary sector”.  General practice are conspicuous by their absence, and in my conversation on the podcast with those behind these teams they explained that one of the things they want to work on is the relationship between the PCNs and the Integrated Neighbourhood Teams (i.e. it is not currently clear).

In Leicestershire the Integrated Neighbourhood Teams are described as operating in parallel and alongside primary care and Primary Care Networks.  The majority of care takes place, “working as individual practice or in networks (Primary Care Networks)”, but this is different to Integrated Neighbourhood Teams which are described as “multi-disciplinary teams of general practice staff, community nurses and therapists, social care staff and the voluntary sector” focussing on specific areas of care such as long term condition management and active management of at risk patients.

In East Lancashire the relationship between the Integrated Neighbourhood Team and the GP practice appears to be primarily one of the GP referring patients to the team.  GPs have been asked to share access to medical records when appropriate with health and social care organisations within the local neighbourhood team.  The way it works appears to be that a patient is assigned a single case manager whose role it is to develop and review the care plan for patients referred to the team and to “communicate with other people involved in your care and provide regular updates to your GP”.

What emerges from these examples is a pretty clear sense that Integrated Neighbourhood Teams, certainly in their current configuration, operate in parallel to general practice and Primary Care Networks, rather than as a replacement for them.  Indeed, taking the Leicestershire example, the Primary Care Network is a component of the Integrated Neighbourhood Team (one assumes it brings the practices and their shared teams together) but is clearly separate from it.

Increasingly it is looking not so much that PCNs will “evolve into” Integrated Neighbourhood Teams, but rather that they will contribute to them.  What we are probably to expect, then, are contractual specifications for PCNs as to how they need to support and enable the working of these Integrated Neighbourhood Teams, rather than a more fundamental change of PCNs.

This makes sense in that the timing for the introduction of Integrated Neighbourhood Teams in the Fuller report is April 2023 in the most deprived areas and April 2024 everywhere else, i.e. within the timeframe of the existing PCN DES (which we already know will run its course through to March 2024).  It could be that the recent update to the PCN DES anticipatory care specification (“PCNs must contribute to ICS-led conversations on the local development and implementation of anticipatory care working with other providers with whom anticipatory care will be delivered jointly”) is specifically intended so that PCNs will play their role within emerging Integrated Neighbourhood Teams.

Things may of course change, but for now it looks like Integrated Neighbourhood Teams may represent more of an opportunity for general practice to influence the deployment and effectiveness of local community teams, rather than pose any major existential threat to the future of PCNs or the independence of general practice.

9
nov
1

Why System Primary Care Leadership Groups Do Not Work

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

In many areas the Integrated Care System has set up a Primary Care Leadership group.  These groups are purportedly to discuss and decide all things primary care, and include membership from PCNs and federations, along in many places with leaders from pharmacy, optometry and dentistry.  The problem with these groups is that they simply do not work.

Often these groups are chaired by senior GPs from with the ICS, and on paper have many of the people that you think would need to be there in order for it to act as a leadership group.  But that is not how they function, and in no way can they be described as providing leadership to primary care.

This will not be a surprising analysis for those who have attended such groups.  If the roots and tentacles of these meetings go up into the system, rather than down into front line primary care, it is not a surprise that those on the front line feel zero investment in any decisions that these groups make.

Where does the ownership of these meetings sit?  If it is sitting within the system it is not sitting within frontline primary care.  These groups end up as simply a meeting that certain PCN CDs and GP leaders attend once a month, with no actual leadership functionality.

The underpinning issue for general practice is that both its leaders and the system are struggling with its transition from commissioner to provider.

As a commissioner general practice had a clear leadership voice at the system table, where its role was to speak on behalf of the practice populations it serves.  It has done this in various guises for over 30 years, ever since the purchaser provider split was introduced, along with the notion of a primary care led NHS.

But the new model of care is different.  In an Integrated Care System each provider is responsible for working together to improve outcomes for the local populations.  Outcomes are no longer the sole preserve of primary care.  All providers need to work out how they can contribute in partnership with others to improving these outcomes.

For general practice this means it is now a partner as a provider, not as a commissioner.  As a provider its leaders cannot operate under the statutory authority that commissioning groups (in any of their guises) provided for them.  Instead its leaders have to connect directly with front line practices, work with them, engage with them, and act on their behalf in order to be able to carry out their role as a leader of general practice who can work in partnership with other providers.

System primary care leadership groups miss out this critical step, because they are still operating in the old paradigm of GP leaders having some sort of system-imbued power over their practices, when the reality is they do not.  Any primary care leadership group that is built top down rather than bottom up will not be effective in the new system, because it is built on sand.

Instead, a general practice leadership group requires the authority, support and mandate of its member practices.  It needs to be a group that connects directly with its front line teams.  It must have a focus on what general practice needs to survive and thrive in the new system, how its role in the system can practically be developed, and how its resilience an be strengthened.  It needs to be recognised by practices and have its roots and tentacles firmly within the practices. Only then can it operate as a leadership group that will add value to the system.

2
nov
0

Creating a Local General Practice “Executive”

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Integrated Care Systems (ICSs) require general practice to work together as a collective, if it wants to hold any kind of direct influence.  In recent weeks I have written about the need to form a single local leadership group for general practice, set priorities, put a single point of access in place, create a representation process, and establish a mandate from practices.  But to be effective all of these require something else.

Local general practice cannot realistically operate as a system partner if it takes the form of a meeting that happens once a week or once a fortnight.  There needs to be some form of dedicated executive capacity that can (amongst other things):

  • Set the agenda for leadership group meetings and ensure actions are carried out
  • Act as the single point of access
  • Drive the process required to set local priorities
  • Coordinate the representation of general practice at key meetings
  • Ensure effective communication with both practices and the system takes place

If the collective use of the shared general practice leadership team is to be optimised, then a dedicated smaller team is needed to make sure this happens and enact all of the things above.  Just as the Board of any organisation cannot function effectively without an executive, the same is true of general practice.

The key questions this presents are where will this capacity come from and will it carry the trust and support of general practice more widely.  These are not easy questions, and the answers will inevitably vary according to local circumstances.

There are two types of additional capacity required.  There is additional clinical leadership capacity, and dedicated management capacity.  I have seen the clinical leadership capacity take a number of forms, but most commonly it is a small group consisting of the LMC Chair, federation lead and a lead PCN CD.  What these have had in common is that these individuals have been able to use funding/time from their existing roles to avoid the need for the establishment of the executive creating an additional cost for general practice.  The last thing general practice needs right now is an additional overhead.  Instead those leaders choose to make this executive work a key part of their existing role.

Dedicated management capacity is harder to come by.  If an area is in the fortunate position of having a federation that sees its role as evolving to support local general practice, then the federation management support may be able to step in and provide this.  However, I suspect this limits the number such areas to less than a handful!

Some places use the system primary care lead (i.e. the person who used to be the CCG primary care lead), but this requires that individual to have a good relationship with, and be trusted by, wider general practice.  In some areas the PCNs have sought funding from the system to have a shared senior manager, who is then able to act into this role.  Bear in mind it is in the system’s interest for primary care to self-organise and so in the absence of any obvious local contenders it is worth seeking financial support from the system to find someone.

The other problem with establishing an executive function is that it concentrates power into the hands of a much smaller group of people.  It is very difficult to bring a multitude of general practice organisations together (practices, PCNs, federations, LMC etc), and I have written previously about the challenge of any leadership group establishing a mandate to make decisions.  This becomes even more difficult for a small executive group which contains less direct representation from all parties.

The key here is making sure that the delegated powers of the executive from the leadership group are clearly defined, and are reviewed and developed over time.  The authority of the executive, and its ability to act, comes via the leadership group.  It needs to ensure there are sufficient feedback mechanisms, and clarity on the decisions it can and cannot take on behalf of the leadership group.

Ultimately, putting such an executive in place will be key to how successful general practice is as it attempts to operate as a partner alongside the trusts within the integrated care system.  It is not without its challenges, but having it will ensure the proactive leadership that general practice requires is in place.

26
oct
0

Is this the same Jeremy Hunt?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

You will recall that Jeremy Hunt was the Secretary of State for Health from 2012 until 2018, a period that marked some of the darkest years for general practice.  It was not until 2016 that the challenges general practice was facing were finally acknowledged, and the General Practice Forward View was published with the first cash injection into the service for over a decade.

But this was too late.  The great exodus of GPs from the service had begun (which had long been both predicted and ignored), and here we are over six years later with less GPs than the GPFV started with.  At no point in Jeremy Hunt’s tenure did general practice ever feel that its value was truly recognised.

So it was with a sense of real astonishment that I read the findings of the inquiry commissioned by Jeremy Hunt in his role as Chair of the Health and Social Care Select Committee.

When the inquiry into general practice was first announced it was hard not to be sceptical about why it had been called (you can read my thoughts from the time here).  One of the key questions was whether we could trust Jeremy Hunt, despite his motivation at the time to be a thorn in his own government’s side, which did seem to be working in general practice’s favour.

The report was published three days before Jeremy Hunt resigned to take on his role as Chancellor of the Exchequer, and it is without doubt one the most incisive and supportive government reports about general practice in recent times.

Don’t believe me? Here are some direct quotes from the report:

  • “In response to this Report the Government and NHS England should be clear in acknowledging that there is a crisis in general practice and set out in more detail the steps they are taking in response to this crisis in the short term, to protect patient safety, strengthen continuity, improve access and reduce GP workloads.” (p12)
  • “Continuity of care is beneficial for all patient interactions even if it cannot always be offered. It should not therefore be available only for patients with complex needs, because part of the purpose of a long-term relationship between a doctor and patient is to prevent chronic or long-term illness before it happens.” (p4)
  • “The Government and NHS England must acknowledge the decline in continuity of care in recent years and make it an explicit national priority to reverse this decline” (p25)
  • “Rather than hinting it may scrap the partnership model, the Government should strengthen it.” (p4)

The report contains a whole series of recommendations for government, nearly all of which are hard to argue with.  They include abolishing QOF and the IIF and reinvesting the finding in the core contract (p32), uplifting ARRS to include the costs of training and supervision (p15), limiting the list size per GP and committing to reducing this over time (p28), and allowing practices to operate as Limited Liability Partnerships to limit the amount of risk to which GP partners are exposed (p38).

There are more, and you can read the full list of recommendations on pp39-45 of the full report which you can find here.

What happens now?  Is general practice finally about to turn a corner?  Well, not quite.  The process is that the government has 2 months in which to respond to the recommendations made by the Health and Social Care Select Committee.  At that point we will find out which of the recommendations will turn into concrete action and which will disappear under the carpet, so let’s not get too excited just yet.

What will be fascinating to see will be the role that a certain Jeremy Hunt plays in the response to what is essentially his own report.  Of course by the time you read this he may no longer have a role in the cabinet, but assuming he does will he be prepared to put his money where his mouth is?  Has the leopard really changed its spots? Time will tell.

In the meantime I would fully recommend that you take the time to read the report (or at least the full list of recommendations in pp39-45 which reflect the report better than the summary document that goes with it).  If nothing else it feels like a recognition of where general practice is, the value that it adds and the need for action to be taken.

19
oct
1

Can independent GP organisations operate as a collective?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

The biggest challenge to general practice operating effectively within an integrated care system is gaining alignment across all of the general practice organisations (practices, PCNs, federations and GP providers and LMC).  As previously outlined, the first step is to create a local GP leadership group.  But what decisions can that group actually take?

The challenge such a group faces is that it has no formal authority.  If one PCN decides it doesn’t agree with a decision made by the group, and is going to plough its own furrow rather than toe the corporate line, what ability does the group have to enforce its decision?  Very little, because attendance and participation in the group is voluntary.

General practice’s ability to operate collectively is what will give it authority within an Integrated Care System (ICS).  If general practice signs up to a course of action through its leadership group but then a large proportion of the practices take a different course that authority will quickly slip away. Or if the federation or one of the PCNs is having side conversations this will undermine the leadership group and its value will be rapidly diminished.

What can general practice leaders do to build the authority such a group requires?

A common mistake at this point is to start by trying to create governance structures to establish this authority.  The thinking is that a hierarchy will enable the leadership to enforce its decisions, in a way that cannot be done with a voluntary group.  But the reality is that even within a governance structure PCNs or GP provider organisations will still go rogue if they are unhappy. A governance structure will just paper over pre-existing cracks, and while it may be a helpful end point once ways of working have been established it certainly is not the place to start.

However, there are two key actions that GP leadership groups can take.  The first is to ensure that decisions are made by consensus.

GPs, more than any other professional group that I have worked with, love a vote.  There is something clean about making a decision based on the democratic ideals of one person one vote.  The problem with a vote is that it creates winners and losers, and it is the losers that are prone to taking matters into their own hands and working against the group decision.

There is also a laziness around voting, because it often (not always) means that not enough time and energy has been put into creating a solution or a way forward that everyone is happy with.  Independent general practice organisations working together in one leadership group requires a commitment by all to working though issues until a solution that everyone can sign up to is found.  Whilst this is hard and time consuming, it is the only way the group can make effective collective decisions that everyone will stand by.

The second action is to create a golden thread from the leadership group through to the practices.  If core general practice has no idea that the leadership group exists or what its function is, it will struggle to have any real collective mandate.  Conversely, if each practice has a very clear sense of what the leadership group is, how it works, and why it is important, then the challenge for the leaders of groups sitting in between practices and the leadership group (individual PCNs, federations etc) of having to explain why certain decisions have been taken is significantly reduced.

This second action is also difficult.  It requires a level of over-communication that GP leaders have not historically been good at.  The general rule is that if you think you have communicated twice as much as you need to, you are probably just about hitting the minimum amount needed.  A direct connection and visibility between those leading the collective group and individual practices is required.  The group and its function must be simple to explain (one of the reasons CCGs struggled was because they could never really explain themselves in sufficiently simple and relevant terms to practices) and have buy in from the front line of general practice.

Establishing a mandate and an authority for the leadership group is probably the biggest challenge of all for general practice as it seeks to exert influence within an integrated care system.  But even though it is difficult, the good news is the ability to make it happen lies solely within the control of general practice itself.

12
oct
0

Operating in an ICS: Single Point of Access

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

One of the reasons for general practice to come together in a local area is to so that it can be an effective partner in the new Integrated Care System (ICS).  But what it doesn’t want to happen is that it simply becomes easier for additional work to be foisted onto the service.

Historically general practice has been seen as difficult to do business with, because it is made up of a large number of individual practices in any local area (along with PCNs, federation, LMC etc) and because the primary route of engaging with general practice is via the national contract rather than any local mechanism.

Integrated Care Systems have been tasked with finding their own ways of engaging general practice as a partner.  What the Fuller Report made clear was that rather than any national solution being imposed, local areas would develop their own.  While this in part has averted the threat of nationalisation that loomed large earlier this year, bringing general practice directly into the NHS within local areas (ie putting practices under the auspices of the local acute or community trust) may end up being the ‘local’ solution if general practice cannot demonstrate that it can operate as a system partner.

I have written previously that the first step towards this is general practice creating its own leadership group.  A key function of this board is that it operates as a single point of access for the system into general practice.

For a single point of access to be effective a number of things need to happen.  First is that all the local general practice organisations (PCNs, federations, LMC etc) need to commit to making it work.  The system can (and does) use the plurality of organisations within general practice to play it off against itself.  If one PCN says no to something the system can usually find another that will agree to what it wants.

What a single point of access requires is that all organisations across general practice commit to redirecting any approaches back to this access point.  This means all approaches will be treated in the same way and that general practice can start to provide consistency of responses.

Second is that the leadership group needs to identify one, or at most two, people to control the process.  These are the people that anyone wanting to access general practice are redirected to.  By having a very small number of people controlling the process it ensures a consistent approach to requests is taken.

The single point of access needs to be people, not a meeting.  When it is a meeting there is no filter in place.  Whoever wants to come to talk to general practice can come, without anyone controlling whether it is appropriate or not or whether it is a valuable use of the limited time GP leaders have together.

What the person in charge of the process for general practice does is act as a gatekeeper, and decide whether attending the leadership meeting is appropriate, or whether a paper could be sent round, or whether it just requires a simple message on the WhatsApp group, or what further work might be required before any item can come to the group.

Operating a single point of access in this way means that general practice can operate as an effective partner with the system by providing consistent, coherent and unified responses to system requests.  At the same time it means that general practice can keep control of its own agenda, not allow its time to be wasted, and maintain a focus on its own priorities.

5
oct
0

Getting Representation Right

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

One of the areas that initially feels quite straightforward but turns out to be relatively complex is representation.  How general practice is represented in system meetings and system discussions, and how this is done effectively, is an area that insufficient thought is given to, and as a result is an area in which general practice is currently faring badly in most areas.

It seems easy.  A GP representative is needed for a meeting and someone needs to go.  In the end someone volunteers/is volunteered and job done, general practice is being represented.

But who is this GP representing?  Themselves? Their practice? Their PCN? The whole of local general practice?  If they agree something in the meeting does that mean that the whole of local general practice also agrees to it.  Probably not.  So that means they are not representing local general practice.  Instead they are most likely giving a view.  Which means that general practice is not actually being represented at the meeting.

The complexity comes because as a disperse group of practices, PCNs and general practice organisations we are generally not clear that anyone can represent us if we are not there ourselves.  Indeed sometimes we feel the need to attend simply because a colleague is attending and we either don’t agree with their views or are concerned that they will use their attendance to exploit the best opportunities for themselves or their practice/PCN.  Even if we agree someone can represent us we rarely agree what it is they can or cannot sign up to, or what outcome we want them to achieve.

The starting point for this process is establishing a single leadership group for local general practice (which I have written about here).  I have also written about establishing priorities for general practice, which will help any representative understand what they may want to achieve.  But the leadership group need to be clear how representation will work in practice.

The first question is who will do the representation.  The choice tends to be between whether one or two key individuals carry out most of the representation on behalf of general practice (like the Chief Executive or Medical Director of the acute trust would), or whether it is shared out amongst multiple colleagues so that the burden of meeting attendance is distributed and more manageable.

My preference is for the former option.  The reality is that much of the system decision making happens not at the meetings themselves, but as a result of the relationships between those at the meetings.  If a small number of individuals are cultivating these relationships on behalf of general practice the influence is likely to be much greater than if a different GP is attending each meeting.  It also means there will be a consistency to the views given by general practice, and different GP representatives cannot be played off against each other, unaware of what their colleagues have said in other meetings.

Available time is the enemy.  In some places a senior manager (such as a federation Chief Executive) is used to carry out this representation as they have the time and skills to be effective in this role.  Where a dispersed model is used then there needs to be one or two leads with overall responsibility for representation who can both brief and receive feedback from the representatives so that all of the system information and dynamics are held in one place.

The second question is what process will be put in place for representation.  The first instinct here tends to be to create a very prescribed framework where what people can or cannot agree is explicit, with clear guidelines on what must be brought back to the wider group for sign off.  The problem is that it emasculates the representative in the meeting as they are not able to agree what others in the meeting can.  The real world is also unpredictable, and so what actually happens rarely matches any predetermined framework.

The process has to be built on trust.  The group has to trust their representative that they will have the skills and experience to agree/not agree to the right things and to bring the right things back for wider discussion.  What is helpful to put in place is a regular review process so that the wider leadership group can feedback to the representative(s) what is working or what is not (e.g. where they may have overstepped the line and agreed something they should not have, or where the feedback could have been more detailed) so that representation develops and becomes more effective over time.

There are two areas where GP representatives generally fall down.  The first is communication back as to what is due to be discussed in a meeting, what has happened in the meetings and what has been agreed (most often due to lack of time).  A process for ensuring this communication takes place needs to be agreed and put in place.  If not, the lack of communication leads to an erosion of trust, and the whole representation process can collapse.

The second area is that of action.  In many of these meetings actions are required as a result of whatever has been agreed.  GP representatives often do not ensure these actions are carried out (again generally because of a lack of time), which in turn means general practice can lose its influence and any gains achieved during the meeting.  Key here is putting some management or administration support alongside the representative(s) to ensure that any actions are carried out.

Getting representation right is not easy.  An early challenge for GP leadership groups is working through how this will happen, and then refining this process over time so that it builds and strengthens the influence general practice is having on the system.

28
sep
0

Priorities for Local General Practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

If general practice wants to influence the local Integrated Care System (ICS) then it needs to be clear what influence it wants to have.  If it doesn’t have priorities of its own then how can it expect these to be reflected in the priorities of the new system?

Last week I wrote about the importance of each area creating a local leadership group for general practice, including as a minimum the PCN CDs, LMC and federation (where there is one).  However, if an area puts such a group in place the risk is that this will simply be used by the rest of the system as a means of talking to general practice about what is on their agenda, and end up as yet another meeting that doesn’t help or extend the influence that general practice has.

Indeed, in some areas we are seeing these leadership groups attempt to be established by the system (as opposed to by general practice itself).  These are rooted in the need for the system to have one place that it can come to ‘do business’ with general practice – they are about making it easier for system partners, not about strengthening the voice and influence of general practice.

General practice needs to set its own priorities first.  But what are these priorities of?  If when generating priorities what comes out is a list that looks like more GPs, more money and less work for general practice then it is hard to see how this is going to help general practice increase its influence.  The system will not take the service seriously.

While these things are important, what the local leadership group needs is priorities that do two things: strengthen how GP practices can be supported by joint working; and identify the specific influence that general practice wants to have on the local system.

What type of things could these priorities be?  Each local area needs to decide this for itself, but it could be things such as:

  • Strengthening the resilience support for local practices (potentially pushing for resources for this to be transferred from the system to within general practice itself)
  • Supporting practices with the recruitment of hard to find staff groups
  • Practical steps to reduce the shift of work from secondary to primary care
  • Putting a local communications or media campaign in place to educate the public about the range and value of the roles that now form part of local general practice
  • Ensuring general practice plays a leadership role in the new Integrated Neighbourhood Teams as they develop

These are just examples, and won’t be right for your area, but they give you an idea of the type of priorities it could be helpful for local general practice to have.  They need to be translatable into practical actions that general practice can influence the local system to take. To be effective they also need to resonate at an individual practice level.

How do you set these priorities?  What is key here is engaging local practices in the process.  The local leadership team cannot just tell practices what the priorities are.  For them to have real value they need the support of all practices.

This could be done by asking practices what the priorities should be and building up from there.  The risk with this approach is that it could build expectations of the leadership team that may not be realistic.  A better option may be for the leadership team to identify a range of potential priorities and then involve all practices in the decision-making as to what constitutes the final list.  This process  would also provide an opportunity to explain to practices what the leadership group is, why it is needed, and what it is trying to achieve.

Once it has an agreed set of priorities in place the leadership group is in a much better place to control its agenda and how it spends its time, ensure that the primary focus of its energy is on delivering these priorities, and establish a real and productive influence in the local system.

21
sep
0

Local General Practice Inc

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

I am going to write over the next few weeks a series of articles outlining the actions that general practice can take in a local area to be effective within the new integrated care system (ICS) environment.  This is the first of these articles, and is about putting a single board or leadership group in place for local general practice.

I have written previously on the potentially huge impact the loss of CCGs and the introduction of ICSs could have on general practice.  With general practice losing its system voice as a commissioner, it has to create one as a provider.  All signs from the Fuller report indicate that more of general practice funding will be channelled via ICSs (as opposed to the national contract) in future, so as a minimum local general practice needs to be organised to at least be able to negotiate effectively.

The first action that general practice needs to take is to put a single leadership board for local general practice in place.  As a minimum this needs to include the PCN Clinical Directors and the LMC Chair.  The system recognises PCNs, and the LMC has a statutory role to play.  If there is a local federation they also need to be included on it.

If general practice is not united it will be weak in the new system.  Different facets of the service will be played off against each other, as the system asks different people the same question until it gets the response it is seeking.  Equally, influence at system meetings is nullified when different parts of general practice argue against each other.  Strength comes from unity, and a single general practice board is the first step towards this.

There are a couple of important considerations to make about setting up such a board.  The first is one of scale.  Should this general practice board be at the level of the ICS, or of the local area (which more likely relates to the “place” area within the ICS)?  Whilst influence at an ICS level is important, the more natural grouping and ability for short term cohesion within general practice is at the local level.  One LMC, less than 10 PCNs and one federation feels both more manageable and more likely to be able to focus on common issues than one operating at an ICS scale.

Rather than having one large ICS group it would be much better for there to be several local place-based groups, and for the leaders of these to work together to influence at ICS level.

The second consideration is one of ownership.  There has been a tendency for local systems to try and set up these primary care leadership groups.  Groups set up in this way rarely work for a number of reasons.  First, the scale is often set at an ICS rather than local level, so there is little in common binding the members.  Second, the agenda is generally set by the system, and so becomes about an ability for the system to interact with general practice rather than general practice being able to influence the system.  Third, they quickly become just another meeting that busy PCN CDs and general practice leaders have to go to rather than being a place where important decisions are made, and so attendance and then influence of these meetings becomes poor.

Instead these groups need to be owned and created by general practice.  General practice needs to set the agenda.  There can be some space allocated for others to come to talk to general practice, but this is secondary to general practice working together to influence the system.  It needs to be where local general practice works out where and how it will influence the place-based board, where it sorts out general practice issues (like extended access) together, and where it shares information about local system issues.  If the system is running the meeting for general practice, this is not what the meeting will achieve.

This raises the interesting question of who will chair the meeting.  I know of a series of different places across the country who are already running these local leadership groups, and the role of the chair varies significantly.  In one it is a PCN CD, in another it is the LMC Chair, and in another it is the senior manager from the local federation.  What all these people have in common, however, is that they are trusted and respected by the rest of the GP leadership team.  It is not about getting the right role as chair, it is about getting the right person, and each local area will need to work out who that is for themselves.

Putting a local general practice leadership group in place is important but it is only the first step.  If general practice is going to survive and thrive in the new system it will then need to develop this group so that it is effective and has real influence in the system.  In the coming weeks I will outline the steps such a board needs to take to build its impact.

14
sep
0

5 Steps to Improve Joint Working in General Practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Effective joint working is the key to successful general practice.  It may be joint working between the partners in a practice, joint working between the practices in a PCN, or joint working between the PCNs in an area.  Joint working is difficult, and where it is not effective individuals, practices and general practice as a whole all suffer.

The most important metric for joint working is trust.  How much do I trust my partners/the other practices/the other PCNs?  Where my trust is low I assume the intentions of others are poor, I avoid interaction where I can, and I am unwilling to be helpful because I do not believe there would be any reciprocation.  Life in a low trust environment is generally tense, unpleasant and often draining.

I spend much of my time supporting joint working within general practice.  Here are 5 steps that I have found to be extremely helpful in shifting from a low to higher trust environment:

  1. Stop communicating primarily by email. One clear indicator of poor relationships is where the majority of the communication takes place by email.  The problem with email is that it is one way and open to misinterpretation.  You are not there to correct any misunderstandings when the email is being read.

 

  1. Communicate by talking at least once a week. It is far better to have a short conversation of 20-30 minutes once a week than to have a (poorly attended) monthly meeting interspersed by heavy amounts of email communication.  Simply shifting the mode of communication from email to conversation in this way can have a huge impact.  It shows respect (people feel more valued when they are told things in person rather than by email), and allows questions and concerns to be answered and dealt with straight away, as well as preventing misunderstandings from festering.

 

  1. Communicate in person. Whilst there has been a huge time and convenience benefit to meeting and talking online, it is very difficult to develop and improve relationships in a virtual space.  It is too easy for individuals to simply disengage from the conversation (how often are we in meetings where the majority of people have their cameras off and are on mute?), rather than have their concerns noted and dealt with.  Online it is difficult to spend enough time understanding and valuing each other as people, as without shared coffee breaks or pre-meeting chat we focus only on the business.

I worked recently with a PCN that shift from monthly virtual meetings and email as the primary communication route, to weekly half hour virtual meetings and a monthly face to face meeting with far less reliance on emails.  The impact on relationships across the PCN was transformational.  Trust that had become low was restored.  There was a shared confidence in a new sense of transparency, and a new willingness to take actions together as a group of practices.

  1. Show vulnerability. The counterintuitive thing about building trust is that you build more trust by sharing your weaknesses than your strengths, and asking for help builds more trust than offering to help.  If I ask you for help I show that I respect you, that I believe you have strengths that I do not have and that I trust you enough to show you my weakness.  Conversely if I offer to help you I reinforce your belief that I think I am better than you, that I have no sense of my own weaknesses, and even that I may have a secret agenda to take you over – however well-intentioned the offer may be.
  2. Admit when you are wrong. We all make mistakes.  Sometimes we are convinced that a course of action is the right one to take, but with hindsight we can see the error of our ways.  But it makes a huge difference to other people if we are prepared to put our hands up and say we are sorry when we have made a mistake.

I worked with one federation who had a difficult relationship with some of the PCNs in its area.  But this all suddenly changed when in one meeting the federation acknowledged that it had made mistakes in the past, said sorry for the impact of those mistakes, and asked what it could do to put them right.  Almost immediately the relationships were changed and moved to a much more positive place.

While it is generally true that trust can be hard to gain and is easy to lose, my experience has been that by starting with a good intent and taking the right actions in line with these 5 steps trust can be rebuilt surprisingly quickly.

7
sep
0

How Much Autonomy are GP Practices Prepared to Give Up?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Much of the strength of general practice comes from its autonomy.  While the rest of the NHS totters under the weight of being part of one of the largest centralised systems in the world, GP practices are free to operate as they choose to deliver the contracts they have agreed.  While this autonomy carries its risks (the practice is the business, not simply a part of the business), it also creates huge freedom for practices to operate exactly as they want.

The pressures on practices mean that the sustainability of these independent, autonomous businesses is coming increasingly under threat.  Growth in funding does not keep pace with the growth in workload, and the staff required (especially GPs) in many areas simply cannot be found.

Here comes the challenge. In order to improve sustainability, practices have to find new ways of working.  These nearly always involve working with other practices.  These could be things such as creating a shared visiting team, building a staff bank, establishing a document management service, putting in place a prescribing hub, or any number of other things.  All of them will make a difference to practices, but all of them involve working with other practices.

If working together can make a difference to practice sustainability, particularly now when individual practice sustainability is under such pressure, why is that so few practices undertake these shared activities?

It is because working with other practices requires a ceding of some autonomy.  If five practices are working together to create a document management hub, they all have to agree to a single way of working for actioning and coding the incoming documents.  It doesn’t work if there are five different ways of doing things.  In order to gain the benefits of the shared hub, each practice has to give up its individual autonomy on how it does things and agree to the single collective way of doing things.

Instinctively GP partners and GP practices resist any attempt to curtail their autonomy.  It is in the DNA of GP practices to be extremely protective of their own autonomy.  This is why joint working is hard, however rational and straightforward it might seem on paper.

There are two critical components to enabling collaborative working in general practice.  The first is a shared belief that continuing on our own is unsustainable and that joint working will make a difference.  The second is that practices trust those whom they are ceding autonomy to, most commonly the other practices that they are working with.  If we do not trust them, and in particular those leading whatever the change is, we are unlikely to go ahead no matter how clear the potential benefits.

As an aside, this is why PCNs are difficult.  The starting point of PCNs was not a shared understanding that joint action is required, but rather a contractual requirement.  The initial level of trust between the practices thrown together in a PCN was usually low, unless there had been some history of effective joint working previously.  So PCNs started with a set of practices who were supposed to work together, but all of whom were hugely protective of their own individual practice autonomy.

As the sustainability crisis worsens, the need for joint working gets greater.  The challenge for GP practices is whether they are prepared to cede some autonomy now to enable this joint working to take place and be effective.  The risk is that refusing to give up some autonomy now will lead to a complete loss of autonomy in future when the practice reaches a crisis point from which it is not able to recover.

24
aug
0

What Should General Practice Do With PCNs?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

There is a danger starting with a title like this that it will provoke many into further calls for general practice simply to abandon PCNs and have nothing more to do with them.  This was the call at the national LMC conference, and as I understand it has become BMA policy.  But as I have previously written, such a move has the ‘cutting off your nose to spite your face’ feel to it, and a more nuanced approach is required.  So what could this be?

The challenge is that all of the additional funding and resources for general practice over the course of the current 5 year deal comes via PCNs, and general practice simply cannot afford to do without this.  Any move away from PCNs will not result in the funding being transferred into the core contract, but in a loss of control of these resources to other organisations eager to take them on.

We know that the Fuller Report has laid out a direction of travel for PCNs to evolve into Integrated Neighbourhood Teams.  This means the focus of PCNs moving away from GP practices and towards multi-agency working across local neighbourhoods.

What will happen to the funding of PCNs after the existing 5 year deal for general practice expires in 2024?  The funding for them will potentially grow (neighbourhood multi-agency working is becoming more not less important to the system), and will most likely continue to consume any additional funding for general practice.  It is also highly likely to come via the local Integrated Care System rather than via the national contract.

So the additional money for general practice is, and will continue to be, tied up in PCNs, but the control of PCNs may start to shift away from practices.

I have written previously of the need for local general practice within each area to start to work together to create a collective voice and influence for general practice as a provider.  My question now is to consider what role PCNs should play in this collective action?

Should the voice of general practice in an area be channelled through the PCNs and the PCN Clinical Directors?  After all, it is the PCNs that the system wants to talk to.

Right now PCNs and PCN Clinical Directors should form part of any collective general practice voice, particularly as the Clinical Directors all come from general practice at present.  But in future the Clinical Directors of the Integrated Neighbourhood Teams may not come from general practice.  Some may come from the community trust, the acute trust, or the council.

Meanwhile general practice needs to create its own provider voice in the system, particularly as its commissioning voice is being lost.  But it needs to build this as the voice of the GP practices at its heart.  It needs to do this in a way that means it can both harness the resources for general practice that come via PCNs, but also when general practice in future has to negotiate its role within the Integrated Neighbourhood Teams it can do so because there is a clear enough separation between what is local general practice and what are the activities of these new multi-agency teams.

This means the local general practice leadership voice cannot be solely that of the PCN Clinical Directors.  The LMC and any local GP provider must also be involved, and there must be a way of ensuring that there is route for voicing the needs of practices, and negotiating on their behalf, that is separate from the needs of PCNs.

While this nuance is difficult, I think ultimately it will largely come down to leadership.  If local GP leaders can work together for the good of the practices and their populations, regardless of the role that they are in, then they can create a strong leadership voice that they can iterate with the changing environment.

10
aug
0

Making the Transition from Commissioner to Provider

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The impact of the formal establishment of Integrated Care Systems and the abolition of CCGs may not have been felt straight away, but there is no escaping the huge consequences this has for general practice.  The question is whether general practice can shift from influencing as a commissioner to influencing as a provider quickly enough to prevent any real damage being done during the transition period.

For the last 30 years, ever since the introduction of the internal market, the influence of general practice has grown through the commissioning route.  It started slowly at first, with the initial forays of GP fundholding, but then steadily grew until Clinical Commissioning Groups were established built around a membership of GP practices.

While the influence of general practice grew through the commissioning route, its influence as a provider steadily receded.  A strong provider voice for general practice has not been needed because GP leaders were already at the system table via the CCG.  Indeed, GP provider representation was actively discouraged because of concerns around conflict to interest.  At best we had GP federations and GP provider organisations purporting to be the voice of general practice provision, but in reality they represented additional provision undertaken by these organisations above and beyond core general practice.

This has been of little concern to the profession because the main representation of general practice takes place nationally via the negotiation of the national contract.  It is this contract that has been pivotal to the sustainability of the service, much more important than any additional local income.

But now this is a problem for two reasons.  First, the representation of general practice at a national level is finding it difficult to secure an effective deal for the profession.  This is encapsulated by the self-defeating policy to promote the withdrawal of practices from the PCN DES, despite all the agreed additional resource for general practice over the last 5 years coming via this route.  This creates a huge risk for general practice, because it relies on a premise that this funding will be reinvested into the core contract instead, when a much more likely outcome is simply that practices will lose control of the PCN resources.

Second, all the signs are that much more practice income will come via the local route rather than via the national contract in future.  This was signalled strongly in the Fuller Report, and backed up by a letter from all 42 ICS Chief Executives.  If this is the case, how organised is local general practice to negotiate as a provider with its local system.  Are LMCs up to the job?  Is the infrastructure of LMCs sufficient for the size of what may be required? While some clearly are, there is a huge variation amongst LMCs across the country.  The system is going to want more ‘integration’ by general practice in return for more resources, so how are PCNs going to play into these discussions?  Will PCNs and LMCs be joined up, or will they be played off against each other?

For the first time in over 30 years local general practice needs to establish its voice and influence as a provider in the local system.  The support that has historically been in place from commissioners will quickly recede in the new system.  Much of the responsibility that has sat with national leaders and the national contract will become the responsibility of local leaders.  It will be up to general practice in each local area to support itself.  LMCs, PCNs, federations and practices will need to work together to ensure local general practice is unified.

27
jul
0

Can GP Federations Continue to Stand Alone?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The world is moving quickly and the need to take a step back and consider how everything fits together is becoming more and more frequent.  For GP federations the move into Integrated Care Systems (ICSs) is creating one of these moments.

Historically GP federations have been set up in local areas often by a relatively small number of enthusiastic GPs.  They generally began with high expectations, and then over time relationships with member practices have waxed and waned, particularly as it has been challenging for federations to fulfil the delivery requirements needed to establish themselves as a provider and at the same time carry out the amount of communication necessary for practices to feel engaged and part of the organisation.

Then along came PCNs.  Up until that point it had been easy for federations to describe themselves as the ‘at-scale’ arm of general practice, as there were only individual practices and the federation.  But with PCNs came a mandated at-scale operation of general practice in every local area.  Now there are practices, PCNs and a federation, and it has made it more difficult for federations to articulate their role in the system.

The preference has generally been to describe themselves as the at-scale provider across any given area, as their remit tends to mirror old CCG areas and hence be larger than nearly all individual PCNs.  The mainstay of many federations has been the delivery of extended access, and recently federations and PCNs have been undertaking a round of relatively strained conversations to agree what the federation will do and what PCNs will do, now that responsibility for the service has shifted to PCNs.

But it is the emergence of ICSs that is bringing things to a head.  General practice needs to be able to operate as a collective entity within an ICS “place” area.  Within such an area there is often a number of PCNs, an LMC and (if one exists) a federation.  The question is whether, in such an environment, a federation can stand alone as a GP provider organisation, separate from core general practice?

This is problematic because the system wants to do business with general practice as a whole (not a limited company that can access GPs to deliver services).  Whereas in the past federations could point to their practice membership as a proxy for working across all practices, with PCNs in place this is no longer the case as they have a much clearer practice membership.  Federations were never really set up as a way of other organisations being able to do business with general practice, so now federations have a problem.

The most obvious way forward would seem to be to strengthen the federation/PCN relationship.  If federations can be the glue that holds PCNs together they would be perfectly placed to continue to provide at-scale services, provide support for PCNs and practices, and by including the LMC could start to be able to talk with authority in the system as local general practice.

But while some federations have been bolder in taking steps towards taking on the provision of support for PCNs as a new part of its core business, many have shied away from this (often because of emerging PCN/federation tensions, and because of the costs involved).  While PCNs are funded by the PCN DES, federations rely on funding from the delivery of services.  The need to breakeven/fund the federation infrastructure and even generate a return for shareholders has often created a tension in terms of what federations have been willing or able to do in terms of support for PCNs.

The irony is that federations are highly unlikely to be able to generate any kind of sustainable financial return if they maintain their separation from PCNs.  They will increasingly rely on the PCNs for the work (like extended access), and if federations are not the support provider for PCNs then whoever takes this on will end up being better placed to take on any at-scale work.

Without the protection of CCGs the ICSs are not going to tolerate small-scale provider organisations with no real remit.  If federations are not providing the scaled up support the new integrated neighbourhood teams are going to require, and don’t become the organisation that holds general practice together in an area, it is hard to see how they will survive beyond the next few years.

20
jul
0

The Direction of Same day Appointments

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

There is no escaping the issue of access to GP appointments.  Now more that ever it is sitting at the top of the national priority list, so what can we expect the future to look like?

There is seemingly a media campaign highlighting the challenge many patients face in obtaining a face to face appointment with their GP (e.g. here).  The highly public nature of this issue means that it is the government’s highest priority for general practice.

At the same time, the erroneous belief that the reason emergency departments are struggling is because patients cannot get to see their GP pervades Integrated Care System (ICS) thinking.  The priority for ICSs is now to ensure that ‘something is done’ about this issue.

This was the context that the Fuller Report was produced in.  Despite the framing of the report as “a vision for integrating primary care”, the framework for shared actions is clear that the number one priority is to, “Develop a single system-wide approach to managing integrated urgent care to guarantee same-day care for patients and a more sustainable model for patients” p34.

I have written already about the single urgent care teams the Fuller Report proposes.  In this article I noted the lack of clarity in the report about exactly what was intended by the notion, and that much of what was written raised more questions than answers.  However, talking to different people it seems that there is a likely direction of travel.

PCNs are already putting plans together to outline a single model of delivering extended access across each PCN to start in October.  The requirement for on the day demand to be organised across the practices in a way that integrates all of the service offerings and guarantees same day care will be added on to PCNs.  The logical third part of the jigsaw will be to also give responsibility for out of hours care to the PCN.  Thus PCNs will have responsibility for 24 hour delivery of urgent primary care in their area.

PCNs meanwhile will most likely fall much more under the remit of ICSs.  Their rebranding as Integrated Neighbourhood Teams and shift of funding from the national contract to ICSs will mean that performance management will come locally.  Don’t expect this to be as light touch as we have seen in many areas over the delivery of the PCN DES specifications.

This of course has huge implications for practices.  While many areas are working on plans for extended access that minimise disruption for practices (either stick with the existing provider, or enable all or part of extended access to be delivered by practices where there is capacity/will to do so), the same approach is not going to work for in hours appointments where many practices are not able to offer same-day appointments.  GP capacity is insufficient and falling, so a different approach, one that most likely involves the patients of individual practices being seen either in PCN ‘hubs’ or by other practices, will be needed.

For some this will represent an unacceptable move away from the core model of general practice, where individual practices deliver cradle to grave care for their list of patients.  This new model creates limits on where continuity of care is required, and splits urgent access away from the traditional model.  For others it will be a welcome relief from the incessant demands placed on the practice, with no hope of them ever being met.

It seems we have a rocky road ahead.  Many PCNs have found getting to agreement across practices on extended access challenging enough, and the prospect of doing with the same with in-hours on the day demand and potentially even out of hours extremely daunting.  Meanwhile, this will feature highly on the priority list of the new ICSs, and given the wider system pressures it would not be surprising to see many adopt a relatively heavy handed approach.  At the same time there will undoubtedly be a backlash across many parts of general practice because of the challenge it poses to what represents core general practice.

Whatever your views, I think it would be sensible for practices to start thinking about this issue now, and working out how they want the future to unfold.  Getting on the front foot, rather than waiting for the system to impose something on you, seems the best strategy to take right now.

13
jul
0

Can General Practice Operate Collectively?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Whilst the starting point for general practice to be able to influence the new-in-place Integrated Care Systems (ICSs) is its ability to establish a unified voice, the challenge quickly follows as to whether it can also act and operate collectively.  But is this a bridge too far for independent contractors?

It is one thing for all the general practice organisations in any given area (practices, PCNs, federations, LMCs) to create a unified voice that it can provide into any system discussion.  General practice can create its own leadership team that can work to be the group representing the whole of general practice in an area.  This is an important and crucial first step towards establishing influence in the new system.

Once leadership groups are established they can very quickly become the place where the system and other organisations come to talk to general practice, a helpfully accessible route that has rarely previously existed.  They can also provide a viewpoint on the ideas, plans and strategies of others, and identify what general practice does and does not agree with.

But it is another thing for those general practice organisations on the leadership groups to be able to work together and agree how general practice as a whole will operate.  It is difficult for them to get to a place and agree that this is what PCNs and practices will do, this is what the federation will do and this is how we will oversee and ensure that what we have agreed is working.

Enhanced access is a good example of this.  The debate is often lost in internal general practice arguments as to which PCNs will do what, what the federation will do and how any ‘hybrid’ model will work.  Very few places have been able to establish and present a unified, coherent, local model with a single reporting structure that can feed into the wider system discussions around urgent care.

The Fuller report points to a model of managing urgent care that brings in-hours on the day demand for general practice, enhanced access, and out of hours care all together (Fuller Report p11/12).  This was number one in the list of actions for local systems to take (Fuller Report p34).  Can general practice agree for itself how this model should be introduced, or will it require the system to enforce a model upon it?

The problem is that practices, PCNs and federations are often focussed on their own autonomy and the needs of their own individual organisations, but this is coming at the expense of what is best for general practice as a whole.  For general practice to be able to preserve its overall autonomy, and resist system advances for it to be ‘integrated’ into some existing part of the NHS machinery, it will have to demonstrate to the new ICSs that it is able to organise itself.  The paradox is that individual general practice organisations will have to give up some autonomy in order for general practice as a whole to retain it.

Ultimately it will not be enough for general practice to create a shared leadership group if it cannot then convert that into collective action.  For influence to be real it needs to go beyond having seats at system meetings, because it is not really about how loud the voice is but whether it can actively impact what happens across the system.    Of course, general practice can have more of an impact than any other organisation on the system, but only if it finds a way to operate collectively.

6
jul
0

Is General Practice About to Score an Own Goal?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

I was amazed when I heard that the BMA’s Annual Representative Meeting had voted in favour of GP practice withdrawal from PCNs by next year.  The motion for the, “GPCE and the BMA to organise the withdrawal of GP practices from the PCNs by 2023” was passed with 61% voting in favour, 12% against and 27% abstaining.

The context for this is that we are currently in year 4 of a 5 year contract deal, agreed in 2019.  By the time we reach the point at which this withdrawal is to happen it will be for the last year of the existing deal.  The majority of the benefits of this deal for general practice sit within the PCN DES, and so the call is for general practice to withdraw from the part of the deal with the biggest benefits for its last year.

I cannot be the only one thinking efforts might better be focussed on negotiating the next deal, rather than putting a huge amount of effort into raising concerns during the last year of the existing deal.

We already know that NHS England is not going to negotiate around the existing deal.  Last year was the first year we did not have a negotiated agreement between the GPC and NHS England.  It will not be any different this year, as they will argue exactly as last time that the current deal was already agreed to four years ago.

The wider context is that we have Integrated Care Systems (ICSs) wanting to take control of GP and in particular PCN funding.  The system can see the extra money that is being put in through PCNs, and in particular through the ARRS, and wants to get its hands on it.  Remember £1.8bn of the additional £2.8bn negotiated in 2019 comes through PCNs.

This creates a fairly happy set of scenarios for NHS England.  They can offer to take PCN funding out of the national contract next year so that it can be “topped up” locally by ICSs, thereby increasing the funding going into PCNs and accelerating their development into Integrated Neighbourhood Teams (as per the Fuller Report).  Very little of any extra money would make it to practice level, and the cost would be a big shift away from a national contract and a worrying precedent set ahead of the next 5 year deal.

Alternatively NHS England can give the PCN funding to ICS areas directly (if practices say they do not want it), for them to either route back through general practice or put it through a local lead provider type model.  If general practice does not want the PCN money or staff, then the system I am sure will be happy to take it.  At this point it would be hard to see any other route for general practice to survive other than via integration into other providers.

The LMC motion that was passed in full also calls for, “PCN funding to be moved into the core contract”.  The problem is that this is outside of the control of general practice and is not something that NHS England or the government is going to agree to.  If what the system wants is a general practice that can actively partner with other providers then the last thing it is going to do is act to strengthen its independence.

Withdrawing practices from PCNs at this point in time would be a huge own goal for general practice.  I understand the resentment and dissatisfaction that exists within many practices towards PCNs, but if the aim is to preserve the independence of general practice then this is politically naïve and a move that will do far more damage than good.

29
jun
0

Why general practice needs to act now

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

This week will mark the end of the current system of Clinical Commissioning Groups and the commencement of the new system of Integrated Care Systems (ICSs).  It also represents the opening of a window of opportunity for general practice to take action that might not last for very long.

Many consider this current round of system changes to be just another turn in the wheel of NHS structures, the latest in a line of changes that have been happening every few years for at least the last 20 years.  But my sense is that this is a much more fundamental change, and one that could mark the beginning of an (even more) difficult period for general practice.

The end of CCGs marks the end of the purchaser provider split and the internal market that has been the organising principle of the NHS since 1990.  Alongside that principle has always been the idea of a primary care led NHS, and this also is coming to an end.  Instead, ICSs are based on the principle of providers working together, but of course not all providers are equal and the dominance of trusts and in particular acute trusts creates huge risks for general practice around priorities, contracts and funding.

How can general practice future-proof itself within the new system?  What action can it take?

The good news is that it seems that there is unlikely to be a nationally prescribed ‘solution’ for general practice.

When the system talks about needing a solution for general practice it means how can it work with general practice playing its role as a partner provider in developing system-wide responses to the challenges local health systems face.  With the GP leadership role of CCGs gone, there is no obvious route for working with general practice.  When there are upwards of 50 practices, 10 PCNs, and maybe 2 or 3 federations and LMCs in any area it can be virtually impossible to find any kind of consensus across general practice, let alone a shared commitment to collective action.

Despite Sajid Javid floating the idea of GP nationalisation earlier in the year, and the incorporation of general practice into an existing NHS organisation as the best solution, the Fuller Report very much points towards the development of local solutions for general practice within each system context.

The challenge for general practice, then, is to demonstrate that is can organise itself in any given area, that it can be united, and that it can create a consistent and influential voice.  If it can do this effectively, it can future proof its own autonomy as there is no need for the system to go down the route of asking another organisation to take over control.

But there is no time to waste.  It wont be long before ICSs find their feet and start to try to impose solutions upon general practice.  While currently this might seem well outside their control, if funding for general practice shifts from national to ICS level then they will most likely have the levers to be able to make this kind of change happen.

There are plenty of areas up and down the country already working hard to try and create a local cohesion across GP practices and organisations.  It is really important that everywhere starts to consider how to develop this in their area.  If practices do not start this work now, it may end up being too late and someone else may be brought in to do it to them.

22
jun
0

The Future of General Practice funding

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Hot on the heels of the Fuller Report, there is now talk of a reform of general practice funding allocations, all of which is pointing to some big changes coming for how the money flows to general practice.  What exactly do we know, and what is likely to happen?

Let’s start with the Fuller Report.  This says a number of interesting things when it comes to funding.  It reiterates the point made by NHS England recently when it says, “We welcome the clarity from NHS England that staff in post will continue to be treated as part of the core PCN cost base beyond 2023/24 when any future updates to the GMS contract are considered” (p19).

This is welcome, as many had been concerned that general practice would be expected to pick up the staffing bill for the ARRS staff post 2024.  It is noteworthy, perhaps, that the description is of these staff being part of the  “PCN cost base”, given the push for PCN funding to come via ICS’s in future that I will come on to.

The report also indicates that no change is planned to general practice funding until after the current five year contract has run its course – the recommendations on p35 around funding are that they should take place “beyond 2023/24”.  Nikki Kanani’s recent comments were also all about planning for the next contract after the current 5 year one.

However, the big push in the Fuller Report is for primary care funding, including general practice funding, to shift from being nationally to locally driven.  The report states, “National contractual arrangements, including for PCNs, have provided essential foundations including for chronic disease management and prevention. But they can only take you so far. As already highlighted in the report, getting to integrated primary care is all about local relationships, leadership, support and system-led investment in transformation. ICSs putting in place the right support locally will be enabled by maximising what control ICSs have over the direction of discretionary investment. This should be looked at by NHS England as part of the implementation of recommendations.” (p28).

Now in case that was missed by anyone the report was accompanied by a letter from the 42 Chief Executives of the new ICSs which reinforced this very point, repeating it almost verbatim, “National contractual arrangements, including for PCNs, have and will continue to provide essential foundations. But they can only take you so far. Getting to integrated primary care is all about local relationships, leadership, support, and system-led investment in transformation.”

There will undoubtedly be a variation across the ICS CEOs in how they view primary care and the role it can play.  But what they can agree on (unsurprisingly) is that they would like the funding for general practice to come via them rather than via a national contract.  It is hard not to believe that this shift of funds was at least to some extent behind the universal support ICS CEOs displayed for the report.

The extent of this shift is made clear in the annex at the very end of the report.  They want firstly the Additional Role Reimbursement Scheme to be delivered via ICSs not via a national contract (“Specifically consider, with DHSC and HEE, how the (ARRS) scheme should operate after March 2024, including the role of ICSs in working with national colleagues and PCNs in delivering it” p35), and secondly any additional funding for general practice to come under the control of local systems (“Move to greater financial flexibility for systems on primary care… Beyond 2023/24, maximise system decision making on any future discretionary investment, beyond DDRB and pay uplifts” p35).

The report also sets the context for Nikki Kanani’s comments at the recent NHS Confederation Expo about reviewing the national funding allocation formula as part of the contract negotiations for the next contract from April 2024.  The report says, “It is also generally accepted that the distribution of primary care funding to neighbourhoods is not always well aligned to system allocations and underlying population health needs – and we need a concerted local effort to try and fix this.” (p28).

All of this, then, is pointing to a shift of resources out of the national contract after this 5 year deal expires, with far more to be allocated via ICSs.  The distribution of this additional resource (it seems) will be made by ICSs dependent on population health needs, regardless of the specific local needs of primary care providers.

All of this means there are a number of risks ahead for general practice.  First, ICSs are governed by a requirement to break even across the system, and cannot ringfence funds in the way areas could in the previous system when commissioners held individual contracts with providers, so funding via an ICS cannot be guaranteed in the same way as funding via a national contract.

Second, the allocation of locally distributed funds is likely to be based on population health need, meaning the distribution across practices will vary significantly.  Third, the ability of general practice to influence the direction of funds within a local ICS is far less than its collective ability negotiating a national contract together.  Fourth, there does seem to be some form of play for some of the existing PCN resources to shift out of the national contract and into local control.  And finally once resources are within ICS control they don’t have to come direct to general practice but could come via a partnership mechanism, i.e. via a third party provider of “support” such as an acute or community trust, which would likely further impact on the independence and autonomy of general practice.

My view for what it is worth is that general practice should think extremely carefully about agreeing to any significant shifts of funding from the national contract into local systems, but the GPC appears to be positioning itself badly in this regard with its position on the PCN DES, and so whether the service ends up with any choice in the matter remains to be seen.

15
jun
0

The Fuller Report: Single Urgent Care Teams

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

There is much that is worthy of further discussion in the Fuller report.  Last week I considered integrated neighbourhood teams, and this week I take a deeper look into the idea the report introduces of single urgent care teams.

There is a context for this notion, which is the Our Plan for Improving Access for Patients and Supporting General Practice paper published last October.  That particular paper incurred the wrath of general practice, and the Fuller Report does seem to be trying to tread a difficult line between a national desire for the GP access ‘issue’ to be resolved, whilst avoiding letting it dominate the whole report.

Hence, while the paper introduces the idea of single urgent care teams in the middle of the document, it is telling that the number one action emerging from the report is to, “develop a single system-wide approach to managing integrated urgent care to guarantee same-day care for patients and a more sustainable model for practices.  This should be for all patients clinically assessed as requiring urgent care, where continuity from the same team is not a priority” p34.

It is also hard not to believe that implicit behind this idea is the erroneous belief seemingly shared by much of the system that lack of access to urgent care in the community (i.e. GP access) is the primary cause of the problems experienced in A&E and the wider urgent care system.  The report actually says that this change, “can also help to reduce demand on other urgent care services across the NHS iv”, although the reference it uses is of a video of how a practice has this system in place without any reference to the knock on consequences for the rest of the system.

This will inevitably lead to this particular action taking a high priority in the majority of Integrated Care Systems.  But what is the action?  The report states that it is for, “primary care in every neighbourhood to create single urgent care teams and to offer their patients the care appropriate to them” (p11).  “Same-day access for urgent care would involve care from the most clinically appropriate local service and professional and the most appropriate modality, whether a remote consultation or face to face” (p34).

It involves taking, “general practice in-hours and extended hours, urgent treatment centres, out-of-hours, urgent community response services, home visiting, community pharmacy, 111 call handling, 111 clinical assessment – and organise them as a single integrated urgent care pathway in the community” (p11/12).

But despite my best efforts, I am still not 100% sure what this means.  Maybe the idea of the paper is to build scope for local interpretation rather than dictate a one size fits all model, and this is why it feels difficult to nail down the exact intent of what is written.  Is it saying that all the on the day demand needs to be managed by a single team, and so that will include the team currently managing this within each practice?  Or is it saying that each practice will be a virtual part of a wider community team, operating with a single triage and capacity management system?  Or is it saying something else?

Either way, the implication is that each practice will no longer be managing its on the day demand separately from other practices.  If the model is going to “guarantee same day access”, what if a practice cannot offer same day GP slots to its patients?  Are those patients going to be seen by a GP at another practice?  The implications of a single team across a neighbourhood for managing all of this demand are enormous, and the only examples given in the report operate at a single practice level.

The model is also seemingly based on patients who ask for a face to face GP appointment being redirected to either a virtual appointment or an appointment with an alternative practitioner (and now add in alternative provider), something that practices have been articulating with little support for a number of years.  Meanwhile both NHS England and the government have been insisting in the national media that anyone who wants a face to face GP appointment can have one (regardless of need).  However, no action on a national communications about-face appears within the paper.

The vagueness around this idea is both an opportunity and a risk for general practice.  It is an opportunity because if this is really to be a system where solutions are generated locally as opposed to imposed nationally general practice can create its own interpretation of what it means, turn it into something useful, and then use the authority of the report to access system funding to support its implementation.  It is a risk because others may start to impose their interpretation of what it means on practices in an area, citing the report as their authority for action.

It highlights once again the need for general practice to organise itself locally so that it can positively influence how things develop.  A united local general practice can work together to make the most of the opportunity, but where no such unity exists the risk will almost certainly prevail.

8
jun
0

The Fuller Report: Integrated Neighbourhood Teams

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

There are some individual elements within the Fuller Report that are worth exploring in detail to try and understand what they mean, and what the implications are.  The first of these is integrated neighbourhood teams.

Integrated neighbourhood teams are described as being “at the heart of the new vision for integrating primary care” (p6).  The clear action at the end of the report is to “enable all PCNs to evolve into integrated neighbourhood teams” (p34).  In terms of timescale, “systems should aim to have them up and running in neighbourhoods in the … most deprived areas by April 2023… and move to universal coverage throughout 2023 and by April 2024 at the latest” (p7).

So integrated neighbourhood teams are to be an ‘evolution’ (replacement?) of PCNs, and a rapid one at that as this is expected to happen this year, or within a maximum of two years.

What exactly is an integrated neighbourhood team?  The problem with the report is that it tries not to be too prescriptive to allow local areas to create their own versions that will work locally, but of course this means there is a lack of definition when it comes to the detail of what is intended.  It does say they will be where, “teams from across primary care networks (PCNs), wider primary care providers, secondary care teams, social care teams, and domiciliary and care staff can work together to share resources and information and form multidisciplinary teams (MDTs) dedicated to improving the health and wellbeing of a local community and tackling health inequalities” (p6).  The clear intention is to bring all providers in a PCN footprint together.

The obvious question, then, is how will this happen.  We know when PCNs were first introduced the clear expectation was set out that these teams should all become part of the PCN Board, but in most places that just has not happened.  This is because it is hard finding ways of enabling the practices in a PCN area to work together effectively, and PCN leaders have done a great job of making this happen.  But this relies on those practices believing they are retaining an element of control, albeit collective control, or else many would just not be prepared to give up the individual practice autonomy the joint working requires.

This report by ICS leaders displays an element of frustration with the pace of progress of PCNs (or else why produce the report?) and wants to fast forward within one or two years to a model of all organisations working seamlessly together around PCN populations.

According to the report, the reason for this perceived lack of progress is, “a lack of infrastructure and support (which) has held them back from achieving more ambitious change” (p6).  The challenge of enabling joint working across practices within a PCN is ignored.  And so the prescribed remedy is “a systematic cross-sector realignment to form multi-organisational and sector teams working in neighbourhoods. For example:

  • full alignment of clinical and operational workforce from community health providers to neighbourhood ‘footprints’, working alongside dedicated, named specialist teams from acute and mental health trusts, particularly their community mental health teams
  • making available ‘back-office’ and transformation functions for PCNs, including HR, quality improvement, organisational development, data and analytics and finance – for example, by leveraging this support from larger providers” (p6-7)

Does this mean, effectively, a takeover of PCNs by the system, i.e. that the practices in the PCN become one partner of this new system, that has its own infrastructure, leadership and (potentially) place within an existing organisation?  Maybe.  Local interpretation means that if a local ICS wants to interpret it like this it probably can.

The key is where the leadership of these grander integrated neighbourhood teams will come from.  Who will be in charge and have accountability for them?  It does seem unlikely that system organisations will all put resources into these teams and at the same time totally cede control of them to the PCN practices.  This is what the report says about this:

“The role of PCN clinical directors in the future will be essential to the leadership of integrated neighbourhood teams… More focus needs to be given to the development and support of clinical directors beyond the current basic arrangements provided through the national contract, including the local provision of sufficient protected time to be able to meet the leadership challenge in integrated neighbourhood teams.  Some systems will want to go beyond this and use even more innovative ways to support clinical directors to expand and develop their integrated neighbourhood teams, for example:

  • some neighbourhood teams may offer an opportunity to develop different areas of focus and specialisation, with senior GPs serving as the ‘consultant in general practice’ – working across prevention, chronic and urgent care as part of wider teams
  • securing the specialist input from secondary care required in neighbourhood teams, as part of job planning for consultants
  • supporting community partners to operationally embed relevant teams as an integral part of existing PCN teams, recognising that the integration of community and mental health services with primary care is crucial to delivering more integrated care for patients in the community, as set out in the NHS Long Term Plan” (p22)

What should we make of this?  It seems to be saying PCN Clinical Directors will be the first port of call when it comes to who will be leading these new integrated neighbourhood teams.  But how many PCN CDs are going to be able to commit the three (or more) days a week this expanded role is going to require?  Does this then mean the bullets above are alternative leadership options?  It is not a huge step to see these being led by individuals from community trusts, mental health providers, or even secondary care.

As a minimum the implication is that the management infrastructure (if not the clinical leadership) will come from an existing provider (cf the action on p34 “baseline the existing organisational capacity and capability for primary care, across system, place and neighbourhood levels, to ensure systems can undertake their core operational and transformational functions” – I don’t suppose for one minute the answer will be to put more funding into a standalone PCN infrastructure).

The report pushes hard for additional resources for these teams to be allocated at an ICS level (as opposed to the current model of nationally via the PCN DES).  If this is the route of future additional funding for general practice (if this year’s contract negotiations told us anything it is that any new money for general practice has to come via PCNs or their successors), and the leadership and management of these teams increasingly sits outside of general practice, the profession could quickly lose control of its own resources.

Integrated neighbourhood teams are coming, and they are coming quickly.  Behind the attractive picture of clinical teams all working in harmony across the PCN, there are big issues of leadership, ownership and control that need to be played out in each area.  General practice will need to pay close attention to how this happens because of the significant consequences it will have for its own future.

1
jun
0

Trying to Understand the Fuller Report

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

There are some far reaching implications of the Fuller Report for general practice.  However, getting underneath exactly what they are and understanding what the report means for practices is far from straightforward.  For me this is primarily because of the way this report has been written, published and launched.  I have picked out four points to note about this here.

The first is that it is not a report about the future of general practice.  Indeed, the report goes to great lengths to insist that it is about all the different parts of primary care, and even then that is about how primary care should be ‘integrated’ not about its future per se.

There is, however, no escaping the fact the two are inextricably linked, despite this seemingly being something the paper tries as far as it can to ignore.  To give two examples: the paper pushes hard for resources for general practice to shift away from the national contract to come under the discretion of local systems (“Beyond 2023/24, maximise system decision making on any future discretionary investment, beyond DDRB and pay uplifts” p35); the paper also mandates that there should be a single system of managing urgent care in every neighbourhood (i.e. across practices).

These are huge changes for general practice, so it does seem specious to argue that this is only about primary care integration and not about the future of general practice itself.

Which brings me to the second point about the paper.  It is not an options paper, or a discussion paper, but is rather produced as a fait accompli – that this is the only possible way forward.  The paper outlines what it describes as a ‘vision’ of the future, and finishes with the actions needed to begin its implementation. For such a radical change you may have expected a period of discussion, deliberation and consultation, but because this is about ‘integration’ not general practice there is apparently no need.

The third point to note is that the paper is not an easy read.  There is no easy to navigate contents page, no numbering or anything to help an unseasoned observer make sense of what they are reading.  There is a great deal made of the three elements of the new vision, but very little on the what all that means for the existing models and ways of working.  In some ways I was left at the end of the paper feeling that much more was implicit than explicit.

The fourth point is about the launch of the paper itself.  The report is accompanied with a letter of support from all 42 of the ICS Chief Executives.  It is explicitly noted in the document that the Chairs of 9 workstreams and 4 task and finish groups all “endorse its findings” (p37).  Following the publication of the report there were then lots of seemingly pre-orchestrated messages of support for the report and a reinforcement of the idea that this is the only possible way forward.  Have a look at this message from the Chair of the RCGP, and even this one from the BMA.

Now it may be that all of these organisations were fully engaged in the production of the report, and what has emerged is a consensus model that all parties concur is the best way forward.  I just find the lack of any clearly articulated implications of the report surprising (in particular from the BMA and RCGP), even if they support the report.

All of this leaves me with the sense of a very highly politically managed process with the report trying to be pushed through, without the debate and discussion that you would normally expect for such a significant change.

It is for individuals to make their own mind up about the attractiveness of the vision laid out in the report and the extent to which they sign up to the proposed way forward.  My ask would be that more clarity is brought to the implications of this report for general practice before these decisions are made, but my fear is that rapid national agreement will quickly push any real debate to a local level and the course will already be irreversible.

25
may
0

Why Your PCN Finances are not Transparent

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

A common complaint many GPs have about their PCN is that the finances are not transparent.  Behind the comment lurks an unspoken implication that not every practice is receiving their fair share, or that certain practices are being favoured.  However, the reality is PCN finances have been set up in such a way that it is hard for anyone in the PCN to really understand the financial position of the PCN.

Why is this? There are number of reasons.  The first is that the funds received by PCNs come in various different formats.  Some money (the £1.76) goes directly to practices.  While most come into the PCN bank account, the timing and amount varies (and is impossible to predict!).  The biggest pot of money, the ARRS, has to be reclaimed based on actual expenditure.  Other pots are paid according to a formula (e.g. PCN CD funding, the £1.50).  Clarity as to when any of this funding will arrive has never been that forthcoming.

Some of the funds are paid on performance, the main one being the Investment and Impact Fund (IIF).  The payment for this ends up being made in the year after the achievement has been calculated, i.e. it will only be sometime probably towards the end of this quarter when PCNs will receive the payment for achievement of last year’s IIF, and they are only just finding out what that amount will be (and there are often reasonably sized discrepancies between what PCNs expect and what the system claims they have earned).

Every year changes are made to the allowances that PCNs can receive, and during Covid these changed in year as well.  The restrictions on how different pots of funding that the PCN receives also vary.  Some have a very specific way in which the funding can be used (e.g. ARRS), whereas others have far less restrictions (e.g. the £1.50).

Then each local area has different funding streams available to PCNs on top of those in the national DES.  These vary considerably across the country, but we are increasingly seeing many local enhanced services with PCN components (if not being entirely commissioned via the PCN).

The financial questions for a PCN to work out then include cash-flow (do they have enough money in the bank to pay the bills), overall income and expenditure (by year), and what all of this means for available expenditure at any given point in time (e.g. can we afford an IIF clinical lead).

Larger PCNs are now multi-million pound businesses, with a relatively complex financial framework sitting behind them.  The funding provided for PCNs to manage these finances are lumped in with all the other running and leadership costs.  If a PCN has a bookkeeping function, even allowing members to access that system does not provide transparency because it will just provide a snapshot of the cash position and give no real sense of the overall financial position of the PCN.

What PCNs need is financial management accounts, i.e. someone with the skills, expertise and financial nous to convert all the financial flows and commitments and create easy to understand summaries of where things are, what is expected and what financial options the PCN has at any point in time.  But how can a PCN afford what it needs given the running cost resources it has?  Some PCNs use a shared resource, e.g. from the local federation, that can make this a possibility.  But for many the costs of obtaining this level of financial support simply feel too prohibitive.

Finally many PCNs have not yet established their own financial strategy.  Is the plan for the PCN to reinvest as much available resource as it can into practices (like a PCN dividend), or is the plan for the PCN to reinvest any available resources into something like support and infrastructure that builds capacity for medium to long term collective sustainability and resilience?  Sometimes concerns about transparency come because different members have different financial expectations of the PCN, without the explicit conversation ever having been held.

My sense is we have reached the point now, where the sums involved have become so significant and are going to increase again over the next two years, that PCNs can no longer manage without effective management accounts, and that making the most of the opportunity of PCNs requires a worked through, agreed PCN financial strategy.  If nothing else, it will at least enable PCNs to get past the complaints about lack of transparency!

18
may
0

4 Key Risks ICSs Pose for General Practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

It is less than 6 weeks until Integrated Care Systems (ICSs) go live, and yet most of us are still trying to get our heads around exactly how they are going to work.  While some are sticking with the “nothing much is gong to change” mindset, the reality is that this transition does pose significant risks for general practice.  I am not trying to be a prophet of doom, but understanding the risks is the first step to being able to mitigate them.

Here are 4 key risks the shift to the new system creates for general practice.

  1. Less funding for general practice

The biggest risk is that the funding coming into general practice reduces.  There is already pressure on the new ICSs to break even.   It is no longer individual organisations that are overspending, but rather whole systems. What this means is that if the hospital is overspending, general practice funding is on the table as a means by which the system can get back into balance.

This could manifest in a whole number of ways.  If general practice funding levels are different across different parts of the ICS, the system could argue that the funding should be reduced across all areas to the level of the lowest.  If different levels of funding are used for out of hours services, arguments are likely to be made that it be reduced to the level of the lowest.  When a system is deciding upon how much discretionary expenditure to make on general practice (remember all local enhanced service funding will come under the jurisdiction of the ICS), these decisions will be made within the context of the overall financial situation of the ICS.

  1. System decision making more likely to negatively impact GP practices

With such important financial decisions being taken at an ICS level, it will be important for general practice to have a strong voice at these discussions.  The problem is there is no obvious route for this to happen.  The mandated GP on the ICS Board only has a few sessions a week, and the size of the ICSs mean there is a huge risk of a disconnect between ICS decision making and individual GP practices.

If the large providers dominate the decision making, then it is much more likely the decisions will be made in their favour.  Some hospitals have already started to make an argument that because of all the fixed building costs within their estate it would be better for more work to come to them from general practice – with the associated funding!  It is thinking like this that poses one of the biggest threats to general practice.

  1. Loss of support for GP practices

Many will remember when CCGs were first created and the commissioning of general practice moved to NHS England.  Systems lost all of the relationship managers that had existed in PCTs, and the whole thing was such a disaster that worries about conflicts of interest were put to one side and responsibility was returned to CCGs to restore individual contract relationships with practices.  But with the move to ICSs it could well be that we see the same mistake made again, only this time with no CCGs available to give it back to.

If ICSs mean the system decides to take a hard contracting line with GP practices, with no thought or concern for the individual pressures and challenges practices face, then it could quickly become a very hostile environment for practices.

  1. Less protection for the independent contractor model of general practice

This shift to ICSs is taking place at the same time as the Secretary of State is declaring his preference for a nationalised model of general practice.  ICSs are all about providing support services at scale across the NHS, and doing things once that only need to be done once.  It doesn’t take a huge leap of imagination to see ICSs thinking that a more efficient (ie less costly) model of general practice would be if multiple practices were consolidated into existing organisations (making use of their existing back office infrastructure etc etc).

In the past we have had sufficient GP leadership in CCGs and across the system to counter such thinking.  But it is questionable as to whether this voice of reason is going to be loud enough in the new system, and the protection that has previously existed is likely to be sorely missed.

11
may
0

Why the End of CCGs is Bad for General Practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

GPs have not been overly enamoured with CCGs.  It was not long after their inception in 2013 that the promises of GP control of the funding fell flat, and that they were subsumed within the tentacles of the all-encompassing NHS system.  Now they are so far removed from any individual practice that the membership model sold to general practice 10 years ago is barely recognisable.  But in only a few years’ time GP practices may well be reminiscing fondly about the days of CCGs.

This is primarily because the system replacing CCGs contains no obvious place for general practice.  Integrated Care Systems (ICSs) are more than just the latest incarnation of the NHS.  They represent the first shift away from the purchaser provider split that has been at the heart of the NHS since 1990.  Whatever our views on the internal market, it was always accompanied by an underpinning philosophy of creating a primary care led NHS.

ICSs mark the end of any notion of a primary care led NHS.

The internal market was first introduced in 1990 via the National Health Service and Community Care Act.  The very same act introduced GP Fundholding.  Since then we have had over 30 years of different versions of trying to create a purchaser provider split where primary care held the purse strings: Primary Care Groups; Primary Care Trusts; Practice Based Commissioning; and, in what was the last throw of the dice, CCGs.

It is not just CCGs that are going, it is the whole notion of an internal market, and the concept of a primary care led NHS.  Instead, the new system is supposed to be based on partnerships, on providers working together to agree how to distribute resources to deliver the best outcomes for patients.

In this system there is little to no incentive for anyone to find a seat for general practice at the leadership table.  The less people around the table, the easier it is to reach agreement.  Hospitals are merging and creating “hospital chains” so that they will essentially be one hospital per ICS.  There is also roughly one community trust and one mental health trust per ICS.  And even then sometimes these organisations are merged.  In all likelihood the bigger you are, the more say you will have in these “partnership” discussions.

By contrast, at 42 ICSs we are looking at c170 practices per ICS, plus c30 PCNs, and maybe a couple of LMCs and federations, so somewhere in the region of 200 general practice organisations per ICS, all with little or no track record of being able to operate collectively.  In a system where bigger is better and less is more, general practice is not in good shape.

The consequences of this will be real for general practice.  Systems are under real pressure to break even, and the “do whatever is necessary, whatever it costs” pandemic mentality has already disappeared.  In this environment, if an ICS has three different levels of funding for general practice across three areas expect it to level down not level up.  Once CCGs are gone, who will be left to argue the general practice corner?  Are we going to pin all our hopes on the GP representative on the ICS Board?

Ultimately the loss of CCGs is going to leave general practice exposed, with little or no voice in important system discussions.  Local general practice needs to be working hard right now to mitigate this risk.  The government’s answer seems to be to nationalise general practice and put it under the control of one of the local trusts.  We are waiting to see what the Fuller Review recommends.  It would be better if local general practice could take advantage of the window of opportunity that is left to organise itself as a force to be reckoned with, because at least then it will be controlling its own destiny.  In this article for PCN Pulse I outline the steps general practice can be taking now to make this happen.

4
may
2

Three Things Practices Can Do to Make the Most of the Additional Roles Reimbursement Scheme (ARRS)

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog2 Comments

The most significant additional investment into general practice at present comes via the PCN DES, and the much of that arrives in the form of the ARRS.  We are three years into the five year deal, which means there are only two years left of significant growth of this funding.  Further similar increases in future seem unlikely.  How can practices make the most of this additional resource?

The scale of the opportunity remains relatively high.  Most PCNs have not yet spent their full allowance to date, and some of last year’s expenditure was often used for the vaccination programme rather than being deployed recurrently.  This means that many PCNs have getting on for £1M available to invest in new roles over the next two years.

There are three things that practices can do to make more of the opportunity of the ARRS.  The first is to think differently about the roles that are needed.  To date the process of identifying which roles to employ has often consisted of looking at the list of available roles and choosing the ones that the practices most liked the sound of.  But continuing to do this is likely to mean practices will fail to make the most of the opportunity this funding presents.

We know that general practice workload will continue to increase. Demand from the local population will continue to go up, and the advent of ICSs is likely to accelerate the shift of activity from secondary to primary care.  At the same time, the number of GPs continues to fall, as despite the push for extra GPs the number leaving continues to exceed those entering the profession.

This means that for general practice to be resilient into the future the model has to change from one where all the activity coming into practices defaults to a GP, to one where the service is led by GPs but delivered by a much wider range of professionals.  This is the only way it will be sustainable.

What the ARRS provides is an opportunity to bring in the new roles that are needed and change the way general practice operates.  If practices spend some time working out what workforce they want in two years’ time, they can then use the opportunity of the ARRS to create a more fit for purpose workforce and employ the roles that will enable this vision to be realised.

The second is changing the approach to the PCN DES work.  At present the approach is generally that practice staff focus on practice work and PCN staff focus on PCN work, and only support practice work if they have any capacity left over.  As a result the additional roles feel like an additional burden on practices because of all the training and supervision that is required, and their time is sucked up meeting the increasingly onerous requirements of the PCN DES.

A better way to think about this is in terms of the totality of the workload (across practices and the PCN) and the totality of the workforce, i.e. how do we incorporate the ARRS staff to create a total workforce able to best support both the practice and PCN requirements.  By keeping such a strong division between practice and PCN work we are preventing ourselves from making the most of the workforce we do have.

The third is not to underestimate the need to invest in a change or redesign process to go alongside the introduction of the new roles.  Incorporating the new roles effectively means changing the way we operate.  If we don’t we are simply trying to plug holes in a sinking ship, rather than building ourselves a new boat.  But this of course requires additional investment and time, both of which are in short supply.

One way round this however is a creative use of the care coordinator role.  So if, for example, we are changing the way practices in a PCN manage prescriptions using pharmacists and pharmacy technicians, then we can use a care coordinator as a change resource to support the change of the prescription process.   Once they have done this they can then be a resource to support the change to the way MSK presentations are managed across practices using an ESP (etc etc).

The ARRS is an opportunity for practices to start to build a model that will be resilient into the future.  But it won’t happen automatically, and practices need to act now to make the most of it because in two years’ time it may well be too late.

27
apr
0

Are PCNs the Battleground for General Practice?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The NHS is undergoing some significant changes right now, and the implications for general practice are potentially hugely significant.  Could it be that whoever ends up providing the support that PCNs need in fact ends up being the organisation that controls general practice?

PCNs are the place to where all the additional resource into general practice is being channelled.  This is the crux of five year deal agreed in 2019, and when the GPC tried to renegotiate this this year, and put more into the core contract, they were met with short shrift.  Instead the message was very much that PCNs are here to stay.

The priority for the NHS with the shift to Integrated Care Systems (ICSs) is for general practice to be able to act as a “partner” in the system.  What this means is that in any individual “place” area they want one way of contacting and doing business with general practice (instead of c50  if there are for example 40 practices, 7 PCNs, 2 federations and an LMC).

It is not a huge leap to think that not only will any additional resource for general practice continue to be channelled through PCNs, but also that ICSs will shift all additional, non-core GP funding through PCNs.  Indeed it would not be a huge surprise if all the PCN funding shifted at the end of the 5 year contract from national terms to local ICS-based terms, to allow “effective local tailoring of the resource to local needs”.

PCNs, therefore, will continue to grow, and potentially take on a increasing role in relation to access and quality across all of its member practices.  PCNs already need far more of an infrastructure than they have (think training, HR, finance, governance, performance etc), and this need only becomes more pressing with further growth and investment.  There also needs to be a bringing together of the PCNs within any place area, to make it workable for the system as a whole.

Where does this infrastructure come from?  One of the other provider organisations in the ICS is the most obvious solution.  Such an integration sorts out the infrastructure issue, as general practice and PCNs can simply tap into the already existing quality, estates, HR (etc) functions within that organisation.

While this might feel like too big of a leap, our Secretary of State seems to have already nailed his colours firmly to the mast with his support for the recent think tank paper extolling the virtues of the vertical integration of general practice and its assimilation into acute trusts.  ICSs want to be able to do business with general practice, and this will be far easier if it is all sitting within an existing organisation with a Board and Chief Executive and clear lines of accountability.  For the other provider organisations within an ICS, one of them taking this on seems a far more attractive option than anything else, if for no other reason than it limits the number of providers around the ICS table.

The alternative is that general practice takes this on and organises itself.  The GP organisations in an area can choose to come together and create a single leadership team, and bring the LMC, federation and PCN leaders all into one group.  This group can start to operate as the leadership team for local general practice.  They can build on any existing infrastructure they have, such as that within their local federation, and work with the CCG primary care team to take on more of the resources that are currently sitting there.

I am not underestimating how difficult a task this is, but there are places up and down the country who are starting to work this through and put it into place.

Nobody else will want this.  It is easier for them to work with the existing provider organisations.  For them, waiting for the inevitable requirement for someone else to need to take this on is the easiest option.  While it might feel like a big change for general practice to make, it might also be the only opportunity general practice has to secure its independence into the future.

6
apr
0

How is our PCN doing?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

As we come to the end of the third year of the PCN it is a natural time to review how things have gone so far, and to consider what might need to be different going forward.  But how do we know how our PCN is doing?

I am struck by the number of PCNs that tell me that they are “behind other PCNs”, even when to me they seem to be extremely well.  Sometimes we hear success stories from other PCNs and assume that this is what “everyone” is doing, and that we are somehow falling behind.  But PCNs are not a race or a competition, and it is up to each PCN to determine what success looks like for itself.

I wrote last time about the importance of a PCN vision, and the need for the practices in a PCN to set their own direction to determine what they want from the PCN.  One measure for how well we are doing is the progress we are making against our own priorities for the PCN (which may well be different from those of other PCNs).

But it is not the only measure.  At their core, PCNs are a joint working initiative across the member practices.  Whatever desired outcomes the PCN has set, a key metric for any PCN is the level of trust that exists between the members.  The more we trust each other, the easier working together becomes.  And this is where we get into the importance of the culture of the PCN.

When you ask member practices about the PCN and how well it is doing the response is rarely about whether the PCN is achieving its goals.  Instead the framing of the response is often about how involved they feel in the work of the PCN, its relevance to them, and its impact (positive or negative) upon them.

So while in part the response is about the level of alignment between the PCN’s goals and the practice or individual’s goals (e.g. is it reducing or increasing my workload), it is also about the way the PCN operates.  Do member practices feel involved in decision making?  Do they feel able to shape the activities of the PCN?  Do they know what is going on?

This is essentially what the culture of the PCN is – “the way we do things around here”.  If the culture is strong, is built on a solid and developing foundation of trust, and the member practices are happy with it, then the PCN has a solid foundation to go on and achieve whatever it wants to in the years ahead.  But if there is unhappiness with the culture, complaints about the lack of communication, disengagement from practices, and a general lack of trust, then regardless of what has been achieved so far it is likely to be a difficult road ahead.

Determining how well we are doing in a long term joint working enterprise like a PCN needs to be as much in terms of how we do things as what we have achieved.  If we are taking time out to take stock of where we are as a PCN (and I strongly recommend that you do!), then make sure to spend as much time on how the PCN is working as what you want it to achieve.

30
mar
0

Time to Revisit the PCN Vision?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

It is always an interesting to hear the response when I ask the leaders of any PCN whether they have a PCN vision.  Most commonly they recall doing some work on this a few years ago when the PCN first set up, but equally could not tell you what it is.  So is it time to revisit the PCN vision?

The problem is most of the work that goes into establishing what the PCN vision should be focusses on the words in the vision itself.  PCNs end up with some form of ‘vision statement’ that acts as the end product to the work, which is often some noble statement about supporting people to have better outcomes and working in partnership (etc).  But what happens to it, other than it ending up on the PCN website or being used as evidence in the latest PCN maturity matrix assessment?

It is not a surprise, then, that members of the PCN cannot remember what the PCN vision is, because its relevance to the members is limited at best.

The point of a vision statement is to establish why you are undertaking the enterprise in the first place.  Why has each practice signed up to the PCN DES?  What do we want out of it?  What problems are we all experiencing that we think the PCN may be able to help with?  If the vision statement can get to the heart of this, it becomes much more powerful.

The simpler the PCN vision is the better.  Compare these two PCN vision statements (these are real, anonymised PCN vision statements):

  • Member practices of XXX PCN will work together to improve access to the local community. Extending the range of services available to them, by helping integrate primary care with wider health and community services. We will work in collaboration with others – health and social care services, the voluntary sector, community groups and local people – to make best use of available resources, creating a seamless approach, whilst making sure that everyone gets the right support, in the right place, at the right time.
  • To create a sustainable future for our practices.

Which is most powerful?  The point of a vision is not that it creates a statement that everyone can sign up to (but ultimately can’t remember), but rather acts as the guiding force behind the decision making within the PCN.  The vision tells us where we are going, and everything else we do should fall in line behind that.

This is why having a clear vision for the PCN is really important.  If we do not have a shared vision across our practices of why we are participating in the PCN in the first place, then we have no clear point of reference for our decision making.  In the absence of our own direction, we let the PCN DES itself dictate our actions.

The PCN DES is produced in a way that enables the general practice leaders that negotiated this additional funding and resources for general practice to justify the investment.  The additional £2bn that it brings has to come with an output, and so those in charge can point to things such as its contribution to the long term plan (the PCN DES specifications) and enabling general practice to work within the integrated care system.

But that does not mean that this has to be how it is used by practices.  While the contractual requirements are there, what practices need to do is work out how they want to make the most of the opportunity that it brings.  Practices can set their own goal or goals, and then the challenge is to work around the contractual requirements to achieve these goals, not simply provide what others want.

If you do not know what your PCN vision is, now is definitely time to take stock and consider what you want it to be.  If you don’t, you are defaulting to a position where others are effectively deciding what you do (because you are simply led by the PCN DES requirements).  Take the time to come up with more than a statement that everyone will agree to. Come up with what you all want to achieve, and that can guide your collective decision making and actions going forward.

23
mar
0

Should Practices Opt-Out of the PCN DES?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

April will mark one of the few opportunities practices have each year to opt out of the PCN DES. Is this a move GP practices should be considering, or do the benefits of staying outweigh the additional requirements on practices?

The lack of a negotiated contract for this year means the existing 5 year deal for general practice agreed by the GPC in 2019 rolls through into next year.  The response by the GPC has been a thinly veiled encouragement for practices to consider opting out of the PCN DES, “Should practices decide that they cannot accommodate the below changes, that their patients would be better supported outside of the PCN DES, that the practice would operate more effectively and safely outside of the PCN DES or any other reason, they are able to opt-out” (GP Contract Changes, BMA).

This theme is continued in the BMA’s recently published “Safe Working in General Practice”, which states, “There is an increasing view that the requirements of the DES outweighed the benefit brought by the investment into practices and ARRS staff… Practices will need to consider if the PCN DES enables them to offer safe and effective patient care within the context of their wider practice, and their present workforce”.

This all feels somewhat disingenuous, and more of an attempt by the BMA to score political points over NHS England than genuinely putting the interests of practices first.

The reality of the 2019 deal and the introduction of the PCN DES is that it put an additional £3 billion funding into general practice, £2 billion via the PCN DES.  The majority of that funding has not yet come through.  We are only half way through the recruitment of the ARRS roles, the IIF funding has been limited due to covid and grows significantly over the next two years, and enhanced access brings £6 per head under the control of PCNs that previously in most places came nowhere near practices.

From a staffing perspective there are no new GPs, and whatever the promises (5,000 GPs, 6,000 GPs etc) there are unlikely to be any anytime soon.  The only way for practices to manage the ever increasing workload is to use different roles.  Notwithstanding the challenges of training, supporting and integrating these roles, they are the only realistic route for practices to find a way of managing the workload.  100% reimbursement (even if that doesn’t mean free) for these roles is not a bad deal.

PCNs are also the only route by which general practice can influence the newly developing integrated care systems.  The future NHS is not interested in any provider that wants to stand alone and not work in partnership with others.  If general practice wants to continue to be able to have a voice post-CCGs then it needs to work on how its PCNs can influence local arrangements.

The alternative is, as the BMA points out, to opt-put of the PCN DES.  This means practices will lose out on the PCN funding, the ARRS staff and worse, “NHS England is likely to transfer the funding, requirements and staff – likely via TUPE (Transfer of Undertakings) – to Trusts or alternative providers to maintain as much of the PCN DES as possible without general practice.” (GP Contract Changes, BMA).  Given the current Secretary of State’s penchant for nationalising general practice I am not sure the government would be that uncomfortable shifting PCN resources to acute trusts and making practices even more vulnerable going forward.

The only real rationale for opting out of the PCN DES is a protest vote because of the lack of any negotiated outcome to this year’s contract, which is what the BMA seems to be pushing for.  But any rational analysis of the situation shows that it is in practices best interests to stay in the DES and to continue to be able to access its (growing) resources.  That said it doesn’t mean things shouldn’t change.  As I have argued previously, in many places PCNs are too distant from practices, and not run with enough attention being paid to the sustainability of practices in mind.  Now is the time not for practices to opt-out of the PCN DES, but rather to ensure that the PCN DES, a part of the national GP contract, is playing its part in ensuring the future sustainability of the service.

16
mar
0

Where is the National Leadership of General Practice?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The move into integrated care systems means the importance of GP practices in a local area working together to create a strong and united voice is greater than ever.  It is not easy, but in lots of areas PCNs, federations, LMCs and even CCG GPs are working out how they can set aside their differences in order to increase their influence in the new arrangements.  But why is the same thing not happening nationally?

There is a lot going on nationally around general practice right now.  The contract for 2022/23 has been issued without any agreement between the GPC and NHS England for the first time that many of us can remember.  I don’t think I have ever seen a clearer signal that a unified national GP voice is 1) needed and is 2) absent.

It is not only the contract.  The Secretary of State Sajid Javid clearly has some pretty radical ideas when it comes to general practice.  He happily wrote the foreword for a recent publication by think tank Policy Exchange that advocated for the end of the national GP contract and for practices to be nationalised.

We also have the Health and Social Care Committee chaired by Jeremy Hunt, and its Inquiry into the Future of General Practice.  There must be a danger that general practice is becoming a political football between the former and current Secretary of State, as they seek to score political points off each other.

Within this context the profession needs strong and united leadership.  I don’t mean union style demands for more (money, staff, support, GPs etc), as the landscape clearly requires a more refined political touch right now.  No sector, whether it is hospitals, community trusts or mental health providers, will succeed right now by framing what they need in isolation from the rest of the system.  Instead they need to demonstrate their contribution to the wider system, and how investment in them can play an important role in making the integration agenda a reality.

It is not hard to hear the acute trust voice advocating for themselves as large, functioning organisations to be the ones who should take general practice under their wing to create joined up pathways of care for patients inside and outside hospitals.  What general practice needs is not only leadership that will articulate the obvious fallacies in such a plan, but also be able to put forward compelling alternatives that build the role and influence of the service.

The problem comes in holding the support of frontline practices, many of whom want to hear their leaders demanding more, and at the same time operating within this political national environment.  Too often GP leaders will simply repeat the demand for more (see this response to the Policy Exchange report from the RCGP) in order to curry favour with practices, rather than because it has any chance of influencing anything.

National GP leaders need to start modelling behaviours for local GP leadership.  It would be great to see the GPC, RCGP and the GP leadership team at NHS England working together as a united group.  There are some very talented and capable individuals across these organisations, and they could work together to strengthen the national influence of general practice (which would be in sharp contrast to the void we have now).  Together they could find ways of both having an impact on how integrated care arrangements develop, and at the same time be able to take practices with them.

When the GPs at NHS England and the GPs in the BMA talk against each other, it is the service as a whole that suffers.  It doesn’t matter who is right and who is wrong.  In the present day context general practice needs to be united at every level, and we especially need that at a national level.  Surely now it is time to put organisational differences aside, and to start working together for the service as a whole.

 

9
mar
0

Guest Blog : What do the new Enhanced Access Requirements Mean for General Practice?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Access remains a highly contentious issue and the latest publication from NHS England regarding the 2022/23 contract updates has resulted in a wave of concern from some GPs and unhelpful headlines in the usual suspects of newspapers.

Negativity permeates a lot of what we are doing as a professional sector and in many parts of society. It is easy to look at perceived problems and often hard to focus on the positives.

Of the Clinical Directors, PCN Managers and GP partners I have discussed this with, once we spent some time assessing the impact on them and their practices, it has been evident that this change is likely to bring about a number of positive outcomes. I wanted to share this with a wider audience to hopefully improve the perception of the changes.

Is there a greater time commitment?

If you are in a practice that has never delivered the Extended Access requirement and you have limited engagement with Improved Access it may feel like an increased obligation.

In most other cases it will be the same and, in some areas, could be a reduction of time. There are areas who have been working under Improved Access at or close to 45 minutes per 1,000 patients plus the 30 minutes of Extended Access. For these areas the strict obligation will be easier to provide.

Services I am involved with have been operating on a model of 37.5 minutes and in practice we have been delivering closer to 50 minutes under Improved Access at the request of our member practices. Consequently the new combined requirement will be between 7.5 and 20 minutes less than currently provided.

Many other areas are the same, but it is essential to ensure that the time requirement is tracked on a like for like basis.

Is there sufficient funding?

The letter states that NHSE will ‘bring together, under the Network Contract DES, the two funding streams currently supporting extended access to fund a single, combined and nationally consistent access offer…’. This means that for every patient £7.44 will be available.

Currently £6 per head is commissioned by the CCG and is paid to the local provider of Improved Access. Some PCNs took responsibility for this funding and commissioned their own Improved Access in 2020, others received the service indirectly through federations.

By moving this fund into the PCNs it is arguably the first significant funding stream that can significantly improve the performance and structure of the network.

The following table provides a quick reference to the new time obligations and funding to support it:

PCN Size Additional Minutes Additional Hours Funding per Annum Funding per Week
20,000 1,200 20 148,800 2,862
30,000 1,800 30 223,200 4,292
50,000 3,000 50 372,000 7,154
75,000 4,500 75 558,000 10,731
100,000 6,000 100 744,000 14,308

 

It is important to recognise that some of this money is already being used by practices and other funding will be with federations or other third parties. The effect of moving these funds into the PCN need to be carefully considered locally so it does not destabilise other services which may be relying on top slicing these revenue streams.

Will the workload increase?

The guidance is vague and in many ways that is far better than the current requirements managed by CCGs. One of the biggest challenges with Improved Access contracts was the focus on appointments of 15 minutes. This resulted in a limiting factor which either excluded or made it very difficult to count many of the more innovative uses of the additional time.

Group consultations, tissue viability clinics and DVT management clinics were some examples that delivered excellent patient outcomes but struggled to demonstrate the appointment counting criteria.

The new requirement simply states that the time is used for ‘any general practice services’. A narrow interpretation for this could be a full suite of services but I would recommend that unless further guidelines are brought out, we use a broad interpretation. Our focus will be on delivering those general practice services which are making the biggest impact on our patient’s needs and preferences.

In some areas this may be a full range of services in others it could be a focus on cohorts of patients. I am aware of a PCN who focuses on weekend clinics for the elderly as they discovered it was the best time for family and carers to help the patient travel to the practice.

This type of patient focused service modelling is at the heart of the original PCN concept and this is an opportunity to start shaping support around them. This is the first requirement in the preparation stages outlined in the guidance.

Sharing the workload between practices by developing shared services across the PCN should improve the levels of demand on practices if managed correctly.

Will much change?

For many practices probably not. Enhanced Access is not significantly different than the current arrangement and as argued above it provides new opportunities to PCNs in terms of service design, improved funding and integrating workloads.

The option remains for PCNs to take responsibility for the funding but to agree with practices and with other providers to continue providing existing levels of cover and services. As long as these meet the minimum requirements and the parties are happy with this approach this allows continuity whilst giving more financial control to the PCNs.

This may well be the stop-gap position whilst a longer term review and service redesign process is instigated by the practices to shape services in the future.

If you are in an area with poor service availability with current Improved Access providers, this situation should improve as you take greater control. There are also areas where the CCG top-sliced the £6 figure, so in these areas the full amount will be made available to practices for the first time.

There will be exceptions to this principle but in general this is a change which should be seen from a positive, pro-GP perspective.

Next Steps

We have until October before the new requirements go-live and first drafts of the Enhanced Access Plans need to be submitted by 31 July 2022. This time will fly by quickly so it is better to get started at the earliest opportunity.

It is likely that these plans will be subject to a form of localised template but in the meantime PCN teams can look at current arrangements, discuss with the practices how they want to manage the transition from the current service and speak with your current Extended Access providers.

You can also engage with your patients at the earliest opportunity. Use different data sources to build a picture of the changes that are most likely to improve services as a whole.

This information will be a great starting point to manage the transition to the new specification and you may be surprised about how little change is needed. For others this is a chance to start implementing some of those longer-term aspirations you have had and to start those service improvements which have been delayed in recent years due to the pandemic or a lack of funding.

It can be hard at times to be optimistic, but I am convinced from the discussions I have had over the past few days that this is a change that should be embraced rather than feared.

2
mar
0

What has the PCN ever done for us?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

There is a tension that sits at the heart of any PCN.  It is the mismatch between the practice expectation of a PCN (that it will support the practice and enable it to be sustainable at a time when GP practices are struggling), and the system expectation of it (that it will work as a force for integration at a local level and unite services around the needs of local populations).

This tension sits primarily on the shoulders of PCN Clinical Directors.  These individuals spend much of their time trying to engage their member practices in the PCN project, practices that are often asking the question of what the PCN has ever done for us.  At the same time the weight of system expectation is that they will form productive alliances with the local (sometimes failing) mental health trust to introduce mental health practitioners, or the local (under pressure) ambulance service to magic up new paramedics, or interface effectively with a whole regional infrastructure that drags the PCN social prescribers away from what the practices want from them.

What is the role of the PCN?  Is it to support member practices, and act as a vehicle for the introduction of additional roles that will sustain them in the absence of any more GPs?  Or is to tackle health inequalities and help ensure the needs of local communities that have often been overlooked finally start to be met?

The fundamental problem with the whole PCN agenda is that the answer to this question is not clear.  It feels like their introduction was a compromise, an attempt to try and do both of these things at once.  The problem is that it was sold to practices on the basis of their future sustainability (remember £1.8bn of the additional £2.8bn promised to general practice in the 2019 5 year contract was via PCNs), and at the same time sold to the system as providing the building blocks of the new integrated care system.

The problem with compromise is that it often means no one wins.  In social psychology studies of groups, compromise is considered lose-lose in a zero sum equation.  Both parties want 100%, but they both have to give something up to appease the other party.  As a result, neither party really gets all of what they want.  Typically it results in resentment and not really being happy.

This feels like where we are now.  General practice is not happy with the PCN DES, as was clearly signposted by the inclusion of resignation from it as part of the move towards industrial action.  At the same time the system is not happy with PCNs and the role they are playing in the developing integration landscape, or else why would they have been replaced by “neighbourhoods” in the recent White Paper?

This is all starting to feel like a missed opportunity.  There is no reason why PCNs cannot meet both agendas, and contribute to the sustainability of practices and enable meaningful local integration.  But what this requires is an explicit acknowledgement by all that PCNs are trying to do both of these things.  Their success should be measured by the extent to which it achieves both of these goals.

At present there is no marker of what PCNs have done for practices.  There is no reason not to make this explicit, and include it front and centre of what PCNs achieve.  At the same time the PCN DES measures that we do have are national markers (because it is a national contract) of the role of PCNs in integration.  But of course for them to be really effective in this role these measures need to be locally set – the challenges in Frimley are not the same as the challenges in Newham.

So instead of trying (badly) to do two different things for two different audiences, it would better for PCNs to be explicit about the dual goals to everyone, have appropriate separate measures for each, and be given the freedom to use the resources that are being made available to make both things happen.

23
feb
0

What the Integration White Paper means for General Practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The government published its White Paper “Joining up Care for People, Places and Populations” on the 9th February, describing itself as “the government’s proposals for health and care integration”.  This is apparently one of a set of reforms, as it sits alongside the Health and Social Care Bill and the Adult Social Care Reform white paper.

There is no getting away from the meaningless fluff that surrounds descriptions of integration in the paper (e.g. “Successful integration is the planning, commissioning and delivery of co-ordinated, joined up and seamless services to support people to live healthy, independent and dignified lives and which improves outcomes for the population as a whole” p17).  The terminology within the paper is both over the top and (at best) confusing.

The paper clarifies (p18) that a “neighbourhood” is “an area covered by, for example, primary care and their community partners”.  You would think this would be called a PCN, but the PCN nomenclature appears to be have been dropped within this paper and replaced by neighbourhood.  A “place” is a locally defined geographic area typically 250-500k population, and a “system” is a larger area with a population of about 1 million.

In fact PCNs only get one significant mention in the paper, and that is primarily to signpost the fact that they are being reviewed, “GP practices are already working together with community health services, mental health, social care, pharmacy, hospital and voluntary services in their local areas in groups of practices known as Primary Care Networks (PCNs). Building on existing primary care services, they are enabling greater provision of proactive, personalised, coordinated and more integrated health and social care for people closer to home. NHS Chief Executive, Amanda Pritchard, has asked Dr Claire Fuller (CEO Surrey Heartlands ICS) to lead a stocktake of how systems can enable more integrated primary care at neighbourhood and place, making an even more significant impact on improving the health of their local communities. This will report later in the spring.”

For a reason that I am not clear on, PCNs have shifted from being the central plank and foundation of integrated care systems, to something that contribute towards the overall ambition for integration – make of that that what you will.

The paper tries to distinguish between what will happen at the system level and at a place level.  There is the sticky issue of whether the NHS or Local Authority is “in charge” at a place level, and the solution the paper comes up with is that, “There should be a single person, accountable for shared outcomes in each place or local area, working with local partners (e.g. an individual with a dual role across health and care or an individual who leads a place-based governance arrangement).” p11.

However, “These proposals will not change the current local democratic accountability or formal Accountable Officer duties within local authorities or those of the ICB and its Chief Executive”, which does rather beg the question of what power or authority these newly accountable individuals will have.

The suggested governance model for place is via a ‘place board’, “a ‘place board’ brings together partner organisations to pool resources, make decisions and plan jointly… In this system the council and ICB would delegate their functions and budgets to the board” p34.

General practice therefore needs to work out how it is able to be an effective member of, and be able to influence, this place board.  This will inevitably require the PCNs within a place area to find ways of working together and to be able to create a unified voice.

The autonomy of these place boards is still open to question.  Despite a lot of rhetoric about the need for local areas to determine local priorities, the pull of the top down approach has once again proved too difficult to resist, “We will set out a framework with a focused set of national priorities and an approach from which places can develop additional local priorities” (p23).   A new set of national priorities is on its way for implementation from April 2023.  This means places will receive their must-do list which they will undoubtedly be heavily performance managed on, but of course can also set some additional priorities for themselves if they would like.

That said, the ambition remains for services and spend to be put under the control of place based arrangements, so I still think it would be wise for general practice to ensure it plays a central role within them.  One thing the paper is clear on is that general practice funding is not to be ringfenced from other spending, but rather included within a single system funding envelope (p36).

There are promises to have fully integrated shared care records across organisations and seamless data flows across all care settings in place by 2024, but if the last 20 years has taught us anything it is don’t hold your breath.

There is a whole chapter on workforce integration.  What is notable about this is more what it doesn’t say than what it does.  It talks about the pivotal role of link workers and care navigators in joining up care, about pharmacist integration, and about making better use of occupational therapists, but it never once references the additional roles coming into PCNs through the ARRS.

Overall the paper continues the national drive towards integration, and reinforces the need for general practice to make sure it is playing a central role in the developing place based arrangements for their area.  What is potentially of most concern is the shift away from the importance of PCNs and whatever lies underneath that.

16
feb
0

The Challenge of Being a PCN Clinical Director

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The role of a PCN Clinical Director is more challenging than it has ever been before, and yet we are about to see a huge turnover in those undertaking these roles.  Why is the role so different now, and how can those taking it on for the first time now even hope to be successful?

It may not feel like it, but it is now three years since we were first introduced to Primary Care Networks (PCNs).  They first appeared in the NHS Long Term Plan which was published in January 2019, which was then quickly followed up with the new five year GP contract the following month with the PCN DES for general practice.

After three months of set up, PCNs were formally established on 1 July 2019.  One of the requirements was that each PCN had a Clinical Director in place.  Many of these Clinical Directors agreed to take on the role for an initial term of 3 years.

Unfortunately the initial funding of 0.25wte per 50,000 population was wholly inadequate for the workload and expectation placed upon these new leaders.  This situation was not helped by the ongoing national refusal to make any funding available for PCN managers to lighten the burden on PCN CDs.  Whilst the funding has (belatedly) been temporarily increased to 1 wte and some (non-recurrent) funding has been made available for management support this year, it has never been done in a way that allows PCNs to invest more into PCN leadership on a permanent basis, or that enables those leaders to give up their other work and create more time for the role.

The PCN CD role has changed immeasurably in the last three years.  In their first year the (not insignificant) challenge was persuading practices to work together.  But since then PCN CDs have had to deal with Covid, the vaccination programme, a huge increase in staffing via the ARRS scheme, and an ever increasing set of delivery requirements, all during a period of transition into integrated care systems.

Let’s not forget, all of this has been set within a context of general unease across the service with PCNs.  At a number of points across the last three years there have been threats of widespread resignations from the PCN DES, and that threat is still hanging following the ballot from November last year.

It is no surprise, then, that many of those who put themselves forward to be a PCN Clinical Director back in 2019 are saying that enough is enough, and that it is someone else’s turn to carry the baton now that the initial three year term is up.

The problem is that most of these individuals have grown and developed with the role over the last three years.  They possess leadership skills and experience that they did not have when they started.  Their PCNs need them in the CD role now more than they ever did.  But the system has treated them in a way that means it is unsurprising that many do not want to continue.

And so we are in a position where in many PCNs, someone new, or maybe even two new people, are taking on the role.  The challenge for these new incumbents is even greater than it was for their predecessors because the roles are so much bigger now, and the expectations on PCNs are so much higher.

It will not be easy, and it will be down to both the local practices within a PCN and the local system to support this new wave of leaders so that they may also have a chance of success within the role.

It is with all of this in mind that myself, along with PCN CD Dr Hussain Gandhi and PCN expert Tara Humphrey, have set up PCN Plus.  PCN Plus is a development programme for those taking on the PCN Clinical Director role, and provides training for new PCN leaders in how to be successful in the role.  You can find more information about PCN Plus here.

9
feb
0

The Influence of General Practice on Integrated Care Systems

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The shift to Integrated Care Systems is going to be a difficult one for general practice.  The luxury of Clinical Commissioning Groups (whatever you might think of them) was that they put general practice at the forefront of decision-making.  Of course that is not really how they worked out in practice, but at least their existence ensured a strong presence for general practice in any system-wide decision making.

That, however, is all about to change.  It may well be that the statutory change to Integrated Care Systems and the formal abolition of CCGs is not due to take place until July, but these changes  are already being made and the new system will be up and running sooner rather than later.  The statutory representation of general practice falls to a solitary GP on the ICS Board, and they will have no requirement to be there in a representative capacity for the profession.

In a recent podcast with Dr Jaweeda Idoo from Greater Manchester, where devolution has accelerated the ICS agenda, it became clear that there are numerous levels between any individual practice and the ICS Board.  Each practice is in a PCN.  Each PCN works together with other PCNs in a “place” area.  The 10 place areas from across general practice work together in a general practice board for Greater Manchester.  Representatives from the general practice board are on the primary care board (incorporating wider primary care partners such as pharmacists, opticians and dentists).  Representatives from the primary care board sit on the Provider Board.   The full ICS Board then also includes CCG and Local Authority representatives.

There are a lot of layers.  The distance between a practice and the ICS seems vast.

In Greater Manchester general practice has retained a voice, but this seems to be due to the influence of certain individuals, such as Manchester LMC CEO Dr Tracey Vell, and a seemingly shared belief in the pivotal role general practice plays within the system.

But Integrated Care Systems are not being designed to maximise the voice of general practice.  Instead we have this sense of predatory hospital trusts, encouraged by the Secretary of State, considering how they can bring general practice under their wing and keep their needs central within ICS discussions.  Practices in areas more dismissive of the role of general practice than Greater Manchester may find themselves even further down the pecking order.

What, then, is general practice to do?  There is a school of thought that the only way to increase the influence of general practice is to make the service more relevant to the system discussions.  By doing more to impact the system, such as taking on outpatient and more minor procedures from the acute environment, or managing cohorts of the unwell at home, then it forces the system to listen.

There is another school of thought that general practice has not only react to proposals put forward by others (which appears to be the default system position), but must proactively generate ideas and strategies of its own in order to increase its sway in the discussions.  By bringing new things to the table general practice can create its own relevance.

While either of these things may or may not turn out to be true, my sense remains that the starting point has to be the development of a sense of unity and collective identity across general practice in any area.  At present general practice often feels divided between practice GPs, PCN CDs, Federation Directors, CCG GPs, LMC GPs, and even CCG primary care teams.  In the new system, however general practice chooses to work to generate influence, it has to do it together.  There can only be one general practice “team”, and everyone has to be on it.

For leaders in general practice preparing for the shift to Integrated Care Systems the most pressing priority right now has to be working to create this unity.  Divisions in the service sometimes run deep, but it is in everyone’s interests to put these to one side, to bring together all the skills and expertise that exist across the service, and work to unite these to give general practice the best possible chance of meaningful influence in the new system.

2
feb
0

Why Would Sajid Javid Claim to Want to Nationalise General Practice?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

On Saturday the Times reported a plan by Sajid Javid to ‘nationalise’ general practice.  It seems (once again) general practice has become something of a political football.  What are we to make of this latest report?

We need to put this latest development within the context of everything that has happened in recent months.  In October last year the government, clearly frustrated by complaints in the Mail and other elements of the press about challenges with access to a face to face appointment for a GP, pushed NHS England into the production of their document “Our plan for improving access for patients and supporting general practice”.

As a result the profession, already incensed by the lack of support from NHS England earlier in the year over the same issue, voted in support of a mandate for strike action.  Not, one would think, the response the government was looking for.

At this point (in November last year) the Health and Social Care Committee, now led by a transformed Jeremy Hunt seeking to use his position chairing this committee to undermine the government at any point, launched an Inquiry into the Future of General Practice.  Evidence for this inquiry can be submitted until this Friday, 4th February.

The Times article indicated that a review of General Practice is “planned” by Javid, so we can assume this is not the same as the Health and Social Care Committee Inquiry.  There are undoubtedly politics that we are not aware of between Hunt and Javid also at play, but what the Secretary of State certainly won’t want is Hunt’s Committee telling him what he should be doing with general practice.

The other important piece of context for this article is the wider shift to integrated care, and what this means for general practice.  As I discussed a couple of weeks’ ago, the Planning Guidance for the NHS seems very geared towards the role general practice can play in support of acute trusts, in particular in relation to the rollout of thousands of virtual wards.

A review of PCNs was also announced in November last year, and interestingly this review is now framing itself in terms of what “integrated primary care” looks like.  In this video the leader of the review Clare Fuller does not reference PCNs once.  This review is due to report next month, so it is not beyond the realms of imagination to think that this is the review that Javid is referencing in the Times article.

This would also explain the timing of the article, although of course all this is being carried out at exactly the time that the newly elected GPC committee, armed with their strike mandate, are negotiating the first contract.  This government, for longer than most of us can remember, wants better access to a GP above all and everything else, and if negotiations are not going well this might be the perfect time to threaten nationalisation to move things along.

The argument for organising health services around the needs of hospitals (as opposed to the health needs of the population) is so antiquated that it is hard to believe that it is being taken seriously.  That said, with this government anything is possible, and there are disturbing trends within Integrated Care Systems and the guidance around them towards creating primacy for the needs of hospitals.

But overall my sense is that general practice has very much become a political football, and that most of this is political game playing.  I don’t really think Sajid Javid wants to nationalise general practice, and to end up in a full on dispute with the profession, but I think there are things that he does want and reports like this are simply a means to help him get them.

26
jan
0

5 Things to Watch Out For in 2022

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

What is on the horizon for general practice in 2022?  Here are 5 things to watch out for in the year ahead.

February: Contract Negotiations.  We are three years in to the 5 year deal agreed in 2019, so you would think that contract negotiations this year would be relatively straightforward.  However, once you throw in Covid, the government’s concern with GP access, a new GPC leadership team, and the vote in support of industrial action made by the profession at the end of last year, the negotiations this year could well be a spikier than normal affair.  Despite the profession’s reaction there has been no softening of the national stance on GP access, and so it will be very interesting indeed to see what comes out of this particular set of negotiations.

March: PCN Review Report.  In November last year a review of PCNs was announced, and how “they will be working with partners across newly formed integrated care systems”.  Potential concerns were highlighted at the time, namely that it implied a need for more national control over PCNs, that it could signal a shift of ownership of PCNs away from practices, and that it may very well further distance PCNs from the pressing issue of general practice sustainability.  This report is due in March, most likely coinciding with whatever comes out of the contract negotiations, and there is a good chance it will have big implications for general practice.

June: 3 years of PCNs.  It may only feel like yesterday but in June it will be three years since PCNs were first established.  PCNs now, with their large team of additional role staff and increasing set of delivery responsibilities, are significantly different from what they were back in 2019.  However, three years may also mark the end of the tenure of many of the initial PCN clinical directors.  While we have experienced some turnover of CDs already, this year could well see a much a greater turnover with many coming to the end of the term they initially agreed, and taking on the role may prove a tough challenge for those coming new into the role this year.  How this affects PCNs as a whole is something only time will tell, but unless more support is put in place it is unlikely to be positive.

July: Integrated Care Systems go live.  It feels like we have been living in the shadow of integrated care systems for some time now, but (according to the new planning guidance) they will finally go live in July this year.  This means CCGs will formally be abolished, and general practice will be left to fend for itself amongst the other providers as we all ‘work together’ to agree how care is organised and how resources are divided.  The extent to which general practice can influence and impact these new systems may well be very important in determining the level of local investment and support in the service going forward.

October: Shift of Extended Access to PCNs. Well, maybe.  This shift was supposed to happen in April last year, and then in April this year, and now in October this year, and the continual delays do raise the question as to whether this shift will ever really happen.  But if it does it may well spell the end of financial sustainability for the significant number of GP federations that rely on this funding, and this in turn could well create difficulties for both local practices and PCNs.  It is an issue that when the guidance (finally) comes out will need some working through to ensure we don’t end up with more problems than we have now.

19
jan
0

What this Year’s Planning Guidance Means for General Practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Each year the NHS publishes planning guidance.  This year is no different, and on Christmas Eve (happy Christmas everybody…) true to form the NHS published “2022/23 Priorities and Operational Planning Guidance”.   It outlines for the NHS what needs to be achieved in the year ahead.

While it is not a document specifically aimed at general practice (rather it is aimed at the NHS as a whole), it provides an interesting perspective on how general practice is viewed within the system, what the priorities for general practice are likely to be, and gives some indication as to what will feature in next year’s GP contract.

The document sets 10 priorities for the NHS.  General Practice explicitly features in one of them, namely to, “Improve timely access to primary care – maximising the impact of the investment and Primary Care Networks (PCNs) to expand capacity, increase the number of appointments available and drive integrated working at neighbourhood and place level” (p6).

So first off, in case anyone thought there might be some national backing off from the October guidance that generated such a backlash (including a mandate for national strike action for the GPC), there is a clear reinforcement of the need for the paper to be implemented (“In line with the principles outlined in the October 2021 plan, systems are asked to support the continued delivery of good quality access to general practice through increasing and optimising capacity, addressing variation and spreading good practice” p25).

More interesting is the newer theme that pervades the text around integration.  Integrated Care Systems go live next year, although this document confirms that this will now happen on July 1st not April 1st to allow time for the bill to pass through parliament.  Systems are exhorted to, “maximise the impact of their investment in primary medical care and PCNs with the aim of driving and supporting integrated working at neighbourhood and place level.  Systems are asked to look for opportunities to support integration between community services and PCNs” p24.  The review of PCNs will be reporting in March, and I wouldn’t be surprised if it marks a shift of PCNs away from ownership solely by practices.

Systems will also be judged by the extent to which their PCNs have made use of their ARRS allocation, and are also asked to support employment models across organisations, “Systems are expected to support their PCNs to have in place their share of the 20,500 FTE PCN roles by the end of 22/23 and to work to implement shared employment models” (p24).  It is interesting that underneath the opportunity for PCNs to use the ARRS funds there is a top down pressure on local systems for all the money to be spent.  Indeed, the rationale used is not to support general practice, but “to support the creation of multidisciplinary teams” (p9).

There is a further notable nuance that PCNs (not practices) are treated as the unit of general practice in the guidance.  It claims that there will be, “ a suite of national GP recruitment and retention initiatives to enable systems to support their PCNs (not practices) to expand their GP workforce and make full use of the digital locum pool” (p9).  We also won’t hold our breath in anticipation of all the same additional GPs we have been promised for the last 5 years…

There are two other major items of note for general practice in the guidance.  The first is the big push in the guidance on the roll out of virtual wards.  The ambition set is that by the end of 2023 there will be 40-50 virtual wards per 100,000 population.  These are to be based on a partnership between secondary, community, primary and mental health services, and they “should only be used for patients who would otherwise be admitted to an NHS acute hospital bed or facilitate early discharge” p21.  £200M in 22/23 and £250M in 23/24 is being made available to develop these wards, although given the numbers of wards expected how they will work is a mystery, as my back of the envelope calculation gives each ward less than £10,000 to operate.

The other item of note is a promised new IIF indicator for PCNs to incentivise contributions to a minimum of 2 million additional pharmacy consultation appointments in 2022/23.  According to the guidance (p25) this will move “more than 15 million appointments out of general practice”!

Overall, the main takeaway is the pressure that will come around ‘integration’ – PCNs and PCN staff to work across organisations, multidisciplinary teams, multi-organisational virtual wards, joint working with pharmacies, and (of course) new integrated care systems in charge of everything.  What could possibly go wrong?

15
dec
0

2021: The Most Challenging Year Ever?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

2021 has been quite a year.  What can we takeaway from everything that has happened, and where are we now as move towards 2022?

The year started with the vaccination programme (in a way hugely reminiscent of everything that is happening right now).  When things were critical, and a fast response was needed, it was general practice that the NHS (and the government) turned to.

For the first months of this year, the vaccination programme was exhausting.  There were real concerns that the programme would prove to be too much for general practice.  One GP predicted at the time, “Prediction for GP in England. It will deliver on the vaccination demands. Delivered for most partners at a loss because of the awful NHSE and GPC ES. Once the pandemic is over many GP partners, PCN CDs and practice managers will resign, broken.” (here).

While we didn’t end up with mass resignations, there was certainly a withdrawal from the programme by many because the constant demands were proving simply too much.  And when the delivery demands of general practice as a whole were increased in April, despite the ongoing demands of the vaccination programme, it did raise the question of who is looking after general practice?

No one, it transpired.  As complaints from the worried well emerged via sections of the press, rather than defend the over and above contribution already made by the service NHS England responded with a letter in May mandating practices to offer face to face appointments.  Understandably, this did not go down well.

Despite some huffing and puffing, at the time no real response was made by the service, much to the consternation of many.  But a few months later NHS England’s publication on improving access and “support” for general practice (essentially how they were going to performance manage practices into offering more face to face appointments) proved to be the straw that broke the camel’s back.

By this point the demand on the service had become so great that the model of access to general practice now required a virtual or telephone triage to protect the face to face appointments for those who really needed them.  Instead of supporting the use of this model, and helping to explain it to the wider population, ministers and NHS England spent time on national TV promising anyone who wanted a face to face appointment with their GP that they could have one.  Nothing could have been either less helpful or more incendiary.

As a result the BMA balloted on industrial action, and supported by the service it now has a mandate to take into next year.

The other big development in 2021 was the shift of the whole systems towards integrated care, as a replacement for the historic commissioner provider split.  The White Paper was published in February, and while it is still making its way through parliament the NHS has been moving at pace to be ready for its approval and it becoming legislation.

It has been a challenge trying to work out what the new system means for general practice.  Design guidance followed for the service in June, and we started to understand the importance of local place based arrangements for general practice, as well as the role of PCNs in representing practices in these models.

The big concern is that there will be a loss of influence for general practice.  While CCGs are (supposed to be) GP led, there is no such requirement of integrated care systems.  Indeed the formal role of GPs in the new arrangements is relatively limited, and leadership of the new system by general practice feels unlikely.  But, as ever, general practice has worked its way through the issues, and areas have worked out that by PCNs, federations and LMCs coming together general practice can have the strongest voice in the new system.  The overall strategy needed is one of pushing decision making to the most local level possible, working together to create a single local voice for general practice, and then using this voice to influence decision making locally.

Here we are at the end of the year, with the service feeling very much on the precipice.  Integrated care systems are due to go live during 2022 (dependent on when the legislation finally gets approved), industrial action looms (one assumes depending on the outcomes of contract negotiations early in the new year), and covid is fighting back to add yet more pressure on to the service.

We have now come full circle with a new call to arms for general practice to once again lead the vaccination charge for the country.  Let’s hope next year there is both more appreciation for the critical role general practice plays, and more support for the service to recover from what has undoubtedly been one of its most challenging years ever.

8
dec
0

GP Partner Training – the Learning So Far

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Earlier this year myself and a group of colleagues decided that we should put in place the training for new GP partners that we had been talking about for such a long time.  The course finally started in September of this year, and we have already learnt some interesting lessons along the way.

I teamed up with Tara Humphrey, PCN management expert, Director of THC Consulting and presenter of the Business of Healthcare podcast; Robert McCartney, general practice governance expert and Director of McCartney Healthcare Associates; Dr Naj Seedat, GP, trainer, partner in a large North East London practice and LMC Chair; and Dr Farzana Hussain, GP, GP appraiser, mentor, trainer and lecturer.  Together we formed a really strong team, designed to be able to meet all the development needs of new and aspiring GP partners.

We designed the course into 20 sessions, broken down across three broad areas: understanding the business (i.e. what goes on within the practice); understanding the environment (i.e. what is happening around the practice that affects it); and understanding the risks (i.e. how do you build a strategic plan for the future).  Naturally the weighting of the first area is greater than the other two, as there is so much within the business of a practice for any new partner to get their head around!

We wanted the course to not be too demanding on GP time, which is why we went for the model of an hour a fortnight over a period of 9 months.  This has worked to the extent that it has made the course manageable in terms of time for participants.  The challenge, however, has been how to cover such huge topics as managing people or understanding premises in just an hour.

We have been working hard to do this well, but for some topics we just had to extend the sessions.  For example, when accountant James Gransby ran the session on understanding the practice finances we had to make the session an hour and a half.  Even then it was hard to cover everything for such a complex topic!

The other challenge we have experienced is how to make the sessions interactive when there is so much content to work through.  In an hour the scope for really interactive sessions is limited, but at the same time the more interactive the sessions are the more valuable they can end up being for participants.

Another lesson we have learned is that one of the biggest challenges new partners experience is taking on the role as a business owner and what this means in terms of how they lead and manage staff.  This is a really critical area for GP partners, as their leadership style really affects the culture of the whole practice.

As a result of all this we have made some changes to the programme, for the next cohort of new or aspirant GP partners who will be joining.  In the new format content will be delivered over six monthly half day sessions.  This will allow us to create longer, more interactive sessions where we can tailor the content to the specific needs of those on the programme.

We have also included core strengths training as standard, as it really helps new partners understand and develop their leadership style, and given over a whole half day session to leading and managing people.

We always knew developing this training would be a journey, and that we would be learning as we went along.  We are delighted with how the programme is going so far, and excited to make the changes to make it even better going forward.

The programme for our next cohort commences on the 1st February 2022.  We still have some places remaining, so if you or someone in your practice is interested you can find all the details here.  Alternatively get in touch and I am happy to talk through individually what we are doing so that you can work out whether it is right for you – I’m ben@ockham.healthcare.

1
dec
0

50 to 1

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

I am spending some time working with a number of areas thinking through how to create and develop a strong, unified voice for general practice, that can be effective and influential within the new integrated care landscape.  It is a challenge that is harder than it sounds.

The problem comes because “general practice” in any given area generally consists of about 50 different, independent, autonomous organisations.  There are the 40 or so individual practices, 5 to 10 PCNs, maybe a federation, and the LMC.  How do you get 50 organisations to speak and act with one voice?

There is a framework that is quite helpful to consider in this context, called the Cynefin Framework.  Essentially it breaks problems down into different categories.  For our purposes what is helpful to understand is that there is a difference between simple, complicated and complex problems.

Simple is a problem that has a relatively straightforward solution, such as how do I lower my car window.  There is a specific, straightforward answer (press the right button).

Complicated is a problem that does have at least one solution, but which can be difficult to deliver.  An example that is commonly used is sending a rocket to the moon.  It is not a simple thing to do, and may well require multiple teams and specialised expertise.  But by really effective project planning, and using the experience of those who have done it before, it is possible to create a path to making it happen.

Complex problems are ones that are impervious to a reductionist approach that strips the problem (however complicated) down to its core components to work out the solution.  The example commonly used is raising a child.  There is no handbook because each child is unique.

For a complicated problem you can use a project planning Lewinian style approach to solving it.  But for a complex problem the approach needed is an emergent one, using trial and review (like PDSA cycles for you NHS improvement fans, or probe, sense and respond which Snowden, who introduced the Cynefin framework, uses).

This distinction is useful because in healthcare we commonly describe complex problems as complicated ones and hence employ solutions that are wedded to rational planning approaches.  We look for business cases with defined outcomes as a default mechanism for moving forward, when this approach can only work for something that is simple or complicated, not for something complex.

Back to our problem.  How do we get 50 general practices organisations to operate as 1?  It is a complex problem.  There is no handbook, because everywhere is different.

That is not to say it is impossible.  What we can do, even operating in the domain of emergence, is understand what factors we need to build in order to give ourselves the best chance of success.  Two stand out.

The first is the need to build some capacity and capability at the collective general practice level.  If general practice is trying to operate as one then whatever forum or entity is trying to bring it all together needs to develop the ability to do a number of things.  It needs to be able to communicate with its 50 organisations.  It needs to be able to coordinate activities across those organisations.  It needs to be able to interact effectively with partner organisations.  These things don’t happen because the different parts of general practice simply meet together.  They need to put in place.

The second is the need to build trust.  Trust is the key ingredient.  If the 50 organisations don’t trust the 1, all is lost.  Here we get into the area of the prisoner’s dilemma, which explains why rational actors won’t cooperate even when it is in their best interest to do so.  Just because it makes sense for general practice to create a single unified voice it doesn’t mean they will do, and in fact without trust it is much more likely that they will not.

It is particularly challenging in general practice because we are all so instinctively independent.  That is why we have 50 different organisations in the first place.  We hate our independence and ability to act autonomously being in any way compromised.  We find working in PCNs difficult enough.  We instinctively pull away from any notion that we might get into scenarios where our practice or PCN has to act for the greater good rather than simply what is best for our practice or PCN.

As we move forward with the 50 to 1 challenge, our approach then needs to be an emergent one, i.e. one where we try things, see how they work, and then adjust accordingly.  We need to keep our eyes on the outcome (why are we doing this), and work hard to build trust and create some capacity and capability along the way.  It might make plan writers uncomfortable, but it is the way forward that will give us our best chance of success.

24
nov
0

The Inquiry into the Future of General Practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The Commons Health and Social Care Committee has announced a review into the future of general practice.  What does this mean, why would they do this, and what are the implications for the service?

The Health and Social Care Committee is a cross party committee charged with overseeing the operations of the Department of Health and Social Care and its associated agencies and public bodies (including NHS England).  It essentially has a scrutiny role.

The Committee chooses its own subjects of inquiry, which it then undertakes by reviewing written and oral evidence.  Once complete, the findings of the inquiry are reported by the Committee to the House of Commons.  The government then has 60 days to reply to the Committee’s recommendations.  The government does not have to accept them, e.g. the Environmental Audit Committee inquiry into disposable packaging recommended a 25p “latte levy” on disposable coffee cups; but the government rejected it, preferring for coffee shops to incentivise customers by offering discounts for the use of reusable cups.  However the cross party nature of the Committee, designed to build consensus across parliament, means its recommendations do still exert considerable influence.

This committee on the 16th November launched an inquiry into the future of general practice.  Its headline focus is to examine both the challenges facing general practice over the next 5 years, and the biggest and current barriers to access to general practice.  The committee is actively seeking evidence from anyone with expertise in the area (i.e. you, if you are reading this).  The deadline for submissions, which must be no longer than 3,000 words, is Tuesday 14th December.

It is one of 9 current inquiries the Health and Social Care Committee either has underway or that are complete and are awaiting a government response.  The others are workforce burnout, lessons learnt from coronavirus, children and young people’s mental health, treatment of autistic people and individuals with learning disabilities, supporting those with dementia and their carers, cancer services, clearing the backlog from the pandemic, and NHS litigation reform.

The inquiry into general practice will cover a range of issues (you can find the full terms of reference here), but it includes regional variation in general practice, general practice workload, and the partnership model of general practice.  The specific question in relation to the latter of these points is, “Is the traditional model of general practice sustainable given recruitment challenges, the prioritisation of integrated care, and the shift towards salaried GP posts?”.   There is also a question about PCNs, “Has the development of PCNs improved the delivery of proactive, personalised, coordinated and integrated care and reduced the administrative burden on GPs?”.

What can we make of the announcement of the inquiry into the future of general practice?

The first point to note is the timing of the announcement.  It has come at a point where there has been considerable media and public attention to the challenges around access to general practice, and is also hot on the heels of the announcement of a ballot for industrial action of GPs by the BMA in response to NHS England’s recent publication on improving access and support for general practice.  It does not seem unreasonable for this to have been picked up as a point of concern by the Committee at this point in time.

The second point to note is that the Chair of the Health and Social Care Committee is Jeremy Hunt.  Jeremy Hunt appears to be enjoying his role as a backbench GP, able to chair this committee from a position of considerable knowledge, particularly in terms of how he can make life as uncomfortable as possible for the government.  His own response to the NHS England document was that it “won’t turn the tide” for GPs, and this seems to be reflected in some of the wording of the terms of reference, e.g. “to what extent does the government’s and NHS England’s plan for improving access for patients and supporting general practice address these barriers” (to access to general practice) when it is already clear to everyone that it does not.

There will be the more cynical who assume this is a back door attempt to end the independence of general practice and shift practices into the main body of the NHS, or conversely to privatise things further by shifting all remote and telephone consultations to digital first providers to “reduce pressure” on practices.  And while it does seem odd to want to look at the partnership model of general practice only a few years after the 2019 review by Nigel Watson, the cross party nature of the committee, along with the methodology of collating evidence from as wide a group of experts as possible, does make this seem unlikely.

Whilst it is hard for anyone in general practice to trust anything led by Jeremy Hunt, my sense is the best course of action would be for as many of those working in general practice as possible to give evidence and provide their views on the questions asked and what is needed going forward.  It feels like a genuine chance to be heard, and is a welcome change from the recent policy directives received from NHS England which have had little or no consultation at all.

17
nov
0

3 Reasons to be Concerned about the Newly Announced Review of PCNs

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The NHS announced last week that  they would be undertaking a review of primary care networks and how they will “work with partners across newly formed integrated care systems to meet the health needs of people in their local areas”.  The review will report by March 2022, ahead of ICSs going live as statutory bodies.  Whilst it might all appear very anodyne on the surface, it does set alarm bells ringing.

There are three reasons for concern.

  1. The perceived need for greater national direction

What the announcement of the review signals is that NHS England, in what is now customary NHS England style, is seeking greater control over PCNs and how they operate.  The initial language used around PCNs was that they how they operated was for local determination by local practices to best meet the needs of local communities.

That, however, now appears to be going out of the window.  NHS England clearly wants to set more guidance and rules on PCNs and how they work.  The contractual constraints of PCNs are already suffocating for many, and so it is hard to see how extra national directions will be helpful.

What we have with this review is a signal that someone somewhere high up is not happy with how PCNs are progressing, and has put this review in place to change where they are headed.  This review has also been announced hot on the heels of the BMA motion for industrial action and mass resignations from PCNs.  This may be unrelated, but it does lead on to my second concern.

  1. It signals a shift in ownership of PCNs away from practices

If you read the announcement from NHS England you will notice it has a very clear focus on joint working.  It talks about how PCNs “will work with partners”, how they can “drive more integrated primary, community and social care services at a local level”, how they can “bring partners together at a local level” etc etc (it carries on like this throughout).

If you recall when PCNs were first announced there was quite a number of references made to how PCN Boards would be expanded over time to be more than simply the member practices.  Whilst some PCNs have widened their PCN Board membership, most have not.  Given the language in this announcement it would be astonishing if the recommendations made were not about a shift of PCN ownership away from practices and towards a much wider ownership.

How far-fetched is it to suggest that this report will end up “recommending” a place for councils, community trusts (and no doubt others) on PCN Boards? Maybe a direct accountability into place-based partnerships will be imposed on them.  Whatever comes, it is hard to envisage a positive outcome of this review for practices.

  1. It further widens the gap between PCNs and the sustainability of general practice

At a critical point in time, just over half way through the 5 year GP contract that introduced PCNs, when general practice has reached such a desperate place that it is prepared to consider strike action, this review is announced.  In the announcement general practice or GP practices receive only one mention, and that is about the need to improve partnership working between GP practices and other organisations.

This report will not be looking at how PCNs can better support the sustainability of GP practices, despite the majority of the additional funding for general practice coming via PCNs.  It is hard not to see the announcement of this report as part of NHS England’s response to the GPC’s threat of industrial action, and if it is it spells more bad news for general practice.

I am not generally a pessimist or a conspiracy theorist, but everything about this report sets alarm bells ringing.  Time will tell whether these are unfounded concerns, or whether it is the first signal of yet more challenges to come for general practice.

10
nov
0

Is General Practice Making the Most of the Opportunity of PCNs?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

It is a difficult time for general practice right now. The pressures of workforce and workload are higher than ever, exacerbated by the media and their impact on patient expectations and overall morale.  How can general practice move forward?  How can it shift from the place that it is now into a more sustainable future?

In 2016 the GP Forward View, a 5 year “rescue package” for general practice, announced an extra £2.4bn for general practice by 2021.  This was then somewhat usurped in 2019 with the new 5 year GP contract that announced an additional £2.8bn for general practice by 2024.

What we have known for a while is that more resources on its own are never going to be enough for general practice.  We don’t feel £2.4bn better off than five years ago.  The reason for this is the growth in resources will never be able to keep up with the growth in patient demand and expectations.  There need to be changes alongside the resources.  These changes need to be in how we manage demand and how we organise ourselves.

Here we get into problems.  No one really likes change.  Look at how certain sections of the public and the media have reacted to changes to the management of demand in general practice where only those who actually need to be seen (as opposed to those who want to be) are seen face to face.  Whether the government likes it or not we will end up there, but it helpfully reinforces the point that no one likes change.

When you examine what options are available for changes in terms of how general practice organises itself (which we did in our 2016 book) they are broadly around staffing, operating at scale, using technology and working in partnership with other organisations.

This is where PCNs come in.  What stands out for me about PCNs is that they offer an opportunity for practices to be able to make virtually all of these changes, and to be able to do so in a way that protects the independent contractor model.  Prior to PCNs it was all about mergers and super practices, but what PCNs do is provide a construct that allows practices to access the benefits of scale while at the same time protecting their own individual identities.

But delivering the potential benefits does not happen by itself, or as a function of signing up to the PCN DES.  It requires practices within a PCN to commit to using the PCN construct to drive change in the way the practices operate to realise the benefits.  Change does not become easy because you call it a PCN.  It remains difficult, but what PCNs provide is a framework for practices to use if they choose to do so (in addition to providing a huge source of resources – £1.8bn of the additional £2.8bn announced in 2019 is coming via PCNs).

I have no idea whether this was the original idea behind PCNs.  I suspect it wasn’t.  Certainly the contractual nature of PCNs, the tick box style of the IIF, the push to recruit more and more new roles with hardly any support for transformation alongside these roles, and the continual attempts by the system to hijack the PCN agenda are not conducive to practice transformation.  But at their core PCNs do provide practices with the chance to broaden their staffing model to reduce the pressure on the GPs and to build relationships with other practices and other organisations to create shared service models that work better for everyone.

However, at present it feels like PCNs are an opportunity for general practice that is not really being grasped.  Many practices choose to keep PCNs at arm’s length.  The BMA is trying to use PCNs as a mechanism for pressuring government and NHSE.  Others want to use PCNs for their own ends.  But PCNs are a huge, well-resourced opportunity to make change that can be a huge force for good and for creating a positive future for practices.  Practices just need to choose to take it.

3
nov
0

Should PCNs be Political Footballs?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Two weeks ago the BMA reported that it had rejected what it terms “the government’s rescue package” and that it was to take a ballot with the profession on industrial action.

The specific motion passed by the GP Committee contained two clauses directly pertaining to PCNs. It:

ii. calls on all practices in England to pause all ARRS recruitment and to disengage from the demands of the PCN DES
iv. calls on all practices in England to submit undated resignations from the PCN DES to be held by their LMCs, only to be issued on the condition that submissions by a critical mass of more than 50% of eligible practices is received

What does this mean for PCNs?  There are effectively three requests being made of practices in relation to PCNs.  The first is to pause ARRS recruitment.  Unfortunately ARRS recruitment is the one part of the PCN DES that many practices consider to be value adding.  Whilst there are some whose primary concern is the clinical supervision, line management and estates challenges these roles can create, increasingly practices are able to realise the benefits of these additional staff on their workload and outcomes for their populations.

It is hard to understand how sending a message to practices and PCNs to stop recruitment into these roles, the one thing that is helping with overall workload, is helpful in the current context.  Do we think that collective pausing of recruitment for a few weeks or months will influence the government/NHS England?  The downside of the suggestion seems far more detrimental than any potential upside.

The second is the call for practices to disengage from the demands of the PCN DES.  There is an anger amongst many that the delivery expectations on PCNs have been ramped up so steeply from October 1st.  The number of IIF indicators (the ‘PCN QOF’) has gone up from 6 to 19 for the last six months of the year, along with a requirement to deliver against two additional DES specifications (health inequalities and CVD prevention and diagnosis).  Disengaging will, however, potentially cost the practices of an average PCN £120k (what they could earn through delivery of the IIF indicators, which are also linked to the delivery of the two specifications).

The third is the submission of undated resignations from the PCN DES by practices. This suggests that the reason practices participate in the PCN DES is because they want to support the government’s/NHS’s desire for PCNs to exist.  In reality there are two reasons.  The first is that PCNs make sense financially for practices, and the second is that practices believe that by working together as a PCN they can improve outcomes for patients.  While the initial decision to sign up was probably more for the former reason, as time has gone by more practices believe they can make a difference through their PCN.

The request, then, is for practices to sacrifice the benefits they receive and believe can be achieved for their patients in order to derail the wider national plan in relation to PCNs, to build influence in the debate on the issues of concern (i.e. the failure to address the crisis in general practice, the recently published plan around access, the GP earnings declarations, and for GPs to oversee the Covid vaccination exemption process).

I understand the desire for greater negotiating power.  The cost, however, falls on PCNs themselves.  While PCNs have been working hard to build trust across their practices, to create ways of working that benefit all, and to make a difference both to practice sustainability and patient outcomes, the effect of something like this is to set the whole thing back.  It makes it easier for the practices that have never really engaged to not do so, and makes it even more difficult for those who have been working hard to realise the benefits of joint working, because now the spectre of mass resignation can sit as a rationale for inaction.

So is it worth it?  Is the threat around PCNs worth the problems this causes to practices?  The Guardian reported that the BMA had won “significant concessions” from NHS England following its threat of potential industrial action.  These included the plan to publish ‘league tables’ – showing what proportion of appointments were in person – had been abandoned, along with specific targets.  However, the organisation seemingly responsible for setting policy in relation to general practice, the Daily Mail, reported that the Department of Health had moved quickly to insist it had made no concession to doctors’ unions, and that it would press ahead with measures to publish surgery-level data on face-to-face appointments.

Time will tell how this will all play out.  I fully support the push back by general practice to the NHS England paper on access, which was the NHS operating at its very worst.  However, I worry that not enough thought has been put into the consequences of conflating PCNs into a dispute that is not actually about PCNs.  Doing so is effectively self-harming for the service, and in particular it has left those in PCN Clinical Director roles, who are arguably doing the most for general practice right now, in a very difficult position indeed.

27
oct
0

GUEST BLOG: Dr Rachel Morris – 3 Conversations You Should Be Having With Your Overwhelmed Teams Right Now

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Many of our team members in Primary Care are feeling battered and bruised by the tone and content of what’s coming out from on high, and everything going on in the media. As a leader you may feel frustrated and angry yourself, and you may be wondering just what you can do to help everyone keep on going through these really tricky times.

There are three key questions which will help you and your team to take stock of what you can do about the situation, work out what you should be prioritising and reduce some of the stress and anger about what’s going on.

 

What can I control?

The first question is all about what is in your power to change, and what’s not.

In any of life’s challenges, there are things which we worry about which we simply can’t do anything about (for example, rising COVID rates, government policy, the national shortage of GPs). Dwelling on these things is a waste of precious time and effort as there is literally NOTHING that you can do to change them.

A far more productive way to spend your time and mental energy is to ask yourself ‘what is in my control right now?’. A simple way of doing this is to do the ‘Zone of Power’ exercise.

Get a sheet of A4 paper, draw a circle – this is your zone of power. Outside the circle list all those things you are not in control of, and inside the circle list all the things which you ARE in control of, and the options and choices which you have. You may not like all of these options and choices and you may feel frustrated about the consequences of some of these choices, but you will feel more powerful and productive by focussing on what you CAN do rather than what you can’t.

The key to this exercise is learning to ACCEPT the things you can’t change and find the COURAGE to change the things you can (this will also help you with the WISDOM to know the difference – sound familiar?!).

Use this question with your team members whenever any of you feel stuck, to work out what your next actions could be.

 

Where is your focus?

The second question helps teams get super clear about what your priorities should be right now.

Many teams in primary care are feeling overwhelmed and exhausted. There are too many things to do and not enough time or staff to do them. But do you know exactly what these things are? Have you had a conversation about what you should be prioritising as a team, as a practice, as a PCN?

So often, we see team members with different priorities going in different directions which causes confusion and overwhelm as no one really knows which is the most important priority, and what they can drop for now. Without this conversation, the stuff that’s urgent will always crowd out the stuff that’s really important but perhaps not urgent – yet, such as team development, sorting out workflows, delegation and staff training.

Getting clear on what three things you will be focussing on as a team in the next week, month and year will help reduce overwhelm, create some mental headspace, and make sure you’re all laser focussed on the same things.

 

What story are you telling?

As patient demand and expectation seem to grow every week and negative stories in the media threaten to kill our morale stone dead, it’s helpful to ask yourself ‘What is the story in my head’ about the things that are bothering you.

When patients are rude and demanding, do we tell ourselves that’s because they are completely unreasonable, that they all hate us and that we’re doing a terrible job? Or do we recognise the truth – that patients may be frightened and worried about themselves (after all, we are going through an incredibly traumatic time as a planet), they may be frustrated that they can’t get exactly what they want instantly (in a world of Amazon Prime and Netflix).

Do we tell ourselves that we are failing and not good enough? Or that Primary Care is doing an AMAZING job in the face of huge challenges, and that we are doing our absolute best through difficult times?

Are we telling ourselves that it’s us vs “them”. Or that we are all actually on the same side, wanting a properly funded, safe and efficient primary care service in which staff AND patients are thriving?

Are we telling ourselves that we ‘have’ to do it all, can’t take any time out or that saying ‘no’ makes us a bad person? Or are we recognising the truth that it’s only by putting our own oxygen mask on first, recognising our limits, and taking time to rest and recharge that we will do our best work?

The stories we tell ourselves create feelings which lead to actions. The negative stories we tell can only lead to stress, disillusionment and often keep us stuck and frustrated. By re-framing what we choose to believe (but not denying the reality of the difficulties) we can start to change our feelings and actions and reduce the stress and levels of burnout we experience.

These are simple questions, but they are not easy. They require a degree of self-examination and recognition of some difficult truths BUT if you start to ask them with an open mind, kindness and a large helping of self-compassion they may just help you and your team make better decisions, take control of your workload, and start to enjoy what you do again.

Our Resilient Team Academy online membership for leaders in health and social care provides conversations canvasses, coaching demos, video training modules, bite size team building videos and deep dive live webinars to help leaders and managers have these important conversations and support their teams care for resilience, wellbeing and productivity. Doors to the RTA are open right now and we have discounted packages for Ockham Healthcare subscribers, and packages for PCNs and other organisations. Find out more here or get in contact with Ben (ben@ockham.healthcare).

You may also be interested in watching a recording of a recent webinar that Ben and I did, ‘How to support your team through the new ways of working in primary care, without burning out yourself.’ You can find it here.

20
oct
0

A Reminder of the Value of Independent Contractor Status

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Last week NHS England published, “Our Plan for Improving Access for Patients and Supporting General Practice”.  It is a document that lacks coherence, and is clearly a performance management document that has then been added to to try and make it ‘acceptable’ to the profession (e.g. add “and supporting general practice” to the title).  This hasn’t worked, and, understandably, it has created an angry reaction across the general practice.

In the NHS direct performance management like this has been common for a number of years.  Statutory NHS bodies such as Acute trusts, Community Trusts, CCGs (etc) receive edicts like this that demand certain actions and delivery on a reasonable regular basis.  These are then reinforced by senior leaders not achieving the targets being summoned to local then regional then even national performance meetings.  There was a time in the not too distant past when acute trust chief executives not meeting the 4 hour A&E target were being summoned to meetings with the then Secretary of State Jeremy Hunt.

This style of performance management is a particularly unpleasant side of the NHS.  It comes because those in the highest positions of the NHS have to demonstrate they have levers they can pull to make things happen on the ground, when they themselves are under pressure.  We have a new Secretary of State and a new NHS Chief Executive, and the bigger worry is that this is just the first taste of what life is going to be like under this new regime.

But if nothing else, the document is a timely reminder of the benefit of the independent contractor status that general practice enjoys.  The reality is that the Secretary of State cannot directly tell GPs what to do, or instruct how they should behave, in the same way that he can with NHS Chief Executives and senior leaders.

Whilst the document might feel like direct performance management (it is designed to), it is in fact an instruction for how NHS staff that are under the direct control of NHS England are to manage the contract they have with general practice.  They are the ones who are to submit returns by the 28th October, not practices themselves.  For general practice, its responsibility lies in making sure it delivers against the contract it has signed up to, nothing more.

For those who have not read the document (and it is not a read I would recommend), it essentially outlines a series of measures that it will introduce to try and increase the number of face to face appointments GPs hold with their patients.  They will use the data practices are now submitting to publish waiting times at practice level, and send a ‘hit squad’ into the practices with the longest waits.  The NHS is asked to compile a list of practices where the number of appointments is lower than pre-pandemic levels, of the 20% of local practices with lowest level of face to face appointments and with the most significant level of 111 calls in hours and A&E attendances compared to expected, and of where concerns have been raised with CQC and others.

The NHS is then to use this data to create an overall list (by 28th Oct) of local practices where “it will be taking immediate further steps to support improved access” (43).  These actions are to include “partnering with other practices, federations or PCNs”, and “contract sanctions and enforcement” (45).

Pretty grim stuff.  It is effectively an instruction for commissioners to use any contractual lever they can to make practices see more patients face to face.  They themselves will be directly performance managed on this, as they are “required to produce a fortnightly updated report for their region” (48).

For GP practices the best thing to do is simply ignore it.  As long as you are happy with the balance of remote to face to face appointments in your own practice and are confident you are meeting your contractual requirements, then don’t do anything.  The worst thing that could happen would be for this approach to be effective, because it would encourage the new national NHS leadership regime to do more of the same in future.  Practices have enough on their plate to content with right now, so let commissioners manage the flak that comes from above.  The good ones do this regularly and they do it well.

If general practice was part of the NHS (as opposed to an independent contractor) it would be having to manage this itself.   Independent contractor status is hugely valuable, and one general practice would do well to hold on to as long as it can.

13
oct
0

What do ICSs and PCNs mean for GP Practices?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

There is so much going on in general practice right now, and the workload pressure is so great, that it is easy to take a head down approach to everything that is going on outside the practice.  But the landscape around practices is shifting.  What do these changes mean for individual practices?

The big change is the introduction of Integrated Care Systems (ICSs).  This change is one that most practices are largely ignoring, but one that has significant implications for practices.

One of the reasons there is little interest shown by practices is because it is a change that is rarely clearly explained.  At its most simple the way the NHS is being organised will no longer be through a separation between purchasers (or commissioners) and providers.  Instead providers will directly work together to agree how care should be delivered, what the pathways should look like, and how the money should be spent.

In practical terms, CCGs will cease to exist from March next year, and they will be replaced by new NHS ICS bodies.  These role of these organisations is essentially to enable the joint working between providers that lies at the heart of the new system.  As a result all provider organisations are represented on the Boards of the new NHS ICS bodies.

ICSs will function on two levels.  There will be the whole-ICS level, where broader strategy decisions will be taken, but then also at local levels within the ICS area.  This local level is what is being referred to as the ‘place-based’ arrangements.  This will generally be the local area or borough that general practice has been part of for many years.

In most ICSs much of the decision making, including resource allocation, will be devolved to these local areas.  This will include funding for any local enhanced services/local incentive schemes for general practice.

At the heart of integrating care within a local area lies Primary Care Networks.  These were created not in splendid isolation from the rest of the system, but with the emerging ICS explicitly in mind.  The role of PCNs within the new system is to create seamless care for physical and mental health across primary and community care, to enable care to be delivered as close to home as possible, to create seamless pathways across primary and secondary care, to strengthen the focus on prevention and anticipatory care, and to support people to care for themselves.  The PCN is the core building block of the new integrated care system.

All of the work that PCNs have been asked to do so far (primarily via the PCN DES) has been with this in mind.  It underpins the specifications that have been developed within the PCN DES, and the indicators within the Investment and Impact Fund (IIF).

The asks and requirements so far on PCNs are only the beginning.  They will inevitably grow, and increasingly these will come from the local place-based Board of the new ICS (i.e. the one that sits at a local level), as opposed to nationally via the PCN DES.

When PCNs were announced as part of a 5 year contract for general practice in 2019 the funding split was as follows: £1bn extra to come via the core contract, £1.8bn to come into general practice via PCNs.  The more recent uplift in ARRS funds to cover 100% of salaries from 70% means the split in reality is more like £1bn to £2bn.  Most new general practice funding is already coming via PCNs.

But PCNs are only just getting started.  The ICSs do not become statutory bodies until April next year, when we will already be 3 years into the 5 year GP contract, with only 2 years remaining.  What will happen then?  Most (if not all) of the local enhanced service contracts from the ICS place-based board will come at a PCN not practice level.  The differential in funding growth after 2024 if anything is likely to be greater than from this 5 year agreement (i.e. the vast majority of resources coming into general practices will be via PCNs rather than via the core contract), because the foundation the whole new system is being built on is PCNs.

All of this means there are two really important things practices need to be doing now.  The first is to start treating the funding and resources the practice receives via the PCN as part of its core resource, and not as an optional extra separate from the ‘real’ business of the practice.  Investment into general practice is coming via PCNs, and so practices that try and sustain themselves into the medium term on core contract income alone are going to find life extremely difficult.  This may in turn have consequences for how practices choose to interact with their own PCN (a topic I will return to in a future blog).

The second is that practices must ensure that their PCN is directly engaged in the Board and leadership arrangements of the local-place based Board of the ICS.  I know the level of meeting requests in relation to the system and ICSs is bewildering at present, and can feel like a waste of time, but the one ICS meeting that PCNs must prioritise is this local place-based Board.  Each PCN has a seat on this Board to represent local general practice, and because this Board will have such a strong influence on how care is organised locally, and how resources are apportioned, it is critical PCNs take up this seat and do not leave it empty.

6
oct
0

A 3 point ICS Strategy for Local General Practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

What is the plan for general practice within an Integrated Care System (ICS)?  It seems that for most the pressure of everyday life is far too much for GPs to be even thinking about this question, let along working out what the answer is.  But if general practice is to have a voice in the new system that is developing some form of plan is necessary.

For local general practice to have as big a voice as possible, and in the absence of any more tailored local solution, I would suggest the following as simple 3-point plan.

  1. Push for as much as possible to be devolved to place-based arrangements

ICSs are to work on two levels.  There is the overall ICS level, and a  number of local ‘place-based’ levels.  Each ICS has to decide how the local place based arrangements will work.  Specifically it has to decide whether to use the local arrangements as advisory within the wider ICS decision making, or whether to devolve decision-making authority to the local level.

The reality is that the influence of general practice will be much greater at a local level than at an ICS level.  An ICS Board only has to have one GP.  That GP will be appointed and in no way has to be representative of general practice.  However, at a local level the PCN Clinical Directors (CDs) are to represent general practice on the local place-based board.

It is difficult for general practice to establish consistent and shared views across practices.  The bigger the area, the harder the challenge of creating a shared view across practices is.  It makes sense to try and push decision making down to a local level, to give general practice the best chance of creating a consistent voice.

On the plus side the local councils will also be pushing for decision making to be devolved to a local level.  While there may be challenges ahead with the council within the place-based board now is a good time to ally with them to influence the ICS to establish a devolved decision making model.

  1. Create an Integrated Voice for General Practice at a Local Level

The challenge for general practice is to bring together all the constituent parts of general practice together to create a single, unified and therefore powerful voice.  This includes the individual practices, the PCNs, the local federation and the LMC.  For general practice to have influence with other system partners it needs to speak with one voice.  If it spends its time contradicting itself (e.g. the LMC speaking against the PCNs) then its voice can simply be ignored by system partners.

The areas that have had most success have done this at a borough or local level.  I wrote recently about what we can learn from the experiences these places have had.  Some ICSs are trying to push practices into creating a shared voice (or general practice ‘collaborative’) at ICS level.  It is hard enough making this work at a local level, and my strong view is that if you attempt to do this at too wide a level the internal arguments will be too difficult to overcome and the net result will be an extremely weak voice for general practice.  Far better to create local arrangements, and then ask the leaders of these local arrangements to come together and influence at an ICS level.

  1. Make Use of the Opportunity to Influence at Local Level

This strategy only works if once the ICS has agreed to devolve decision making to a local level that general practice actually takes the opportunity to influence decision making locally.  It means PCNs and practices working together to identify their priorities and to push these in the local meetings.  It means building relationships with local leaders and taking an active role in the working of the local place-based partnership meetings.

This is more challenging than it sounds.  PCN CDs are overwhelmed as it is with meetings and demands on their time.  The delivery responsibilities for PCNs have just been ramped up.  It is easy to ignore the local ICS partnership board as one more meeting that you don’t have time for.  But losing control of this now and giving it up to local authority and community providers who will be eager to take it would be a mistake that general practice could rue for a long time.

Not only does local general practice need to come together and create a single voice.  It needs to establish how it will discharge this voice and influence the local meetings.  This involves identifying one or two senior leaders who it will choose to build relationships with the other local leaders to represent general practice in discussions and at these meetings.

This three point strategy will only work if all elements are carried out.  If decision making is devolved but local general practice cannot agree with itself, its voice will still be weak or limited.  If it doesn’t attend the meetings or find a way of ensuring its views are adequately represented the same will apply.  However, if done well the rewards could be significant, as it is an opportunity for general practice to work with other providers and shape the provision of healthcare in their area.

29
sep
0

Why Extended Access is so Controversial

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

There is a storm brewing in general practice.  Not unusually it relates to access, and more specifically extended access.  The ramifications are significant for PCNs more widely and the ability of general practice to be effective within local Integrated Care Systems.

What exactly then is the problem?

Right from the inception of PCNs it was announced that the funding for extended access would shift from the CCGs to the PCNs.  Originally this was planned for a year ago, but then this was delayed for unspecified covid-related reasons to April 2022.  It does look like it will happen this time round, especially because CCGs themselves will no longer exist at that point.

The current situation is that either local practices via a federation or an external provider deliver extended access.  This is not the same as out of hours, but covers 6.30–8pm on week days and 8am to 8pm at weekends.  Out of hours providers cover the 8pm to 8am period.

The issues can be broadly broken down as follows:

  • Where an external provider delivers the service there is often unhappiness with the quality of service provided, and many local GPs have a sense that a better service could be put in place, particularly given the amount of money on offer.

 

  • Extended access is funded at £6 per head of population. Given the requirements placed on the service, this feels generous to many GPs when compared to the core funding they receive.  We do not know whether this will be the funding level transferred to PCNs, or whether the service requirements will remain the same, but some practices believe it would make financial sense for extended access to be directly delivered by the practices in their PCN.

 

  • Many practices are at breaking point already. Regardless of the finances, there are many practices who are vehemently opposed to taking on extended access at a practice level.  The issue for these practices is that their staff cannot cope with the workload they have, and to then ask them to cover extended hours is untenable.  Those with longer memories view it as a step back to the pre-2004 days when GP practices were responsible for their own out of hours cover, and are passionately opposed to any such movement.

 

  • Federations use extended access funding to carry out far more than extended access. The relatively generous funding to date for extended access means that many GP federations have been able to build an infrastructure to support the delivery of at-scale general practice based on the extended access contract.  This has often included support for PCNs, delivery of vaccination services, delivery of resilience programmes (etc).  If the extended access contract is moved away from the federation by the PCNs then the whole at scale delivery capability for general practice that sits within the federation is put at risk.

The issue is hugely divisive because there are those practices who are adamant in their refusal to take it on, and practices and PCNs who are very keen.  Areas without a federation are already starting to feel forced into having to deliver this service, whereas areas with a federation are having to weigh up the impact on the federation as well as the impact on the PCN and its practices of any decisions they make.

The whole issue is unsurprisingly leading to increasing tension and animosity within general practice, just when it needs to be creating a united front.  The ongoing delays in the guidance from NHS England (it was due last year, then this summer, now it is due this autumn) are exacerbating the situation because without clarity on the requirements and the funding no one is in a position to make a final decision.

It is a controversial issue that is likely to become more divisive in the short term.  It falls to local general practice leaders to help navigate a way through this that works best for local practices and their populations, and not allow it become something that prevents general practice working together and having the united voice it so urgently needs within the emerging Integrated Care Systems.

22
sep
0

Making General Practice Effective within an ICS

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

A key challenge for general practice operating within an Integrated Care System is how it establishes a single voice, and how it exerts influence given the strength and size of system partners such as acute trusts and local councils.  But already up and down the country we are starting to see local areas work through exactly how they will do this.

Establishing a unified voice is difficult for general practice. The independent contractor model, and 7000+ units of general practice, puts it at a distinct disadvantage compared to local providers.  Often there will be one acute trust, one council, one community and mental health provider and then anything between 5 and 10 PCNs and 40-50 individuals practices in any local ‘place-based’ area.  Across the ICS as a whole it is even worse, as there can be literally hundreds of practices, dozens of PCNs, but one (often merged) acute provider and one or maybe two community and mental health providers.

In this set up it is not hard to see how the unified voice of these single providers, with their hierarchical structures and large management teams, is going to be more powerful than that of general practice, given its relatively disparate nature and lack of any form of comparable management support.

But what we are now seeing in different parts of the country are attempts to bring the different parts of local general practice together to create some form of a unified voice.  There is superb example of this in Herefordshire, which we featured recently in an episode of the podcast.  There they have established what they term a ‘General Practice Leadership Team’, which comprises the federation leads, the PCN Clinical Directors, the LMC, and even the CCG Director of Primary Care.

This leadership team works through things together and agrees a single voice on issues, as well as providing a forum for general practice to meet with system partners where it is needed.

Other areas are equally bringing together the federation directors and the PCN CDs and the LMC into an overarching local leadership group for general practice.  Sometimes this is done within a federation infrastructure, and sometimes it is created separately to the local federation but with federation input.  Of course sometimes there is no federation, but I am yet to find an area without one who has actually started on this journey (do get in touch if you have!).

What early lessons can we learn from those areas who are taking the early steps along this journey?

The first is that there is no right way of doing it.  All of these systems rely on trust.  So the important thing is whether all those round the table are bought into the need to create a single voice for general practice, and whether the people leading the group are trusted.  Interestingly in Herefordshire the group is chaired by a manager, the Director of Strategy at the federation, but that works because she has the trust of those round the table, has good system relationships in place, and can take a neutral stance, i.e. is not seen as favouring their own practice/PCN over others.  More commonly there is a trusted GP at the helm.  What is clear is that it is trust in the person leading that is important, rather than their role or background.

The second is that system influence is a function of relationships, not just attendance at meetings.  What that means is that those leading need to be given the time to build relationships with the other system leaders.  While there is a benefit in distributed leadership (i.e. different individuals taking on different aspects of the system leadership requirements), there is also the need for a focal point and someone who is enabled to invest the time to build relationships with the individual local leaders of the other organisations.

The third is to be effective this type of system requires clarity on the roles of all concerned.  It is not an abdication of autonomy of the general practice organisations around the table to the group.  It is a place where decisions can be made about what requires a group decision, and what remains the responsibility of the PCN or federation or LMC (etc).  It requires clarity about if someone is purporting to speak in the name of the whole of local general practice exactly what process is in place for them to be able to do that, i.e. how is that individual engaging or briefed beforehand, what can they agree/not agree, and how do they feedback and implement any actions picked up.  And it requires clarity as to where delivery responsibility lies, as the group only provides a coordinating function (it is very rarely an entity in its own right).

The fourth is that such a system or infrastructure will take time to develop and become effective.  Trust (the key ingredient) has to build along the way.  And given how close we are to these new systems going live it is probably a journey that every area needs to be thinking through now as to how this is going to work locally.

This could be left in the ‘too difficult’ box (because of the size of the challenge!) but that then leaves general practice hugely exposed in the new system, with little hope of exerting effective influence on local decision making and resource allocation.  If there is no movement in this direction locally I would suggest the best starting place would be a conversation between the PCN CDs and the LMC to agree how to get started.

15
sep
0

Dos and Don’ts for the Next Phase of PCNs

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The recent PCN guidance signalled a new phase for Primary Care Networks.  In a recent blog I examined the guidance in some details.  The upshot, though, is that delivery expectations on PCNs will increase significantly from the start of October, and then again from March next year.

Covid has directly impacted on PCNs over the last 18 months.  Amongst other it postponed some of the delivery expectations to allow practices to deal with the pandemic and to roll out the vaccination programme.  Meanwhile the ARRS investment has continued.  Now the transition from set up to delivery is happening very quickly, instead of the more gradual shift originally intended.

This is significant for PCNs.  It means a move away from considering how to best use the ARRS funds to requiring a much stronger focus on delivery against the DES specifications, the IIF indicators, and any local schemes that may be in place.

So the set up phase of PCNs is effectively coming to a rather abrupt end, and we are entering a new delivery phase.  How should PCNs respond to this change?  Here are my top 3 ‘Dos and Don’ts’ for PCNs in making this transition.

DO

  1. Do be explicit about the link between PCN and Practice Work

Since 2019 the uplift in funding to the GP contract has come almost exclusively through PCNs.  This trend will continue for the next three years until 2024, and is highly likely to continue beyond that.  The funding and resources that will come to practices via PCNs will soon make up a key part of a practice’s income.  Participating in PCN delivery is not separate (and additional) to a practice’s core work; it is part of it.  For practices in a PCN to make the most of the PCN opportunity they need to work together, and make sure a commitment is in place from each practice to meet the delivery requirements.

  1. Do firm up the agreement between practices in relation to delivery

It is crunch time.  Some PCN targets can only be achieved if each practice plays its part.  But what happens if one practice does not meet the delivery requirements?  What if that means the whole PCN loses out financially? What are the consequences?  How will the PCN respond?  Will the practice have to recompense the other practices for any income lost? How will it work? It is really important practices within a PCN have a clear upfront agreement in place of exactly what the requirements in relation to delivery are, and what will happen if these are not met.  Without these in place life could become extremely difficult over the next few months.

  1. Do put management support in place

Many PCNs have some management support in place, but some still do not.  The latest guidance promises £43M for ‘PCN leadership and support’ this year.  If it is not already, ensuring delivery against all of the new requirements will be impossible for PCN CDs to do on their own from October, so use this funding to put some management support in place.

DON’T

  1. Don’t Change PCNs

Being in a PCN can cause relationships to fray, and working together can sometimes feel more difficult rather than easier over time.  But if you have got this far with your PCN configuration don’t be tempted to change it now.  Changing PCNs means doing all the start up work all over again, and frankly there is not the time to do this as well as meet all the delivery requirements.

  1. Don’t ignore the fact that a practice is not delivering

Conflict is difficult, and PCNs have been working hard to build relationships between its practices over the last two years.  But if a practice is not meeting its extended hours commitments or its care home requirements, and that is impacting the PCN as a whole, then it needs to be tackled.  Ignoring non-delivery now sends a message that non-delivery is ok to everyone, which in turn will make effective delivery across the increasing range of requirements almost impossible to achieve.

  1. Don’t waste your time in pointless meetings

The value of PCNs will ultimately come from their ability to make a difference to their local population.  It will not be determined by the number of system meetings that the PCN attends.  This phase for PCNs requires an internal focus to make sure they are each able to deliver effectively.  A PCN’s influence will increase if it can gain a reputation as one that can make change happen, versus one that attends a lot of meetings with little end product.

8
sep
0

What Next for General Practice Nursing?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

General Practice nursing has reached something of a hiatus: the ten point action plan published in 2017 has expired and as it stands there appears to be nothing new taking its place.  At the same time the Primary Care Networks (PCNs) dominating much of the general practice agenda make relatively little mention of the nursing workforce.  So where does this all leave general practice nursing?

At the time of the publication of the General Practice Forward View in 2016, along with the subsequent 10 point action plan for general practice nursing, there was a gentle optimism that the problems within the general practice nursing profession were finally being recognised, and action was being taken to resolve these.  But fast forward to five years later and it seems the situation remains critical.

While the numbers of nurses attracted into general practice has risen over the last few years (NHS Digital data reports just over 24,000 nurses in 2020 compared to c15,000 in 2015), the fundamental problems in relation to retention of these nurses remain.  The aging workforce, the lack of career opportunities, and the generally poor support for nurses all contribute to the retention challenge.  General practice nurses are funded via the core general practice contract, have no direct influence on the contract negotiations and are not part of agenda for change, and the inequity of pay this generates is the source of much frustration.

PCNs have not helped.  Many nurses are angered by the lack of mention of general practice nursing in the PCN documentation, in particular in relation to the additional roles coming in via the PCNs.  It makes already undervalued nurses feel even more underappreciated, while other professions brand new to the sector receive all the support and attention.

Nurses have provided the frontline of face to face care in many practices during the pandemic.  While many clinical staff were able to function through the use of remote consultations, it was often nurses who had to continue the face to face work such as immunisations and vaccinations, right at the time when the situation was at its worst.  The Queen’s Nursing Institute’s General Practice Nursing Report published last year includes many individual examples of this, and there is no doubt that many GPNs felt exposed to increased risk compared to other workers.

Where does all of this leave the profession now?   Ironically, the introduction of the other roles, and the challenges associated with this, has reinforced for many GPs the value of GPNs.  It is a source of frustration for GPs as much as the nurses that they cannot use the ARRS funding to strengthen this particular workforce.  Despite this, there should still be a place within PCNs for practices to consider how they are supporting their nurses alongside the other roles.

The nurses themselves also have a role to play.  Mel Lamb, a recent podcast guest, describes the need for a change in mindset from the nurses themselves to be more proactive about the opportunities that do exist, and to take more of a leadership voice in how general practice operates.  We have seen the emergence of the Institute of General Practice Management in the last year creating a national leadership voice for practice managers, and it does seem that a similar kind of unifying impetus is needed for GPNs.

National support and action is also required.  It is impossible to look at where we are now, review the progress made over the last five years and decide the job is done.  It cannot be left to the discretion of local areas to determine whether any more action is taken.  There has been some great work started via training hubs, federations and other organisations and these need to continue to be supported and funded, alongside a proper focus on how this critical staff group can be retained, to ensure any gains made are not lost in the next five years.

1
sep
0

What to Make of the New PCN Guidance

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

NHS England has recently published new guidance for PCNs, which covers the requirements for PCNs in relation to the DES specifications and how the Investment and Impact Fund will work for the 18 months from October.  This week I explore the implications of this guidance for PCNs.

Additional funding for PCN leadership and management support (£43m this year) is announced.  While PCN Clinical Directors certainly need more management support to help them with the role, this funding has to be taken with two important caveats.  First, there is no indication as to whether this funding is recurrent or not, and second there does not appear to be any extension of the additional Clinical Director funding itself (which had been increased for the first 9 months of this year).  So rather than “additional funding” it could probably be more accurately described as a re-badging (and reduction) of funding that PCNs are already currently receiving.

What is certainly good news is the announcement that PCNs will not be expected to deliver all of the additional PCN DES service specifications from 1st October, as had previously been signalled.  PCNs have to start with two: CVD prevention and diagnosis and tackling neighbourhood health inequalities.  Even these have been given an 18 month implementation timetable, meaning that the requirements for the first six months are not the full specifications.

Alongside this, the guidance announces the requirements for the anticipatory care and personalised care service specifications for 22/23, meaning PCNs are able to prepare for these now.

Of course the question all along has been where the funding for the additional work in each of these specifications is coming from.  What has become clearer with this publication is that the Investment and Impact Framework (IIF) is intended to provide direct funding support (or ‘incentives’ as NHS England like to term it) for the specifications.  Previously just over £50M had been allocated for the indicators in the IIF from April, but now new indicators have been added from 1 October that take the total national investment to the previously promised £150M.

As an aside, I find talking in these national, aggregated figures extremely unhelpful.  I understand it works for politicians and national figures when they are trying to demonstrate they are investing in general practice, but what a PCN needs to understand is exactly what it means for them (or even for an ‘average PCN’).  The original (£50M) IIF funds meant just over £40,000 was available to the average PCN, and this effectively triples that now this year to just over £120,000 for the average PCN.  In 2022/23 the total available increases to £225M, or £180,000 per PCN.

In the revised IIF there are a total of 666 points now available in 21/22 across 19 indicators.  This jump from just 6 indicators at present will need managing by PCNs.  80 of these points are allocated to the CHD specification (i.e. around £14,500 per PCN) and 56 to the health inequalities one in 21/22 (around £10,000 per PCN).  This does stand in contrast to the 222 points allocated to improving access to primary care services (or 166 if you don’t want to double count the health inequalities indicator, although even that indicator is not about tackling health inequalities per se, but rather health inequalities specifically in relation to access to GP services).

This latest guidance highlights that the focus on access to general practice is firmly back on the agenda.  I am not sure it ever really went away, but PCNs took primacy over access in national policy making for a couple of years, but we are certainly seeing it make a comeback now.  NHS England have produced this chart that summarises ‘PCN objectives’ for the next 18 months, and out of nowhere ‘improving patient access’ has appeared as one of the top 5 objectives for PCNs.  At the same time, supporting and sustaining core general practice is notable by its absence from this list.

Guidance had been promised on the transition of commissioning extended access services from CCGs to PCNs in the “summer” of 2021.  This letter states that this will now be available in “autumn”, but the deadline for the transition remains as April 2022.  This guidance was due last year, and has now been put back again, so it is clearly proving difficult to agree.  NHS England is probably stuck between a rock and a hard place with the government demanding more and more in relation to access, and the GPC unwilling to agree that PCNs will deliver more for less.  In the meantime PCNs are expected to have “undertaken good engagement with existing providers”, which in the absence of any guidance or indication of funding levels is something of a nonsense.

So that’s it.  There was always going to be a scaling up of expectations on PCNs, and we are starting to see this now.  It will soon be impossible for PCN CDs to manage PCNs on their own, simply because of the scale of the demands and delivery responsibilities upon each PCN.  For PCNs to work they need to do more than just what NHS England wants them to, as they also need to make a difference to their own member practices.  This latest guidance reinforces the need for PCNs to make sure they have they have clearly set their own priorities (so as not to be simply swamped by the national ones) and have the infrastructure in place to meet the ever-expanding requirements placed upon them.

25
aug
0

Is General Practice Making the Most of CCG Clinical Directors?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Over the last 8 years a wealth of skills, knowledge and experience has built up within a relatively small group of GP leaders who took on Clinical Director roles within Clinical Commissioning Groups (CCGs).  Now that CCGs are coming to an end, what will happen to these Clinical Directors?

The first thing to say is that some CCG Clinical Directors have taken matters into their own hands and have taken on roles as PCN Clinical Directors, thus cementing their place in the new system.  But there are still a considerable number continuing to undertake their CCG roles whose places are less clear moving forward.

The context this sits in is the shift of the system as a whole from a commissioner provider split to one of integrated care systems (ICSs).  Within ICSs the different providers are expected to collaborate and work together to decide how care will be delivered and how resources will be deployed.  One of those providers is general practice.

Many of the functions of CCGs are transferring directly over to the new NHS ICS bodies.  It may well be that roles have or can be identified within these bodies for the GPs in CCG Clinical Director roles.  But the key question is whether general practice as a whole wants these GPs to be deployed providing clinical advice and leadership across the system within the ‘neutral’ NHS ICS bodies, or to be more squarely deployed as part of the leadership team of general practice?

Within CCGs GP Clinical Directors have an explicit remit as GP leaders within GP membership organisations responsible for the health of the whole population.  Within an NHS ICS body, it is less clear that any clinical leadership role should be filled by a GP.  They could just as legitimately be filled by clinicians from anywhere across the provider landscape.

If general practice is to genuinely operate as an equal partner with an equal voice within ICS discussions, it will need leaders who are able to develop strategy, think strategically, and operate politically.  These are exactly the skills that CCG CDs have been developing over the last 8 years, and are not skills that commonly exist amongst the provider-based GP clinical leadership teams.

The Consultant leadership within an acute trust is primarily deployed in medical and clinical director roles within the hospital.  It is only when these roles are filled that it will start to consider supporting system roles.  General practice is in danger of having this the other way round: making sure the system roles are filled before ensuring it has the internal leadership skills and expertise it needs.

History is, inevitably, getting in the way.  GPs who have undertaken CCG Clinical Director roles are sometimes perceived as being distant from core general practice, particularly when they may have been on the commissioner side of developing services and specifications that practices may not have been happy with.

Equally funding is a barrier.  CCG Clinical Directors were well remunerated for their time, and there is no obvious source of remuneration for GP leaders outside of the PCN Clinical Directors at present.

But general practice in every area needs to think through how it is going to be effective in the new world of ICSs.  CCG CDs are a hugely valuable resource for general practice, and the service as a whole would be well advised to consider how it can ensure that this resource is deployed where general practice needs it, rather than passively allowing the system to decide where it should go.

18
aug
1

How Does the System View General Practice?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

When you are working day in and day out in general practice, it is easy to lose any sense of perspective as to how the profession is viewed by those elsewhere in the system.  What do others think of general practice, and whatever it is, does it matter?

The reality of the purchaser provider split has meant that the views of others has not really been an issue for a long time.  Whether the local hospital or council ‘rate’ general practice has been neither here nor there, as the contract is primarily negotiated nationally, and locally there has always been a strong GP presence within the local commissioners.  This of course was baked into the design of Clinical Commissioning Groups, and was a staple of its predecessors Primary Care Trusts and Primary Care Groups.

Now things are about to be different.  The premise of Integrated Care Systems (ICSs) is that they are a collaboration between providers, who will agree between them how to design services and deploy resources.  The requirement for ICSs as legal entities to have GPs within their design is limited to say the least – one GP on an NHS ICS Board (not as a representative of the profession), and PCN involvement in place based arrangements (more explicitly to represent primary care).

The national GP contract will remain.  However, increasingly we are seeing any additional resources deployed through PCNs rather than direct to practices.  This trend will continue until 2024, and most likely beyond that.   This means (amongst many other things) the deployment of local resources to general practice will be essential, via enhanced services and the like.  The extent to which this happens, however, will be down to the local ICS.

The local ICS will be comprised of the various system partners.  The acute trust, the community trust, the mental health trust and the local council will be extremely powerful voices within the new arrangements.  So it will matter, for the first time in many years, how general practice is viewed by these partners.

How do those across the system view general practice?  Do they view it as a trusted partner, as a service that is worthy of investment, as the front line in the delivery of health and care?  Will the primary motive of each ICS be to invest as much resource as possible into general practice to improve the functioning of the system as a whole?

Of course views will vary across the country, and there will be a range of perspectives that are held.  The views will locally be influenced by personalities and the strength of relationships that exist at senior levels with local systems.  In some places GPs have rubbed local political leaders up the wrong way over a number of years, whereas in others extremely strong relationships have developed.  The credibility of the senior GP leadership inevitably affects the credibility of the service as a whole.

The underlying concerns that system leaders in some areas hold about general practice, whether they are valid or not, is the extent to which investment in general practice leads to any real returns.  There are concerns as to whether general practice is pulling its weight when it comes to the pressures on the urgent care system, with many (particularly in acute trusts) viewing the stories about lack of availability of GP appointments as a direct cause of downstream system pressures.  Council leaders on the other hand often bemoan the lack of impact the recent investment into general practice has had on health inequalities, and can sometimes hold the perception that practices are more motivated by money than by making a difference to the populations that they serve.

All of this can lead to an overriding sense from some system partners that general practice collectively is dysfunctional and fragmented, and that the consequences of this are felt by other parts of the system.

Don’t shoot the messenger!  In your area everyone may hold general practice in particularly high esteem.  There is no question that many have been impressed by the role general practice has played in the roll out of the vaccination programme.  But it may still be worth checking.  How others view general practice is more important now than it has been for at least 20 years, and where there are negative and unfounded perceptions in place it is critical that general practice takes action to start to correct these.  If it does not, life in the new system could start to prove very difficult indeed.

11
aug
0

What is the Role of LMCs in Integrated Care Systems?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

As we move into the new system of Integrated Care a question is emerging around the role of LMCs, and how it will be impacted by the change.

In a traditional purchaser provider model it makes lots of sense to have someone whose job it is to negotiate contracts on behalf of the provider.  Hospital trusts have contracting teams, and general practice has the GPC nationally and LMCs locally.  LMCs have a statutory duty to represent GPs at a local level, and are mandated to represent and negotiate on behalf of their local GP practices.

Whilst recognised by statute and having statutory functions, LMCs are not themselves statutory bodies.  They are independent, and it is this independence that means most GPs and practices trust their LMC to stand up for and support them.  Current legislation includes a requirement for NHS Bodies to consult with the LMC on issues that relate to general practice in their locality.

However, the new guidance on Integrated Care Systems states,

“It should be recognised that there is no single voice for primary care in the health and care system, and so ICSs should explore different and flexible ways for seeking primary care professional involvement in decision-making.” p27

It then goes on to say,

“PCNs in a place will want to consider how they could work together to drive improvement through peer support, lead on one another’s behalf on place-based service transformation programmes and represent primary care in the place-based partnership. This work is in addition to their core function and will need to be resourced by the place-based partnership.” p28

LMCs are not explicitly mentioned in the guidance.  The implication of the paragraphs above is that it will be PCNs representing primary care (i.e. not LMCs), and it will be up to each local area to decide how LMCs should be involved.

The challenge is that fundamental to integrated care is the need for collaboration and joint working between partners.  This requires give and take on all sides, something LMCs will find difficult because their mandate is only for general practice, and it would be hard for them to justify making concessions around the role of general practice for the greater good to their member practices.  The reality is most LMCs would not, and it is for that reason that those establishing place based arrangements in most areas will be reluctant to include LMC representation.

But if the LMC are not included it potentially serves to make life difficult for those who are representing general practice within the integrated care arrangements.  It is going to be hugely undermining if the representative agrees something for general practice, only for it to be rejected by the LMC (and then most likely member practices) at a later stage.  It won’t just be undermining for the individual leader, it will actually serve to undermine the voice and influence of general practice within the system, as it will reinforce the lack of confidence that some parts of integrated care systems have in general practice.

Any system that is formed as a collaboration of different organisations will necessarily be political.  Integrated Care Systems will be no different.  If general practice is going to be effective within the new systems it will need to find ways of bringing LMCs and PCNs (plus federations and any other general practice leaders) together itself, so that it can operate collectively and effectively.  The system is not going to do it for general practice, and unless general practice can create its own internal coherence it is at risk of having little or no influence on the new system as it develops.

4
aug
1

What is the Right Size for a PCN?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

Two years in and we are already starting to see questions emerge as to whether the PCNs that we have are appropriately sized.  But what is the right size for a PCN?

The rapid development of Integrated Care Systems (ICSs) is the main reason for the questioning.  New system leaders understand there is an important role for PCNs, particularly within place-based arrangements, and so inevitably are starting to question whether the arrangement in their particular area is the right one.

The main question these leaders are posing is whether we have too many PCNs.  If the place based population size is around 300,000 and there are (for example) 7 or 8 PCNs, the challenge is whether there are really 7 or 8 Clinical Directors (CDs) ready to be local leaders of the place-based arrangements, and whether the 7 or 8 can really operate effectively together as a unit.  Does it create too many points of contact to make place-based working really effective, due to the number of local relationships it necessitates with the local acute, community, mental health, social care and voluntary sector providers?

The other question it poses is whether the smaller PCNs can create the infrastructure needed to be able to deliver all that is expected of them.  Can they find the HR, payroll, finance, communications, IT, estates, strategy (etc etc) expertise needed to be effective?  And where will PCNs end up – is the expectation really that there will be 7 or 8 limited companies all operating alongside each other?

The questions around PCN size from a practice level are more frequently the other way round.  Practices who are part of larger PCNs are beginning to question whether this is really the right option for them, or whether they should actually be part of a smaller group of practices.

The problem practices experience is that when the population size starts to get up towards 70,000, and the number of practices gets much beyond 3 or 4, then there is always a challenge with engagement at practice level.  There always seem to be one or two “passenger practices” who at best contribute very little, and at worst block and slow down initiatives and any changes the PCN wants to introduce.

What this in turn leads to is the smaller group of more proactive practices starting to question whether they would be better off on their own, particularly as the value of the PCN contract, the value of the Investment and Impact Fund, and the number of staff that can be employed via the Additional Role Reimbursement Scheme is becoming more and more significant each year.

Larger PCNs have also not been helped by the continual “one per PCN” ruling that comes out for any PCN with a population under 100,000, such as mental health practitioners this year, which favours those areas that have opted for a larger number of PCNs with a lower population size.  It is not that surprising, then, that practices looking to maximise the value of the PCN DES are wondering whether what they actually need is a smaller PCN.  I did suggest at the start of the year that this might be the case.

Where does this all leave us?  What is the right size for a PCN?  The important thing to remember is that there will always be a trade-off between engagement and delivery/effectiveness.  Smaller PCNs can build more engagement, larger PCNs can create a better infrastructure to enable delivery.  It is difficult to deliver without engagement, and it is difficult to create the necessary infrastructure without scale.  There is no right answer, no perfect size for a PCN.

What is most important is that practices work in PCNs that work best for them.  If you are small and it is working, don’t bow down to any ICS pressure that comes down the line to get bigger.  If you are large and it is working, keep going as you are.  Changing PCN size and structure is of itself distracting  and challenging, so any planned change would not just have to be sensible, it would have to outweigh all the disbenefits that would come with making such a change.  Most of the time it will be better to understand the weaknesses of your current situation and work to mitigate them, as well to exploit the strengths that you have, rather than change the configuration of the PCN.

28
jul
0

Can General Practice Lead an ICS?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

As the NHS shifts away from the purchaser provider split and into the new world of integrated care, can general practice actively drive the agenda? Or is the ability for general practice to be proactive locally made impossible by the national contract?

At its heart integrated care is built upon the notion of the different providers of health and social care working together to improve outcomes for patients.  Instead of competing with each other, the providers seek to actively collaborate in order to make the best use of the resources available.

If we take even the place-based arrangements, the ones within an ICS where general practice is guaranteed a seat at the table via PCNs, then there will be representatives from acute, community, mental health, social care, the voluntary sector alongside general practice.

The first and most obvious question is whether general practice can provide a unified voice within this arena.  I discussed this in more detail recently, and the need for PCNs to find ways of establishing a single voice.  But this is not the only challenge.

The potentially greater challenge is whether general practice can be proactive in the discussions, or even lead them.  Can general practice come to the ICS table and drive the agenda?  Can the strategic direction be set by general practice, so that meeting the needs of the population that general practice often understands best is prioritised?  Or will the discussions be driven by the large providers such as the acute trusts, demanding to know how primary care is going to support a reduction in attendances at A&E, or help tackle the backlog of outpatient attendances?

The problem is that in recent times general practice has become mostly reactive.  The way that general practice operates is by being offered things e.g. changes to the national contract, national Enhanced Services like the PCN DES, or local enhanced services, and then responding to these offers.  It reacts to the proposals that are put in front of it.

Alongside this reactivity there is very commonly a learned local helplessness.  Most practices feel too small to be listened to, that their voice is not heard, and that no one understands the pressure they are under or what life is really like in general practice.  They do not feel able to influence the system, only able to react to the demands or requests that are made of them.

To some extent this is due to the national GP contract.  Any one of the 7,000+ individual GP practices is too distant from the negotiation of that contract to really feel able to influence it.  As it forms the largest part of general practice income the national contract provides security, but the price of this is a sense of local powerlessness.

None of this helps general practice if it wants to be influential and proactive within local ICSs.  For local general practice to be influential it needs to not only have a collective voice, but be able to proactively flex its offering into the local system.  “Collective voice” has to mean more than an ability to react collectively, it has to mean operate effectively together to come up with and drive changes across itself as well as the rest of the system.

How realistic is this?  There will undoubtedly be those who are at the head of the curve who are proactively thinking this through and working out a way to do it.  But for the majority at present this seems out of reach, and without strong local leadership it seems unlikely general practice will be able to play a role proactively shaping the direction of local ICSs.

21
jul
0

What will happen to Primary Care Commissioning?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

As we move into the new world of Integrated Care Systems (ICSs) and come to the end of the purchaser provider split, what should happen to the primary care teams that currently sit in CCGs?  Will we make the same mistakes as 8 years ago when CCGs were formed, or will a more forward thinking approach be taken?

For those who were not around back in 2013 when CCGs were first formed it was Primary Care Trusts (PCTs) that were being abolished.  The primary care commissioning function sat within PCTs, and was moved to NHS England, because of the dreaded ‘conflict of interest’ concerns that surrounded the idea of GP-run CCGs commissioning from themselves.

What followed was an inability of the regional NHS England teams to meaningfully engage with practices, because the distance was too great alongside a huge loss of skills and expertise.  In the end, it was decided that the conflict of interest wasn’t that great after all and the commissioning of primary care was ‘delegated’ back to CCGs.

What we learnt from that sorry episode was even though general practice is essentially commissioned through a national contract, practices do need local contractual support, local problems need to be discussed and tackled locally (often in partnership with local LMCs), and that a one size fits all contractual management programme does not work.

In recent times the role the CCG primary care teams plays has also been evolving.  In a system redesign programme, e.g. of long term conditions or urgent care, general practice is an essential component.  As such, the role of the primary care commissioning teams has become as much about shaping the input of primary care into these redesigns, through local enhanced services or incentive schemes, as it has around local contract management.

Within an integrated care system there is an essential need for primary care to be a core component of local redesign, particularly in a place-based arrangement.  But how will this work in practice?  Is the expectation that PCN Clinical Directors will agree changes and then ensure implementation across their practices?  Will the PCN Clinical Directors write the terms of any new local contract, agree it with the LMC, and manage its implementation with their practices?

This does not sound very realistic.  Aside from the issue of GPs writing their own contract, and the huge unwillingness there will be by PCN CDs to take on the role of contract enforcers, the continued lack of support for investment in any form of PCN management means there is simply not the capacity to do this.

Should CCG primary care commissioning teams, then, become part of local place-based arrangements?  Could they play a role there as enablers of change?

This does seem logical.  At its heart, integrated care is about providers working together to agree changes to improve outcomes, experience and value for money.  Within this model general practice needs to be suggesting and driving its own changes, not primary care commissioners.  But there is potentially an important role for the existing CCG primary care teams to work in partnership with general practice as an agent and enabler of change.  Because without this in place, how will it work?

The problem with this is one of accountability.  Who would the primary care commissioning team be accountable to?  The PCNs? The local place-based ICS Board?  The local federation?  There is no right answer, and this clearly needs some working through, but it doesn’t feel insurmountable.

The move to integrated care systems is happening quickly.  Let’s hope the same mistakes of 8 years ago are not repeated, that we don’t waste the skills and expertise we have in local primary care commissioning teams, and that primary care is supported to lead local change not be passive recipients of it.

14
jul
0

How Will PCNs Work Together?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

A new challenge has emerged for PCNs with the advent of Integrated Care Systems – that of working effectively with each other.  To date joint working between PCNs has been something of an optional extra, but the transition to the new arrangements mean firm plans need to be put in place.  How are PCNs going to make this work?

The new guidance on Integrated Care Systems states,

“PCNs in a place will want to consider how they could work together to drive improvement through peer support, lead on one another’s behalf on place-based service transformation programmes and represent primary care in the place-based partnership. This work is in addition to their core function and will need to be resourced by the place-based partnership.” p28

This seems to be a gentle way of saying that not every PCN can be individually represented in the place-based partnership (the local arm of the Integrated Care System).  Instead PCNs need to find a way of being able to work together and represent each other.  Bear in mind that place based partnerships could potentially be making funding allocation decisions that will impact on the whole of primary care, so getting this right feels very important.

In some places this is not going to be a problem.  Effective joint working arrangements between PCNs are in place, often via a federation or shared umbrella organisation, and those PCNs will be able to use that system within the new arrangements.  However, in other areas no formal joint working mechanism exists, and for these the challenge could be much greater.

There is an underlying issue when it comes to representation, and making it work in practice.  It relies heavily on trust.  When an individual is at a meeting, do those he or she is representing trust that individual to work in the best interest of all, or are there concerns that he or she will make decisions on what is best for their practice or their PCN? If an opportunity arises, e.g. to pilot a new way of working, will everyone receive a fair opportunity to take it, or will the representative have first choice?

Even where motives are good, how strong and effective are the communication feedback loops?  Is each PCN canvassed for their views ahead of important items being discussed and a consensus reached ahead of time, and is timely feedback on decisions made provided to all?  Or do those that are being represented feel left in the dark, without any real idea of what is being discussed let alone decided?

It is concerns such as these that lead individual PCNs to wanting their own individual representative at system discussions.

Even for those who do attend the meetings, life is not much easier.  It is hard to comprehend everything that is being discussed, given the complexity around Integrated Care Systems (which even seems to have its own language!).  Worse, many are left with the nagging sense that the decisions seem to be made outside of the formal meetings, with the meetings themselves just a rubberstamping of conversations that have already taken place.

Of course that is to some extent true.  Integrated care is about relationships between organisations, which means relationships between individuals within those organisations.  It is not as straightforward as objective discussions within a meeting environment.  This begs the question as to whether what PCNs need is not one of the PCN CDs to ‘represent’ the others, but a senior manager who can operate at the same level of as the senior leaders of the other organisations, and who can be part of the decision making both inside and outside of the meetings.

Appointing such an individual would have the added benefit of being effectively neutral across all the PCNs, as well as potentially being skilled at pre and post meeting communication.

The problem for those wanting to go down this route is inevitably one of funding.  The guidance says that this work “will need to be funded by the place based partnership” so if a case can be made there is mileage in exploring receiving funding for such an individual directly from the ICS.  While for the role to be effective a senior and experienced individual capable of operating at director level is required, it probably does not have to be full time which would bring the cost down.  And with an imminent turnover of CCG Directors as CCGs are abolished at the end of March there may be secondment opportunities worth exploring.

This is not an issue that can be ignored any longer.  Whatever the local difficulties, it is important for general practice as a whole (the guidance says the PCN representative will “represent primary care in the place-based partnership”), and so it is important PCNs are working now to establish how they will make this work.

I take a more detailed look at how to create a strong voice for general practice in my free guide, “10 Steps to a Powerful voice for General Practice”, which you can access by simply signing up to our weekly newsletter here.

7
jul
0

The Importance of Training for New GP Partners

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

There is a big difference between being a GP and being a GP partner.  All of the training to become a GP is designed to ensure you have the clinical skills needed to deliver great patient care.  The training is not designed, however, to provide you with the skills you need to be an effective GP partner.

A partner in a GP practice has overall responsibility for the running of the business of the practice.  The staff who work in the practice rely on the partners to run the business effectively.  If things go wrong, the buck stops with the partners.  It is a big responsibility.

At the same time, it is a huge opportunity.  Uniquely within NHS, GPs as clinicians have the opportunity as partners to run their own businesses in the way they choose to.  They can employ the staff they want, design their own way of doing things, and have their own rules about how things should work.  This freedom is highly unusual (ask any hospital consultant!), and means that GP partners are independent.  They have no line manager, and no one telling them what they have to do and how they have to do it.

Of course, life is never that simple!  Practices have contracts, and partners are responsible for ensuring the practice fulfils the contract it undertakes.  There may not be any line manager, but there are contract managers, CQC inspectors and others who will step in if the practice is not fulfilling its duties.

But the opportunity to choose how things are done, and to shape the culture of the GP practice, are what have drawn many to GP partnership.  I spoke to Dr Liz Phillips about why, after many years as a salaried GP, she chose to become a partner.  You can hear her story here, but for her it was all about the ability to make a difference.  She is loving her new life as a GP partner!

I have worked with a number of colleagues to provide training sessions on partnership for GPs.  It is interesting to me that the reflections are often not that the model of GP partnership needs changing, but as one salaried GP put it, “I left (the session we ran) feeling GPs need to be conversant with politics, finance, and management, so that we make informed decisions about our roles and the services we run for patients.” (you can read her full reflection here).

She is right.  Practices won’t run themselves, and responsibility cannot simply be delegated to a practice manager.  Partners need to be actively engaged in the business of the practice.  And for this GPs need specific tools and skills.

I wrote recently on the content of a training programme for new or potential GP partners that myself and some colleagues are putting together.  I am delighted to say that this week we are formally launching that programme.  For more information about the programme and how to secure your place, simply click here.

There is no doubt that the role of a GP partner is challenging, but it also presents a huge opportunity to make a real difference to people’s lives (both patients and staff).  As with any role, it requires specific skills and understanding, and our aim in this programme is to give new GP partners the tools they need to be successful in the role.

30
jun
0

All Your PCN CD Mastermind Programme Questions Answered!

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Dr Rachel Morris and myself are setting up a new “Mastermind” programme exclusively for PCN Clinical Directors.  Here is everything you need to know about the programme (and more!).

What is a Mastermind Group?

A Mastermind group is a group of peers that meet to give each other support and advice.  The beauty of a Mastermind group is that it combines brainstorming, education, peer accountability and support in a group setting to sharpen your leadership and personal skills. A Mastermind group helps you and the other Mastermind group members achieve success. Members challenge each other to set strong goals, and more importantly, to accomplish them.

Mastermind group facilitators start and run groups. They help the group to dive deeply into discussions, and work with members to create success — as each member defines it. Facilitators are the secret to thriving mastermind groups, and I am really excited to be working alongside Dr Rachel Morris to facilitate our new Mastermind Group for PCN CDs.

Through a Mastermind group process, first you create a goal, then design a plan to achieve it. The group helps you with creative ideas and wise decisions-making. Then, as you begin to implement your plan, you bring both success stories and problems to the group. Success stories are applauded, and problems are solved through peer brainstorming and collective, creative thinking.

The group requires commitment, confidentiality, willingness to both give and receive advice and ideas, and support each other with total honesty, respect and compassion. Mastermind group members act as catalysts for growth, devil’s advocates and supportive colleagues. This is the essence and value of mastermind groups.

Why is it only for PCN Clinical Directors?

Being a PCN Clinical Director is one of the most challenging roles there is in general practice right now.  And there is precious little support available.  Those most able to provide support to PCN Clinical Directors are other PCN Clinical Directors, because they are the only ones experiencing the same challenges.  By providing a safe space for a small number of PCN Clinical Directors to come together and support each other we are creating a unique opportunity for those who participate to support each other and thrive in their roles as PCN CDs.

Who are the Facilitators?

The group will be facilitated by Dr Rachel Morris and myself.  We will support the group by facilitating the meetings, providing input, expertise and challenge tailored to the individual needs of each of the participant, and making sure everyone gets what they need out of the group.

Why is it called a Mastermind Programme?

The reason it is a Mastermind Programme is because as well as the mastermind group meetings, those on the programme will be part of an exclusive WhatsApp group for participants (for ongoing support and challenge between meetings!), and will have access to Dr Rachel Morris’s fantastic Resilient Team Academy – with all the resources that includes!  You can find more details about the Resilient Team Academy by clicking here.

When does it start and how often will it meet?

The group will meet every 6 weeks on a Thursday lunchtime from 1pm to 3pm.  All the dates are on the website and can be found here.

How much does it cost and how do I join?

The cost is £1995 plus VAT for a year’s membership of the Mastermind Group.  Applications are via a short application form, which you can find here.  There are a maximum of 12 places available for the group so get your form in quickly, and no later than 31st July 2021.

More Questions?

If you have any further questions, please do not hesitate to contact me.  Email me at ben@ockham.healthcare

23
jun
0

What do Integrated Care Systems Mean for General Practice?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Following the publication of the White Paper in February, new guidance has just been published by NHS England outlining the “Design Framework” for the new integrated care systems that are to replace CCGs and bring providers and commissioners together.  What can we learn from the new guidance about what the new integrated care systems will look like, and what does it all mean for general practice?

At the top of an integrated care system(ICS) there will be two bodies: an ICS Partnership and an ICS NHS Body.  The ICS Partnership is essentially the body to bring health and social care (under the remit of the local authorities) together, and has responsibility to develop an “integrated care strategy”.  There is no explicit mention of the need for GPs or PCNs on these bodies.

The second body is the ICS NHS Body.  This will be a statutory NHS organisation which will receive and distribute NHS funding, and will take on all CCG functions and duties, including the commissioning of primary care.  It is explicitly required to “support the expansion of primary care and integrated teams in the community” (p16).

Because the changes are intended to end the commissioner/provider split in the NHS, the ICS NHS Board is described as being a “unitary” Board: it will have a Chair and at leas two other non-executive directors; an executive team of at least a CEO, Finance Director, Medical director and Nurse Director; and will also have at least 3 “partner members” – one from the NHS Trusts/Foundation Trusts, one from the local authorities, and one from general practice.  The partner members, “will be full members of the unitary board, bringing knowledge and a perspective from these sectors, but not acting as delegates of these sectors”(p20).

What does that mean?  Well, it means there will be a GP on the NHS ICS Board, but it is up to the NHS ICS Board to appoint them, and they don’t have to represent the profession.  This in turn means it is highly unlikely there will be any form of election process.  It is up the NHS ICS Board to come up with and agree how it wants to appoint the partner members.

Beyond the ICS NHS Body, there are two other important pieces of the new system architecture.  One is called “place-based partnerships”, and the other “provider collaboratives”.

In my view place-based partnerships are the most important part of the new integrated care systems for general practice.  Each local system has been asked to define its place based partnership arrangements.  A place should have “configuration and catchment areas reflecting meaningful communities and geographies that local people recognise” (p24), but it is up to local areas to define exactly what that means.

Not only that, but it is also up to local systems to agree the membership and form of governance that place-based partnerships should adopt.  “As a minimum these partnerships should involve primary care leadership, local authorities, including Directors of Public health, providers of acute, community and mental health services, and representatives of people who access care and support” (p24).

Here is where it gets interesting.  The NHS ICS Body remains accountable for any resource deployed at place level, but there are different options outlined as to how this accountability could be discharged through place based arrangements.  These range from it being a consultative forum, that informs decisions made by the ICS NHS Body (ie has no power), to it being a committee of the NHS ICS Body with delegated authority to take decisions about the use of ICS NHS Body Resources.  It can even be delegated authority by both the local authority and the ICS NHS Body as a joint committee to make local decisions and allocate resources.

This is key.  Primary care’s influence and ability to shape the delivery and provision of services is realistically going to happen at a place level not at the wider ICS level, and that ability will be determined by how the ICS designs these place based partnerships in the next few months.

There is an interesting note in the guidance on the role of Primary Care Networks (PCNs) in the place based partnerships, “PCNs in a place will want to consider how they could work together to drive improvement through peer support, lead on one another’s behalf on place based service transformation programmes and represent primary care in the place based partnership.” (p27).  Regular readers of this blog will be no stranger to my view that primary care and PCN influence in the new system is predicated on their ability to work effectively together and present a unified voice.  The good news is that the guidance explicitly states, “This work is in addition to their core functions and will need to be resourced by the place-based partnerships”(p27).

The second important new piece of the architecture is provider collaboratives.  From April 2022 NHS trusts are expected to be part of one or more provider collaboratives.  There is a strong expectation in the new system that providers will work together (as opposed to in competition with each other).  They could be paid (by the NHS ICS Body) separately, or via a lead provider arrangement.  There will be far less competition and tendering in future, as it is to be a “tool to use where appropriate, rather than the default expectation” (p30).

The transition to the new system will happen quickly.  The NHS ICS Body Chair and CEO are expected to be in place by the end of September, along with the draft ICS operating model for 22/23.  NHS staff below board level (ie CCG staff) have been given an employment commitment to continuity of terms and conditions, but this does not apply to those in senior/board level roles.

The most important part of all of this for general practice is how the place-based arrangements will work locally.  It is vital that GPs and PCN CDs get involved in these discussions, and do not leave it just to those who are currently involved in the CCG, as they are the ones who will have to make the new system work.  At this stage there is a lot of local flexibility, and there is an opportunity to ensure systems are put in place that support locally-led bottom-up change, but it is an opportunity that won’t last long.

16
jun
0

Do the Additional Roles Belong to the Practices or the PCN?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

One of my favourite questions for guests in the current series we are running in the General Practice podcast on the additional roles in general practice is where do they belong?  Do those in the roles feel like they belong to a specific practice, or to the PCN as a whole?

Many PCNs have already experienced turnover in the additional roles, despite the scheme only having just completed two years (and for the first year only pharmacists and social prescribing link workers could be recruited).  One of the most common reasons cited by those leaving is that they did not feel like they belonged anywhere.

It is a difficult conundrum.  The PCN is a collection of practices, and is not really an entity of itself.  It does not exist in a specific place, and is defined as much by a series of meetings and actions as by any physical reality.  So when an individual is appointed to work for the PCN it is not surprising that they can lack this sense of belonging to something.

This issue is then exacerbated because these roles in many places are very new.  Most practices are not used to working directly with social prescribing link workers or health and wellbeing coaches or physician associates (etc).  Making something new work involves change, and change inevitably leads to resistance.  So those taking up post in one of these new roles is working for the less-than-tangible PCN, and at the same time encountering push back from the individual practices within the PCN.

Those taking on these roles need somewhere safe they can retreat to, somewhere they can feel supported, somewhere they can regroup and work out a plan to win over those who have not yet understood the value they can add.  They need to feel like they belong somewhere.

What is really interesting about the responses that I have had to the question from those in roles that are clearly working extremely well is that they are not consistent about where they feel they belong.  Some respond quite emphatically that they feel like they belong to their host practice.  They feel part of the practice team, welcome in the practice, supported by the practice, but at the same time enjoy working with patients from across all the practices in the PCN.

Conversely others feel part of a PCN team.  This is particularly true where there are a number of roles working together, for example social prescribing link workers, care coordinators and health and wellbeing coaches.  They feel like they belong to the PCN team, and that this is where they get the support they need.  The team often has a number of key individuals (clinical supervisors, line managers etc) from across the practices, who enable this team to feel an integral and valued part of the PCN.

Where it doesn’t work, and where more commonly we see turnover in the additional roles, is when those in the role does not feel like they belong to either a practice or a PCN team.  Problems occur when roles are isolated, and left to try and work with each PCN practice without really being a part of any of those practices and without any peer support to speak of.

As long as the new roles feel like they belong to either one of the practices or the PCN then which is not really important.  What is important is they feel like they belong somewhere.

9
jun
0

How to Make the Additional Roles a Success

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

We have a strange irony in general practice right now whereby the biggest investment into the service, the Additional Role Reimbursement Scheme (ARRS), is in many places adding to the challenges practices are facing rather than helping.

What is happening is that the burden of recruitment, line management, and clinical supervision, along with the time needed in each practice to make these roles effective, is outweighing the value the new roles are bringing.  This is then exacerbated by rapid turnover in these roles, and the need to constantly start over and over again.

I have written previously on the need for PCNs to plan for the new roles, and also on the challenges associated with introducing them.  But how can PCNs and practices turn this huge investment (£746M this year) to their advantage?

In recent weeks I have been talking to areas that have found ways of making the new roles a success.  What is becoming abundantly clear is these areas have understood that the introduction of the new roles is a change process and have treated it as such, rather than simply recruiting to the roles and expecting the benefits to automatically follow.

What does this mean in practice?

The leading thinker on change at present is Professor John Kotter.  In this Harvard Business Review Article, in addition to outlining the 8 steps of a robust change process, he states 8 reasons why change processes fail.

Read the article for yourself, but my take on the first three of these reasons, as applied to the introduction of the new roles, is as follows:

Error 1: Not Linking the Roles to the Need for Change

Practices are at breaking point right now.  The workload pressures on top of trying to operate in the environment of the ongoing pandemic are making life extremely challenging for many.  What many PCNs are doing is introducing the new roles without being explicit as to how they directly link to this challenge.  Without this link in place practices feel they are making the situation worse not better.

Error 2: Not Creating a Cross-Practice Team to Lead the Changes

The way many PCNs work is that the leadership of the introduction of the new roles is left to the PCN Clinical Director (CD).  They have a PCN meeting to gain sign up as to which roles from the list to recruit, but overseeing the recruitment process and introduction of the roles is left to the CD, who then in turn has to assign line management and clinical supervision roles out across the network.

The problem is that it is simply not possible for someone to successfully introduce a new role into a practice if they are not part of that practice.  A team is needed with a range of individuals, taken from across each of the practices, that is multi-professional (including practice managers, reception managers, nurses etc as well as GPs), to work together to lead the changes to make the new roles a success.

Error 3: Not being Clear what Difference the New Roles will Make

Kotter calls this lacking a vision.  The places where the new roles are working well have a plan in place as to how the new roles are going to make a difference.  They have created multi-professional visit teams to take the burden of visits off practices, or created multi-professional non-clinical teams that can manage the social and non-clinical work that comes into practices, or built prevention teams with a clear plan to tackle pre-diabetes (etc etc).  This is in stark contrast to PCNs who have simply identified the roles they most like the sound of and recruited to them because the money is available, but have not taken the time to create a clear plan as to how these new roles will make a difference.

These are not the only mistakes being made.  All of the errors Kotter outlines can easily be applied to the introduction of the new roles.  The key message, however, is to think of the introduction of the new roles not as a task to be completed, but as a change process that if done well can add huge value, but if done badly will probably make things worse.

2
jun
0

The Investment and Impact Fund Year 2

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Whilst we are already a couple of months into the new financial year, with so much going on it has been hard for everyone to fully get their heads round the changes to the Impact and Investment Fund (IIF) for 2021/22.  This week I summarise those changes and what it means for PCNs and practices.

I wrote last year about the Impact and Investment Fund when it was first introduced.  You will recall for the first six months of last year the funding was protected as a covid fund for PCNs.  The IIF was then launched in October, in the format of a ‘QOF for PCNs’.

PCNs are yet to receive money earned from the IIF for the last six months of 2020/21.  As I understand it once the figures have been collated nationally, and they have established exactly what an “average” PCN comprises of, PCNs will be sent a draft declaration which they will need to confirm as accurate, or appeal to their commissioner if the figures are wrong.  The amount of time it is taking to pull these figures together suggests there may be trouble ahead in getting final agreement on these figures!

Year 2 of the IIF is nonetheless underway.  The scheme works the same way as last year, with minimal changes.  The prescribing indicators have been dropped (I suspect at least in part to do with the challenges of integrating the prescribing database with the information from GP systems).  This year there are three flu vaccination indicators, the social prescribing and annual LD health check indicators remain (with adjusted thresholds), and there is a new one off indicator of “mapping appointment categories to new national categories” which needs to be completed by the 30th June.

There is £200 available per point (adjusted for list size and prevalence), with 225 points available in total.  The indicators and amounts available for an “average” PCN are below (also see the PCN DES specification Annex D, p103):

 

Indicator No. of points Upper Limit Lower Limit £ available
% patients aged 65+ who received a seasonal influenza vaccination 01/09-31/03 40 86% 80% £8,000
% patients aged 18-64 and in a clinical at-risk group who received a seasonal influenza vaccination 01/09-31/03 88 90% 57% £17,600
% children aged 2 – 3 who received a seasonal influenza vaccination 01/09-31/03 14 82% 45% £2,800
Percentage of patients on the Learning Disability register aged 14+, who received an annual Learning Disability Health Check and have a completed Health Action Plan 36 80% 49% £7,200
% patients referred to social prescribing 20 1.2% 0.8% £4,000
Confirmation that, by 30 June 2021, all practices in the PCN have mapped all active appointment slot types to the new set of national appointment categories, and are complying with the August 2020 guidance on recording of appointments 27 Binary target – all practices to achieve for PCN to receive in year payment £5,400

 

The amount available is roughly double what was available for the last six months of last year (£40,500, compared to £21,500 for an average PCN last year).  A key point to note here is that only one third of the £150M set aside for the IIF in the contract for this year has currently been allocated. The plan is to allocate the rest of it to new indicators to be introduced from 1st October (Covid permitting) with double the value of the existing indicators.  My understanding is these indicators are most likely to be linked to delivery of the new PCN specifications also due to be introduced at that time.

So by the end of the year the IIF is likely to be worth over £120k to the average PCN.  This is due to increase further to £250k by 2023/24.  During this year the IIF will overtake the core funding of £1.50 per head in terms of value to the PCN, and will continue to grow thereafter.

The flu indicators, representing 142 of the 225 points on offer, do not start until September, so at present there is relatively little for PCNs to do, other than to ensure they have effective monitoring and reporting systems in place, to try and get ahead of the social prescribing referral target, and to ensure all practices carry out the appointment mapping exercise.

But this will most likely be the calm before the storm.  The importance of the IIF may be minimal at present, but the values attached to it mean this is likely to change significantly in the second half of the year.  At that point the new indicators alongside the existing flu ones will mean the work really begins.

25
may
0

Training and Development Support for New GP Partners

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

A few years ago I wrote an outline of a training programme for new GP Partners.  In recent months I have received regular requests from GPs interested in accessing the programme.  Whilst we never set it up at the time, I am working with some great partners to now make this happen.

Below is an updated and adapted version of the original blog:

“Taking on responsibility for a business, for its staff, for its performance, and for its liabilities, is a big commitment. While in the past GPs took it on because that was the established career route for them, that no longer appears to be the case. Increasingly GPs are opting out of being a partner, and taking on salaried, locum or portfolio careers. Even GPs who had previously become partners are now choosing these alternatives.

It is into this environment that we are developing a training programme for GP partners. It is for those GPs who are considering becoming a partner, want to understand better what is involved, and want to develop the skills to be a good partner should they choose to make that step. It is also for those GPs who have already made the decision to become a partner, and want training and development to ensure they can be successful in the role.

The programme will comprise of the following areas.  We will work with participants to tailor it to their individual needs through the course of the programme

Section 1: Internal – understanding the business

Success Measures: What constitutes success for the practice? Is the practice there to serve patients or to make money? What does independent contractor status really mean?

Partnership: What is a partnership; why partnership agreements are important; what makes a good partnership agreement; building a strong partnership team; “last man standing” and strategies for dealing with it.

People: How to lead people, how to manage people (and understanding the difference!); dealing with difficult people (including other partners!); staff appraisals; staff surveys; team meetings; the importance of coffee.

Finances: Partner financial responsibilities; dealing with accountants; understanding cash flow; how to manage the finances.

Processes: Appointment systems: the good, the bad and the ugly; DNAs; workflow redirection; active signposting. How to implement change within the practice.

Property: Understanding premises; types of ownership of property; leases and rent reimbursement; working with NHS Property Services.

Practice Manager: What to expect from your practice manager; how to get the best out of them; understanding the difference between the role of the practice manager and the role of a GP partner; how to know if you need to change your practice manager and how to do it.

 

Section 2: External – understanding the environment

NHS: Understanding where GP practices fit within the NHS; the different structures and types of organisation within the NHS and how they impact on GP practices.

Commissioners: Friend or foe? Understanding the GP contract and how it works; understanding the different commissioners; how to build effective relationships with commissioners.

Regulators: The role of the CQC; surviving inspections

Primary Care Networks: What is a Primary Care Network (PCN); how to build relationships with other GP practices in the PCN; overcoming history and other barriers to joint working.

Integrated Care: What is integrated care?  What is an Integrated Care System?  What does it mean for my practice?  Is building relationships with other organisations, such as community pharmacy, community trust, local voluntary organisations, local council, local hospital important? Who to prioritise; how to do it.

 

Section 3: Future – understanding the risks

Changing NHS: The changing NHS, including the new (2019) GP contract; integrated care systems; and the role of PCNs moving forward.

Strategic Change: Understanding strategic options for your practice for the future; how to develop them; how to implement them.

Practice mergers: When to consider it, when not to, and how to do it successfully.”

 

If you are interested in being part of our pilot cohort which has a maximum of 15 place available, please get in touch (ben@ockham.healthcare). The course will start in September, and will be delivered online.  We will work with this cohort to tailor the programme to the specific needs of those on the programme.  I am hugely excited about taking this forward, and I will share more details as we finalise the programme over the coming weeks.

19
may
0

How Should Your Practice Respond?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

It has been a difficult week for general practice.  The main source of the problem has been a letter from NHS England that panders to press criticism by mandating practices to “offer face to face appointments” (implying they have not), and to allow patients to choose whether they need to be seen face to face or not (“practices should respect preferences for face to face care unless there are good clinical reasons to the contrary”).

The widespread anger this letter has caused is not difficult to understand.  Many practices have been uncomfortable with virtual appointments for a long time, but the ‘total triage’ model was mandated by NHS England in the first place as a response to the pandemic.  To then be criticised on the front page of the Telegraph for using it is galling.

The workload itself in general practice has risen to unsustainable levels over the last few months, in part fuelled by the additional demand from the new routes of access.  Practices are already offering face to face appointments (the implication they are not is of itself insulting), but what this does is raise patient expectations to expect an appointment with their GP whenever they want one.  It is GP receptionists who often bear the brunt where these expectations meet reality, and in extreme circumstances can result in vandalism of practices.

This government’s biggest success has been the vaccination programme, the delivery of which has largely been down to general practice.  There is no mention of this in the letter, of the amount of additional work this has put upon practices, or even any acknowledgement of the contribution made.  Any lingering hopes that the role of general practice in the vaccination programme would change the public perception of GP practices have been sadly extinguished by this letter.

So where does this leave general practice?  What is the right way to respond?

The first thing to note is that the letter is overtly political.  The government is obsessed with access to GP practices (and has been for the last 10 years) because it understands the link between access to a GP practice (where so many of the NHS consultations take place) and the overall public perception of the NHS.

Equally the media understand this.  So a story that demonstrates there are problems with access to your GP is a story that demonstrates a government is failing in its handling of the NHS.  The Telegraph in particular has been trying to make a story about access to GP practices throughout the pandemic. Like it or not, GP practices are political footballs.

The temptation is of course to get drawn into working out how to influence the national debate.  Should there be a collective work to rule, a refusal to participate in any work beyond the core contract, or some other form of collective action?  The unfortunate reality is that for most of us engaging in the national politics around this is futile.  Clearly there is a role for the BMA and GPC in fighting the corner of general practice, but this needs to be done at a national level.  The worst outcome is to penalise your own patients and population because of national politicking.

For individual practices it is better to focus on those things you can influence, such as supporting staff, promoting thank you letters and the positive comments received, building positive local communications about the work of the practice as well as its role in the vaccination programme, and the impact you are making on local lives.  General practice remains one of the most trusted professions in the land, and local people will listen to you.

The bigger question is to work out how you will tackle the next 5 years.  The workload will continue to grow, patient expectations will continue to accelerate, and the number of GPs remains static.  Practices need a plan, because carrying on doing the same things will simply mean the pressure will get worse.  This will not be the last letter, or the last insult, or the last criticism of general practice.

Of course there is the temptation to simply walk away, and say enough is enough.  But not everyone has that option, and all that will do is make it even harder and more challenging for those left behind.  Even if that is what you want, it is better to leave with a clear plan in place so that those who remain have some hope and confidence in the future.

While the independent contractor model means there is limited protection from national and press assaults such as this one, it also means GP practices are businesses that can choose how they operate and organise themselves.  It is better to focus on what you can control and spend time working out what you can do to meet the challenges ahead.

There will always be national politics, and general practice will be part of this.  At times like this it is frustrating, disappointing and enraging.  However, channelling your energy into those things you can control, strengthening your own local communications, and planning for the future is the best way to respond.

12
may
0

5 Top Tips for Success as a PCN Manager

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Despite no funding for a manager being included within the PCN DES, the PCN manager has quickly established itself as a crucial role.  As PCNs continue to grow in terms of staff and responsibilities, so has the importance of the PCN manager.  But the role does not come without its challenges, and many who have taken it on are finding the going tough.  How, then, can PCN managers make their role a success?

I recently spoke to PCN management expert Tara Humphrey, and out of that conversation distilled 5 important actions PCN managers should take to be successful in the role:

  1. Be Clear What Success Look Like

The challenge facing many new PCN managers is the PCN into which they are arriving has often not made explicit what actually constitutes success for the PCN.  Indeed, in many PCNs, success can mean different things to different people within it.  If the PCN is not clear what success looks like, it will be impossible for the incoming PCN manager to achieve it!

The trick for the PCN manager is not to assume that simply delivering the PCN DES requirements constitutes success.  If it is not explicit, ask those in PCN what success looks like for them.  Listen carefully to the answers.  Play back what you have heard and get sign up from the PCN as a whole.

When you are clear what success looks like, use it as your guiding principle.  When faced with competing priorities or pressures on your time, use how it will impact on the success of the PCN as your way of making decisions.  This will also help you not to feel like a CCG manager or someone adding workload to the practices, but rather someone supporting them to achieve what they want with the PCN.

  1. Form a Strong Partnership with the PCN Clinical Director

The really successful PCN managers are those who have formed a strong partnership with their PCN CD, and are clear on what each of their roles are.  The two need to work as a team, playing to each other’s strengths, and compensating for each other’s weaknesses.  For example, one might be great at building relationships and communicating with the practices, while the other might be better at understanding and distilling the guidance as it comes in from NHS England and the CCG.

The PCN Clinical Director will always retain overall accountability for the PCN’s success, but what actions the PCN CD and PCN manager respectively take to ensure this success is up to them.  Key is that the two of them create a strong partnership and work together, and the better they do this the more likely success will follow.

  1. Build Strong Relationships with the PCN Practice Managers

The practice managers can make or break a PCN manager.  If a PCN manager can build strong relationships with and earn the trust of the practice managers in the PCN, and have open channels of communication through them into each of the practices, their chances of success are really high.  But if they fail to get the practice managers on side they will really struggle to be successful in the role.

I have already seen a number of instances where PCN managers have had to leave their roles because they lost the confidence of the practice managers.  If the practice managers are regularly complaining about the PCN manager to their GPs, who in turn pass on these concerns to the PCN CD, the position is more or less unsustainable.

  1. Decide Whether to Work With or Round the Difficult Practice or GP

There is always one!  I am yet to meet a PCN where there was not at least one GP (or more often than not a whole practice) who is at best disinterested in the PCN and at worst obstructive to whatever the PCN is trying to achieve.  For the PCN manager there are two choices.  Do they invest significant time and effort into getting this GP/practice on side, so that the work of the PCN can progress?  Or do they focus their attention on the other, more willing GPs and practices to ensure that any attempts to derail progress are not successful?

Each situation is different, and the right approach to take in any individual PCN will depend on the local circumstances, but what the PCN manager has to do is work out which tactic is best and then make that approach work.

  1. Communicate More Than You Think You Need To

For a PCN to be successful, it needs to do two things.  First, take actions and make progress towards its goals, and second communicate these actions and successes to its members.  Most PCN managers understand and do the former, but then completely underestimate the importance of the second.  The result is those in the PCN are generally not aware of just how much the PCN has achieved.

As a PCN manager your days are spent on PCN business.  It is easy to think everyone else has the same level of knowledge of what is going on as you do.  But others in the PCN have busy other jobs and are not as immersed in it as you are, and they quickly forget what the PCN is up to.

Communicating via a once a month PCN meeting is not enough.  There needs to be WhatsApp groups (or equivalent) and a regular email update/newsletter (probably weekly) as a minimum.  Some PCNs have gone as far as setting up their own podcast simply to communicate internally where they are up to.

Success breeds success, and using communication to ensure that not only is the PCN successful but that it is perceived as being successful is vital for future and ongoing success.

 

5
may
0

Does Your PCN have a Financial Plan?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

As PCNs enter year 3 of their existence, they are growing in complexity.  Not only is the number of staff employed by the PCN continuing to increase, the expectations and requirements on PCNs is also going up.  The more the PCN becomes like a business in its own right (as opposed to a shared enhanced service across practices), so the importance of the PCN having a financial plan grows.

To date it has been easy enough to monitor the finances based on the individual funding streams associated with the PCN: the ARRS funding (which has pretty tight rules about how it can be claimed); the PCN CD funding (which generally goes to the PCN CD); the extended hours access payment (which generally goes to the practices who have provided it); and the £120 per bed care home premium (which is generally paid according to the beds managed by each practice).  I have not included the network participation payment as it is paid directly to the practices and by and large stays there.  That only really leaves the core £1.50 per head funding, and the PCN development monies (which are handled differently in different parts of the country) that have required any debate as to their allocation.

It won’t be so simple going forward.  This is for a number of reasons.  The first is that many PCNs have been managing the vaccination service which is highly unlikely to have exactly broken even, and so have to decide how any surplus is to be used.

The second is that the PCN CD money has once again been increased to 1 wte for the April to June period.  This creates a significant sum: a 50,000 population PCN will receive just over £26,700 extra for these three months.  Most PCN CDs do not have the capacity to work full time in the role (because of their clinical and practice commitments) so PCNs have to decide how they will make best use of this funding.

The third is the Investment and Impact Fund (IIF).  Not only will PCNs (eventually) receive payment for achievement against last year’s IIF (up to £21,534 for the average PCN), there is a small in year payment available for this year (£5,400 for mapping appointment slot types to national categories by the end of June), as well as the opportunity to earn £40.5k in total by the year end from the indicators announced.  The total IIF earning opportunity is due to rise to over £120k with the addition of the indicators not yet announced but set to commence in October.

The IIF funding has caveats not contained within the core funding and any funding earned from the vaccination service – “a PCN must commit in writing to the commissioner to reinvest any IIF Achievement Payment into additional workforce, additional primary medical services, and/or other areas of investment in a Core Network Practice” PCN DES 10.6.16.  It is the arrival of the IIF funding that means it suddenly becomes more sensible for PCNs to think about the finances in the round, as opposed to in terms of each individual funding stream.

If a PCN combines its core funding, any surplus generated from the vaccination work, the IIF funding, any unallocated PCN CD funding, plus any development monies it has been able to secure, then it can create a funding pot that it has relatively flexible use over.  There are some requirements governing some of these funding sources, but if a PCN can create an overall expenditure plan (i.e. how it wants to use the money it has), it can generally allocate the expenditure items against the different funding sources to ensure it complies with the rules.

So for example if a PCN is looking to reimburse GP time for clinical supervision of ARRS roles, or employ a PCN project manager, it may be better to allocate at least some of this out of the IIF monies rather than the core funding as it meets the IIF requirements and means the PCN then has total freedom for how it uses the remaining funding.

This financial complexity will continue to increase for PCNs moving forward.  The new PCN specifications likely to be introduced in October will have demands that require some sort of funding.  The IIF is due to be worth nearly a quarter of a million pounds to the average PCN by 23/24.  The commissioning of extended access via PCNs from next year will have its own financial (as well as operational!) challenges.

Now is the time for any PCN that has not created a comprehensive financial plan (as opposed to managing each of the PCN finance streams in isolation) to do so.  It is a good habit to create, and one that will reap significant dividends down the line.

28
apr
0

How to be an effective PCN Clinical Director

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Many PCN CDs describe a sense of uncertainty as to what exactly it is they are supposed to be doing in the role, and are concerned as to whether they are meeting expectations.  Often they are plagued by self-doubt, exacerbated each time they hear of another PCN achieving something that they may not have even thought of.

What makes a good PCN Clinical Director?  What is the role really about, and how do you know if you are being effective?

There are three things to understand about the PCN CD role:

The role is about making change happen.  Ultimately what will separate the successful PCN CDs from others will not be how many meetings they attended, how well they understood the PCN DES or the intricacies of the ARRS, or how many WhatsApp groups they were on.  It will be whether they were able to make change happen within their PCN.

But making change happen is not easy.  People do not like change (even the ones that say they do!).  We all gain comfort from our routines and ways of doing things.  Change means stepping out of these and doing things we are unfamiliar and uncomfortable with.  Naturally, we will all resist change.  Even when the new way of working is better, most of us will be reluctant to make the step away from what we are currently doing.  It is human nature.

The PCN CD role is about making sure the changes that are chosen are the right ones, and that those within the PCN make these changes.  Which leads us to the second thing to understand about the PCN CD role.

The role is primarily about people.  Making change is really about people.  It is about building relationships and trust so that when you ask those people to move in a certain direction, they trust you enough to follow.

This is not easy to achieve.  People within a PCN will not do what the PCN CD says, just because they have the title “Clinical Director”.  They need a reason to leave the comfort of where they currently are and what are they currently doing to move in the direction the PCN CD suggests.  An effective PCN CD is one who can make this happen.

The role is not about being popular.  Inevitably, different people within the PCN will want to do different things and to move in different directions.  The PCN CD ultimately has to make the decisions about what to do and where to go.  To be effective they can’t be seen to be favouring one individual or practice or group over others.  While others can seek support from their peers, no one else within the PCN will experience the same set of challenges that the PCN CD faces.

Those seeking popularity should not take on the role.  Not only is it lonely, but managing conflict is inherent within it.  There is always an individual or practice actively blocking any change that you are seeking to introduce.  Where the opposition is not vocal and overt, the leader’s role is often to seek it out and bring it to the surface so that it can be dealt with.  Constantly dealing with conflict makes sustaining positive relationships challenging, as well as being exhausting.

One of the best ways of dealing with this loneliness is to engage with peers who are in the same situation.  Other PCN CDs and primary care leaders are the best source of support, as they are most likely facing a similar set of challenges.

Dr Rachel Morris, GP and host of the You are Not a Frog podcast that focusses on resilience, has established a Resilient Team Academy.  This is an online membership programme for PCN CDs and busy leaders in healthcare that not only provides a community of like-minded colleagues, but provides coaching, productivity and resilience tools to support you in your role, and will help you as you lead and support your practices and team.

I have teamed up with Rachel and we have created a 6 module online course on how to get people and practices to work together across a PCN.  In the course we provide practical advice on what PCN leaders can do to be effective in the role, and how to avoid the common mistakes that are made such as forgetting it is about people, and taking things personally.

Rachel’s Resilient Team Academy only opens a few times a year for new members.  If you want to join you can do so now, but only until Monday 3rd May.  If you join using this link you can receive a 15% discount on the joining fee, and receive the online course on joint working across practices for free.  It is risk free, because if you change your mind once you have joined, there is a 90 day no quibble money back guarantee.

An effective PCN Clinical Director is one that can make change happen, and can build the relationships needed to achieve this.  It is one of the most challenging jobs there is right now in general practice, and I would strongly recommend that anyone wanting to make a success of this role makes sure they put the support they need in place.  The resilient team academy is a great place to start!

21
apr
0

Do you really trust your team?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

If I were to ask you this question directly, your knee jerk reaction may be, ‘Of course, why else would I work with them?’.  But for many of us, this question raises some uncomfortable truths.

 

Yes, I may have ‘competency-based trust’ in my colleagues. I know they are capable of practicing safely, have good clinical knowledge and go above and beyond in the care of patients. I also know they are honest, good upstanding citizens and unlikely to nick my car…

 

But do I really trust that I can speak up, raise difficult issues with them, give them some feedback about the way they behaved in that meeting, challenge a decision they have made about a patient or disagree with something they have done? AND that our relationship will be totally fine afterwards?

 

Do I know that they always assume I have a good intention towards them? Do I know they will forgive me if I get it wrong or fail at something – even if I should have known better?

 

This is a different level of trust – vulnerability-based trust.  It is what makes teams work – or not. It is a key ingredient of psychological safety – essentially a climate in which people, ‘are comfortable expressing and being themselves…in which they are comfortable sharing concerns and mistakes without fear of embarrassment and retribution and…they are confident that they can speak up and won’t be humiliated, ignored or blamed.’ Amy Edmondson, The Fearless Organisation.

 

Unless we have this sort of trust within our teams, we are effectively trying to drive a high-performance car in first gear. The team won’t even be the sum of its parts, and certainly won’t be able to conflict and disagree well, which will lead to artificial harmony, lack of commitment, accountability and ultimately poor results.

 

One of the major reasons why PCN Directors and other leaders in healthcare struggle to get projects off the ground is an absence of trust in the team between the individuals from the different practices or organisations.

 

Teams with high levels of trust and good psychological safety have less medical errors, better outcomes, more engaged staff and better performance, so building trust in your team should be a priority for any PCN Director. The problem is that so often we focus on tasks and processes rather than building relationships and trust. Whilst doing a task together is a good way of beginning to build trust (if you do it right!), neglecting to work on the relationships can have dire consequences and can de-rail the whole thing.

 

So how do you build trust within your teams?

 

  • Really get to know one another. This doesn’t actually take too long. It is possible to make a deep connection in less than a minute if you ask the right questions. Show genuine interest in the other person (and then remember their answers!). Find some ‘uncommon commonality’ (perhaps you have children at the same school, or you’re both origami enthusiasts) or something about their past that shaped them and affected them deeply. Don’t forget to create times where you can have informal interactions (admittedly much harder online – it can be done but you’ll have to plan it more).
  • Model vulnerability. Tell people when you’re worried about something, share where you’ve made mistakes and ask for help. Self-disclosure is a powerful way of building a deep connection with people and it shows you trust them if you’re asking for help.
  • Assume good intent from others. Assuming that someone has your best interests at heart and that they are saying that thing because they are genuinely concerned, want to learn from mistakes, make things better and that they care about you too is a powerful mindset and the basis of psychological safety. It will allow teams to address all sorts of things in a non-judgemental, open and curious manner. It will help people speak up, recognise problems and challenges before they happen and save a whole load of hassle and heartache.
  • Seek first to understand before giving your opinion. Not only will you build trust but you’ll come across as wise too.

 

Leading teams in healthcare is ultimately about people, not about process. Focus on building trust within the teams in which you work and you’ll reap the rewards several times over.

 

For more about how to build trust when working across teams in practices and networks, check out the brand new BONUS spotlight course from Ben Gowland and Rachel Morris  ‘How to work together across practices and networks: 6 mistakes leaders in healthcare make and how to avoid them’ available free to you when you join the Resilient Team Academy – a membership for busy leaders providing monthly Deep Dive Masterclasses, ‘done for you’ team resilience building activities, teaching you how to use the Shapes Toolkit coaching and productivity tools with your teams and giving you a likeminded community of peers. Find out more here.

14
apr
0

The trouble with conflict in General Practice? There’s just not enough of it.

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

A busy practice is wondering why it is struggling to recruit more doctors.

The team is lovely, ‘we all get on really well, never a cross word’.  The practice manager agrees, ‘the partners are just really nice’.

The problem is they’ve been trying to get their document management workflow right for years but no-one’s on the same page. The doctors are staying later and later just to get everything done and even though they’ve been offered half a clinical pharmacist by the PCN they’re a bit unsure about how it will work for them.  When they tried it before, the person they appointed moved on after three months.

In this day and age, being ‘nice’ just won’t cut it for your team.

You see the problem I’ve seen the most in practices is not out and out war between the partners (though that definitely exists!) but the problem of people being too nice and a fear of conflict, which produces artificial harmony.

We all know that destructive conflict can cause untold damage to teams and organisations and is to be avoided at all costs.  However we are in danger of throwing the baby out with the bathwater when we are so frightened of destructive conflict that we avoid having any constructive conflict that will help us to debate and solve problems and ultimately work better together.

If we avoid conflict, what happens? People ignore changes that are being implemented, don’t use the new systems and processes designed to improve things and carry on with business as usual. Bad behaviour is not addressed, groupthink happens and often the loudest and most senior (though it doesn’t always have to be) voice in the room gets their way.

‘For good ideas and true innovation, you need human interaction, conflict, argument, debate.’ Margaret Heffernan

How many ideas have been lost, initiatives gone untried, and changes failed because we didn’t have the constructive debates and disagreements needed to come up with better solutions?

With artificial harmony it’s not that people don’t disagree, it’s that they disagree and just don’t tell you. Then, if a decision is made that they disagree with, they simply won’t commit to doing it. (Think about how many times something was discussed and ‘agreed’ in a partnership meeting that people just don’t do).

So this fear of conflict leads to a lack of commitment – the second and third dysfunctions of a team as described in Lencioni’s ‘5 Dysfunctions of a Team’. This in turn leads to avoidance of accountability and inattention to results which will affect workload, performance and even patient outcomes.

So how exactly do we increase the amount of constructive conflict in our practices?

You need to start with building vulnerability-based trust. This is where you can trust that if you disagree over something, the relationship will still be OK. Trust that you can fail, do something wrong or just have a bad day and you’ll be forgiven. In short, it needs to be SAFE to speak up and to disagree. This is the basis of psychological safety.

 

Here are some suggestions about how you can increase the constructive conflict in your practice:

  • Mine for conflict. In every meeting, in every discussion, ask every person to tell you 3 reasons why what has been suggested won’t work, or 3 potential problems / barriers or challenges they can see. Constantly ask people ‘what am I missing here? What are the downsides to this?’
  • Assign different roles in a meeting – make one person ‘Devil’s Advocate’ (to disagree about everything!). Make one person the ‘Unconditional Supporter’ (to agree), and one person ‘Switzerland’ (to be completely neutral). Make sure you swap these roles around regularly so that one person doesn’t get stuck as the Devil’s Advocate all the time!
  • Listen and ask questions. Give people ‘permission’ to disagree. Thank people for their contributions
  • Build up trust within your team. Get to know people, have coffee together, understand where they’re coming from. Model vulnerability; admit when you’ve failed and when you’re having a bad day.

So next time you’re feeling frustrated and stuck, ask yourself, are we being ‘too nice’ here? How can we help everyone feel able to get their ideas and opinions on the table? You might just get a pleasant surprise.

 

Dr Rachel Morris, April, 2021

Further resources:

  • ‘How Safe Do You Feel At Work?’ You Are Not A Frog podcast on Psychological Safety at work
  • ‘How to Manage Conflict during COVID’ You Are Not A Frog podcast
  • The 5 Dysfunctions of a Team by Patrick Lencioni

 

Want to learn more about how to increase trust and psychological safety within your team? Would you like to get a happy, thriving team at work without burning out yourself? Join Rachel in the Resilient Team Academy – a membership for busy leaders providing monthly Deep Dive Masterclasses, ‘done for you’ team resilience building activities, teaching you how to use the Shapes Toolkit coaching and productivity tools with your teams and giving you a likeminded community of peers. PLUS gain exclusive access to Ben and Rachel’s very special bonus course ‘How to work together across practices and networks: 6 mistakes leaders in healthcare make and how to avoid them’. This very special offer for Ockham Healthcare ends on the 2nd May – click here for more information.

24
mar
0

What did the GP Forward View Achieve?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

It might not seem like that long since the GP Forward View (GPFV) was published, but at the end of the March we come to the end of the 5 year GPFV period.  Just as a reminder, the headline of the GPFV was an investment of £2.4bn over those 5 years to demonstrate that the challenges in general practice had been heard and understood, and to provide real financial and practical support to the service.  What did the GPFV achieve, and where has it left general practice now?

There are a number of reflections to make about the GPFV:

5 years is too long a time frame.  In 2019, 3 years into the GPFV, the GPFV was effectively superseded by the new 5 year GP contract and the introduction of Primary Care Networks (PCNs).  When announcing funding uplifts a longer timescale works better because the money sounds more, but the reality is things change too much over that time period for it to remain a firm plan.  No one has really spoken about the GPFV for the last 2 years since the new contract was introduced.

It was really about access. While not immediately obvious, what became clear from the GPFV over time was that the real intention of the document was to deliver the government’s agenda of improved access to primary care.  The only significant recurrent additional funding in the GPFV, on top of the contract awards, was the £500m funding, or £6 per head of population, for additional access.  What then happened was the introduction of access stretched the already-thin workforce even further, diverted portfolio and part-time GPs away from core practice, as well as moved funding thought to be for core general practice into alternative providers – the £6 per head never went direct to practices.

In the new contract the primary policy objective is the introduction of primary care networks.  As with access in the GPFV, the real new money follows the policy objective, not the demands of the service.

There was never £2.4bn additional funding.  The GPFV struggled right from the outset with transparency over the funding.  It was very difficult to track and find the money.  Some of us persisted in trying to track it down, and it turned out the extra £2.4bn never really was £2.4bn.  It was less than £1bn.  Headline announcements of large sums of money over 5 year periods are largely an accumulation of inflationary rises to the global sum.  And in the case of the GPFV these were backdated to before the document was even published.

Money in the GPFV came via NHS England to CCGs, sometimes to federations, and eventually to practices.  Multiple pots all had their own application processes.  The money proved difficult to access and was beset by bureaucracy.

In the GPFV the headline figure was £2.4bn over five years, and in the new contract it is £2.8bn over five years. £1.8bn of the £2.8bn comes via the new networks, the rest is primarily in the uplifts to the global sum.  This year the uplift was 2.1%, less than the figures around 3% we were seeing during the GPFV.  But at least this time there is more transparency and the money is embedded in the contract.

5,000 extra GPs was always a myth.  One of the government’s promises when it published the GPFV was to provide an extra 5,000 GPs.  This became a particular source of embarrassment for the government, as not only did it fail to provide the extra GPs but the total number of GPs actually fell.  In 2019 there were 6.2% fewer full time equivalent GPs than in 2015[1].  At that point the old trick of changing the way the numbers are counted was introduced (see here[2]) to try and prevent further embarrassing comparisons.

With the 2019 contract the move was to additional roles to support GPs via the Additional Role Reimbursement Scheme.  How successful this is in supporting practices with the core workload remains to be seen.

It started the journey of delivering care in new ways.  The GPFV promised to support practices to introduce new ways of delivering care, and the Releasing Time for Care programme and the work of people like Robert Varnum on the 10 high impact actions were amongst the most helpful parts of the document.  However, there is no getting away from the fact that it was Covid-19 not the GPFV that has ultimately led to a step change in the way that care is delivered.

 

But for all its faults, the GPFV did represent a clear change in government policy towards general practice.  Previously, ever since the introduction of the revised GP contract in 2004 which the government felt it had paid too much for, there had been disinvestment in the service over many years.  This had left general practice in a parlous state, and it was only the introduction of the GPFV that really marked the end of this period of austerity.

However, for many this came too late, and the GPFV struggled to stop the exodus of GPs either into retirement or reducing their hours.  As a result the plan was never able to address the core workload and recruitment issues the service faced.

Five years on general practice is starting to feel different, but that is primarily down to the new contract and Covid-19.  The next few years are critical for general practice, particularly in terms of whether it can access the PCN funding to support the delivery of core services and build a sustainable staffing model, and whether it can embed the more helpful changes made during the pandemic. At least with a clear contract now in place the service has a more secure platform than the GPFV ever was to build on.

[1] https://www.bmj.com/content/bmj/369/bmj.m1437.full.pdf

[2] https://digital.nhs.uk/data-and-information/publications/statistical/general-and-personal-medical-services

17
mar
0

Who is looking after General Practice?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

This pandemic has not been just one big challenge, but rather a whole series of different challenges over an extended period of time.  As we move into yet another phase, and the next set of challenges, where does the energy come from to keep going?

At first there was the arrival of the pandemic itself, changing the operating model and moving to remote working, and putting systems and processes in place for managing patients presenting with Covid symptoms.  Then we had to work out how to do this alongside the normal work of general practice.  Then we had to introduce a vaccination programme, which has been all consuming and itself a series of different challenges (different vaccine types, care homes, housebound, practice dispersal etc etc).

One year in, we are once again moving into a new phase and a new set of challenges.  Some of the core services (such as QOF) that were put on hold are restarting.  The vaccination programme continues.  The work of PCNs accelerates, as the ARRS nearly doubles in size and the move towards integrated care means PCNs have to start to play an important role in influencing the system as whole.

But are we ready for more challenge?  How do we find the energy and personal resources to cope with and manage more change, more disruption, and yet more new ways of working?

We have not been good in the NHS at looking after the people who work in the service, or indeed at looking after ourselves.  We have known for a number of years that most GPs are looking to reduce the number of hours they work, and a large percentage of those who can are planning to retire in the next five years.  It is not just GPs; many practice managers and other members of the practice team are also looking to leave.  The recent pay offer for NHS staff and the freeze on the lifetime pension allowance is not going to help.

The continual wave after wave of challenges the pandemic is creating has made this situation more critical than ever.  If we do not take time now to look after ourselves, and look after the people we work with, it wont be long before the exodus of people out of general practice reaches unprecedented levels.

We have to prioritise our staff and ourselves.  The good news is that there are actions that we can take.  In this week’s podcast I talked to resilience expert and GP Dr Rachel Morris.  She outlined a range of tools, techniques and approaches that can all help with personal and team resilience.

It seems to me that the starting point is deciding that looking after ourselves and our teams is the priority.  We cannot rely on or even expect other people, or the wider NHS, to do that for us.  Most people working in general practice have spent a lot of time doing whatever has been needed to meet the different Covid challenges.  Going forward the only way general practice is going to be in a position to serve its local populations is by ensuring it takes time now to invest in itself and the people who work there.

10
mar
1

ARRS Roles: Planning for Year 3

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

We are about to embark on year 3 of the Additional Role Reimbursement Scheme (ARRS), through which the PCN DES funds additional roles for individual PCNs.  How can we take the learning from the first two years and build it in to our planning for next year?

The first year of the ARRS was relatively quiet, as PCNs were only allowed to employ a pharmacist and a social prescribing link worker.  Last year the scheme took off, in part because the list of different roles was expanded to 10, and in part because 100% (as opposed to 70%) of the salary costs were reimbursed through the scheme.

The investment into roles through the scheme continues to increase significantly into year 3, with the total investment reaching £746M nationally.  Many PCNs will be in a place where they can afford 10 or even more staff with the funding available. This number will continue to rise for the next two years.  What this means is PCNs have to move from considering the ARRS staff on an individual basis to thinking about all of the roles collectively as a team.

I have written previously about the challenge of introducing the new roles.  This challenge just gets greater as the number of roles increases.  We are now at a tipping point where the overall approach needs to change.

Any business that employs 10 or 20 staff would put a business plan in place.  Having a plan is what is now required for PCNs.  The plan needs to contain (as a minimum) the following 4 elements:

  1. Team Objectives

PCNs need to clarify exactly what the objectives for the ARRS team are.  How will the PCN know at the end of the year whether the new team has been a success?  How will the team itself know?  How will the practices know?  Agreeing objectives for the team will help everyone, and help move the PCN away from a mentality that it is recruiting these roles simply because the funding is available.

  1. Team Structure

The retention challenge for these roles is something I have already written about, despite the recruitment only really taking place in earnest over the last 9 months.  It is clear the individuals in these roles need to feel part of a team.  At the same time, practices cannot simply absorb the extra work of looking after these roles, and asking them to do it means in many cases it simply does not happen.

My sense is most PCNs will need to create an overall ARRS team.  Very large PCNs can probably create more than one team, such as a pharmacist team and a social prescribing team, but the majority of PCNs will need one team so that the individual Health and Wellbeing Coach (for example) does not end up being isolated.

The team will need a leader.  It needs to be someone’s job to be responsible for the overall ARRS team.  This does not mean line managing every member of the team, but it does mean responsibility for ensuring the team is functioning effectively, delivering on its objectives, has effective communication across it, and that any issues that arise are dealt with.  This could be the Clinical Director or PCN manager, but someone needs to take on this role.

The team needs to have a structure.  Moving beyond 5 or 6 members of the team means that there needs to be levels within it, e.g. one of the pharmacists managing the other pharmacists, a senior link worker managing the other link workers etc.  Planning the structure, thinking about individual advancement, making the team more self-sufficient are key aspects of this part of the process.  No structure means as more staff are recruited, the burden simply becomes greater on a relatively small number of individuals.

  1. Team Support

The key retention question for the PCN is how will this team be supported?  The provision of support is critical to getting the most out of them.  There are plenty of examples up and down the country of either ARRS staff such as Physician Associates carrying out low level work because no clinical support is being provided, or of staff such as social prescribing link workers working to other agendas because what support there is is provided outside of the PCN.

Increasingly there are opportunities (e.g. for pharmacists here or physician associates here) to ensure ARRS staff receive the training they need.  We are beginning to understand better how work needs to be organised to ensure ARRS staff can be effective (e.g. for FCPs here).  The PCN plan needs to be explicit about exactly how the ARRS staff will be supported.

  1. Team Finances

As the team expands the financial model of matching the monthly cost of the ARRS staff against the reclaimable allowance is no longer sufficient.  This is an important element of the financial plan, but cannot be it in its entirety.

The ARRS team are a (funded) investment in the wider work of the PCN.  There are wider costs beyond those which can be reclaimed, e.g. clinical supervision, line management, estates costs, training costs.  PCNs also need to be mindful of potential VAT costs as they are likely to exceed the £85,000 VAT threshold, and of the need for a fund to cover potential employment liabilities.  Equally, income can come from other sources such as CCG/HEE/ICS funding pots, PCN core and development funds (etc), as well as benefits in kind provided to practices (e.g. support for vaccination services, a home visiting service, support with the delivery of enhanced services etc).  There are also future opportunities on the horizon, such as support with the delivery of extended access.

The funding model is not perfect, but for the ARRS team to be effective a financial plan for the team as a whole needs to be put in place.  This is more important this year than it was last year, and its importance will continue to increase year on year as the total amount of ARRS funding received (and associated costs) grows.

 

The plan does not need to be long or complicated.  But spending some time and energy now in putting a plan together will put the PCN in a much stronger position for making the most of the opportunity of these new roles in the year ahead.

3
mar
1

Does Integration Really Mean Centralisation?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

I wrote last week about the new White Paper published by the government, and what it means for general practice.  My sense at the end of the White Paper is that I am less clear now than I was before as to what exactly is meant by “integration”.  Does it mean removing the barriers between organisations to enable joined up care, or does it in fact mean a further centralisation of control?

I understand the logic of integration, and why it is perceived to be a ‘good thing’.  Years of an internal market have created divisions and rivalries within the health service, and led to behaviours focussed on the needs of individual organisations rather than necessarily what is best for the patient.  It makes sense, then, to take steps to remove these artificial barriers created by the system, and for the organisation of care to be centred on what is best for patients.

There is, however, a difference between removing the barriers that have prevented health and social care professionals from working across organisational boundaries and centralising control into single organisations.

The new statutory NHS Integrated Care System (ICS) bodies will be given more formal power, “In order for ICSs to progress further, legislative change is now required to give ICSs stronger and more streamlined decision-making authority” (White Paper 5.4).  Further “each ICS NHS body… will be directly accountable for NHS spend and performance within the system” (6.18 f).  The NHS is well known for its mindset that accountability cannot be exercised without control.  Indeed, the system’s experience of the regional tiers of NHS England points very much to the fact that centralised control is something NHS England is extremely comfortable with.

All organisations within the NHS will not be merged into these new ICS bodies.  How, then, could control be exercised by the new system?  Well there are “several further changes to reinforce or enable integration” (the actual words used, 5.13 of the White Paper), one of which is a new “duty to collaborate” (3.11) imposed on all organisations across the system.  It does not take a huge stretch of imagination to envision a situation where any organisation not complying with the central diktats of the new ICS are taken to task for failing to comply with the new duty to collaborate.

The White Paper does talk about “the primacy of place” (6.5), and by place it means local areas within an ICS, but it only goes on to say that place is important, and not how this primacy should be effected.  Instead the government is not, “making any legislative provision about arrangements at place level – though we will be expecting NHSE to work with ICS NHS bodies on different models for place-based arrangements” (6.14).

Worrying, then, that a centralist-minded ICS would be able to set up its own arrangements for how arrangements in local “place” areas will work, with as many control mechanisms as it likes.  The argument is that by not legislating the arrangements that work best in any local area can be made, but that does leave it wide open to local interpretation/abuse.

We are therefore left with a situation, embedded by a new legislative framework, that seems designed to bring about integration not through relationships but through a system of centralised control.  How it works in practice will be dictated by the way NHS England behaves with the new ICS’s, and how the local leaders then operate within their own area.

Now I am generally a glass half-full individual, and of course there will be local leaders who focus on empowering and enabling local teams.  But I suspect this will be the exception rather than the rule, and so all of this leaves me feeling less than optimistic about the future.

24
feb
2

What does the new White Paper mean for General Practice?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog2 Comments

White Papers are not known for their readability, and at 80 pages long it easy to understand why the White Paper published on the 11th February has not made it to the top of the reading list of GPs busy dealing with the pandemic.  But how important a document is it, and what implications does it have for general practice?

The document signals three changes important for general practice:

  1. The Primacy of Integration
  2. Integrated Care Systems to become Statutory Bodies
  3. Locally Determined Place-based Arrangements

 The Primacy of Integration

At the core of the changes proposed is a shift away from the internal market and towards joined up, or integrated, care.  The aim is to continue to bring different parts of the systems closer together, and to support “GP and healthcare specialists to work together to arrange treatment and interventions that either prevent illness or prevent their conditions deteriorating into acute illness” (4.2).

Integration does not mean merger.  “While NHS provider organisations will retain their current structures and governance, they will be expected to work in close partnership with other providers and with commissioners or budget holders to improve outcomes and value.” (6.8)

There is, however, a new duty to collaborate. “This will require health bodies, including ICSs, to ensure they pursue simultaneously the three aims of better health and wellbeing for everyone, better quality of health services for all individuals, and sustainable use of NHS resources.” (3.11).  One assumes this will equally apply to general practice.

The expectation in recent years has been for GP practices to work together and in partnership through Primary Care Networks (PCNs).  While the White paper says very little directly about PCNs, it certainly signals integration as the direction of travel moving forward.

Integrated Care Systems to Become Statutory Bodies

Integrated Care Systems (ICS’s) are not new, as most areas already have one, and the White Paper is very much about legislation catching up with what it already happening.  However, as a result of the proposed legislation the ICS’s will become statutory bodies.

Each ICS “will be made up of an ICS NHS Body and a separate ICS Health and Care Partnership, bringing together the NHS, local government and partners. The ICS NHS body will be responsible for the day to day running of the ICS, while the ICS Health and Care Partnership will bring together systems to support integration and develop a plan to address the systems’ health, public health, and social care needs.” (3.9).

Why separate the ICS NHS body and the ICS Partnership?  The White Paper explains that the creation of an ICS NHS body is needed to, “merge some of the functions currently being fulfilled by non-statutory STPs/ICSs with the functions of a CCG. We aim to bring the allocative functions of CCGs into the ICS NHS body so that they can sit alongside the strategic planning function that we would like the ICS to undertake” (5.8).

Effectively then the role of CCGs become subsumed under the ICS NHS statutory bodies, who will take on both responsibility for allocating NHS money and the commissioning of general practice. However, interestingly, “It will not have the power to direct providers, and providers’ relationships with CQC will remain unchanged.” (6.15 e)

So the days of general practice being responsible for NHS money – the claim made when CCGs were introduced – will formally be over with the introduction of the new ICS NHS bodies.  General Practice will still have a say, however, as, “Each ICS NHS body will have a unitary board, and this will be directly accountable for NHS spend and performance within the system, with its Chief Executive becoming the Accounting Officer for the NHS money allocated to the NHS ICS Body. The board will, as a minimum, include a chair, the CEO, and representatives from NHS trusts, general practice, and local authorities, and others determined locally for example community health services (CHS) trusts and Mental Health Trusts, and non-executives.” (6.15 f)

In addition to this statutory board, ICSs and NHS providers can create joint committees and delegate decisions to them. At the same time NHS providers can form their own joint committees.  These are relevant for general practice as, “Both types of joint committees could include representation from other bodies such as primary care networks, GP practices, community health providers, local authorities or the voluntary sector” (5.26).

It will be important for general practice to ensure it both has representation and get its representation right on both the local statutory boards and joint committees.

Locally Determined Place-based Arrangements

An important term used in the White Paper is that of “place”.  By place it means local areas within a larger ICS, “Most usually aligned with either CCG or local authority boundaries… Many provider organisations and groupings of organisations such as primary care networks look to their ‘place’ as their primary focus” (6.5).  Place, then, is not a PCN, but the local area within which a PCN operates.

The White Paper does not propose any legislative arrangements at a place level, although they, “will be expecting NHSE to work with ICS NHS bodies on different models for place-based arrangements” (6.14) – i.e. expect guidance to come.  Local Authorities will have a big say in these place-based arrangements, which include aligning ICS allocation functions (i.e. where the money goes).  Health and Wellbeing Boards are explicitly recognised as having “the experience as place-based planners” (5.11), and so will feature in the local arrangements.

Local place arrangements may well end up being the ones that impact general practice and PCNs most.  Individual areas will have more of a say as to how these end up as they are outside of the scope of the new legislation, so it is important GPs and PCNs start to influence now how these develop locally.

 

Overall the White Paper signals a continuation of the changes already started across the NHS.  It does means a new contract manager for general practice (the new ICS NHS body), but more importantly it requires general practice to work in partnership with other organisations, and those partnerships will be pivotal to its future success.  Little if anything is said in the White Paper about PCNs and their future role in the new system, but everything suggests PCNs will be the key enabler of these partnerships.

17
feb
0

The Changing Face of At-Scale General Practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

It is not long ago that at-scale general practice primarily meant the merger of practices into bigger practices, the emergence of super-partnerships and the development of GP federations.  But all that has now changed.

This change has come about because the unit of at-scale general practice has changed.  It is now the Primary Care Network.  The PCN is the unit through which investment is made into general practice, through which delivery is expected, through which the workforce is being developed, and through which general practice will have its voice within integrated care systems.

Historically practices were moving towards at operating at greater scale for three reasons: financial, workforce and influence.  In the last two years since PCNs came into existence it has become abundantly clear the best way for general practice to achieve any of those gains is through PCNs.

As with any change, there are winners and losers.  Those most adversely affected are the large and dispersed super-partnerships, and GP federations.

The large super-partnerships spread out across large geographical areas were built on the establishment of a centralised resource whose cost was prohibitive for small partnerships, but is continually reduced by larger and larger numbers.  These partnerships worked to grow their numbers across the country, and in doing so reduced costs and overall profitability.  But PCNs are based on co-located practices serving specific communities rather than isolated practices joined together by a shared central resource, and so the new PCN environment will not enable this model to thrive.

GP federations were a relatively safe unit of at-scale general practice, that allowed practices to retain their individual identity and ways of working but come together on shared initiatives to secure contracts (such as extended access) and funding (such as for GP Forward View work like care navigation and workflow optimisation).  But with practices now within PCNs, and PCNs receiving any shared initiative funding including extended access, the future for federations as a model for individual practices working together seems very limited indeed.

But the shift of focus of at-scale general practice also creates opportunities.  The biggest opportunity comes for practices working together within a PCN.  The closer those practices can work together, and blur the lines between core practice business and PCN business, potentially to the point of full merger, the greater the opportunity for those practices to use PCNs to stabilise and sustain the core practice model.  If the practices can incorporate the ARRS roles along with the PCN DES requirements into its core business, they have a much greater chance of a sustainable long term future than those that treat all of the PCN investment and work as separate to core business.  We will see this disparity magnified as extended access moves into the jurisdiction of PCNs.

The other main opportunity comes for practices to change the function of their federations.  As I have discussed previously, the limits that PCNs put around at-scale general practice (ongoing and increased individual partner liability, a disparate voice across multiple PCNs within an integrated care system area, a limited ability to support and maximise the value of the new ARRS roles) can all be overcome by PCNs working together within a federation.  While the unit of scale for individual practices is now the PCN, the unit of scale for PCNs could usefully become the federation.

Like it or not PCNs are now established as the primary unit of at-scale general practice. The question for practices to consider is how best to adapt to make the most of the opportunities of this new environment.

10
feb
0

Could the Vaccination Programme have been Organised Differently?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Last week I considered whether the impact of the vaccination programme might end up being too much for general practice, as a result of the financial and personal challenges that it has entailed.  One of the questions that this provoked was what would I have done differently given the chance to run the national programme?

Of course no one has the freedom to run the national programme.  Even our national primary care leads are constantly negotiating with (and directed by) their own political and NHS masters.  But even with that in mind the national approach could have been different.

The national approach has been characterised, I think it is fair to say, by control.  It started with the insistence that general practice sites were organised via “PCN groupings”.  Why was that?  Well in part it was because of the logistics of the Pfizer vaccine.  But this was never going to be the only vaccine, and the logistics were always likely to change, but there was never a commitment to work through individual practices.  PCN groupings were to be the delivery unit.

The fact is c1000 PCN groupings are easier to control than over 7000 practice units.  Supply can be controlled, delivery can be controlled, cohorts can be controlled.  While the vaccination service has technically been delivered via an enhanced service contract, in reality it has been managed as an NHS directly delivered service.  The daily requirements to provide information, the strict controls on what is and isn’t allowed, and the regular interventions from above into local sites are all testament to that.

This does feel like a taste of the future.  PCNs will increasingly be the ‘go to’ units of general practice, rather than individual practices themselves.  In part this is because it makes ‘integration’ between general practice and the rest of the NHS easier to achieve (e.g. the arrangements for mental health workers in next year’s ARRS scheme), but in part it is because it puts general practice more within the control of the NHS.

Could things have been done differently?  Or did the overriding requirement for speed and rapid mobilisation mean the approach built around national control taken was the only realistic one available?

I think things could have been done differently.  The approach could have devolved more control to local areas.  Local areas could have been given a clear set of outcomes to achieve within a set timescale and a set amount of funding, and could have been allowed to develop and implement tailored solutions for their local areas.   Each area could have created its own, joined up mix of PCN, practice, and mass vaccination sites (or indeed other types of site), that could have worked together to ensure whole population coverage.

We are in a situation where PCN sites, mass vaccination sites and pharmacy sites feel more like they are competing against each other than working together to achieve whole population coverage.  Separate national implementation teams has led to local confusion rather than a joined up approach. If local areas had been able to design their own mix of service offerings everyone could have understood their respective roles and worked together as a local team.

Local areas could also have tailored their approach according to their own local strengths and weaknesses, and challenges.  Rural areas could have taken different approaches to more densely populated urban areas.  Mass vaccination sites could have been targeted where PCN sites found it more difficult to mobilise.  Most importantly, sites within local areas could have actively supported each other, as different members of the same team.

I know it is easy to criticise, and am cognisant of just how successful the vaccination programme has ultimately been so far.  But we are on the verge of a shift in NHS policy towards integrated care systems.  The danger is that these systems, and PCNs within them, simply become different units through which central NHS exercises top down control.

For integrated care and these new ICS systems to really work they need to be locally owned and led, and freed up from top down imposition.  The concern the national vaccination programme highlights is that local freedom and true integrated working will remain secondary to top down national control.  The cost of that approach is things that do not make sense at a local level as well as an unsustainable level of pressure on individuals.

3
feb
0

Will the Vaccination Programme prove to be too much for General Practice?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

A GP posted this message on twitter last weekend:

“Prediction for GP in England. It will deliver on the vaccination demands. Delivered for most partners at a loss because of the awful NHSE and GPC ES. Once the pandemic is over many GP partners, PCN CDs and practice managers will resign, broken.” (you can find it here)

It is an interesting prediction.  I would say general practice is currently divided into two groups.  There are those sites that have a vaccination model that is working well, has a team that is functioning effectively and are not only delivering the vaccine but also deriving huge satisfaction from doing so.

Sadly this group do not seem to be in the majority.  The second (larger) group are those who are both struggling to make the vaccination model work financially, and personally finding the whole process physically and emotionally exhausting.

The financial challenge noted in the tweet comes for a number of reasons.  The Pfizer vaccine is much more expensive to deliver (because of the need to dilute the vaccine, to put a 15 minute observation period in place for those receiving the vaccine, and to staff clinics at incredibly short notice).  There is no additional payment that takes this into account.

The housebound patients simply cannot be vaccinated within the £12.58 available.  Even if the team delivering the vaccinations can be funded (not possible if a GP carries them out), there is no way of funding all of the additional work required such as carrying out the training, gaining consent, validating the Pinnacle records etc etc.

Then there are all of the unseen costs.  Finding staff to book patients at short notice, even on the day of clinic and while the clinic is still running.  Bringing staff in on a Sunday because of an insistence that all of this week’s vaccines are used this week.  Managing the complaints because of the national control-freakery that is being applied to any messaging.  Communicating with practices and GPs who are not crazy enough to engage with WhatsApp groups that spew hundreds of messages a day, but are the only way of finding out what is going on.

Et cetera, et cetera.

If it does come to pass that, once all of the housebound and elderly are vaccinated and the Oxford AZ vaccine is much more widely available, primary care sites are stepped down for other sites, it will genuinely be one of the most galling financial kicks in the teeth general practice has ever experienced.

However, the personal loss for many of those leading the vaccinations is far greater than any of the financial challenges.  It is hard to overstate how all-consuming leading the vaccination process has become for many.  It is 7 days a week with no respite.  There is the weekly wait to find out what vaccines will be arriving, with painful recent scars reminding these leaders not to book anything until national confirmation is received.  Then there is the mad scramble to staff rotas and find patients for the clinics.  Then there is dealing with the inevitable change or late delivery, and having to absorb all of the local patient and staff unhappiness this creates.

For many vaccination leaders their life is on hold.  On top of the clinic challenges, there come new challenges every week – changes to the second vaccine regime, delivering to care homes, to the housebound, changes to Pinnacle, the emergence of a local mass vaccination centre (etc) – all topped with constant pressure from above to do more, faster, better.

The staff they are leading struggle with the pace, but the leaders have to push forward.  The local practices who are not involved push them from the sides.  It is the leaders who bear the brunt of the blame for national rules that don’t make any sense but can’t be broken, like which cohort can be done when, and why vaccine can’t just be given to local practices to administer themselves.

These leaders are PCN CDs, GP partners, PCN managers, practice managers.  They are our local leaders of general practice.  And if not already then certainly at some point soon they will need a break.  Many will simply not want to return.  They won’t stop until the job is done, but I understand a message that says once we get there enough will be enough.  And what then?  Who will pick up the pieces?  What state will general practice be in?  Will it all have been too much?

27
jan
0

The 2021/22 GP Contract

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

NHS England published a letter on the 21st January, entitled “Supporting General Practice in 2021/22”.  The letter states NHS England and the GPC have agreed that, “too much remains unclear to confirm contractual arrangements for the whole of 2021/22”, and so the letter is intended to provide what certainty they can at this point given the pandemic.

The letter reinforces what we already knew, primarily that the majority of the additional investment into general practice is coming via the PCNs.  This primarily takes the shape of the Additional role Reimbursement Scheme (ARRS), where the total pot has been increased from £430M to £746M.

There are some interesting developments of the ARRS.  The most helpful is that those in London can now offer the same inner or outer London salary weighting as other NHS organisations (although they are still restricted to the same total pot).  Three new roles have been added: paramedics, mental health practitioners, and “advanced practitioners”.

PCNs have been looking forward to the opportunity to employ paramedics from April since it was announced last year that they would be able to do so.  There is a nasty sting in the tail in the guidance however,

“Where a PCN employs a paramedic to work in primary care under the Additional Roles Reimbursement Scheme, if the paramedic cannot demonstrate working at Level 7 capability in paramedic areas of practice or equivalent (such as advanced assessment diagnosis and treatment) the PCN must ensure that each paramedic is working as part of a rotational model with an Ambulance Trust” p7.

This theme of other NHS organisations bringing their weight to bear on the introduction of the PCN roles is also reflected in the new mental health practitioners.  Here there are even more complicated arrangements at play,

“From April 2021, every PCN will become entitled to a fully embedded FTE mental health practitioner, employed and provided by the PCN’s local provider of community mental health services, as locally agreed. 50% of the funding will be provided from the mental health provider, and 50% by the PCN (reimbursable via the ARRS), with the practitioner wholly deployed to the PCN. This entitlement will increase to 2 WTE in 2022/23 and 3 WTE by 2023/24, subject to a positive review of implementation.” p3.

Can the ARRS funding really be counted as funding for general practice if the funding is to be used for staff that are to be employed by the local community mental health provider?  It is a worrying precedent that has been set against the main source for investment into general practice.  It will be interesting to see how PCNs react to this, how keen they are to take up this offer, and what pressure is brought on them if they decline.

In better news the 4 outstanding PCN DES specifications will not be introduced at the start of 2021/22, with an implementation agreed once (if) the Covid situation scales down.  There is no mention of the existing 3 specifications and how they will be monitored through the year – something which varies considerably across the country.  The transfer of extended access will now take place in April 2022 (a more definite statement than the previous “from” April 2022), with the specification to be published this summer (i.e. September).

The Investment and Impact Fund (IIF) will continue.  The existing indicators of seasonal flu vaccinations, social prescribing referrals and LD health checks will continue (thresholds to be determined), which I assume means the prescribing indicators will not.

Finally QOF will remain broadly the same next year as this year.  A vaccination and immunisation domain will be added, adding £60m from the replaced childhood immunisations DES, there will be no new quality improvement modules but LD and supporting early cancer diagnosis will be repeated from this year, and £24M is being added to strengthen SMI physical health checks.

In summary then, no huge surprises, some minor disappointments, but on the whole a pragmatic approach to keeping the focus on the challenge that is front and centre right now of dealing with the pandemic.

20
jan
0

Should we Stop Vaccinating While Others Catch Up?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

We are at a difficult stage of the vaccination programme.  Some sites started in December, and have been able to largely complete the vaccination of cohorts 1 and 2 (care home residents, those aged over 80, and frontline health and social care workers).  Others have only just received approval for their local site to begin vaccinating, and are only now able to make a start on these priority cohorts.

The challenge is whether the sites that have completed the initial cohorts should carry on with the next cohort (the over 75s), or whether they should be stopped while other areas catch up?  By the time you read this the next cohorts are likely to have been announced, but at present strict national rules mean any area that has completed cohorts 1 and 2 is experiencing heavy pressure not to make a start on cohort 3.

The Joint Committee on Vaccination and Immunisation (JCVI) is clear that the priority for the vaccination programme is the reduction of Covid-19 mortality and morbidity, and the protection of health and social care staff and systems.  The age based strategy in place has been selected as the best option for preventing morbidity and mortality in the early phase of the programme, because “Current evidence strongly indicates that the single greatest risk of mortality from COVID-19 is increasing age and that the risk increases exponentially with age” (p4).

The strategy is clear.  So if the constraint in the system is the supply of vaccine it makes perfect sense that the supply should now be prioritised to those areas that are catching up and still have over-80s to vaccinate.  It is up to the national team who decide who is receiving supplies to ensure it goes to those sites.

The complexity comes when the constraint is not supply but delivery capacity/capability.  If a site has completed cohorts 1 and 2 and receives a supply what is it to do?  The national mandate is that this site must now help other sites to deliver cohorts 1 and 2.  This is sensible, but there are two problems with this.  One is geography – how practical is it for the over 80s to travel to an area that is further away to receive the vaccine; and the other is logistical – the Pfizer vaccines have to be used within a very short number of days, and so delays in booking patients leads to a much higher risk that the vaccines will be wasted.

Many sites have been scrambling around for patients to ensure that vaccine isn’t wasted at the end of a session.  There are reports that some sites have not been able to use all their vaccine because they have not been able to find people from the right cohort in time.

To an outsider this seems strange – surely no one would let any vaccine be wasted?  But there is heavy system pressure applied to sites about not vaccinating outside of the allowed cohort, even after Pfizer vaccine has arrived on site and the clock has started ticking.  Threats are made that sites supplies will be cut off if they go outside the cohort.  So some vaccine has been wasted.

There needs to be a balance between striving to achieve the strategy of delivering the vaccines in priority order and a pragmatism of applying this goal so that we make the most of the vaccines we have.  The JCVI itself advised that,

“Implementation should also involve flexibility in vaccine deployment at a local level with due attention to… vaccine product storage, transport and administration constraints… JCVI appreciates that operational considerations, such as minimising wastage, may require a flexible approach, where decisions are taken in consultation with national or local public health experts.” (p11)

It does not feel like we have got that flexibility in the system right yet.  As ever, the top down nature of the NHS is resulting in local inflexibility when flexibility is required.

If supply is not the constraint and some areas can go faster, and cannot for geographical and logistical reasons help other areas, surely it makes sense to let them vaccinate their local population as quickly as possible (in cohort order)?  Holding back supplies so that we all move at the pace of the slowest does not feel like an appropriate response to the crisis we are all currently in.

This is only the first time we are moving from one cohort to another; there are many more such movements ahead.  General practice has stepped up and is doing an amazing job of mobilising and responding to the call.  The numbers already vaccinated is  a testament to this response.  Let’s not let system bureaucracy impede the incredible effort that is underway.

13
jan
0

What to Make of the NHS England “Freeing up Practices” Letter

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Last week, on the 7th January, the national primary care team wrote a letter to practices entitled, “Freeing up practices to support COVID vaccination”.  There is no question GP practices are struggling right now, so how helpful was this letter, and does it go far enough?

The letter follows a previous letter written at the start of the second lockdown in November, which headlined with an announcement of £150M of additional primary care funding.  The core message of this letter was that, unlike the first wave of Covid, GP practices are very much expected to stay “fully open” this time round.  The additional funding was to enable “expanded capacity”, and to be able to deliver (on top of day to day work), extra work including:

  • Supporting the establishment of a Covid oximetry at home model
  • Identifying and supporting patients with long Covid
  • Supporting clinically extremely vulnerable patients and maintaining the shielding list
  • Making inroads into the backlog of appointments including for chronic disease management and routine vaccinations and immunisations

As a result the £150M has been primarily deployed to support additional work in general practice, rather than to provide any extra support for the work currently being carried out.

Two months later we are at a point where the pressure of the pandemic has significantly increased.  Practices are having to juggle staff sickness and isolation alongside skyrocketing demand.  At the same time the pressure is on from all sides for practices to carry out an extremely challenging Covid vaccination programme, as well as well as completing the biggest ever flu vaccination programme.  This is before getting started on the list of extra work from the November letter.

And so it was into this context that last week’s letter landed.  There is no question that the financial protections it contains were very much needed.  The minor surgery DES, the QOF QI domains and the 8 prescribing indicators in QOF are all now income protected until the end of March.  I think just seeing something that recognised the need for additional support prompted an initially positive reaction from many.

Non-essential locally commissioned services are suspended, although there is no guarantee of income protection.  Instead “budgeted payment against these services should be protected to allow capacity to be redeployed”, which undoubtedly will mean some CCGs interpret this as local income protection while others make additional requirements of practices against it.

PCN CD funding is (rightly) increased from 0.25 WTE to 1 WTE in recognition of the complexities of the Covid vaccination response.  This can “be flexibly deployed by PCNs” – it will be interesting to see how this works where one PCN is leading on behalf of a number of PCNs.

The other main announcement was that extended access funding won’t be shifting to PCNs before April 2022.  You would think that “repurposing extended hours and access capacity to support the vaccination programme” would actually be easier once the funding moves across to PCNs, but given everything currently happening I can see that many PCNs would struggle to put effective new arrangements for extended access in place any time soon.

My sense is that when you dig into the detail of the letter it does not acknowledge the reality of the additional pressure currently on practices as a result of both managing Covid patients and the demands of the vaccination programme.  If the national aim is really to free up practices to support Covid vaccinations, I would suggest what is also needed is:

  • The £150M announced in November is distributed to practices to enable them to manage the current demand rather than to create additional work for practices
  • There is a national mandate that the income from locally commissioned services is protected for practices by CCGs
  • PCNs are allowed to flexibly deploy the ARRS underspend to staff vaccination centres. The requirement for six month minimum contracts limited to the staff roles identified in the ARRS list feels like such a wasted opportunity.
  • National financial commitments are made to practices that go beyond March. The vaccination programme will take at least six months (and longer), so surely arrangements need to be put in place now that reflect that.

The ask of primary care is really significant at present, and practices up and down the country are going above and beyond to meet these challenges.  But practices remain independent businesses faced with unprecedented operational and financial upheaval, and my sense is more active support for practices needs to be provided to go alongside the demands being made of them.  Without it the current situation may not be sustainable.

16
dec
1

My 2021 Prediction: How PCNs will change

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

As this is my last blog of 2020 (we are going to give you a two week break from the podcast and blog over Christmas!), I thought I would share what I foresee on the horizon for PCNs next year.  I am of course aware that predictions are a mug’s game (who could have predicted how this year would turn out?), but I always find it helpful to think through what might be coming up ahead.

My main prediction for 2021 is that there will be a move towards smaller PCNs.

Normally in the NHS, we like to start small and then merge organisations into bigger and bigger entities.  Those with longer memories will recall that multiple Primary Care Groups became a smaller number of Primary Care Trusts (PCTs), and the number of CCGs has been on the decline ever since their inception.

I suspect, however, the trend will be different for PCNs.

Currently, there are around 1,250 PCNs, and the “average” PCN is very close to the originally-envisaged upper limit of 50,000.  This means approximately half of the PCNs have population sizes in excess of the 50,000.  Why might that be?  Why have GP practices chosen to group into larger groupings than were expected?

My hypothesis is that the primary reason for this was because PCNs looked like a lot of work right from the outset, and it seemed sensible to group together so that work could be shared out between more practices, and the burden of additional work on anyone practice would be minimised.  The problem is we are now at a point where the resources and funding coming through PCNs is significant, and far outweighs anything that is coming through the core GP contract.  The ARRS in many PCNs will be funding not much shy of a million pounds’ worth of extra roles, and the extended access funding is also likely to be pushing £0.5 million for many PCNs.

What practices want is to feel the benefit of these resources.  The challenge of working with lots of other practices is these resources can feel distant from the practice, there can be lots of different ideas as to how these resources should be deployed, and it can be hard for any individual practice to exert the control it would like to over PCN decisions.

While at first it was helpful for practices to be distant from PCN decision making and to some extent be protected from the additional work, now that the resources are becoming very real many practices are finding the set up frustrating.  Cue conversations between smaller groups of often like-minded practices about what they think should be happening, and wouldn’t it be better if they were their own PCN?

It is a logical step.  Smaller groups of practices in PCNs can have really detailed conversations about how the totality of the resource they now have (existing practice resources and the additional PCN resources) can be combined to deliver maximum benefit to the practices and their patients, and ensure that all of the PCN requirements are met.

The artificial divide between PCN business and practice business does not actually serve either of those businesses, but is necessary when there are multiple practices operating together with relatively low levels of trust.  This barrier is removed when the PCN becomes smaller and the number of practices who have to work together is reduced.

The other factor at play is that it is very difficult to introduce new roles into general practice across large numbers of practices.  Those in the new roles need a home, and to be linked primarily with one practice, and receive all the support that comes with that.  PCN working across multiple practices does not allow that, whereas smaller PCNs can.  We are going to see significant turnover in the new roles next year, and they are likely to settle with those PCNs who are able to look after them.

There it is – more and smaller PCNs next year.  Have a great Christmas, I hope you have a chance to take some well-earned rest, and thank you for all your support this year.

9
dec
0

3 Ways PCNs can make the most of their First Contact Physiotherapist

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

One of the most exciting of all the additional roles that are available to Primary Care Networks (PCNs) are First Contact Physiotherapists (FCPs).  This is because they have the potential to take on a significant amount of the general practice workload, and provide some much needed support to GP practices struggling to cope with the sheer volume of demand.  But what do PCNs need to do to ensure FCPs are able to fulfil this potential?

I spoke recently to Larry Koyama from the Chartered Society of Physiotherapy (CSP) on the podcast (you can listen to the full conversation here).  There is lots of great information on the CSP website about FCPs (e.g. here), but out of my conversation with Larry I took 3 key lessons for PCNs to make the most of their FCP:

  1. Ensure the Patient Sees the FCP First

Ok this might sound obvious to some, but there are some places where patients are being referred by the GPs to the FCP.  FCPs are (as described by Health Education England), “Regulated, advanced and autonomous health professionals trained to provide expert MSK assessment, diagnosis and first-line treatment, self-care advice and if required, appropriate onward referral”.  The role of FCPs is not to provide physiotherapy for those patients GPs assess as needing it; rather their role is to provide that initial assessment themselves.

The pathway PCNs need to create is for practice receptionists to be able to book patients directly into FCP appointments.  According to NHS England MSK conditions account for 30% of GP consultations in England, so the potential for workload to be diverted away from GPs via this pathway is huge.

  1. Base the FCP at a Single Site

The default guiding principle for GP practices working together is often equity.  Whatever service or scheme is being put in place GP leaders often have to work hard to ensure it is seen as equitable by all of the practices involved.  What this in turn often translates to when it comes to the PCN additional roles is they are split between all the member practices, so they might be at practice A on a Monday, practice B on a Tuesday, practice C on a Wednesday etc.

The problem with this approach is that, while it may well be equitable for the GP practices and their patients, it makes it very difficult for the new roles to feel they really belong anywhere.  Instead they are treated as visiting clinicians by every practice, and they never feel at home.  And when staff feel they do not belong, they do not end up staying very long.

On top of that, FCPs are new roles into general practice.  It is already difficult for the new starters to try and adapt to the general practice environment.  This sense of overwhelm the new recruits feel is exacerbated when they are have to get used to 5 or 6 different GP practices all at the same time.

A better model for PCNs is to establish a “host” practice for the FCP service, and set up a system whereby each practice can book appointments with the FCP for their patients.  It may be more work for the PCN leaders, it may be less popular with the member practices (less equity), but it will make it as easy as possible for the FCP to feel at home in the PCN, to feel supported, and to make the new way of working as effective as it can be for the practices.

  1. Link the FCP into the wider MSK system

Larry Koyama reported in our conversation that the CSP had looked at all the employment options for FCPs (including individual GP practices and PCNs) and they recommend that existing providers of NHS physiotherapy services employ FCPs.  This means they think that the best employer is actually the local community or acute trust.  The rationale is that it helps to embed and integrate FCPs across the MSK pathway (where they can access training and peer support), and the provider can ensure service consistency and staff continuity.

Now as well as equity, GPs prefer direct control, and I suspect few PCNs are minded to buy in their FCP service from the local trust.  However, what PCNs can do is make sure that professional training and development, as well as mentoring and peer support, is provided by the existing local provider.  This will ensure their FCP is not isolated, as well as linking them in to the wider local MSK system.

 

This year PCNs are only able to employ one FCP this year, but that number will go up next year.  By working hard now to support the FCPs they do have, PCNs will be in a great place to attract more FCPs in future and make the most of all they have to offer.

2
dec
1

What Does the End of CCGs mean for General Practice and PCNs?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

Last week NHS England published a paper in which it backed legislation to abolish Clinical Commissioning Groups (CCGs) by April 2022.  The aim is to replace them by giving the newly developing Integrated Care Systems statutory status.  What will these changes mean for general practice, and in particular for PCNs?

When they were established much of the rhetoric around CCGs was about putting NHS money in the hands of GPs, who know their patient populations and their needs best.  Whilst an attractive idea, the reality right from the outset was close control of CCGs by NHS England with very little room for GPs within CCGs to actively change the flow of NHS money.  Whatever else it might signal, the end of CCGs does not feel like it will be a loss of influence for GPs, because it is not clear that CCGs really ever had any.

NHS England’s paper is significant because it not only heralds the end of CCGs, but also the end of the purchaser provider split in the NHS.  This split was created by the last Thatcher government in the early 1990s in an attempt to create an internal market within the NHS.  Hospitals became provider Trusts, money to purchase care was given to Health Authorities, and GP fundholding was the first iteration of GPs being involved as the “commissioners” of healthcare.

What this paper does is (in effect) recommend the split (which has been largely ignored since the publication of the 5 Year Forward View anyway) is finally put out of its misery.  It is fair to say it was an experiment that has not worked.  At 30 years it is probably also fair to say it was an experiment that was allowed to go on for far too long.

What does this mean for general practice and PCNs?  Integrated care systems (ICSs) are to become statutory bodies, and general practice is represented on ICSs by PCNs.  Indeed, PCNs were created to represent local populations of 30-50,000 within ICSs, and ensure care is organised across agencies around the needs of those local populations.  It means the role of PCNs will become even more important.

Where in the internal market the commissioning organisation was expected to exert control over the delivery of local care via the use of contracts with provider organisations, within the new system the provider organisations are expected to work together and make sensible decisions as to how to use their resources to improve outcomes.

I can almost feel your scepticism as you read these words as to whether the new system will make things any better.  What the internal market has done through its attempt to create internal competition within the NHS is not to improve efficiency (as intended) but instead breed huge mistrust between different provider organisations.  It is going to take time for these organisations to get used to the new environment and learn to trust each other.

The real opportunity for the new integrated care system to work is only (in the short to medium term at least) at a local level.  Where relationships are between individuals trust can develop and mature quickly.  Where relationships are between organisations, with years of bad blood to overcome, trust will take much longer to build.  Front line clinical teams talking to front line clinical teams and working out sensible ways of doing things is how integrated care can make a difference that the internal market never could.

The changes that are coming represent an opportunity for general practice and PCNs, but they will need to take action to ensure they can make the most of it.  By April 2022 PCNs will be nearly 3 years old, and by then they need to be firmly established, have built some delivery capacity and capability, and have developed strong working relationships with local partners.  The challenge for PCNs and GP leaders in the meantime is to ensure that as ICSs develop primacy is given to making and supporting change at a local level, and that decision making doesn’t drift into large regional areas divorced from local teams.

25
nov
1

Working Together: Covid-19 Vaccinations

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

It has been a stressful few weeks for many practices.  Not only did practices find out via the BBC that flu vaccinations for the over 50s are to commence from December 1st, they also had to agree with their neighbouring practices which sites are to be used for the delivery of the Covid-19 vaccine.

Working together is not easy.  Trust is hard to build between practices, and despite the progress made in recent months, agreeing a single site for Covid-19 vaccinations across PCNs within a week was always going to be challenge.

At the root of this challenge is the money at stake.  If the average practice has 8,000 patients, and we conservatively estimate that only half of these will receive the vaccine, then that is 4,000 patients x2 shots each x £12.58 a shot.  Which equals over a £100,000 per practice.  That kind of money will always create tension, but especially in a year like this when practices are under so much financial pressure.

Most practices would have preferred to deliver the Covid-19 vaccine in the same way that they deliver the flu vaccine to their patients – in their own practices with their own staff.  But the nature of this vaccine (it arrives in batches of 975, has a shelf life of only 5 days, is difficult to transport and wastage is not an option) means that it simply is not possible at this point in time.

The logistics are not the only reason it makes sense for practices to work together to deliver this vaccine.  Practices already have to deliver the flu vaccine to a huge new cohort at the same time as the Covid-19 vaccine becomes available.  The ask of practices already during this second peak of the pandemic is to manage the new virus on top of everything else that practices have to do.  At the same time as winter properly kicks in.  Individual practices simply do not have the spare capacity.

While the workload is growing, the workforce is much less resilient.  Everyday different practices are faced with the challenge of huge swathes of staff either sick or needing to isolate.  Individual practices cannot be sure they will be able to keep normal services running, let alone an additional vaccination service that requires 975 injections within a 5 day period.

Delivering this vaccine also requires a level of management capacity not present in the vast majority of individual practices.  We know the logistics are extremely challenging (think enabling national and local booking, cold chains, training staff, organising volunteers, working with other agencies on communication messages, managing the IT, without even getting into the reporting requirements that will inevitably be necessary).   It is not realistic to think a practice manager can do all this in their spare time.

The financial efficiencies are potentially greater working together.  A well run single site operating with a clear set of processes and flows can minimise the costs by maximising the numbers running receiving the vaccination each hour, and by working effectively with volunteers and partner agencies.

Many practices dislike working together, because it is difficult and requires a ceding of control.  But if there was ever a set of circumstances where it makes sense for practices to work together this is it.  That does not make it easy to achieve, or change the local politics or difficult relationships, but nonetheless it is an opportunity.

The vaccination programme has huge societal implications, and is a massive opportunity for general practice to be a key part of taking this country out of the situation it is currently in, but my one piece of advice to those trying to make this joint working happen is not to ignore the money.  Whether it is what is being talked about or not by practices, it is an issue that needs to be explicitly addressed.  Be clear how will the money flow, how it will be transparent, and how it will be fair.  It might not be the most important, but it is certainly an essential step to making the joint delivery of the Covid-19 vaccine by general practice a success.

18
nov
0

Making a Difference

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

It has been a difficult year.  Coping with Covid-19, and all the challenges that it has brought both personally and professionally has been difficult for everyone.  The first lockdown was hard, but the second lockdown in many ways feels harder, because we understand the scale of the challenge and what will be required to get through it.

This time round some of the fear from the first lockdown has gone, because we know what to expect.  But instead it has been replaced with a tiredness.  Without really having the time or opportunity to recover from the first time round we are having to do it all over again.

For general practice lockdown 1 and lockdown 2 feel significantly different.  When lockdown 1 happened the message was to stop everything to make sure that patients with coronavirus were looked after.  In lockdown 2 the message seems to be that general practice should be open for business as usual, and be absorbing the covid challenges on top of everything else.

Now the ask is for general practice to also take on the covid vaccination programme.

It easy to react from a position of tiredness.  How can we find the energy to take on all the logistical and operational challenges this brings, on top of everything else?  Especially when it feels like we are already running on empty?  I know I personally am guilty of reacting like this.

But the reason I (like many of you) chose healthcare as the industry that I wanted to work in, as opposed to investment banking or commercial law or anything else, was because I wanted to make a difference.  I wanted to not just earn a living, but to do so in way that a made a positive difference to others.

Playing a part in the covid vaccination programme is likely to be my opportunity to make the biggest difference maybe I will ever be able to make.  A vaccine is the only route by which we can re-gain our lives, our economy, our normality.  Without it, as we have seen, the pandemic takes over everything.

So yes it is hard, and it is difficult to summon up the energy and personal resources, but really it is a huge opportunity.  Undoubtedly general practice will rise to the challenge, and play a leading role in taking the country out of the crisis it finds itself in.  I want to be part of it.  I want to know that when it mattered most, I made a difference.

11
nov
0

Time for a PCN Stocktake: 10 points to review

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

A number of PCN Clinical Directors have asked me recently, “What should I be doing now?”.  With so much going on at present, it is no surprise that it is difficult for the leaders of PCNs to remain clear as to exactly where their focus should be.  Just because of the volume of things that are happening, now is a good time for a PCN stocktake.

Investing some time now in a stocktake will help provide a clear sense of direction for the PCN, and help create a renewed sense of focus for the months ahead.

But what should the stocktake cover?  Here are my suggested 10 areas for review:

  1. Member practice engagement. The number one priority for any PCN is its members, because without unity and a sense of collectivism it is very difficult for anything else to be achieved.  It is easy when the agenda gets busy for this to fall to the bottom of the list, but engagement is an ongoing process and it is important PCN leaders do not let it slip.  Within this (of course) is how the PCN has (and plans to) support member practices with covid, flu vaccinations, and (potentially) covid vaccinations.

 

  1. PCN vision/purpose. It is never too late for a PCN to work on what it is trying to achieve and what it wants to deliver for its members and the population it serves.  Member practice engagement is much easier to maintain when everyone is agreed on the overall direction of travel.  Even if you did this a year or more ago, it is important to keep it under review to maintain alignment across the PCN.

 

  1. New Roles. PCNs submitted their recruitment plans for this year back in August, so now is a good time to review progress made against that plan.  It is also important to review how well the new roles that have started are working, and what can be done to both help them become more effective and maintain a focus on retention.

 

  1. PCN DES specification delivery. We are now over a month into the delivery of three new specifications (enhanced health in care homes, early cancer diagnosis, and structured medication reviews).  CCGs seem to vary in the closeness with which they are monitoring PCN performance against these specifications, but better for PCNs to be on the front foot, understand how they are doing, and make any change that are needed themselves.

 

  1. Social Prescribing Service. It is also a requirement of the PCN DES that each PCN provides a social prescribing service to their patients.  According to the Investment and Impact fund (see below) a PCN needs to offer appointments for up to 0.8% of its PCN population between October and March, so for a 50,000 population PCN that is 400 appointments (15-20 appointments per week, depending on whether or not you have started yet).  Is your PCN’s social prescribing service up and running and how many appointments per week is it offering?

 

  1. Investment and Impact Fund (IIF). An ‘average’ PCN can earn up to £21,534 in this year’s IIF (for my blog explaining how it works click here).  In the current absence of any national reporting on PCN performance against the IIF, it is worth at least keeping back of the envelope workings out on where you think you are, so that it doesn’t come as any huge surprise when the dashboard finally appears.

 

  1. Local projects. It is all very well making sure the PCN has done everything that is asked of it in the PCN DES, but to thrive and make a difference locally a PCN needs to undertake at least one project of its own.  Tracking the performance of your own projects is probably more important for the PCN than performance against national directed initiatives.

 

  1. Local relationships. We are still in the start up period for PCNs, and crucial for future and ongoing success are the relationships a PCN has in place with its local health and social care partners.  Are there individuals in the community trust, acute trust and mental health trust the PCN can contact to sort out issues or take new initiatives forward?  Are relationships in place with the local voluntary sector to enable the nascent PCN social prescribing service to thrive?  Is the PCN working well with the other PCNs in the area?

 

  1. Preparation for extended access. Looming large on the horizon is the transfer of responsibility from CCGs to PCNs for extended access form April next year.  We are still awaiting guidance on the details of this and what this is going to look like in practice, but a PCN would be wise to at least have started working through what it wants the service to look like, and any major changes (e.g. locations etc) it wants, so that when the guidance does finally land the PCN is in position to move quickly and not lose out on the opportunity simply because the timescales are (inevitably) tight.

 

  1. Preparation for next year’s PCN DES specifications. We have also had a pretty good preview of at least some of the outstanding specifications that are on the way, in particular anticipatory care and personalised care which were published in draft last year before they were dropped from this year’s requirements.  A PCN would do well to plan how it intends to meet the requirements of the new service specifications, so that it can make sure it has the staff and resources in place to deliver it when the time comes.
4
nov
0

The PCN Retention Challenge

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

After a slow start last year, when PCNs displayed considerable reticence about taking up the additional role reimbursement scheme (ARRS), things have taken off this year.  There is a recruitment frenzy underway, with thousands of new roles being recruited across the country.  But could all this recruitment energy be being expended in vain?

The biggest challenge PCNs face is not recruiting to the roles in the first place (although one colleague described it to me as being like the “wild west” out there, as some PCNs do whatever is necessary to secure candidates – regardless of whether they have already accepted an offer elsewhere).  The biggest challenge will be keeping the ones they do manage to recruit.

For a start, PCNs are not actually organisations.  They are collections of practices, so when an occupational therapist or care coordinator is recruited by the PCN it is not 100% clear exactly who they are working for.  It is this sense of the new staff not belonging that is difficult for PCNs to overcome.

There are already plenty of stories of new staff arriving on their first day who discover they do not have a base (“could you work from home for now…”), a clinical space to operate out of, or any sort of induction.  It is not going to be long before those particular new recruits start looking elsewhere.

Even for those PCNs that have managed to put the basics in place, there is still the challenge for any new starter of working across multiple practices.  Each practice has its own systems, processes and way of doing things.  Will every practice make the new starter feel equally welcome?  Unlikely.  More likely is that very quickly they will start to dread Wednesdays and Thursdays when they have to go to practice X and practice Y.

Introducing new roles into general practice has never been easy.  It is not clear to many GPs and many GP practices exactly what value the new roles can bring to them.  The challenge pre-PCNs of introducing new roles was not a lack of availability of the staff, but a lack of belief amongst practices that they could make a significant difference to the workload.  This has not changed just because PCNs are providing the funding.

“What does the dietitian/physician associate/health coach (etc, delete as appropriate) actually do?” and “can’t we just use the money for an extra GP instead?” are not uncommon questions in practice meetings discussing the new starters.  And it is into this environment that PCNs send the new recruits, often without any real warning of what to expect or any support in overcoming known areas of resistance.

Even when all the practices understand the role, know how it is supposed to function, and are fully briefed and prepared for it to begin, it is still challenging for any individual to feel like they belong anywhere, when everyday they are in a different practice working with different people, and always feeling like an outsider.  When hostility is palpable in half of those practices, the experience goes from feeling like an outsider to more like an unwanted intruder.

Clearly the new roles will work better when they are in, and feel part of, a team.  But what should the team be?  Should they have a ‘host’ practice, and become part of that team? Or should they be part of the team of all the new roles working across the PCN?  Or should it be by professional group – so all the pharmacists form one team, maybe across multiple PCNs?  Or should it be a PCN project team working on something across the PCN, which includes members of existing practice staff as well as the new roles?  Or something else?

I am not sure it matters what the team is, but for the (lack of) ownership issue to be overcome I am sure it is vital that the new roles are part of a team, with a leader, clear objectives, and identified support.

I know some places have done this, and where they have many already have a waiting list of applicants disillusioned with their new life elsewhere who are keen to join.  Recruitment may have been very challenging over the last few months, but it will all have been for nothing if that effort is not at least matched with an equal effort to look after these new staff.  High turnover rates in these new roles is extremely likely in the coming months, and the winners will not be those that pay the most but those that provide the best support.

28
oct
0

Do PCN finances stack up?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

I understand the primary aim of PCNs is not to be a source of income for practices, but it is important they don’t become a drain on already under pressure practice finances.  So do PCN finances stack up?

Just as a reminder, the aim of PCNs (according to the BMA) is to focus services around local communities, help rebuild and reconnect the primary healthcare team across the area, alleviate workload, be practice-led, and allow GPs and primary care practitioners to deliver a new model of care for their patients and communities.  It is interesting there is no mention of money, despite the financial challenge in general practice PCNs are supposed to be part of the solution to.

The headline investment figure into PCNs is the Additional Role Reimbursement Scheme (ARRS), which brings with it total investment of £1,412M by 2023/24, equating to an average reimbursement pot of £1.13M per PCN.  Member practices receive a £1.76 participation payment.  PCNs directly receive £1.50 core funding (which I discussed last week), 2 to 3 sessions reimbursement for a Clinical Director, and the Investment and Impact Fund – the proceeds of which PCNs have to commit to reinvesting in additional workforce or primary medical services.  There are also extended hours payments and care home “premium” payments, but these are funds for specific pieces of additional work.

The eye catching figure is of course the investment via the ARRS.  But what is increasingly emerging are a set of hidden (and not so hidden!) costs for PCNs and their practices associated with these roles.

Many areas have not been able to recruit the roles within the salary reimbursement available, and each role where this has been the case becomes a cost pressure on the PCN.  These cost pressures will accumulate as more roles are added, and as staff expect pay rises beyond the reimbursable amounts available.

It is also unlikely the on costs will meet the training, supervision and professional development costs of the roles, along with equipment and property costs – apparently NHS Property Services has recently stated that where its property is used to house PCN services this will incur additional property costs for those practices.

When PCNs were first being set up there was quite a bit of talk about the risk of incurring VAT, but that died down relatively quickly.  However, as PCN turnover starts to exceed the VAT allowance of £85,000, which it increasingly will do as the number of roles recruited to increases, then the spectre of this charge will quickly re-emerge.  There is no obvious source of funding to meet any such VAT charge, other than directly from member practices.

The other issue for PCNs to consider is whether they should be creating a financial buffer, to mitigate the potential risk of any employment costs that may arise out of the new PCN staff group.  Often companies will try and ensure they have at least three months of salaries as a financial buffer, which by 23/24 would be £250-300K for an average PCN.  That money will need to come from somewhere.

What approach, then, should PCNs take to PCN finances?  It seems to me that PCNs have one of two choices.

They could choose to think about PCN finances in terms of the net impact on member practice finances.  This would mean practices actively monitor the total positive impact on practice profitability of the PCN.  They would take the £1.76, the impact of the new roles in reducing staff costs, and any increase in income from PCN contracts, and subtract any direct costs to the practice of the PCN, such as financial contributions, property charges and staff time, and ensure that it remains net positive.

The key to making this approach work would be ensuring each practice receives a direct positive impact from the additional roles that are brought in, rather than treating them as PCN-staff that are not really anything to do with the work of the practice.

The other option would be for PCNs to operate financially like a business.  The principle here would have to be that the total income of the PCN should match the total costs.  Outside of the DES contract itself there are soft funding pots available, both through the national PCN development funds and local initiatives.  The Investment and Impact Fund was initially presented as an opportunity for PCNs to earn money by reducing secondary care expenditure, but that was lost as it was watered down into what we have now.  The big potential income generating opportunity on the horizon is the shift of extended access funding to PCNs from next year.  It remains to be seen whether this too will still exist once the final guidance has been agreed.

My worry is that many PCNs at this point in time are not taking either of these approaches.  PCN finances can stack up, but to do so will require active financial management.  The big risk is that without this in place PCNs could end up having a significant negative impact on member practice finances.

21
oct
0

The £1.50 Challenge

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Each PCN receives “core funding” of £1.50 per patient.  The Network DES states, “A PCN is entitled to a payment of Core PCN Funding for use by the PCN as it sees fit” (9.5.1).  This freedom has created a level of ambiguity around the use of this funding that is hindering rather than helping most PCNs.

If we start at the beginning, there is no way that £1.50 per patient (c£75k for the average PCN) is sufficient to cover the running costs of a PCN.  A PCN will soon be employing upwards of 20 staff, and be managing a budget well in excess of a £million.  It is not possible for the administrative overhead to be £75k and expect payments to staff and practices to be made accurately and on time, for staffing issues to be dealt with appropriately, and for the huge system expectations of PCNs to be met.

A helpful piece of context might be the running costs of CCGs.  When they were established they were allocated £25 per patient (which was still a cut on the running costs of their predecessor PCTs).  Admittedly PCNs are not statutory organisations like CCGs, but the expectations are still high, and having only 6% of the running costs given to CCGs highlights the challenge PCNs are facing.

PCNs may have been able to get by so far, as the actual demands have been limited to sorting out extended hours and some early recruitment.  But now there are new staff in post, 3 service specifications to deliver, and with the prospect of sorting out extended access on the horizon things are soon going to feel very stretched.

The challenge many PCN Clinical Directors (CDs) are facing is their member practices do not want the £1.50 to be spent, and resist proposed uses of the fund.  Because the expectations were relatively light in year one some PCNs were able to return some (or even all) of the £1.50 to member practices.  This in turn has set an expectation that practices will receive some such funding directly from the PCN each year.

So when a new PCN manager is under pressure it can often turn into questions to the CD from practices about what value are we really getting from this role anyway?  And before you know it, the PCN has decided they do not need a PCN manager after all.

Other PCNs have turned to the £1.50 to make up for the shortfall in the ARRS funding for the new roles.  So where the roles have come with additional costs (salary shortfalls, training supplements, venue/location costs etc) the £1.50 has been used to meet the deficit.

The problem of course is that this will only work for the first couple of roles.  If you are cutting £75k across more than 20 roles it is not going to solve the overall funding shortfall problem that the ARRS scheme presents.  At the same time, it is eating into an already underfunded running cost allocation.

I have written previously on how essential the PCN manager role is.  There is a rumour that PCN managers may be included in the next list of roles that can be funded from the ARRS.  But whether it is or isn’t, no individual can be an expert change manager, project manager, finance manager and HR manager.  PCNs need a team of support to be successful.

The £1.50 challenge for PCNs, and particularly for PCN CDs, is how to withstand pressure from member practices not to spend it or to spend it on topping up additional roles, and instead to use every penny to put in place the best possible support infrastructure for the PCN.  Because without it, the PCN is going to struggle as it moves forward.

14
oct
0

Is the PCN CD Model Reinforcing Historic Leadership Approaches and Cultures?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Introduction

In 1998 I completed an MBA. For my dissertation I undertook a triangulated study to identify the barriers to public participation in General Practice. I found culture, leadership and structure of General Practice to be contributory factors.  These terms were alien to NHS management language at the time. In the emergent purchaser provider split of the time, with the introduction of commissioning and competition into the NHS, there was a reliance on quantitative and empirical evidence, with little room for qualitative evidence. As a result, my dissertation sat on a shelf until I became a Practice Manager.

Finding my personal motivation and beliefs constantly conflicted in a toxic command and control environment, I found it increasingly challenging to function as a middle manager in commissioning. At the time, I thought academic leaning was my route to influence in the NHS. Heading towards a PHD I was head hunted to apply for a practice manager job. Taking it became the best decision of my career. More on that later………………

Fast forward to November 2019 when I was fortunate to attend a Kings Fund conference on “The Challenge of Culture Change in the NHS”.  Promoting a move away from the command and control culture, this event explored the type of culture (in alignment with the Interim NHS People Plan) that would make the NHS a better place to work in. The emergent words on the day included “collaborative and compassionate culture and leadership”. This brought music to my ears. Emotionally exhausted from hearing some very brave individual accounts of collaborative and compassionate leadership, I left the conference with renewed hope and personal ambition!! I had waited two decades for this.

Having dusted off my MBA dissertation and reflected on my findings, it becomes clear to me that the structure, culture and leadership style in individual practices not only prevented meaningful engagement with patients and the public, but may also be a contributing factor to the challenges we face in embedding PCNs and new models of care.

Leadership and Culture

Many GP practices aspire to a command and control leadership style and culture, aligned to a vertical organisational structure. This leadership style is authoritative in nature and decision making is top-down. Privilege and power are vested in the Senior Partner (the heroic leader) with limited opportunities for broader involvement and engagement. This leadership style facilitates a weak organisational culture, one in which core values are not defined or communicated. The absence of shared values results in individualistic compliant behaviour, with a greater need for policies, procedures and bureaucracy.  Employees are compliant with low morale. Staff are disengaged and disempowered.

 

A weak culture is associated with:

  • Incompatible vision, mission, goals, and a lack of understanding about the future direction of the organisation, which may lead to failure;
  • Lack of leadership, poor direction from senior managers, competition and poor role models, and;
  • Lack of quality of service provision, poor running of the organisation, and priorities externally perceived as being incorrect.

 

A strong positive culture is evident in practices where members within the organisation have deeply embedded shared values and beliefs. In this culture committed employees understand what is required of them and are empowered to act in accordance with the core values. Bureaucracy is reduced and there is high staff morale, engagement, and productivity. Internally, this positive culture provides the “glue” that binds the organisation together. Many practices with this culture and collaborative, compassionate leadership style are forging the way forward towards successful new models of care and scaled up General Practice.

 

The Practice Manager Continued….

Working at Oxford Terrace Medical Group taught me that command and control is not the only model available to general practice. There was no Senior Partner.  Leadership roles were distributed across the partnership.  Individual partners worked with the practice manager on management issues, taking an active role in running their business. At first there was limited involvement of patients and the broader Primary Health Care Team.

 

Equipped with my MBA and the necessary operational management skills, my first job was to co-ordinate a merger with a failing practice. It became very clear to me early in the process, that operational management skills alone, were not adequate for the culture change required to lead large scale transformational change. With three clear strategic priorities: improving access; transforming the workforce, and premises development, I embarked on a quality improvement programme. This provided structure for the merger project, through three modules:

  • Fundaments of quality improvement;
  • Human dimensions of change, and;
  • Facilitation Skills and developing a compelling narrative.

 

A focus on human dimensions of change and quality rather than finance, transformed engagement of patients and employees during, and after the merger, enabling us to achieve the first two priorities quickly. We developed new roles (Frailty Nurse, Older Peoples Specialist Nurse, Care Navigator and Occupational Therapy in GP) to meet population need, this helped us to manage the access issues. Tied up in the merry-go-round of the ETTF process, premises development eludes me to this day.

 

What I learned was that a distributed leadership model focused on engagement and collaboration could not only succeed but also make a real difference within the general practice environment.

 

Quality Assurance and Quality Improvement

CQC further perpetuates the command and control leadership style and culture through target driven “quality assurance”, stifling opportunities for collaboration and the value of quality improvement. The Well Led KLOE, focused on transactional process is a clear indication of this.

 

There is a recognition now that the Well Led KLOE is limited, and there are plans to split the transactional (quality assurance) from the transformational (quality improvement) elements. A strong organisational culture requiring less bureaucracy, is better placed to facilitate quality improvement and collaborative, compassionate leadership with strong organisational culture.

 

Putting quality at the heart of the organisation, embedded though continuous improvement, involving all levels of the organisation working together to produce better services and care, through transformational processes and action. Quality improvement relies on the use of methods and tools to continuously improve quality of care and outcomes for patients. There is no place for command and control leadership in this environment.

 

PCN Leadership and Culture

Faced with changing demographics, people living longer with long-term conditions, with increasingly complex health needs alongside a shortage of GPs and nursing staff, the unprecedented pressures in primary care are well rehearsed. To date, workforce in general practice has remained simple with GPs, Practices Nurses, Health Care Assistants, Administrative staff and recent introduction of pharmacists in some practices. As new roles emerge, a different leadership style, culture and structure will become essential to enable safe embedding and sustainability of the new roles.

 

It is disappointing then, that the traditional leadership style and culture has been lifted and shifted from General Practice into Primary Care Networks in the guise of the Clinical Director role (The heroic leader).  Lip service is paid to management and non-clinical leadership, with only one paragraph in the PCN DES relating to administration support for CDs. The ensuing effects are already being felt by individuals and across the system.

 

Contracting of PCNs perpetuates financial incentives to passive engagement. This culture, with a focus on process, individual targets and transactional approaches to organisational and team development minimises the full potential of PCNs.  It limits the opportunities of active participation of individual practices. This will result in increasing performance management and bureaucracy for practices to maximise PCN income.

 

The rhetoric is around collaboration and integration, but actions are individualistic. The structure around practices is changing, but there are no incentives in the contract to influence and facilitate the necessary culture and leadership changes for collaboration and integration. The continuation of the existing culture, leadership style and levels of engagement across PCN practices will present significant risk to the introduction of new roles working across practices. Patient and staff safety will, therefore, be compromised.

 

To grow and flourish, PCNs will require a different leadership style and culture. A collaborative and compassionate leadership style, embedded in a strong positive, supportive and facilitative organisational culture. For PCNs to succeed we need Clinical Directors functioning as inspirational leaders, supported by a collaborative infrastructure with complementary skills.

 

Conclusion

My conclusions in 1998 were that the structure, culture and leadership style of general practice were barriers to patient and public involvement. My reflection now is that these are also contributing factors to some of the challenges we face in general practice, potentially including the move away from partnerships.

In his last address to the North East RCGP faculty: GP Reimagined conference in 2018: the late Sir Donald Irving (RIP) invited us to be brave, be accountable and be responsible in order to maximise the benefits and opportunities offered by new models of care. I believe, this is exactly what we must do to transform not only the structure of general practice, but also the leadership style and culture. It will take a brave leader to challenge the engrained culture that has endured decades of change in General Practice but maybe the time is nigh!

7
oct
1

10 Challenges PCNs face introducing new roles

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

The majority of PCNs are experiencing difficulties as they recruit into these new roles.  Here are 10 challenges PCNs are grappling with:

  1. Understanding the Role

Just because a PCN has recruited a social prescribing link worker (for example), it does not mean the practices in the PCN understand what the social prescribing link worker should be doing, or that the new incumbent understands what they are to do in the new PCN environment.  There are a growing number of examples where this basic lack of clarity on both sides is leading to the early breakdown of new roles.

  1. Recruitment Capacity

Many PCNs are recruiting as many as 10 new roles all at once.  This involves creating job descriptions, developing different job adverts, shortlisting from maybe 100 applications, interviewing up to 50 applicants, negotiating 10 job offers, creating 10 contracts and putting in place 10 induction plans.  It is a huge amount of work for any PCN, and many PCN CDs are finding the scale of the required work simply overwhelming.

  1. Line management

There is a huge challenge introducing a new role into a practice, let alone a PCN.  The change process involved creates tensions within the practices in the PCN and inevitably for the new role incumbent.  These individuals require line management support, in addition to making sure their equipment, annual and sick leave is being managed.  Many PCNs initially underestimated the line management requirements of the new roles and are finding it difficult to create the additional capacity needed to support the new recruits.

  1. Location

General practice is not sitting on lots of empty space, and a huge challenge for PCNs as the new roles start is finding the clinic space for them to operate out of, as well as identifying desk space for their permanent base.  There is no obvious remuneration for this (there are only so many times you can spend £1.50), and so unsurprisingly it is creating internal disputes between PCN practices.

  1. Clinical Supervision

The new recruits come with varying levels of experience.  In particular the physician associates currently being recruited are often still to sit their final exams, let alone have any years of professional experience.  The clinical supervision requirements, particularly when these new roles first start, are significant, and PCNs are often relying on the goodwill of individual GPs from across their member practices to ensure these are met.

  1. Professional Development

Each of the new roles requires support and a plan for their continuing professional development.  There are pathways laid out for some of the roles, for example for the clinical pharmacists, which again require significant input from the PCN.  Health Education England is providing some resource to training hubs to support this, but in many areas this is not converting into the tailored, individualised support that PCNs require.

  1. Ownership

Who exactly do the new recruits into PCNs work for?  PCNs are not legal entities, and while they may comprise of the member practices, practices in general see the PCN (and so the new recruits) as separate to themselves.  New recruits often arrive but end up not really being owned by anyone, as they work for a PCN that no one really owns.  If a new recruit does not feel they belong anywhere, or that anyone really wants them, it will only be a matter of time before they start looking elsewhere.

  1. Additional Costs

The ARRS funding formula is rigid in terms of what PCNs can claim for.  Each additional role generates its own set of additional costs.  In some of the bigger urban areas this even includes salary costs, before we even get into some of the unfunded delivery costs.  Normally a business generates income to enable these costs to be met, but the nature of the PCN contract means there are very few ways PCNs can generate additional income (the potential impact of the Investment and Impact fund looks limited).  Given these costs it is hardly surprising that enthusiasm for additional roles from PCN member practices is often somewhat muted.

  1. Monitoring Impact

One of the key ways any new role establishes itself in a new environment is by demonstrating the value it is adding.  While there are some examples of some of the new roles starting to do this, e.g. first contact physiotherapists demonstrating a reduction in the number of GP appointments and secondary care referrals, for many of the roles there are no clear impact measures in place.  However they are funded, practices need to see the value the new roles are adding.  Otherwise it will be only a matter of time before discontent with the additional time and cost burden of the new roles reaches unsustainable levels.

  1. Retention

It is unsurprising given all of these challenges that even where PCNs have been able to recruit the new starters often do not stay for very long.  In part this is due to the huge number of additional roles being recruited by PCNs up and down the country and the seller’s market this is generating, but primarily it is because PCNs haven’t had the time, capacity or support to work through many of the challenges above.  The result is many new recruits are moving on quickly.

 

It is when you think about the extent of these challenges that the assessment of some GP leaders I have spoken to that we are still 12-18 months away from feeling the impact of these new roles starts to make sense.  It is going to take that long for PCNs to establish the systems, processes and ways of working that will enable these new roles to thrive and flourish.  In the meantime what PCNs need is support and assistance to help them get there as quickly as possible.

23
sep
0

The PCN Investment and Impact Fund Explained

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

NHS England published a set of guidance last week in relation to the PCN DES.  One specific piece of guidance was detail on how the new Investment and Impact Fund (IIF) is going to work.

The IIF has the feel of one of those initiatives that probably started out as a good idea, but has been watered down so much in the making of it a reality that its impact is likely to be minimal.

For a start, the sums we are talking about pale into insignificance when compared to some of the other funds on offer to PCNs.  An “average” PCN can earn a maximum of £21,534 in this year’s IIF.  Compare that with the c£350,000 (£7.131 per weighted patient (pwp)) the average PCN has received through the Additional Role Reimbursement Scheme, or even the £75,000 (£1.50 pwp) core PCN funding.  These sums require very little effort from the PCN.

PCNs have already received  c£13,500 (£0.27 per weighted patient) for the six months up to the end of September as a Covid “support payment” for the PCN.  The question, then, is whether the £21,534 available between October 1st and March 31st is going to be sufficient to entice PCNs into action, particularly in the context of everything else that is going on.

It depends to some extent on how achievable the targets are.  The scheme is designed like a QOF scheme, but at a PCN rather than practice level.  There are 194 IIF “points” available, each worth £111 each (adjusted for list size and prevalence).  These points are divided across 6 indicators.  For each indicator there are limits outside of which practices either earn zero or the maximum, with a sliding scale applied in between:

Indicator No of points Upper limit Lower Limit £ available
% patients aged 65+ who received a seasonal flu vaccination 72 77% 70% £7,992
%patients on the learning disability register aged 14+ who received an annual learning disability health check 47 80% 49% £5,217
% patients referred to social prescribing 25 0.4% 0.8% £2,775
% patients aged 65+ currently prescribed a non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drug (NSAID) without a gastro-protective medicine 32 30% 43% £3,552
% patients aged 18+ currently prescribed an oral anticoagulant (warfarin or a direct oral anticoagulant) and an antiplatelet without a gastro-protective medicine 6 25% 40% £666
% patients aged 18+ currently prescribed aspirin and another antiplatelet without a gastro-protective medicine 12 25% 42% £1,332

It will be hard for any individual practice to achieve the 75% flu vaccination target, let alone 77%.  It will be even more difficult for a whole PCN to achieve it. A non-guaranteed incentive payment of less than £8,000 is not going to change behaviour.  PCNs may well work very hard to achieve as high a vaccination coverage as possible for their local population, but it will be because they want to protect their local population, not because of the IIF.

Even if a PCN does examine the scheme and thinks the rewards could be worth the effort, there are further barriers to overcome.  To earn any IIF funding, a PCN must first “commit in writing to the commissioner that it will reinvest the total achievement payment into additional workforce and/or primary medical services” (2.15).

I find this astonishing.  The IIF funding is not recurrent (it has to be re-earnt each year) but the cost of any additional staff or service delivery is, so how is this supposed to work as an incentive? Equally, if a PCN invests in extra resources to achieve these targets it does not seem as if they can refund their own outlay with any money earned.

We will have to wait and see how these restrictions are applied in practice (e.g. whether any earned IIF funding can be applied retrospectively, whether it can be used to fund on-costs of additional staff not covered by ARRS funds etc).  Hopefully common sense will prevail.  Either way, it seems that either the policy should be to create incentives and allow PCNs the freedom to innovate to achieve them, and the freedom to use those incentives as it sees fit, or it should abandon any notion of payment for performance (which is what this scheme at its heart is) and stick with fixed payments for expected deliverables.  As it stands, this scheme neither promotes investment nor looks like it will have much impact.

16
sep
0

The Growing Influence of PCNs

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

We are just over a year from the formation of PCNs and, despite the pandemic, their importance and influence is growing.  Could this incarnation of general practice be the one that finally starts to shape the NHS around the needs of local populations?

The voice of general practice has long been sought after.  Right back from the days of GP fundholding, different regimes have tried different ways to enable general practice, the “gatekeepers” of the NHS, to have a bigger say in how the service is organised.

It would seem the main problem, however, is that this has been done throughout any extremely long NHS experiment with the purchaser provider split.  Each attempt so far (fundholding, primary care groups, primary care trusts, practice based commissioning and clinical commissioning groups) has been hampered by the inability of any of these incarnations (or indeed any form of purchasing) to make its mark on the shape of healthcare provision.

As the purchasing model is finally put out of its misery, and CCGs simultaneously reduce in number and influence, the new order is starting to take shape.  Centre stage are Primary Care Networks.

The NHS already knows that merging organisations makes no difference.  Integration is not about the merger of providers.  We used to have merged community and acute providers.   Back then the argument was that resources were being stripped from community services to fund hospital services.  What was needed was to make community services organisations independent in their own right.  We have just come back full circle.

Merging or not merging organisations is not what integration is about.  Integration is about doing things differently.  About working in different ways to change the experience and outcomes for local people.  The only chance integration, and integrated care systems, has of making this difference is at the level of the Primary Care Network.

This is really important.  Integrated care systems and integrated care partnerships are dependent on PCNs to be successful.

PCNs may only be just over one year old, but we already have groups of practices almost universally working together to provide care for their local populations.  The work to deliver enhanced care into care homes, and to deliver a social prescribing service, has already begun.  Practices are building relationships with voluntary organisations, local authorities, and care and nursing homes in ways not seen before.

We are less than one month away from PCNs finding ways to deliver structured medication reviews to those who need it most, and to support early cancer diagnosis.  With each new service we will see new relationships form, new ways of delivery develop, and new benefits for patients and local people result.

PCNs are not purely conceptual (the problem with many of the purchasing constructs).  An army of new staff who will actively deliver care are currently being recruited.  PCNs up and down the land are building teams of pharmacists, physiotherapists, physician associates and more.  About 10,000 new staff are being put in place this year to provide the energy and impetus to make this work.  Thousands more are to follow next year, and the year after, and the year after that.

PCNs worry about their voice at the “top table” of integrated care.  But the reality is the power sits with them, because they are the ones who can effect real change.  This power will only grow, as their resources grow and they deliver more.  This really could be the opportunity for general practice to finally make the difference it has been seeking to make for so long.

9
sep
1

Do PCNs need a manager?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

In the update to this year’s GP contract the increase in funding for additional roles for PCNs from 70% to 100% was heralded in this way:

“We have heard that the £1.50/head support for PCNs – worth £72,000 annually for an average PCN – has been deployed to contribute to the 30% funding of additional roles.  Instead it can now be used as needed for development and transformation support.  It equates to a full-time band 8A, and increasing the contribution of Clinical Director time by almost 50%.  We encourage Clinical Directors to use the funding to ensure sufficient support as rapidly as possible”.

A band 8A manager, for those not fully conversant with NHS pay scales, attracts a not insignificant salary of between £45,753 and £51,668.

Some PCNs have taken the plunge and employed a manager.  Others are more reticent.  The relative ease with which the PCN requirements were able to be handled in 2019/20 meant many PCNs decided to return much of the (unused) £1.50 to practices at the end of the year, and in doing so set a precedent that some PCN CDs are now uncomfortable breaking.

Part of the problem of course is that a salary of c£50K for a PCN manager is significantly higher than the salary of the average practice manager.  On the one hand, PCN CDs don’t want to be accused of stealing practice managers from local practices, and on the other it is very hard for a manager with no local knowledge to come in and work effectively across practices.  Especially when the local PMs know exactly how much the incoming PCN manager is being paid…

It is very difficult for an outsider to come in as manager and be effective straight away with a group of practices.  This requires trust, which needs time to build, and the covid restrictions make that all the more difficult right now.  It is hard to build relationships via Zoom.

Do PCNs really need a manager?  Is it worth the investment?

Many PCNs have been able to cope perfectly adequately without one until now.  Unfortunately this is no great indicator that this will be the case in future.  On October 1st three new service specifications kick in for PCNs (care homes, medication reviews and supporting early cancer diagnosis), alongside the requirement for PCNs to offer a social prescribing service.  In addition, the new Investment and Impact fund (think PCN QOF) begins.

In six months’ time four more service specifications will need to be delivered, while at the same time PCNs will take on the responsibility for delivering extended access.

Many PCNs are currently recruiting an average of 10 staff, with another 6 or 7 to be recruited by the start of next year.  These staff will generate work, headaches and challenges (new staff always do), and someone will need to pick up the pieces.

Without a PCN manager, who is going to do all of this work?  This is without mentioning the plethora of system meetings (just say no), the data sharing and patient engagement requirements, and any local initiatives the PCN has committed to.  Is the PCN CD expected to do all of this in 2 or 3 sessions a week?  Or the PCN practice managers in their spare time?  I don’t think so.

If your PCN does not yet have a manager in place, the time has come to bite the bullet and recruit.  From October not having a PCN manager will cost more than having one.  Don’t put it off any longer.  Some practices might not like it, but the sheer scale of work means that PCNs will not be able to function effectively without one from October.

2
sep
0

Why Flu Planning is So Difficult this Year

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

There cant be anyone working in general practice who has not yet been asked what their plans are for the flu season.  But I am not 100% sure those asking always understand why the question is so difficult this year.

We are still very much in the planning stage, as we await the arrival of the first vaccines.  It is difficult to know how well prepared practices are, but what is certain is preparations are much more difficult than in previous years.

In part this is because of national shifting sands on three fronts: the cohorts to be vaccinated; the PPE requirements; and getting hold of the vaccines.

The season started with a message that 50-64 year olds are to receive the flu vaccine this year.  This was then changed to a message that this will only happen later in the season, if vaccine supplies allow.  So now we have a vocal cohort of individuals contacting practices demanding a vaccine that practices won’t be paid to administer, and confusion across practices as to exactly what they are supposed to be doing.

Initially the PPE requirements were a face mask for every session, with new gloves and apron to be worn for each patient.  Once forward thinking practices, PCNs and GP federations had dutifully mass purchased the required equipment, the guidance was changed so that only sessional face masks are now required.  And who knows whether it will change again in future.

As for vaccine supplies, no one knows how that is supposed to work.  Because practices generally order vaccines a year in advance, the orders placed are for the normally expected amounts.  This would be 50-55% of a practice’s usual cohort, which means practices are well short of the 75% needed to achieve the target, even before this year’s additional cohorts are added on.

Anyone who has tried to order additional supplies will know all remaining vaccine stocks are being purchased centrally.  What we don’t know is how any central supply will work in practice, and how these vaccines will be distributed to practices.  But given the recent experience of central purchasing and distribution of PPE, it is not surprising there is little confidence amongst practices that this will work well.

However, these are not even the biggest challenges practices face in developing their flu plans.  Traditional systems of flu delivery (bringing in large numbers of patients over a weekend or two) simply will not work this year.

The social distancing requirements mean that patients need to be given more specific appointment times, and the usual method of “stacking” multiple patients at once cannot be used.  The high DNA rates that can usually be offset using this method will have a significant impact.  Practices will also need additional staff to ensure social distancing standards are adhered to and manage any queues that form.

At the same time, the social distancing and PPE requirements mean that clinicians will be able to vaccinate far less patients per session.  I have seen the overall impact of this estimated at a vaccination rate of one patient every six or even eight minutes, compared to one roughly every two minutes in previous years.

What this means is that practices can see less patients in a session, but with higher staff costs.  The net impact has been estimated as meaning that the costs of vaccination will rise by between £6 and £9 per patient.  This of course calls into question whether practices can even carry out the vaccinations this year for the fee that is being offered (which currently remains unchanged from previous years).

This is why flu planning is so difficult this year.  I am not sure the system fully yet understands the extent of the challenge this creates for general practice, but I suspect when we move from the planning to the delivery phase these challenges will become much more evident.

26
aug
0

Start Recruiting 2021/22 Additional Roles Now

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

We have all been struggling to get our heads around the Additional Role Reimbursement Scheme (ARRS) for PCNs, and in particular how to make most of the opportunity it creates.

Significant changes were made to the ARRS in the 2020/21 GP contract (in particular the increase in reimbursement from 70% to 100%, and widening the number of available roles to 10).  However, the impact of these changes were somewhat lost initially, as a result of uncertainty as to whether PCNs were going to sign up to the revised DES and, of course, the emergence of coronavirus.

But now PCNs are moving forward as quickly as they can with their recruitment plans.

The problem is, despite an apparent enthusiasm nationally for each PCN to use all of its ARRS fund to be used, the rules seem to conspire against this happening.  PCNs can only be reimbursed up to a maximum monthly reimbursable amount, which means funds can only be used once the new staff are actually in post.

In order to spend all of the money PCNs would have needed their new staff to be in post on the 1st April.  But given at that point most practices had not even signed up to the DES, not to mention the distractions posed by the small matter of a pandemic, it is not surprising that for many PCNs staff are only being recruited now.

It seems likely (and entirely reasonable, given the PCN DES specifications only start on the 1st October) that the majority of the new PCN roles will probably not be in post until October.  And if the PCN staff do not start until October this means somewhere in the region of half the available ARRS money will not be spent.

How then can PCNs ensure they make the most of the available ARRS fund for this year?

The best way is for PCNs to start their recruitment to their 2021/22 roles now.  PCNs can use the underspend against this year’s roles to pay for additional months of next year’s roles.

The “average” PCN has £344k available for additional roles this year.  This goes up by nearly 75% to £597k next year.  Even a PCN that is on track to spend as much as 70% of its funds this year could still afford to have all of its roles for next year start in the middle of November this year, and remain within budget this year and next.

This means, taking into account the need for notice periods and the delays these cause to recruitment, PCNs who want to maximise the use of their allocation would be wise to start their recruitment for next year now.

One caveat of course is that paramedics and mental health practitioners cannot be employed until April 2021.  These roles will be popular, so even for these it is worth considering starting the recruitment process at the end of October/early November so that they are recruited and ready to go on April 1st 2021.

Even for those PCNs who did manage to get ahead of the curve and are not looking at much of an in year underspend, it is still worth being ready for early recruitment to next year’s roles.  It is highly likely your neighbouring PCNs will have an underspend (because the majority will), and the rules are that any underspend in an area should be offered in the first instance to the neighbouring PCNs, rather than being lost to general practice.

PCN recruitment may have got off to a slow start this year, but I suspect this wont be the same in the years to come as savvy PCNs get started well before the next year begins!

19
aug
0

How to Create Effective Representation for your PCN

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

We are getting into the weeds a little bit this week, as we consider what action PCNs can take to ensure they are represented effectively at system meetings.

Regular readers of this blog will know that we have established two important principles when it comes to PCNs attending the wide range of system meetings that they are currently being invited to.  The first is to prioritise local PCN delivery over attendance at these meetings.  The second is that finding effective representation is difficult.

The way to think about this is not to consider first who should represent the PCN, but instead to start by considering how to create the representation the PCN needs.

One of the actions very few of us take (but is really important) is to determine what outcome we want from a meeting before we attend.  Why are we going?  If we are clear what outcome we want from a meeting we can in turn be clear with others who attend for us the outcome we are asking them to achieve.

A set of outcomes our PCN might be looking for in attending a system meeting might be:

  • To increase the resources and opportunities coming to the PCN and its member practices
  • To enable the appropriate shift of work (and resources) from secondary to primary care
  • To accelerate the alignment of community services with the PCN
  • To raise the reputation of PCNs and build confidence that they are an effective delivery vehicle

Whatever they are, they need to be ones appropriate for the meeting and for your PCN.  Of course, if your PCN has already taken the time to be clear about its purpose, then the outcomes may well be a version of the those stated in the purpose of the PCN.  Equally, if when you think about a meeting you cannot come up with any outcome you want to achieve by attending, that is probably a sign that you don’t need to go!

The reality is that all of us get invited to meetings when we are not clear what the meeting is or why we are needed.  For the time-poor PCN CD it is far better to spend time seeking clarity on exactly why attendance is required and the outcomes that attendance is seeking to achieve, as opposed to turning up and hoping that clarity will come during the meeting itself (it rarely does).

When we are clear on why we are attending a meeting, the question of representation becomes much easier to handle.  If you can be clear with your representative on the outcomes you are seeking to achieve, they can be much more confident in representing you in the meeting.  This will apply to a non-CD attending for the PCN, or for the CD of another PCN representing your PCN as well.

You can even go as far as being clear what they can or cant agree on your behalf.  For example, anything in line with the outcomes can be agreed, but anything that commits the PCN to additional work has to come back to the PCN for a discussion.  It is perfectly reasonable for a representative to gain rapid agreement after a meeting from those not present, and should not feel pressured into feeling they have to make decisions for others there and then.

We often get lost in the question of who should represent us at meetings (and whether we trust them or not).  But our time would be better spent on why attendance at each meeting is important, and as a result being clear on what the representation is we require.

12
aug
0

Who can Represent my PCN?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

I wrote recently about the importance of PCNs prioritising delivery over attendance at meetings.  The question that poses is how PCNs can ensure they are effectively represented at meetings if they are not there themselves.

First off I would just reiterate that given the limits of available PCN time, if a PCN is faced with a choice of either ensuring local delivery or attending a system meeting, I would always prioritise the former.  But how then do we ensure that the PCN influence on decision making is not completely abandoned?

This raises the thorny issue of representation.  While the idea is simple enough – one person goes to a meeting to represent a PCN or multiple PCNs – the reality is much more difficult.  How do I and my PCN know that the person who attends on our behalf is going to accurately represent us?  How can we be sure that by not attending the meeting we are not missing out on opportunities and/or resources?

Representation requires trust.  And the trust required for representation is hard to gain.  If I am to trust someone to represent my PCN I am not simply asking for the minutes of the meeting to show that my PCN turned up, or someone to spectate and then feedback afterwards.  I want, in addition to timely and appropriate feedback on the meeting and any relevant decisions made, to:

  • Know that my PCN is going to be represented accurately
  • Be confident that the representative is not going to put his or her own interests before that of my PCN
  • Believe that the reputation of my PCN will be strengthened as a result of my representative’s attendance
  • Trust that the representative will make an intervention where one is required, e.g. because the meeting is suggesting something inappropriate/absurd/potentially damaging etc.
  • Be sure that the opportunity to build relationships with other attendees will not to be lost

Given the challenge that effective representation presents, how is a PCN to find someone they can trust to represent them?

A commonly suggested solution is to use rotation, either between CDs of different PCNs, or between members of a PCN, where a group of individuals take turns to be the representative.  This stops everyone needing to go, and reduces the risk of any bias to a particular individual or PCN.  However, I don’t like this as a solution.  Meetings themselves are about relationships.  In any regular meeting the attendees get to know each other and find a way of interacting.  If my representative is always someone new they wont understand the dynamics of the meeting and as a result will almost certainly be less able to influence any outcomes.

This then leaves the daunting prospect of me needing to find a single individual to represent me and my PCN at the meeting.  Who can I turn to?  Here we are talking primarily about system meetings, with potentially Board Directors of the CCG, hospital and community trust in attendance.  So in addition to being someone that I trust, I also need someone with an understanding of the system, someone who can hold their own in that company, and someone who can influence the outcomes in at least the same way as I believe I could if attended in person.

The horns of the dilemma facing many PCN CDs then is who can represent me and my PCN at these meetings that I simply don’t have time to attend?  And the default response is generally that there is no one, and that I will just have to find time and go myself.  But then, as I discussed last week, the PCN loses out because delivery suffers as there is insufficient time to both deliver and go to these meetings.

In many ways this brings us back to where we started.  If the choice is delivery versus meetings, choose delivery, and say no to the meetings.  But the real question is not is there someone who can represent me, but how can I create the representation that I need.  That is the question that I will explore in more detail next week.

5
aug
0

Why attending less meetings will increase the influence of your PCN

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

It will come as no shock when I tell you that the NHS has a meetings culture.  The NHS loves meetings.  There is virtually no situation in the NHS where the default response will not be to organise a meeting.  When emergencies arise, ‘lesser’ meetings are cancelled so that the new, more important meeting can take place.

Integrated care is no different.  It is nearly six years since the Five Year Forward View was published, which was when the idea of integrated care became mainstream.  The idea was to close the divide between health and social care, between physical and mental health, and between primary and secondary care.

There then followed a tsunami of meetings to decide whether an MCP or a PACS (remember them?) would be the best model for integrating care locally.  Integrating care was the clear priority and so that was what filled the meeting schedule.

But 6 years later on it is not clear what impact all of those meetings have actually had.  Now of course the agendas of these meetings have moved on to integrated care systems and integrated care partnerships.  The default NHS response to any new initiative remains having meetings about it, and now PCN CDs are being asked to fill their diaries with these meetings.

The big question then is: should a hard pressed PCN Clinical Director spend any of their valuable time attending these meetings?  If a PCN CD has 2 or 3 sessions a week to carry out the role, how many of them should be spent attending system meetings about integrated care?

The problem with not attending these meetings is the nagging sense that somehow the PCN is missing out.  The concern is that the influence of the PCN will be less if they are not present at these important meetings, or that resources will be diverted elsewhere.

But the reality is that real influence comes from delivering change.  If the PCN is able to build relationships with the local community teams, to find a way of working alongside the local voluntary sector and social care, and to start to make changes happen that make a difference to the local population, not only will the time spent on PCN business become infinitely more worthwhile but also the local system will start to look to your PCN as a place to invest energy and resources.

When the wider system interacts with a PCN, they want to be able to ask the PCN to do something, and once whatever that is has been agreed, they want that to turn into real delivery.  If all PCNs do is turn up to meetings but never delivery anything (because attending the meetings has consumed all of the available time), any influence gained by being at the meeting is quickly lost.  Worse, confidence in PCNs as an enabler of integration is lost and the system starts to look elsewhere for a solution.

A PCN can diligently attend every meeting it is asked to go to and end up with very little influence because it has not had time to make any local changes, whereas a PCN can refuse to attend the majority of meetings it is asked to go to and yet be hugely influential because of what it has achieved.  In the end, delivery will always trump attendance at meetings.

Time is the most precious PCN resource.  PCN CD time and PCN meeting time are extremely limited.  One of the key leadership roles of every PCN CD is to determine how the time available can best be utilised to enable the goals of the PCN to be achieved.  If one of the goals is for the PCN to influence the local agenda, prioritise making change happen locally over attendance at meetings and trust that influence will follow.

29
jul
0

Should PCNs Choose the Greater Good?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

“There are plenty of teams in every sport that have great players and never win titles. Most of the time, those players aren’t willing to sacrifice for the greater good of the team. The funny thing is, in the end, their unwillingness to sacrifice only makes individual goals more difficult to achieve. One thing I believe to the fullest is that if you think and achieve as a team, the individual accolades will take care of themselves.”  Michael Jordan

 

There is an interesting dilemma facing many practices right now, as they work out how to make the most out of PCNs.  Is it better to maximise the gains for your own individual PCN, or is it better to work together with other PCNs to maximise the gains for general practice as whole?

This manifests itself when a collection of PCNs in an area have to make a decision, and different PCNs have different views.  The decision could be for example whether one individual can represent all of the PCNs in a system-wide meeting.  If that individual can speak as a united voice on behalf of all practices then the overall voice of local practices is stronger.

But that individual may not fully represent the views of “our” PCN.  What if we don’t fully agree with what they say, or don’t trust them to put our point across?  We end up feeling the need to represent ourselves and our own PCN.  But now there are two voices of local general practice.  And if we contradict each other, the overall voice and impact of general practice is diminished.  But at least we know that our individual view and has been represented, and our views fed accurately into the system-wide discussion.

Or maybe we need to decide whether our PCN should use the federation to deliver extended access services, or whether we deliver these directly as a PCN.  If all the PCNs agree to the same model, the overall costs and administration to general practice are likely to be cheaper.

However, an individual PCN may be able to develop its own model which delivers greater retained profits for its member practices.  It may have access to capacity or management capability which mean the cost of delivering directly for that PCN are less than going with the federation model.  In doing so, the costs of using the federation model are likely to go up for the other PCNs and practices (because the fixed costs are then shared between fewer practices).  But at least our PCN has maximised the potential of the opportunity presented.

Should, then, individual PCNs make decisions based on the direct interest of itself and its member practices, or on the greater good of the wider group of local general practices?

The fates of PCNs and practices in an area are actually intertwined, whether PCNs and practices like it or not.  How much a system invests in local general practice overall will be determined by the extent to which general practice is able to both agree amongst itself and collectively deliver.  A system is not going to choose to invest in the medium to long term into one PCN over and above the others in an area, because it will want gains to be delivered to all of its population not just parts of it.

Choosing to take decisions based on maximising the gains of short term opportunities for an induvial PCN is short sighted, particularly when this comes at the expense of neighbouring practices and PCNs.  Operating in isolation will ultimately come at a cost to overall general practice.

What Michael Jordan said applies directly to practices and PCNs within a local area, “If you think and achieve as a team, the individual accolades (gains) will take care of themselves”.

22
jul
0

Go Back to the Purpose

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

We are a year down the line with PCNs.  Recent months have been overshadowed by covid, but there were significant PCN developments in that period.  In particular, the agreement by NHS England to pay 100% rather than 70% cost of the new roles, the rowing back of the service specifications so that now only three (relatively light) specifications need to be delivered this year, and the sign up to the 2020/21 PCN DES by almost all practices.

Last year I don’t think it is unreasonable to say a number of practices, and even whole PCNs, took a ‘wait and see’ attitude towards PCNs.  It was a case of cautious sign up without making any significant commitment.  But now practices are in a whole new position – the role reimbursement scheme funding is significant, the delivery requirement is greater this year, and the extended access funding is around the corner (April next year).  The relative importance, particularly financial, of PCNs to practices is starting to feel different, and so the attitude of practices towards PCNs is beginning to change.

What we are starting to see (understandably) in some areas as a result of this is more unrest within PCNs.  The move from practices taking a relatively passive attitude to one that is more active is inevitably starting to create friction.

This is primarily because GPs and practices often want different things from the PCN.  Should the PCN appoint first contact physiotherapists or more pharmacists?  Should the PCN spend its £1.50 on management support or retain as much of that money as possible for practices?  Should the PCN use the local federation or should it manage its own finances and employment?  There are often different answers to these (and similar) questions within the members of a single PCN.  Moving forward can be difficult.

So how does a PCN move forward in this situation, where practices seem to have differing views on nearly every issue?

The key priority here for PCNs is to work on a shared purpose for the PCN across member practices.  Even if PCNs did this in the early days it may be time now to revisit this given how the landscape has started to shift.  Once there is a clear, shared purpose this can be used as the framework for decision making by the PCN.

Easier said than done.  How exactly do practices develop a shared purpose?  How can practices agree what they want the PCN to achieve?  The key part of this is taking time to sit down together and for each practice to share what they want from the PCN (what we assume is often different to the reality), and then work hard to identify where the common ground lies.

This process may take some time.  The key is to create a framework within which the practices can make decisions together, and criteria to assess any decision against.  If the practices, for example, want the PCN to reduce practice workload, increase the voice of general practice, and improve outcomes for the local frail elderly population, these can become the criteria for assessing any decisions against.  But this will only work if all the practices are agreed and sign up to the framework in the first place, which is why it takes time.

A shared, agreed purpose will not end debates and arguments within a PCN.  There are very few PCNs where the practices agree on everything.  But as the responsibility, funding and influence of PCNs grows, the importance of having a clear direction and a framework to make decisions and settle disputes is greater than ever.

15
jul
0

3 Ways to Attract New Roles to your PCN

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

There is a recruitment challenge facing PCNs this year.  There are over 1,200 PCNs, and each PCN has an average budget of £344,000 to spend on new roles.  This converts to more than 7 roles each, and if the time lag is built in (i.e. most of these roles are not yet in post, despite it being July) it could mean PCNs are recruiting to over 10 roles each.

That means there are potentially over 12,000 new roles being advertised by PCNs all at more or less the same time.  That number of viable candidates does not exist, and so the question facing PCNs is why would potential candidates choose their PCN over another?

The nature of the Additional Role Reimbursement Scheme (ARRS) means that the level of funding available to PCNs for the new roles is fixed, so what is unlikely to happen is that the result will be price competition.  PCNs are not going to offer more money to attract the best candidates.

So how can PCNs differentiate themselves?  This might not be as difficult as it at first appears.  Below are three simple steps a PCN can take to give themselves an edge over the competition.

1.Plan the Role in Advance. PCNs are not experienced employers.  The most likely scenario is that most PCNs will do the work as it arises.  That is to say they will first of all advertise the posts and make offers to the best candidate, but only then work out where the role will be based, how it will be managed, and how it will be supported.  Some may identify exactly what work the new role will undertake in advance, but others will only work this out once the new person is in post.

So if a PCN works out in advance both how the post will operate in practice, and how the role will be supported, it is likely to have a huge advantage over many other PCNs.  This means working out upfront where the role will be based, where the clinical work will take place, who will be the line manager, and who will provide professional support.  It means thinking through the mentoring, coaching, education, and personal development support that will enable the new postholder to be successful in their new role.

These things will have to be worked out anyway.  But a PCN that does this before it starts recruiting, and can provide this information as part of its campaign, will be much more attractive to potential candidates than one that plans to wait until the successful candidate takes up post.

 

2.Recruit a Team not just Individuals. Working for the first time in general practice can be daunting for candidates.  Many PCNs will recruit to each of the roles individually.  But if a PCN, or even a groups of PCNs, is recruiting (for example) a team of pharmacists or a team of physician associates, and builds team development and peer support into its offer, it is likely to have an edge.  The postholder knowing they wont be entering this new environment alone, but doing so as part of a team, makes taking on the new role less of a risky proposition.

 

3.Make recruitment personal. Finally, the recruitment campaign itself is an opportunity for PCNs to differentiate themselves.  If PCNs can offer an online platform which provides information about the PCNs and the local area, practices, opportunities and challenges, it is likely to have the edge on many other PCNs.  Even better if it can create a personal connection, e.g. a short video from a GP within the PCN talking about why the role is important, or from a named contact who seems friendly and approachable.

While the bad news is competition is likely to be fierce for the new roles, the good news is that with a little thought and effort your PCN could still be able to attract the best candidates.

8
jul
0

Lessons from AccuRx: Resist the urge to control

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

A few weeks ago I wrote about how AccuRx had changed general practice over the course of a single weekend.  What can we learn from the achievements of a relatively small company like AccuRx, in contrast to the traditional ways of working in the NHS?

The most striking feature of the way AccuRx work is that they do not try and control how the innovation they create is used.  Their belief is that if you prescribe how something is to be used, you actually prevent innovation.

The core AccuRx product is the text messaging service.  They linked the service with the individual patient and their record, but didn’t prescribe how or when the service was to be used.  When practices were working out how to see potential covid patients face to face, some put signs in the car parks for patients to wait in their cars until they received a text message when they were ready to be seen.  Not a way of using the product the company could ever have foreseen!  Innovation in the use of the product came from the GPs and the practices, not from the company.

Equally with the video consultations, practices sent the link for the call to a family member who could interpret for the patient when they didn’t speak English.  In hospitals, it was used to enable virtual visits by relatives not able to visit in person.  Innovation was generated by front line staff, enabled by the initial development.

By resisting the urge to control and dictate how the change was to be used, far more innovation has developed as a result.

In general practice local teams in many parts of the country were allowed to work out how to respond to covid.  “Hot hubs” and the like were developed and locally tailored and implemented in days and weeks.  Without central control, frontline innovation prospered.

This is in contrast, of course, to how we normally introduce change in the NHS.  The urge always is to control.  Trusting front line staff to innovate feels risky because it cannot be predicted.  So what we do is insist on business cases that detail not only the change to be introduced, but exactly how it is be used and implemented, and the predicted impact that will result from the prescribed changed.  The more we control the change, the less risk we feel, but at the same time the more we suppress any wider innovation.

Let’s take PCNs as an example.  The basic change is to enable practices to work together and with local partners to improve outcomes for local populations.  But as an NHS we can’t leave it at that, and allow practices to use the change and innovate locally.  The urge to control is too great.  So instead we have template legal network agreements, detailed service specifications (remember the December drafts?), and maturity matrices.  The NHS attempts to control how PCN will operate, what they will do, and the way in which they will develop.

Resisting the urge to control is very difficult in the NHS.  Senior staff are consistently reminded that they are “accountable”.  The pressure to minimise and control any financial risk is immense, and leaves little room for trusting local staff and teams to innovate.  But the lesson from the success of AccuRx is that less control is exactly what is required to foster greater innovation.

1
jul
0

The opportunity of the additional roles for GP practices

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

I wonder whether in the all the complexities of the additional role reimbursement scheme (ARRS), the underlying potential value of the new roles to GP practices is being lost.  Are we taking on the new roles so that we can make sure the needs of the PCN DES specification are met, or because the money is there, or because they are part of our strategy to create a sustainable future for our practice?

Just a reminder – despite all the promises of 5,000 (now 6,000) new GPs, and the increases in numbers of GPs entering training, the total number of wte GPs remains (at best) stubbornly static.  In the meantime the workload continues to rise.  While there are pockets of the country that can attract new GPs and do not have a GP recruitment problem, the majority do.  It is no surprise, then, that workload persists as the greatest challenge for the under-manned GP workforce trying to keep up with the growing demand.

If there are no new GPs available, it does seem to make sense to use different roles.  It makes sense from a straight workload perspective, providing much needed assistance to the overall workload problem.  It also makes sense from a financial perspective, as the new roles are generally cheaper than employing GPs, and a lot cheaper than paying for locums.

Life, however, is never that simple.  Resistance comes primarily from the mindset that the idea of the new roles is to allow lesser trained, lower paid clinical professionals to carry out the work of a GP.  It can feel to GP partners when presented with the option of new roles is that the ask is for under-qualified staff to undertake work that requires the skills and training of a GP.  The question appears to be one of whether the practice will sacrifice clinical quality for the sake of financial sustainability and a more manageable workload.

But those practices that have introduced new roles successfully have not used this mindset.  Instead, they have asked what parts of the practice work can be carried out more effectively by a different professional than by a GP.  For example, many practices that have introduced a first contact physiotherapist have found an increase in the quality of the relevant practice referrals to secondary care, to physiotherapy and indeed to self-care.  The same with pharmacists and medication reviews, link workers and meeting the social needs of patients, etc etc.

Ultimately, the aim of the practice is to identify how it can meet the challenge the new profile of demand presents, and consider how it can re-shape the way it meets that demand using the skills, experience and expertise of different clinical staff, so that it can make best use of the available (finite) GP time that it does have.

The opportunity of the PCN additional role funding is that these roles come fully reimbursed.  So not only can the practices in a PCN obtain the new roles they need, they can get them for free, or for whatever minimal contribution is required on top of the ARRS reimbursement.

It is a tremendous opportunity for practices.  I understand practices will have to deal with sharing the roles with other practices, and that the PCN specifications do provide demands on the time of the new clinical staff.  I understand that changing the way the practice operates to make the most of the new roles can be difficult and uncomfortable.  But this could still be a game changer for practices.  It is a chance to put the practice workforce in place that is needed to make the workload sustainable, in a way that it hasn’t been for many years.  I just hope practices work their own way through the challenges and grab this fantastic opportunity with both hands.

24
jun
0

The Future of Federations

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

What is the future of GP federations?  Do they have one, or does the emergence of PCNs mean that the days of GP federations are essentially over?

The best place to start when searching for answers to questions like these in the NHS is generally the wider policy context, and this is no exception.  The existing set of GP federations can be by and large split into two categories.  The first set of federations formed in c2007 at the height of the commissioner/provider split, when ‘world class commissioning’ was a thing, and when a primary care provider vehicle was needed for the delivery of services in primary care.

The second set of federations formed 10 years later in c2017 in response to the extended access funding that was made available to general practice and in response to the increasing pressure that general practice was finding itself under.  Funded through the delivery of the access hubs, federations were able to play a wider role in supporting individual member practices.

But the end of the commissioner/provider split was formally (if not explicitly) announced by the publication of the Long Term Plan in January 2019.  It signalled instead a shift to integration.  System Transformation Plans (STPs) were to be implemented and Integrated Care Systems (ICS) developed.

Over the last 30 years a range of GP commissioning organisations have all come and gone, from GP fundholding, through primary care groups and practice based commissioning organisations, right up to the current embodiment as CCGs.  These are in terminal decline, as the NHS moves to replace the legacy of commissioning organisations with the new integrated arrangements.

The new, non-commissioning, integrated entity for general practice are Primary Care Networks (PCNs).  First mentioned in the Long Term Plan published at the start of 2019, they are described as the enabler of “fully integrated community based health care”.

Without a commissioner/provider split, and with the establishment of PCNs as the statutory (or as close to statutory as can be achieved with a set of independent contractors) integrated community provider, it is not clear what role a separate primary care provider like a federation can play.

So far existing federations have been able to co-exist with PCNs, primarily by using the funding in their extended access contracts.  But the funding for extended access shifts to PCNs next year.  While federations will struggle to replace the lost income, PCNs will continue to grow and develop as integrated community providers, with nationally mandated funding streams alongside additional local ones.

It will be tough for federations to continue to exist in isolation from PCNs.  PCNs mean there is no need for a separate provider arm of general practice within an integrated care model, because PCNs are that provider arm.  In the world of integrated care, without the commissioner/provider split, where does an independent provider like a federation receive its funding from?

The future of federations, if there is to be one, can only lie as an enabler of PCNs.  The real barrier to progress for many PCNs is their size, and by working together through a federation they can move faster and more effectively than they can on their own.  Federations could take on delivery of extended access, and indeed of a range of PCN delivery requirements, but only if the PCNs want them to do so.

Federations are currently viable as a result of the provider contracts that they hold.  As integrated care develops, these contracts will shift into the realms of PCNs and the joint working between the statutory providers.  Crunch time is coming soon with the shift of the extended access contracts, and it is hard to see federations surviving it if they are not built on joint working between PCNs.

17
jun
0

accuRx – How General Practice was changed in one weekend

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

On Monday 9th March Jacob Haddad, co-founder of accuRx, tweeted, “Friday PM, we decided to build two new products for COVID-19: video consultations and pre-appointment screening. Last night we shipped. This AM we tested. 3pm today, we enabled for 3600 practices – over half the country.”

Friday PM, we decided to build two new products for COVID-19: video consultations and pre-appointment screening. Last night we shipped. This AM we tested. 3pm today, we enabled for 3600 practices – over half the country. Privileged to work with such a talented and motivated team!

— Jacob Haddad (@jacobnhaddad) March 9, 2020

By the end of April 35,000 video consultations were being carried out by general practice each day, across 90% of practices.  It is unlikely general practice will ever be the same again.

Who are accuRx?  Jacob Haddad and his co-founder Laurence Bargery launched the company in 2016 to develop datasets and tools to help tackle the problem of inappropriate use of antibiotics.  They quickly shifted to the development of a broader communication platform connecting clinical teams with patients.

They started with a text messaging service.  It gained traction quickly, in part because it was offered for free, and in part because GPs found it so easy to use.  It worked effectively with the GP clinical systems and made it easy to text patients where letters and phone calls were proving time consuming and ineffective.

But the game changer was this over-the-weekend introduction of video consultations.  In the past video consultations had been difficult to implement, because it was hard to synchronise timings between doctors and patients, and technical and installation issues often got in the way.  But the accuRx system is simple to use for both doctor and patients.  It makes it easy to switch from telephone to video, and doesn’t require any installation.

It is fair to say that GPs by and large love it.  It is extremely rare for a new technology to get universal uptake so quickly.  Of course the shift was shaped by necessity and the context of the pandemic, but even so it has been an unprecedented change, and one that is likely to shape how general practice operates for years to come.  And it is free: accuRx does not charge practices to use the service.  Apparently some agreement has been reached between the company and NHS England, the details of which are unclear, but it remains free at the point of use for practices and their patients.

accuRx is venture backed.  It raised £8.8M of funding in its last round in 2019, and is in what is termed the “pre-revenue” stage.  How that will play out for the NHS and general practice when it needs to generate revenue remains to be seen.  But the strategy of gaining traction for the product first has had a huge, transformational impact.

It is in direct contrast to GP at Hand, in many ways the initial trailblazer for video consultations.  GP at Hand set up in competition with general practice, using video and e-consultations as their competitive advantage.  They (unsurprisingly) encountered huge resistance, and now their advantage has gone.  While accuRx has thrived during covid, and undoubtedly has the support of the profession, apparently GP at Hand has furloughed 5% of its staff.

When you reflect on the millions and millions of pounds invested in technology within the NHS (NPFIT anyone?) and the tortuous pace of development, it is unthinkable that changes developed by a small team over the period of one weekend could have such a profound and permanent impact on general practice.  But that is undoubtedly what has happened, and general practice will never be the same again.

10
jun
0

Time for Reflection

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

I am tired.  It has been difficult over the last few months not only having to keep up with the pace of change, but also having to constantly adapt and get used to new ways of working.  It is not only our professional lives, but our personal lives as well.  Everything we do has been completely changed.  It has been exhausting.

I know I am not alone.  Everyone working in general practice has had their world turned upside down.  All we want is some respite.

The talk nationally is of recovery and restoration.  Sounds like exactly what we need.  But of course it is not about us.  It is about restoring the services that are not being offered, and creating that dreadful term “a new normal”.

It is into this context that we hear about how this is a new future for general practice, how we must build on the changes and go further, faster.

But we are tired.

It may be the start of a new future for general practice.  Or it may be that many GPs are just waiting for the opportunity to close the much-touted new digital front door.  The draw of the comfort of ways of working that we know and trust may well take many back to how things were, not forwards to the newly glimpsed but (for some) highly uncomfortable ways of working we are now experiencing.

Recovery and restoration in general practice needs to start with practices and practice staff.  It needs to be about creating time for teams to reflect on the changes they have made over the last few months, to share the things that been difficult and to ask for help where it is needed.  We need the opportunity to talk to others about what they have done, how they have coped with the changes, and what the impact has been for them.  We want to learn from what they did differently and understand what this teaches us about our own experiences as well as theirs.  We need the comfort of knowing we are not the only ones who have found this difficult, and the reassurance that what we are doing now is ok.

We need time to consider whether any of the changes have been positive, and if they have which ones we want to keep.  We need the opportunity to think this through for ourselves, rather than be told it by other people.  We need to do this at our own pace.

At this point in our covid journey, I don’t think there is anything more important than creating time and space for reflection and review.  We have to recognise that we and those around us are tired, that change is difficult and this feels like it has been going on for a long time.  We need to create the opportunity for ourselves and our teams to be able to move forward.  It may feel counter intuitive, but the way to do this is by creating the time and space for our teams to look backwards, so that we can decide for ourselves where we go from here.

3
jun
0

Are PCNs Making General Practice More or Less Resilient?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Resilience is a popular term at present, as we all cope with the challenges of covid in our own way.  While our individual levels of resilience may vary, it is not just our personality that will determine our overall level of resilience.

For GPs and those working in GP practices, the robustness of the GP practice itself will be a huge contributor to our personal resilience.  If our practice is well run, has strong leadership in place, and has good relationships across the practice, we can use the practice a resource to help us with the challenges we face.  When we are confident in the strength of the practice as a unit, we can draw on that to help us when things like covid come along.

Conversely, if the practice has divided leadership, poor systems and processes in place, and weak relationships between the staff, then the practice is likely to be a source of worry and concern for us.  The practice itself becomes yet another contributing factor to the stress and anxiety we feel, and so is likely to make us less resilient.

And so the strength of the practice unit is critical to the overall resilience of general practice.  So what impact do PCNs have on the resilience of GP practices.  Do they help, or do they make it worse?

For some practices, the PCN is a real source of concern.  We have seen this articulated in some of the resistance to the PCN DES.  PCNs are designed so that the performance of the individual practice becomes linked to the performance of the other practices in the PCN.  The inability of your practice to control the performance of the other practices in the network, alongside a lack of confidence in their ability to deliver, means the PCN will serve primarily to reduce our confidence in our own practice’s ability to deliver.  Putting performance outside of our individual control is a source of stress and detracts from our overall resilience.

The desire to maintain the independent contractor model in the context of PCNs is about enabling a practice to keep control of everything within its contract, and not allow concerns about other practices to make the job of running your own practice even more difficult.

For others, however, particularly as a result of the recent challenges of tackling covid, the PCN has become a source of real strength.  While I as an individual practice may not have been able to cope with covid on my own, by working with the other practices in my PCN I found support, joint working, and a collective strength that enabled the challenges we faced to be overcome.

By working with other practices I trust I can become more confident in the delivery of targets because I can access the support and help I need when things are difficult or I don’t know what to do.  The PCN becomes a vehicle for sharing of ideas, information and resources that means I feel more confident about my practice, and so more resilient overall.

So are PCNs making general practice more or less resilient?  It varies.  Some practices feel that the PCN makes their practice less resilient, while others are starting to feel that their resilience is very much improved by being part of the PCN.  The most interesting thing about this is that practices control the PCN.  PCNs can support the resilience of general practice, but ultimately it is up to the practices in the PCN to decide to work on building the trust and relationships required to enable this, or whether to resist the PCN, treat it as a threat, and suffer the impact on overall resilience that will result.

27
may
0

The Opportunity of the Additional Role Reimbursement Scheme

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

By far the largest amount of funding in the PCN DES is for the Additional Role Reimbursement Scheme (ARRS).  But is general practice making the most of the opportunity that such an investment represents?

To put the funding into context, a PCN with a weighted list size of 50,000 will receive £356,600 under the ARRS.  This size of PCN will have funding for more than 7 roles this year.  This will rise to £618,600 next year, £850,900 the year after, and reach £1.17M in 2023/24 (network contract DES guidance p20). The £7.13 per weighted patient PCNs receive for the ARRS for this year compares to a combined total of £5.61 for all of the other funding in this year’s specification put together (excluding the care home premium, which is not going to significantly alter the figures).

The funding is not, however, given as a lump sum.  It is paid a month in arrears based on the actual expenditure made by the PCN.  A PCN must, “complete and return to the commissioner a workforce plan, using the agreed national workforce planning template, providing details of its recruitment plans for 2020/21 by 31 August 2020 and indicative intentions through to 2023/24 by 31 October 2020” (6.5.1 Network contract DES Specification, p36).

We are currently at the end of May.  Assuming a PCN has not yet employed any additional staff (although I know some have, many have not), our 50K weighted population PCN now has funding for 9.3 additional roles.  If the PCN waits until the end of August (the deadline for submitting its plan), it will have funding for 11.6 additional roles.  The longer we go into the year, the harder it is going to be to spend the money.  Once we are over a third of the way in next year’s funding is unlikely to cover the incurred recurrent expenditure even if we do manage to spend it all.

Any money allocated to a PCN that can’t be spent will be offered to “other PCNs within the commissioner’s boundary”.  So a smart PCN will not only be well into planning how to use its ARRS funds, it will also be looking at its neighbouring PCNs and working out whether they going to be able to use all their funding and preparing accordingly.

This year, impacted already by covid as it has been, does present general practice with something of an opportunity when it comes to ARRS.  In effect there is 12 months funding available for 6 months of work, because the requirements of the specifications only start on October 1st.  The argument has been that the roles should be supporting core general practice, not simply carrying out additional work mandated by the PCN DES.  Well it may or may not be by design, but that opportunity is certainly there now for this year for PCNs.

The question, then, is how should PCNs respond?  With such a wide array of roles (10 in total) available, what roles should PCNs be prioritising?

Let’s take the work to meet the requirements of the specifications as a given, and focus on what to do with the roles beyond that.  The specifications are not going to require all of the ARRS funding, and certainly will not this year.  Once the specification requirements are met, it seems there are two ways to think about how to use the new roles.

The first is to focus on the roles that will free up the most GP time.  The biggest challenge in general practice for a long time now has been GP workload, and so it would be logical to use this funding on the roles that most directly reduce GP workload.  This would lead to a focus on first contact physiotherapists, physician associates, pharmacists and (next year) paramedics, as roles that can directly have this impact.

The second is to focus on the roles that can change the shape of demand into GP practices.  Instead of reacting to the incessant rise in demand on practices, this may be an opportunity to do something about it.  A team made up of some combination of social prescribers, health and wellbeing coaches, occupational therapists, dietitians, podiatrists and care coordinators may be able to start with the currently shielded and housebound patients, and prepare a PCN for the anticipatory care and personalised care specifications that are on their way in future years.  By proactively meeting the needs of those patients who are the biggest drivers of demand on PCN practices, the constantly rising demand may be slowed.

These two approaches are not mutually exclusive.  It may be that some combination to the two is what is needed locally.  And of course there may be others.  What is important for PCNs is to be clear on what they are trying to achieve with the new roles, before they start deciding which specific roles they want to employ.

It is rare that general practice finds itself with an opportunity like this, backed up with such significant resources.  I very much hope we make the most of it.

20
may
0

The impact of virtual working

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The working day has transformed for many people (including me!) in recent weeks, and one of the key changes has been the shift to Zoom (or Teams, or Hangouts, or Skype) video calls for meetings.  Zoom has been a vital part of managing during the pandemic, enabling rapid communication and decision making without the need for in-person meetings or travel.

But how is the shift to Zoom affecting relationships?  While some are reporting that the increased communication means relationships have never been better, others are finding that relationships are beginning to suffer.

There are a number of reasons for this.  Firstly, it turn out that Zoom fatigue is “a thing”.  This HBR article explains that the focus required in video calls, the ability to get distracted by other things, plus the need to be paying attention the whole time, all contribute to this growing phenomenon of Zoom fatigue.  This BBC article (I told you it was a thing) also suggests the need for greater focus means people cannot relax into conversations.

I am not sure it is just about getting used to the technology.  I think the ease with which we can hold the meetings actually leads to more meetings than we had before.  This is quite some feat, given the NHS’s penchant for back to back meetings.

At the same time, there can be something impersonal about Zoom meetings.  This humorous video (which I am sure you have already seen) reduces attendees into certain types.  It does seem to me that it is a difficult platform on which to actively build personal relationships.  Alongside the rapid growth in group video meetings we seem to be having less one on one meetings.  It is so easy to add people into a call that meetings are rarely with less than 4 people, and regularly with many more.  The cost of this is potentially individual, personal relationships.

What should we do?  This National Geographic article suggests when people start to experience Zoom fatigue then they should join meetings with the camera off.  This is because it is far less exhausting to not feel like you are in the spotlight every time you have a meeting.  But then the people with the cameras on assume you are not paying attention and more than likely doing something else.  Once again, it is relationships that can suffer.

And where there are disagreements individuals can often prepared to be much more forceful in their views when they are on a video call (but with the camera turned off) than they would have been face to face.

The basis of collaborative working is relationships and trust.  Communication is a key part of building trust.  But if the communication does not feel personal, is tiring, and even negative or aggressive, then relationships will suffer not improve.   Simply holding more Zoom meetings is not going to improve relationships per se.

I find myself in the camp that would say if you are going to be in a Zoom call then you need to commit to it and have the camera on.  More helpful, then, than the advice to join meetings with the camera off is the advice in this article which suggests 5 alternatives to zoom meetings we might want to try.  These include the “old-fashioned” phone call, holding shorter video conferences, and scheduling days without them.

Ultimately, what I think we need to do is prioritise relationships.  If we are finding that Zoom calls are enhancing relationships, building trust, and enabling collaborative working then great, carry on.  But where we find relationships are starting to suffer we need to take time to reflect on why, and identify what changes we need to make to rebuild those relationships.

Zoom has had a transformative effect on my life in recent weeks.  I am certainly not advocating abandoning something that has had such an impact.  I am, however, suggesting we review its effect on us and our work beyond simple convenience, to ensure it enhances what we do rather than detracts from it.

13
may
0

Holding the Gains

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

There is a lot of talk at present about improvements that have been made as a result of the crisis.  These changes include the move to remote working, connected teams, practices working together to create “hubs” for patients to be seen in, data sharing between practices and organisation, and systems working together to make decisions based on needs.  I am sure there are many others.

As a result, exercises are emerging (often management led) in identifying the changes we want to keep, and even considering how we can take these changes even further.

There is a presumption, it seems, that the changes made in response to the crisis, are somehow “locked in” for the post-covid future.  But the reality is of course that change is never that simple.  It would be unwise to underestimate the impact the level of recent change has had on individuals, and the discomfort it has caused.  A change made in response to a national crisis is very different from a change made in perpetuity.  Throw in a bit of conspiracy theory that there is some masterplan to move away from the core general practice model, and it is not hard to understand why holding the gains made so far will be a challenge, let alone building on them.

What do we know about sustaining improvements?  Nicola Bateman produced a guide on the sustainability of improvements made back in 2001.  The research was based on the sustainability of changes implemented rapidly in an improvement workshop, but there is a useful parallel here to changes made rapidly in general practice in a covid environment.

What she found was that there are 5 ways changes can go:

She divided the post programme period into two phases.  The first 3 months is primarily concerned with maintaining the new way of working and resolving the technical issues identified during the initial improvement period, and whether these are tackled and resolved.

The Class A and B classifications closed out the actions on the problem follow-up list and maintained the new way of working.  Class C maintained the new way of working but failed to close out tasks, and Class D activities closed out the tasks but did not maintain the new way of working.  Class E activities failed to do either.

There are lots of interesting lessons in this for us.  Beyond understanding that the only way is not up, it highlights that problems identified along the way to making these rapid improvements still need to be tackled and dealt with.  According to Bateman, they also need contribution and buy-in from the relevant teams, “making sure that the people who work in the area can contribute to the way in which their area is operated”.

A change implemented out of necessity, steamrollering any resistance along the way, will need engagement of teams to adapt that change to give it a chance of becoming permanent.

Bateman also advises, “ensuring that the team members and their managers remain focussed on the improvement activity”.  The idea that remote working (for example) is somehow “done” because it has been going for a few weeks misses the need to be continually addressing issues that arise and adapting it to meet the needs of the practice and its staff.  We are not yet at a point where any of the changes we have put in place so far could be considered permanent.

The second phase Bateman divided the post programme period into was from 3 months to 9 months after the initial changes were made.  This period is concerned with whether there is any ongoing improvement beyond the initial change period.  Class A is what happens when ongoing improvement is in place, as opposed to Class B where there is not.

Being able to make further improvements after these initial gains requires three things: consistency and buy-in; having a strategic direction; and (senior) support and focus.  So making the most of the opportunity that seemingly now exists will be no mean feat.  It will require a practice to adapt its medium term strategic direction, with full buy-in of the GPs and practice staff, and to develop a clear plan for moving forward.

There are five ways we can go from here.   If we are really serious about holding and even building on the gains made in recent weeks then we need to understand there is a lot of work to be done in keeping things as they currently are, let alone taking them beyond the current level.

6
may
0

The Care Home Debacle

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Nothing has gone well when it comes to care homes in this pandemic.  Care home staff trying to look after an extremely vulnerable group of patients have been left on their own, without access to the support, resources or equipment they need.  Figures from the Office for National Statistics show that between 10 and 24 April, there were 4,343 recorded deaths from Covid-19 in residential care homes.  The number of deaths in care homes is rising at a higher rate than hospitals.  Frustration with the lack of support has grown, not just among staff and relatives but more widely across the country.

It is probably in response to this frustration that Simon Stevens announced in his letter to the NHS on Wednesday 29 April, “To further support care homes, the NHS will bring forward a package of support to care homes drawing on key components of the Enhanced Care in Care Homes service and delivered as a collaboration between community and general practice teams. This should include a weekly virtual ‘care home round’ of residents needing clinical support.”

Now anyone paying attention to the events surrounding the 2020/21 PCN DES will have been able to predict the reaction from general practice.  One of the most contentious issues surrounding this year’s PCN DES was the specification that related to enhanced care in care homes with the workload implications it contained for GPs.  Eventually a care home ‘premium’ of £120 per bed was agreed, with a trimmed down version of the specification to be implemented from October 1st, that allowed for “appropriate and consistent medical input from a GP or geriatrician, with the frequency and form of this input determined on the basis of clinical judgement” (as opposed to mandatory GP participation in weekly ward rounds at each home).

But this was a fragile compromise at best, and so it was no surprise that the new announcement attracted a vehement response from the GPC.  Chair Dr Richard Vautrey said the next day, “We were incredibly disappointed to see in the letter from NHS England yesterday that it intends to bring forward the introduction of key elements of the care home specification without engaging with the profession, and in the full knowledge of the serious concerns many in the profession have previously expressed about this earlier this year.  We have told NHS England and Improvement that this approach is unacceptable. The profession will be rightly dismayed that this element of the contract scheduled for October, which depended on an expanded workforce and additional resources, could be imposed without either being provided.”

Cue some backtracking from NHS England.  It turns out that anyone thinking that Simon Stevens letter was about bringing forward the DES specification was wildly mistaken.  In fact, as a letter from NHS England on the 1st May clarified, it is rather a service that needs to be established “as part of the COVID-19 response”.  Of course it not the PCN DES specification, because, “We are looking for all practices to take part, not just Primary Care Networks (PCNs). However, it will be less burdensome for general practice, easier for community partners and better for care homes for this to be delivered at a PCN level as the default.”  What were we thinking?

But however we got here, we are where we are.  If we have learnt anything from coronavirus it is surely that care homes need to be tied much more closely into the health and social care system, and there is a  clear and pressing need right now to provide better support to care homes.  Such a need in fact that NHS England has outlined a two week deadline(!) for the new service to be put in place.

I know there are some places around the country that have tackled this in the past and have arrangements in place that effectively mean all the new requirements are already met.  There are, however, others where there are vast numbers of residential homes and no such arrangements in place.  The challenge in these areas cannot be underestimated.

Let’s hope the wider system puts the support and resources into general practice and PCNs that will be needed for an effective response to be mobilised.  And let’s hope that care homes start to get the support that has been so sadly lacking so far through this crisis.

30
apr
0

Where are we up to with PCNs?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

It has been very hard to think of anything other than covid for the last 6 or so weeks, but it feels like we are now just reaching the point where we can start to consider where other issues are up to.  In particular, PCNs were a controversial topic in the first three months of the year, and the deadline for signing up to the 20/21 DES is fast approaching.  So where did things with PCNs get to?  Time for a recap.

The 20/21 PCN DES got off to a bad start when the draft specifications were published just before Christmas.  What followed was widespread uproar over the level of specificity they contained, the financial implications for practices, and the lack of any additional funding to go with the new workload requirements.

These were only drafts for consultation, and following a torrent of negative feedback the GPC and NHS England commenced negotiations on the new contract.  The result was a reduction in both the volume and specificity of the service specifications (leaving only three: structured medication reviews and medicines optimisation; enhanced health in care homes; and supporting early cancer diagnosis), a commitment to fully fund the new roles (as opposed to providing 70% funding), and additional funding for the care home specification.

What followed this agreement between the GPC and NHS England was a general calming down, and a sense that what was on offer was much more reasonable.  However, underlying concerns about what PCNs mean for the independent contractor model persisted.  These culminated in a vote at the special conference of England LMCs on the 11th March, which decided to reject the agreed DES specification.

Before anyone really had a chance to react to this, covid happened.  Indeed it was only 8 days later that NHS England published a letter detailing further changes to the PCN DES.  These changes were designed to do two things: push the work back until after covid (the start date for the new specifications were essentially all moved to 1st October); and use the PCN DES to release money into general practice to support with the crisis.  The new Investment and impact fund was replaced for its first 6 months with a PCN support payment of 27p per weighted population (not contingent on performance), and the funding for all the new roles (PCNs now have an additional role reimbursement scheme (ARRS) allowance from which they can fund any of 10 new roles) was made available despite the specifications not starting until October.  Indeed all the PCN DES funding has been made available to practices who sign up from April.

These changes were confirmed in the covering letter for the final PCN DES specification which was published on 31 March.  NHS England has been clear that they made sure this came out not because of a stubborn commitment to PCNs, but to ensure that money continued to flow to PCNs in the midst of the pandemic.

So the PCN DES specification is out.  Practices have until 31 May to decide if they want to participate.  Sign up is easy, especially if the PCN is not changing its membership.  Practices simply confirm their ongoing participation to the commissioner.  Once signed up practices remain signed up for the year, and cannot withdraw during the course of the year.

There have been some concerns that by signing up for this year practices are committed for a longer period.  That is not the case.  The system does change to one of opt-out rather than opt-in from April 2021, but the process of opt-out is straightforward.  The practice must simply, “notify the commissioner within one calendar month of the publication by NHS England and NHS Improvement of the specification for the subsequent Network Contract DES” (Network Contract DES Specification 4.13.1).

The GPC are encouraging sign up, as are many LMCs (e.g. Surrey and Sussex).  The rationale is it represents a vehicle to channel funding into general practice in the national effort to deal with the pandemic, and it continues to enable a structure for much needed collaboration between practices to enhance support and resilience for practices at local level.  Other LMCs (e.g. Berkshire, Buckinghamshire and Oxfordshire) remain fundamentally opposed and so are taking a more neutral stance and neither recommending practices sign up or don’t sign up.

So this is where we are.  My 10 cents for what it is worth is that with all the uncertainty that covid brings for the next 12 months this isn’t the time to be walking away.  The PCN DES brings significant funding and resources into general practice over the whole year, while the additional work is only for 6 months (and that is assuming we don’t have any future covid disruption).  Even if you are not sure about PCNs it is not difficult to opt out next year, so you are not making a lifelong commitment.  Covid has changed everything, and the PCN DES is no exception.

22
apr
0

Covid Changes: Opportunity or Threat?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Rapid changes are taking place across general practice as a result of the covid crisis.  Do these pose a long term threat to the profession, or are they an opportunity?

It is hard to over-exaggerate the level of change taking place in general practice right now.  The shift to telephone consultations, video consultations and remote working, borne out of necessity, is happening at a pace and a scale never previously seen.  Shared models of service delivery across practices within networks and boroughs are being developed and operationalised in a matter of days.  Models include covid face to face sites (“hot” clinics), covid and non-covid visiting services, and even non-covid face to face services, including essential services such as childhood immunisations and routine injections.

Such changes have raised concerns in some quarters of the profession.  Will general practice ever be the same again?  Once this is all over, will things be able to return to the way they were, or are we saying goodbye to general practice as we knew it forever?  The worry is that the scale and pace of the changes being introduced right now will have an impact on the profession way beyond being able to cope with the crisis that is front and centre right now.

It is, however, worth bearing in mind that all was not well in general practice before the current crisis.  The GP Forward View, and then the five year contract introduced last year, were put in place to help a profession that was facing significant workload, workforce and financial challenges.  Some areas had been making changes in an attempt to meet these challenges.  These changes largely focussed on new ways of working, working at scale, introducing new roles, and building stronger partnerships with the wider system.

What the current crisis is providing is a unique opportunity to test out these changes.  The rationale for making these changes is stronger than ever.  Rather than the changes relying on a critical mass of practices having reached the point of enough being enough, when in reality some practices were getting there while others were managing to find a way through, now the need for change is clear.  The safety of staff, and limiting exposure to the virus, requires virtual appointments and centralised models of face to face delivery.  This, alongside the limited supplies of PPE, means these models have had to be put in place very quickly indeed, when previously such changes would have taken months or even years to put in place.

At the same time, the system is providing resources to general practice to make these shifts in ways that it never has done before.  On the podcast Dr Ravi Tomar describes the advantage practices have in making the shift to remote working now compared to when his practice made it 18 months ago.  Laptops, dongles, tokens are all being made readily available to practices.  In many areas centralised models of service delivery for covid patients are being directly funded by the local CCG.

The need for rapid change right now, and the support and resources available to make this happen, represent much more of an opportunity than a threat to general practice.  Once all this is over general practice can choose the parts of the changes they want to keep and the parts they do not.  But right now there is a unique opportunity for general practice, a profession that has been in urgent need of resuscitation, to test out new ways of working.  These changes may not only help it get through the current crisis, but also enable it to thrive into the future.

1
apr
0

What level of risk are we prepared to take on PPE?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

A big part of this week has been about PPE (personal protective equipment).  GPs need it.  They need it to see covid/suspected covid patients, and, increasingly, they need it to see everyone because right now who isn’t suspected covid?

The problem is that the supplies have not been there.  Initial supplies were sent to GP practices in early March.  But these supplies are widely regarded to be inadequate for what is required, and are rapidly running out (if they have not already done so).  Last week GPs were informed that a hotline had been established (0800 9159964 in case you don’t have the number), and for GP practices ringing the hotline that kit would be arranged within 72 hours.  So far (as of the weekend) reports are that problems remain.

As a result, GP federations and organisations have been working to see if they can secure supplies on behalf of their member practices.  Supplies do exist, but they are primarily in China.  But as we have been discovering this week, there are a number of problems dealing directly with suppliers in China.

First, the products need validating.  Just because the supplier says the masks are FFP3 masks does not mean they are.  Someone needs to go and check the products.  But finding someone you can rely on to carry out the validation is difficult.

Second, the PPE products need to be transported from China to the UK.  The cost of air freight is eye-watering.  On top of that the exporters need to have all the correct licenses to be able to ship products to the UK.   There are reports that hand sanitisers and overalls are being stopped at the UK border, and being returned to China as the importers did not have an alcohol or medical supplies licence.  This urgently needs to be addressed, but it falls within the remit of government and is out of the control of GP federations.

Third, the products are expensive.  They are not just expensive – prices are escalating on a daily basis, as the worldwide demand for the products soars.  Not only are they expensive, the Chinese suppliers demand payment upfront.  They hold products that everyone wants, so they can set their own terms.  Their terms are that they will only sell to those who are pay upfront.  Some will only sell to those who provide cash upfront.

However, the NHS does not work that way.  The NHS will not make payment up front ahead of supply.  It, understandably, does this on the basis that any supplier not prepared to extend credit to a state backed entity is a much higher risk of fraud.

So here comes the dilemma. How much financial risk is it reasonable to take to secure PPE supplies for GP surgeries?  Because ultimately we are weighing that risk against the health and lives of our GPs and their staff.  Should the NHS be prepared to say that in these exceptional circumstances we will take risks that normally we would not take, because these are not normal times?  Should government be encouraging and enabling NHS organisations to take these risks?  Or is the financial risk not worth it?

Whatever the view of the wider NHS, a number of GP federations think it is a risk worth taking.  If at the end of the day the PPE isn’t what they said it was, or it doesn’t arrive, they view it as a risk worth taking, because ultimately what we are actually risking is the health and lives of those we are asking to deliver care.

25
mar
0

Make or Break for At-Scale General Practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

I spend most of my time at present working with a GP Federation in North East London.  What has become clear in recent days is that the crisis we are in is a key moment for the federation.  The role of the federation is, and always has been, explicitly to support member practices and delivery of care to their practice populations.  If the federation cannot support practices right now at the time when they need it most, I don’t think it ever will be able to.

This situation is not unique to the federation I am working with.  I think the challenge equally applies to other federations, to super-partnerships, and even to Primary Care Networks.  If there was ever a time when working together could add value, then it is now.

Individual practices are working extremely hard.  They are trying to get to get to grips with whole new ways of working – some practices have had to move to full telephone triage in a week, when many practices have taken years to make such a shift.  Every day there is a new challenge, with different staff off sick or isolating.  The priority is simply to make it through to the end of each day.

What is the role of at scale general practice?  Things are changing at such a pace that what is needed today might be completely different to what is needed in only a couple of weeks’ time.  But for right now, the role appears to be threefold.  First, identifying what immediate support can be provided to practices.  That could be help with ordering equipment, setting up IT equipment or establishing remote working, help obtaining locums, and directly helping when a practice goes into crisis (as some practices inevitably will).

Second, preparing for what is coming next.  We know the scale of the challenge will increase week on week, certainly for some time to come.  What worked last week may not work next week.  Local at scale general practice has to think about what is coming next, and what needs to be put in place to enable practices to cope.  This might be ensuring robust escalation processes are in place between and across practices, the introduction of “hot” sites, establishing an at-scale visiting service, plus things we have not even thought of yet.  Practices are (rightly) focussing on today, so at-scale general practice has to make sure it is doing the thinking about tomorrow.

Third, ensuring there is two-way communication with practices.  Practices need to have the up to date information on what is happening locally, and at the same time need somewhere to raise questions and concerns.  At-scale practice needs to provide that visible local leadership for practices which is so critical at a time when individual practices could easily feel isolated and alone.

But the challenge this presents for the at-scale organisations themselves should not be underestimated.  They often operate with a very limited number of staff, and clinical leaders in more or less full time roles in practices themselves.  They will also have their own internal challenges with sickness and isolation.  Meeting this challenge will not be easy.

In the coming weeks on the podcast I am going to be talking to Tara Humphrey who is working with a PCN, and we will both share our experiences of working with a PCN and a federation to see whether at scale general practice is able to rise to the huge challenge ahead.

18
mar
0

How COVID-19 is re-shaping general practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

We have had quite a week in general practice.  The LMC conference voted to “reject the PCN DES as it is currently written” and yet, frankly, it feels like an irrelevance given the unfolding situation with regards COVID-19.

The irony of course is that, just when the profession has chosen to reject PCNs, the need to work in groups of practices has become more important than ever before.  The reality is that many practices will have to close for periods of time over the coming weeks, and so right now need to be working and planning with their neighbouring practices to be prepared for when the time comes.

In turn, this reinforces the point that those who voted against the PCN DES were making.  If Primary Care Networks were genuinely about strengthening core general practice (and there is no better example of the need for this than right now) they would have voted for them.  It is the sense that, as the LMC motion put it, they are “a trojan horse to transfer work from secondary care to primary care” that has caused the disillusionment, not the idea of PCNs or working together per se.

Let’s see where we end up, but it may be that when all this is done and dusted we have much stronger, supportive networks of practices, regardless of whether or not they have signed up to the PCN DES.

At the same time practices have been asked to move to a total triage system (whether phone or online), and to undertake all care that can be done remotely through remote means.  The threat caused by coronavirus means that practices are very keen to move to such a system, to reduce the risk to their own staff as much as they can.

Now this is in sharp contrast to the situation we have had previously, where there has been a relatively slow rollout of first telephone triage and then e-consultations.  What situation will we be in a few months down the line when practices have grown used to operating primarily via remote consultations?  Even at this early stage it is hard to envisage a full regression to the point we were in maybe only as recently as last week.

So right before our very eyes general practice is changing at a pace that it has never changed at before.  It is change borne out of the necessity and challenge the current crisis is placing upon us.  What the service will look like once the dust has settled none of us know, but my guess is general practice will never look the same again.

11
mar
0

Coronavirus: Disabling or Enabling?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Coronavirus: Disabling or Enabling?

As someone who has worked in Emergency Health and Disaster management situations throughout the world, it would not be unreasonable for me to suggest that crises beget opportunity. Whether it be changes in political power and influence, the displacement of refugees or the rapid development of technology to counter impending threats: There will always be individuals and organisations that can benefit from disaster situations.

Coronavirus presents just such a situation. And whilst not every individual or organisation will stick to the moral high ground when exercising that right, there are plenty of opportunities for well-meaning groups to provide assistance during this current outbreak.

One such group are the emerging Primary Care Networks (PCNs), who are in prime position to grasp this opportunity and respond to this rapidly developing crisis.

Now there is no escaping the fact that PCNs are still new and in varying states of cohesion; there is still wrangling about what is expected of them and the funding that will support them – but none of that matters in a crisis.  None of that matters if you start to dig deeper into the potential community impact of the Coronavirus and Covid-19.

The government is moving to phase 2 of its containment plan ‘Delay’, prompting strategies to defer the impact of Coronavirus beyond the winter pressures by limiting social and occupational interactions and the movement of people. There is no criticism of the strategy per se, but this implies a resignation to the fact that, with the predicted numbers of cases rising steadily, it will no longer be possible to contain the virus simply through contact tracing and isolation within specialist units.

This in turn means that the burden of responsibility for the management of acute cases will fall on other secondary care facilities, which makes it even more vital that there is a robust response to manage cases that present in the community.  There is also an increasing likelihood that patients who might ordinarily require admission may have to remain and be cared for at home or in the community.

All practices are being asked to consider their continuity arrangements and the NHS England Emergency Preparedness, Resilience and Response Framework (2015) highlights the importance of Mutual Aid in successfully managing such incidents.

PCNs are mutual aid units and have a unique capacity to provide such continuity not just within practices but to the community at large.

Staffing

The first consideration when responding to any emergency situation is ensuring the safety of your own workforce.  NHS England guidance for Primary Care (5th March 2020) has provided assurances that sufficient PPE will be delivered to protect staff.  Consider also the existing health needs of your staff and whether their own existing co-morbidities may place them at risk and rotate staff as required.  With an assumption that at its peak 1/5th of workers may be self-isolating, it is vital that a wide range of staff have the capability to manage basic system functions.  If schools are to shut, then some staff will have unplanned caring responsibilities.

Estate

PCNs should consider how they can best use their facilities across a wide area, e.g. some facilities may be easier to clean than others or there may be centres where it easier to isolate patients and keep them away from patients in waiting areas.  At its peak, one practice could be designated for testing.

Service Delivery

Increased demand may mean that existing services need to be rationalised.  Encouraging patients to phone for triage rather than attend the surgery will reduce the risk of cross-contamination. Residential and Nursing Homes may require a PCN to set up a support service using telephone support and risk stratification to identify those most in need of a visit.

Working at scale requires resources to be used in the most expedient way whether it be the deployment of specialist practitioners, the allocation of support staff, the rational use of facilities or the prioritisation of care.

Our nation and the world have been confronted by a new and at times deadly virus. It is vital that we use our precious resources wisely and work together to mitigate its impact.

 

Stephen Kemp works as Senior Consultant for McCartney Healthcare Associates and provides advice on governance, quality and performance issues for Urgent and Primary Care service providers. Stephen is a nurse with 40 years’ experience, mainly spent within Accident & Emergency and Urgent Care. Between 1994 and 2001, Stephen developed health responses to humanitarian crises around the world, including in Rwanda, Afghanistan, Liberia, Mozambique, Honduras and Albania.

4
mar
0

Has the employment liability question been answered?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The Updated GP Contract states that there are now three measures in position to reduce the risks associated with employment liabilities. This has generally been well accepted and people have moved onto looking at other questions.

Unfortunately, a careful look at these measures reveals very little actual change between the new and the original position.  The three measures represent an option that already existed (measure 1), a partial statement of the law as it has always been (measure 3), and a vague assurance about the future of funding which does not directly give assurances about employment (measure 2).

It is important not to create and continue periods of negativity, and as someone who is generally supportive of the principles underpinning the PCN project it is difficult to appear too critical. However, this has to be balanced by a true understanding of the risks.

If the wrong decisions are taken now, or if over reliance is placed on vague assurances, practices may find their original fears come true.  This in turn creates a further disconnect in the relationship of trust between the practices and the commissioners.

From a practical perspective, I was speaking with a GP partner earlier in the week who had committed to taking on the employment responsibility of all the new staff due to the assurances of the measures. I corrected his view, and this has resulted in a redesign of appropriately shared liabilities across the PCN members.

I have written a longer piece relating to the measures as they have currently been outlined for specific concerns and recommendations. The following is a quick summary of the measures within the updated GP contract:

  • Measure 1 – Using third party contractors

These can be structured in different ways and the extent to which these are provided will vary the degree of protection. They need to be financially viable and should offer the service that you are after. VAT remains a risk if it is not structured correctly. Good contracts are essential in forming these documents.

 

  • Measure 2 – Funding secured within the core contract

This is a good change, but ensure your plans have sufficient security for the employing practices should the money be split between other practices. You may find that you employ an individual but the money is with multiple other practices with no mechanism to claim it. A cross-indemnity arrangement may resolve this risk.

 

  • Measure 3 – Reliance on the future application of TUPE

TUPE has complex rules relating to when it does and does not apply. Most importantly it does not apply where services cannot be clearly defined and employees directly linked with those services. How each specification requirement is structured, and how each additional role is utilised across the PCN, will significantly alter the risk. In many cases it is hard to see how this protection will apply where the team members are integrated into core general practice delivery.

In practice it is important to note that these are the same risks faced by the providers of all time-limited contracts. APMS and AQP providers have had the same issues and it could be argued they have damaged the ability of many of these providers to retain staff and have partially resulted in the higher rates than GMS contracts.

The only definitive solution is a legally binding indemnity from the commissioners relating to redundancies directly resulting from a change of policy. This remains unlikely, and even if it could happen it is some time away.

Practices and PCNs should therefore ensure that this is a defined risk with a suitable management plan based on categorisation of staff. Certain steps can reduce the risk, including the following:

  • Ensure that contracts with third parties are viable in the long-term and that all liabilities are covered;
  • Develop an indemnity between the practices to ensure the funds are appropriately managed, to reduce the risk of funds being split between multiple practices and creating a shortfall for the actual named employer;
  • Where possible, directly link staffing to service delivery. This may reduce flexibility but it improves the chance that TUPE will apply.

Finally, if in doubt seek support when making plans and ensure that you fully understand the risks!

 

Robert McCartney, Managing Director, McCartney Healthcare Associates Ltd.  You can contact Robert by email rm@mccartneyhealth.co.uk.

LinkedIn

Twitter

26
feb
0

The PCN Clock is Ticking: Your 3 Month Plan

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

We now know what is in the GP contract update for next year.  But we are worried that the LMC conference in March might change things.  We don’t know if our practices will sign up again to the PCN DES, and won’t know for sure until the end of May.  So what should we be doing now?

The problem PCNs have, given the challenges posed within the contract for next year, is that they do not have a spare three months.  Meeting the contract requirements is going to take all the time available, and trying to move from a standing start at the end of May is going to make life very difficult for any PCN that postpones taking action.

Where should PCNs start?  It will of course depend on the individual circumstances of each PCN, but a generic plan for the next three months will look something like this:

March

Undertake a workload analysis for 2020/21.  This will include working through the detail of the three PCN specifications, identifying what your “social prescribing service” is going to entail, working through the actions required to achieve the 8 indicators in the Investment and Impact Fund, as well as any actions needed to continue or develop any local priorities or initiatives.

Get the information you need from your CCG.  This will include the list of care homes and number of care home beds in your PCN, the exact amount of your Additional Role Reimbursement Scheme (ARRS) funding for next year, and any additional support the CCG will provide.

Put management support in place.  You may have already done this, but if you haven’t, then now is the time, because the demands on PCNs next year are much more onerous than this year.  Don’t wait until several months in when the PCN CD is on the verge of resignation/breakdown to make this happen.  Use the PCN development money, the £1.50 running costs, or grab any support the PCN is offering – access management support however you can.

Establish your end of 2019/20 financial plan.  By now you will have a good idea of how much money the PCN has spent, is going to spend, and what will be left over.  You need to decide how this funding is either going to be used or distributed to the practices.  You need to do this in March so that if you do want to do anything with the funding it is not too late to make it happen.

April

Define the roles you want.  Once you have completed the workload analysis the PCN will need to decide how to use the ARRS funding to deliver the workload.  PCNs have to formally submit their “workforce intentions” by the end of June, but, frankly, this is too late.

Create a local recruitment campaign.  The contract update indicates that CCG HR resources will be available to PCNs to support them with recruitment into these new roles.  It would seem wise to take up this offer to attract the highest possible calibre of candidates locally.

Establish a financial plan for 2020/21.  As the total income and expenditure will be higher for the year ahead, it is even more important that each PCN establishes not just a plan to deliver the workload and a workforce plan, but also a financial plan to run alongside.

Finalise the 2019/20 accounts.  I can’t stress enough the importance of PCNs sorting out their end of year accounts as early as possible.  If there are any tax implications for the member practices, then they need to be informed of these as early as possible.

May

Push on recruitment.  Recruitment is notoriously slow, and so PCNs will need to make sure the process is being actively managed to ensure the staff they need to enable delivery are in post as quickly as possible.

Prepare for the incoming roles.  Making the new roles a success involves more than simply getting people in post.  PCNs will need a clear plan of how each role is going to be managed, supervised and supported, as well as how they will operate and what they will do.  The better the preparation for the new roles, the more likely that they will be a success.

Create a detailed work plan for each workstream.  PCNs will need to build on the workload analysis carried out in March, and hopefully by now be able to use some management resource, to create a detailed work plan for each of the service specifications and each of the areas of work identified for the PCN.

Sign up to the DES.  At the end of May, practices will need to sign up (or not) to the PCN DES.  If PCNs have carried out all the work above, it will be much easier for practices to be able to understand exactly what is involved and how it is going to be achieved when making this decision.

 

This is not an exhaustive list.  For example, you might want a stakeholder plan (how you are going to work with neighbouring organisations to support/enable delivery of the workload), an estates plan (where are these new roles going to be based), or an IT/data sharing plan (how will you deliver services across multiple practices), depending on your local circumstances.  Equally, you may already have some of the components of the plan in place.  The key point is that the next three months are a vital period for PCNs, and it is important PCNs don’t waste the opportunity to build some momentum into the coming year.

19
feb
0

Is it time to go “all in” on PCNs?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

What is going to happen with Primary Care Networks (PCNs) at the end of the 5 year PCN DES?  Are PCNs going to be a here-today-gone-tomorrow phenomenon, or are they here to stay?  And does it matter?

I think this is a really important question.  It is important because the answer should probably shape how practices approach PCNs, and determine the amount of effort and engagement they put into them.

There are some significant clues in the recently published update to the GP contract.  The update states that the additional roles employed under the PCN DES, “will be treated as part of the core general practice cost base beyond 2023/24” (1.20).  This means £1.13M of additional roles funding (for the “average” PCN) will at that point become part of the core contract.

The Investment and Impact Fund (think QOF for PCNs) will be worth £300M by 2023/24 (£240k per “average” PCN).  This is going to provide population based coverage at a meaningful level within an Integrated Care System in a way that the individual practice QOF does not.  Would it be a huge surprise if future additional investment focussed on the PCN IIF rather than the individual practice QOF?  It would be more of a surprise if it didn’t.

Of the 45 pages containing the details of the updates to the GP contract, virtually half (22 pages) is dedicated to PCNs and PCN initiatives.  The main changes to the GP contract are already now coming through PCNs.  With all the effort and resource that has gone into establishing PCNs and creating them as a platform, it seems highly unlikely that at the end of the 5 years they will be stopped.

More likely is that as the funding for the additional roles shifts into the core general practice contract, so PCNs themselves will shift from being an optional additional service to a core part of the contract.  Despite the nervousness around PCNs that the publication of the draft PCN DES specifications raised earlier this year, the final update reads as though practices and PCNs are already inextricably linked.  And if not now, they certainly will be by 2024.

If you believe this to be true, what does this mean for an individual practice today?  I think the implications are significant.

So far it has been possible to treat PCNs as an optional extra, something a practice can dip in and out of, and leave the work to those prepared to volunteer to take it on.  The implications of the shift signalled in this year’s update are that this level of engagement is no longer going to be enough, because letting PCNs develop in ways that don’t support your practice could jeopardise your practice’s future in the medium term.

Practices are going to have to work to ensure that they are directly receiving the benefit of the new roles and the new sources of funding.  They can’t leave it for others to sort out, and rely solely on the income they receive directly (i.e. not via the PCN).  Over time the PCN will become more established and the ability to shape and influence it will become less for each individual practice.  Practices need to work now to make sure the PCN is working for them and their population.

If I was a partner of a GP practice, my take on this year’s update to the GP contract would be that now is the time to go “all in” on PCNs.  While last year there was probably sense in taking a watching brief to see how PCNs developed, now I think the time for that strategy has come to an end.  The signals are all there that the future of GP funding is going to come through PCNs, and I would want to be right at the forefront of making that work for my practice and my patients.

12
feb
1

What to Make of the Updated GP Contract Agreement

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

I am not sure how many of you will have read by now the “Update to the GP Contract Agreement 2020/21 – 2023/24” released by the BMA and NHS England last week, but having waded through all 86 pages it is hard to take it all in. There are huge implications in particular for PCNs, who will need to digest the contents quickly to be able to move to action.

First things first. It looks like the big problems caused by the draft PCN DES specifications have been addressed. The biggest sticking point was no extra money to deliver the required extra work, followed by the seeming requirement that all of the additional roles would be used to deliver extra work and not support core general practice, with practices expected to chip in 30% of the funding for the privilege. The draft specifications were also seen as over-prescriptive, stifling local innovation and responsiveness.

This update addresses these issues in some surprising ways. The number of specifications needed to be delivered in year has been reduced from 5 to 3. Only structured medication reviews, enhanced health in care homes, and supporting early cancer diagnosis remain, with the other four to follow next year (two were always planned to be implemented from 2021). PCNs are also to “provide access to a social prescribing service in 2020/21, drawing on the workforce funded under the network contract DES” (7.5, p41).

100% reimbursement is to be provided for the new roles, removing the need for a 30% contribution from member practices/the £1.50 per head. This won’t solve the problem of being able to recruit into the roles at the funding levels available, but it tackles the major issue of sourcing the 30%. 6 new roles have also been added to the list that PCNs can use this funding to recruit from: pharmacy technicians; care coordinators; health coaches; dietitians; podiatrists and occupational therapists.

Importantly, assurances are made that the funding for these roles will continue in the core GP contract beyond 2023/24, and that should practices withdraw from the PCN DES the roles would TUPE to whichever provider takes over the delivery, alleviating concerns about future liability costs.

Access to further funding is also provided for PCNs. The level of funding available to source these new roles has been increased. Where it was, for an “average PCN”, £206k in 2020/21 it will now be £344k. An additional (recurrent) £120 per care home bed per year will be directly provided.

PCNs can also access funds through the Investment and Impact Fund (IIF). This looks like it is essentially a QOF for PCNs. It is a points based system, with a number of areas each with indicators allocated a certain number of points. There are upper and lower thresholds beyond which no payment is made, with a sliding scale rewarding performance in between.

The “average PCN” can earn £32,400 in 2020/21 from the IIF (although it has to declare it will use any funds earned for workforce expansion and services in primary care). This will rise to £240,000 per PCN by 2023/24. There are 8 indicators for 2020/2021 for seasonal flu vaccinations, LD health checks, referrals to social prescribing, gastro-protective prescribing (3 indicators), metered dose inhaler prescriptions, and spend on medicines that should be routinely prescribed.

The challenge, then, for the PCN is first of all to identify its overall delivery requirements for next year (delivery against the specifications, delivery of a social prescribing service, delivery against the IIF indicators, and any agreed local delivery).

Then the PCN in relatively short order has to establish the additional roles it will need to enable this delivery. PCNs are required to produce (and submit) their workforce “intentions” by 30th June at the latest, but will most likely need to be actively recruiting well ahead of this. The document encourages, in light of the additional role reimbursement funding, PCNs to use the (existing, recurrent) £1.50 to appoint a full time manager and increase PCN Clinical Director time so that the growing PCN workload can be managed effectively. Sounds sensible.

It does seem that there are sufficient resources available in the updated contract to meet the requirements it makes, while at the same time leaving some freedom for local developments, delivery and innovation. This was always the key for me as to whether the revised proposals would make sense.

There is of course more in the update that I haven’t touched on. There is a renewed focus on increasing the number of doctors, with initiatives including a new two year fellowship programme for all newly qualified GPs and nurses, a new to partnership one off payment of £20,000 to encourage GPs to become partners, and a locum support scheme to encourage consistent locum working with groups of PCNs.

We may have a new government but access inevitably features. This year all practices will be required to participate in an appointments dataset, and then it is about preparation for April 2021, by when there will be a “nationally consistent” offer developed for bringing extended hours and extended access funding together, as well as a core digital service to be offered to all patients.

A new payment mechanism for vaccinations and immunisations is being introduced over the next two years. This year it will become an essential service with new contractual core standards that practices will be expected to meet, and an item of service payment of £10.06 introduced for MMR 1 and 2. In year 2 the item of service payment will be expanded to other areas, and a new QOF domain for routine vaccinations will be introduced, with the existing childhood immunisation DES retired.

There are, as ever, a few adjustments to QOF, but that is the bones of the changes within the updated contract agreement. I am sure it will take time to take it all in (especially getting our heads round the new investment and impact fund!), but from first impressions it seems that PCNs may well survive the turbulence of the last few months and be able to build a platform from which they can start to make a real difference.

5
feb
0

It is Not a Race

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

I am lucky enough to be in a role where I meet lots of Primary Care Networks in different parts of the country.  One of the most common things they tell me is that they know that they are “behind” where everybody else is.

This is interesting for a range of reasons.  Firstly, if everybody is behind everybody else, who is in front?  The influence of social media is such that when we hear a few PCNs report on what they are doing, our immediate reaction is to think we are not doing that so we must be behind, even without knowing anything like the whole story of what is going on in that other PCN.  By and large we tend to share what we are doing well on social media, not what we are struggling with.

Secondly, what does being “behind” actually mean?  How do we determine if a PCN is ahead or behind?  Is it the extent to which they are meeting the DES requirements, meaning the PCN that has a network agreement, a data sharing agreement, a social prescribing link worker and a pharmacist is ahead, and those that don’t are behind?  I am not convinced this is going to be the best indicator of ultimate PCN success, because it is possible to have all those things in place simply with a level of passive compliance from member practices as opposed to any active ownership.

Maybe it is distance along the PCN maturity matrix that is the best measure of progress?  Just in case you haven’t fully internalised the PCN maturity matrix, it identifies five components of a PCN development journey: leadership, planning and partnerships; use of data and population health management; integrating care; managing resources; working in partnership with people and communities.  Now I wrote back in August about the dangers of a nationally prescribed maturity matrix imposing requirements or expectations on a PCN.  Ultimately each PCN should determine its own purpose, and make its own decision as to what its maturity would look like.

Thirdly, is being ahead a good thing?  If we have learnt anything from the DES specifications it is that showing a little bit of caution may actually be wise in the current environment.

As regular readers will know I am a big fan of Professor John Kotter at Harvard and his approach to change management.  He believes assuming people know that change is needed, and focussing instead on strategy and solutions (like PCNs) is what kills most change efforts.  He differentiates between a “false” sense of urgency whereby people feel anxious, angry and frustrated, and a “true” sense of urgency whereby people have a powerful desire to move, successfully, now. The former does not lead to taking action, but the latter does. GPs feeling under pressure and angry is not the same as GPs wanting to make a change and make PCNs a success.  There is work for PCN leaders to do to get to this point.

So if PCNs are ultimately an exercise in change management, which is what makes them difficult, then moving too quickly into doing things without spending time coalescing around a shared vision is likely to be a recipe for long term failure.  Meeting contractual requirements, or ticking the boxes on the maturity matrix, are a long way from winning the hearts and minds of member practices and local partners.

PCNs are not a race.  There is no prize for being “ahead” (whatever that means).  Taking time at the start to understand what the PCN is for, and what transformation its members want it to deliver, and building trust across the network (however long this takes) is key to making the most of the opportunity that PCNs provide.

29
jan
0

Extending the Primary Care Network

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

What is a network?  According to that modern day fount of all knowledge, Wikipedia, it is, “a set of human contacts known to an individual, with whom that individual would expect to interact at intervals to support a given set of activities. In other words, a personal network is a group of caring, dedicated people who are committed to maintain a relationship with a person in order to support a given set of activities.”

The key point here is that networks are based primarily on relationships.  So while Primary Care Networks (PCNs) may have originated through a contractual route, that shouldn’t be what defines them.  Rather the connectivity, interactions and mutual support of relationships are their lifeblood, and what will determine the impact they can have.

So far Primary Care Networks have, in the majority of cases, been made up of groups of GP practices.  Practices within a network have been building the relationships between themselves to build trust and enable joint working across practices.

But in the Network Contract DES Specification for 2019/20 it said, “There is no requirement for the Network Agreement that is signed by 30th June 2019 to include collaboration between practices and other providers, but this will need to be developed over 2019/20 and to be well developed by the beginning of 2020/21 when the Network Agreement will need to be updated to reflect the new Network Contract DES Specification.” (p11, 3.6).

If we leave the cloud having over next year’s Network Contract DES specification aside for a moment, then the logic of this requirement is sound.  If PCNs are based on relationships, then to make the maximum impact they need to include all those who can contribute to the cause.

But of course there is another way of looking at this.  The reason why practices were uncomfortable signing the network agreement in the first place was the potential impact on the practice’s autonomy.  Practices didn’t want to be told how they would have to operate by the other members of the PCN.  But at least all the other members of the PCN were GP practices, and so there was a level of shared interest.  Widening the membership to include non-GP practice organisations reduces practice autonomy further (less influence on PCN decision making), with less certainty that decisions made will be made in the best interest of my particular practice.

So there are two factors at play here: impact and trust.  For PCNs to have the maximum impact they need a broader set of relationships.  But without trust practices are going to be reluctant to include new members into the PCN family.

Networks must start with a common purpose (clarity on what we are trying to achieve).  Identifying who can help deliver this purpose and widening the membership to include them is the way to move forward.  Let the shared purpose determine the terms of any agreements that need to be made, but prioritise person to person relationships, because it is only when we trust each other that we can work effectively together to make change happen.

The mistake is going to be starting with the network agreements, ahead of building relationships and trust.

PCNs have the opportunity to establish a new way of working for the NHS.  Instead of the traditional top down, bureaucracy heavy, organisation centric way of working, PCNs can model a new style based on trust, relationships and commitment to a common cause.  Whatever the PCN DES specification ends up saying for next year about extending the membership, how PCNs extend their membership is going to be at least as important as who with.

22
jan
0

Is it time to move away from centralised control of PCNs?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The biggest challenge the publication of the PCN DES specifications for next year has created is not so much the detail contained within the documents but the loss of enthusiasm amongst GPs for the whole PCN project.

Before Christmas there was hope that PCNs could mark a new dawn for general practice.  But that bubble was burst when the specifications demonstrated the lack of any national ambition to use PCNs to support the ailing profession.

Wherever the national negotiations end up, it is hard to believe they will restore the hope and energy that existed last year.  But PCNs don’t go from being a good thing to a bad thing overnight, and so it is worth taking some time to reflect on the opportunities PCNs create, regardless of national specifications.

A good place to start is the time before PCNs existed (remember that?).  There were two main trends in general practice, both a response to the pressures the service has been facing.  The first was the introduction of new roles, not to replace GPs but to manage those parts of the (growing) demand that their skills made them best placed to take on.  The second was the move to bigger practices and operating at scale, to develop the resilience of practices and to enable them to embrace any opportunities that develop.

PCNs continue both these trends.  The majority of the funding for PCNs is for the introduction of new roles, and PCNs bring practices together and provide the opportunity for the benefits of scale to be delivered across practices.

The big new opportunity the introduction of PCNs has created is working in partnership with other providers.  One of the rationales for PCNs was to enable the gap between primary care and the rest of the system to be closed, and to bring (in particular) general practice and community services closer together.

For GP practices PCNs create the opportunity to better meet the needs of the local population.  Practices can clarify what part of the local demand they are best placed to meet, and what part of the demand is best met by partners, by collaborations and by network wide services.  Where gaps in service provision exist PCNs can work with local partner organisations to fill these gaps.

In a world where we didn’t have PCNs what would general practice be doing?  Probably working towards the development of something that looks very much like PCNs…

So the problem is not primary care networks themselves.  PCNs enable general practice to respond effectively to the pressures they face and to better meet the demands they are under.  The issue lies with the PCN DES specifications which seem to be attempting to shift PCNs away from supporting general practice and into the generation of additional work that will make the current problems worse.

But that doesn’t make PCNs themselves a bad thing.  They remain the best hope for general practice for the future.  What has been revealed as the ‘bad thing’ is the level of control the national contract has over PCNs.  Leaving the destiny of PCNs in national hands already looks like a recipe for disaster.  So now may be a good time for practices and local systems to think carefully about exactly how they want to make PCNs work for them, and to exert more local control to restore the confidence of practices that PCNs can still be the path to a bright new future.

15
jan
1

Why the new PCN DES Specification matters to everyone, not just general practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

There is a huge furore at present in general practice as a result of the publication of the draft PCN DES specification for 2020/21.  There are hugely detailed requirements on PCNs without any additional resource, and a clear expectation that the new workforce outlined in the 5 year GP contract last year is for additional work rather than to help meet the existing pressures in general practice.  Unsurprising, then, that general practice has reacted how it has.

But the implications of the draft specification go beyond general practice.  It is material to whether the shift away from the commissioner/provider split and towards integrated care, as outlined in the Long Term Plan, will succeed.

For integration to have an impact it needs local innovation, driven at a local level, based on trusting local relationships.  But as Integrated Care Systems (ICSs) and Integrated Care Partnerships (ICPs) try to meet testing national deadlines, their focus has shifted to governance, and the traditional NHS focus on accountability, control and decision making.

We have moved the deck chairs around enough times to know already that this will make no difference.  The one opportunity for it ‘to be different this time’ is PCNs.  Their 30-50,000 size enables real localism, borne out of an understanding of what is needed and what will work in each area, with person to person relationships as the enabler of making real change happen quickly.

The job of the architects of the new system really is to create the space, time and freedom for these local relationships to develop, for local problem solving to begin, and for local solutions to be developed.  So, for example, if a group of practices has a problem with the way district nursing is being delivered, instead of them raising that with the CCG to raise with the community trust in a contract meeting, who in turn will raise internally, and very little will happen, we move to a system where the practice leaders meet the district nurse leaders (who they already know) and work out what they can do differently to offer a better service to patients.  A system like this is one where things could start to be different.

The biggest problem with the PCN DES specification is the signal it gives that this will not be allowed to happen.  This is for three reasons.  The first is that if the centre dictates what PCNs should do in anything like the level of detail that is in the draft specifications, local innovation will not be able to flourish.  The mindset of central control has to be given up if integrated care is going to work, because the best solution in one area will not be the same in another, and each area needs the freedom to work out what will work best for them.

The second reason is that it has to be up to local areas to determine how they will use their workforce, and not nationally dictated.  The individual ‘return on investment’ mindset of any new funding, and a requirement for additionality even when core services are floundering, is fundamentally flawed.  We know we are 5-6,000 GPs short.  The new PCN-funded workforce can help both support general practice to thrive and be an enabler for local system working, but it has to be for local areas to decide how this workforce should be deployed across priorities (including core work), not via a nationally dictated contract.  Defining the “additionality” that new roles must deliver misses the point that existing (potentially more important) requirements cannot currently be met, and each local area has to be free to determine how to deploy the new roles to get the most out of them.

The third reason is that it takes time for local relationships to develop.  In year one we have had a primary focus on practice to practice relationships.  In year two we do need to widen that focus to the relationships across the wider group of providers within each network.  Time is needed for trust to develop, and over-burdening local areas with the level of delivery requirements contained in the draft specification at this stage runs a high risk of making relationships worse not better.  We need patience as we build a platform for future success.

My plea is for system leaders to recognise that the underpinning approach encapsulated within the PCN DES specification is one that will prevent the success of the new systems they are trying to create, and that it is not simply a general practice only contractual dispute.  If PCNs are really going to be the engine of integrated care, this contract needs to be an enabler not a dictator of local change.  Getting this contract right is everyone’s responsibility, and it would be great to see local leaders vocalising their own concerns about the issues the draft specification raises.

8
jan
1

What to Make of the Draft PCN Service Specifications

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

The draft PCN service specifications were finally released just in time to put a dampener on Christmas for anyone eager enough to read them that quickly.  If you have avoided that particular pleasure so far, you can find them here.

It is worth stating right at the outset that the specifications have been published as draft, and that NHS England is seeking input/feedback from GPs (and “interested parties”), in the form of a survey (which you can access here).  The deadline for comments is the 15th January.  The final version of the specifications won’t be available until “early 2020”, when the contract for next year has been negotiated with the GPC, at which point we can look forward to “further detail for each requirement, followed by guidance”.

There were rumours circulating before these specifications were published that there would be no additional funding attached to support their delivery, and unfortunately these fears have been realised.  The guidance tries to make as much as it can of the existing funding that has come into general practice through PCNs (the practice funding for engagement, the £1.50 per head, and the funding for the new roles). It also suggests £75M will be available via the Investment and Impact Fund, meaning an “average” PCN could secure c£60,000 in 2020/21 via this route.

The problem is this funding has not felt significant to practices this year, and that is without any additional (unfunded) work being included.  More new roles are available to each PCN next year (with associated funding), but each one comes with its own 30% cost, and it is hard to see practices being motivated to put their hands in their pockets to carry out work on top of the work they already cannot cope with.

In an apparent attempt not to “overburden” the nascent PCNs, only two of the five specifications (medication reviews and enhanced health in care homes) are to be implemented in full next year.  The remaining three will be phased in over the next four years.  It seems there is at least some insight behind the guidance of just how these proposals are likely to land with most GPs.

Perhaps this is all an NHS England negotiating tactic.  Perhaps there is a plan to incite general uproar amongst the GP community, which will be quelled by the inclusion of additional resources at a later date.  The request for feedback and inclusion of a survey on the draft specifications does suggest that at least some parts of NHS England understand the implications of asking these specifications to be delivered unfunded.  However, it is entirely likely that senior parts of NHS England think that this is a reasonable ask of general practice, and so I doubt there is a grand plan or that the final outcome is fixed at this point.

It would be a shame if PCNs, who have come an extremely long way in a very short amount of time, are stopped in their tracks by such short-sightedness.  PCNs represent a major change to the fabric of general practice, and it is one that requires much more nurturing to succeed.  Where we are right now is that they are not at the point of irreversibility, and asking too much in too short a space of time without providing the necessary resources is likely to send many areas right back to the beginning.

But these are not the final versions.  As yet nothing is fixed in stone, and there is a whole round of contract negotiations to go through yet.  My advice to GPs is to send comments in nationally and to your local LMC.  Use the survey, although if doesn’t allow you to say what you want to say send your comments directly to england.networkscontract@nhs.net, and include what is needed to make delivery achievable.  Let’s not give up just yet, and let’s see if something positive can be salvaged out of what is admittedly a less that promising start.

Happy new year to you all!!

18
dec
0

Guest Blog – David Cowan – A link worker has arrived. What do I do with them?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

A number of new roles have been introduced into primary care over recent years. In this blog, I’ll focus on two ways that social prescribing is delivered, in particular, the active sign-poster referred to here as a care navigator, and the social prescribing link worker.

Care navigators are often primary care reception staff who have received appropriate training on options they can provide patients. The care navigator role should be seen as complimentary to social prescribing when viewed in terms of ‘as well as social prescribing’ not ‘instead of social prescribing’ (NHSE, Social Prescribing and Community Based Support 2019).

The four levels of social prescribing

Social prescribing as care navigation was identified as the first of four levels by Kimberlee (2015), who notes a growing evidence base for providing online information or leaflets in GP practices to help patients choose the most appropriate service.

The key aspect of differentiating the care navigator role, from other types of social prescribing, is the time the care navigator has with the patient. For the care navigator, it’s often a brief intervention with 30 seconds to a couple of minutes for the care navigator to identify the need and, if appropriate, offer the patient a choice between a GP appointment and an alternative healthcare professional.

Kimberlee (2015) goes on to say that ‘social prescribing light’ was the second level, led by the voluntary sector, including providing a point of contact and addressing a specific need, but no direct links with general practice.

‘Social prescribing medium’ is the third level identified by Kimberlee (2015) and includes a health-focused role, with a set number of visits, addressing healthy lifestyle choices through applied behaviour change techniques.

Finally, the fourth level of social prescribing identified by Kimberlee (2015) is ‘social prescribing holistic’ with a direct primary care referral to social prescribing link workers who may be based in general practice, but are employed by a local social prescribing community provider and focus on the persons self-identified needs.

What is the evidence social prescribing works?

Social prescribing can reduce demand for GP appointments.

A recent study published in the BMJ open journal by Kellezi et al (2019), asked 630 patients to complete a survey at the point of referral and again four months after they had received social prescribing.

There was a reported 25% reduction in healthcare appointments and decreased feelings of loneliness.

Dr Chris Dayson from Sheffield Hallam University has contributed towards the evidence base with several evaluations in Yorkshire, such as in Rotherham in 2014, Doncaster in 2016 and Bradford in 2017. These evaluations show a return on investment to the healthcare system, reductions in primary and secondary care demand as well as improvements in individual mental wellbeing scores.

Despite this, social prescribing evaluations often draw criticism for their lack of methodological rigour (Evidence to Inform the Commissioning of Social Prescribing, 2015).

Social prescribing, as signposting or care navigation, builds on the GP receptionist role, who for many years have helped patients choose a doctor or nurse appointment.

As the extended primary care team grows under the NHS Long Term Plan (2019), social prescribing link workers will benefit from spending time with care navigators:

  • By listening to the needs of patients who request GP appointments, they can flag appropriate referrals.
  • Working together GPs, link workers and care navigators can co-develop the systems and processes so that everyone feels confident for direct signposts away from GP appointments to a link worker.
  • There’s also the option of working with a care navigation training providerConexus Healthcare have trained over 10,000 care navigators across England and Wales, with an accredited care navigation training programme. Appropriate training and support is available to social prescribers with the introduction of a level 3 social prescribing qualification.

So, in a nutshell.

Working together, care navigators and link workers are able to play a greater role in helping patients access social prescribing.

So Mr Williams can directly access a social prescribing link worker, via a care navigator, for welfare and benefits advice. Miss Jenkins can feel less anxious about her housing issues because she’s being supported through each step of talking to her housing association. And Mrs Rupinder could wait just days, rather than weeks, to get extra help with her carer duties, thanks to both a care navigator and link worker.

An integrated care navigation and social prescribing service in primary care makes perfect sense. Patients can get the help they need sooner without the need to see a GP first and save finite GP appointments for patients with medical needs.

Dayson, C. (2014) The Social and Economic Impact of Social Prescribing. Available from: https://www4.shu.ac.uk/research/cresr/sites/shu.ac.uk/files/social-economic-impact-rotherham.pdf

Dayson, C. (2016) Doncaster Social Prescribing Service. Understanding Outcomes and Impact. Available from: https://www4.shu.ac.uk/research/cresr/sites/shu.ac.uk/files/eval-doncaster-social-prescribing-service.pdf

Dayson, C. (2017) Evaluation of HALE Community Connectors. Available from: https://www4.shu.ac.uk/research/cresr/sites/shu.ac.uk/files/eval-HALE-community-connectors-social-prescribing.pdf

Evidence to Inform the Commissioning of Social Prescribing (2015) University of York. Centre for Reviews and Dissemination. Available from: https://www.york.ac.uk/media/crd/Ev%20briefing_social_prescribing.pdf

Kellezi et al (2019) The social cure of social prescribing: a mixed-methods study on the benefits of social connectedness on quality and effectiveness of care provision. BMJ Open Journal. Available from: https://bmjopen.bmj.com/content/9/11/e033137

Kimberlee, R. (2015) What is social prescribing? Advances in Social Science Research Journal. Vol 2, No 1. Available from: https://blogs.ncvo.org.uk/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/what-is-social-prescibing.pdf

NHS England (2016) High Impact Action Case Study. Available from: https://www.england.nhs.uk/publication/west-wakefield-reception-care-navigation/

NHS England (2019) Social Prescribing and Community Based Support: Summary Guide. Available from: https://www.england.nhs.uk/publication/social-prescribing-and-community-based-support-summary-guide/

NHS England (2019) Long Term Plan. Available from: https://www.longtermplan.nhs.uk/

11
dec
0

Lessons for PCNs: Get Some Delivery Capacity

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

“To me, ideas are worth nothing unless executed. They are just a multiplier. Execution is worth millions.” – Steve Jobs

We could debate whether or not Primary Care Networks are a good idea, but the idea contains enough potential (practices working together, general practice partnering with the wider health and social care system, a focus on the specific needs of a population of c50,000 etc) to state that their success will not be determined by how good the idea of PCNs is, but by how well they are delivered in practice (or “executed” in Steve Jobs parlance).

Lots of people have good ideas.  Some people think their ideas are so good that they pay for a patent on their idea, so that other people can’t steal it.  Forbes reported that, ‘of today’s 2.1 million active patents, 95 percent fail to be licensed or commercialized’.  Most ideas stay as simply that, ideas, and never become a reality because they are never executed.

PCNs are an idea.  At present they exist in the conceptual, and in nascent governance frameworks, but try asking a hospital consultant what a primary care network is.  Their success will not be determined by the size of the population they serve, or whether they have a network agreement in place or have appointed a Clinical Director, but by whether they actually start to deliver and make change happen.  PCNs are still an idea needing to be executed.

Studies into successful change in the NHS have found that there are three critical components of success: clinical leadership, senior support and project management.  Clinical leadership in PCNs comes through the PCN Clinical Director, who has dedicated time to undertake this role (although last week we discussed the importance of protecting this time to make change happen).

Senior support in other organisations of the NHS usually comes from a director who can link the change effort with the organisation’s priorities and the wider senior team.  For PCNs this role can be fulfilled by the PCN Board, who generally have partner level representation from all member practices.

The third component of successful change is dedicated delivery capacity in the form of a project manager.  It is extremely difficult when a PCN CD only has a couple of sessions a week, and practices are working on top of the pressures of the day job, for changes to be made and new ways of working to be introduced.  Change, as we have discussed many times in this blog, is hard, and without dedicated project management it is very difficult to find the capacity to overcome the blocks that will inevitably emerge along the way and make it happen.

While project management for PCNs is not directly funded within the contract, the good news is that PCNs are all being given significant development funding, that will continue over the five years of the contract.  My very strong advice is that PCNs prioritise the use of this funding to establish capacity to deliver change and employ dedicated project management support.

I have met a number of different PCNs on my travels over recent months, and one thing I have noticed is those PCNs who have dedicated delivery capacity in place are the ones who have been able to achieve the most.  The real value of PCNs comes with their ability to execute.  At this point in the development of PCNs, when moving from idea to execution is the critical next step, there can be no higher priority than getting in some dedicated project management support.

4
dec
0

Lessons for PCNs: Learning to Say No

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

“It is only by saying ‘no’ that you can concentrate on the things that are really important.” Steve Jobs

I was talking to a PCN Clinical Director recently, who told me the story of how in one day she had received three emails and numerous phone calls, including to her practice receptionists, for her to say whether or not she was employing a link worker.  She and her practices remain undecided on how to progress with link workers (because they are clear they want the model of social prescribing to drive the employment of the team, not vice versa), but she is coming under increasing pressure to 1) spend more and more time responding to these types of process request and 2) put the needs of the system (and its targets to employ link workers) over the needs of the network.

I was talking to a different PCN Clinical Director who told me that he had received an email with a long list of meetings the system was expecting him to attend.  These included PCN assurance meetings, integrated care development meetings, and a whole raft of clinical “transformation” meetings taking place at the wider system level.  He felt pressure to go to as many of these as he could, and wasn’t sure whether saying no was an option or whether it was a requirement of taking on the new role.

In fact, I am sure it would be relatively straightforward for any PCN Clinical Director to spend all of their time responding to the constant system requests for information, attending system meetings and responding positively to as many of the meeting requests they receive as possible (although I doubt they would be able to meet all of them!).

The irony of this position is that despite this willingness to comply and respond positively, it will be these PCNs who in the medium term will be judged to be failing.

Ultimately, successful PCNs will be the ones who understand their local priorities, focus on building local relationships (between practices and with their local communities), and, most importantly, learn how to make change happen.  All of these things take time, and PCNs who spend their time meeting the requirements of the system will not have the time needed to do the things that are important.

And so the job of the leader, the PCN Clinical Director, is to say no to the things that are less important, in order to be able to say yes to the things that are.

In a recent conversation I had with Professor Becky Malby (a national expert in these matters, do check out her blog if you haven’t already), she recommended that to ensure PCNs focus on the right things they allocate at least 80% of the agenda time in any PCN meeting to innovation, change or improvement, and that the time for everything else should be limited to 20% of the time available.

For the new PCN CDs I was talking to that kind of prioritisation can feel very difficult.  But learning to keep focussed on what is important, and to say no to the things that are not, is critical for PCN success.

27
nov
0

The future for GP Home Visiting Services?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The national LMC conference caused a stir in the national press last week when they passed a motion instructing the GPC to negotiate the removal of home visits from the core contract.

Hardly surprising given the timing and the forthcoming election, with each of the main parties falling over themselves to say how many extra GPs they are going to train and recruit should they be elected (Conservatives an extra 6,000 GPs, Labour and Lib Dems an extra 5,000 GP training places).  And of course it was easy for the press to sensationalise the story as an “end to home visits”, and for Matt Hancock to reject that notion out of hand, when that was not what the conference voted for.

So what did they vote for?  The specific motion was:

That conference believes that GPs no longer have the capacity to offer home visits and instruct the GPC England to:

  1. Remove the anachronism of home visits from core contract work (passed 54%-46%)
  2. Negotiate a separate acute service for urgent visits (passed 74% to 26%)
  • Demand any change in service is widely advertised to patients (passed 90% to 10%)

Let’s be clear, the motion was not really about the merits or otherwise of home visits.  It was about GP resourcing and workload.  Despite the existing promise of 5,000 more GPs, the number of GPs has gone down while the workload has continued to rise, at a rate exceeding any increase in funding.  And so, inevitably, we end up with motions like this, which are statements that the current situation is unsustainable.

Something needs to be done.  I don’t think many of those at the conference believed the GPC would be able to negotiate such change to the contract, but rather they wanted a line drawn in the sand.

If the contract itself isn’t going to change, what can be done, and can the visiting system be changed to reduce pressure on GPs?

It is interesting that the level of support at the conference was so high (74%) for the introduction of a separate service for urgent visits.  Whilst some portray the debate as one of access versus continuity, this is snot necessarily the case.  Most current visits by a practice will not necessarily be by the patient’s own GP.  There are systems that have developed in different places around the country where a paramedic or nurse practitioner report back into the surgery before, during and/or after carrying out a home visit.  It does seem there is mileage in such a system that could potentially (according to the LMC conference debate) release 2 hours a day of time for practices.

Of course, not all visits are equal.  Many GPs in the debate have drawn the distinction between urgent on the day visits particularly requiring a “convey to hospital or not” decision, and the scheduled complex visits for very frail elderly people, those with severe disabilities, and those at end of life.  An acute visiting service would be for the former of these types of visits only.

What interests me is why practices are not planning to use the new roles coming via the PCN contract to set up such a service.  The LMC conference gave its own verdict on PCNs, passing a motion that PCNs would not reduce GP workload and would not address the workforce crisis.  But if practices chose to use the new PCN roles in the way they are asking for in relation to visits, it does seem as if PCNs could have an impact.

If the conference had slightly amended its motion as follows, NHS England may have potentially been more receptive:

That conference believes that GPs no longer have the capacity to offer home visits and instruct the GPC England to:

  1. Shift the requirement of home visits from core contract work to the PCN contract
  2. Negotiate sufficient resources for PCNs to establish an acute service for urgent visits
  • Demand any change in service is widely advertised to patients

Would this, though, have garnered the same media reaction?  Would it have drawn the line in the sand that the LMCs were seeking?  Unlikely.

But do practices within a PCN require such a motion to be passed?  What is stopping them from deciding for themselves that this is how they are going to use the new roles that are being funded within their PCN?  I doubt local commissioners would get in their way.  Indeed, I suspect such an initiative would be welcomed, and could even attract additional local resource.  The bigger barriers are internal: the change capacity within PCNs; and of actually making change happen across multiple practices.

Relying on the promises of the major political parties to resolve the challenges in general practices is unlikely to be any more successful in the future than it has been in the past.  Whatever the right changes to make are, the best ones are going to come from within the service itself.  If 74% of an LMC conference believe an acute visiting service will help, maybe now is the time to push ahead with its implementation.

19
nov
0

A Network of Primary Care Networks?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Is a network of primary care networks (PCNs) a good idea?  What are the benefits, and why is operating a network of PCNs more difficult than it might at first appear?

It is only a couple of months ago that practices divided themselves into groupings along PCN lines, and the scars in some areas are not yet fully healed.  So it is with understandable trepidation that some PCN Clinical Directors are thinking about whether operating as part of a network of PCNs is something they really want to be part of.

The rationale for PCNs to work together is fairly solid.  There are (at least) four good reasons to do it.  First is simply for support.  PCNs are new entities, and many Clinical Directors (CDs) are new to such a leadership position.  By working closely with other PCN CDs, they can make sure they understand what is required of them, how (and whether) to meet the various asks the system is putting on them, and can share intelligence as to how to meet the different PCN requirements.  There is a safety and security in numbers, and operating together reduces the risk of your PCN becoming isolated, of making unintentional errors, or of being singled out by the system.

Second, working together as network of PCNs creates a greater capacity to meet the ever-growing demands the system is placing on this new cadre of leaders.  If one PCN CD can attend a meeting instead of five, the collective group of PCN CDs is better able to manage the workload between them, and protect precious time for building relationships between practices within the PCN.

Third, the collective voice of all the PCNs in an area speaking together is much more powerful than that of any individual PCN.  Indeed, if one PCN says one thing and then is directly contradicted by another, the overall voice of local general practice is weakened and the potential influence of the new PCNs hugely reduced.  But if a network of PCNs can agree a position, it can be hugely influential on the CCG and wider system.

Finally, the level of resources provided to PCNs is small compared to the asks that are being made of them.  By sharing resources, e.g. administration, finance, recruitment, training, HR (etc), the PCN pound will stretch much further, and the benefit to practices and ability to deliver significantly increased.

If the benefits are so clear why, then, is not every PCN already operating within a network of PCNs?  Indeed, why is it that in some places where such alliances across localities previously existed, they have they fallen by the wayside with the advent of PCNs as more formal entities?

Essentially, it is a question of trust.  For example:

  • Do I trust the other PCN CD to speak on my behalf and adequately represent my PCN?
  • Do I trust the other PCN CD not to take advantage of any opportunities for their own PCN, before sharing any relevant information with me?
  • Do I trust that the decisions the other PCN CDs will make are the best ones for practices? Or that if I make a decision that is worse for my PCN but better for the wider group, when the scenario is reversed the other PCN CDs will equally make the same decision?
  • Do my practices trust me to make the right decisions when it comes to the other PCNs? Will they back me if I choose for us to be represented by a different PCN CD? Isn’t it safer to make sure I represent my practices directly?
  • Do I trust that I am getting a fair share of resources that are shared?

With sharing comes a loss of control.  Giving up control in this way requires trust.  The benefits of PCNs working together in a network of networks may be obvious, but without trust it is very difficult for them to be realised.

 

13
nov
0

Mind The Gap!

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

A gap has developed between CCGs and Primary Care Networks (PCNs).

It is not hard to understand why this has happened.  PCNs formed as a result of the national GP contract agreement, and not as a result of commissioning decisions by the local CCG.  Indeed, many CCGs had local primary care development plans in place involving “localities” that were somewhat derailed by the imposition of PCNs via the national contract. The core funding for PCNs comes through the national contract, and it is the national requirements of the PCN DES that practices that have signed up to meet.

Meanwhile local CCGs and STPs have incorporated PCNs within their overall system development plan.  For many, they are the centrepiece of the out-of-hospital plan for the new system.  PCNs in these plans go way beyond groups of practices, and include a whole range of NHS, community and voluntary sector organisations working together to transform care and outcomes for patients and local residents.

But, frequently, the system has not discussed these expectations with the nascent PCNs themselves.  It has not worked to get any agreement about the role that it would like PCNs to play in the future with the new PCN leaders.  Instead local systems seem to be relying on an assumption that because the national framework agreement exists, the PCNs will then function and develop in the way the local system wants them to.

And so we have a problem.  The expectations the local system has of PCNs (to play its role as defined by the local plan) is significantly different to the expectations local practices have of PCNs (to meet the requirements of the PCN DES).  Throw into the mix the issue of overall sustainability of general practice and where PCNs sit in relation to that (where nationally it is not clear let alone locally) then it is not hard to see why this gap between CCGs and PCNs has developed.

This manifests in lots of different ways.  Take the new roles.  There is a gap between the expectations and issues for practices about the introduction of the new roles through PCNs and those of the system.  Practices are concerned about making up the 30% shortfall in funding, about potential liability for the roles if the funding stops after five years, and whether the roles will create rather than reduce overall GP workload.  The system wants to ensure all of the funding for new roles is utilised, that the new roles support the delivery of local plans, and that moving staff into the new roles does not destabilise any local organisations or departments (e.g. the ambulance service, the physiotherapy department).

At the same time many CCGs are in the throes of merger, and moving into larger organisations more distant from individual PCNs.  Without action it is easy to see this gap getting larger and more problematic.

The need to close this gap is urgent.  Many areas are shying away from an honest conversation between PCN leaders, the LMC, and the CCG because it is difficult to get to a shared place on what is, for example, the future of access hubs given the national framework, or the need for a multi-agency PCN board when there is no current national requirement around this, or even what realistic expectations of PCNs are given their limited capacity.  Too often local systems are over-reliant on an expectation that national directives will close this gap for them, when this rarely proves to be the case.  With the gap widening seemingly with every passing week, this conversation, or series of conversations, is both essential and urgent.

6
nov
0

Is the system suffering from “Shiny New Toy Syndrome”?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

If you are not familiar with shiny new toy syndrome, it is characterised by the sufferer wanting to own the latest toy and getting hooked on the intense but very temporary high of the ownership, before moving on to something else.  In the short term the new toy always seems to offer some sort of novel nirvana and the hope of short term gains, and the owner is blinded to the obvious shortcomings of that item.  But then, inevitably, disenchantment sets in, and the owner discards the toy and moves on to the next thing.

It seems to me that at present the wider NHS system is suffering from shiny new toy syndrome when it comes to Primary Care Networks (PCNs).  Whatever the current question, at present the answer is “PCNs”.  From “how will general practice be sustainable in the future?” to “how will we sort out out of hospital care?” and right through to “how will we deliver our ICP plan?”; the answer always seems to be “PCNs”.

As happens with shiny new toy syndrome, the system is apparently blinded to the obvious shortcomings of PCNs, most notably that they are brand new, they have very limited (if any) capacity to deliver, they have a large cohort of inexperienced leaders in place, and the relationships they have are very much in their infancy.  PCN development money is not, unfortunately, magic dust that can make these limitations disappear any time soon.

And it does not take someone with particularly well-honed psychic powers to predict that a year or two down the line widespread disillusionment with PCNs will set in, as they fail to deliver “what we expected”.  This will be followed by questioning as to whether the 30-50,000 population was really the right size, and then a new solution (or shiny new toy) will be put in place to replace this one, with equally unrealistic expectations upon it.

Success generally comes by staying focussed over the long term, and not getting distracted by whatever is new today.  The risk is that in the excitement of PCNs the recent good work that had been put in place to turn round the fortunes of general practice may get lost, including:

  • The GP Forward View and the releasing time for care programme
  • The support for individual practices to meet the challenges they face
  • The support for practices to learn to work together in different ways
  • The support for federations and other at-scale structures as enabling entities operating across multiple practices.

These were things making a difference, and you can feel the system losing its appetite to maintain its focus on them because PCNs are the shiny new toy in town.  Of course PCNs are an opportunity to build on the work so far, to enable further investment where it is needed into general practice, and to develop stronger relationships across general practice and between general practice and the rest of the system.  But it is going to take time.  The benefits will only come over the medium to long term, and they will require PCNs to build on the progress to the point at which they were conceived rather than starting all over again.

Right now what is important is that unrealistic expectations of PCNs are challenged both nationally and locally to give PCNs the chance to grow and develop.  The system needs to move away from shiny new toy syndrome and develop a long term commitment to PCNs as they have been configured, accept the real benefits will come some years down the line, and understand that the best way of accelerating this development is to build on the work already carried out rather than starting all over again.

30
oct
0

Are you ready for Babylon?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Any reports of the demise of GP at Hand as a result of the new requirements on it from next year are, at best, overstated.  More likely is the threat to local practices will be greater.  The question, then, is how should practices react?

From April 2020 when the number of out of area patients in any CCG area reaches a certain threshold (1,000 patients) the GP at Hand contract will be split and a new practice list will be created with a new CCG contract, where the company will need to provide premises, be part of local networks, and meet all services requirements.

At present GP at Hand exceed the threshold in at least 17 of the 32 London CCG areas, and there are reports that it won’t be long until this is the case in all 32 areas.  And it is not just London.  In February this year NHS England approved plans for the expansion into Birmingham, and only a few weeks ago the company announced plans to expand into Manchester.

While the suggestion is that GP at Hand will need to set up under new APMS contract arrangements I think this is unlikely.  My sense is they will instead seek to “partner” with an existing practice in each of the relevant areas (and rumours abound these discussions are already taking place).  This removes the need for any set up costs, or any of the recruitment problems that new APMS contractors generally face.  And of course, the ‘local practice’ label could accelerate further the expansion of the service beyond its current rate by giving it a credibility that an anonymous national organisation wouldn’t otherwise have.  Patients not prepared to de-register from their existing practice to register with an on-line provider may not have the same qualms about shifting to the practice down the road.

Will GP at Hand be able to find local practices open to their advances?  Given the challenging environment general practice continues to find itself in, it is hard to imagine there won’t be at least some who will find the promise of silver too hard to resist.

The main challenge this creates for practices is they rely on risk pooling and cross subsidy, where the capitation fee for younger, fitter patients funds the cost of caring for elderly and complex patients.  The way GP at Hand operates, as Hammersmith MP Andy Slaughter describes it, “is distorting the way primary care is going to operate by sucking the most profitable parts into a parallel digital system”.

How, then, should general practice respond?  There is going to be limited political support, as the Secretary of State for Health proudly announced at the RCGP conference last week he was a GP at Hand patient.  If the argument isn’t going to be won at national level, it may well fall to local areas to take up the fight.

But can local areas do anything with the prospect of such a juggernaut looming large?  Even though the situation might feel hopeless to some, there a number of factors working to the advantage of local practices:

  • Consistently over 90% of patients say that they trust their GP, and there is not a clamouring from patients to move to a new service. If practices can keep patient satisfaction high, it is unlikely patients will leave en masse.
  • The opportunity now exists for practices to put their own digital arrangements in place. In the new contract practices have to offer online consultations by April 2020, and so practices can significantly reduce the differential between the local offering and the GP at Hand offering.  Practices working together in Primary Care Networks (PCNs) provide the opportunity for practices to do this collectively, in a way that is tailored to the specific needs of their local population.
  • Local practices are embedded in local communities. PCNs provide an opportunity for practices to strengthen these links further, and to create more reasons why being part of a local service is better than being part of a corporate, national service.
  • LMCs have a role to play. There may not be national opposition to the roll out of GP at Hand, but practices need to be making sure their local LMC is mobilising opposition locally. GP at Hand may come in the package of a local practice, but it is up to the local GP leaders to ensure the local population is fully aware of the reality of the new situation.

There are probably lots of other factors that I have missed.  My point is that Babylon is coming, and it is important practices understand what is on the way, and think proactively about what they can do to minimise the impact on their own practice.  The head in the sand approach is unlikely to be the best one, and now is the time for local practices to get together and come up with their own plan to mitigate the forthcoming challenge.

23
oct
0

What single thing can have the biggest impact on GP resilience?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

I was talking recently to Dr Rachel Morris (who as many of you will know is a Red Whale presenter, coach, and specialist in resilience) as part of a conversation for her new podcast “You are not a frog” (which focusses on how to build resilience and thrive in challenging environments).  General practice is certainly challenging, and the question Rachel asked me was what can GPs do in such an environment?  What “quick wins” are there that GPs can take?

I reflected on all of the guests we have had on the General Practice podcast, and what is clear is that there are no magic bullets for general practice.  Changes that have worked for some have not worked for others.  Some practices hate telephone appointments, some swear by them.  Some love new roles, some think they simply add to the overall burden of work.  Some like to give the admin team more of the GP workload, but others find the lack of control adds to rather than reduces their stress levels.

There is, however, one thing that GPs who are working in practices that are thriving in the current environment have in common: the ability to make change happen.  I don’t think it is over-stretching it to say that a key part of developing resilience for GPs is the ability to make change happen in their own practice.

I recently interviewed Dr Liz Phillips on the podcast, and she talked about the transformational impact being able to make changes (for her as a partner, compared to 12 years previously as a salaried GP) has had on her.  Longer time listeners to the podcast may also remember the inspirational Dr Farzana Hussain talking about how learning how to make change happen using quality improvement techniques had given her the strength to carry on when she was left as the sole partner in her practice.

Resilience comes from the sense of control that when things are not working, they can be made better.  When problems are being faced, there is a way out.  When making change feels impossible, it is easy to understand why individual GP resilience can suffer.

Recently on the podcast Paul Deffley (in a must-listen episode) described his experience of making changes across multiple practices.  However, it was in his first appearance on the podcast that he described an experience of two practices introducing the same pharmacist to do exactly the same things.  One had made it work really well, one hadn’t.  The pharmacist was the same, and what the pharmacist was doing was the same.  The variable was the practices.  Why would one practice be able to introduce the change successfully and the other not?  Ultimately it came down to ability of the practices to make change happen.

Making change is difficult.  But it is not impossible.  Learning how to make change is a skill, and it is one that it is worth investing in developing because the benefits are so wide-reaching.  I remember my own ‘a-ha’ moment many years ago, when suddenly after 5 years of “managing” in acute hospitals I learnt the role was not simply to keep things going, to do the heavy lifting for a period of time until it was someone else’s turn, but to actually make things better.  I learnt the skill of making change happen, and it completely transformed my own experience of being a manager.

So when Rachel asked me what can GPs and practices do that will make the biggest difference in the challenging environment of modern day general practice, my response was to learn how to make change happen.  Whatever the challenges a practice might face, if it knows how to implement change effectively it will always have a route to overcoming them.

16
oct
0

Guest Blog – Karen Castille – 10 things coaching can do for you

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

When your car won’t start you probably call out a mechanic. And when your drain is blocked it’s likely you’ll need a plumber to help you unblock it. But when might you require the help of a coach? Whilst it’s hard to describe what their role is, it is certainly not to fix things for you!

As it is notoriously tricky to explain what a coach does, it is probably better to flip the question and, instead, describe how the process of coaching might help you.

The coach’s job is to help you move closer to achieving things you want for yourself. However, most of us have a natural tendency to focus on problems rather than on bigger more strategic and longer-term goals that will help us to grow and learn. So I use the mnemonic ‘A.C.E.’ as a reminder of the three possible areas of focus if you work with a coach:

A – an Aspiration, goal or dream that you have

C – a Challenge, problem or issue that you need to rise to or resolve

E – an Experience or event that you want to make sense of

The ‘A’ is future focused; the ‘C’ is mostly present focused; and the ‘E’ focuses on the past.

Based on many years of coaching, here are ten things that most of my clients ask for help with and which usefully describe how a coach might help you.

Aspirational Things (hopes, dreams and longer-term goals)

1. Provide clarity about what you want, then create a tangible plan of the steps you will take to get there.

2. Work out what’s most important to you (rather than focus on the urgent things in front of you now), especially those things that will help you create a more positive future.

3. Determine what success looks like (for you) and embed this into your longer-term goal.

4. Create excitement, momentum and focus to help you move closer to your goal.

Challenges

5. Build confidence and competence in solving your problems and making decisions about things that are troubling you or keeping you awake at night.

6. Help you to stand outside of the problem, rather than being in it, by questioning your assumptions and helping you think about it from different perspectives so that you can consider different solutions.

7. Work out your options – especially if you feel stuck or that the challenge is impossible to overcome – then create commitment to acting on one or more of your ideas.

Experiences or Events (either negative or positive)

8. Reflect on and make sense of past experiences or situations. This can help you to learn from mistakes and let go of things that are out of your control.

9. Help you discover things about yourself that you may not be conscious of such as:

  • Your leadership style and preferences
  • How you deal with challenging behaviour or conflict situations
  • What works for you (and what doesn’t!)

10. Build positive and productive relationships – even with people you don’t get along with – by reflecting on their behaviour as well as your own.

People who have undergone coaching often talk about it being a life changing or transformational experience. But don’t misunderstand me. It is certainly not a cosy chat over a comforting caramel latte! It requires hard brain work and for you to take responsibility for your life and your future. It needs courage to try new things, and commitment to make changes to the way things are.

This said, when the coach and coachee work well together, it is certainly worth the effort.

Unfortunately, you’ll still need to call out a mechanic for your car, or a plumber for your blocked drain. But with coaching, futures get sharply defined, careers get changed, problems get solved, work-life balance can be restored and, importantly, sleep comes more easily!

Dr Karen Castille O.B.E, Executive and Leadership Coach, Author The Self-Coaching Workbook, @karencastille

9
oct
0

Are PCNs the new unit of GP improvement?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The question of whether Primary Care Networks (PCNs) are to replace individual practices as the focus for improvement in general practice is an important one.  If the answer is yes, it potentially represents a direction of travel whereby the focus on the individual practice could be significantly reduced, and (conversely) the opportunities for practices through PCNs could increase way beyond the level set out in the contract.

I asked Robert Varnam, Head of General Practice Development at NHS England, in a recent interview for the General Practice podcast whether PCNs are the new unit of GP improvement.  His response was that while there is a focus on the unique and individual needs of each practice at present, we are in a period of “transition” from practices to PCNs, and are moving increasingly towards working with practices as a group within their individual networks.  The rationale is that when practices collaborate they can generate more ideas more quickly, they can build shared resources that prevent things being done multiple times (e.g. training, directories of service etc) and networks create a route to accessing resources like new roles, that for some practices have been out of reach while working on their own.

Within such a transition, how will the focus on the specific needs of the individual practice be maintained?  This responsibility is likely to fall to the PCN itself.  The ‘system’ will support the PCN, and it will be the role of the PCN to support its member practices.

The question then for the PCN is how it intends to support its member practices.  There are two potential routes open.  One is to use the PCN as an exercise in collaborative improvement for its member practices (and the populations they serve).  The second is to treat the PCN as a bureaucratic hurdle to be overcome to secure resources for member practices.

It is the role of the practices in each PCN to decide what the right balance is for them, and which of these routes they want to go down.   I suspect the assumption made in some STPs and in some quarters nationally that all practices are opting for the former rather than the latter of these two routes is unlikely to be right.  The differing attitude of PCNs to the £1.50 running costs is illustrative of this, as some PCNs are spending as little as possible to maximise the resources that remain for practices, and some could have easily already spent the £1.50 twice over as they embark on a series of different local change initiatives.

Underneath this choice is a question each practice needs to grapple with on its own, which is in light of this overall national direction and given the challenges we face how will we make improvements to our practice?  Will we do it on our own, using the (increasingly limited) resources that will be available?  Or will we do it through the PCN, using the opportunities that brings?  Is it to be done at a practice level whenever we can, and a PCN level when we have to?  Or PCN level whenever we can, and practice level only when we have to?  The mindset here is key.

The PCN route brings resources such as new staff and new investment, as well as the opportunity to make bigger, bolder, more impactful changes.  But as ever there is a trade-off, as individual practice autonomy is reduced, there is less individual control on changes happening across a larger group of practices.  And, inevitably, the more GPs that are involved, the more difficult introducing any change can be.

So far PCNs have been largely about set-up and getting the fundamentals in place, and the opportunities for improvement have not yet been widely exploited.  What remains to be seen is whether practices will choose to use PCNs as a collaborative opportunity to create a general practice that can thrive into the future, or whether PCNs end up as a largely administrative exercise that serve a wider purpose but do not really help core general practice.  PCNs may be the perceived unit of general practice improvement going forward, but ultimately it is up to practices to decide whether this is a route they are prepared to travel down.

2
oct
0

Why PCNs are difficult – Part 2

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

In the world of start-ups, the mantra is that any new idea has to solve a problem. Google solved the problem of finding things on the internet, while Amazon solved the problem of buying things on the internet. But start-ups that begin with a solution and search for a problem to solve are the ones that find life much more difficult.

Google Glass is a classic example. It failed because the creators neglected to define what problems it was solving for its users. There was not even a consensus among the creators about what the core use of Google Glass was. One group argued it could be worn all day as a fashionable device while another thought it should be worn for specific utilitarian functions. They assumed the product would sell itself, and that its hype would be enough to appeal to everyone. But in the end, Google Glass did not provide enough advancement for users compared to older technologies (phones), making the product a useless supplement to their daily lives.

There are some interesting parallels between Google Glass and Primary Care Networks (PCNs). There is not a clear consensus as to the core purpose of PCNs. The wider system wants them to be a mechanism through which general practice is “integrated” with the rest of the system, and the GPC want them to be a mechanism for greater investment into general practice. There is an assumption that by channelling resources through PCNs it will make them successful. But in the end, if PCNs do not make a big enough difference to member practices, success is by no means guaranteed.

PCNs need to work hard to avoid being a solution looking for a problem. Because success depends so heavily upon the engagement and participation of member GPs and practices, they have to define themselves early on as the solution to the twin problems of workload and financial viability. These are the problems in general practice that need to be solved, and working at scale, introducing new roles, and working with the rest of the system are proven solutions, and all (potentially) encapsulated by PCNs.

But the reason PCNs are so difficult is that change is not that straightforward. You can’t start with the solution (PCNs) and expect practices to buy in straight away. Changes succeed or fail as a result of understanding the problem, and building confidence that the solution offered can make a difference. If operating at scale was that easy, we wouldn’t still have 7,000 individual GP practices. If introducing new roles was that easy, they would be much more widespread across practices. If working with the rest of the system was that easy, we would have more than a handful of examples of practices working in partnership with acute and community trusts.

The challenge, then, that largely sits with the new PCN Clinical Directors, is to do the work to understand the specific problems facing local practices, and to convince the local GPs that by working with and through the PCN these problems can be tackled. Without this, PCNs risk being a solution looking for a problem, and ending up the same way as Google Glass.

25
sep
0

Which is better? A Federation or a Primary Care Network?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The rapid emergence of Primary Care Networks (PCNs) has led practices in many areas to consider the question of whether they are better off as part of a federation, or whether it would simply be better to go it alone as a PCN. So which is better, a PCN or a federation?

What criteria do you use to make this decision? Generally, it comes down to a “what have the Romans ever done for us” consideration. Has the federation/PCN had a beneficial impact on practices? Or does it feel like an entity ploughing its own furrow without really impacting on member practices?

The answers to these questions will vary locally. But the opportunity federations and PCNs can provide for member practices is clear. Federations can provide an organisational structure that PCNs (that are not legal entities) can harness to employ staff, manage risk, and take away any personal or practice liabilities. They can deliver benefits of operating at a greater scale than PCNs, such as attracting higher calibre staff, establishing central functions (such as finance and human resources), and reducing costs through better purchasing power as well as attracting funding for general practice. They operate at a scale where they can build and maintain organisational relationships with all of the local health and social care organisations in way that an individual PCN cannot hope to. General practice itself can have a much stronger voice in the system if the federation is speaking on behalf of all practices, where six PCNs wanting six different things can quickly dilute the collective voice of the profession.

A PCN on the other hand can have a much closer and more intimate relationship with its member practices. It can take time to fully understand the individual challenges each of its practices is facing and take tailored action to support them. It can be nimble and change direction quickly. If the focus needs to change from one challenge to something more pressing it can be reactive and responsive. Each practice can be part of the decision making, and understand exactly what has been decided and why. There can be a transparency about funding, use of resources, and exactly where everything is going. They can make change happen at a local level in a way federations could never hope to, because of the relationships they have in place.

For those of you with longer memories, you may remember back in the days when CCGs were being formed one of the key questions was – what is the right size of the CCG? Should they be small and closer to practices, or should they be large and able to consolidate resources and the available funding to maximise the impact the CCGs could have? In the end both arguments were right: the smaller CCGs didn’t have the resources, influence and financial stability needed to be effective, and the larger CCGs quickly became distant from practices.

The lesson here is that you need both. You need to be large to be effective, and you need to be small to remain relevant to local practices and local populations. The incredible opportunity that general practice has in areas which have federations in place is to have both: they can use the federation to achieve all the benefits that size requires, and the PCN to maintain the localism and energy to drive locally relevant change.

The difficult question, then, is not whether a federation or a PCN is better, but how to bring federations and PCNs together in a way that maintains the trust and confidence of local practices, and allows the two to work effectively together for the benefit of all.

18
sep
0

Three top tips for PCN development plans

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The development funding available for Primary Care Networks (PCNs) is a tremendous opportunity. But how to make best use of the money? How should PCNs focus their development plans to ensure the money has the maximum impact? This week I consider three ways PCNs can ensure they make the most of the new money.

1.Get Capacity

The one thing that can accelerate the development of a new entity like a PCN more than anything else is capacity. It is virtually impossible for new PCN Clinical Directors to have the time to do everything that is needed to be done in the limited number of sessions they have available. They need someone to be enacting the decisions made, delivering on what has been agreed, and doing the work required to turn ideas into real change. One of the biggest frustrations of the new PCN Clinical Directors is lack of time, and additional capacity in the form of a project manager is the best way of overcoming this.

While some PCNs may be forward thinking enough to invest some of their (recurrent) £1.50 in project management support, many are reluctant to commit what is effectively practice money so quickly. The development fund gives PCNs the opportunity to try a project manager on a fixed-term basis, and then down the line if they find it is a worthwhile investment they can consider making the post permanent using the £1.50.

2.Focus on Delivery

There is something intangible about “development”. But for any new entity (and PCNs are no different) success is dependent upon their ability to deliver. Attending the right meetings, saying the right things to the right people, and learning about how the system works are all well and good, but ultimately if the PCN is not able to deliver anything, it will not be a success. The most important part of development is learning how to deliver.

The best way to learn how to deliver is to deliver something! Don’t think about development as something that is done before you start delivering. Think of it as what you learn while you are trying to deliver. So in the PCN development plan identify what you want to deliver, and make sure you include the resources necessary to make it happen.

3.Create Benefits for Practices

The most important stakeholders in PCNs are the member practices. If the member practices believe in the PCN and its ability to make a difference, then the PCN is much more likely to be successful. Conversely, if practices are working to keep the PCN at arms-length, meaningful change is going to be very difficult to realise.

It is therefore important to demonstrate as early as possible to practices that working together can create significant benefits for the practices and their patients. This is particularly important if the experience to date has been a set of painful meetings to create a network agreement, and then pressure to deliver extended hours. It is perfectly reasonable for the development plan to include work that will not only deliver benefit for member practices, but also include the resources to achieve it.

 

11
sep
0

Why PCNs are difficult – Part 1

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Change is difficult. Changing behaviour is even more difficult. Persuading other people to change their behaviour is even more difficult still. Which is why PCNs are difficult.

The really difficult part of PCNs is that the main benefits come as a result of GPs changing how they work. PCNs have all recently been through the trials of working out how between them they are to cover the extended hours requirements that now fall on the network. The (relatively) easy route is to say everyone has to do their bit. The impact of this is that practices who were choosing not to do it, now have to “choose” to do it. So the impact of the Primary Care Network (so far) on those practices is that they are having to do more work.

At the other end of the spectrum, practices in a PCN work out how they can see each other’s patients. They create a “hub” to carry out extended hours on behalf of all the practices. They expand the remit of the hub beyond extended hours, and into seeing all the on the day demand from the practices across the network. The team seeing the on the day demand is multidisciplinary, led by a GP. The impact on the GPs in the PCN is that they have more time for routine appointments, and they experience some relief from the constant pressure of the daily demand.

The first option does not require GPs to change their clinical practice. They simply have to do more of the same in order to comply with the requirements of the PCN. In that sense it is “easy”, and is why many PCNs have gone down this route.

The second option requires a whole raft of changes. It means all the practices have to agree to the new way of working. It means practices have to trust their patients to be seen by clinicians from other practices. It means the way each practice delivers continuity of care has to change. It means the management of the new urgent care team needs to be agreed. It means when things go wrong practices have to work together to solve the problems as they arise. It requires strong leadership, trust between the practices and a willingness to make changes together.

In summary, it is an extremely difficult option to put into practice, and why most PCNs would have discounted it (or anything similarly disruptive) as an option without much consideration. The opportunity for significant gains is there, but the journey to achieve them is so difficult that they are not realised.

This, incidentally, is the reason many mergers have not made life any better for the GPs involved. Instead of delivering “economies of scale” they have simply led to twice the problems and twice the number of people to engage when any decision needs to be made. In the same way that mergers are not a solution in themselves, but rather create the opportunity for improvement, so PCNs are not a solution for general practice in themselves, but rather create an opportunity for things to be better.

PCNs are an opportunity, but an opportunity that is difficult for practices to exploit. PCNs are difficult because change is difficult, and for PCNs to make a real difference to general practice, real changes need to be made: changes to the way practices work together; changes to the way individual practices in the PCN operate; and changes to the way individual GPs (including those that may not want to make the change) operate.

4
sep
0

Making the most of PCN development support

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The good news is that £43.5m has been released nationally to support PCN development. This is new money for PCNs, and according to the guidance is “a floor not a ceiling”. The money can only be used for PCN development or PCN Clinical Director (CD) development. “Around 10% of the funds are intended for CD specific development” (expected to be £3,000 – £4,000 per CD).

The process for accessing the funding is relatively straightforward. PCNs are to self-assess their current needs in September, and determine how they want to develop in a support plan. The PCN Maturity Matrix (here) or local version thereof is to be used for this self-assessment. PCNs are also to identify “a specific service improvement priority to focus on as a means for closer collaboration”.

6 development support “domains” have been identified that the guidance suggests PCNs will want to access as they work on their agreed priority: PCN set-up and support, organisational development and change, leadership development and support, supporting collaborative working (MDTs), population health management, and social prescribing and asset based community development.

The PCN identified support plan has to be agreed by “ICSs/STPs, places, CCGs, PCN CDs and other system partners”. In practice for the majority of places this means the CCG and the PCN CD have to agree it. The support is to be mobilised in October. Then “systems and CCGs support PCNs to review progress against PCN priorities and self-assessment” once the support is in place through to March.

There is a parallel process for systems to work with the new PCN CDs to identify their individual and collective development needs and develop tailored plans with support requirements. Once that support has commenced, “with support from systems, PCN CDs review progress against priorities. Areas for additional support identified, revised development plan produced”.

So there is a huge opportunity for PCNs to access a significant chunk of funding that can support the member practices and their work together. There is a risk that accessing the funding becomes the mechanism by which the system exerts management control (i.e. the PCN cannot have the funding unless it is operating in the way in which the system wants it to), and the joint review of progress between the PCN CDs and the system become performance management meetings. But this risk can be mitigated, and the amount of development funding mean it is worth jumping through a few hoops to access it. The key is keeping control of the agenda (which I have written about previously) – if the PCN is clear what it wants to achieve, then this whole process can be worked as an enabler for that.

My main advice to PCNs thinking about their development needs is to differentiate between the internal and external needs. By internal needs, I mean the needs of the member practices, the strength of the relationships between the member practices, and the ability of the practices to work effectively together and deliver services. By external needs, I mean the ability of the PCN to work collaboratively with community services and other teams, to understand the local population health needs, and to be and active partner within the wider STP/ICS system.

I think it is important to prioritise the internal needs first. If practices cannot work together, support each other, agree on priorities, and make changes to delivery across practices, the PCN is very unlikely to be successful. This joint working between the practices is the bedrock of PCN success. All other things will follow if this is in place. So my advice is to prioritise working on the internal needs first, even if both practices (because it can be difficult and threatening) and the system (because they want to widen the focus of PCNs) want more of the initial energy focussed on the external needs.

28
aug
0

What is a Primary Care Network?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

What is a Primary Care Network? Well? What would you say? It is a question that should be simple to answer, but in reality is not. According to the NHS England website, “They consist of groups of general practices working together with a range of local providers, including across primary care, community services, social care and the voluntary sector, to offer more personalised, coordinated health and social care to their local populations”. Is that what you were going to say? I didn’t think so…

The NHS England definition feels more like an ambition than a definition. Technically, today, a Primary Care Network is a group of GP practices who have signed up to the Network Contract DES, and who as a result have a Clinical Director and a network agreement in place between the practices. And, as the Network Contract DES Specification states, “There is no requirement for the Network Agreement that is signed by 30 June 2019 to include collaboration between practices and other providers, but this will need to be developed over 2019/20 and to be well developed by the beginning of 2020/21 when the Network Agreement will need to be updated to reflect the new Network Contract DES specification.”

Why have GP practices joined primary care networks? Of course for some it is the opportunity to deliver coordinated, integrated care for the local population, but for most it is because access to much of the financial and workforce resources in the new GP contract is dependent on joining. There is an expectation that up to 40% of the additional funding for general practice will come through the new networks, and as the GPC’s initial press release about the new contract said, “Support and funding for Primary Care Networks mean practices can work together, led by a single GP, and employ additional staff to provide a range of services in the local area, ensuring patients have ready access to the right healthcare professional, and helping reduce workload pressures on GPs.”

So we are in this strange limbo position whereby the NHS has introduced Primary Care Networks and created a rhetoric around them that they are to do one thing (co-ordinate and integrate care for local populations), but an establishment of them where the on-the-ground reality is about GP practices working together to secure the investment and resources they need to survive.

This, inevitably, is leading to confusion. The wider system is somewhat bamboozled by Primary Care Networks and the conflicting messages about them, and as a result has no idea what to make of them. “PCN” is being added to the list of acronyms such as QOF, PMS, GMS that make general practice so inaccessible to outsiders. Even practices themselves are not sure whether to keep the PCN at arms-length, and insist that PCN services are kept distinct from the services provided by individual practices, or to embrace the opportunity for cost-saving, income generation and workforce development that PCNs could potentially provide.

But in the midst of this wider confusion there is huge opportunity for practices. If practices can maintain clarity on exactly what a PCN is (as defined by their contract), keeping in mind that the contractual requirements will change and evolve, it actually puts them in a strong position. They can focus on maximising the opportunities of PCNs for their practices for now, and on ensuring that as the system asks for more from PCNs (as it inevitably will) that appropriate funding follows.

21
aug
0

Primary Care Networks: Who sets the agenda?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

It has been a challenging start for Primary Care Networks (PCNs). From first settling the membership and getting the network agreement signed, to then immediately having to tackle any half day closure issues and practices who were not providing extended hours, it is fair to say the journey so far has not been easy. But where does the focus now lie for PCNs?

The risk for PCNs is that they continue to be recipients of an agenda and a timetable set by others. Now PCNs are in place, there are a plethora of organisations and individuals keen to meet them and talk about their work and their programme and how the PCN can support it. The number of meeting requests for the new PCN CDs is growing, and will doubtless accelerate once the holidays are over and September arrives.

PCNs are different from CCGs and other NHS organisations, in that they are not statutory bodies. The NHS hierarchy has no formal control over them. Born out of the GP contract, they are contractual constructs and as such are independent contractors in the same way that GP practices are. If it is not in the contract, the PCN can choose not to do it.

There is a power in this position. Clearly it is going to be in the interest of the PCN to build constructive relationships with other organisations (even if the primary motivation is to make delivering the future contractual requirements easier!), and to take actions to support the local population. But this is different to letting others set the agenda for your PCN, in terms of what it is trying to do and what it spends its time discussing and working on.

The establishment of a PCN is an exercise in change management for general practice. Changes succeed or fail depending on the extent to which the problem the change is trying to solve is clear, the extent to which those involved in the change are bought in to solving the identified problem together, and the ability to show progress over time towards solving the problem (I would strongly recommend you take half an hour to read this book if you haven’t already).

This means to be successful PCNs need to exist not because the contract mandates that they do, but as an enabler to solving the problem(s) the practices have identified. It is critical PCN practices spend time agreeing exactly how they want to maximise the benefit of the new PCN, whether that is the outcomes for the local population, the financial sustainability of the member practices, the workload of the member GP partners, or whatever the key local challenges are.

Once this is clear, setting the agenda is much more straightforward. The PCN will prioritise anything that supports delivery of its aim, and de-prioritise anything that does not. Control of the agenda comes from the PCN itself, not from outside. If progress is monitored by the use of some agreed regular measurements, this focus will remain in place as the months progress.

But without a clear purpose, PCNs run the risk that their agenda will be set by others, that they will achieve very little that makes a difference locally, and that any initial enthusiasm and support from practices will quickly wane. As the contractual requirements lessen for the remainder of the year, and as PCN development monies emerge, if you have not done so already now is the time for member practices to establish and agree what they want the PCN to achieve, and then to make sure it controls the agenda and how its precious time is used to ensuring that goal is delivered.

 

14
aug
0

Should PCNs have a national voice?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

There was an interesting recent debate on one of the national WhatsApp groups about whether there is a role for an independent national PCN voice. Opinion was divided, with strong proponents both for and against.

The argument for goes along the lines that PCNs are something new (with a new cadre of PCN Clinical Directors) doing something different and more inclusive than general practice, and hence need to be represented at a national level in a different way to the GPC/how core general practice is represented.

I think there are two main reasons why this is not a good idea. First, it will weaken the national voice of general practice. General practice remains in crisis, despite the new contract and the formation of PCNs. It is critical that general practice retains a strong national voice. It currently has this through the GPC. If a separate voice for PCNs develops, it risks enabling the government, NHS England and national bodies to bypass the GPC, and push initiatives and new ways of working onto general practice via the PCN route. The greater dependence general practice has on PCN funding, the greater this risk becomes.

Second, it could limit local PCN flexibility. There are people working hard to try and enable the development of PCNs to be determined at a local level. One of the key strengths of PCNs is as local network enablers, bringing general practice together with a wide range of local stakeholders for the betterment of local outcomes. Each place is different, and will need different strategies and ways of working, and (more importantly) will want to control how this happens for itself. The old mentality of being dictated to from on-high needs to be replaced with a vibrant local determinism, a shift far less likely to happen if a national PCN representative body exists.

PCNs do, however, need a strong voice within their local integrated care system (ICS). Part of the PCN Clinical Director role is to represent the PCN within the local ICS, and how effectively this happens may determine whether there is any overall shift of resources (and workload) from secondary to primary care, and whether the system invests in primary care.

The key to this voice being strong is for general practice to ensure it presents a united front locally. If general practice is represented by a federation, the LMC and PCNs, none of whom can agree on what they want or how they want it, the voice is divided and the overall voice is diluted. Ultimately this internal division will end up in less resource being shifted to primary care.

The desire for a separate PCN voice comes from a sense of some GPs and practices not feeling represented. The solution, however, is not to create a separate voice for them, but to work hard to establish an inclusive, strong, unified voice for general practice, and to work to overcome the often historic barriers and disputes that exist within general practice for the benefit of all.

Here at Ockham Healthcare we have produced a free guide for PCNs which outlines 10 practical steps for PCNs to establish a powerful voice. It is free for subscribers – to subscribe simply click here. A unified PCN voice at a system level, and a single general practice voice at a national level, will maximise the overall impact of general practice on the system, and increase its chances of emerging from its current challenges.

7
aug
2

The danger of the PCN “maturity matrix”

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog2 Comments

How will you know if your PCN is “mature”? What is maturity of a PCN, and who is to decide when you have reached it?

There is a danger that NHS management speak (I think it is fair to categorise “PCN maturity matrix” in this way!) can generate a life of its own. The PCN guidance suggests a national PCN maturity matrix will be produced (which was due at the end of July, and so should appear any day now). The PCN frequently asked questions says that “all systems should use the provided maturity matrix in the first instance to assist with assessing the relative maturity of networks”.

This response inevitably gave rise to the next question, “Will the PCN maturity matrix be used for performance management?”, and we are assured that, “the maturity matrix is not an assurance vehicle for PCN performance”. However, it does seem that creating a PCN development plan based on an assessment against this matrix will be a required gateway for accessing PCN development monies.

While there is clearly a value in laying out for nascent PCNs what “good” looks like, the danger of a national PCN maturity matrix is that it could impose requirements or expectations upon a PCN beyond those set in the national contract. It could start to impinge not just on what PCNs have to do, but how they have to do it. There is a fine line between a national framework (and NHS England has pushed back on any attempts by local areas to create their own framework) that helps PCNs to develop, and one the determines how they should operate.

Rather than let a national team decide what maturity looks like for your PCN, it may be better for the PCN itself to determine what maturity looks like. A PCN that decides for itself where it is going and how it will develop will be likely to progress more quickly, as it will retain ownership of its future. Equally, if a national framework is used to shift autonomy away from member practices and assert top down control on how PCNs are to operate, progress is likely to be laboured.

So what is maturity for your PCN? I would argue it is essentially framed around the ability to deliver:

  • The ability of the PCN to deliver across the member practices (see last week’s blog for the importance of the relationships between the practices, an area unlikely to be given prominence in the national maturity matrix)
  • The ability of the PCN to support member practices who struggle with delivery, and to support the delivery of core general practice
  • The ability to remove blocks to delivery as they occur, such as resolving disputes between member practices
  • The ability of the PCN to build productive relationships with system partners to enable effective delivery
  • Having the infrastructure in place to enable effective delivery, such as data sharing, access to information, ability to attract, employ and retain staff, project management etc.
  • The ability to access good ideas, new ways of working, solutions to challenges and support when needed from both inside and outside of the PCN to enable delivery
  • Having effective leadership in place that can make delivery happen

Your PCN will inevitably have its own view on what its maturity looks like. The key is a good PCN is not necessarily one that is assessed as “mature” against all elements of a nationally set maturity matrix, but one that can turn ideas into actions and into tangible results, and is able to make the biggest possible difference for its practices and its patients.

Clearly it is worth jumping through a few hoops to access what is a significant amount of PCN development money. But don’t let the process determine how you will develop. Make that decision for yourselves.

31
jul
0

The relationship between a practice and a PCN

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

As a GP practice, how do you think of your PCN?  Do you see it as a joint initiative between you and your fellow practices to work together to make life better for each other and for your patients? Or do you see it as something you have to do because the GP contract/CCG/government have decreed it?

When you think of the work that does and will take place through the PCN, do you see it as practice work done jointly with the other PCN practices? Or is it “PCN work”, separate from the work you do in the practice?

How the relationship with the PCN “feels” to the member practices is crucial.  If it feels like the PCN sits above the practices, in a hierarchical fashion (as depicted on the left below), there is going to be a perceived separation between the practices and the PCN.  The work of the PCN will feel separate from the “core” work of practices, and the PCN will run the risk of being a burden to practices both in terms of workload and finances.

If the PCN feels like it is the group of practices working together (as depicted on the right), then the opportunity of PCNs for practices is greater.  The work of the PCN will support and become part of the core work of practices, rather than operate separately from it.  The PCN work becomes the way the practices can improve their workload and their finances.

Even within one PCN the attitude towards it by member practices can vary.  You may have one practice viewing it as something separate, but another seeing it as integral to the practice and how it operates.  This point was brought home to me this week in a conversation I had with Paul Deffley from Practice Unbound (watch out for this episode of the General Practice podcast coming up in August).  He described a pharmacist operating across two practices.  It was the same pharmacist following exactly the same processes and seeing exactly the same types of patient.

The reaction to the pharmacist by the two practices was completely different.  One practice quickly got to the place where they couldn’t imagine how they ever managed without a pharmacist before, and thought the impact on the GPs and on the practice had been enormous.  The other practice was far less enamoured, and if anything thought the pharmacist had created additional work for the GPs.  The main difference was the first practice had actively engaged with the pharmacist, invited them to team meetings, and made them part of the practice “family”, whereas the other practice had never embraced the pharmacist in the same way.

If a practice welcomes and takes on the PCN initiatives as part of the way they are now working, the impact for the individual practice, and the for the PCN overall is likely to be considerable.  If a practice keeps its focus on what it can control, and keeps the PCN work at arm’s length, the impact will be far less.

The implications of this are huge.  It impacts the extent PCNs are able to make changes to meet the needs of practices, and how effectively PCNs can support the sustainability of general practice.  It will directly affect the finances.  Practices would willingly pay a third of the funding for new services that they want, if the “centre” is chipping in 70%.  Subsidising an arms-length PCN initiative for the same amount is an entirely different matter.

It is not the existence of PCNs that is important, but how they operate.  This will vary considerably across the country.  For all the talk about PCN plans, maturity matrices, and development programmes, my number one focus right now for making a PCN successful would be on getting the relationship between the practices and the PCN right.

17
jul
0

The Top Ten Most Popular General Practice Podcasts of All Time!

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

While the General Practice podcast is having a few week’s holiday (it will be back on the 29th July), it is a good time to catch up on some of the episodes you may have missed.  The podcast started in 2016, and there are now over 170 episodes, so choosing the best ones might be a challenge!  To help you I’ve identified the 10 most downloaded episodes, as they may be a good place to start. Here, in traditional reverse order, are…

  1. Marie-Anne Essam – Social Prescribing and Link Workers

In this episode, I spoke to Marie-Anne Essam a GP in Herts Valley and an enthusiastic ambassador for social prescribing. She explained what it is and told a powerful story about a patient of hers which amply illustrated the value of social prescription. She also talked about the specific role of link workers including their salary, their competences and their likely backgrounds.

  1. Riaz Jetha – The new Primary Care Network DES

In the days immediately following the publication of the new network DES special guest Dr Riaz Jetha and I discussed the newly released specification. We looked at the nature of the network agreement, the role of federations, how clinical leaders were to be recruited, population size, funding and much more.

  1. Neha Shah and Colin Haw – The practical implications of establishing PCNs

In this episode I was joined by Neha Shah, a Legal Director from Capsticks and Accountant Colin Haw from BHP Chartered Accountants.  They discussed some of the legal, financial and governance issues facing general practice as it began to establish Primary Care Networks. Specifically they considered how networks would be hosted and the implications for liability, choices around the organisational form, employment contracts, pensions and VAT.

  1. Ben Gowland – The new GP contract

In this episode the tables were turned with me in the hot seat detailing the importance of the new GP contract. I explained, in the week after the publication of the new GP contract, why it is a huge opportunity and gave me optimism for the future. I described the way that the additional £2.8bn attached to the contract was expected to flow, how primary care networks were to be developed and how they would be staffed. I also gave some practical advice to practices about what they should be doing then, in preparation for the year ahead.

  1. Ceinwen Mannall – Education for clinical pharmacists in general practice

In this episode I spoke to Ceinwen Mannall, who is the national lead for Clinical Pharmacists in General Practice education at the Centre for Postgraduate Pharmacy Education (CPPE).  She told me about the training available to pharmacists moving into general practice, the impact and value that pharmacists have and tips for practices thinking of employing a clinical pharmacist.

  1. Tom Howseman – Better managing demand through pre-triage protocols

Tom Howseman is a GP Partner in a large urban practice in Northampton. When their complement of GP partners fell from twelve to six due to retirements and they couldn’t recruit they decided to adopt a more multi-disciplinary approach. Over the last two years they have introduced and refined a system of pre-triage protocols which enable reception staff to collect information from patients presenting on the day which is then helpful to the pre-triage clinicians in directing those patients to the appropriate member of the emergency care team. 20,000 additional appointments have been created through this system and in this episode Tom explained how they have done it.

  1. Rachel Morris – GP stress, burnout and resilience

Rachel Morris is a GP, an executive coach and presenter with Red Whale; producers of the famous GP Update. In this episode she looked at GP resilience; what it is and how can you acquire it. She considered the causes of stress and burnout and pointed to a range of useful resources GPs can use to develop their personal resilience.

  1. Nikki Kanani – The new GP Contract – Part 1

My special guest for two weeks in February/March this year was Dr Nikki Kanani, one of the chief architects of the new GP contract. Nikki is a GP in south-east London and is currently Director of Primary Care for NHS England. This is the first of two discussions with Nikki in the Top Ten and in this part, she explained the role of primary care networks in general practice and looked in detail at the funding behind the new contract. She explained how the money would be delivered and for what it would be made available including 20,000 new staff, support for clinical leadership and Investment in innovation.

  1. Nikki Kanani – The new GP Contract – Part 2

In this second part of the interview with Dr Nikki Kanani she addressed the concerns of podcast listeners about primary care networks including population size, hosting of the networks and the role of federations. She looked at how clinical leaders should be identified and focused in detail on the timetable from March 2019 onwards and what practices should be doing at that time to guarantee success.

  1. Rachel Morris – Developing GP leaders

Top of the pile, and more popular than even Nikki Kanani, sees the second entry for Dr Rachel Morris.  In this podcast Rachel described two courses that Red Whale were running aimed at developing leadership skills in primary care leaders. The first is Lead. Manage. Thrive! – a very popular one day course in management skills for GPs. The second wass a new course on Working At Scale. Rachel explained how and why the programmes were developed, who the training is aimed at and what the courses cover.

So that’s the current Top Ten. Don’t forget, if you’d like to see something featured in a future episode of the General Practice Podcast or you’ve got a story to tell yourself, just email me at ben@ockham.healthcare or DM me on Twitter @benxgowland and we’ll do the rest.

10
jul
0

Guest Blog – Nick Sharples – PCNs and Social Prescribers

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

With the vast majority of Practices now a part of a Primary Care Network, and a week into the formal ‘Go Live’ date for PCNs to start operating, PCN Clinical Directors and their teams are starting to consider recruiting the Social Prescribers for whom the NHS are providing full funding in the current financial year. Now is perhaps therefore an opportune time to review the ways in which PCNs can best recruit, train and introduce Social Prescribing to their new organisations.

Our engagement with PCNs regarding training for Social Prescribers has identified a number of different models currently being considered by PCNs. Perhaps the most innovative approach is to realise that the opportunity is significantly greater than simply recruiting an additional member of staff. These PCNs are already examining ways in which the recruitment of the new Social Prescriber can herald the introduction of a Social Prescribing culture and the provision of a comprehensive Social Prescribing Service throughout the PCN. This can be achieved by leveraging the people skills of the health professionals already working within PCN Practices and recruiting suitable volunteers from the patient community to support the Social Prescriber, who sits at the heart of the new Social Prescribing Service.

Introducing a Sustainable and Comprehensive Social Prescribing Service across the PCN

It may seem a little counter intuitive, if not naïve, to believe that one can create a sustainable and comprehensive SP service with just a single Link Worker to support potentially 50,000 patients. But with imagination and determination it is not impossible. The key is in being prepared to engage and upskill existing staff and leverage them to support the primary Social Prescriber, and in doing so to help the new funded Social Prescriber be as effective in their role as possible.

Practice Social Prescribing Champions

With the average PCN in England likely to comprise between 3 – 6 Practices (based on an average list size of 8,490 in Dec 2018), forward thinking PCNs are seeking to train up not just the primary Social prescriber but a suitable volunteer member of staff with the right people skills from each of the PCN practices. These Social Prescribing Champions in each Practice will facilitate and smooth the referral process to the primary Social Prescriber, actively recruit volunteers from their patient communities to assist the Social Prescribing Service and will be trained and able to stand in for the primary Social Prescriber when he or she is on holiday or off sick.

Where appointment capacity becomes a problem for the primary Social Prescriber, as experience with the introduction of other allied health professionals suggests it will do, these Practice Champions, trained to the same level as the primary Social Prescriber, can undertake their own Social Prescribing, working in their own Practice and with their own patients to alleviate waiting times for the primary Social Prescriber. This may not be practical in every Practice and will depend on the clinical priorities determined by the GPs, but some are starting with a half day a week of Prescribing from their own trained Champion and building up as appropriate. However, if started, this needs to become a long-term commitment with a long notice period, as continuity of Link Worker is fundamental to building the trust and relationship with the patient.

Volunteers

There is much emerging evidence that using volunteers alongside trained Social Prescribers can significantly enhance the scope and reach of a scheme. Volunteers can provide emotional and practical support to service users and have in some cases been further trained as link workers to provide facilitated referrals to some of the community groups within the local area. They come from a wide range of backgrounds; some may be recruited from patients who have been referred to the service and wish to volunteer as part of their social prescription; others may come from the Patient Participation Group and yet more may be locally recruited volunteers with multiple skills and experience of life who wish to offer something back to the community. Recruitment of a cadre of volunteers at PCN Practices will significantly increase the overall effectiveness of the Social Prescribing service.

A Potential Structure Suitable for a PCN to Establish a Comprehensive Social Prescribing Service (Click image to enlarge)

 

The Primary Social Prescriber – PCN Controlled or Aligned with Existing Local Scheme?

Given the challenges of expecting a single, unsupported Link Worker to make a significant difference in a patient community of up to 50,000, NHS(E) and the Social Prescribing Network have both suggested that the most effective way of managing new PCN Link Workers is to closely align them to an existing Social Prescribing Scheme in the area. This can range from close collaboration and sharing of administration, resources and operating protocols where appropriate, through to fully outsourcing the employment and management of the Social Prescriber to a local CVS scheme.

For both outsourcing the role and for close collaboration, the choice of host CVS based scheme is crucial. Ideally it should be already working with and taking referrals from Primary Care in some respect so that the working practices and administrative processes are similar. For example, whilst a local Social Housing based Social Prescribing scheme might be delivering great results, it is unlikely to be working closely with GP Practices in the manner that will be expected of a PCN based Social Prescriber. The desired synergies from aligning the PCN Social Prescriber with such a scheme are therefore unlikely to be realised.

Recruiting the Social Prescriber – Upskill or Recruit from Outside?

PCNs are currently considering whether to upskill an existing member of staff as a Social Prescriber or recruit from outside. Recruiting skilled and experienced Social Prescribers from existing schemes in the voluntary sector is a possibility, but this does nothing to expand overall Social Prescribing capacity and is likely to lead to ill feeling between Primary Care and existing Social Prescribing schemes. Additionally, in large urban areas with many PCNs seeking to recruit Social Prescribers, the availability of external, currently unemployed candidates is likely to be quickly exhausted.

Up skilling of existing Practice staff has many benefits; they are already known to GPs within the Practice/PCN, they will be familiar with procedures in the Practice and, if their PCN has undertaken Active Signposting training for their Reception teams, they will have a good understanding of the available services and community groups operating in the area. In short, after suitable training in the specific skills needed by a Social Prescriber, they are more likely to be ready to hit the ground running.

The only real prerequisite for upskilling an existing member of staff is that they fulfil the person specification of a Social Prescriber. These soft people skills are inherent in those who make the best Social Prescribers, and it is no surprise that many come to Social Prescribing from the caring professions. These soft people skills include a natural desire to help people and give them time, the ability to listen, empathy, patience, excellent communication and organisation skills, the ability to inspire trust and confidence, and the flexibility, resilience and initiative to work on their own with minimal direction. Nurses, HCAs, some Receptionists, Social workers and voluntary workers often make good Link Workers.

Training the New Social Prescriber and Practice Champions

If recruited directly from a local CVS based scheme working closely with Primary Care, the new Social Prescriber is unlikely to need much additional training. In all other circumstances however, the newly recruited Prescriber will require upskilling in the specific skills used by Social Prescribers. These include Active Listening, Motivational Interviewing, Health Coaching, preparing Care Plans and managing the administrative processes required of the role so that they align with those of the PCN.

Motivational Interviewing skills are particularly important in a Primary Care setting, where the percentage of referred patients who are at the pre-contemplation stage of the change cycle tends to be higher than for service users in CVS based schemes.

If adopting the PCN Social Prescribing service structure suggested above, the training will also need to encompass the Practice Social Prescribing Champions who, by definition, are unlikely to possess any existing Social Prescribing skills. Training the new primary Social Prescriber alongside the volunteer Practice Champions is a wholly positive approach and should be considered the default.    It establishes the supportive network and close personal and professional relationships needed for the Social Prescribing service to operate effectively across the PCN.

If looking for external training support, PCNs would be advised to retain a training organisation, such as DNA Insight, who will train the PCN’s Social Prescribers as a single group and who will customise the training to suit the specific needs and operating protocols of the PCN. Facilitated Active Learning Sets, such as those included in DNA Insight’s SocialPrescriberPlus™ programme, help the whole Social Prescribing team to build an enduring and close personal and professional network that can address challenges, identify and build on Best Practice, increase resilience within the team and meet the priorities set by the PCN Clinical Director and the Practices.

 Conclusion

In conclusion, the additional resource of a fully funded Social Prescriber to work across the PCN is a wholly positive development. On their own however, the challenge of supporting up to 50,000 patients is likely to be overwhelming and the expected benefits may not extend as deeply into the PCN Practices as had been hoped, especially once the Social Prescriber’s list has filled up and waiting times start to become unacceptable.

PCNs can however take an innovative approach to creating a sustainable and effective PCN-wide Social Prescribing Service – by training, utilising and empowering volunteer Practice Social Prescribing Champions to support the primary Social Prescriber. These Champions in turn recruit volunteers from the local/patient community with lived experience, some of whom may have benefited from the service, to provide practical assistance and support to the team, allowing the team to focus on delivering the best possible care to the greatest possible number of patients.

Other Social Prescribing models are of course available and are equally valid. The key outtake is that with initiative, ambition and innovation it is entirely possible to create a comprehensive Social Prescribing Service for a Primary Care Network, despite only having funding for a single Social Prescriber.

Useful Resources and Social Prescribing networks for PCNs and Link Workers

  • Future NHS Collaboration Platform https://future.nhs.uk/connect.ti/socialprescribing/groupHome hosted by the NHS Personalised Care Group – Request membership via england.socialprescribing@nhs.net and then access the Social Prescribing pages/Regional pages/Regional Discussion Forums
  • Social Prescribing Network – https://www.westminster.ac.uk/patient-outcomes-in-health-research-group/projects/social-prescribing-network and @SocialPrescrib2 on Twitter
  • Twitter Social Prescribing Wednesday – @SocialPresHour – every other Wednesday and hosted/organised by Elemental
  • Friday afternoon (4:30pm to 5:30pm Fridays, 10am-11am Monday) Social Prescribing email meet-up social-prescribing@googlegroups.com Apply for membership at https://groups.google.com/forum/#!forum/social-prescribing or email sam@agileventures.org if having difficulty.
  • National Association of Link Workers www.connectlink.org Christiana Melam christiana@connectlink.org Professional body representing Social Prescribers/Link Workers with lots of useful resources for Link Workers and those employing them.****************

Nick Sharples is a Director of DNA Insight Ltd, a GP training consultancy specialising in providing advice and training in the High Impact Actions of the GP Forward View. The SocialPrescriberPlus™ programme is designed for new or existing Social Prescribers and Link Workers, whether GP-based or working in the community. For more information please call us on 0800 978 8323 or visit our website at dnainsight.co.uk

 

3
jul
0

What’s next for PCNs: The first 100 days…

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

You made it! The 1st July has come and gone. The Primary Care Network is in place, the network agreement (largely) agreed and signed, you have a way forward on extended hours, and now you are “live”. But what is next for the PCN Clinical Director? Now you are officially on the payroll, it is time for the first 100 days.

Senior leaders often start new roles with a plan for their first 100 days. They are important because they set the tone for how things will be under your leadership. Here are seven things for new PCN Clinical Directors to consider making part of your 100-day plan.

1 Focus on relationships over delivery

The biggest mistake eager new leaders make is to have an almost zealous focus on delivering sweeping changes as early as possible in their tenure. They feel the need to prove themselves in the job by showing they can make change happen fast.

Practices are already nervous about the introduction of PCNs. A new PCN CD dictating to practices how things are going to be within a few weeks of taking on the role is going to make these feelings worse. Even if you are able to bulldoze through how the pharmacist is going to work in every practice, it will be at the cost of the trust, discretionary effort, and support that you will need going forward.

Instead, focus on listening to practices, understanding their different needs and challenges, and the concerns and hopes they have about PCNs. At the same time, identify the key leaders in the community, mental health and voluntary organisations in your area. Ask to meet them, don’t wait for them to approach you. A network of strong relationships will be essential for future success.

2 Ensure a communication system is in place

Communication across all members of a practice is not always great.   If practices don’t know what the PCN is up to, mistrust will grow. The challenge for PCNs is enabling two-way communication across a group of practices. Ask practices what they want – a WhatsApp group, a weekly email, or whatever will work locally, and how often, and put it in place. If you achieve nothing other than putting an effective communication system in place you can consider your first 100 days a success!

3 Agree what success for the PCN looks like

You may be one of the few PCNs who before they got lost in the details of network agreements and extended hours took time to agree what the PCN was for, what its purpose was, and how success would be measured. But if not, now is the time for the PCN CD to find out from practices what success for the PCN means to them, and then to play back something that all can relate to, so both you and the practices are clear on what exactly it is you are trying to do in your role as PCN CD.

4 Under-promise and over-deliver

This sounds simple, but all too often new leaders make grand promises early on to try and build support based on what they are going to do. They then spend the rest of their time having to explain why they haven’t lived up to their initial claims. It is far better to be cautious in what you say you can deliver, and to build trust as you go by not only consistently doing what you said you would do, but often times achieving considerably more.

5 Select the Meetings you attend carefully

The NHS has a nasty habit of taking new leaders and swamping them with more meetings than it is possible for any diary to bear. The challenge in your first 100 days is to keep as much control of your time as you can. You must decide the meetings you go to; do not let the system decide for you. Ultimately you will be judged on the success of your network, not on the number of meetings you have attended. If you are always in meetings you will have very little time for real delivery, and very little time for the visible presence you will need at practice level to build that all-important support and trust.

6 Find your personal support

Leadership is lonely. You will, however supportive practices are right now, have to make some very tough and most likely unpopular decisions. There will be times when choosing the right way forward will be hard, and you won’t know what to do. These are the times when you will need support; people you can turn to who you can trust and who will help you work things through. Better to find this support and have it in place before you need it, rather than wait until the inevitable crisis arises. It may be a trusted colleague in your PCN, the CD of a neighbouring PCN (you are all on the same side), or someone else whose experience and opinion you value. Make finding this support a priority for your first 100 days.

7 Deliver some small wins

Now remember you are not trying to deliver any sweeping changes in your first 100 days. By small win we are not talking about anything major. But if from your conversations with practices, listening to GPs, and meeting local stakeholders there are things you see that can be done that are relatively easy to implement (without generating antibodies!) then make them happen. No one is expecting a miracle straight away, and setting a tone of positive change can create momentum for the bigger challenges ahead.

26
jun

Pack or pride – how should PCNs operate?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

“The strength of the pack is the wolf, and the strength of the wolf is the pack.” Rudyard Kipling

There is a nervousness amongst GP practices in the intertwining of their fates with those of other practices through PCNs.  The move to robust PCN network agreements can be about protecting the higher performing practices from being ‘dragged’ down by those who are not doing so well.

Equally, as GP practices choose the PCN they are to be part of, there is a tendency for competitiveness between PCNs to emerge.  Instinctively many GPs and practices want “their” PCN to be more successful than those around it, thus justifying the choice of the practice to join it in the first place.

Anyone working in general practice at present understands the pressure that the sector as a whole is under.  When faced with such an existential challenge, there is real value in working together to meet the challenges rather than shifting to a ‘survival of the fittest’ type attitude.

This is perfectly illustrated when considering the respective plight of lions and wolves.  It is estimated there are 20-30,000 lions left in Africa.  50 years ago there were 450,000 lions, a decline of more than 95%.  While historically their numbers had grown, the emergence of man as a predator of lions is the major factor behind their decline.

However, what is astonishing is that the majority of lions are still killed by other lions.  In some prides 80% of the cubs don’t survive.  Either they are killed by other males, or they don’t get enough to eat (they typically eat last in the hierarchy of the pride).  Lions evolved without a predator with an instinct to dominate the savanna from each other, not to share it.

The similar emergence of man as a predator of wolves resulted in the number of wolves declining by about a third.  However, their population is now relatively stable at about 300,000.  Wolves care for each other as individuals.  They form friendships and nurture their own sick and injured.  Pack structure enables communication, the education of the young, and the transfer of knowledge across generations.  The older wolves, as more experienced hunters, share hunting strategies and techniques with younger wolves, passing down knowledge from one generation to the next.

While lions collectively struggle because of their individual desire for dominance, wolves succeed because they cooperate and support each other.

The lessons for newly formed PCNs are clear.  Do we build PCN governance structures to ensure the most successful practices aren’t negatively affected by the practices that are not performing as well, or is the aim to support all practices regardless of their starting point, and to help those most in need to improve?  Do we share information, ideas, resources, expertise with other PCNs, or do we keep it to ourselves and leave other PCNS to work it out for themselves?  Do we collaborate with other PCNs to create a strong voice for general practice, or do we let inter-practice and inter-PCN disputes weaken our collective stance, as we argue against each other in public so that others can simply ignore the general practice position?

We should judge PCNs not on how they are performing relative to other PCNs, with metrics devised by the system, but on how well they are supporting their member practices, and the extent to which they are enabling general practice to thrive.  The more both practices within a PCN work collaboratively together, and PCNs work collaboratively together with each other, the more general practice will thrive.  It may even be we get to a place where “the strength of the PCN is the practice, and the strength of the practice is the PCN”!

19
jun
0

What is your Primary Care Network’s Purpose?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

I was sitting in a nascent PCN’s meeting recently, and watching the practices grapple with the challenges of forming a new network, and at the same time thinking of the quite common advice for PCNs to establish a common purpose.  Sitting there, I imagined saying to the practices that what they needed to do was spend time identifying and agreeing a common purpose, and equally visualised my rather speedy subsequent removal from the room.

I understand that forward thinking practices can get to the place of considering what the purpose is of their shared network.  But for most practices the current challenges are agreeing who will be in the network, who will be the leader, how they will make decisions, who will hold the money, and how they will deliver extended hours.  There is no time (or patience) for esoteric questions about purpose, when there is so much that needs to be done in the little time they have together.

Does that therefore mean that those PCNs who have not explicitly addressed the question do not have a purpose?  Or is the (unspoken) purpose enabling practices to do what they need to do to fulfil the contract, and receive the funding and resources to which they are entitled?  If there is no purpose at all, you could argue practices would have rejected the Network Contract DES.

Framed more positively, is, then, the (unspoken) purpose of PCNs to increase investment in, and the sustainability, of general practice?  Is it to reverse historic underinvestment and enable general practice to emerge from its current crisis?  Are PCNs in fact a “lifeboat” (as it was termed at a recent Nuffield Trust event) for general practice?

I co-authored a book entitled the Future of General Practice, in which we explored what practices who had emerged from the current crisis had done.  Broadly speaking they have introduced new roles, found ways of working at scale, and began to form partnerships with other providers in the wider system – all elements of the new PCNs.  Like them or loathe them, there is no doubt PCNs represent an opportunity for general practice to create a more sustainable future for itself.

Is it ok for the purpose of PCNs to be first and foremost about investment in and the sustainability of general practice?  As we discussed last week, the system wants PCNs to be about the integration of general practice with the wider system.  And can anything in the NHS be about anything other than improving outcomes for patients?

I would argue that if the system partners with a general practice that is essentially broken, the benefits will be limited.  And if supporting general practice is the way to improve outcomes for patients, then it is perfectly reasonable for that to be its primary goal.  Where general practice is in crisis, the purpose of PCNs needs to be to support them out of it.  Integration with the wider system, and improved outcomes for patients, will be happy bi-products of this primary purpose being fulfilled.

The challenge for PCN leaders is to be clear on the purpose of their PCN.  While the discussion might not explicitly have been had, GP leaders will know why their colleagues are turning up and what their expectations are.  I think there is actually real value in these leaders making the implicit explicit, and using this positive articulation of exactly what it is practices are doing together to give energy to the PCN from member practices.  Ultimately, practices, the wider system and patients will all benefit from this.

12
jun
0

What are PCNs: joint working between practices, or something more?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

There is an almost palpable dissonance that sits between the Primary Care Networks (PCNs) as constituted in the PCN DES, and how they are perceived in the minds of CCG leaders and those responsible for developing integrated care systems.

On the one hand the GP contract portrays the DES as a framework for practices to work together and to secure investment into general practice over the coming years.  The system, meanwhile, seems to think of PCNs as the building blocks of the local integrated care system, with a membership and remit expanding far beyond core general practice.

So who is right? Are PCNs a contractual construct of joint working between practices, operating solely within the framework of the national GP contract, or are they something more, owned more widely across the system and with an accountability beyond the terms of the GP contract?

This question is one general practice would do well to take time to consider, because the implications are far reaching.

A good place to start is the Long Term Plan for the NHS, published just before the new GP contract.  In chapter 1 of this document, which sets the direction for the NHS for the next 5 years, it sets out five major changes to the NHS service model, the very first of which is “we will boost ‘out-of-hospital’ care, and finally dissolve the historic divide between primary and community services” (Long Term Plan p12).

How will this be achieved?  Through PCNs. Through the investment of £4.5bn in “expanded community multidisciplinary teams aligned with new primary care networks based on neighbouring GP practices… Most CCGs have local contracts for enhanced services and these will normally be added to the network contract… The result will be the creation – for the first time since the NHS was set up in 1948 – of fully integrated community-based health care” (Long Term Plan 1.9-1.10 pp 14-15).

There are some important points to note here.  First is that, in case anyone is in any doubt, the primary purpose of PCNs is the integration of primary care with the rest of the system.  The contract has been used as a necessary mechanism for setting them up.  How else can you integrate independent contractors?

Second, is that the promised £4.5bn in the Long Term Plan is considerably higher than the £1.8bn promised in the GP contract to support the formation of PCNs.  This is because the majority of investment in PCNs will not be through the core GP contract.  The funding that comes from other sources (which, by the way, represents a huge opportunity for general practice) will, inevitably, bring with it an accountability outside of the core contract, and into the wider system.

The other place to look is the PCN Network Contract DES, which notes the key features of the DES are set out in the Long Term Plan (and so references the points above without explicitly stating them).  It says the DES is subject to annual review and development, and that the focus in 2019/20 is “to support the establishment of PCNs and the recruitment of the new workforce, with the bulk of the service requirements coming in from April 2020 onwards” (Network Contact DES Specification p5).

So this year (the easy one) is about practices working together, and essentially getting ready for what is to come from 2020 onwards.  That is when the shift will accelerate away from core general practice.  The Network Contract DES guidance states, “PCNs will increasingly need to work with other non-GP providers, as part of collaborative primary care networks, in order to offer their local populations more personalised, coordinated health and social care. To support this, the Network Contract DES will be amended from 2020/21 to include collaboration with non-GP providers as a requirement. The Network Agreement will be the formal basis for working with other non-GP providers and community based organisations.” (p16-17).

One of the service specifications coming in 2020/21 is the innocuous-sounding anticipatory care, “The Anticipatory Care Service will need to be delivered by a fully integrated primary and community health team. To support this, from July 2019 community providers are being asked to configure their teams on PCN footprints. The requirements will be developed across the country by ICSs, and commissioned by CCGs from their PCNs. NHS England will develop the national requirements for the essential contribution required under the Network Contract DES.” (p18).  Within one of seven DES service specifications the NHS has effectively announced the full integration of primary and community care!

Back to the original question – are PCNs about contractual joint working between practices, or about integrating all services within a local community?  While today the answer is largely the former, it is clear from 2020 onwards the answer is very much the latter.  There is no real dissonance (other than between the expectations of pace setting system leaders and the reality of where their local networks are).  PCNs are on a journey.  The start of this journey (and where we are today) is joint working between practices, but very quickly this will evolve into joint working between that group of practices and the rest of the local health and social care economy.  This is the DES practices have signed up to, and these are the changes that are on their way.

5
jun
0

Guest Blog – Clare Allcock – Accelerating Collaboration in Primary Care

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

To support her excellent podcast this week, our special guest Clare Allcock from Kaleidoscope Health and Care has provided us with a very useful infographic outlining the ways in which new networks can accelerate the pace of successful collaboration.

29
may
1

Primary Care Networks: A Roadmap until the end of June

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

While many have sat back and breathed a collective sigh of relief that the 15th May deadline was met for the submission of the initial PCN returns, that was unfortunately only the start of the journey.  Some pretty formidable challenges lie ahead.

I am sure some PCNs have a clear plan and are meticulously ticking off actions and making sure everything is sorted as they get ready for the 1st July, when PCNs formally begin.  This is less for those PCNs, and more for the time poor and those who have that feeling there is something they should be doing but they are not sure exactly what! It also doesn’t cover everything you could be doing (if that’s what you need do watch out for Clare Allcock’s wonderful advice on how to accelerate collaborative working in next week’s podcast).  Rather this is designed to help you meet the minimum requirements.

Essentially, each PCN has to complete three key actions by 30th June:

  • Agree how extended hours will be provided at a rate of 30 additional minutes per 1,000 registered patients to all registered patients within the PCN.
  • Ensure appropriate data sharing agreements and, if required, data processing arrangements are in place, using the national template, to support the delivery of extended hours.
  • Ensure the network agreement is completed (including all seven schedules), and signed.

For the provision of extended hours, each PCN will need to know:

  • Does each member practice wish to undertake the delivery of extended hours for their practice population?
  • If any practice does not, is there another practice willing to take the delivery of these hours on?
  • If not, is there a third party who can deliver the services on behalf of the practices?

It is easiest if each practice does their own extended hours, next easiest if there is some sort of buddy arrangement between practices so that they can cover each other, and least easiest if you have to create some new model of joint working across practices.  That is not to say one model is better than the others, only which is easier in terms of the amount of work each will require in the month until the next submission is due.

Now you may be lucky and already have data sharing agreements in place between your practices.  If you don’t, then there is the promise from NHS England of a national template.  Unfortunately, the PCN frequently asked questions states that this is not yet available as it has to be agreed with the GPC.  Watch out for its publication, as you are not going to have long to turn it round and get it agreed by your member practices.

As for completing the network agreement, remember the starting point for each PCN is the mandatory network agreement (here).  This mandatory agreement cannot be altered.  However, there are 7 schedules where additional clauses can be added.  The template for completing the schedules can be accessed here.

I am not a lawyer, so this is not legal advice, but if you had to prioritise you could go with the suggested wording of the national agreement and not worry too much about schedule 2 (essentially this schedule is where you can make changes/additions to some of the mandatory network agreement), and for schedule 6 you could go with the suggested list of insolvency events (it is essentially a list of different events of insolvency that would enable members to take action under the clauses).  The difficult bits you would then have to sort out are:

  • The rest of schedule 1 (you have already done some of it) where you have to say how the meetings will take place, what is quorate, how you will make decisions etc etc
  • Schedule 3 where you outline everyone’s responsibilities in delivering extended hours
  • Schedule 4 where you have to outline all the network’s financial arrangements (how much money each practice is getting and who is going to pay it)
  • Schedule 5 where you set out the arrangements in the PCN for engaging or employing staff, including arrangements for employment liabilities
  • And schedule 7, which is essentially how you will work with any other organisation (e.g. a federation). Top tip here is get them to draft it for you, and then change their version, rather than starting with a blank piece of paper.

I don’t know how many meetings you are realistically going to have with your practices between now and the end of June, but if it isn’t many you may want to find someone to draft a starter for 10 for each of these schedules.  If you can agree 90% of them remotely, then you can use any valuable meeting time to focus on the hopefully small number of areas that are left.

And once you have done all that, you are probably going to need to get a lawyer to look over the final agreement with all its appendices before you can persuade your practices to sign it.   Remember the submission of the network agreement is due by 30th June which (inevitably) is a Sunday, which means the 28th June, which means there is only one month to go to get everything done.  No pressure!

What would be really helpful would be sharing across PCNs of good ideas for improving the agreement between practices, strong additions to the network agreement, and good wording for the schedules.  Anything we find along the way we will definitely pass on.

I hope that is useful.  If you have any advice for over-stretched incoming PCN leaders that I have missed please do get in touch to share.  Good luck all!

22
may
0

Guest Blog – Tara Humphrey – Introducing New Roles

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

This week we are delighted to feature a useful guide from our old friend Tara Humphrey, founder of THC Primary Care. Tara appears on this week’s podcast talking about the introduction of new roles to Primary Care Networks. You can find that here.  In support of that podcast Tara has provided us with a written guide to the practical stuff you’ll need to know and you can download that by clicking on the link below:

Tara New Roles

15
may
1

PCN Deadline Day: 8 Lessons we have learnt so far

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

Primary Care Network submission day has arrived!  3½ months have passed since Primary Care Networks were formally announced as part of the new GP contract for 2019.  What have we learnt in the intervening period?  I would suggest there are (at least) 8 key lessons.

  1. PCNs represent the biggest change for general practice in a generation. While PCNs may have started life as only one part of the package that was the 2019/20 GP contract, it has become clear they represent a much more fundamental change for general practice.  Funding flows into the profession are set to shift from being primarily at an individual practice level, to being primarily at a PCN level.  The fates of GP practices within a PCN are set to become inextricably intertwined.
  2. 15th May was an ambitious deadline for PCN submissions. The initial expectation was practices would have their network agreements in place by today, but as the complexity of that particular task became clear the deadline for the full agreement was relaxed to the end of June.  Practices choosing whom to get into bed with has taken most of the last few months (and some may still not be there yet!), and the challenge of defining the nature of the agreement between them still lies ahead.
  3. The lawyers are coming. What wasn’t clear at the outset was how defined the nature of the network agreements between the practices needed to be.  NHS England has produced a “legally binding” mandatory network agreement for all practices to sign up to, but the meat of this agreement has been left to schedules that need to be developed and agreed locally, which will inevitably require lawyers.  It will be hard to keep the focus on trust and building relationships, which is widely agreed to be the most important foundation for a successful network, once the lawyers are in.
  4. Focus has shifted away from the sustainability of core general practice. In the context of the new GP contract, PCNs were heralded as the mechanism for enabling new funding and resources to flow into general practice.  But on top of the legal fees, each new role requires practices to dip into their pockets to finance the unfunded elements, and the funding for extended hours has been cut.  The talk surrounding PCNs has quickly moved towards “system integration” and equally quickly away from the sustainability of PCN member practices.
  5. The gap in funding for new roles is high risk. As practices have picked through the funding of the new roles, they have found that the headline 70% is an optimistic assessment of the national contribution.  This contribution is fixed regardless of the local market for the roles, or the package the network ultimately has to offer.  Financial liability for the new roles, for example in the case of redundancy, also sits with the practices in the network.  Whether all networks take up the offer of the new roles remains to be seen, but it appears increasingly likely at least some will not.
  6. PCNs represent a shift in system GP leadership. CCGs always had the problem that they represented their population not their practices, despite being membership organisations.  The introduction of PCNs coincides with a 20% cut to the management costs of CCGs and a likely move to a wave of mergers, making CCGs yet more distant from local areas.  At the same time PCNs will each hold seats on the integrated care system boards, as the means of providing “full engagement with primary care” (Long term Plan 1.52).  There is a clear shift of power in motion from CCG GP leaders to PCN Clinical Directors.
  7. The role of Federations is uncertain. Federations were conspicuous by their absence from the Long Term Plan and the new GP contract, and it is clear that PCNs are flavour of the month.  It remains to be seen the extent to which PCNs will work together effectively through federations, or whether each PCN will plough its own furrow.
  8. Expectations of PCNs at practice and system level are very different. There are grand plans for PCNs in the Long Term Plan, as the focus of developing place-based care and integrating services around local communities.  But the challenges facing front line GP practices have not gone away, as the recent Panorama programme highlighted.  Practices need PCNs to first support and enable their sustainability, whereas the system expects them to first prioritise delivery of their own plans.  How that tension plays out remains to be seen.

We are still at the very outset of PCNs.  Establishing them may have been the easy step, compared to some of the questions that remain unanswered and the challenges that lie ahead.

8
may
0

Will the PCN Voice really count?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The Long Term Plan published in January of this year said, “Every integrated care system will have… full engagement with primary care, including through a named accountable Clinical Director of each primary care network.” (1.52)

The GP Partnership Review, published shortly afterwards, said, “Working at scale, for example through Primary Care Networks, has the potential to improve and support general practice influence at a system level.” (p35)

The question is will the establishment of PCNs and the new Clinical Directors really mean that general practice has a voice, and be able to influence outcomes (and the flow of resources) at a system level?  You could argue the establishment of Clinical Commissioning Groups as statutory bodies was supposed to achieve just that, yet they have presided over one of the worst periods of under investment into general practice in NHS history.  Clearly setting up an infrastructure doesn’t of itself necessarily translate into a bigger voice.

Of course, some might argue, CCGs were commissioning organisations and PCNs are provider organisations, so this time it is different.  It is hard for the average GP not to be cynical about yet another promise that “this time it is different”, after so many previous identical promises failed to deliver.

We are heading in the direction of c1000 Primary Care Networks (PCNs) across England.  There are 44 STPs, so we are looking at c20 PCN Clinical Directors per STP.  Even though this is hugely more manageable for system leaders than 7,000 GP practices (c150 per STP), it is difficult to overestimate the challenge for each one of those 20 Clinical Directors trying to influence for their particular PCN.

In the model of “place-based care” (NHS-talk for providers from across health and social care working together at a PCN level), you could argue PCN Clinical Directors will be leading and shaping the integration of services locally.  However, this also depends on whether the reality of how place-based care works is bottom-up (decisions made by local teams), or top down (decisions made at STP level, and PCN leaders asked to implement them).  This in turn will depend on how influential the PCN leaders are at STP level.

The challenge facing the new Clinical Directors of PCNs is formidable.  They have to introduce joint working across GP practices that have never really worked together previously, and manage all the inevitable internal disputes and conflicts that will arise, before they can even start thinking about how they will work with local partners, and how they will create a strong voice for local general practice.

My sense, however, is that it is important to start as you mean to go on.  While the odds may initially be stacked against PCN Clinical Directors, the reality is the system needs them more than they need the system.  There is the opportunity to influence, but only if it is seized and taken from the start.  It is not going to come on a plate, and the new leaders of primary care will need to work hard to establish their voice.  Done badly, the voice will not be strong.  But done well, I think there are many gains to be had for PCNs, their practices, and their local populations.

It is with this in mind that here at Ockham Healthcare we have created a brand new (free) guide for PCN CDs on how to establish an effective voice.  It includes 10 practical steps PCN leaders can take to make their voice effective.  If you are already on Ockham Healthcare subscriber you will receive the guide free via our weekly newsletter on the 9th May.  If you are not a subscriber just sign up here (for free) and we will email you a copy.  I hope you find it useful, and good luck with finding your voice.

1
may
0

Guest Blog – The new Primary Care Network Agreement

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

This week our old friend John Tacchi returns with a guest blog on the newly published Primary Care Network agreement. A vital set of documents which will dictate the shape of PCNs for years to come.  John critiques the agreement…and doesn’t pull his punches.

NHS England has released the mandatory Network Agreement which all PCNs will have to sign. It consists of two documents, the agreement and the schedules. Given the importance of this document (bear in mind that in future, payments to GPs will increasingly be made to PCNs and less to individual practices), it is a bit thin. Terribly thin in fact. Rather than pick it apart, let us instead consider what it actually says and what is left in the hands of GPs to sort out for themselves.

The Agreement

This is the document that all members of the PCN must sign. It is categorically stated as ‘legally binding’ and so will govern the future relationship of the practices which make up the PCN and govern the flow of money. There are 106 clauses and you would be forgiven for thinking that this is where the ‘meat’ is. These cover general obligations and patient involvement, financial arrangements, workforce, information sharing and confidentiality, conflicts of interest, meeting format (governance generally), joining and leaving the PCN, duration and variation, termination, dispute resolution and ‘events outside our control’.

Except they don’t. The clauses in the agreement all refer to the schedules for greater detail. The schedules document is, however, a series of blanks, leaving PCN members to fill in as necessary. This is not particularly helpful and leaves GPs to sort out a host of vital issues themselves. The top 5 are:

Financial arrangements

There are so many issues under this heading. If one practice in the PCN is designated to receive PCN payments, how will it pay what is owing to other practices? When? On what basis (i.e. what happens if another practice does not provide the PCN services required)? How will be accounted for? What happens when there are other organisations other than practices involved? What about possible insolvency of a practice; how will this impact the PCN? What about intellectual property rights of individual practices/partnerships? How will these be protected? Can individual partners of member practices be sued for the liabilities of the PCN? No detail. Not good.

Workforce

Given the fact that money is being made available for additional roles (but not at 100% reimbursement), who will employ them? If the practice that is the designated fund-holder does, is it aware of the implications from an HR perspective? If another organisation employs them (i.e. a new company), there may be VAT issues. This has the potential to create horrendous problems.

Governance

How will the PCN decide on pressing issues? It will need to have some a ‘board’ of some kind and who will be on it? What will the role of Clinical Director be? Will representatives of the ‘board’ have authority to bind individual partnerships? What is the legal status of decisions made? What about liability issues? How will a PCN vary the agreement if it needs to? Many, many open questions.

Joining and leaving the PCN

This is probably the most glaring ‘omission’ (given the schedule simply says ‘fill in the blanks’). How do practices leave and are they even able to do so? Can a PCN expel a member practice? If so, how? If a PCN expels a practice, what becomes of the patient list? How will they still receive PCN services?

Dispute resolution

What happens if things go wrong? What is the legal status of member practices within the PCN? Who will act as arbiter in the event of a dispute?

Timing is obviously an issue. The network agreement and all its schedules must be signed by all member practices by June 30th.  This is not very far away! The current version does at least say that the agreement can be varied from time to time, but this first draft is so devoid of detail that PCN members really must get specialist advice before signing anything. Lawyers are expensive and it is only the national firms that have the breadth of experience to give a detailed view. They are very expensive. GP’s need specialist advice on this vital issue. And fast!

John Tacchi

Tanza Partners

www.tanza.co.uk

17
apr
1

Federations vs Primary Care Networks

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

There is a tension developing in some quarters between the existing GP federation and the emerging Primary Care Networks (PCNs).  It is like they are trying to compete for the same ground (at-scale general practice), and the result is a growing discord between the two.

A conversation develops about what the federation “offer” is for the new PCNs: will it be for all of the £1.50 per patient running cost, or just a proportion of it?  And what do the PCNs actually get in return for this investment of their money?  Federations can feel they have to justify their offerings, and PCNs can feel they might not be getting value for their investment.

What about the existing work of the federation?  Much of it, such as the delivery of extended access, is funded through monies that in future will be coming through the PCNs.  Will this work continue in its current form, or will the new PCNs demand a different model of delivery to that insisted on by the commissioners?  If it changes, will the GP federation even have a future?

It is easy to understand why tension between the two develops.

For me, however, this tension misses both the point and the opportunity of general practice operating at scale.  Inherent to both PCNs and GP federations is a membership of GP practices (generally the same GP practices).  The point of working together (whether because they choose to or “have to” because of the new GP contract) is to be able to better serve these member practices and their populations.  This is true for both PCNs and GP federations.   The practices are the underlying constant.

So the best place to start the conversation between federations and PCNs is not who should be doing what, and how much they are going to be paid for it, but one between the member practices as to what the relationship between the two is going to be.  The conversation should really be between the practices themselves, working out what they want to do together at PCN level, and what at federation level, and then to organise themselves accordingly.

For me, the most logical step is for the new clinical directors of PCNs to either become the Board, or at least have a majority on the Board, of the GP federation.  This removes the unhelpful sense of competition between the PCNs and federation, and instead enables the PCNs (as the group closest to practices and that hold the majority of the funding) to ensure the federation delivers exactly what the PCNs need.

There is no reason why existing GP federation directors can’t stand and become clinical directors of the new PCNs.  I was asked recently as to whether this would be a conflict of interest.  This question only makes sense if your starting viewpoint is one of competition rather than collaboration between federations and networks.  If the role of the federation is to serve the networks, not only is it not a conflict of interest but it is a pragmatic response to the emergence of PCNs.

For areas that have a GP federation the opportunity exists to have the best of both worlds – scale where it is needed, and a focus on individual local needs.  A GP federation and PCNs working in harmony can secure more investment and resources, create efficiencies by reducing duplication, establish robust and tailored mechanisms for service delivery, limit liabilities, improve patient outcomes, and strengthen the collective voice of general practice.  But whether practices can take this opportunity may depend on their ability to ensure the conversation is focussed on how to deliver the most benefit to practices, rather than one that is competitive between the two.

10
apr
0

Primary Care Networks: Learning from the Past

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

“What has been will be again, what has been done will be done again.  There is nothing new under the sun” Ecclesiastes 1:9.

Primary Care Networks (PCNs) may be the shiny new toy of today, but of course they are not completely new.  At their heart they are about practices working together, about the introduction of new roles, about securing a vibrant future for general practice, about joining general practice more closely together with the rest of the NHS, and about making a difference to local populations.  These are challenges GP practices have been grappling with for a number of years now.

In 2016 at Ockham Healthcare we started the General Practice podcast, and have featured case study after case study of GPs, practices and groups of practices who have been innovating and finding new ways of working to tackle these challenges.

We also published, “The Future of General Practice. Real Life Case Studies of Innovation and New Ways of Working”, in which we highlighted 16 of these case studies, analysed why they had been successful, and distilled the lessons that could be learnt from them. What strikes me now is that this learning is more relevant than ever, to accelerate the progress and impact PCNs are able to make, and to avoid the mistakes of the past being repeated.

The case studies include a focus on introducing new roles.  We considered the impact of pharmacists, first contact physiotherapists, and paramedics, and how they could reduce the workload of GPs.  Even more interestingly, we looked at the development of multidisciplinary teams in general practice, and in particular how in some places they have transformed the management of on the day demand and the whole experience of being a duty doctor in a practice.  Key lessons included starting with the person not the profession, keeping a focus on building a wider team not on individual roles in isolation, and the need to stage appointments of staff over time.

Just like new roles, working with other practices is not new.  There are many experiences out there of what to do and what not to do that those involved in setting up the new PCNs would be wise to pay heed to.  We looked at case studies of mergers over a time period, multiple mergers at the same time, as well as the establishment of a super-partnership.  A whole range of benefits of at-scale working were realised, such as improved resilience, a better ability to manage demand, and greater profitability.  However, we also found simply working at scale does not automatically generate these benefits, and highlighted some important lessons for practices working together to make these a reality.

A key focus of PCNs will be partnering with other organisations, but again this is not completely new ground for general practice.  In the book we considered case studies of practices working with a hospital, with a community trust, with community pharmacy, with the voluntary sector and the local community.  We looked at the benefits general practice was able to achieve through this, such as access to staff, back office support, financial gains, and also what factors seemed to make these particular relationships successful compared to areas where relationships are poor.

There are now less than 75 copies of “The Future of General Practice” left.  To help those who want to learn the lessons from the past as they create the future with PCNs, we are making them available for only £9.99, a discount of over 60%, for as long as stocks last.  Click here for your copy.  The fastest way to success is always to learn first from those who have gone before you.

3
apr
0

What is new in the network DES specification and guidance?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Last Friday (29th March) the new Network Contract DES was published.  Six documents in all, and well over a 100 pages of weekend reading (my life is basically one big party).  Much of it restated what we already knew, but I will focus here on the important new things it contained.

There are a number of key changes to the submission requirements.  There has been some talk about the sizes of networks since the new GP contract was published, and how fixed the 30-50,000 population is.  More flexibility is now permitted for the upper end of the range, and where commissioners do agree to larger network sizes, “the PCN may be required to organise itself operationally into smaller neighbourhood teams that cover population sizes between 30 and 50,000”.  There can also be changes to network memberships after the 1st July, but these will require 28 days’ notice, approval from the commissioner, and will only start the quarter after approval is received.

The network agreement now does not have to be submitted by the May 15th deadline, but by the end of June.  Interestingly, it is in a mandatory form (one of the six documents published is the “Mandatory Network Agreement”), a theme reinforced by lines like “we agree that the wording in the clauses to this agreement may not be varied unless a national variation is published”.  There are, however, seven schedules at the end which do allow some variation, and, frankly, seem to me to mean that most networks will need the extended deadline to agree them.  For those interested in hypothetical future scenarios the agreement also includes quite a bit on (amongst other things) the process for leaving/joining networks, expulsion from, dissolution of, and dispute resolution.

More clarity is also provided on who can and cannot be the accountable clinical director.  It can be a clinician (i.e. not just a GP), but they have to be practising within the network area (no out of area leaders allowed).  Four options are suggested for the selection process: election, mutual agreement, selection, and rotation within a fixed term (the latter presumably the last option for those areas where no one is willing to step forward).

What is also new is networks have to be ready to provide extended hours from July 1st, including having in place “appropriate data sharing arrangements”.  If this is done, and the network agreement is completed and signed, the PCN will be considered “established” (a term eerily reminiscent of “authorised” for those still bearing the CCG set-up scars).  Any delays in becoming established will affect payments, most notably the ability to claim the £1.50 PCN funding that will otherwise be backdated to April 1st.

The new GP contract published at the end of January indicated the money for a network could be paid to a lead practice, a federation, an NHS trust or even a social enterprise.  All mention of that is gone in this guidance, which instead states that the recipient of the funding “must hold a primary medical contract” (i.e. a GMS, PMS or APMS contract), thus at a stroke discounting the majority of federations, NHS trusts or social enterprises.

How, then, federations might feature immediately becomes a less straightforward question.  The answer appears to lie in the recently published BMA Primary Care Network Handbook, which suggests one of the potential operating models for networks is to subcontract the provision of services and employment of staff to a federation.  Subcontracting in this way is allowed by this guidance, as long as it has the consent of the commissioner.  There is some complicated VAT guidance also provided, but my take is that as long as the twin traps of simply providing employment of staff (so falling foul of agency requirements) and of separating out clinical and non-clinical services into separate contracts, are both avoided then subcontracting by the networks to the federation is unlikely to incur VAT.

One of the other questions that has been doing the rounds is whether there is financial benefit in networks being smaller to secure proportionally more resources.  I think this guidance effectively puts that to bed by clarifying that even though each network (regardless of size) will initially receive 100% funding for a link worker and 70% funding for a clinical pharmacist, from April 2020 each network will receive a “single combined maximum sum… based on weighted capitation”.  So any advantage gained in 19/20 will be immediately lost the following year by having less left to spend on new roles the following year.  Indeed, the guidance states, “PCNs will not wish to make short term gains to the detriment of longer term sustainability”.

However, in 2019/20 practices can only use the workforce funding to appoint a link worker and a pharmacist, and cannot use the funding for any other roles.  The only flexibility is if a network either cannot recruit to one other of these posts, or already has a “full complement” of one or the other, at which point networks can substitute between the two roles.  The workforce funding for PCNs also means the clinical pharmacist scheme in general practice is being ended.  This means if practices have applied to the scheme, or even been approved for it but have not appointed a pharmacist, they will not now be eligible to go ahead.

The guidance also introduces the concept of “additionality”.  Essentially a baseline of staff numbers supporting practices across the five roles (clinical pharmacist, link worker, physician associate, extended scope physiotherapist, and paramedic) as of 31st March this year will be taken through a combination of NWRS (national workforce reporting system) and a (mandatory for practices) survey by commissioners during April 2019.  The funding for additional staff will be given as long as networks can show that these staff are “additional” to this baseline number.

There is much in the guidance about the supervision and workload requirements of the new staff.  My worry is the level of restriction in the guidance, coupled with the cost pressure and associated liabilities each new member of staff funded at 70% (or less) of total cost presents, may lead to a much lower uptake in the recruitment of the new staff than those writing the guidance are seemingly predicting.

Overall, as is the tendency of all detailed guidance, whilst it may provide some much needed clarity, enthusiasm for the changes will inevitably be dented by the sheer weight of the new instructions.  While some aspects are helpful, some are clearly not e.g. the change to the hosting arrangement options, and the lack of flexibility around workforce funding.

At the heart of the new GP contract was a desire to create a sustainable future for general practice, and yet what seems to be most lacking in this guidance is any focus on how all of this will benefit core general practice.  The challenge for local leaders will be first to understand this guidance, but then, more importantly, to translate it in a way that can still inspire local GPs and practices to make the most of this new opportunity.

27
mar
0

How can Federations help Primary Care Networks?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Amongst all the furore that primary care networks are creating it is easy to lose sight of GP federations. The role of federations in the new world of primary care networks is unclear and not prescribed. So do they really have a future? If they do, what will it be? This week, I explore how federations could help the nascent primary care networks meet four of the biggest challenges they face.

Challenge 1: Managing the new clinical staff and the associated liability

By 2024 a typical (50,000 population) primary care network will have 5 clinical pharmacists, 3 social prescribers, 3 first contact physiotherapists, 2 physician associates and 1 community paramedic. That is a lot of staff. Who is going to manage the employment risk (and associated liability) for these staff? Some will arrive with considerable amounts of NHS service, making the potential employment liability very high.

Federations established as limited liability vehicles can not only take this risk away from GP partners, but can also add real value to the recruitment, management and development of these staff. When multiple networks are seeking to recruit from this limited pool of new staff, why will they select one area over another? If a federation can offer peer support, professional development, and (probably most importantly) structured support for both practices and staff in the implementation of these new roles, they will make their area more attractive to these staff, as well as ensuring the networks gain the greatest possible benefit from them. It is hard to overemphasise the importance of change management support to go alongside the recruitment of these new roles.

Challenge 2: Maximising the available financial resources and minimising the financial risk to practices

The new GP contract suggests that a typical network will have funding for additional role reimbursement of £726,000 by 2023/24. At 70% this creates a potential cost pressure for networks of up to £311,000. As a side note it has been suggested (e.g. in the BMA primary care handbook) that the £1.50 management allowance could be used to offset this, but the total management allowance for a 50,000 network is £75,000 – well short of the total amount potentially required.

It is on the finance side and meeting the “30% challenge” that federations can really come into their own. Federations can:

• Limit liabilities through an incorporated structure
• Attract further investment. Many CCGs and local integrated systems will want to invest in general practice, but will want to do it at a scale that maps to boroughs or historic commissioning areas, and federations providing an infrastructure across multiple networks will be an attractive vehicle for them to do so.
• Make the £1.50 management allowance go further. A typical network can’t hope to include delivery support, administrative support, communications and engagement, HR, financial support and leadership support with £75,000. But multiple networks working together could easily do this.
• Create other economies of scale. The £6 per head for extended access is a great example of a resource that if used collectively across a wider area through a federation could generate a significant return to constituent networks.
• Establish strong financial governance. A small but effective finance team within a federation can ensure financial risks are minimised, financial efficiencies are delivered (e.g. in relation to what funding is superannuable), and income opportunities are maximised.

Challenge 3: Ensuring delivery both across practices and with other organisations

Networks are not simply constructs that need to be created. There is a delivery expectation upon them, both across constituent practices and with local organisations. Five new network specifications kick in in April 2020, probably alongside the requirement to sort out extended access, plus any local enhanced serviced the CCG may want to add in to the mix. How will one network operating on its own get its head around all of the new delivery requirements? The nature of the new specifications mean it will not be as simple as passing them on to the member practices and simply asking each to do its share. New delivery models will need to be developed, agreed with practices and local organisations, and implemented.

It may be on the delivery requirements of networks that federations can add the most value. Resources can be dedicated to each of the network specifications, for example a clinical lead and a lead manager for each, who can negotiate with local practices, organisations and commissioners to create locally-tailored delivery models. Sharing resource and expertise in this way through a federation can reduce duplication and enhance local delivery.

Challenge 4: Meeting the leadership challenge of networks and creating a powerful local voice

Much is expected of the new “accountable” network Clinical Directors. They are to become the voice of the network in the plethora of integrated care meetings locally, as well as leading the development and delivery of new services, and sorting out any inter-practice issues – all in roughly one day a week. Nationally we have heard of a desire for new leaders to emerge from practices to take on these roles. These could be very challenging and isolating roles for potentially inexperienced leaders.

Networks operating together within a federation can do a number of things. They can provide leadership development. They can ensure the leaders work together to support each other, and share ideas, approaches and learning. The incessant representation requirements from the wider system can be prioritised and shared across the group. Equally, a strong collective voice for primary care and the area can be established through a federation (whereas multiple network voices, potentially contradicting each other, is likely to weaken the overall general practice system voice).
Primary care networks are not in competition with each other, and working together through a federation can help meet some of the major challenges they will inevitably face. It does of course rely on trust, and a belief that the federation will operate to serve and support the new networks. It may be that governance changes, such as ensuring there are at least a majority of network clinical leads on the federation board, are needed to establish the future role of the federation in support of networks. But however it is done, it does seem there could be a very important role for federations in support of general practice as we move into the new world of primary care networks.

20
mar
0

The new BMA Primary Care Network Handbook

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

More information was recently published by the BMA on primary care networks.  You can read it here.  I would regard it as essential reading for all GPs and practices who are considering joining a network.   But at 30 pages it takes some working through, so for the time poor I have summarised below what it says about the questions not answered in the initial contract document.  The answers provided are essentially quotes from this new BMA handbook.

Can CCGs influence the shape of the new Primary Care Networks?

The only involvement of the CCG in this process should be when there are gaps in the total PCN coverage of their area. (the document’s highlighting, not mine)

The content of the network agreement is not within the remit of the CCG to challenge. As long as the practices have agreed, the CCG cannot refuse the DES based on its content.

What agreement is required between practices in a network by 15th May?

To be recognised as a PCN, individual GP practices will need to make a brief joint submission outlining the initial network agreement signed by all member practices.  This will specify how the member practices will handle network-specific issues such as:

  • decision making, governance and collaboration arrangements
  • arrangements regarding the delivery of different packages of care
  • the agreement for distribution of funding between the practices
  • arrangements regarding the employment of the expanded workforce
  • internal governance arrangements (appointment processes, decision making process, etc).

Who can be clinical director of a primary care network? Does it have to be a GP?

It is expected that the clinical director will be selected from the GPs of the practices within the network, but any appropriate clinically qualified individual may be appointed.

While there is no requirement for the clinical director to be appointed from within the network, we recommend that the first option should be to consider an appointment from within.

How will Primary Care Networks make decisions?

Each network is to have a governing/representative body.  This network “board” should operate as the network’s governing body, bringing all members together, overseeing joint decision making, the strategic direction of the network and the network’s funding/financial layout. It is also the body to which the clinical director would be directly accountable.

The network will need to decide:

  • what is within the remit of the clinical director to act executively, what needs to go back to the practice representatives
  • how the governing body makes decisions – does it require a simple majority, a conditional majority, unanimity, etc
  • how often the governing body should meet
  • how meetings are chaired (an elected chair, rotational chair, etc). As the clinical director will be accountable to the governing body, it may be better for the role to be excluded from chairing the governing body

What will the operating model of Primary Care Networks be?

Key issues to consider when establishing an operating model include employment liabilities, ability to offer NHS pension, and inadvertently attracting VAT charges.

5 potential operating models for networks:

  1. “Flat practice network” – practices work together and spread responsibilities and commitments, with one practice acting effectively as the network bank account.
  2. “Lead Provider” – a lead practice takes responsibility for engaging the workforce and entering into contracts
  3. “GP Federation/Provider Entity” – the provider entity is subcontracted to deliver services required by the DES and to employ the staff
  4. “Super-practice as a network” – a super-practice creates an internal ‘network’ amongst its constituent sites, with each ‘neighbourhood’ of practices operating as a mini network in themselves.  The super-practice would be the nominated payee and would then supply support and resources to its constituent neighbourhoods.
  5. “Non-GP provider employer models” – the non-GP provider is signed up to the network agreement, along with the GP practices. They provide network services and employ staff available under the DES on behalf of the network, as well as using their own staff to further enhance the network’s potential workforce.

All primary care networks will need management and administrative support structures.  Practices that form the network will also need to seek advice on any proposed legal agreements and financial matters, and will need to establish a regular meeting of their representatives to ensure that things are developing as planned.

What will Primary Care Networks actually do?

Networks will develop expanded practice-based and connected teams to deliver the provision of workload support of the member practices by:

  • working alongside the existing practice team and taking responsibility for some services of the member practices (to be decided by the network), focusing on extended-hours delivery in the first instance
  • restructuring some service delivery (to be decided by the network)
  • offering access to the extended PCN team (extending the workforce).

The funding currently associated with the Extended Hours DES will transfer (with the associated responsibilities) to the network. This will be provided as an entitlement to the network’s nominated bank account of £1.45 per patient. The network will decide how this funding is distributed in line with the provision of services required to fulfil the requirements of Extended Hours.

The £6 per patient that is currently provided for the Extended Access scheme will also transfer to the networks; the exact timing of this transfer will depend on the current arrangements in each area for the Extended Access scheme… The intention is to bring together extended hours and extended access activity to reduce fragmentation and confusion for practices and patients.

How will the funding for the new PCN workforce role work?  Will smaller networks receive (proportionally) more funding?

There will be funding for the clinical lead post for each network on a basis of 0.25 WTE per 50,000 patients, at national average GP salary (including on-costs) (of £137,516).

For the first year of the DES (2019/20), every network with a population of at least 30,000 can claim 70% funding as above for one additional WTE (whole time equivalent) clinical pharmacist and 100% funding for one additional WTE social prescribing link worker.

The level of funding available for a PCN will scale with its size. This will be especially true in future years when workforce funding switches from direct reimbursement to a capitated payment, based on the population size of the PCN.

Over the coming years…the workforce reimbursement system will be altered so that it is linked to the patient population of the PCN.

The network will need to provide a monthly invoice with evidence of costs to its CCG, and will be reimbursed the required amount up to the maximum reimbursement. The maximum reimbursable amount for each of these roles will be set at the weighted mid-point of the respective Agenda for Change salary band.

There are no mandated contractual terms for staff employed under the PCN DES.

Can the funding be used for additional staff practices have already employed?

Staff employed under the DES must be ‘additional’ to the existing workforce employed by the network’s member practices. This will be measured on a 2018/19 baseline established as of 31 March 2019…The only accepted exception will be those clinical pharmacists employed via either the national Clinical Pharmacist in General Practice scheme and Pharmacists in Care Homes scheme.

How are practices expected to fund the 30% staff costs (for roles where only 70% funding is provided)?

2 options:

  • Use the network payment (e. the £1.50 per head).
  • Practice-pooled funding (e. contribution from each practice)

Who will be responsible for distributing the network funding?

How funding could flow in a network – 4 examples:

  1. “Flat practice model” – expenses shared across member practices
  2. “Lead practice model” – a single practice takes sole responsibility
  3. “GP federation/provider entity” – the limited liability provider entity takes responsibility
  4. “Non-GP employer” – the non-GP healthcare provider takes responsibility

Can my CCG decide not to provide the required funding for networks?

Commissioners cannot remove or reduce the entitlements, but they can add to them.

Commissioners may choose to transfer, where appropriate, their locally commissioned services contracts to the network, rather than with individual providers.

Are Primary Care Networks just a precursor to general practice becoming part of Integrated Care Providers?

A more controversial model of integration, the ICP (Integrated Care Provider) has also been introduced by NHS England. ICPs involve merging multiple services into a single contract, held by a single provider. ICPs have been subject to controversy and the BMA has been clear that we oppose their introduction, as they increase the risk of privatisation and are incompatible with the independent contractor status of GPs.

13
mar
0

How Much Governance is Enough for Primary Care Networks?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The relationship was over.  After a bright beginning things had slowly deteriorated, and now it was time to call it a day.  The problem was we had a house, a car, joint bank account, the works.  We were faced with a choice – get the lawyers in to fight it out, or sit down and work it out ourselves.

Would we have been better sorting out a legal contract at the beginning, so that in the event of this situation arising we would have had a framework to sort it out?

This is the question some practices facing the prospect of entering a Primary Care Network are asking themselves.  Two thirds of the promised new money for general practice is coming via these networks, and that may just be the start.  CCGs and STPs are likely to put nearly all future local enhanced services through these nascent networks.  The fates of each practice within a network will be intertwined.

With this in mind, the temptation is to establish some form of legal contract between the practices.  Yes there is going to be a model network contract, but is it going to be enough?  Networks are going to need every practice to pull their weight.  Would it be better to get them to sign up to both their commitments and, more importantly, the consequences if they don’t meet them?  Won’t that provide better protection for everyone?

Back to the end of the relationship.  We sat down and had the difficult conversation, and agreed who would be having what.  It felt like a better way to sort things out than paying expensive lawyers and asking them to decide.  We would have had to have the conversation anyway, but this way we had it face-to-face rather than through our legal representatives.  I don’t think an upfront legal agreement would have done anything other than breed mistrust from the very beginning and increase the likelihood of legal fees down the line.

If a practice in a network doesn’t pull its weight, doesn’t fulfil its commitments, or doesn’t do what it is supposed to do, all of the practices will lose out.  Stronger legal agreements won’t prevent the need to have the difficult conversation.  Better to focus on the work needed to avoid this situation in the first place.

Three things feel more important than investing in lawyers for practices at this stage:

  1. Build positive relationships. Develop enough trust between practices to be able to have the “difficult” conversation without getting the lawyers (or the CCG, or NHS England, or the LMC etc) in.  Time invested in relationships before these conversations are required will repay itself over and over if it means practices in a network can work through their own challenges and issues internally.
  2. Appoint the right GP network leader. Brokering these conversations is likely to fall to the appointed GP lead of the network.  Building bridges between the practices may well be the key challenge of these new leadership roles, and be much more difficult than the external facing requirements.  Appointing someone trusted by all of the practices will be key to future success.
  3. Get the size of the network right. Smaller may be better.  There has been an initial reluctance in certain quarters to move from pre-existing localities and groups of 70 or 100 or even 150 thousand populations into the new 30-50,000 limits.  There is a sense of safety in numbers in the larger groupings.  But the point of the new size is that it is small enough for everyone to know everyone.  At this size, building trust across everyone is more possible, and the leadership challenge less impossible.

One of the key strengths of general practice has been the family feel of the practices, and the close relationships between staff and with patients.  This is a strength practices should aim to build on as they move into networks, rather than abandoning personal relationships in favour of legal frameworks as a way of reducing risk.  Involving lawyers might feel like it is adding a layer of protection, but the reality is the success of the network will be based on the strength of the relationships, the quality of the leadership, and the ability to have the difficult conversations when they are needed.

6
mar
0

What do Primary Care Networks Have to Do?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

It is easy to get lost right now in the immediate challenge of identifying practices to be in a network with, persuading someone to be the ‘accountable clinical director’, and deciding who should hold the network bank account.  But to get these short term decisions right it is worth spending some time reflecting on exactly what primary care networks are supposed to do.

This starts with their place in the wider system.  The new GP contract says, “The Primary Care Network is the natural unit for integrating most NHS care. Collective general practice can become the footprint on which other NHS community-based services can then dock. And by serving a defined place, the Primary Care Network brings a clear geographical locus for improving health and wellbeing.” (p25)

How networks will start to enact this bold claim is also spelled out in the new contract.  There are seven services networks are to provide against national specifications.  After the set-up year of 2019/20, there are two initial services to be delivered in full in 2020/21.  Networks are to provide structured medication reviews to patients, focusing on particular priority groups.  The pharmacists employed during 2019/20 will be key to the delivery of this service.

They are also to provide a new enhanced service for care homes.  This might be the first new service requiring networks to agree differential delivery across practices, e.g. a lead practice for one or even all of the care homes.  A condition of signing up the network agreement is that services will be provided equally across the network population, and it is becoming immediately apparent networks won’t work via a simple equal division of labour across member practices.

Worth a further pause at this point.  Many CCGs up and down the country have commissioned these types of schemes locally.  It would seem the use of the national GP contract, and its new network function, will lead to the replacement of many locally commissioned schemes with nationally commissioned ones.  We should watch out for how much opportunity the imminent Network Contract DES indicates there will be for local flexibility.

There are three further services that are to “commence in 2020/21 and develop over the subsequent years”.  This is where general practice is taken into slightly less well chartered territory.  While the first service, anticipatory care, is fairly common across the country (although under different names such as “proactive care”) and the idea of identifying and proactively managing the needs of high risk patients is nothing new, what is new is that this service will require a “fully integrated primary and community health team”.   Community providers will even be asked from July to configure their community teams on primary care network footprints.  The relationship (and power dynamic) between the primary care network and the newly configured community team will be critical to future success.

Which takes us back to the wider purpose.  The network is very much about enabling the integration of primary care with other parts of the NHS system.  “A Primary Care Network cannot exist without its constituent practices, but its membership and purpose goes much wider. The NHS Long Term Plan sets out a clear ambition to deliver the ‘triple integration’ of primary and specialist care, physical and mental health services, and health with social care. The Primary Care Network is a foundation of all Integrated Care Systems; and every Integrated Care System will have a critical role in ensuring that PCNs work in an integrated way with other community staff such as community nurses, community geriatricians, dementia workers, and podiatrists/chiropodists.” (New GP contract, p30-31).

The next service is “personalised care”.  Easy to say, hard to understand exactly what it is.  I have read the relevant parts of the new contract a number of times and I still find it hard to pin down.  It seems this is essentially about widening the support provided to individuals beyond purely medical interventions.  Social prescribing and the newly funded link workers will play a prominent role in the delivery of this service.  However it plays out, it is another step in widening the scope and role of general practice through networks in influencing the overall health of local populations.

The last service to be introduced in 2020/21 is supporting early cancer diagnosis.  What is most interesting about this service will be the role of networks in raising awareness of symptoms and uptake of screening in their local neighbourhoods.  Networks may provide a way of practices operating more freely outside of their practices with local community partners.

Finally, in 2021/22 two more services will be introduced.  Cardiovascular disease prevention and diagnosis and, more nebulously, tackling inequalities.  Whilst the former is relatively clear, the latter much less so.  The text in the contract is along the lines of “we will test some ideas and then roll out the approaches that have the greatest impact at the network level”.

Alongside these seven new services from 2020 there will be a new national “Impact and Investment fund”.  Based on a principle of “shared savings” it means networks can gain a financial return from reductions in A&E attendances, emergency admissions, outpatient costs, prescribing savings, and hospital discharge (I assume via reduced length of stay), to then invest in new staff for the network.

It seems, then, the real work begins for networks in 2020 with the introduction of these specifications.  The immediate challenge then should not be simply to tick the relevant boxes that will be sent out by the centre, but rather to use 2019/20 to develop a platform that will be able to deliver against these future requirements, or even better one that can make a real difference to the health and wellbeing of the population it will be serving.

27
feb
0

Who Should Host Your Primary Care Network?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

I have talked a lot about needing to start with why and build relationships before you get into the discussion about what form your primary care network should take.  But time is short, and form is also a decision that will need to be made.

First things first.  £1.8bn of the promised £2.8bn coming in to general practice in the next five years is coming through networks.  It is worth spending some time making sure these are set up correctly!

Technically practices sign up to networks by signing up to the Network Contract DES (guidance due out in March).  Networks are not to be legal entities of themselves; the aim is explicitly not to create another layer of governance/bureaucracy.  In signing up to the Network Contract DES practices have to identify, by 15th May, “the single practice or provider that will receive funding on behalf of the PCN” (p27).

The contract goes on to say, in paragraph 4.32, that “It is for each PCN to decide its delivery model for the Network Contract DES.  It could be through a lead practice, GP federation, NHS provider or social enterprise partner”.

But which option to choose? How would a new network decide?  It is worth spending some time examining the pros and cons of each of the options.

  1. Lead Practice

Summary: This model feels primarily designed for those practices already at the magic 30-50,000 population, who wish to become a network in their own right.  The money stays close to general practice, but could be a fast-track to inter-practice disputes where more than one practice is part of the network.

Pros Cons
Allows a single practice to receive/manage all the network funding Funding routed through one practice can lead to tensions between practices
Keeps the funding as close as possible to core general practice Liability for expenditure (e.g. employment of new staff) sits with the host practice
Enables rapid decision making and minimal bureaucracy Limited ability to influence as wider general practice within local integrated care arrangements, or to develop services beyond network boundaries

Key questions to consider:

If the network has more than one practice: How will you ensure all practices have an equal say?  How will you ensure transparency between practices? How will you prevent it feeling like a pre-cursor to a future merger with so much of the funding flowing through one practice?

How will you establish joint working arrangements with other networks? How will you create a strong local voice for general practice with other networks?

  1. GP Federation

Summary: This model feels primarily designed for those practices who already have a successful GP federation in place, who want to use the federation infrastructure to strengthen the ability to deliver against, and maximise the opportunities of, the Network Contract.  It will require a clear accountability of the federation to the networks.

Pros Cons
Creates a GP owned host that will allow equity between practices in a network Given the timescales, is likely only to work where GP federations already exist
Creates opportunities for at scale working beyond network boundaries, e.g. extended access funding is often already routed through federations, development of services to impact the Investment and Impact Fund Federation may have priorities different to those of networks, e.g. delivery of existing contracts
Limited liability for the member practices of employing new staff if employed directly through the federation May feel like the networks work for the federation rather than vice versa if not structured correctly
Potential enabler of strong collective voice for general practice in local integrated care working Potential VAT issues if practices want to second existing practice staff into the federation

Key questions to consider:

How will you make sure the federation is working for the networks, and not vice versa?  Who controls the decision making in the federation?  Do/will the networks have enough of a say?  Is there a willingness among federation leaders to adapt the existing governance to meet the needs of networks?

  1. NHS Provider or Social Enterprise Partner

Summary: This model feels primarily designed for those practices already in some form of partnership arrangement with either the local hospital, the local community or mental health trust, or some other organisation.  Without an existing relationship in place it is hard to see how the level of trust could be high enough for practices to be willing to entrust their funding to them.

Pros Cons
May be able to provide additional services for networks such as estates or HR support Is only likely to work where a reasonably advanced existing agreement is in place between local practices and the host organisation
Large turnover organisations will be able to carry liability and any financial risk the networks want to undertake The size and core business of the organisations may mean the networks and their activities are low priority for them
May enhance ability to recruit and support new staff groups e.g. physiotherapists, pharmacists, where host organisation already employs these staff groups Voice of the networks may get confused with that of host organisation in system/integrated care discussions
May be able to offer synergies with own service offerings, e.g. integrating community and primary care teams Distance of the funding from practices

Key questions to consider:

What influence will the network have on the host organisation?  How will it be able to control how network funding is used?  Does the relationship rely on certain individuals, who may only be around for a few more years?  How can networks ensure they can retain a distinct identity from the host organisation?

Conclusion

It very much looks like different solutions will be appropriate for different areas, and that there is no obvious “best” solution that applies to all.  For single practice networks, or those already in a federation or who have a pre-existing relationship with another organisation, the challenge is probably mainly about adapting their existing arrangements to meet the network requirements.  But the greatest challenge may lie with those nascent networks who are formed of a group of practices, with no federation or obvious organisational link.  For them, the best way forward appears far less clear.

20
feb
1

First steps towards networks

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

Maybe your practice has never worked well with other practices.  Maybe you have avoided it, as far as has been possible.  The new GP contract, with so much money going through the new primary care networks, means this strategy of avoidance is not going to be an option any longer.  What do you do now?

There is a perception that primary care networks are not really anything new, that they have been happening anyway.  I don’t think this is true.  According to the NAPC website, 16% of the population is covered by the forerunner of primary care networks, primary care homes.  NHS England state that according to CCG returns 80% of practices report being in some form of network.  A generous estimate might put the real figure of the percentage of practices that have actively sought to work with their neighbours in some sort of meaningful way in the middle of these two, which would be about 50%.

That means half of practices are in the situation of having to work with other practices for the first time.  It means while half of the practices are building on some sort of foundation, making progress, and generally intimidating those who don’t know what to do, half are simply trying to get their heads around what the new world of networks means.

I have spoken to a number of people recently, asking what advice they would give to GPs and practices in exactly this situation.  I asked an accountant, a lawyer and the Head of Primary Care at NHS England.  Interestingly, all three came up with exactly the same answer.  Go for a drink or for a meal with your local practices.  Get to know them.  Build the relationships.

The questions GPs and practices ask when reviewing new guidance or documents such as the new GP contract are often technical.  What will the accounting relationship be between the new network and my practice?  Will we incur VAT charges?  Who will employ the staff, and where will the risk sit?  These are all valid questions, but, even according to an accountant and a lawyer, they are not the place to start.

A few years ago a colleague of mine took up a new post as an Executive Director in a large teaching hospital.  On her first day she met with the CEO.  He said to her that he didn’t want her to do anything for the first month, just to build relationships.  She was stunned.  She wanted to prove her worth, and was worried that she would be seen as someone without focus on delivery.  But years later she reflected it was the best advice she could have been given.  She said too many people start to try to do things without having relationships in place.  Delivery then happens at the expense of those relationships, not through them.  But because she was given the time to develop strong relationships she was able to deliver far more than if she had just jumped straight in.

The same applies to GPs and practices looking to set up new networks.  The whole rationale of the 30-50,000 population size is about relationships.  It means the people operating within the network can all get to know each other and have a personal relationship, and not be of a size that inevitably creates distant, faceless bureaucracies.  So if the basis of the new primary care network is relationships, the best starting point is to build these relationships.  While it might feel indulgent when the timescales are short, time invested now will repay in buckets in the months and years to come.

13
feb
1

Primary Care Networks: Start with the right question

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

The clock is already ticking. Following the recent publication of the new GP contract, GP practices only have until the 15th May to submit their network registration information to their CCG. Waiting until the Network Contract DES is published (promised by 29th March) will only leave 6 weeks. Starting now gives practices three months to get ready for the new networks.
But where to start? It is tempting to jump straight in to what the network will look like and how it will operate. But a better place to start is with “why?” Why will this network exist? What is its purpose? What difference is it going to make?

Simon Sinek talks about this lot. His book, “Start with Why”, has inspired many. For the time poor, you might want to cut straight to this 5 minute short version Ted talk to understand the essence of it. Essentially, people are inspired by a sense of purpose. It is this that motivates us to take action. Clarity on why we do things leads to much more sustained action than clarity on what we are to do or how we are to do it.

The GP contract offers a number of possible motivations for primary care networks. They are (p25):

  • “Intended to dissolve the historic divide between primary and community services”
  • “A way of helping GP partnerships survive and evolve over the coming decade, and provide a means of mutual support for better workload management”
  • “A dedicated joint investment and delivery vehicle”, a way of enabling investment into primary care where it cannot reasonably be expected for every practice to deliver the requirements on their own”
  • “Large enough to run a full multi-disciplinary team”, a way of bringing new roles into general practice”
  • “A clear geographical locus for improving health and wellbeing”
  • “To provide strategic and clinical leadership to help support change across primary and community health services”

Each area is different. One, some or all of these may work for you. More likely there will need to be some adaptation, some local tailoring, to create an ambition that is inspiring for your GPs and the practice staff in your network.

It will be easy to get lost in creating a network simply because you have to. Or in tactics to try and maximise income received. Or in the details of how the network will operate. But networks present a huge opportunity for general practice, not just for now but for many years to come. Decisions made in the next 3 months are like to have long lasting consequences because these networks will grow in importance.

Even though time is short, time invested now in determining the why of their network for member practices will be time well spent. It will create unity, excitement even, and a shared sense of purpose. It will make delivery down the line much easier, and sustain action well beyond the initial network submission deadlines.

6
feb
0

The GP Forward View and the new GP Contract: Spot the Difference

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

On the surface the new GP contract and the GP Forward View (GPFV) appear very similar.  Both contain promises of money and staffing, as well as a determination to create a sustainable future for general practice.  But nearly three years on from the publication of the GPFV, things don’t feel much better.  Workforce, finance, workload and morale all remain challenges for general practice.  Will it be any different this time round?  We’ve been examining the differences between the two documents, and have identified 5 that give cause for optimism.

  1. Type of document

While both are written documents, there is a big difference between the GPFV and the new GP contract.  The GPFV was essentially a commissioning plan – it was how NHS England, as the commissioner of general practice, was going to improve it.  It was full of aspiration, but lacking in detail of how it was going to be delivered, a concern that ultimately proved well-founded.  The new GP contract, however, is just that – a contract – and as such is clearer and more transparent, making the promises feel much more concrete than in the GPFV.

  1. Money

On the surface the promise of money is similar.  In the GPFV the headline figure was £2.4bn over five years, and in the new contract it is £2.8bn over five years.  The problem the GPFV ran into was transparency in relation to the money.  The RCGP and others set up tracking mechanisms to try and check the promises made were being adhered to.  In the end, because the £2.4bn was actually to be delivered over 8 years (a retrospective starting point of 2013 was used), and because a huge chunk of it went on access and so not to core general practice, it never made the difference it should have.  The new contract is different.  Yes £1.8bn of the £2.8bn comes via the new networks, but it is still coming to practices, and how the money will be delivered is clearly laid out.

  1. Implementation

Money in the GPFV came via NHS England to CCGs, sometimes to federations, and eventually to practices.  Multiple pots all had their own application processes.  The money proved difficult to access and was beset by bureaucracy.  This time the money will come via the contract, either directly to the practice or directly to the network set up by the practice.  It feels like control of the funding will sit at practice level and then work up, rather than (as with the GPFV) start at the top and slowly trickle down.

  1. Policy Objective

Politicians and commissioners always want a return for their money.  In the GPFV the primary policy objective was extended access (‘we will invest this money in general practice if you deliver 8-8 working 7 days a week’).  The introduction of access stretched the already-thin workforce even further, diverted portfolio and part-time GPs away from core practice, as well as moved funding thought to be for core general practice into private providers.  In the new contract the primary policy objective is the introduction of primary care networks.  These networks are to enable general practice to integrate more effectively with the rest of the system, and allow a more robust system of out-of-hospital care to be created.  The great news for general practice is that, done well, these networks can support and enhance the delivery of core general practice.  This alignment of the needs of general practice with overall policy provides maybe the greatest hope for the new contract.

  1. Workforce

One of the biggest failings of the GPFV has been its inability to successfully tackle the workforce crisis in general practice.  The service is still waiting for 5,000 of the promised 5,000 additional GPs.  The new contract, however, takes a more realistic approach.  The focus on new GPs isn’t lost, but is enhanced by a much more pragmatic (although still challenging) plan to recruit 20,000 additional non-GP non-nurse clinical staff, with the funding being directly provided to the practices via networks.  This realistic plan for staffing creates a strong foundation for optimism.

30
jan
1

The Obsession with Access is Destroying General Practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

If you ask the government what is important about primary care, it is clear there will only be one response: access.  Access is determined to be important to voters, and so it is access politicians care about.  Whatever the cost to general practice itself.

Looking back to 2016, the GP Forward View feels very much like a solution to the strong governmental desire to introduce extended access, despite the crises befalling general practice.  Here is a headline £2.4bn…with the condition you deliver extended access.

Indeed, recent reports suggest a huge investment in recent years into general practice.  This is not what it feels like to practices.  Much of the investment never reached practices, but instead went to extended access providers.  As these providers deliver general practice, it all “counts” as investment in general practice.

The reality is, of course, that the introduction of extended access has made things worse for practices.  The root cause of the workload and financial problems, alongside the inexorable rise in demand from a growing, ageing population, is the lack of GPs.  Fewer GPs means more work for those who remain, plus an increased expenditure on locums which in turn creates a huge financial pressure on practices.  The introduction of extended access simply creates an additional demand for GPs, stripping down further the numbers who can work in core, in-hours general practice.

The pledge to increase the number of GPs by 5,000 was a central part of the GP Forward View.  But despite an increase in the numbers entering training, the numbers leaving has exceeded those arriving.  GP numbers (FTE excluding locums and registrars) fell 3.4% between September 2016 and September 2018.  The pledge to increase access to 8am to 8pm seven days a week, on the other hand, has been delivered.

What, then, do we get in the Long Term Plan?  Yet another access pledge.  “Digital first primary care will become a new option for every patient improving fast access to convenient primary care.  Some GPs are now offering their patients the choice of a quick telephone or online consultation…. Over the next five years every patient in England will have a new right to choose this option – usually from their own practice or, if they prefer, from one of the new digital GP providers” (Long Term Plan 1.44, p26).

So now, in addition to GPs who choose to work extended access hub shifts (convenient, without the pressure and hassle of core general practice), we are going to have GPs who choose to work for “one of the new digital GP providers” (potentially ‘working from home’ for GPs).  Further dilution of a precious and diminishing workforce, all in the name of access.  All piling yet more pressure on a general practice that is creaking at the seams.

Amidst the plethora of documents that have come out already in 2019 (with potentially the most important, the new GP contract, due this week), there is one ray of hope.  Dr Nigel Watson’s Partnership Review did explicitly recognise the pressure access is causing core general practice.  His recommendation 5a states, “Primary Care Networks should be enabled to determine how best to address the balance between urgent and routine appointments during extended opening hours and weekends” (p32).  He explains, “Extended access services in many areas are attracting GPs away from practices. NHS England should therefore consider how existing funding for extended access and opening could be allocated through PCNs as they mature, to enable local decision making on managing demand appropriately. This should also support partnerships to feel a greater sense of control and influence over managing the safety of their working day.  It could also reduce fragmentation of services and increase opportunities to improve continuity of care.”

It is not a recommendation, however, that has been picked up in the Planning Guidance or the Long Term Plan.  Whether it will turn into anything remains to be seen, but the priority this government has placed on access to primary care, regardless of the consequences for core general practice, makes me, for one, sceptical as to its chances. However, it is certainly a recommendation fledgling primary care networks would do well to remember as they move forward, as its chances of implementation probably relies on pressure from them.

BMA Council Chair Chaand Nagpaul summed it up well when he said, “There is no use opening the digital front door to the health service if we don’t have the healthcare staff behind it”.  The current obsession with access is dangerous, because it is making a bad situation worse.  A resource can only be stretched so thinly, and it is only a matter of time before more holes begin to show.

23
jan
0

Primary Care Networks are the new black

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Reading the NHS Long Term Plan (LTP), the GP Partnership Review, and the Planning Guidance for 2019/20 (not something I would recommend for a single sitting!), one thing stands out for general practice above everything else – Primary Care Networks.  When it comes to general practice, the documents make it clear that Primary Care Networks, based on neighbouring GP practices that work together typically covering 30-50,000 people, are the new black.

They are seen as the enabler of “fully integrated community based healthcare” (LTP p15).  They will have expanded neighbourhood teams, which “will comprise a range of staff such as GPs, pharmacists, district nurses, community geriatricians, dementia workers and AHPS such as physiotherapists and podiatrists/chiropodists, joined by social care and the voluntary sector.” (LTP p14).

And not just an enabler of integration.  The GP Partnership Review wants more.  It says, “Multi-professional community health teams should be based in Primary Care Networks and work under the clinical and service direction of the Primary Care Network.  They could remain employed by their existing employer while being more closely partnered with, and embedded in, practices day to day.  This should include creating a single team using a common health record, sharing the same caseload, and removing the need for referrals.  Wherever possible, the community teams should also be co-located with the constituent practices of the network.” (Partnership Review 4.46 p30).

The future role of Primary Care Networks does not stop there.  They are the vehicle for online consultations: digital-first primary care is to become a new option for every patient, and to enable this the NHS, “will create a new framework for digital suppliers to offer their platforms to Primary Care Networks on standard NHS terms” (LTP p26).  The GP Partnership Review recommends an even stronger role in relation to access, “Primary Care Networks should be enabled to determine how best to address the balance between urgent and routine appointments during extended opening hours and weekends…NHS England should consider how existing funding for extended access and opening could be allocated through Primary Care Networks as they mature, to enable local decision making on managing demand appropriately” (Partnership Review p32).

They will provide around the clock cover for care homes, “Primary Care Networks will also work with emergency services to provide emergency support (to care homes) including where advice or support is needed out of hours” (LTP p16)

They should be training hubs.  Dr Nigel Watson in his review recommends, “every Primary Care Network should be in partnership with, or become, a Training Hub, ensuring the place-based delivery of education and training in primary care for GPs and other staff working in general practice and staff aligned with the Primary Care Network” (Partnership Review 4.51 p31).

They are to be the new voice of general practice.  “Every Integrated Care System will have… full engagement with primary care, including through a named accountable Clinical Director of each Primary Care Network” (LTP p30).

They will be responsible for health outcomes.  “Primary Care Networks will from 2020/21 assess their local population by risk of unwarranted health outcomes and, working with local community services, make support available to people where it is most needed” (LTP p17).  They will also be encouraged to reduce expenditure.  “We will also offer Primary Care Networks a new “shared savings” scheme so that they can benefit from actions to reduce avoidable A&E attendances, admissions and delayed discharge, streamlining patient pathways to reduce avoidable outpatient visits and over-medication through pharmacist review” (LTP p15).

How is the move to Primary Care Networks going to happen?  Well I suspect we will find out more when the new GP contract is finalised.  For now, the LTP says, “As part of a set of multi-year contract changes individual practices in a local area will enter into a network contract, as an extension to their current contract, and have a designated single fund through which all network resources will flow.  Most CCGs have local contracts for enhanced services and these will normally be added to the network contract” (LTP p14).

In 2019/20 CCGs are required, “to commit a recurrent £1.50/head recurrently to developing and monitoring Primary Care Networks so that the target of 100% coverage is achieved as soon as it is possible and by 30 June 2019 at the latest.  This investment should be planned for recurrently and needs to be provided in cash rather than in kind” (19/20 Planning Guidance p17).

It remains to be seen if that sets a “running cost” of £45-75K per network (assuming 30-50,000 population), or whether it is a starter fund with more to be added later.  One place we might find out is in the primary care strategy that every ICS or STP must have in place by 1 April 2019.  This strategy is to set out, “how they will ensure the sustainability and transformation of primary care and general practice as part of their overarching strategy to improve population health… This must include specific details of their: local investment in transformation with the local priorities identified for support; Primary Care Network development plan; and local workforce plan” (19/20 Planning Guidance p17).

The ambition for fledgling Primary Care Networks, that in some places do not even exist yet, is breath-taking.  They are clearly a crucial building block in the design of the new system for the NHS.  Whether they can live up to the expectations remains to be seen, but they represent a huge opportunity for general practice.  Like them or love them, because even funding is being channelled through them, they are a trend that will be almost impossible for general practice to ignore.

16
jan
0

Guest Blog – the NHS long term plan, a GP at-scale view

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

You’ve seen the summaries of the NHS Long Term Plan but now, thanks to a guest blog from Craig Nikolic, Chief Operating Officer of Together First (a GP federation in Barking and Dagenham) we offer you a more in-depth look from the particular perspective of general practice operating at-scale…

I’m a long-term cynic when it comes to NHS long-term plans.  They’re usually unnaturally narrow, overly prescriptive and with the flexibility of a Soviet Five Year Plan.  This new one is different: it’s broad (scattergun broad in places), with vision statements instead of hard plans, and enough scope for local areas to interpret this in a way that makes it work for their area.

Be open when you read it, if you don’t like one part then don’t write off the entire plan.

The sections below are my commentary on each chapter in the plan, concentrating on Chapter 1 and putting a very strong at-scale bias on it.

CHAPTER 1 – SERVICE MODEL

The changes to the existing NHS service model in this plan are generally well thought through and represent some good innovative thinking.  There is substantial work needed, though, to turn it from vision into actual plans.  For at-scale General Practice, the Plan has plenty of changes:

The focus around Primary Care Networks (PCNs) is interesting as it’s a deliberate step away from discussing “providers” and into defining geographically bound GP-led organisations.  There is almost no other way they could have phrased this without allowing a way-in for out-of-area and private company poaching of work.  How this is funded is a different question, as it’s vague.  I would prefer a capitated block budget with a deprivation supplement (see Chapter 2 notes).  It will be interesting to see how this will work with looking-out GP Federations mixed with looking-in PCNs.

Additionally, it refers to CCG procured “enhanced” services.  This is a particular issue of mine as cash-rich CCGs can afford lots of these enhanced services while cash-poor ones can’t.  It’s a built-in inequality that directly impacts the way clinicians can offer patient care. It would be good to see a national index of enhanced services offered in each area.  Maybe this is something for NHSE to do, enabling GPs and providers to hold CCGs to account for the reduced capabilities they have.

A very welcome change in this Plan is the addition of “shared savings” where GPs and PCNs will be rewarded by getting part of any savings made in other care settings.

There is now a focus on “digital first” for GPs.  I think this partially misses the point as it does not account for the system-wide savings through continuity of care in General Practice. Neither does it work for the “have-nots” of society who can’t or won’t use technology. This is where GPs must step up and be the patient advocates for the have-nots, especially in deprived areas.

I would recommend a priority for GPs is to address this themselves to protect their own service.  For example, it’s allowable in this for patients to be offered telephone appointments OR online conference ones.  Show that you offer patients a teleconference option and change your model to prioritising it and you’ll be half-way to meeting this objective. Do it yourselves or you’ll find it mandated and patients going elsewhere under promises of remote unicorns of same-day GP appointments by phone.

The outpatient redesign part of this chapter concerns me as, unless it’s done properly, it’ll result in General Practice being dumped with patients overly quickly discharged or there being clear rationing or higher bars on referring patients.  The Plan risks getting this wrong.  Patients don’t just go away because they can’t get a referral to hospital.

A major focus is placed on moving all of England to the ICS model by 2021. This is too aggressive as some areas just will not be ready in time.  Areas with large system-wide deficits or strict system controls are most likely to have difficulties in setting up effective ICS because it’s just not a priority compared to that big financial black hole

Another aspect of ICS is the move to Integrated Care Provider contracts. This will require legislative change to enable, but will effectively shortcut alliances of NHS public providers into formal status while also allowing a complete removal of the necessity for procurement for work in the area. A concern is the Plan suggests only allowing this for statutory bodies.  While this will exclude the big private providers, such as Virgin, it will also exclude GP Federations.  Much is required to make this work, and the elephant in the room of Brexit makes legislative changes unlikely for quite a while.

CHAPTER 2 – PREVENTION AND HEALTH INEQUALITIES

This chapter concerns itself with the prevention agenda and addressing health inequalities.  It does it very well and makes a strong case for addressing deprivation related health inequalities.  For this alone, this Plan succeeds and deserves support.

The Plan is clear that more funds will be targeted at areas with high deprivation and high health inequalities.  The concern for many areas with high deprivation is that they’re often grouped with areas of middling or low deprivation and any aggregation of their “scores” would see a loss of any such deprivation premium.

I would like to see a central strategy of highlighting discrete areas of high deprivation and high health inequalities and mandating special funding for them.  A secondary, but just as important, strategy is that this extra money must not be allowed to be diluted across an ICS/system; it must be provided to help health inequalities among the most deprived patients in England, not to give extra to areas that don’t need as much help.

CHAPTER 3 – CARE QUALITY AND OUTCOMES

This chapter is a mixed bag of strong content matching chapter 2 and defensiveness over the consequences of previous decisions.

The cancer prevention and early diagnosis parts of this Plan fall heavily on primary care with extra resources being made available for urgent referrals and diagnostic tests.  It will put pressure on GPs to deal with the turnaround and meet targets but it is achievable and will help patients.  A critical component is the funding though and ensuring it comes before the targets.

There’s a strong focus on mental health with distinctions between CYP and adult MH, as well as plans for addressing the current service gap of 18-25-year-old patients moved from CAMHS to adult MH services. Much of the load from this will land on primary care through IAPT extensions, and it’s worth dedicating time to what this will mean for both individual practices and at-scale General Practice. I’d recommend that GP Federations make this a core part of any clinical strategy they’re developing.

One thing that will benefit patients is the commitment to get 70% of acute hospitals to the Core 24 standard on emergency MH support by 2023/4 and then to 100%. This will give GPs a much needed emergency referral source that is missing at present across the greatest part of England.

The less good side is learning development and autism where the plan seems disjointed and is proud of the fact that inpatient provision will be halved by 2023/4 considering that it was already effectively cut in half from its 2010 numbers by 2015.  As always, the load from these patients moved back to the community risks landing on primary care and often take GP time.  Again, we need a GP at-scale strategy for these patients to treat them with the dignity and care they deserve while also not impacting overall workloads.  The relatively low numbers would suggest this may be best dealt with in practices with at-scale support.

Interestingly, there are some changes to the planned vs urgent care model that will help primary care. There are plans to provide funding for increased planned care capacity, but not necessarily in acute hospitals.  This is a welcome change from the now habitual “cut referrals” strategy to reduce waiting lists.  Also, there are plans to force physical separation between urgent/emergency care and planned care so that disruptions such as winter pressures will have fewer major impacts on planned care.  This would be a major expense though, and I doubt the government will provide the capital needed for the physical building separations.

CHAPTER 4 – NHS STAFF

Of greatest importance to GPs in this section is the confirmation that GP indemnity will be cost neutral.  This means it will be paid for but then clawed back through other parts of GP funding, most likely GMS/PMS contracts.

The remainder of chapter 4 shows this is the weakness of the whole Plan. It needs a robust workforce strategy and struggles without it.  Treat this chapter as a placeholder for the proper strategy later.

There is too much concentration on the centralised functions writing the plans and far too little recognition that it’s locally that workforce fails when grand strategies are applied.

It also shies away from changing previous poor decisions, such as materially defunding the NHS Leadership Academy, but talks about improving training & CPD coverage.

CHAPTER 5 – DIGITALLY-ENABLED CARE

There’s some blank cheques written in this section that recognise the aims of the Health Secretary, but these haven’t yet been fleshed out beyond bare skeletons.

A key example is the paragraph about improving IT to make work more satisfying (“faster, better and more reliable”).  Yet with no ideas on how they’ll do that when programme after programme has failed to touch the subject.

It also fails to deal with the massive infrastructure upgrade of resilience that is essential if the NHS is moving away from on-site presence to off-site coverage.  If a system goes down or is slow when the patient and clinician are face-to-face then it’s often simple to work around; if a system goes down when it’s a virtual consultation then it usually stops. This is a massive expense, based on my own experience of grand-scale upgrades, doubling the capital IT budget for a few years MIGHT just achieve this.  There’s no getting away from this, to make it “faster, better and more reliable” will require huge and probably politically unbearable capital investment with revenue uplifts.

CHAPTER 6 – TAXPAYERS’ INVESTMENT

The Plan bakes in a 1.1% annual “productivity growth” dividend.  This is unlikely as there’s very little “fat” left in the system.  The NHS as it stands is far more efficient than the vast majority of even the best private sector organisations.  Any more cuts will be right into muscle.

It does make an interesting comment that community care clinical staff spend more time doing admin and non-patient facing work than patient-facing work. I would put that this is a recognition that admin cuts have gone too far and investment in specialist admin staff and tools would more than repay themselves in freed time to deal with patients.

Finally, it makes the point that the central admin budgets of the NHS, including provider Trusts, will be expected to be cut by £700m/year.  Again, from where?

CHAPTER 7 – NEXT STEPS

An interesting point here is the Plan’s aim to provide five-year indicative budgets.  My hope is that this will remove the year-by-year short-termism of the NHS and allow long-term efficient and multi-year budgets. This is an area where Federations and private providers can outperform the NHS at present as we’re not bound by in-year spending of funds.  It will only be good for the rest of the NHS to catch up.

The legislative changes required to make this plan work are also interesting.  The bits that impact at-scale General Practice are around the ICS/ICP and integrated care Trusts and the removal of procurement mandates.  The latter would allow CCGs to make direct contracting between NHS organisations easier and remove the significant wasted costs we see in NHS procurements of very low-level services.  Both are items that should gain strong support and advocacy from GP at-scale groups.

WHAT IT’S MISSING

I hope some readers are still here!  As a bonus to those of you who made it, I noted two major areas that this Plan misses that I’d hope would make it.

Point 1: National detailed minimum standards of care matched to local needs.  Targets are fine in their own way (same with CQC inspections) but they’re negative and, regardless of what they say, just are not patient focussed. I would like a grand programme that sets standards of care across all health issues and provokes discussion on prioritisation for care to help the NHS set its own localised plans.  For example, what’s unique about a deprived area’s health inequalities that explains WHY it has lower levels for patient care?  What does that mean and how does the area plan to meet, and exceed, national minimum standards of care?  Long-term local plans should then be externally funded for removing health inequalities matched with central funding for delivery that supplements local commissioning funding.

Point 2: Demand analysis.  The NHS is woefully unaware of its actual demand.  How many patients don’t bother when they can’t get a GP appointment?  How many GPs won’t refer clearly ill patients because they know they’d be rejected?  The NHS is terrified of these figures as they’d be spun out of all proportion by the media, but they’re needed to model demand properly.  The NHS needs an adult conversation on demand and how it should be met, including what we expect the public to do themselves.  It’s a weakness to continue scaling services by supply rather than demand.

As mentioned, this is my interpretation with my tinted glasses on of at-scale General Practice. I instinctively wanted to dislike this Plan before I read it but I actually do like it.  It’s honest and doesn’t pretend to be complete, it also is a vision statement where you can forgive the lack of detail as long as there’s a genuine aim to produce proper plans in a relatively short time.  With that in mind, give it your own read with that in mind rather than “that won’t work”. https://www.longtermplan.nhs.uk/

28
nov
0

Making general practice easy to do business with

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Is general practice easy to do business with? The prevailing wisdom of the day is no, general practice is not easy to do business with. One of the big gaps identified in the Five Year Forward View was the one that exists between general practice and, well, everyone else. In a world of integrated care systems the NHS needs general practice to be easy to do business with. It needs general practice to be an active partner in the new arrangements because it recognises integrated care won’t succeed without it.

Being easy to do business with benefits practices as well as the system. It means more resources can be directed into primary care, aligned to the impact this investment will have on the system as a whole. It means general practice not only has a voice, but can shape changes to the system in a way that makes sense for its patients. It means the problems of distance from the community providers and the hospitals can be tackled not via fruitless arguments in a contracting room, but in practical changes that impact how services operate.

Why is general practice not easy to do business with? It is essentially a numbers game. The average hospital serves a population of about 300,000. The average practice serves a population of 8,000. So that is an average of 37.5 practices for each hospital to be doing busy with. It is an unsustainable number of relationships for a hospital to maintain. Community trusts serve population sizes of over a million, exacerbating the problem even further.

Enter general practice at-scale. Much of the drive for general practice at-scale is to solve this numbers problem. If general practice is organised into units of 30-50,000 there are only 6-10 relationships needed for an acute trust to be able to partner with general practice. If it is organised into larger federations of 200-300,000, then this number may be reduced to 1 or 2.

But there is a danger of being too greedy. The greater the distance of the general practice organisation from its practices (i.e. the bigger it is), the harder it is for it to really represent the views of its member practices. And of course with integrated care it is not just about presenting views, it is about changing models of care. If the system pulls the (newly created) general practice lever (in the form of the federation) but nothing happens, all we have really done is add to the complexity by increasing the number of organisations.

Hence the value of at-scale general practice lies in the strength of its relationships with its member practices. I write a lot about the importance of trust between practices and their network/federation leaders, but it is because it is so crucial. If these leaders sit around the integrated care table and cannot commit their practices to anything, and spend their time explaining how complex the general practice landscape is because practices are independent contractors, then the gap between general practice and the rest of the system has not really been closed.

But if these leaders can sit around the integrated care table and make decisions on behalf of their practices, firm in the knowledge that whatever direction they choose the member practices will follow on the basis of their belief and trust in them, it means general practice is, at last, easy to do business with.

21
nov
0

Can you solve The Autonomy Paradox?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

A paradox is, “a seemingly absurd or contradictory statement or proposition which when investigated may prove to be well founded or true.”

Try this one on for size… In order to retain autonomy GP practices need to give up autonomy. Is that absurd or true?

It is, in fact, The Autonomy Paradox!

The first question we need to consider is “why is operating at-scale of benefit to practices?” It is because, the argument goes, costs can be reduced, income can be increased, and new ways of working and new roles can be introduced to reduce workload.

But none of these things can happen without practices operating together as a collective. The group of practices working together “at scale” need to agree to a single way of doing things in order for any of the benefits to be realised.

For example, they all need to agree to move to a single accountant, or they all need to agree to a new paramedic-led visiting service, or they all need to agree to cross-refer their dermatology patients to one of the practices rather than sending them directly to the local hospital. Some practices will gain more than others from each change. One practice may have very cheap accountants, and my gain little or even lose out by the shift to one accountant across the group, but by that practice agreeing to it the group as a whole gains. Equally another practice may have a very low level of visits and so introducing the new paramedic model may feel like it is more trouble than its worth, but by participating the group as a whole benefits. The benefits of individual changes are rarely shared equally.

This, of course, is where difficulties set in. In my work with practices up and down the country, I am yet to go to an area that has introduced extended access without disputes about differential utilisation between practices. There is a deep seated reluctance for any practice to agree to a change that benefits another practice more, let alone one that might create a worse position for itself “for the greater good”.

But for operating at-scale to work, this is exactly what is required. For working together to deliver the maximum overall benefit, practices have to be prepared to make individual decisions for the benefit of the group, and trust that the overall benefit of working together will come to them.

Of course this is not the only option. Practices could fully merge, and then the single entity gains the benefit, rather than them being (differentially) apportioned across participants. But what is the cost of this for the original practice? In this (merged) scenario the practice has given up its independence altogether to become a new (admittedly independent) organisation. But it is no longer in its original state, with the freedoms that brought. The cost of receiving an equal share of the benefits was for the original practices to give up their independence altogether to form a new practice.

As the scale of the required changes grows, so does the problem. At what point, or at what size of practice, do we declare we no longer have independent general practice, but rather a group of (GP-led) corporations running the majority of services? Is this future worth it in order to ensure that at each point benefits are shared equally between practices?

In order to retain autonomy GP practices need to give up autonomy. If practices choose to cede some decision-making to the collective, so that benefits can be achieved at the group level rather than solely at an individual level, practices could retain their independence. They could avoid the need to either merge into larger and larger practices, or reach a dead-end when getting out is the only option remaining.

The choice is not either independence or dependence. Inter-dependence, and using federations, networks and the like to create this, is an option that allows practices to stay as separate units but enjoy the benefits of scale. But it requires practices to give up some autonomy in order to retain overall autonomy.

14
nov
0

How to build trust with practices

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The key success metric for at-scale general practice, the one I would be monitoring most closely in my own at-scale general practice organisation, is trust. Do the practices trust the federation/network/primary care home/insert local name here?

Why? It is because at-scale success, one that is to genuinely support GP practices, depends on practices giving up some degree of individual autonomy to the at-scale organisation. And this will only happen where there is trust. Without trust, practices will work to protect individual autonomy, not give it up.

So how can any at-scale general practice organisation build trust with its member practices? An interesting place to start is Charles Green’s trust equation. The equation is:

Trust = (credibility + reliability + intimacy) / self-orientation

This is summarised in a Harvard Business Review article (here). Credibility is the perception of credibility, and ultimately stems from whether practices think the organisation is honest and truthful, and whether they think what it says can be believed. Reliability is again a perception, of whether the organisation will do what it says it will do. Giving up any sort of autonomy means a practice needs to believe those to whom it is giving up autonomy can deliver on their promises. Intimacy is the willingness of a practice to trust the at-scale organisation with something. This needs a relationship between the two to exist.

But what strikes me as most interesting about this equation for at-scale general practice is that the denominator is self-orientation. This is the extent to which practices believe the focus of the at-scale organisation is on itself rather than on the member practices. The stronger the belief held by practices that the federation or network is primarily concerned with itself rather than its member practices, the greater the extent to which trust is lost.

How, then, can such an organisation reduce self-orientation? What can it do to build confidence with member practices that it is genuinely there to support them?

Create opportunities for practices to speak. Often communication between at-scale organisations and practices is one way. The federation or network will report back on what it is doing, and explain its plans going forward. But what is equally important is to enable practices to talk about what is important to them. Often the best way to do this is for leaders to visit individual member practices with the sole intent of listening to what the practices have to say.

Listen with intent. Creating the opportunity for practices to speak and then taking no action as a result is probably worse than not doing anything. It is simply lip service. The more practices feel you are listening to what they are saying the more they will engage, and the less they will feel you are simply carrying on with your agenda regardless of anything they have to say.

Take responsibility when things go wrong. A clear signal that organisations are oriented to themselves is when they blame others for failure. This might be the practices, the CCG, other federations, the government (the list can go on!). By taking responsibility, and by being transparent, practices can start to see that you have integrity. Avoiding the tendency to blame others shows you are committed to delivery, and that your focus is more on making things work for practices than your own reputation.

Trust is hard to win and easy to lose. Guarding against self-orientation, and actively keeping focus on the needs of member practices is one of the best ways for at-scale general practice organisations to build and maintain trust.

7
nov
0

Guest Blog – It’s time to get the lawyers in!

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

In last week’s blog Ben suggested that spending time and money on lawyers whilst developing new federations might be a mistake. But Craig Nikolic, Chief Operating Officer of Together First (a GP federation in Barking and Dagenham) had different ideas. So this week he gives us his take…

Ben Gowland’s blog piece on the Perfect Governance Model for GP Federations hits the spot on most areas and is correct that Federations that overdo “governance” are setting themselves up to become cumbersome and inefficient. Where I disagree with Ben is in the commissioning of professional advice.

For the vast majority of the NHS, the statement “it’s time to get the lawyers in” means that something has gone wrong and it’s often far too late. Most NHS senior managers have only seen lawyers in outright firefighting mode where they’re trying to fix problems, and doing it expensively.

To someone like me who has spent most of their career outside the NHS, this is a strange phenomenon and makes about as much sense as refusing to spend £100 on fire extinguishers then later complaining when you call the fire brigade to stop your business burning down.

A good lawyer or accountant, or even both, brought in early can be a very positive event when you’re doing business transformation. The trick is understanding what lawyers can do for you. For most NHS folk, lawyers are there to help you get over negative legal problems, or to legally threaten someone else, and they’re expensive. On the positive end of legal advice, it can be substantially cheaper to get a lawyer in early than put it off then find out when it’s too late that you’ve got it all wrong.

In Barking & Dagenham, we’re undergoing substantial transformational change and there’s a few areas where we’ve had uncomfortable experience of things going the wrong way because of the standard NHS “gentleman’s agreement” or a vague MoU over a critical piece of our business. We brought in lawyers and accountants to make sure our new plans get it right first time.

I’ll give a few of examples:

  • Take a GP Federation that wants to hold APMS/GMS/PMS contracts yet has GP practices in its area that are corporate bodies, say other APMS practices. Do you know absolutely and beyond doubt how your Federation can hold those contracts and also have the corporate body as an equally represented Federation member?
  • Do you do business with other NHS organisations by MoU? What’d happen if the other organisation said tomorrow “sorry, but that’s it, we’re stopping this deal today and you have no comeback because MoUs aren’t contracts”. That happens far more often than you’d think in the NHS.
  • Could your Federation’s books cope with a substantial amount of delegated commissioning if it suddenly came from the CCG? How could you track the financial viability of each LIS or contract? Are you confident that your cash flow could keep up with the slow nature of centralised NHS payments or payments from other care settings such as acute Trusts?

Getting formal legal and accountancy support on those items is not expensive, the trick is working with them properly. On lawyers especially, work with them, tell them in detail what you want to accomplish and how you’re planning to do it then put the open statement: “tell us the risks in what we’re doing”. It’s your plan, not theirs, you must put the hard work in first. Most NHS people dealing with lawyers give them nothing but vague statements and then say, “tell us how to do it”. You then get lawyers responding in the most risk-averse way possible with a contract that does nothing but lock people into onerous and negative terms. See the difference?

Imagine a GP referring a patient to a Consultant, you’d grumble at a GP just referring on and saying “patient is not well, tell us what to do” and giving nothing else, yet that’s what lawyers dealing with the NHS often get. Most of the money lawyers charge the NHS is spent doing their equivalent of “What do you mean by not well? Come on give us a clue, is it his leg? Maybe his arm?”

We did the positive work with our lawyers, we built a good relationship over overwhelmingly positive items and working through our already very robust plan. We got reassurance that most of the stuff we were doing was perfectly fine and had a legal opinion we could give to Commissioners and others to prove it. We changed track on a couple of minor points to address legal issues we simply didn’t know existed. We now have a clear idea of how to work well with other NHS organisations without having to get into regressive and negative protectionist contracts. Most importantly though, we know for sure that our plans are fit for a very flexible future that could go all the way from staying the same size all the way through to becoming a super-power Federation.

That’s it. Done. A simple, low bill to lawyers and we now have a clear foundation that’ll do us for years, protecting us from most negative events and giving us simple tools to help us do business more efficiently.

For me, that’s a no-brainer and I’d be in dereliction of my duty as a professional senior NHS manager to not take advantage of such an easily accessible resource.

31
oct
0

The Perfect Governance Model for GP Federations

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

One of the problems I have been grappling with in recent weeks is trying to work out why there is no single, universally applicable model of governance that GP federations can adopt. I have seen governance models that have worked really well in one area be a real hindrance to progress in another, and I wanted to understand why.

What has helped me unpick this is thinking about organisational life cycles. If you are not familiar with these, essentially each organisation goes through a life cycle from creation through to termination. People who look at these things have found organisations do not progress through a series of random events, but rather through an expected sequence of stages. These are start-up, growth, maturity, renewal and decline[i].

Different organisations go through these stages at different rates. Some companies like Blockbuster Video and Boo.com (anyone?) came and progressed quickly through to decline, while others like Colgate and Cadburys feel like they have been around longer than most of us can remember. Some, of course, never make it out of the start-up phase.

This helps us understand why the ‘cut and paste’ model of federation governance doesn’t work because the governance needs of an organisation vary according to the stage of development it is at. In a start-up it is generally all hands on deck with everyone (including the board) doing what is needed to get the idea off the ground. During the growth phase the board is more focussed on plans and policies. And as the organisation gets to maturity the focus of the board is much more on strategy, risk management and holding the leader/CEO to account.

This means asking “what is the correct governance for a GP federation?” is actually the wrong question. The right question is “what stage in its organisational life cycle is the GP federation at?” Once that has been established, we can match the appropriate governance to it.

The trap I see many GP federations falling into is failing to match the appropriate governance with where they are in the organisational life cycle. In particular, many GP federations are in start-up – they have developed a shared vision/mission across the member practices, and there are a small number of leaders trying to maintain engagement and enthusiasm while at the same time getting projects off the ground to prove the worth and value of the organisation. But they spend their time investing in lawyers and developing complex governance arrangements that are appropriate for a more mature organisation.

It is hard enough being a start-up organisation. There are so few people trying to do so much, at the same time as having sceptics to convince. The precious limited resource that is the time and energy of the leaders needs to focus initially on getting ideas off the ground and turning them into action, and of convincing stakeholders that this really is the future. Spending it on creating overly complex governance structures at this stage diverts energy from where it is really needed (as well as being expensive!).

Meanwhile, the high performing federations have already been through the start-up stage. They may even have gone through rapid growth. So the governance they now have is of a mature organisation (looking at strategy, risk management and holding the leaders to account). This is appropriate for them now. But it wasn’t appropriate when they started, and simply because you aspire to be like them doesn’t mean that it is appropriate for your organisation now either.

There is no single perfect governance model for a GP federation. But being clear on where your federation is on its organisational life cycle is the best first step you can take to determine what the most appropriate form of governance is for you.

[i]  Lester, D., Parnell, J. and Carraher, S. (2003). Organizational life cycle: A five-stage empirical scale. International Journal of Organizational Analysis, 11(4), p.339-354

17
oct
0

Never mind the models, it’s the mind-set

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Back in the dark mists of time, I used to work in the national emergency care team. Our job was essentially about applying service improvement to improve the delivery of emergency care. As part of the role myself and others would visit many different A&E departments and hospitals. What struck me most about these visits were the different mind-sets of those we visited.

They generally fell into two camps. There were those who were very warm and welcoming. They wanted to show us every part of their system and explain how it worked. They were eager for our feedback, and were keen to understand how they could make it better.

Then there were those who were not welcoming, who would make us wait, and restrict access to the areas they wanted us to see or to a certain amount of time because of how busy they were (i.e. had more important things to do). They were defensive to any reflections made about their practice, dismissed innovations developed elsewhere, and were not open to doing things differently.

We were not there to judge these departments, only to help. But it was clear from the outset which ones were actually open to any help and which ones were closed to it.

This phenomenon of having an “open” or “closed” mind-set is not limited to emergency departments. It is also prevalent in general practice. There are practices who are keen to learn from others, eager to try new things, and who want to find out where they can improve. Then there are practices who will tell you they have already tried everything that is out there, that it “didn’t work” for them, and that it is the system that needs to change, not them.

Possibly the leading international thinker on this subject it Carol Dweck. She talks about an open mind-set as a growth mind-set, and a closed one as fixed. She says,

“A fixed mind-set doesn’t easily allow you to change course. You believe that someone either has ‘it’ or they don’t: it’s a very binary frame of mind. You don’t believe in growth, you believe in right and wrong and any suggestion of change or adaptation is considered a criticism. You don’t know how to adopt grey thinking. Challenges or obstacles tend to make you angry and defensive.”

The tricky part of all of this is that most people and practices will say they are open to new ideas, and that they have a growth mind-set. But saying it doesn’t make it so. Some people and some places maybe were open to new ideas once, but no longer are. Years of relative success breeds a confidence in what you do and how you do it. It creates a mind-set that challenges and difficulties are driven by external forces and that making changes to meet them and learning from others is disrespectful to how they do things and unnecessary.

This is the difficult place that general practice finds itself in. Some practices are open to new ideas and to making changes, and are developing rapidly. But others are not. Their mind-set remains closed. This is where the real challenge for general practice lies. Primary care networks, operating at scale, technology, the introduction of new roles, creating John Lewis style ownership models (etc.) will only help practices if they have an open mind-set, if they want to learn from others, and if they want to make changes.

Creating a new future for general practice is not really about creating a new partnership model. At its heart it is about developing a new mind-set.

10
oct
0

What GP Federations can learn from the RCN

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

It might feel like getting a voice around the table is the hard part for general practice. It is not. It is just the beginning.

There is a salutary lesson for GP leaders from the experience of the Royal College of Nursing. They had a seat around the table of national pay negotiations for the NHS. Important for nurses, to ensure they are represented. But, under pressure from the government to “sell” the negotiated deal to their members they provided what an independent review described as “inaccurate” information to members, and presented the deal in a way “biased towards acceptance”.

When nurses opened their pay packets in July and found they were much lighter than they had been expecting, they called an emergency general meeting. The Chief Executive resigned, and a vote of no confidence was passed, following which the entire council will stand down.

In system meetings, just as general practice will want the hospital and the acute trust to make changes, so they in turn will want general practice to make changes. How does the federation leader, there to represent general practice as a provider, respond? If he or she is too inflexible, the chances of any system changes being realised are minimal. If too flexible, they could end up the way of the RCN.

The job of the leader is difficult. The real work is outside of the meetings. I have written previously about the importance of establishing a mandate with member practices. But this is not a one off event. Federation leaders need a strong, continuous, two-way flow of communication with their member practices. As situations develop keeping practices informed, listening to feedback, and understanding the mood amongst GPs is critical to being able to make the right decision in the meetings themselves.

It is neither possible nor desirable to go back to practices before each and every individual decision is made. Nothing is more frustrating in system leader meetings than individuals refusing to make any decisions without full Board/practice support. The federation leader must understand their practices well enough to know which decisions they can make and which they cannot.

The trap the RCN seemingly fell into was having agreed to something (even if they felt they had no choice), instead of being honest and transparent with their members they tried to “spin” it to make it more palatable. It didn’t work for them, and it won’t work for general practice.

The trust and support of practices, and the ability to maintain this through periods of changes, is at the heart of the leadership challenge. It requires honesty, transparency, and, probably above all else, a relentless commitment to communication. It requires clarity of purpose – of why general practice is around the table and what it wants to achieve. And it requires strength of character, in particular the ability to make unpopular decisions and to speak out when needed (because caving to pressure from above to agree, as we have seen, is a recipe for disaster).

Like I said at the start, getting a seat round the table means the real work is only just beginning…

3
oct
0

Giving the Federation Voice Gravitas

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

We’ve all been in a meeting where someone (let’s say Peter) speaks and makes a relatively innocuous point. But then for the next 10 minutes everyone else who speaks starts with “I agree with Peter…”. You can’t help but notice the influence Peter has.

Later on in the same meeting you are listening intently, and suddenly have a flash of inspiration – you can see a way forward for the group. You build up your confidence, and make your point. You were kind of hoping for applause, but would have taken even some acknowledgement. But instead, nothing. The conversation moves on, as if you hadn’t even spoken. A few minutes later, Peter makes an almost identical suggestion to the one you had just made, just phrased slightly differently. Suddenly, we are back into “I agree with Peter”, the meeting swarms behind him, and it is as if you hadn’t said anything. You sit, bewildered, wondering what is going on.

Why is it, then, that some people have such influence in meetings when others do not? It is a really important point for those leading GP federations to consider, when thinking about how to ensure their voice has influence in system discussions.

As a young manager my mentors would encourage me to have more “gravitas”. It was hard to understand what they meant. It is something of a slippery, elusive concept. The word gravitas, according to Wikipedia, is used to describe someone whose words and actions have importance and weight. You know when someone has it or when they don’t, but it is difficult to understand why, or how you get it for yourself.

Part of it comes from positional authority. If Peter was the hospital CEO then some of his influence is a function of his position. In system discussions it is not because he is the boss, but because of the importance of what he represents (the hospital). For federation leaders, this brings us back to the question of mandate. The positional authority is much stronger if everyone in the room knows that you talk for 30 practices, and if you don’t agree with them they can’t go ahead with anything that involves those 30 practices.

Another part comes from relationships. If Peter has a set of good relationships with those around the table, they are more likely to listen to him. If they don’t know who you are, sometimes it doesn’t matter how good your idea is it is just going to get ignored.

But there is more to gravitas than positional authority and relationships. I remember as a federation leader there was one particular GP who wasn’t particularly well liked by other GPs (although he was respected), and who had no positional authority other than as a partner of a small practice. But when he spoke he always commanded the room. If he agreed with what we were suggesting as a federation (which he sometimes did) it really helped us to make the change happen with other practices. If he didn’t, he would articulate why and making the change from there was almost impossible. In the end we would run proposed changes by him to get his input before taking them forward.

His gravitas came from a really strong sense of values about what was right for his patients. His points never felt like a political manoeuvre, but more like an articulation of what was right. He was always consistent. He was always prepared to agree, and he was always prepared to disagree. He was never afraid to speak his mind. And when he spoke, everybody listened.

For federation leaders thinking about how to have a strong voice, this idea of gravitas is an important one, particularly when trying to shift the thinking from how to get a seat round the system table into how to make it a powerful one. Creating positional authority by developing a strong mandate from practices, building relationships with those around the table so they are receptive to what you say, and speaking consistently from a clear value base that determines whether you support or oppose proposals are all components of giving the federation voice gravitas.

19
sep
0

Building Relationships to Strengthen the Federation Voice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

We discussed in last week’s blog the importance of federations establishing a mandate from their practices, but that is only half of what is needed. To have influence, federations also need to build relationships with other organisations.

A common misconception is that attendance at meetings is the same as having a voice. It is not. If a GP sits through a meeting and has no impact on the outcomes then general practice has not had a voice. In fact it is worse, because other organisations can point to the fact that general practice was represented, even though it didn’t influence any of the decisions made.

This is not an uncommon situation. Understaffed federations, often reliant on the goodwill of a small number of individuals, are asked to attend a plethora of system wide meetings as the NHS works up a head of steam in its shift towards integrated care. It becomes a case of finding someone to go, and the poor GP who attends sits there, often without a clue what is going on.

The reality is, of course, that while meetings are often the end point of a decision making process, they are rarely the start of it. In a world of integrated care, the starting point is much more about relationships.

I was working in an area where the federation formed a strong relationship with the local acute trust. The Chief Executive of the hospital was supportive of the local GPs. They worked together on creating a primary care front door at A&E. When the federation needed someone to host the employment of the pharmacists to work in practices, the hospital stepped in. Then the CCG put community services out to tender. The hospital Chief Executive and the federation leadership had a conversation and decided to put a (ultimately successful) bid in, in a model whereby the hospital hosted the contract, but looked to primary care to provide leadership as to how it would be delivered in the local areas (which is exactly what the GPs had been asking for).

This change came about not because of what happened in meetings, but because the federation had built a relationship with the local hospital. To have a voice, to have influence, federations need to build relationships.

There are some really important relationships federations need to have in place. The LMC for one. Federations and the LMC need to work hand in glove together to ensure the voice of general practice is as strong as it can be. Practices are not going to trust the federation if the LMC doesn’t.

Other local federations in the same area are also key. Ultimately they are not competitors but collaborators seeking (more or less) the same thing.   Disagree in private, work out a way forward, and agree in public. If general practice is arguing with itself around the integrated care table, the power of any individual federation’s voice will be lost.

And as in the case of the federation who ended up being able to control the shape of community services in their area, a strong relationship with at least one local statutory organisation (whether it is the hospital, or the community trust or the mental health trust matters less) means when the bigger opportunities come along, the federation is in a realistic position to be part of the conversation.

These are the two foundations federations need to develop to create a strong voice: a mandate from their practices; and strong relationships across the health and social care economy. Next week we will explore how federations can turn these foundations into a voice which has impact.

12
sep
0

How Federations Can Establish a Mandate from their Practices

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Vineet Nayar is famous for what he stood for: “employees first, customers second”. He became CEO of HCL technologies and transformed its fortunes. He believed passionately that the firm itself did not add value to customers, but its employees did. The role of the firm was to build trust with its employees and empower them to make the changes that might at first sight appear impossible.

He was transparent about information and about the firm’s weaknesses with his employees in ways most companies would never dream of. He did this to build trust between the leadership of the firm and those who worked there. The firm was not telling its employees the answers, it was being honest about the challenges of the current situation, and enthusing, encouraging and enabling the employees to make a difference to it.

There is a 10 minute YouTube interview with Vineet about “employee first, customer second”. It is well worth a watch. I think it is entirely relevant to federation’s thinking about their role and the mandate they have from practices. What do federations stand for? Is it “practices first, patients second”?   Is the role of federations to transform patient outcomes directly, or to enthuse, encourage and enable practices to work together and do this themselves?

Federations need to stand for something. To be the “voice” of general practice in the new world of integrated care, federations need a mandate from their practices. To gain that, they need to be clear what it is they are articulating on behalf of their practices. They cannot claim to be the voice of general practice without agreeing with practices what it is they are going to say on their behalf.

They will need some form of agreed vision/strategy with their practices. This will be some version of:

  • A strong and vibrant general practice with the registered list as the foundation of local healthcare delivery
  • Service delivery tailored to naturally occurring local populations of c50,000
  • Integrated primary and community care teams at a locality level
  • The removal of barriers between primary and secondary care, between health and social care, and between physical and mental health
  • A greater focus on health and prevention

You will have your own version of this. Whatever it is, the important part is that it is developed with the practices, not for them. But turning this into a mandate involves not only agreeing the what, but also the how – how will any agreements that are made actually be delivered? The lesson from Vineet Nayar is that it is not only ok for federations to stand for empowering, enabling and supporting general practice, it is what is needed because it is practices not federations that will make a difference to patient care. Federations are not around the table to get more for themselves; they are there to ensure practices get what they need to deliver change locally.

The important conversation with practices is to agree the nature of this relationship. The federation will use its “voice” to get the resources, the support, the infrastructure, the tools and whatever else practices need to make changes locally. But it is the practices that will make change happen. Change is done by the practices not to the practices. Ultimately, it is a two-way agreement, each side with its own part to play.

This is how federations can create a powerful mandate from practices, one where what they agree turns into action. This mandate is based on trust, the hard won and easily lost trust federations build with their practices. Without this mandate, even though it might be at the table, the federation does not really have a voice.

5
sep
0

The Voice of General Practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

My first executive director role was at a hospital. I was very excited. Finally, I was going to get the chance to be part of the team who would make all the decisions about the running of the hospital. It was all new to me, and I wasn’t sure what to expect.

Some things, however, became clear immediately. When the Director of Nursing spoke (which was infrequently), her opinion did not carry weight and had little influence on the decisions the team made. But when the Director of Operations spoke (which was frequently), her opinion carried a lot of weight and frequently swayed the Chief Executive into decisions in line with what she had said.

In that same role I went to meetings of the hospitals across the local area. The same thing happened there: some hospitals had a much more influential voice than others. It happens everywhere.

The lesson, of course, is that simply being at a meeting does not mean that you have a voice.

General practice is seeking a “voice” around the table of providers who will be making decisions in the post-commissioner landscape of the NHS. GP federations are being established in many places to be the voice of general practice within this arena. But what exactly does this mean? I looked up the definition of voice (the meaning that we are thinking about here):

“A particular opinion or attitude expressed

  • An agency by which a point of view is expressed or represented
  • (in singular) the right to express an opinion”

What particular opinion or attitude are GP federations seeking to express at the integrated care table? This is a more difficult question than you would think. If they are seeking to represent the views of practices, isn’t that the role of the LMC? Don’t they have a statutory role to do just that? What do the practices expect – are they expecting the federation to sign them up to new ways of working, or are they really expecting the federation to be representing the potential delivery of services outside of hospital rather than anything to do with what actually happens within the walls of their own practice?

And what do the other providers around the integrated care system table expect of federations? Do they think the federations are representing what happens in core general practice as well as the delivery of additional services? If the federation only represents the delivery of extended access (or the like) how influential a voice is it likely to have? Possibly more Director of Nursing than Director of Operations…

The aim of integrated care is not to hold meetings where representatives make the case for their individual areas, but rather that organisations partner with each other. This is why LMC representation at this level rarely works, because the other organisations see the LMC not as a partner but more as a trade union. It is hard for an organisation perceived as a trade union to persuade others it is there as an active partner.

So here is the challenge for federations to think through: how will they establish a mandate from practices that will enable them to be confident that when they speak at the integrated care system table they have the support of the practices behind them? And how will they deliver that voice within that arena in a way that influences decisions rather than is ignored? And when faced with making difficult decisions (which they inevitably will be) how will they keep credibility with both the practices and the system partners?

Over the course of the next few weeks I will consider this challenge in more detail. While there are no easy answers, having a clear approach and preparing effectively can reap significant rewards down the line.

29
aug
0

The Independence of General Practice Series – 5

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Throughout August we’ve run a series of blogs where Ben has considered various aspects of the independence of general practice. In this fifth and final blog in the series he asks

Is operating at scale necessary to protect the independence of general practice?

There is something counter-intuitive about the notion that practices would operate at scale to protect their independence. Many GPs resist any notion of operating at scale precisely because of the restrictions they feel it places on their autonomy. The perceived wisdom is at-scale general practice is a step away from independence, not a move towards it.

But is it? I was struck by the tale of the practices in Wolverhampton. Recently a ninth local practice has handed over its list to the local hospital trust there, taking the total population now under the hospital’s control to 70,000. Now, I am not close to what is happening in Wolverhampton but local GP leaders said the GP partners were motivated by financial ‘non-viability’ and workforce shortages, with the move viewed as ‘handing over the problem to someone else’.

One of the practices put this on its website as it announced it was joining the hospital, “Without the help of The Trust we would definitely have left and would have had no option but to close the practice and split our list up amongst other local Practices. The Trust have been able to find us new Partner GPs, a new site and the funding to refurbish it into a modern GP Practice.”  The local practices, it seems, felt like there was no alternative.

I am sure everyone reading this is aware of the pressures currently facing general practice. Those pressures are not going away. There are no new GPs. Demand is continuing to rise. The financial pressures remain significant. At some point, almost inevitably, practices (like those in Wolverhampton) will reach the point where they decide to hand over the pressure of running the practice, to let someone else take on the responsibility, and to simply focus on the patients in front of them.

In a period of sustained pressure on general practice, where salaried doctors are increasingly earning more than the GP partners, more and more practices will reach this ‘enough is enough’ point. And if the local hospital, or community trust, or whoever, offers to take on the responsibility, increasingly practices will make the decision to trade their independence for the relative security and simplicity of salaried life.

If we take the practices in Wolverhampton back 3 or 4 years, would they have made the same decision then? Could they have envisaged then that things would get to the point where this was the choice they would make? And if they had known this would happen would they have chosen to do things differently?

But what could they have done? Well, the opportunity that practices working together (“operating at scale”) presents is for practices to support each other, and to work together to tackle the workforce, demand and financial pressures all are experiencing.

Here is the irony: practices resist operating at scale in the name of keeping their autonomy, but by doing so are keeping themselves on a track that is taking them to the ‘enough is enough’ point when they will hand their list over to whoever will take it. The status quo is unlikely to remain an option for much longer. However counter-intuitive it feels, it is choosing to work together with other practices that is most likely to protect the independence of general practice.

22
aug
0

The Independence of General Practice Series – 4

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Throughout August we’ve been running a series of blogs dedicated to the independence of general practice. In this fourth blog Ben looks at why independence matters.

At-Scale General Practice Must Stay Independent

The BMA has found GP practices with a higher CQC rating earn more income. My PhD wife regularly pulls me up for mistaking correlation with causation, so I wonder whether outstanding practices earn more income (i.e. the cause is that they are outstanding), or whether they are outstanding because they receive more income (i.e. the cause is that they receive more income)[i].

More research is required to test these hypotheses, but my money would be on the former. I know many areas where the opportunity for income is equal across practices, yet the better practices earn more (through better recovery of QOF income, through delivery of a wider range of enhanced services, and through private income streams).

So in the independent world of general practice, the practices that provide a better service to patients earn more money, while the less well run practices earn less. Independence, of course, means there is no bail out. The risk sits squarely with the GP partners as business owners. Compare this with those leading statutory bodies, such as CCGs. They will earn the same amount of money regardless of how well the CCG does. Salary is not linked to performance. There is no meeting with the accountant where the slow realisation descends on all of the partners that they are going to have to take a pay cut. Instead the CCG goes into deficit and money is spent on management consultants to “help” the CCG get back into balance.

I was fortunate enough recently to spend some time learning about how the system of general practice works in New Zealand. There, a key component is that each practice is part of a network. These networks are not statutory bodies. They were formed by practices nearly 30 years ago, essentially as a protectionist manoeuvre by practices, and their purpose is to strengthen and improve general practice.

The great thing about non-statutory bodies is that they cannot be abolished or reorganised. While in this country we have seen PCGs, PCTs and now (probably) CCGs come and go, in New Zealand over the same period the networks have been constant. They have been able to adapt and thrive over that time, and provide better and better support to their member practices. Indeed, the government has even channelled the contracts for practices through the networks, enabling the networks to take on the role of improving quality across their member practices.

I was the Chief Executive of Nene Commissioning, one of the leading practice based commissioning groups. We were a non-statutory body, but we worked with the PCT, with our member practices, and with many others to drive some impressive innovations across the system. With the advent of CCGs we transitioned into a statutory body. There is no doubt in my mind that becoming part of the NHS system, hounded by layers of hierarchy and regulation, strangled the innovation out of the organisation. It is precisely because CCGs are statutory bodies that ultimately they have not been able to fulfil their promise.

Meanwhile the networks in New Zealand have thrived and continued to innovate. Pinnacle, one of the leading New Zealand networks, has developed an improvement programme for its member practices. It funds it itself, it tests it on practices that it directly manages (the equivalent of our APMS contracts), and is working with its members to make them fit for the future. Not because it has to, not in response to a government initiative, but because its role is to strengthen and improve general practice. It only answers to its member practices, and because it is independent it cannot be abolished or reorganised.

This is an important lesson for us. Moving to at-scale general practice in many areas is the right thing to do. But finding ways to do it that maintain the independence of general practice, and the independence of any at-scale organisations it creates, is absolutely critical. Independence rewards success, and penalises failure. It fosters and encourages innovation. Most important of all, it creates stability and strength for the long term.

[i] My wife informed me after reading the blog I had missed out a third option: that there might be other variables affecting both results. I have vowed never to do a PhD.
15
aug
0

The Independence of General Practice Series – 3

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

This is the third in a five-part series of blogs discussing the independence of general practice. This week Ben looks to the Nigel Watson-led review of the partnership model and considers the possible threats this poses to that independence.

Why the review of the GP partnership model makes me nervous

In February Jeremy Hunt announced there would be a review of the partnership model of general practice, and that it would consider “how the partnership model needs to evolve in the modern NHS”. This review makes me nervous.

The number of GP partners is falling. As all practices are only too well aware, the number of applicants for a GP partner post has fallen dramatically, with many adverts not attracting a single serious application. General practice has to be attractive to the GPs of the future. The review will need to look into this, and discover nuggets such as “the prospect of unlimited personal liability in a hugely under-funded sector has limited appeal to new GPs”.

I am nervous about this review because it is very easy to conflate the issues facing general practice as a whole (the workload, workforce and financial pressures) with the partnership model. It is easy to imply it is the partnership model causing the challenges rather than the historic underfunding etc. etc. Correlation, regular readers of this blog will recall, is not the same as causation. If general practice was still receiving 11% of NHS expenditure would we still be having this review?

A review of the partnership model is also a review of independent contractor status. General practice is currently very difficult to control. The independent contractor status affords it an ability to act only according to what is negotiated within its contract. Changes to NHS rules don’t directly affect it. Persuasion rather than coercion is required, and for politicians seeking rapid change in general practice I can imagine this is hugely frustrating.

There is a widely-espoused view that the small business, or “corner shop” model of general practice is no longer fit for purpose. As the NHS seeks to move into a world of integrated care a new, bigger version of general practice is required that can partner with the rest of the system. Most sectors of the NHS can be instructed to actively participate in integrated care arrangements (or individuals moved on), but not so general practice. The sheer number of practices is making progress painfully slow, and there is no direct command lever that can be pulled to make integration happen any faster.

However, size and form are two different things. GP partnerships, operating as independent contractors, can operate at any scale. They are not limited in size. Our Health Partnership has done an admirable job of demonstrating how the partnership model can work at a population scale of over 300,000. Conflating the relatively small size of general practice organisations with the partnership model of general practice when they are two distinct issues is, at best, unhelpful.

The review makes me nervous because although the partnership model does not need to change for general practice to operate at greater scale, it does need to change if the system is to exercise greater control over general practice.

The only thing making me less nervous about the review is the appointment of Dr Nigel Watson, Chair of Wessex LMC to lead it. He appears to be a supporter of the partnership model. He recently said,

“My personal view is that the partnership model has not reached the end of the road, it can still have an important role to play in the future of the NHS but we need to make it a better place to work, which will encourage more GPs to remain working in general practice, address the concerns about the unlimited personal liability and with the move to a more population based approach to healthcare ensure that general practice is truly able to play a leadership role in the local NHS.”

The review does indeed need to consider these things, and build on the strengths and freedoms of the partnership model as it looks to the future. Let’s hope my nervousness (and, I admit, my cynicism) is unfounded.

8
aug
0

The Independence of General Practice Series – 2

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

This is the second in a series of five blogs where Ben is considering the issue of independence in general practice. This week he looks at the distinction between statutory bodies and independent contractors and asks whether the difference is of any consequence.

Can independent contractors be trusted?

During the 2017 Christmas holidays, when you would have thought attention may have been focussed elsewhere, there was something of a debate as to whether organisations that are not NHS statutory bodies, but rather ones that contract with the NHS, can be trusted.

The debate focussed on the pre-cursor of the new favourite (Integrated Care Systems) which was Accountable Care Organisations (remember them?). For example, Dr Phil Hammond, a doctor, radio presenter and NHS commentator, said,

“I don’t think Accountable Care Organisations can be set up in the NHS without legislation stipulating their governance. They need to be statutory bodies to be properly accountable for the quality of care they deliver.” (via Twitter, Jan 1st)

Unfortunately, this debate brought the position of both GP practices and GP federations under the spotlight. If this is true for Accountable Care Organisations, is it not also true for GP organisations?

There is a fine line between being in the NHS and working with the NHS. Back in 1948, amidst the protracted negotiations required to start the NHS, a deal was brokered whereby GPs would not become salaried employees, but rather remain independent, providing services via a national contract with the NHS. This means GP practices provide NHS services, but are not NHS organisations, and “independent contractor” status was born.

Does the distinction between a statutory body and an independent contractor matter? At first it mattered little, but times have changed since 1948. In the 1980s the Conservative government privatised some of our national industries, including steel, railways, airports, gas, electricity, telecoms and water. Although the NHS survived the cut, the purchaser provider split was introduced in 1990. Ever since, fears have remained this was the first step in a plan to privatise the health service, and anything not a statutory NHS body is treated with suspicion.

Over 25 years later, we now approach the end game of the purchaser provider split, in a strange closing manoeuvre whereby the Health and Social Care Act of 2012 seemingly opened the NHS up to more competition, but in practice the NHS itself has closed competition down with a focus on integration through the Five Year Forward View. Fears that accountable care organisations were a Trojan horse to enable the privatisation of the NHS led to their re-badging as integrated care systems.

At some point these integrated care systems will take on a population budget. It seems that rather than allow them to do this as “independent contractors”, the government is prepared to legislate to enable new types of statutory bodies to be created.

Where does that leave general practice? Is the current review of the partnership model an attempt to shift general practice from independent contractor into some form of statutory body status? Are the new, semi-mandated GP networks the first step towards groups of GP practices as statutory bodies? Will the public tolerate at-scale GP organisations that are not statutory bodies, or will the anti-ACO sentiment shift its focus towards federations and the like?

The currency of the new world is trust. People trust their GP, more than they trust their local NHS organisation, and much more than they trust national (statutory) NHS organisations. Being a statutory part of the NHS won’t make the public trust GPs any more. Our experience of CCGs should at least teach us that. My sense is the benefits of being independent (to GPs and to the delivery of health care) outweigh the costs and challenges.

GP practices know it is not the technical difference between an NHS statutory body and an independent contractor that matters, but rather what they do, and the trust they build with the people they serve. The same will be true for at scale general practice organisations. And for integrated care systems. Ironically, it is the relationships integrated care systems develop with their local (independent contractor) GPs that may determine how much their local population eventually choose to trust them.

1
aug
0

The Independence of General Practice Series – 1

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Ben Gowland introduces an exciting new series from Ockham Healthcare:

“In the last couple of years I have written a few articles about the independence of general practice.  The current review of the partnership model being carried out at the behest of government, which is considering what has been the bedrock of general practice for so many years, will inevitably have to consider the issue of independence.  This prompted me to bring together and update what I have produced so far, along with some new thoughts, to create an autumn series of articles on this topic.  Over the course of 5 articles throughout August I will consider the threats to the independence of general practice (from within general practice, from the wider system, and from the review itself), reflect on its importance, and identify what might be needed for it to be preserved.”

In this first blog Ben considers the impact that fewer and fewer GPs choosing to become partners will have on the independence of general practice:

Without GP Partners General Practice will lose its Independence

For me, one of the biggest strengths of general practice is its independence. It contracts with the NHS, but is not part of the monolithic NHS structure. For some this may feel like a technical difference (after all GP practices can still access the NHS pension, and they are funded with taxpayer money) but for someone who has spent 20 years working in the NHS like myself the difference feels much more fundamental.

GP practices are bound by the terms of their contract with the NHS. But within the boundaries of those terms they are free to innovate, make changes, and take whatever decisions they want to improve care for their patients and the working lives of their staff. This is in stark contrast to NHS organisations that are bound by NHS-wide restrictions, ways of operating and approval mechanisms that often stifle innovation and directly impact on culture.

It is now widely accepted that GP practices require more money – whether they are funded directly or through a contract. Moving away from the independent contractor model is not an answer in itself to the challenges facing practices. It will not solve the problems of inadequate funding, insufficient GPs, or growing workload. Independence is not a cause of these problems, but rather is the only reason GP practices have been able to continue the way they have despite the current pressures.

Yet, sadly, the independent contractor model is teetering on a knife’s edge. I visited a practice recently that a year ago was a relatively stable, well-run, 4 partner and 7500 population practice. Within the space of two weeks two of the partners resigned. One was retiring, and one was emigrating to Australia. A few weeks later a third declared they were also resigning as they wanted to become salaried. This left a single GP, who had neither the skills nor the desire to be the sole partner of the practice. She wrote to the CCG informing them of the situation and declared that if a solution was not found she would be forced to hand back the list.

This scenario and others like it are being played out throughout the country. The inability to recruit GP partners is rising to the top of the challenges facing GP practices today. Every resignation of a GP partner creates panic within practices, a sense of being trapped, and a fear of being the one left carrying the costs of closure.

The recent push to secure 5000 new GPs, whilst unlikely to be achieved, has brought new GPs into the profession. But many of these GPs are choosing part time or portfolio careers. The competition for new GPs is pushing up the pay for salaried GPs. The new extended access and A&E based services provide well-paid, flexible alternatives for new GPs, further increasing the challenges of recruitment for practices.

The risk is that, unconsciously, we are creating a system that rewards salaried GPs and punishes GP partners. The number of “zombie practices”, where the salaried GPs earn more than the partners, is reportedly on the rise. By not intervening, general practice as a profession is risking its independence. Without GP partners, there are no businesses that can deliver against the contracts, no practices as we know them today. The NHS will have to directly deliver the service. Once independence is gone, it will never be regained.

I do not believe GPs, even new GPs, by not choosing to be partners are choosing for general practice to relinquish its independent. But I believe that is exactly what is happening below the surface, unnoticed; not as a conscious decision or policy intent, but as an unintended consequence of the way the system now operates (“every system is perfectly designed to get the results it gets” etc.) We have not paid this dilemma enough attention, and must take urgent action before it is too late.

Nigel Watson is leading a review of the GP partnership model. My sense is we need to make becoming a GP partner more attractive. We must provide more training and preparation for GPs who do want to take up the challenge of becoming a partner. We must cherish the independence of general practice, and help the future generation of GPs understand not only the freedom it provides but also what will be lost without it. With or without the review, unless we take action now, general practice will lose its independence.

25
jul
0

Funding GP Networks

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The general consensus appears to have fallen on integrated care systems and primary care networks as the way forward. CCGs have been instructed to encourage every practice to be part of a primary care network, which are to cover populations of (roughly) 30-50,000, and as a result a plethora of these new entities are now developing.

Here is a question: where should the funding for the management of these primary care networks come from?

We may not be convinced that another layer of management in the NHS is what is needed, but if the mantra of the day is primary care networks, and the point of them is to enable core general practice to partner effectively with other providers within an integrated care system, then some management function is going to be required.

What are the options?

1.Use the management margin gained from the delivery of additional services.

Traditionally this is how GP federations have made themselves sustainable. In some places this is the assumed mechanism for developing the management funds for these new organisations. The problem is that the networks are expected to represent the delivery of core general practice, not simply the delivery of the (small) range of new services they may provide. This method creates an incongruence between what the network does and the voice it is supposed to have. It also serves to inflate the management costs they have to charge for any service delivery, which is likely (at some point) to make them uncompetitive.

2.“Investment” by GP practices.

In this model GP practices chip in anything up to £2 per head of practice population. This ensures the network function has a clear sense of ownership from its member practices, and that it speaks on their behalf. The challenge comes here with the underfunding of general practice in recent years. Establishing the networks becomes another drain on GP practice resources, at a time when many practices simply do not have the spare financial capacity. As a result, many practices will choose to pass when the opportunity to directly fund the new networks comes along.

3.GP Transformation Funds.

The GPFV is investing a considerable amount of funding to enable “transformation” in/of general practice. Some STP areas are using the transformation funds to support the establishment of GP networks with appropriate management. This is a sensible starting point, but really is deferring the question of where recurrent funding will come from, rather than answering it (i.e. what happens when the non-recurrent transformation funding runs out?).

4.Additional Funds for the GP contract.

Essentially, a model could be introduced whereby additional funding is given to every practice through their contract, for them to use to fund the management resource required for primary care networks. A similar approach was used in practice based commissioning days when practices in many areas received an enhanced service for practice based commissioning, although then they could choose to use it themselves or pool it to create a shared function.

The benefit of this approach is it ensures GPs retain ownership of the management function because even if it is “pass-through” funding, it comes from the practice. This creates the accountability between the network and the practices that is required for them to be successful. The downside is that local disputes and disagreements make local arrangements hard to pin down and sustain over a period of time – just look at the blood, sweat and tears it took to tie down CCG configurations.

5.Transfer of some CCG management allowance

The final option (that I can think of) is the transfer of some of the management funding that sits within CCGs to these new networks. CCGs as member organisations at some stage in the move away from the commissioner/provider split are going to cease to exist, and the natural replacement for groups of practices looking to work together to improve population health (although this time as providers) is going to be primary care networks, so it seems a relatively logical move. It may also serve to stop the shedding of the huge amount of GP leadership talent that CCGs have uncovered.

This would be a recurrent resource, but the downside would not only be the lack of ownership from practices that this move may generate, but also a reinforcement of an unease held by some GPs that primary care networks are the next iteration of PCGs/PCTs/CCGs.

It will be interesting to see where this ends up. It is important that general practice fights hard against the result defaulting to option 1, which in the end will serve no-one, and put unrealistic pressures on network leaders. I suspect we will find ourselves in some form of amalgam of option 3 (to get things started) and option 4 or 5 – but with the proviso that additional recurrent funds build on and develop whatever was established in the start-up phase to prevent huge backwards steps.

18
jul
0

The Tyranny of Governance

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

There is something difficult, elusive even, about the concept of governance. It should be straightforward. According to the universal fount of all knowledge (Google) the definition of governance is, “the action or manner of governing a state, organisation etc.” Yet somehow in the NHS, governance has drifted into becoming a stick managers wield over clinicians to drive compliance.

Am I overstating it? I am not sure. The first time I really saw evidence of this was when CCGs were first formed. Keen, eager and green, groups of GPs worked together determined to use NHS money to make a difference to local populations. But then these fledgling organisations were subjected to an “authorisation” process, where the focus was on governance and the ability of CCGs to operate as stewards of public money.

Whatever your views on the rights and wrongs of the authorisation process, the result of it was that it sucked the life and spirit out of nearly all of the CCGs. The model constitution, non-executives, multiple committees (etc. etc.) all contrived to create organisations too unwieldy to make any real change happen, to diminish trust between the organisation and its member practices, and to sap any sense of organisational pride or identity.

Last week we published our four step guide for practices working at scale. The real point of this was to encourage practices wanting to work at scale to think about why they wanted to work together and what they wanted to do before getting bogged down in questions of governance.

Don’t get me wrong, governance is important. But it is not more important than having a clear purpose for the at-scale general practice organisation, or more important than working out the guiding principles that will determine how the organisation will operate (its values). It is not more important than building trust between the new at-scale entity and the member practices, or more important than achieving the goals the organisation has set itself. Focussing on these things makes good governance an enabler, rather than governance existing for governance’s sake.

In the days when CCGs were being established, the key cry from practices was that it “did not become like the PCT”. Now the concern from practices about the development of new at-scale general practice entities is that they “don’t become like the CCG”. Yet the pressure “to have good governance” is often forcing some of these newly-emerging organisations down the same route. This is the tyranny of governance.

But things can be different this time. The cycle can be broken. At-scale general practice organisations are not statutory bodies in the same way that CCGs are. They do not have to hold population-based budgets (which will take them down the CCG route), and it is perfectly feasible for them to partner with other organisations (with the required governance) to enable that to happen. They can be whatever the member practices want them to be.

This means there is no ‘right’ model of governance for them. There is no checklist they have to adhere to.   Appropriate governance will depend on exactly what it is they are trying to achieve and do.

New at-scale GP organisations have choices. First they must determine why they exist, then decide what they want to do and the way they want to do it, and finally choose what governance they need to enable them to do the things they want to do in the way they want to do them. Governance in its place is an amazing enabler, but out of place can create a fast track to failure.

11
jul
0

Working at scale – the right way to proceed

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Many practices are considering the benefits of working at greater scale. But, from our experience at Ockham, we see so many approaching it from the wrong direction; by considering what form this expansion will take before even reaching agreement on why they are seeking to get bigger. So we have put together a simple and helpful guide on the steps practices should take to help them successfully navigate this journey.

4
jul
0

Do GPs want to work at scale?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

When I was about 5 years old my brother and I became supporters of Liverpool Football Club. No-one told us we had to. Our parents were not football fans. We did not have to sit in a class to learn about Liverpool Football Club, or pass an exam before we could watch them play. No-one forced us to learn the names of all the players, or their shirt numbers, or the endless statistics from the previous decade. We learnt about the club because we were passionate about it which created our energy and enthusiasm to find out as much as we could, whenever we could, and to pester our father constantly to take us to matches.

Whilst not a football fan, my mother was a catholic. So when we were the same age every Sunday she used to make me and my brothers go to church. We never asked to go, and we went because we had to. We didn’t pay attention, got out of going whenever we could, and spent our time when we were there daydreaming about Anfield and whether Liverpool would win when they next played, as well as generally causing trouble. Eventually, we made life so miserable for my mother that she stopped making us go.

Now I am older, things are not much different. I spend my time doing the things I am passionate about and enjoy doing. There are some things I have to do (chores, shopping etc.), but, as my wife will no doubt attest, I do them as quickly as I can (or try and get out of them!) so that I can focus my efforts on the things that matter to me.

My brother is the same. In fact, we all are. We all want to spend time doing the things we want to do and care about, and avoid doing things we are doing because we have to. GPs are no different. Most GPs want to spend their time in the practice, focussing on making a difference to patients and the things that matter, not doing the things they feel they have to do (but hate) like preparing for a CQC inspection, or attending yet another CCG meeting.

For GPs, where does operating at scale fit in to the spectrum, where “doing it because we have to” is at one end, and “doing it because we are passionate about it and the difference it can make” is at the other?

Looking around the country, it varies.

Some GPs are really passionate about operating at scale. They believe it is key to the sustained future of the profession, to ensuring GPs have a strong voice around the system table and to giving them the best chance of making a difference to the lives of their patients. They seemingly work 24 hours a day on making it happen, putting all their spare time into it, and do so with boundless energy.

But many GPs are doing it because they feel they have to. They feel the weight of system pressure pushing them in that direction, and go along with it because even if they recognise there is some logic to it, their heart is in small, independent general practice. Unsurprisingly, they rarely turn up to meetings, they contribute only what they have to, and are often negative and disruptive.

GPs working at scale because they want to, not because they have to, is what will create the energy to make something great happen. It is what already differentiates those really successful examples of working at scale from the rest. Getting the majority of your colleagues to agree to doing something they do not believe in is storing up problems for the future. Jumping into a federation or a network without even knowing why is a mistake, because you won’t invest of yourself in it.

Spend time on why. Spend as much time as it takes to generate energy for a movement, and only then move forward. That investment of time will repay itself multiple times in the future, because it won’t feel like (your equivalent of) going to church, but instead like going to Anfield!

27
jun
0

Is working at scale just a trend?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Did you ever have a mullet? Regularly wear flares? Decide tattooing your eyebrows was a good idea? I suspect not (or not that you would admit to!). As we all know, things come in and out of fashion, and sometimes there is a real art to avoiding something popular in the moment that later we might come to regret.

A common question I get asked is whether the move to working at scale in general practice is just a trend. The profession has been burnt before (think PMS contracts, fundholding, even CCGs), and it is reasonable to consider whether operating at scale is just another in a list of initiatives that demand energy and time but leave little or no lasting benefit.

It could be a short term trend. It feels like there is pressure in the system on practices to operate at scale, and yet history suggests that changes practices have made because others want them to (like the move to PMS contracts) are often best ignored, because the fickle nature of health policy is such that there is likely to be an opposite policy (PMS reviews) a few years down the line.

When we look at joint working between practices we find the benefits are not always that great: purchasing gains can be limited; extra services can be time limited or put out to tender with little or no margin included; and the additional overheads of working at scale can quickly absorb any financial gains made leaving little or no benefit for the member practices.

Bigger practices can create bigger problems. Communication can be difficult (poor), practices become impersonal and it can feel like the soul of general practice has been removed. Individual disputes do not disappear, and where they are not tackled divorce can follow quickly on the heels of the marriage.

Working at scale itself has now been around for some time. Average practice size has grown steadily from 6250 in 2005 to 7860 in 2017, and according to the Nuffield Trust three quarters of GP practices are now in some form of collaboration with other practices. Could, then, we be heading in the wrong direction? Could working at scale be just a trend, something we will inevitably later regret?

The best way to determine whether something is likely to be a short term trend or something more permanent is to consider the causal factors affecting the change.

There are, as you are no doubt fully aware, some long term trends impacting general practice. Demand is rising. There are more patients, more GP visits per patient, more over 85s and more patients managing one or more long term conditions. This demand is highly likely to continue to rise. The supply of GPs to meet this demand is going down. In the time period from September 2015 to December 2017, the total number of GPs decreased by 720 full time equivalents, despite the national pledge to increase the number by 5000. Less and less GPs want to work full time, or to be partners.

Funding for general practice has fallen from 11% to under 8% of the NHS budget. The promised extra £2.4bn in the General Practice Forward View is hardly touching the sides. The recently announced 3.4% growth for the NHS means no windfall for general practice is coming any time soon. The national policy is towards integration, and providers working together. A 10 year plan for the NHS is expected this year, built on exactly these principles. 7,435 practices operating independently in this environment are unlikely to be able to articulate their need for resources as well as, for example, the 135 non-specialist acute trusts.

Ultimately, working at scale is a reasonable response to these long term trends impacting general practice. Simply deciding to work at scale will not in itself deliver benefits (for all the reasons outlined earlier), but using the opportunities that scale provides to find new ways of managing demand, to expand the workforce and incorporate new roles, to deliver efficiencies and respond to the opportunities that the new integration agenda presents is one of the few things practices can proactively do to meet the challenges they face.

Working at scale is a trend. But it is a trend that is a response to underlying changes affecting general practice. Sometimes working at scale becomes the change itself (which is where problems set in) rather than understanding that its function is to enable the continued challenges to be met. Because the demand, supply, financial and policy changes are all continuing to move in the same direction, my view is that working at scale won’t go the way of mullets and flares, but will continue long into the future.

20
jun
0

It is not the model

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

I had butterflies. It was my first day at only my second placement on the NHS management training scheme. I followed the directions I had been given off the motorway and into deepest Salford. The area had long rows of terraced houses interspersed with small corner shops. I passed a group of youths gathered on a corner, hoodies raised, and I hoped they would be out of sight before I had to park and get out of the car. I turned the corner and drove into the car park of an incongruously new and modern building, with immaculate red brick walls and gleaming windows.

It was the Willows Primary Care Resource Centre. It was run by Salford Community Trust; my placement was working with the manager of the new centre. I was excited by the new model of care being implemented here. The centre was based in a district of Salford called Weaste. It was (and I suspect still is) a deprived area, and the centre was part of a community regeneration scheme. The plan was for this centre, which was also home to a GP surgery, to host a range of community facilities, voluntary services and resources, and to act as a “one stop shop” to meet the needs of local people.

An interesting range of services were delivered from the centre. There was a community based leg ulcer clinic, who were using a maggot based treatment for wound care. The Citizens’ Advice Bureau held regular drop-in sessions. There were twice a week art therapy sessions. Physiotherapy and speech and language therapy were provided. Plus there were a whole host of other providers; the space was there, and was available to be used by the local voluntary groups who needed it.

Looking back, and this was over 20 years ago, the model was not hugely dissimilar to the primary care home model. It was serving a defined local population where health and social care needs were closely linked, and it was trying to bring a range of different skills and roles together in one place so that all of the needs of the individuals could be met in one place.

But something was missing. At the time it was hard to put my finger on it. I had a sense of it because sometimes we struggled to attract some of the voluntary groups in to use the centre, and I didn’t really understand why. The locals also seemed to steered clear of the place unless they had a specific reason to attend.

Looking back now, the problem was really one of ownership. The GPs were happy with their new building but by and large left the rest of the centre to others. The district nurses had their base there, but didn’t really interact with the other services running from the centre. Co-location wasn’t resulting in joint working, let alone joined-up care for patients.

The incongruity of the shiny newness of the building with its immediate surroundings meant that rather than local community being proud of it, they were wary and mistrustful. In all the time I was there it never felt like it became the vibrant hub I think was initially intended. Nobody really owned the vision for the place, there was no one driving with a passion to change the lives of the local community. So while the original plans were followed and put in place, it never took off or had the impact that once had been imagined.

What that whole experience taught me is that however good the “model” is, however well we design it, however shiny the building we put it in, it won’t work on its own. It is all about implementation. Not PRINCE-style implementation. But implementation that is about people, about partnerships and about passion. Implementation that is about leadership from individuals who care. And it needs GPs, community teams and voluntary groups to share a vision for the future, a picture of what can be achieved, and to find a way of partnering with the local population to make it happen.

There was nothing wrong with the primary care resource centre as a model. It was a good model. Equally, there is nothing wrong with the primary care home model. But the model will only ever be one part of the story. It takes people who care and who are prepared to step forward to turn a good model into something that will make a real difference.

13
jun
0

Evolution is not mandatory

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

I recently chaired a panel discussion that was considering the question, “what will the infrastructure of general practice look like in 5 years’ time?”. What was most interesting about the discussion was the debate the panel had as to whether general practice could evolve quickly enough to prevent itself becoming extinct.

I didn’t expect that either. Most of us would agree with the starting point which is that we expect general practice to become bigger in the next 5 years. However, it won’t get significantly bigger. We might make it to the 20-50,000 population primary care home size, but only because that is what one panel member described as the “mentally capable” next step, i.e. the one that isn’t too far away from where we are now to feel doable. Getting to a 300,000 or even 500,000 population size, one where real economies of scale can be achieved and system leadership exerted, feels like a distant dream in most places because it is too far away from where general practice is right now.

As one panel member explained, the reason anything like this can’t happen quickly is because getting practices to work together is hard work, and takes what he describes as “hand-to-hand combat” – tackling one practice at a time. That is why getting universal population coverage at a scale of 20-50,000 is challenging, and why getting to something bigger than that is simply out of reach.

This pace of change may simply not be fast enough. For two reasons: one, the system wants to drive integration at a greater scale faster than general practice can keep up with; and two, the technological disruption we have seen from GP at Hand is likely to only be the start and it remains to be seen whether general practice in its current form can survive it.

One panel threw in the example of dinosaurs, as a telling reminder that “evolution is not mandatory”. As another said, “all innovation is a generational war, and we know who wins that one…”

Which all then led to an existential discussion about the value that general practice adds. Do we really know what it is? One GP panel member stated he is not clear which patients he adds the most value to – the data simply is not there. The starting point for general practice to move into the future is to prove the difference it makes to people, and then to do more of that.

If the primary role of general practice is the place we take our symptoms to find out what is wrong with us, won’t that at some point in the (near) future get replaced by technology? If it is to act as a gatekeeper to the rest of the system will that role continue to be accepted by the coming generations who demand instant access to everything?

In a 2015 article in the NEJM, Martin Marshall argued that in the future general practice, “will have to get the support they need to continue to provide person-centred care and to deal with the complex and delicate balance among an individual’s health, illness (the perception that something is wrong), and disease (a confirmed diagnosis). General practices will have to facilitate the increasingly important interface between people’s management of their own health and the care that is delivered in partnership with, or by, health care professionals. And they will have to find ways to negotiate the complex trade-offs among the sometimes conflicting expectations and needs of individuals, populations, and taxpayers, whose continuing support for a publicly funded health system is essential for its survival.” N Engl J Med 2015; 372:893-897

I think the point the panel were making is that if general practice develops further as a place that is about compromise, about trade-offs, about individuals not getting the care they really want or need at the time they really want or need it, then extinction of general practice in its current form is a real possibility. Instead, key to the future is understanding, demonstrating and then developing the part of general practice that is genuinely value adding to individuals, their families and their local communities.

You can listen to part 1 of the panel’s discussion here. Part two will be published here on Monday 18th June.

6
jun
0

Why the review of the GP partnership model makes me nervous

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

In February Jeremy Hunt announced there would be a review of the partnership model of general practice, and that it would consider “how the partnership model needs to evolve in the modern NHS”. This review makes me nervous.

The number of GP partners is falling. As all practices are only too well aware, the number of applicants for a GP partner post has fallen dramatically, with many adverts not attracting a single serious application. General practice has to be attractive to the GPs of the future. The review will need to look into this, and discover nuggets such as “the prospect of unlimited personal liability in a hugely under-funded sector has limited appeal to new GPs”.

I am nervous about this review because it is very easy to conflate the issues facing general practice as a whole (the workload, workforce and financial pressures) with the partnership model. It is easy to imply it is the partnership model causing the challenges rather than the historic underfunding etc. etc. Correlation, regular readers of this blog will recall, is not the same as causation. If general practice was still receiving 11% of NHS expenditure would we still be having this review?

A review of the partnership model is also a review of independent contractor status. General practice is currently very difficult to control. The independent contractor status affords it an ability to act only according to what is negotiated within its contract. Changes to NHS rules don’t directly affect it. Persuasion rather than coercion is required, and for politicians seeking rapid change in general practice I can imagine this is hugely frustrating.

There is a widely-espoused view that the small business, or “corner shop” model of general practice is no longer fit for purpose. As the NHS seeks to move into a world of integrated care a new, bigger version of general practice is required that can partner with the rest of the system. Most sectors of the NHS can be instructed to actively participate in integrated care arrangements (or individuals moved on), but not so general practice. The sheer number of practices is making progress painfully slow, and there is no direct command lever that can be pulled to make integration happen any faster.

However, size and form are two different things. GP partnerships, operating as independent contractors, can operate at any scale. They are not limited in size. Our Health Partnership has done an admirable job of demonstrating how the partnership model can work at a population scale of over 300,000. Conflating the relatively small size of general practice organisations with the partnership model of general practice when they are two distinct issues is, at best, unhelpful.

The review makes me nervous because although the partnership model does not need to change for general practice to operate at greater scale, it does need to change if the system is to exercise greater control over general practice.

The only thing making me less nervous about the review is the appointment of Dr Nigel Watson, Chair of Wessex LMC to lead it. He appears to be a supporter of the partnership model. He recently said,

“My personal view is that the partnership model has not reached the end of the road, it can still have an important role to play in the future of the NHS but we need to make it a better place to work, which will encourage more GPs to remain working in general practice, address the concerns about the unlimited personal liability and with the move to a more population based approach to healthcare ensure that general practice is truly able to play a leadership role in the local NHS.”

The review does indeed need to consider these things, and build on the strengths and freedoms of the partnership model as it looks to the future. Let’s hope my nervousness (and, I admit, my cynicism) is unfounded.

30
may
0

Practical advice for moving ahead in the new environment

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Even the most successful people and organisations can be caught out when the world around them changes. For Ben Gowland this was brought home by his personal transition from Chief Executive of a small successful federation employing 20 people to a large Clinical Commissioning Group employing over 200. He quickly discovered that the behaviours and approaches that had made him successful no longer worked in the new world. This week, in a “talking blog” he uses this revelation and his years of working with challenged general practices to advise how general practice can move forward in the new environment. Watch his presentation below (you’ll need your sound turned “on”):

23
may
0

A new paradigm for general practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The world has changed for general practice. A new, more challenging external environment means the behaviours that have been successful in the past no longer work. A new paradigm is required. New behaviours are needed for general practice to thrive in the new environment.

16
may
0

Who is to blame for the current crisis in general practice?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Who is to blame for the current crisis in general practice? NHS England? The government? Jeremy Hunt? Workforce planners? The bankers because of what happened in 2008? Millennials, because of their demand for instant-everything? Somebody else?

Whose job is it to sort out the crisis that general practice is in? Is it the same people whose fault the crisis is in the first place? Or is it Simon Stevens, NHS England, Jeremy Hunt, the government, or maybe even the BMA and the national general practice organisations?

These will not be unfamiliar questions for GPs. The injustice of the current situation pushes them into almost constant consideration. But focussing on them does not help individual GPs and practices find a way through the challenges they have to contend with on a day to day basis.

I am sure many readers will have at some point come across Stephen Covey’s book, “The Seven Habits of Highly Effective People”, first published in 1989 with over 25 million copies sold. Within the very first habit that Covey identifies of very successful people (“be proactive”), he introduces the Circle of Concern and the Circle of Influence.

The Circle of Concern contains all those things we focus our energy and efforts on over which we have little or no control, such as the weather, Iran’s nuclear programme, or national debt. For GPs it includes working out who to blame for the crisis afflicting the profession, and considering how much of the soon to be announced additional NHS funding will make it to front line general practice.

The Circle of Influence contains all of those things that we can directly control or influence, such as our actions, our behaviours, our family and our colleagues. For GPs this includes their own individual practice.

The habit successful people have, according to Covey, is focussing their energy and effort in the Circle of Influence where they can make a difference, and not wasting it in the Circle of Concern over which they have little or no influence.

I see this difference regularly in GP practices. The factors causing the crisis are outside of the control of practices. The local response to them, however, is within their control. Some GPs and practices focus their energy on the former, and some on the latter.

The barrier that stops many GPs focussing on the Circle of Influence and the changes they can make is this question of who is to blame for the challenges the practice faces, and whose job it is to sort it out. If it is not my fault, and I am essentially a victim of a system failure, why should I be the one who has to sort it out? Letting go of the unfairness of the situation is far easier said than done.

But the practices who are thriving and doing best in the current environment are those focusing their energy within their Circle of Influence; the ones who are looking at how their own behaviours and actions and relationships can influence and change the current situation for the better. They have not waited to react to changes that others will make at a national or policy level, but have taken things into their own hands.

I recently visited Thistlemoor Medical Centre in Peterborough. The majority of their local population do not have English as a first language, and recruiting GPs has been a longstanding problem. But they have focussed on what they can control, and have created a really innovative model so that instead of relying on Language Line they have trained HCAs recruited from the local community to both interpret and take work off the GPs (you can find out more about their model in an upcoming episode of the General Practice Podcast). The practice is thriving and continues to grow at well over 1,000 patients a year.

In Plymouth three practices merged in 2014 to form Beacon Medical Group, and they created a new multidisciplinary team to manage the on-the-day demand. Since then, in the midst of a really challenging local environment, the practice has grown and continued to prosper.

These are just a couple of examples, and there are many across the country. What they have in common is that local GPs focussed on what they could control not what they could not, and took action. They did not waste their energy assigning blame or hoping for national solutions, but instead channelled their efforts within their own Circle of Influence to change the direction in which they were heading.

Thinking about who is to blame for the crisis in general practice is considering the wrong question. It is operating in the wrong circle. The real question to consider is what can I do, what can I influence, to create a vibrant and positive future for my practice, and to focus all my energy and efforts there.

10
may
0

The impact of the new models of care on general practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

“Remind me what they are again” the GP responded. I was asking what his thoughts were on the new models of care. I jogged his memory with a few choice acronyms (MCP, PACS, PCH etc). “Oh those. Hard to say really…”. He trailed off, interest clearly waning, and then visibly winced as he saw the message on his screen indicating the number of patients waiting to be seen.

The concept of new models of care has not really taken off as a driving force for change in general practice since they were first proposed in the five year forward view (5YFV) in 2014. Certainly not within the specific frameworks outlined within that document. Frankly, general practice has been too busy. But some of the principles underpinning the models can be seen in some of the recent developments in general practice.

The relative isolation of GP practices has changed more in the last few years than at any point in its history. Practices are far more prepared to work with each other. We have seen mergers, super-practices, federations and networks proliferate. Practices are also more willing to work with other health and social care organisations, in particular those from community and voluntary sectors. A team based approach is both building resilience and creating a more attractive proposition for incoming staff.

Practices are also far more open to reviewing their governance model. The pressure the partnership model places on individual GP partners has led many to explore other options. There has not been a wholesale move away from the GP core contract in the way that maybe some envisaged when the 5YFV was published, but the desire to retain the “independent contractor” status is no longer as strong as it once was. We may well have only seen the beginnings of the rise of at-scale general practice entities like Modality, Our Health Partnership and Lakeside, as well as acute/primary care collaborations like those in Wolverhampton and Yeovil.

General practice has also shown signs of wanting to tackle the wider determinants of health, rather than simply meeting the ever-increasing presentations of health concerns. There is a dawning realisation that something has to be done to tackle the drivers of demand growth. This sits under much of the primary care home movement, and places like Fleetwood are leading the way in taking this on.

These changes have been framed far more by the challenges the profession is experiencing than by the 5YFV. If I had asked my GP colleague about the impact of the pressures on general practice in recent years, rather than about the new models of care, he would have been much more forthcoming.

But moving away from crisis can only be half a story. We know what we are moving away from, but where are we going? What will be the impact of the new models of care going forward? Do they offer a destination for the journey on which many have already embarked?

The emergence of STPs is the current manifestation of the 5YFV implementation. There is something of a battle around size within STPs, when it comes to integrated care systems. Is the local model to be built around primary care home sized units of 30-50,000 as the focal point of change efforts, driving improvements to health as well as health care in local communities? Or is it to be driven at STP level or acute hospital sized units, with primary care homes operating as sub-localities of sub-localities, languishing at the bottom of the health ecosystem? In many places both are still possibilities, but the window of influence isn’t going to stay open for long.

Much of this depends on voice. There is a challenge for general practice to create a coherent and cohesive voice for general practice as a provider within the STP arena. Some places (like Manchester) have worked hard to create this, but for others the primary care seat is still empty. Without a voice, let alone a unified one, it is hard to see the impact of the new models being a positive influence on the future of general practice, despite the opportunity they represent.

2
may
0

Why is the GP Forward View not working?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

It is now two years since the publication of the GP Forward View (GPFV). Do things feel any better? Not for most GPs. In a recent Pulse survey 80% reported their workload had worsened over the last two years. So why has the promised £2.4bn recurrent investment, with all the trimmings alongside, failed to have any impact so far?

Looking back, I wonder what the GPFV was. Was it a strategy document? Not really, because there was no clear sense of direction. A recovery document for a service in crisis? Maybe, although it was written at arm’s length from GPs as providers. I think it was a commissioning plan, or commissioning intentions at a stretch. It was what NHS England, and the CCGs, would do to support a service in crisis. It was also a public, political document designed to demonstrate the concerns of GPs had been heard and were being addressed.

Understanding what the document was gives an insight into why it is not working. The headline investment figure of £2.4bn was an overstated figure. The real five-year investment plan was under £1bn. But the figures were extrapolated back to 2013 (the details are here) to inflate the figure to £2.4bn. Promising more than is going to be delivered is a sure-fire recipe for underwhelming results.

A cynical view of the document is that it was also a very clever way of packaging the extended access agenda to make it palatable to GPs, at a time when many were close to breaking point. While the share of funding for general practice within overall NHS expenditure has not really changed, the challenges of GP recruitment have not been addressed, and workload continues to rise, the one clear “success” of the document is that extended GP access is being introduced across the country. Ask any CCG which of the targets in the GPFV they are most closely monitored on and they will tell you it has been all about access. While the problems in general practice have not been alleviated, the government’s primary agenda for the service is being delivered.

There are some good things in the GPFV. The Releasing Time for Care programme and the work of Robert Varnum on the 10 high impact actions, which I admit I was initially sceptical about, I now think is possibly the most impactful part of the document. Practices changing themselves is the only realistic way out of the crisis, and this programme empowers and enables practices to do this. The support for indemnity looks like it is heading in the right direction, and the funding for new roles such as pharmacists has definitely helped.

But the reality is the workforce crisis persists (1,300 full time equivalent GPs left between September 2015 and September 2017), the workload continues to grow, the capital investment through the elusive ETTF simply has not materialised, and funding remains insufficient. Worse, the rhetoric around the GPFV has put general practice to the back of the queue when further funding is announced, e.g. the chancellor’s pledge of an additional £2.8bn to the NHS at the last budget had nothing earmarked for general practice.

Our collective failure to understand what the GPFV as a document was means we are now left without a clear plan or sense of direction for general practice. We initially thought (wrongly) the GPFV provided this, but what it needed (and what it still needs) is a provider led response to say this is how we will use the commissioner promises made in the GPFV to deliver a new future for general practice, and this is what it will look like. There are enough green shoots out there (the primary care home, the great work of NHS Collaborate, and the 108 episodes of the GP podcast are all testament to that) for this to be possible. But without it, either at a local or a national level, I fear the situation will be worse in 2021 than it was when the GPFV was published.

25
apr
0

The Millennial Opportunity for General Practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

I am not a millennial. I am not a baby boomer either. To be honest with you, I don’t really know what I am (although apparently I am part of the “lost generation”). How could this possibly matter? Aren’t they just analytical constructs marketing people have developed to try and categorise different age groups?

Broadly speaking millennials are those currently aged 18-35. The first concrete example of the importance of this generation to general practice has been the startling growth of the GP at Hand service, where the practice of offering video consultations grew by 20,000 in 4 months. 85% of the patients joining were millennials.

So maybe there is something in the “millennials are different” mantra after all. This South African analysis resonates:

“The nature of the digital age is to prioritise speed, convenience, and value. The millennial, being digitally native, is exactly the same. This extends from their interactions online to their experiences in healthcare. Doctors do need to look at ways to adapt their practice to meet these expectations in order to meaningfully connect with their patients. From online bookings to …SMS alerts and online calendars, practices already have a multitude of digital solutions to choose from. It is OK that you make changes incrementally, but it is vital that practices start thinking about ways to increase the convenience and speed of the new doctor-patient process.”

Millennials: Getting to know the Patients of Tomorrow, Healthbridge, South Africa

The consensus is that the number of millennials is about to surpass the number of baby boomers, and the differential between the two will grow in the coming years. It is not only our patients but also our doctors who will increasingly be millennials.

Millennial doctors may well be less a product of a technological age, and more a group affected by the junior doctor dispute, the Bawa-Garba case, and training in a system where both they and their senior role models are struggling to cope. It is hardly surprising they feel unsupported, under-valued, and uninspired.

Add to that the growing rejection of the “deferred life plan”, of putting off what you really want to do for what is expected of you, of the idea of working hard until you are 65 to enjoy the benefits later. This is evident in the conflict between a generation of doctors who accepted intolerable conditions when they were training with a new generation who simply will not.

Lucy Cohen, in her article Why Practices Must Engage Millennials, writes,

“As a business owner, millennial, and employer of millennials, I see how different our lives are to that of previous generations. Expect to see them sitting at their desk for set hours of nine to five? Those days are long gone. And if you want millennials to engage with you, then you need to get on board with that idea. We’ve grown up accustomed to communicating and receiving answers almost instantly. So if your (practice) wants to engage with us, we need you to have systems in place to keep us posted on things.”

What I see in all of this is a tremendous opportunity for general practice. The NHS, and its constituent statutory bodies, is not going to be able to respond quickly to the demands of the new generation. The entrenched culture runs too deep. But general practice is far more agile. Individual practices can find ways of letting go of the past and of creating a new, different future that caters for the changing needs of the patients and the staff coming through the doors.

By strengthening the connection with their local community, by valuing individuals over traditional structures and ways of working, and by embracing the opportunity of technology, general practice can become the destination of choice for millennial doctors. It can also harness the growing engagement of millennial patients in their own health to improve health outcomes.

Understanding the changing needs of millennials is important because understanding the needs of our staff and our patients is important. It is an important place to start as we try and shift our thinking from “how do I get out of this crisis?” to “how do I build a sustainable future for this business?”

I will be exploring this issue in much more detail with a panel of experts this month. Watch out for the podcast episodes of these discussions which we will publish over the summer.

18
apr
0

Technology: Opportunity or Threat for General Practice?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The world is changing. We know it. We read books on a Kindle, download films, order just about everything online. Everyone has, and is permanently attached to, a smartphone. The NHS and healthcare has so far remained relatively unscathed, unlike many other industries. But that is starting to change. What will the impact of technology be on general practice?

A number of new reports have come out recently, heralding the changes. One of these, The Promise of Healthtech by Public, describes the rising impact of digital innovators and technology on healthcare.

The report identifies 9 trends where there is significant growth in technological innovation, the areas the report describes as “low hanging fruit”: procurement and productivity; recruitment and training; prevention; winter pressures and supported self-care; Artificial Intelligence (AI) in pathology and radiology; patient safety; mental health; social care; and research. It then maps the growing number of tech start-ups against each of these trends

You may think the report is overstating the pace of change, in its desire to encourage more tech start-ups to follow suit. But I don’t think so, because at the same time the big technology firms, like Apple, Amazon, Google and Facebook, are all moving into healthcare. According to this article published in March in Vox, “The most proven, forward-thinking, and, dare I say, disruptive companies in our country have decided health care should be their next big move.”  So whether it is the healthcare equivalent of Uber or Fitbit, or one (or more) of the more established tech companies, the current (relative) status quo is not going to last long.

Early stirrings are starting to have tremors through primary care. The GP at Hand service led to (mainly young) patients deregistering from their practice to sign up in London. Echo enables online ordering and delivery of prescriptions.

The Public report identifies numerous barriers that have slowed the introduction of technology: lack of clarity about the evidence; fast evolving regulation of digital health products; slow procurement; partial interoperability; unclear data security standards; and limited change management and digital skills. A quick reflection on the reaction to the introduction of GP at Hand within general practice and the size of these barriers becomes apparent.

I don’t think, however, these barriers will stop the tide of digital health development (disruption?) from coming in. Instead, overcoming them may well be the catalyst for greater and quicker advances. The use of blockchain looks set to empower individuals to control their own clinical records, as it can guarantee single ownership without requiring a central trusted authority, which in turn will start to shift power from the NHS as an institution into the hands of patients. The benefits of bringing together health and social media data, of enabling professional and community resources to interact effectively, is at the heart of the argument that is persuading Facebook to enter the health space.

General practice, sitting at the cusp between individuals managing their own health and accessing healthcare when they need it, is ripe for technological disruption. A recent Harvard Business Review article entitled, Virtual Healthcare Could Save the US Billions Each Year outlined it was changes to primary care that could deliver these savings. It says, “Without expanding the primary care workforce, virtual health technologies can augment human activity, expand clinical capacity, and improve efficiency by ushering in a new health care model where machines and patients join doctors in the care delivery team.”

The independent contractor status of general practice means the barriers to entry are not as great as those that exist in the statutory NHS sector. Changes can happen rapidly in a small area and grow, without the need for national decision making. General practice has always prided itself on its ability to respond and act quickly.

The crisis engulfing general practice means the willingness to take risks is much higher than ever before. The incentive for a hospital within the NHS to take a risk on a new “carebnb” discharge option is simply not as great (given the potential for backlash) as for a practice facing financial hardship to try something new, however controversial.

Technology can help general practice become more efficient, but more importantly it can enable much stronger links between practices, their patients, and their local community. Shifting the demand curve is key to general practice emerging from its current predicament. The Public report, describing the trend for the development of technology in the area of prevention, states, “the need for digital solutions for wellness, supported self-care for patients with chronic conditions, AI driven behaviour change models and personalized patient education solutions is only going to increase.”

There is now an opportunity for general practice, given its current crisis, to reinvent itself as the supporter of communities and individuals to actively manage their own health, to act as a guide through the new environment as it evolves, and in doing so to make its own workload more manageable. The paternalistic “gatekeeper” role is unlikely to survive the changes that are coming, but the need for the expert generalist to empower, encourage and enable individuals and their decision making will be greater than ever.

The threat technological innovation presents is to the existing model of general practice. But given it is widely accepted that the current model of general practice is no longer sustainable, and in the absence of any meaningful investment in general practice, the opportunity technological innovation provides for general practice to reinvent itself seems to far outweigh the threat.

11
apr
0

Book Review – Perspectives by Judith Harvey

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

In his latest blog Ben reviews GP Judith Harvey’s latest book “Perspectives: A GP reflects on medical practice and, well, just about everything…”

There are not many non-autobiographical books where you feel like you get to know the author, but Perspectives by Judith Harvey is definitely one.   There is something compelling about getting inside the mind of a doctor, not just as a doctor but as a person, and getting a sense of how they see the world.

Judith Harvey is a GP, a patient, a charity founder, and a unique individual. She is also a very talented writer. “Perspectives” is a collection of articles she has written over a 10 year period. Her articles have been published each week in the National Association of Sessional GPs newsletter, as well as other GP publications. While they were written primarily for GPs, I am not a GP and I still found them highly accessible, as well as insightful, stimulating and challenging at the same time.

Her writing is characterised by her honesty. In “It’s a knockout!” she describes her own experience of having concussion, of how it impacted her ability to think clearly, to work effectively and to sleep properly. In “Sleeping with the patient” we find out why she spent the night sharing a bed with one of her patients. In “Giving up… or stopping?” she shares what the prospect of retiring from clinical practice is like in real time.

As the book progresses you start to sense her underlying frustration with the system, borne out of a deep concern about health inequalities. In many ways, Judith was always ahead of her time: a proud portfolio GP when the voice was not as loud as it is today; writing about the impact of employment on health as a medical student and being summoned to the Dean to be reminded she wasn’t training to become a social worker; to advocating walking (for staff and patients) as a route into cutting the NHS budget back in 2009, well before the social prescribers had moved into town. Her passion for learning from others systems is clear (Judith founded Cuba Medical Link, a registered charity which enabled medical students to travel to Cuba for their electives), as is her frustration that we are not learning more from the system that exports doctors and achieves some of the best outcomes at a fraction of the cost of systems we frequently refer to.

When it comes to dealing with difficult issues, no stone is left unturned. She tackles self-prescribing by doctors (an issue rarely considered by non-clinicians), whether placebos can (and should) be morally prescribed, and the impact discussing an elderly patient’s driving ability can have on the doctor-patient relationship. She talks about the problems of evidence based medicine, about the social pressure put on potential organ donors, and questions whether it is ethical to provide a new face to a healthy person whose face is damaged when the price is premature death.

Ultimately, what I enjoyed most was the sense I was starting to get to know Judith as a person, as someone who loves travel and film festivals and the paintings of Goya, as someone who embraces all of life, rather than choosing to be defined by her profession or one particular aspect of it, and as someone prepared to share some of her innermost thoughts so that we, the readers, can better understand the points she is making, simply because she cares.

Maybe the book would have been even better if it had included more of a biography at the beginning or end. The only thing missing for me was a more direct insight into Judith’s life, into where she has been and what she has done, as a canvas to enrich the colour of the articles.

That said, this book is much more than “a GP reflecting on medical practice and, well, just about everything” as it says on the front cover, which hopelessly undersells it. It is a rare insight into what the world looks like through the lens of someone who is both a GP and a fascinating individual, and as someone who had never previously read any of her articles, I found it captivating.

Judith’s book can be purchased via Amazon here. We will be talking to Judith about her life and career in a future episode of the General Practice Podcast

28
mar
0

I am a Consumer of Health, and Why this Matters

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Are patients consumers? It is a question that has vexed those trying to introduce a market into healthcare for many years, and I think it is fair to say the consensus view is captured in Dr Jordan Shlain’s article, “There are no consumers in healthcare, get over it”.

He summarises that this is a consumer:

  1. They have freedom to make choices based on their resources and their numerous options
  2. They can decide not to make a choice
  3. They add something to their lives (material or experience) after a purchase
  4. They have a trust psychology based on being excited, not anxious
  5. Consumers get immediate or near immediate benefit from their purchase

And this is a patient:

  1. They often do not have freedom to make a choice and the options are limited
  2. They must make a choice
  3. They are trying to get rid of something (pain, nausea) and have no idea of the cost
  4. They have a psychology based on anxiety
  5. Patients often have no line of sight into whether they get a benefit or not

According to Wikipedia, a patient is “any recipient of health care services”. But how does prevention fit in to this? If a GP surgery undertakes preventative activity with its local population, is it doing that with them as patients or as consumers? When I as an individual decide to go for a run to improve my health, am I a patient or a consumer?

Let’s apply Dr Shlain’s criteria for consumers to my choice to go for a run:

  1. I can choose whether or not I go for a run
  2. I can decide to stay at home watching TV on the sofa instead
  3. I feel more healthy (as well as slightly smug and self-satisfied) after I have been on a run
  4. I am excited to lose weight, improve my fitness, and to (feel like I) look better
  5. I feel great as soon as I have completed my run. My phone tells me how far I have run, at what speed, and how long it took. I can share it on social media and gain feedback from my own network.

So while there may not be consumers in healthcare, there are certainly consumers of health. Why does this distinction matter? It matters for two reason. First, if general practice is serious about changing the pattern of demand, of shifting the focus from healthcare for the sick to wellness for all (as described by Dr Amit Bhargava in our recent podcast), then the nature of the interactions need to be consumer-focussed rather than patient-focussed. We will need something very different from our current system of patient participation groups, something more along the lines of the “Beat the Street” initiative described by Dr William Bird.

Second, the big technology companies (e.g. Amazon, Apple etc) already understand that individuals are consumers of health. Their moves into healthcare are predicated on being able to reduce total expenditure by empowering individuals to manage their own health.

“Apple, Google, and Amazon are trying to lower the cost of health care for their employees by steering them toward outpatient clinics and wellness programs that they own or control…There is a potential convergence going on now. Electronic medical records, mobile phones, and wearables have achieved widespread adoption, creating new opportunities.”

Technology can make a real difference to us as consumers of health. But the opportunities for Apple, Amazon and Google are also opportunities for general practice. The risk is if general practice does not take them, it might be superseded by the technology companies who do.

Dr Shlain may be right that there are no consumers of healthcare, but there are consumers of health. The aging population and the rapid advancement of technology mean this distinction is more important than ever before, and its impact upon primary care is likely to be huge.

21
mar
1

What does GP at Hand mean for General Practice?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

The world is changing. The days of popping down to Toys ‘R’ Us for a present for the kids are over. Last week Toys ‘R’ Us announced it was closing all of its stores. According to toy industry analyst Jim Silver, “They lost online and they didn’t adapt.”

It is not just the toy industry that is changing. It is everywhere. Earlier this month Countrywide estate agents reported significant ongoing financial difficulties. In a statement they acknowledged they had not yet learned how to deal with the challenge from digital property services (such as Purple Bricks).

General practice is not immune to these changes. Lillie Road Medical Centre practice in Fulham, which last year started to offer the GP at Hand video consultation service to anyone outside its area living or working in London, has seen startling growth. Taking up the service requires patients to leave their existing practice and register as an out of area patient. The list size of the practice has grown from 5,000 to almost 25,000 in 4 months, and 85% of registrations have been patients aged 20-39.

The GP at Hand experience means the digital threat to general practice has just become real. The capitated payment system of reimbursement for general practice means losing the younger, healthier patients on the list, and being left with patients who are older with more complex health needs; and could result in income not matching costs. It could well be the final straw for many practices already experiencing financial pressure.

Should these changes be resisted? Are video consultations a “good thing”? In a paper published in the Journal of the Royal Society of Medicine, the team from the Department of Primary Care and Public Health at Imperial College London said that while there is evidence that video consulting is acceptable to patients and offers many potential benefits, at least to those of younger age, its safety and efficacy in primary care currently remains largely untested. It raises concerns that while online consultations may help practices manage demand more easily, it may conversely increase pressure through supply-induced demand, or defensive practices.

In our new society, video consultations are more about allowing patients to access services in the way they want to, and less about reducing workload for GPs. Increasingly, it is patients who are going to set the pace for changes like this. The early results from GP at Hand demonstrate for some there is an impatience to see these changes now. Our recent technology panel ultimately felt the profession would not be able to keep control of the use of technology, and it would be driven by patients, if not now then certainly at some point in the future.

We are only at the start of the “digital journey” in general practice. Technology is evolving all the time. Jim Forrer on the technology panel talked about an app currently in development that can monitor blood pressure, pulse rate, oxygen saturations and respiratory rate through the camera function on a smartphone. Technology will change the doctor patient interaction and the way patients manage their own health. Google and Amazon are entering the health space, using global cloud-based health platforms and data, and this is going to have an impact on general practice.

We may think in a tax funded system based on needs not wants that market forces won’t apply. But the reality (as demonstrated by GP at Hand) is they will, because people will not accept what they perceive to be a second class service when it comes to their health, and will demand that health services evolve in the same way as every other aspect of the world. Resisting the implementation of technology will, at best, be a short term strategy. The risk of that approach is that others will move in to fill the void and the opportunity to respond positively may be lost.

If we can’t stop the march of technology, and given the significant potential financial impact, can general practice survive the changes that are coming? Well, established players in other industries (unlike Toys ‘R’ Us and Countrywide) have. Take the experience of the supermarkets. Online grocery shopping is the fastest growing area in the sector, but it is the major supermarkets who understood the change was coming and set up their own services. While new entrants have come into the market, Sainsbury’s, Asda, Morrison’s and Tesco are the major players. Morrison’s are now building partnerships with those with better distribution networks such as Amazon and Ocado to further cement their place.

The world is changing. GP at Hand is simply the indicator that general practice is not immune to these changes. Right now the onus is on general practice to respond, to respond quickly and to respond positively. Part of the opportunity of the move to scale in general practice is precisely for this, as it enables practices to invest in technology or partner with technology firms, to test and develop its usage and to evolve the model of care. By working together, practices can meet this challenge. The other option, to resist the changes, to pass motions that “more needs to be done” by commissioners and policy makers to preserve the status quo has the whiff of King Canute on the beach, and may leave current GP practice businesses in a position like Countrywide or Toys ‘R’ Us, rather than evolving with the changes like the supermarkets.

14
mar
0

Where is general practice going?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

We all know what general practice is trying to move away from (a crisis), but where is it going?

Anger, irritation, fear, or frustration with the current situation can be a great motivator to get change started, and provide an initial impetus to motivate a practice to take action. But if your only motivation is ‘away-from’ the current crisis, then your attention is consistently drawn to the negatives in your experience, filtering out the positives in the process.

It is also not sufficient motivation for sustainable change. For example, if a GP’s goal is ‘not to be in crisis’ (by their own definition of the term), then they have achieved this goal when they reach the level they decree to mean ‘not being in crisis’. They then lose a significant portion of their motivation so run the risk of dropping back down to a point at which they become motivated by their ‘moving away from being in crisis’ goal again. ‘Moving away-from’ goals produce inconsistent motivation levels which are rarely satisfying at any stage.

Sustainable change requires an element of ‘towards’ motivation as well; a vision of where you want to get to. Creating a vision based on aspirations and positivity and not on barriers or avoidance is both empowering and inspiring.

Where is the vision for the future of general practice? I don’t think it really exists. The GP Forward View seems to be more a public acknowledgement of the challenges general practice is facing while ploughing on with extending access, rather than the development of an inspiring picture of what is to come. So here at Ockham Healthcare (with help from whoever will give it!) we aim to put that right. We want to help build excitement and anticipation about the future of general practice, and to shift the focus from the crisis around and behind us, to an inspiring and attractive future ahead.

To kick this off we are holding a series of interactive sessions with some of the leading thinkers and practitioners in general practice. We are exploring with them some of the key changes they believe will impact the future of general practice. We will distil the key lessons, and capture the learning as a resource to enable GPs and practices to prepare for what lies ahead.

We are going to consider four questions:

  1. How will technology shape the future of general practice?
  2. What will the infrastructure of general practice look like in 5 years’ time?
  3. How will the new models of care change general practice?
  4. What do GPs (of the future) want?

We recently held the first of these panels, to discuss the technology question. You can listen to the first part of the discussion here. We will publish the second part in a few weeks’ time.

What is already clear from our first panel is there are huge changes on the horizon. There is an opportunity for general practice to embrace these changes and use them to create a future that will enable a greater focus on prevention, on building patient ownership and control of their health and their illness, on a new partnership between doctors and patients, and on new treatment opportunities (e.g. the use of virtual reality in pain management).

Finding a way out of crisis is not a plan for general practice. It is the start of the journey, but to ensure it doesn’t peter out there needs to be a vision, a future, a picture of what it will be like. Our aim, starting with these panels, is to help paint that picture.

7
mar
0

The days of CCG Locality Groups are numbered

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

“But we are a membership organisation!” the newly appointed GP Chair exclaimed. “Member practices have to have a voice. We need localities to ensure each GP practice is represented in the decision making of the CCG. Each locality needs its own GP leader, the support of a locality manager and we must pay for the time of a representative from each practice to attend locality meetings”.

The Finance Director looked sceptical. He could see the £25 per patient management costs rapidly disappearing into these localities. “But where is the return on investment?” he countered. “If we fund all of that, the costs of five localities could be nearly half a million pounds a year!”

“This is what will make CCGs different to PCTs” hissed the GP Chair. “PCTs had no route into the voice of GPs and GP practices. These localities will be the engine for clinically-led change and redesign, they will ensure we connect commissioning policies to change on the ground, and make sure we can put the decisions we make as a Board into practice. Without them, we won’t deliver anything.”

And so it was that locality groups started off in many CCGs as the great hope for the future, as the symbol of what could be different. But, as is the way of the NHS, the local freedom promised to CCGs did not materialise, and the voice of localities was overtaken by directives from NHS England, the pressures of the 4 hour target, and the need for centralised financial control. Locality GP Chair roles on CCG Governing Bodies were replaced by clinical lead roles for urgent care and planned care and the like. Localities have continued, GP Locality Chairs are still in place, some even have managers, and practices are still paid to attend meetings, but more often than not these meetings now consist of a one way flow of traffic where teams from the CCG present the latest clinical pathway, referral guidance or QIPP plan to the GPs.

What hasn’t changed are the questions from the CCG finance director as to the return on investment of the locality funding. Now the embattled GP Chair simply knows removing it would be just one step too far in trying to maintain any sense of support from member practices.

So what is next for CCG locality groups? As STPs develop, and the system moves to the introduction of integrated care, it is becoming increasingly unclear what is the responsibility of the local GP federation (as a provider, and the “provider partner” within the developing integrated care system) and what is the responsibility of the CCG locality.

There will come a time when all of the functions of the CCG locality – input into clinical pathways, liaison with practices, redesign of services, representing practices in system discussions – will fall to the GP federation, as power shifts from the old system to the new, from commissioners to partnerships of providers. For now, we are in a transition period between the two.

But a transition period is problematic. Already overstretched GPs cannot be in two places at once. Do we want practices to spend the limited time resource they have on existing commissioning localities or on establishing a strong GP provider voice for the future? Realistically we can’t expect them to do both, and doing so simply limits the capacity to do either. The funding we have invested in the localities is no longer in the right place, and would be better situated within the developing federations.

The extent to which CCGs and general practice accelerate this transition may determine the strength and influence of the GP voice in the new system. Because GPs do not have the capacity for double running in a transition period, it is now time to accept the end of the locality within a CCG and to create a new future for them, and maybe allow them to fulfil their initial promise, within (or even as) GP federations.

28
feb
0

Who Represents Your Practice in Integrated Care?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

What is Integrated Care?

“Integrated care” is the term used to describe provider organisations in the NHS working together to improve care for patients.  The ambition of the NHS, as described in the Five Year Forward View, is to move away from a system of care organised via contracts between providers and commissioners, towards one in which groups of providers are given the budget to work together to deliver outcomes for a local population.

Why is it important for GP practices?

Within an integrated care system GP practices will have stronger relationships with local community services teams, social care, the voluntary sector and even the local hospital.  It will also change the way that GP practices receive (some of) their money.  Whilst the core contract will remain nationally negotiated and paid directly to practices, other income streams such as enhanced services will ultimately come via the new provider partnership (or integrated care “system” or “partnership”).

When will this happen?

There is no national timetable for the changes, as there has been no new legislation to dictate it.  Each area is implementing changes in line with their local STP (Sustainability and Transformation Plan).  Eight areas nationally are acting as pilot systems to “fast track” the introduction of the new system.

The changes have, however, already started, primarily through a push for practices to work together in populations of 30-50,000.  This is evident in the procurement of extended access for general practice, and CCGs have been explicitly asked to “encourage” practices to work together at this scale.

 

What will integrated care look like locally?

There is no blueprint for what integrated care will look like.  The lack of legislation means there is freedom for each area to determine this for itself.  We are currently in the critical period where each area is deciding and agreeing how integrated care will develop locally.  Providers and commissioners are meeting together to work this out, in meetings with a range of titles but that generally include the terms STP or Accountable Care System/Partnership or Integrated Care System/Partnership.

How is my practice represented in these discussions about integrated care?

This is an important question.  I carried out a quick poll on twitter to find out.  The results are below:

Who represents your GP practice in discussions about integrated care? #generalpractice #primarycare

— Ben Gowland (@BenXGowland) February 26, 2018

It is not surprising that practices do not think they are represented by their CCG or LMC. CCGs cannot represent practices, as they are a commissioning body that exists to represent their local population not their practices. LMCs have traditionally been the representatives of general practice. The challenge for LMCs is convincing the other providers they are there as a genuine partner rather than trade union. Integrated care is about building partnerships between providers, not negotiating terms. Some LMCs have stepped up into the role (Tracey Vell in Manchester is the obvious example) but many are simply not able to.

This essentially leaves federations (where they exist) to represent their practices, unless practices are of a size (so called “super practices”) to represent themselves. Some federations have been reluctant to take this on, because their relationship with their members is not one where they feel they can speak on their behalf. Some areas have not included GP federations in the meetings about integrated care. Whatever the reason, the absence of a federation around the table means that many GP practices are not currently represented in these important discussions.

What happens if no one represents me?

There are (at least) two consequences of practices not being represented in discussions about integrated care. The first is that general practice, as the provider of by far the largest number of patient contacts, has no voice in determining what the local integrated care system will end up looking like. The second is that acute trusts, community trusts and other large provider organisations will have the greatest influence on how care is organised and how local funds are allocated between providers in the future.

Why is no one asking how I want to be represented?

The representation of general practice is difficult because of the large number of practices, and because it is not a contract negotiation but a building of relationships between providers. It falls to general practice to organise itself so that it can be represented effectively and build relationships with the rest of the system. There is no incentive for other providers to take on this responsibility for general practice. Tracey Vell talks about how she had to fight to secure a place for general practice around the top table making these decisions in Manchester.

How can I ensure I am represented?

Practices need to do two things:

Establish who (if anyone) is representing you in local integrated care discussions. If it is no one, agree with the other local practices who should be representing you, and then push for this to happen.

Create an explicit agreement with this organisation to establish what they can and cannot agree on your behalf, and what requires further discussion and debate with you directly. Don’t make their job representing you impossible, and ensure they have a strong mandate so they can have a powerful voice with the other providers around the integrated care table. Agree the feedback and communication mechanisms to be put in place between the discussions and the practices, and review them regularly.

Who represents your practice in integrated care?

In summary, it is of critical importance for the future that general practice is represented, and represented well, in the local discussions that are taking place now about integrated care and how the future system will be organised. It is up to each practice to ensure they are being represented, and for practices to work together to empower and enable those representing them to present a strong and unified voice. For federations it is vital they establish a mandate from their member practices to undertake this role on their behalf.

 

21
feb
0

What is a Primary Care Network?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The concept of “primary care networks” is one of the most confusing I have come across in recent times. This is saying something given the plethora of new acronyms and ideas that have sprung to prominence in the last few years (think STP, PACS, MCP, PCH etc). Here I try and unpick what they actually are.

Primary care networks have something of a mysterious past. They first appeared in NHS England’s update last year on the Five Year Forward View, where they claimed they would,

“Encourage practices to work together in ‘hubs’ or networks. Most GP surgeries will increasingly work together in primary care networks or hubs. This is because a combined patient population of at least 30,000-50,000 allows practices to share community nursing, mental health, and clinical pharmacy teams, expand diagnostic facilities, and pool responsibility for urgent care and extended access. They also involve working more closely with community pharmacists, to make fuller use of the contribution they make. This can be as relevant for practices in rural areas as in towns or cities, since the model does not require practice mergers or closures and does not necessarily depend on physical co-location of services. There are various routes to achieving this that are now in hand covering a majority of practices across England, including federations, ‘super-surgeries’, primary care homes, and ‘multispecialty community providers’. Most local Sustainability and Transformation Plans are intending to accelerate this move, so as to enable more proactive or ‘extensivist’ primary care. Nationally we will also use funding incentives – including for extra staff and premises investments – to support this process.”

I remember reading this last year and thinking that it looked anomalous, out of kilter with the prevailing rhetoric of supporting GPs to manage their way out of the current crisis with the promise of extra resources and extra staff. They had not featured in the GP Forward View, where you would expect such a dramatic change for general practice to take centre stage, or even before that in the Five Year Forward View.

Maybe there had been a mistake, some sort of internal breakdown in communications within the towers of NHS England. But no, in an article in GP Online from March last year, NHS England’s Director of Primary Care Dr Arvind Madan said of these networks,

“This now becomes the new delivery scaffolding across the system. And it may be how they organise themselves in terms of access, and population and place-based care, and how they will be meaningful neighbourhoods for services to patients in terms of the offer they get too.”

But then all went quiet again on the primary care networks front. Despite the boldness of the earlier claims, nothing was seemingly happening to make these stated ambitions a reality. Efforts focussed on supporting practices through clinical pharmacists, resilience support and the like.   Until, that is, the recent planning guidance was published, which mentioned “incipient primary care networks” (like they are even a thing) and CCGs were told to “actively encourage every practice to be part of a local primary care network”.

What should we make of this? What is a primary care network? I can imagine CCG leads reading the words in the planning guidance and scratching their heads at what exactly it is they are being asked to do.

The use of “primary care network” seems to have appeared because learning from the vanguards demonstrated that for accountable/integrated care systems to work, they require general practice to be joined together into populations of 30-50,000, as the building blocks of the new system. This joining together of practices, how it happened and what it looks like is very different within each of the vanguards, although was consistently borne out of a huge investment of time, relationships and effort into building and developing trust. The term on its own, however, merely describes the end-state.

It also appears to be a term used to retrospectively fit the move in general practice towards operating at a greater scale into a policy direction. According to NHS England the “routes” to primary care networks include “federations, super-surgeries, primary care homes, and multispecialty community providers”. All very different things. Yes, they all involve previously separate GP practices working together, but they cover a very broad spectrum of what that means in practice. The term primary care network is seemingly used as a generic descriptor of where different areas who have embarked upon a journey of practices working together have arrived.

Herein lies the complexity. A primary care network is not an actual thing that can be defined or described in any detail. This is because the journey for each group of practices that chooses to work together is different and will lead to a wide range of different destinations. For some it will end up in super-practices, for others a federation, for others a primary care home, and for others something totally different. Most confusingly, very few (if any) will end up at a place that is called a “primary care network”.

So let’s not add “primary care network” to the already full lexicon of NHS terminology. Joint work across GP practices is a journey not a destination, and use of the term primary care network pulls focus unhelpfully away from the journey and onto the destination. Let’s hope CCGs do not take their new commands to heart, and that a new industry doesn’t arise in trying to create something that we can’t define.

14
feb
0

Guest Blog – My GP by Sarah Smizz

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The following Blog was previously published by Sarah in a series of tweets (@smizz) and is published here with her kind permission. Thanks Sarah!

Ah, my GP is flipping amazing. I can’t explain how good it really is to have someone who knows you & your medical conditions & what matters – someone who just, like, knows this without ever looking back at the records. Someone who sees a longer & bigger picture.

Sometimes we have disagreements on what the longer picture looks like. In the beginning we’d argue. But he was the only GP at the time who decided to take responsibility for me. Most let me jump from GP to GP. But after every test he’d say, “you do this & you come back to me”

I didn’t know at the time the benefits of having continuous care. I was young & impatient. But now I really get it. Today he instantly knew I had an infection (cuz he knows what my normal is), he prescribed me more stuff cuz of a previous diagnosis to help with current sickness

I whined about my leg being numb esp when I run around 5K & how I wanna run half a marathon & I can’t get past 10K (which is still a HUGE mile marker for me). I said all of my friends can run a (half) marathon & I can’t! & he was like:

“Not all of your friends Sarah. I can’t run a half marathon & I’m your friend.” It sounds proper Cheesy to write but also it felt really genuine.

He asked me about PhD work, what Prague & Japan was like. He told me about a beautiful Japanese animation he watched the other night on Amazon Prime. Even Googled it. I gave him Japanese weird tasting Kit-Kats & he seemed pretty made-up by my gesture.

Then I went on my way, not before he gave me his wise-words full of living life & selfcare wisdom as I went to leave. Dude has his moments as a proper philosophical guru. Then of course, he made sure – as per – that I come back to him to check-in in a few weeks.

GP’s will NEVER be replaced esp by apps. And we need to make sure we take care of them, as they take care of us because they’re the backbone of the NHS and the community. And my GP turns out to also hold me up when I feel like I’m falling down. I know they do this for everyone.

7
feb
2

What the 2018/19 NHS Planning Guidance Means for General Practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog2 Comments

I have always wondered who actually reads NHS planning guidance. It contains really important information, but it is always so dry and impenetrable (deliberately?) that most will rely on “bluffers” briefings from others. So here is my “bluffers” briefing for you (although it is here in full for the brave hearted). There are three key messages for general practice:

 

1.The Obsession with GP Access Continues

Buoyed by the apparent success of introducing extended access across groups of practices at evenings and weekends, the timetable for 100% coverage across the country has been moved up by 6 months to 1st October this year. How much of the heralded 52% of the country that is already covered have permanent (as opposed to pilot) arrangements in place is not known, so expect a plethora of hastily put together procurements to emerge in the coming weeks. These are likely to represent something of a risk to local systems, because if the tenders are not awarded to local practices it will mean a fifth of the GPFV investment going elsewhere (£500m of the promised GPFV £2.4bn is for extended access), and GP engagement in integrated working may suffer as a result.

 

2.The Rise and Rise of STPs and Integrated Care Systems

And integrated working, as I am sure you already know, is now king. The furore over accountable care systems/organisations has led to a renaming as “Integrated Care Systems”. That should do it. More interesting is some of the insight the narrative provides as to how these will operate in future.

In the short term, the power and influence of STPs will rise. They will have “an increasingly prominent role in planning and managing system wide efforts to improve services”. They are expected to develop their management infrastructure. They will be the conduit for capital allocations.

It doesn’t stop there. Over time “we envisage Integrated Care Systems (ICSs) will replace STPs”. These ICSs will have one plan across all their constituent organisations, rather than there being a collection of individual organisational plans. It will be the role of the ICS to assure and track the progress of its member organisations. If an individual trust or CCG has financial or quality issues “the leadership of the ICS will play a key role in agreeing what remedial action needs to be taken”. This is code for ICSs being able to fire the CEOs of the member organisations, the key determinant of where the power lies.

What role this leaves for CCGs (the guidance also all but outlaws the use of contract penalties) is very difficult to identify. Most likely is an acceleration of the merging of CCG teams and the development of a (heavily reduced) “strategic commissioning” functions coterminous with the STP/ICS area.

The development of ICSs will also impact general practice directly. For an area to become an ICS they need “compelling plans to integrate primary care, mental health, social care and hospital services using population health approaches to redesign care around people at risk of becoming acutely unwell. These models will necessarily require the widespread involvement of primary care, through incipient networks”.

Incipient networks? Anyone? All becomes clearer later on in the guidance as CCGs are directed to “actively encourage every practice to be part of a local primary care network, so that there is complete geographically contiguous population coverage of primary care networks as far as possible by the end of 2018/19, serving populations of at least 30,000 to 50,000”.

“Geographically contiguous” is new. I know plenty of areas that have encouraged practices to form networks with like-minded practices, regardless of geographical location. They won’t be happy. It is all very reminiscent of CCG-formation days. And what “actively encourage” means is anyone’s guess. Carrot or stick? Time will tell.

 

3.There is No New Money

Were you expecting any? The message for general practice is essentially investment will continue as outlined in the GP Forward View (and if you missed it, here’s a quick reminder of why the promised £2.4bn is not £2.4bn) – i.e. there is no additional, previously unannounced money. You should still expect the balance of the £3 a head one-off commitment from CCGs between 2017 and 2019, as well as the remaining sustainability and resilience funding to be spent next year (75% by December 2018, and 100% by March 2019).

Financial pressure in the system means “non-elective demand management” is to make up the majority of the CCG Quality Premium scheme. Urgent care will be a focus, but the elective position essentially just must not get any worse. GP referrals are assumed to remain flat (“increase by 0.8% i.e. no change per working day” – whatever that means). And, the guidance confidently states, “there will be no additional winter funding in 2018/19” (there will).

There is a push on CCGs to reduce the routine prescribing of 18 ineffective and low clinical value medicines, and savings against this are “assumed” for CCGs, so expect more pressure here. There is also a national consultation on reducing prescribing “of over-the-counter medicines for 33 minor, short-term health concerns, as well as vitamins and probiotics”.

Finally, there is one other bizarre addition I wanted to point out – a requirement for CCGs to ensure every practice implements at least two of the high impact “time to care” actions. Make of that what you will, but it does seem to highlight the persistent inability of the system to distinguish between top down and bottom up.

 

There you go – the essentials of the planning guidance in one five-minute chunk – now you can bluff with confidence!

31
jan
0

Funding Federations – The Accountable Care Conundrum

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

You will need to bear with me this week as I try and explain why the funding of GP federations is a critical issue for emerging accountable care systems, because moving to a new non-legislated system is (unsurprisingly) complicated.

Let’s start at the beginning. The principle behind accountable care is one of providers working in partnership with each other to redesign services to improve outcomes. By the way, if “accountable care” does become “integrated care” (or some such) in the next few months, it won’t change anything other than introduce a new set of terms for exactly the same thing – it is simply the price (in my view acceptable) we have to pay for non-legislated reform.

For accountable care to work, one of these providers has to be general practice. In an accountable care system/partnership/organisation (delete as locally appropriate) general practice needs to work in partnership with other local providers. The whole concept builds on the registered list of general practice, and of providing services that are joined together and tailored to meet local needs.

But there are lots of GP practices. Too many for local providers to all build a relationship with each of them individually. As a result, someone has to act on behalf of practices. Partnership between general practice and the rest of the system can’t work without this.

Who, then, should take on this role for practices? Well it can’t be the CCG because they have been established to represent the needs of their local population, not of GP practices as providers. LMCs? The main problem here is that practices need someone to partner on their behalf with the rest of the system. While LMCs are good at representing and articulating the needs of practices, partnership has not historically been a strength. They are also often perceived more as a trade union by other NHS providers. So while in theory LMCs are an option, the reality is without exceptional leadership they are not. Which leaves GP federations (in the absence of a local super-practice) as the best vehicle to enable general practice and the rest of the system to partner with each other.

GP federations are experiencing something of a resurgence at present, as practices seek to gain the benefits of working at scale without formally merging. But one of their challenges, as anyone working within a developing federation will know, is that they don’t have any money. The delivery of some services will create a small margin, but this is rarely enough to fund enough more than a skeleton management team.

Here we (at last) come to the crux of the problem. The system needs GP federations to ensure general practice are part of the provider partnership that underpins accountable care. But partnership working and the building of effective relationships takes time, which someone has to pay for. For GP federations the task is doubly difficult, because at the same time as creating new relationships they have to ensure they have a mandate from their practices and keep them on board with any agreements they make. How can the leaders of GP federations find time for this? Should they do it out of goodwill, and effectively pay for it out of their own pocket by giving their time for free? Should the host practices of the emergent GP leaders bear the cost? Or do we expect the member practices of the federation to contribute the ongoing cost of federation leaders both attending system wide meetings and reporting back to them as the accountable care model develops?

None of these are realistic. So the conundrum is how can federations and those representing general practice be funded to ensure that accountable care systems develop to include general practice?

Answers on a postcard. If this conundrum has been solved in your area I would love to hear how. Email me at ben@ockham.healthcare. Next week I will share the responses (if there are any!) and attempt to consider what mechanisms might be available to find a way through this thorny issue.

24
jan
0

What does “being resilient” mean?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The letter I had been waiting for dropped through the letterbox. I had been an “A” student right through school, and my sights were now firmly set on Oxford University. The interviews had been hard to read, but seemed to go ok. I opened the letter. “Thank you for applying to Oxford. After careful consideration it has not been possible to offer you a place”.

I didn’t take it very well. Maybe we are less resilient when we are younger. My (somewhat sulky) response was to decide university wasn’t for me, and I headed off to do voluntary work (“something that mattered!”) instead.

A key part of resilience is described by Bruce Cryer and his colleagues at HeartMath as “releasing the emotional grip” that stress has on us. In their 2003 Harvard Business Review article they describe how to do this, essentially by using techniques to accept the current situation and to develop a new perspective centred on what actions you can take to change the situation.

It took me a long time to do this. After my rejection, I actually did well in my A-Levels, but the following year refused to apply to Oxford again on principle (the principle of, “if they don’t want me, I don’t want them”). I was hanging on to the pain of rejection instead of thinking positively about the future.

Changing our own mindset that things need to and can be different is at the heart of resilience. I think this is the hardest part. In the end, I was sat down by an individual who had become something of a mentor to me. He laid out some different options of what my future might look like. One involved going to Oxford. It did look like the most attractive path… Something seemed to click inside me. It might have taken 18 months(!), but finally I could accept it was me who hadn’t been ready for Oxford (and not vice versa) and I decided to swallow my pride and reapply.

While tenacity and perseverance are key parts of resilience, it is adaptability, and the ability to change mindset, that are more important. Blockbuster Video, Borders Books, Kodak (and many others) kept going for as long as they could when things were tough, but they did not adapt to the new world and the changed environment around them, and ultimately were not able to survive.

I recently had a conversation with Dr Mike Holmes, the newly elected vice chair of the RCGP, about resilience and the importance of it for GPs right now. In echoes of the HBR article, he identified three elements to GP resilience: pragmatic optimism; making do with what you have while making things better; and allowing yourself to think differently.

There are opportunities and new ways of working that can help general practice. Mike Holmes outlined some of these in our conversation. The hard bit for many GPs, as for anyone in a difficult situation, is letting go of the unfairness of what is happening and shifting into the “pragmatic optimism” that Mike describes.

Some GPs and practices have not yet been able to make this shift in mindset. Some will never make it. My life was probably changed forever (with a lot of help!) by shifting my focus from unhappiness with my rejection, to taking action to remedy it. I was accepted into Oxford at the second time of asking. Changing the direction of our lives starts with ourselves, with us releasing the emotional grip our current circumstances have on us, and changing our focus from causes and blame to our response and what we can do about it. This is being resilient.

17
jan
0

Is General Practice Responsible for the pressures in A&E?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Well what do you think? Is it? It may well depend who you are. If you are a GP you are unlikely to think so, but as a hospital Chief Executive, who has heard all about the workload and workforce pressures general practice is under, it is easy to draw the alternative conclusion.

But correlation, as my PhD wife constantly reminds me, is not the same as causation. The fact that general practice is struggling with workload pressure at the same time as there is rising demand in A&E only means the two are correlated. It doesn’t necessarily mean one causes the other. And so it is that research was published this week in the British Journal of General Practice looking at the factors affecting emergency department attendance. They found (drum roll),

“…the burden of multimorbidity is the strongest clinical predictor of ED attendance, which is independently associated with social deprivation. Low use of the GP surgery is associated with low attendance at ED. Unlike other studies, the authors found that adult patient experience of GP access, reported at practice level, did not predict use.”

In other words, people are living longer with more long term conditions. This in turn is causing the growth in demand, both for GP practices and A&E departments. The more GP consultations a person has, the more likely (for many groups) it is that they will also have more A&E attendances. Growing demand is the causative factor. Pressure on A&E departments and GP practices are simply correlated.

I am on Twitter (@BenXGowland – the X is actually my middle initial, as opposed to denoting membership of some secret society). You should be too. The GP I most enjoy following on Twitter is Dr Steve Kell (@SteveKellGP). He recently ran a survey (now I recognise I need to be careful here as having preached about the difference between correlation and causation, I know I am going to get stung on the validity of a small sample size, but nevertheless) which found that, of the 48(!) GP practices that responded, 81% had not been asked if they were busy or managing in the first week of the New Year, with only 19% saying that they had. Steve’s concern is that “sadly we value what we measure”.

But simply knowing that a problem exists (there is too much demand, and it is getting worse) does not actually help. Nor does finding someone to blame (whether it is GPs blaming hospitals, or vice versa, or the government, or Jeremy Hunt etc etc). The only real option is to work out what we can do about it (because even if there was more money, which there isn’t, there will never be enough).

Which brings me to another interesting exchange on Twitter involving my friend Dr Kell. His practice is a leading light in the Primary Care Home movement, and he announced on Twitter that his practice had achieved a (highly impressive) 5.5% year on year reduction in emergency admissions. Now that prompted a question in response from Professor Harris of Lakeside Health asking,

“where lies the incentive (other than patient benefit) of GPs working harder/differently/more productively if the £ benefits remain with trusts or CCGs?”

The essence of this question is what is the point of the primary care home, of groups of practices working with other agencies, and managing demand in a different way in the way that Dr Kell’s practice has, if there is no financial return for the practice? His response was that while there is no direct financial return, it makes things better for patients, for staff, and is more efficient.

If we think about this in the context of constantly rising demand, the challenge practices face is how to adapt to meet this demand in different ways. Not because there is a direct and immediate financial benefit, but because the current system is not working, and without change the system is likely to collapse. Everyone working in the system has a responsibility to understand and accept the current realities, and to think and act differently as a result, so that things can improve.

General practice is not responsible for the pressures A&E is experiencing, but it is responsible for adapting and finding new ways of dealing with the demand (like the work being undertaken within the primary care home sites) so that general practice, and the NHS, can continue to manage the rising burden of disease. And if you take nothing else away from this, at the very least you should follow @SteveKellGP on twitter…

3
jan
0

General Practice Podcast – Highlights of the Year 2017

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

2017 was a brilliant year for the General Practice Podcast with 50 episodes and well over 2,000 downloads per month. In this graphic (below) we pick out a few of our favourite highlights including some of the most downloaded. We hope you enjoy. The Podcast returns on 8th January 2018 with a brand new episode and then continues with a new, free episode every week. You need never miss out on an episode – why not subscribe to our weekly newsletter here.

Open the graphic here: Podcast Highlights Graphic

 

20
dec
0

What is new in General Practice – Late 2017

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The end of 2017 marked something of a watershed for general practice. For the first time, the focus seemed to shift away from the crisis general practice is in, to what the future that awaits general practice will be.

And threaded throughout the free content from Ockham Healthcare, we saw glimpses of this future. There was outrage (in some quarters) at the growth of e-consultations – and I spoke to Mark Harmon from e-consult about where we really are currently. We saw the continued growth of the super-partnership and I spoke to Mark Newbold for the latest update from Our Health Partnership as they continue to develop. There was the continued development of new roles in general practice and I spoke to Jenny Drury about paramedics undertaking the majority of GP visits. Jonathan Serjeant and Mark Spencer from NHS Collaborate shared pictures of the future with general practice bringing whole communities together, and we learned of a new style of management leader in general practice from Claire Oatway at Beacon Medical Group.

3 important questions for the future of general practice were identified: Will general practice remain independent? What scale will general practice operate at? What will the role of federations be? In the end it became clear that it is ultimately all going to be about collaboration. The Nuffield Trust produced a report on collaboration in general practice, and federations have come back into vogue. We identified good reasons for practices to join (and not to join) a federation. No longer just needed to subsidise meagre general practice earnings with additional revenue streams, now (and in the future) they will also need to support the delivery of core general practice and to give general practice a voice around the accountable care table.

All the more important because “accountable care” has developed into the potential new game-changer for general practice. Nick Hicks explained what accountable care means, and how an outcomes based contract might actually work. The new ACO contract was published back in August, but the involvement of general practice is more likely to come from leaders getting out and talking to practices. Anna Starling shared lessons the Health Foundation has distilled from the work of the vanguard sites, and Nick Hughes explained first-hand what it is like to lead a federation within a PACS vanguard. We thought about the impact commissioning has had on general practice (overall, not good), and highlighted the importance of a proactive transition from CCGs to accountable care for general practice (here and here).

In the end, we concluded the general practice forward view is not going to change general practice, STPs are not going to change general practice, the revitalised federations are not going to change general practice – it is GPs themselves accepting the situation they are in and making the necessary changes that ultimately provides the only way general practice can move into its new future.

Merry Christmas and a Happy New Year to you all from everyone here at Ockham Healthcare, and I look forward to sharing the continuing journey with you in 2018!

13
dec
0
Here and there

What got general practice here won’t get general practice there

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

There’s a tricky issue at the heart of the general practice crisis. Ostensibly, those working in general practice need to do things differently. It’s tricky because if I accept I need to do something differently, it means I am taking responsibility for the difficulties I am facing, even though the situation is not my fault.

To try and pick a way through this, I am going to lean heavily on a book by Marshall Goldsmith, “What got you here won’t get you there: How successful people become even more successful” (2008). I found this a really helpful book when I was a newly appointed CCG accountable officer. Previously, as a middle manager and running a small organisation, I had always been successful by being very task focussed, by making things happen, and by delivering results. What soon became clear was that this style of managing was not effective when I was the leader of a larger organisation.

It turns out what I needed to do was spend less time trying to force things to happen, and more time communicating what the organisation was about and where it was going, and listening and talking with those who worked in and with the organisation. I needed to be visible, and trust the managers working in the organisation to make things happen, whilst I focussed on making sure the direction and priorities were clear and understood by all.

It might sound obvious, but it was a very difficult personal transition. As Marshall Goldsmith explains, it was difficult because of my personal beliefs. He describes it like this, “One of the greatest mistakes of successful people is the assumption, “I behave this way, and I achieve results. Therefore, I must be achieving results because I behave this way.”

It was hard to change the way I behaved because it had always worked for me in the past. But the world around me had changed, and to be successful I needed to do things differently. The difficult bit was really believing that it was me that needed to change, rather than falling into victim mode and blaming the people and organisations around me. Marshall Goldsmith puts it like this,

“Many people enjoy living in the past, especially if going back there lets them blame someone else for anything that’s gone wrong in their lives. That’s when clinging to the past becomes an interpersonal problem… When we make excuses, we are blaming someone or something beyond our control as the reason for our failure. Anyone but ourselves.” 

I remember the point at which I realised it was me that needed to change. We had been a really successful practice based commissioning group, but had struggled in the transition to becoming a CCG. It was easy to dwell on the successes of the past, and blame the challenges we were facing on others. But ultimately that wasn’t going to help. For me it was facing the feedback from our CCG authorisation process (remember that?) – it was as if that was the event I needed, to get me to understand I had to do things differently to change the situation. Back to Marshall Goldsmith,

“There’s nothing wrong with understanding. Understanding the past is perfectly admissible if your issue is accepting the past. But if your issue is changing the future, understanding will not take you there. My experience tells me that the only effective approach is looking people in the eye and saying, “If you want to change, do this.”

Focussing on my own past successes, and how events had conspired against us, was not helping me. In fact, it was holding me back. Which brings me to general practice. Practices are in a difficult position. It is not their fault. But they are the ones in the difficult position. Getting out of this position requires different behaviours to those that were successful in the past.

This is the kind of thing that is easy to say (or blog about!), but hard to act upon. It only becomes possible when an individual really believes things need to change, because without that conviction people take half-hearted steps (or none), or do the same as they have always done, which won’t lead anywhere productive. I don’t know what the equivalent of my ‘authorisation-moment’ will be for individual GP partners, or practice managers, or federation leaders, but the truth of it is that for their situation to change, they are the ones who will need to change. Not to satisfy others, but for themselves.

The environment general practice now finds itself in requires collaboration (with other practices, NHS organisations, the voluntary sector, social care), a willingness to explore new ways of working, and an openness to letting others do what for many years has been the sole domain of GPs. The changes themselves are not that difficult, but personally getting to the point where you are prepared to make them, and adopting the new behaviours that are needed, is.

If we could apply Marshall Goldsmith’s work to general practice directly, perhaps it would read: “What got general practice here won’t get general practice there: How successful practices become even more successful”. Or “What got GP federations here won’t get GP federations there: How successful federations become even more successful”.

The world has changed for general practice, and, like it or not, it is GPs and those working in general practice that will need to change if general practice is to thrive into the future.

6
dec
0
Accountable Care Clinical Commissioning Part 2

Becoming a butterfly…Part Two

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

General Practice and the Transition from Clinical Commissioning to Accountable Care –2

Last time (here) I explored the negative impact that dual running the existing commissioning system and the future accountable care system was having both on general practice, and on the success of the new accountable care models themselves. We want GPs to focus on engaging with accountable care, to ensure general practice and the registered list is central to it. But the commissioning system hasn’t stopped, and we still want GPs leading and actively participating in the commissioning system.

By creating an artificial split between general practice as providers through federations and general practice as commissioners through CCG localities we are making it difficult for core general practice to be involved in the new models (How are practices represented? Do federations have a mandate to speak for practices? etc.), wasting valuable general practice time, and unnecessarily limiting the GP leadership capacity available to the new system.

If the heart of the transition is moving where the energy for redesign sits, how might we shift it from the GPs sitting in their commissioning role, to the GPs sitting in their provider role (rather than simply asking two different groups of GPs to do both)?

Could we transfer the responsibility for redesigning services from CCGs to groups of providers now? In practical terms, could we cope now without GPs carrying out their commissioning role, and ask them to take on the redesign role as providers, working with local partners? Could we transfer the resource we spend on our CCG locality structures to the GP federations (and what is the real return on the investment of that money anyway?), against a set of outcomes and outputs that we want in return? Wouldn’t that, in fact, be modelling the future?

Immediately I can feel the unease growing around the dreaded conflicts of interest. How can we give GPs the responsibility to design something they will potentially benefit from as providers? It has been the bane of CCGs in recent years, and this could feel like a step backwards.

But isn’t is true that within an accountable care model of providers working together within a fixed envelope of money, some of those providers sat round the table will end up providing more, and some will end providing less? The prevailing wisdom suggests the likely shift is from secondary care into primary care (a shift the purchaser/provider system singularly failed to enact). The logic of the new system is that, for the new system to be successful, exactly what we fear from a conflict of interest perspective (general practice designing services that shift resources into primary care) is what is needed for the new system to succeed.

If we place the redesign resource for a system into a provider partnership that the GP practices are part (maybe a major part) of, then all we are doing is modelling the future. We have to unlock the creativity of front line clinicians working together to improve the lives of the populations they serve. We can’t do that if we bind them in bureaucracy.

Attempts to develop a contractual approach to overcome the potential conflicts issue (the dreaded ACO contract) has already proven unwieldy and time consuming, focussing energy on form and governance structures and away from the key challenge of making change. In our transition plans from the old system to the new we need to find a way of shifting the energy for redesign as early as possible to make it central to the new way of working.

We are wasting valuable GP resource in dual running a system we are winding down alongside the new system we are trying to put in place. We need to accelerate the shift from the old to the new. The longer we wait, the harder it will be to engage general practice in the new model, and the more disenchanted they will be with the old model as it is dismantled around them. If we don’t do this now, then when?

29
nov
0
Accountable Care Clinical Commissioning Part 1

Becoming a butterfly…Part One

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

General Practice and the Transition from Clinical Commissioning to Accountable Care – 1

The NHS is faced with something of a conundrum at present. We have the system of commissioners and providers as laid out in the legislation and statutory architecture, and the system of providers working together as laid out in the Five Year Forward View and STPs. The two are fundamentally different. The conundrum is how to manage the transition from one to another, without any legislation or mandated transition plan.

General practice sits at the very heart of this transition. The new models of care are based on the registered lists of GP practices, yet all the while it remains mandatory for these practices to be part of a CCG. We want GPs to (eventually, at a time yet undetermined) stop doing “commissioning”, and (immediately) to start doing “accountable care”. Unsurprisingly, the early lessons are that general practice needs to be involved in accountable care from the outset.

The transition has of course already started. STP leaders and teams are growing in number and power, and we are starting to see reductions in the number of CCGs and also in the number of CCG Accountable Officers, as CCGs increasingly share management teams. The overall system leaders are no longer exclusively commissioners, and they are grappling with how to make the transition from the existing system to the new one a reality.

At the heart of this transition is the shift of where what I would call the “energy for redesign” comes from. In a commissioner/provider split, the commissioner designs the pathways and ways of working and contracts each provider to deliver their part. Within an accountable care model, the providers work together to redesign the pathways and the interfaces between organisations and clinicians. For me, it is this shift of the energy for redesign from commissioners to providers that is critical to the success of the new system.

If we go back to why we wanted GPs involved in commissioning in the first place, it was because of their unique perspective on the wider healthcare system and how it impacted on their patients, and their ability to use this to drive change for their registered list. Is it any different with accountable care? I don’t think so. We are simply trying to harness the same insights, knowledge and experience within a different system. In truth, we are doing it because the commissioning system has not worked as the driver for the change that the NHS needs.

How, then, do we make this transfer of the energy for redesign from commissioners to providers a reality? How do we empower GPs to start to make the changes we wanted them to make in commissioning, but not through contracts but by building relationships with other providers?

Most places are encouraging the development of federations, or other at-scale general practice vehicles. These are then seen as the GP “providers”, and the sub-structures of commissioning groups, often called localities, are seen as the GP “commissioners”. We then try and talk accountable care and the future with the federations, and commissioning and business-as-usual with the localities. But this has three fundamental problems. First, we are halving the already limited GP capacity available by splitting it between the two. Second, engaging GP federations rather than practices and practice representatives in emerging models of accountable care (unintentionally) limits the general practice input to those activities the federation undertakes and often excludes core general practice. And third, the GPs who have built experience of working in partnership through their CCG work are left in the commissioning camp when they are desperately needed in the accountable care camp.

Dual running general practice as both commissioners and providers suits the system because of the complexity of the current situation, but we are not serving an already overstretched general practice well, and we are diluting the potential impact of the new system right from its very inception. Next time I will explore whether within the transition we can empower general practice to make a fuller shift to the new system earlier, without resorting to the bureaucracy and upheaval of the proposed ACO contract.

 

22
nov
0
Joining A Federation

Seven good (and seven bad) reasons to join a federation

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Joining federations is currently de rigueur in general practice. But is it right for everybody? For federation leaders, is it important that practices join for the right reason, or is it more important that as many practices as possible join? And for a system trying to push for general practice at-scale, does the underlying motivation of practices to work together matter, or should we be pursuing the goal of scale regardless?

As someone who has led a federation in the past, and now works with practices and federations up and down the country, my view is there are good and bad reasons for practices to join a federation. When federations form with practices joining for “good” reasons, federations can fly quickly. Initiatives can get off the ground rapidly, a powerful voice for general practice can be formed, and partners can find the group easy to do business with.

Conversely, when practices have joined a federation for the “bad” reasons, progress can be painfully slow. The group can be beset by internal arguments and in-fighting from the start. Gaining practice agreement for any, even minor, initiative can be extremely challenging and the leaders are often disconnected from their members; unable to speak with any real authority for them.

Here are my seven “good” and “bad” reasons to join a federation:

15
nov
0
Get Involved

How to get GPs involved in accountable care?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

It is one of the perennial challenges of NHS management – how do we engage the GPs? I remember when I was an NHS management trainee, in the days when GP fundholding was imminent but had not yet arrived. There was a look of fear in the hospital contract manager’s eyes, as he grappled with the prospect of engaging GPs, with no real clue of how to do it. Some STP meetings feel similar. We want GPs to be central to the whole process, but (ahem) as we look around the table, there are none to be seen.

It works the other way. GPs have previously been duped into participating in a whole raft of system initiatives, largely against their better judgement. Generally, if it works for them (e.g. fundholding) it gets taken away, or if it gives them any real power (e.g. CCGs) the power gets taken away, or if it has the promise of power (e.g. practice based commissioning) it turns out to be an illusion and built on sand.

Which leaves GPs facing the prospect of accountable care systems with an understandable lack of relish. Promises and reality have been so different over the years that scepticism seems like a reasonable starting point.

So how do you get GPs engaged? Professor Kotter, Harvard professor and one of the leading current thinkers on change, is clear the first (and most important) step is to create a sense of urgency. What he talks about is creating a clear reason, a rationale, for getting involved in the change, and why action is needed now. If you haven’t read his “penguin” book, Our Iceberg is Melting, I would highly recommend it.

There are potentially three ways to create a sense of urgency for GPs related to accountable care. The first is the current crisis engulfing GPs. Accountable care, and partnerships with other organisations, represent a potential way out for GP partners who no longer want to continue with the daily struggle of trying to keep up with ever increasing demand without the staff or resources to realistically cope. Certainly this has been one of the drivers in some of the vanguard areas.

In my closeted management world, a distinction is drawn between “towards goals” and “away-from goals”. Towards goals are ones like winning a medal at the Olympics, where individuals have a very clear picture of what they are trying to achieve and they use this picture to motivate everything they do in pursuit of that goal. Away-from goals are ones like wanting to change job because you hate your boss, where individuals don’t necessarily want the job they are going to, they just don’t want to remain in the situation they are currently in. You know where I am going with this. Towards goals work well, away-from goals do not (you end up in a different job that you hate equally), and using the crisis in general practice to motivate GPs to engage in accountable care is an away-from goal.

The second way is to draw out how the NHS world is changing, and how involvement in accountable care is the only real way for GPs to shape the environment they will operate in in the future. The voice of GPs through CCGs is getting lost as commissioners merge and align with STP areas. Despite assurances about where the core GP contract sits, the reality is accountable care includes all of what general practice does (not just the extra services the local federation provides), and the changes will include to a greater or lesser extent some aspects of how GPs are reimbursed.

This is a tough sell, largely because the default GP strategy of head down and wait for the wind to blow over has by-and-large worked for the last 70 years. Why will it be any different this time? Worse, there is no legislation to fall back on. At least with CCGs you could point to the Health and Social Care Act and the 1st April 2013 for CCGs taking on real responsibility. No such luck this time. But on the plus side, the threat of acute hospitals controlling primary care expenditure will corral many GPs into action.

The third way is to attempt what I describe as the Martin Luther King approach (“I have a dream…” etc.). In the true spirit of “towards goals”, we could start with an inspiring vision of what accountable care can do for our communities. What if we asked our local community what they really wanted from their health system, and what if we could work with our local partners to make their vision a reality. What if consultants, GPs, social workers and the voluntary sector could really work together to change the experience of diabetes or asthma or frailty (or all of them) in our area. Starting with the difference individuals wanted to make when they chose to become a GP and tapping into that may ultimately be both the hardest and most productive route to follow.

In the end, the contracts manager did what these days we often fail to do: he went out to all the practices, listened to what they had to say, built a relationship with them, and the hospital survived fundholding. There are no shortcuts for this. If we want to engage GPs in accountable care, whatever arguments or approach we want to take, we have to get out to the practices and talk to GPs about it.

8
nov
0

Guest Blog – Six Secrets to Active Signposting Success

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

In Episode 62 of the General Practice podcast (here) Nick Sharples explained Active Signposting; a system of non-medical telephone triage. In this guest blog Nick describes the six keys to successful implementation.

With the GP Forward View strategy now well established, many CCGs, GP Federations and individual Practices are seeking to commission training in the two High Impact Actions (HIA), for which NHS England has provided ring-fenced funding.

Active Signposting is one of these and has the potential to save up to 26% of GP consultation time if fully and effectively implemented. But how do you introduce Active Signposting in such a way that the potential savings are optimised? And what do you need to consider when commissioning such activity?

Here at DNA Insight we have identified six key elements of success:

  1. Preparation is Vital

Introducing Active Signposting brings a change to the way in which the Practice currently operates, and it will affect the entire Practice Community, albeit for the better. It is not just the training of the reception team that is important – but how the system is introduced to the whole team.

You or your training provider should consider:

  • The need, scope and creation of a Service Directory (start small and build over time)
  • The building of an EMIS or SystmOne template to allow signposts to be recorded and exported for analysis
  • The need for Red Flag Protocols to be articulated, written down and available to Receptionists
  • The need for the GPs or the Federation/CCG to decide which of the available alternative services (in-Practice or outside in the community) offer the most potential for early Signposting wins. These services should be amongst the first to be introduced but will almost certainly need some additional consultation to ensure they are ready for the increased flow of patients. (Where available, Pharmacy and MSK/Physio related services top the charts for delivering the greatest numbers of signposting opportunities.)

All of these activities can be developed concurrently while you are going through the procurement process for a training provider, but ideally, they should all be in place before the training of your Reception team starts. In that way, your Receptionists can train on scenarios that will be immediately relevant when the Signposting starts.

  1. Engage the Whole Practice Community

Active Signposting will not happen just because you’ve been on a course. GPs, Practice Managers, Clinical staff and external service providers such as Pharmacists and Physiotherapists all need to be engaged in the programme for the benefits to be realised.

The training programme offered by your provider should be bespoke to your specific needs. They should take time to understand the local dynamics of the Practice and the wider Federation or CCG within which it operates – customising the training accordingly, so that it is both relevant and valuable.

  1. Face to Face or Online?

Whilst some training works well when delivered remotely, in Active Signposting it is the face-to-face practice and the interaction with colleagues that goes a long way to making sure the techniques will be adopted on return to the Practice.

Trying out new techniques in a safe training environment, with a colleague on the end of the phone playing the role of the patient, provides the necessary self-confidence for Receptionists to introduce the techniques when they finish the training.

  1. Bring Everyone to the Training

Encourage your commissioners, Practice Managers and GPs to attend the training, alongside the Reception team. Such high level attendance not only empowers the Receptionists with the authority to apply the techniques they are taught, it also exposes managers and GPs to the realities of life behind the Reception desk.

If training budget is an issue, consider running a pilot with a complete practice team or several. This is far preferable to trying to spread the knowledge across the organisation by training a couple of Receptionists from each Practice, and then hoping that they will magically be able to train their colleagues when they get back. Whilst nice in principle, it almost never works in practice.

  1. Promote the Service to your Patient Community

Active Signposting is a Win-Win for all members of the Practice community, and the patients are no exception. Making them aware of the introduction of Active Signposting/Care Navigation will encourage them to share their symptoms with the Receptionists, which will allow a signpost to be offered.

One of the most effective ways to do this is for the senior GP to record a message on the front end of the Practice phone system encouraging patients to share their symptoms with the reception staff.

  1. Have a Formal Go Live Date

It’s not unusual in our experience for the training of the Reception team, and the separate but necessary preparation of the Service Directory, Data Collection template and consultations with chosen service providers, to get out of sync.

It is important however that all are in place prior to your ‘Go Live’ day. As the saying goes, “You never get a second chance to make a first impression”. With so many stakeholders involved and affected by the change, getting it right first time is essential.

DNA Insight provides support and training to GP Practices in Active Signposting, the Management of Medical Correspondence, Reducing Missed Appointments, and Quality Improvement & Leadership. These High Impact Actions are designed to transform General Practice as part of the NHS England’s GP Forward View strategy. Please contact us on 0800 978 8323, email info@dnainsight.co.uk or visit our website at www.dnainsight.co.uk.

18
oct
0

Collaboration in general practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The Nuffield Trust have published a new report[1] on how collaboration between GP practices has developed over the last 2 years. It is based on a survey of 565 GPs and practice based staff, and 51 CCG chairs and accountable officers. It makes for fascinating reading. But what can we learn from it?

The first point is the findings have been skewed slightly by the availability of funding for extended access to general practice, including recurrent funding from this year onwards. As a result, over half of collaborations made improving access one of their priorities, and it was also the highest ranked potential benefit. The access funding has not been available to individual practices, and even if it was few were keen to take it up. Consequently, it has ended up almost as a system lever to provoke more joint working between practices. The concern is that its success in that regard may lead to similar types of “incentives” in the future.

But that aside there is much to consider. I have two hypotheses about federations. The first is that the current crisis in general practice is driving collaboration between practices to support delivery at practice level. In the past, federations were primarily about transferring services to the community, but I would suggest this has changed to a focus on practice-sustainability over recent years.

Does this hypothesis stack up in light of these survey results? It would seem so. 67% of respondents identified improving the financial and organisational stability of practices as a potential benefit of collaboration, higher than the 53% who identified the transfer of services into the community.

But interestingly only 46% of respondents reported their collaboration had identified improving the financial and organisational stability of practices as a priority in 2016/17 (the exact same percentage who identified transferring services into the community).

Why might this be? If GPs and practices are joining federations to improve the stability of their own practice, why is there this discrepancy in the number of federations who then prioritise it? Other survey responses provide clues. Smaller collaborations, covering less than 100,000 population, were much more likely (47%) to have it as a priority than larger collaborations of 100,000 population plus (37%). And collaborations formed more than two years ago were more able to fully or partially achieve the aim of improving practice sustainability.

It is because the ability to improve practice sustainability requires trust. It requires practices to trust the federation enough to allow them to take control of parts of the business that have historically always been within their control, right through from ordering supplies to employing staff and managing their visits. Smaller groups of practices, and practices that have been working together for a longer period, are more likely to trust each other (because they know each other), and as a result encourage and enable the federation to take steps that might benefit them, even if it means ceding bits of control.

If federations really are going to make a difference to member practices then this journey of building trust is one they and their practices will need to go on together.

My second hypothesis is that federations are needed to ensure GP practices as providers have a voice in the emerging new models of care. Well at present, it would seem, GPs don’t agree, with less than 9% of respondents identifying it as a potential benefit of a collaboration, and an even lower percentage reporting it as one of their collaboration’s 2016/2017 priorities.

At the same time over half of GPs responded that general practice had been not at all influential in shaping their local Sustainability and Transformation Plan (STP).

Maybe GPs don’t see it as the federation’s role to represent them in discussions about new models of care. But if it is not the role of the federation, whose role is it? The GPs in the CCG have to go to great lengths not to be seen to be favouring practices over other providers in their role as local commissioners, so it can’t be them. LMCs are the only other option, and other providers do not see LMCs as a fellow-provider they can collaborate with in an accountable care set up. Like it or not, it has to be the federation.

In summary we have learned that clear financial drivers like the access funding can successfully drive collaborative working across practices. Practices want collaborative working to help them with the challenges they are facing, but the reality of making that happen is proving difficult. It relies on trust, which is a hard won and easily lost currency. And finally the need for practice leadership within the accountable care arena by federations is one that has not yet been fully recognised.

[1] Kumpunen, S. Curry, N. Farnworth, M. Rosen, R. (2017) “Collaboration in general practice: Surveys of GP practice and clinical commissioning groups” Nuffield Trust, Royal College of General Practitioners survey www.nuffieldtrust.org.uk/research/collaboration-in-general-practice-surveys-of-gp-practice-and-clinical-commissioning-groups

11
oct
0

Your Easy Guide to the Next Steps

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

This week’s post is a clear and simple guide to an important new direction for general practice…

 

 

4
oct
0

What does accountable care mean for general practice?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The NHS world is changing. I wrote last week about the impact of commissioning on general practice, and this week I consider what the move towards accountable care organisations and systems means for GPs and practices.

What is accountable care? The Kings Fund has helpfully described it as comprising of three core elements,

“First, they involve a provider or, more usually, an alliance of providers that collaborate to meet the needs of a defined population. Second, these providers take responsibility for a budget allocated by a commissioner or alliance of commissioners to deliver a range of services to that population. And third, ACOs work under a contract that specifies the outcomes and other objectives they are required to achieve within the given budget, often extending over a number of years.”

Rune reading, particularly in the NHS, is a difficult game. But all the signs point to accountable care organisations and systems (often used interchangeably to describe very similar arrangements) as the direction of travel. STP plans, NHS leaders and politicians are all making noises to suggest it is exactly where we are heading, despite the reticence to create new legislation with the disaster of the last NHS legislation so fresh in people’s minds.

If accountable care is where we are going, what does it mean for general practice? To help answer that, there are three further questions for us to consider.

1. What role will general practice play in an accountable care system?

Here the options appear to be threefold. General practice could choose simply not to engage. Indeed, some of the early accountable care pilots report engaging GPs to be one of their key challenges. The problem here is some of the budget for general practice will transfer from local commissioners to the accountable care system. If this is dominated by the acute hospital and other large provider organisations there is an obvious risk some funding streams will dry up.

Conversely, for accountable care systems seeking to deliver outcome rather than activity goals within a fixed funding envelope, international examples such as the Canterbury Health Board in New Zealand have shown the rate of growth of hospital activity can be moderated by investing in services in the community. There is opportunity for general practice within accountable care systems, meaning active engagement could well benefit the profession as well as the local population.

General practice could choose to play the role of “strong voice around the table”. It could ensure it is involved in accountable care system decision making, and almost take on an LMC type role to ensure risk to practices is minimised and funding streams are maintained and, where possible, developed.

Or it could attempt to play a leading role. Accountable care systems are very much at the developmental stage. There is no fixed blueprint for how they will look or how they will operate. Active leadership now could drive the evolution of these systems to ensure they are built around core general practice and the delivery of joined up and effective prevention and out of hospital care.

2. What scale will the accountable care system operate at?

Equally, the answer to this question is not clear yet. On the one hand we have the devolution project in Manchester creating an accountable care system spanning the whole of Greater Manchester. On the other, the primary care home (PCH) initiative is promoting accountable care for populations of 30-50,000.

In most places, size has not been determined. It may be that “layers” emerge, with smaller local areas where they exist (maybe PCH size) feeding in to larger areas (maybe acute hospital catchment area size), in turn feeding into even larger areas (whole STP size, a la Manchester). What “feeding into” in this context means is anybody’s guess.

For general practice, the scale chosen is likely to be important. If an accountable care system operates at acute hospital catchment area size, general practice would need to be well led and organised to be able to match the voice of its acute counterpart. At STP level, how does it prevent its voice being drowned out by the multitude of other big voices around the table?

Even operating at a locality or neighbourhood level of 30-50,000, practices will need to find a way of working well together and creating a strong single voice. To influence the scale at which accountable care operates locally practices will need to be involved at an early stage of the discussions. Once final decisions are taken, they will be hard to undo.

3.How will general practice build the relationships it needs to participate in accountable care?

It is clear a system reliant on collaboration between providers is going to be a challenge for general practice which is currently organised into nearly 8,000 individual business units. Practices will first and foremost need to build relationships with each other. Some practices are merging themselves into a size that means they will individually be ready. Some are forming federations. For others the currently existing CCG localities may provide a platform practices can build on. Key here is if practices want accountable care systems to work for them, as opposed to simply becoming their new masters, the ability to work effectively together is undoubtedly task one.

Equally, GP groups (whether it be large practices, federations, or localities) have to find a way of working together. Ultimately there is going to be one GP voice in an accountable care system. For that voice to be effective it will need to be unified. The acute trust, for example, will have a single, clear voice. If general practice cannot create the same level of cohesion, its voice will be diluted, and influence correspondingly diminished.

Finally, GP groups will need to be able work collaboratively with other providers. The aim is not that these systems become the fora within which providers fight each other for their share of the fixed amount of funding available. Rather, it is for barriers between organisations to be removed and for more effective ways of delivering care to be developed for patients. This requires productive relationships based on trust. For general practice it will require strong local leadership that practices believe in and are prepared to back when decisions are made – there will not be the time or opportunity for every decision to go back to each practice for a vote.

The overriding message for general practice is accountable care is coming. As such, practices may want to consider how they want accountable care to work locally, to identify what role they want to play in both shaping and delivering this future, and to reflect on how ready they are for this new system which has significant implications for the future of general practice.

27
sep
0

The impact of commissioning on general practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

At an appearance before the Commons Public Accounts Committee in February this year, Simon Stevens signalled the end of the purchaser provider split, indicating that the development of accountable care organisations by STPs would dissolve historical boundaries between commissioners and providers.

These boundaries were first established by the NHS and Community Care Act in 1990. Even then two types of “purchasers” were created: Health Authorities, and general practice through fundholding. Fundholding was abolished by Tony Blair and the new labour government in 1997. Instead, Primary Care Groups and then Primary Care Trusts emerged, with GPs given a voluntary role through practice based commissioning. This voluntary role became compulsory in 2013 with the establishment of CCGs.

The commissioner/provider split has always been an artificial one, particularly for general practice. It was introduced to create a healthcare market, based on the theory it would create value for money by purchasers shopping around for care provision. But the requirement to sustain existing providers, the creation of perverse incentives to increase activity, and transaction costs not being matched by innovation has led many, including it seems Mr Stevens, to the conclusion it just does not work.

The entire commissioning “experiment” has not served general practice well. Divisive at first (e.g. fundholding vs non-fundholding practices blamed for creating a two tier system for patients), a “primary care led NHS” became one of the mantras of the late 1990s and 2000s, using the public trust of GPs to soften the blow of a nominally left-wing government maintaining the internal NHS market. With the advent of CCGs, all practices were mandated to become part of the commissioning system. All practices were to become both providers and commissioners of care. Conflict of interest regulations were developed to manage this dual role, which became increasingly cumbersome over time. In turn, practices had to split their leadership resources, energy, focus and talent between these commissioner and provider roles.

This happened at a point where the profession (as providers) was plunging into crisis. Ironically, the boundaries between the commissioning and provision roles of GPs left them powerless to use their position as commissioners to ensure the required shift of resources into the provision of general practice actually took place.

And now the purchaser provider split is to end. What does this mean for general practice? Most obviously it means the role of local GP commissioners will be side-lined, to be replaced by providers working together in accountable care systems. However, this shift will evolve locally, meaning GPs will continue to expend effort, time and energy into commissioning, while providers develop a new future.   The artificial split between commissioning and provision enforced upon practices in 2013 is to be abandoned, but not yet.

General practice as providers, however, are to be included in the development of accountable care organisations. But not as individual practices. Instead they need some at-scale representation. Here general practice is at a real disadvantage. Some of its limited pool of leaders, talent and energy remain tied up in CCGs. At-scale organisations in some areas do not even exist, and in many areas are new, and not really able to partner as equals with established local hospitals and the like.

There are, however, opportunities. The capitated based budget systems for accountable care organisations may incentivise systems to strengthen general practice, and remove the incentives for growth in secondary care activity that the internal market has generated. The removal of the artificial commissioner/provider split for general practice is an opportunity for the profession to become “whole” again with a much clearer identity. And for all their ills, CCGs have enabled a cadre of GP leaders to gain system leadership skills over the last 4 or 5 years, that can be deployed by the profession within the new care delivery systems.

Making the most of these opportunities requires action. The world is changing quickly, and in many places general practice has been slow to respond. The cohesion of practices attempted (but often never really achieved) by CCG locality structures and the like needs to be delivered by practices themselves. A strong, single voice is required. Practices need to ensure they are around the STP and accountable care “table” as providers, represented by their best leaders. In some places it will need early decisions by GP leaders to move out of the commissioning arena to focus on provision.

The purchaser/provider split has not served general practice well, but it is coming to an end. It is time to draw a line under it, to focus time and energy solely on the provider role, and to build a strong future for general practice in the post-commissioning world. Lack of action now, however, could lead to a new (albeit different) set of problems that may pose a more fundamental challenge to general practice in the future.

20
sep
0

General Practice in 10 Years’ Time – Part 3

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

This is the third in the series of blogs where Ben asks the questions that he believes will shape the future of general practice. This week he asks

What Role Will Federations Play?

As with any look into the future, dipping into the past is a good place to start. Federations have changed significantly over the last ten or even twenty years. Post fundholding, and during the practice based commissioning years, federations were set up primarily to deliver services historically provided in hospital, in the community in order to generate an additional income stream for GPs and practices.

Since then, two things have materially impacted on the role of federations. First is the crisis that has engulfed general practice. Where federations historically operated at arm’s length from practices, they now have an important role in supporting member practices through the current challenges. This is a critical difference. It means the activities federations undertake are much closer to the delivery of core general practice e.g. visiting services, delivery of extended access, employing pharmacists and other new roles for practices. They have to work hard to ensure the cost of the additional layer of administration is offset by the value they bring to their members.

Second is the rise and fall of CCGs. At their inception they gave a powerful voice to general practice, as arbiters of how the NHS pound would be spent. No need, then, for federations to take on this role. Indeed, where they tried to assume this role, GPs were herded in and out of rooms to satisfy increasingly confusing conflict of interest requirements. But now power is shifting away from CCGs and away from commissioning. As CCGs get bigger, the local GP voice is getting smaller. As STPs and accountable care systems develop, the influence of general practice via commissioning continues to diminish.

Suddenly, we have a really clear role for federations: to support local practices to meet their current (and growing) challenges and to provide a strong voice for general practice as local systems move towards integrated models of working. Whereas in the past federations were something of an optional extra, it no longer feels like that. The challenges facing general practice and the wider integration agenda require an ability for practices to function coherently as a collective.

Federations provide that acceptable middle ground, where individual units can retain the independence and individuality they prize so highly, while at the same time gaining the benefits of joint working. They provide a vehicle for collective voice and collegiate working without necessarily requiring wide-scale restructuring into larger, formal organisations. Where trust levels grow between practices, and the ambitions for working together become greater, some are starting to move beyond loose federations into more formalised joint working arrangements, such as super practices.

Federations will play a key role in the development of general practice into the future. Where they are successful, owned by and adding value to practices while at the same time leading them through the integration agenda, they may well evolve into more formal partnership structures. Where leadership is weak and trust levels remain low, they may fall by the wayside, most likely to be taken over by more successful groups seeking to expand their footprint. Either way, we are already seeing well-developed federations able to play a leading role in local system integration plans. Moving forward, federations will have a critical role in both supporting the transformation of general practice into new sustainable ways of working, and shaping the role general practice plays within accountable care models and systems.

13
sep
1
General Practice in 10 years time

General Practice in 10 Years’ Time – Part 2

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

In the second of his blogs looking at the questions that will determine the future of general practice Ben asks

At What Scale Will General Practice Operate?

I find the answer “general practice needs to operate at greater scale” often precedes the question. Indeed, in many cases there is no sign of a question, it is simply presented as a statement of fact, as though 70 years of effective working at the current scale counts for nothing and there is no need to even make a case to support the statement.

As I have previously been at pains to point out, scale does not, of itself, automatically generate benefits for general practice. We only need to look at the graveyard of federation failures to know this to be true. Equally, the Nuffield Trust report “Is Bigger Better?” found instances where the quality of general practice reduced with increased size.

The authors of that report ultimately felt scale was better for general practice, but only where it is led by high quality leaders who understand the value general practice provides and work hard to preserve it. I have been fortunate enough through the podcast to be able to discuss with some of those leaders the rationale that sat behind their move to scale. What is striking is how different those rationales are. This is important, as it means there is not a single basis for general practice operating at scale. Further, it is the rationale for operating at scale that ultimately determines the answer to the question of at what scale general practice should operate.

There are seemingly two ends of the spectrum. At one end, the question is, “how do we create the efficiencies, voice and shared infrastructure to preserve and strengthen independent general practice”? This, for example, is broadly the question the super-practice Our Health Partnership (OHP) is seeking to answer.

They believe the optimum population coverage for their model is c500,000. This is based on each member practice contributing £2 per head, which creates a £1m budget to fund a management team. This is the size they believe is necessary to deliver real value. What is impressive about the model is it is maintaining a focus on working for the member practices (efficiencies), while at the same time creating a strong position within the local STP (voice).

At the other end of the spectrum, proponents of NAPC’s primary care home model advocate strongly for a population size of 30-50,000. Here the question is, “How can general practice really understand and best meet the specific needs of local communities, and retain and build on the sense of belonging that local communities have”? They believe if general practice operates beyond that size it cannot maintain the personal relationships fundamental to its success. Local needs vary so much that a service providing an average of the needs of two communities is in fact not meeting the needs of either.

Of course these two perspectives are not mutually exclusive. OHP want to build their organisation around specific geographical localities. Nav Chana, GP Chair of the NAPC, is clear a bigger population size might be required to create the infrastructure needed for these individual primary care home sites to deliver.

Futures are journeys not destinations. Beacon Medical Group is a great example of a practice on a journey. Already at 30,000, they have plans to scale significantly beyond that. But they understand what is important about general practice is continuity of care, and the ability for local areas to tailor services to the needs of their local population. So as they grow they are building on units of around 30,000, each with some degree of local freedom. Imposing a one size fits all operating model is not, in their view, going to work, even within a single practice.

General practice may be heading to a place where it operates at a large scale (over 100,000 population, maybe higher than 500,000) to create the new infrastructure it requires, while at the same time finding a way to retain some level of autonomy at individual locality level (30-50,000 population). But this concept of the journey, like the one that OHP and the Primary Care Home sites and Beacon Medical Group are all on, is the one that Rebecca Rosen and the authors of the “Is Bigger Better?” report believe to be critical. The most important question is not what size general practice is going to be, but rather how it is going to get there.

If you’d like to find out more about the future of general practice and meet some of the key voices in contemporary general practice (including Mark Newbold from OHP, Nav Chana Chair of the NAPC and Jonathan Cope from Beacon Medical Group) then why not buy a ticket to our first General Podcast LIVE event? For more information including a full programme and how to buy tickets visit our website here.

6
sep
0
General Practice in 10 years time Part 1

General Practice in 10 Years’ Time – Part 1

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

This is the first in three linked blogs where Ben poses three questions that, taken together, will paint a picture of the future of general practice. In this blog the question is:

Will General Practice Remain Independent?

When thinking about what general practice will look like in ten years’ time, one of the questions that immediately springs to mind is whether it will remain independent. Will general practice (finally) become a full-blown part of the NHS, or will it continue in its current peculiar position of half in and half out.

First off, what does independence mean? While the average person on the street considers general practice to be an integral part of the NHS, the description of general practice as independent comes because practices (in the vast majority of cases) are not run by NHS organisations, but by independent organisations (usually GP partnerships) that contract with the NHS.

Is this just a technical difference? Well not really. It means GP partners can choose what they do, which contracts they will enter into, and which they won’t. They can invest in property, form partnerships, decide on their staffing model, and choose how they will operate. They are bound by the constraints of the contracts they enter into, and more recently by CQC regulations, but they retain a level of autonomy and freedom of decision making not available to those working more directly within the NHS.

The opportunity for practices to give up this independence has become much more real recently, since the publication of the GP Five Year Forward View and the emergence of the new models of care. These new models provide what is described as a “fully integrated” option whereby practices can transfer their contract into the new multispecialty community providers (MCPs) or primary and acute care systems (PACS), and the GPs can become salaried employees within the new larger organisations.

Will practices take this opportunity to give up their independence, and if so why? On the podcast, I have asked this question to some of those involved in the new models of care. They explain some will, and the primary reason is the pressure general practice is currently under. For some the workload, financial and leadership pressures have become too great, and focussed on too few individuals. When presented with a way out, they are eager to take it.

For other GPs there is more of a strategic sense that general practice cannot continue on its own. They feel that to thrive into the future and to best serve local communities, general practice needs to work as part of a wider team. They see the future of general practice as no longer being small, independent businesses, but instead operating within a new style of NHS organisation that harnesses the benefits of full membership of the NHS (indemnity, VAT exemption etc), of scale and of fully integrated clinical teams.

But large organisations in the NHS do not have a strong track record of maximising the benefits of scale, of enabling effective multi-disciplinary working or of innovating around the needs of patients. If GPs have learnt anything from the rise and fall of CCGs, it is that the statutory world of NHS stifles rather than enables, creates bureaucracy rather than removes barriers, and controls rather than empowers.

As a result, some prize the independence of general practice much more highly, and are much less willing to give it away. Our Health Partnership (OHP) is a “super practice” with a population of over 200,000 that aims to demonstrate it is possible for independent general practice to thrive into the future, by operating at greater scale. What they, and others like them, are already showing is the choice to remain independent or not is real for general practice, and while changes might be necessary to preserve it, there is certainly no inevitability it will be taken from them.

To thrive into the future, general practice has to change. While some cling to the status quo as a “tried and tested strategy”, the reality of the changed political, social and economic environment is change is necessary. General practice has to operate at greater scale, to manage risk, deliver greater efficiencies, build partnerships and have a strong system voice. But independence is something general practice can choose to keep. Whether or not it will do so I suspect will largely depend on how actively it works at redesigning itself, or the extent to which it allows the system to determine its future form.

If you’d like to find out more about the future of general practice and discuss these issues and many others with Ben and a range of expert GPs then why not buy a ticket to our first ever General Podcast LIVE event next March. You can find all the relevant information and book your ticket here.

30
aug
0

The Future of General Practice – Have Your Say

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Here at Ockham Healthcare, the question we have been giving most thought to is what the future of general practice will be.

We asked Mark Newbold what he thought the biggest change to general practice would in the next 10 years. Find out what he said here. We will be asking the same question to a whole range of people over the next 6 months, in an attempt to build a picture from a variety of perspectives as to what the future will hold.

We also want to ask you the question. We want you to be part of the debate. We want to know what you think the future of general practice will look like in 10 years’ time. Do you think independent general practice will still exist? If not, what do you think will be in its place? Will the role of the GP have changed, and if so what will they be doing? Will technology have transformed the way patients and GPs interact? Will the registered list even still exist on a local basis? Will we have moved all the way to 10 or 20 large providers of general practice? Or will the profession have been subsumed within acute hospitals, community trusts and the nascent accountable care organisations? Or will it be exactly the same as it is now?

These are important questions. Each practice is regularly faced with decisions about its future. GPs have to determine how much autonomy to give up to federations and networks, and how much to retain for themselves. Commissioners have to choose how to invest the GP Forward View money in general practice for best effect. Everyone has to work out how to cope with the falling numbers of GPs.

A clear vision of the future will help. At present, there isn’t one. If general practice knows where it is going, it is more likely to be able to control its own destiny, to make the right decisions today that will impact tomorrow, and to build for the future instead of protecting the past.

Be part of the conversation. Tell us what you think. We literally want to hear your voice. You can do this in a number of different ways. Either record your views on your phone or ipad or computer, and send the MP3 file to me, Ben Gowland, at ben@ockham.healthcare, or we can set up a 5 min Skype call where we can record what you think, or just email me and we will work out a way to do it!

We will be bringing all of the different thoughts and thinking together at our conference in March next year. Get involved now, so that we can shape the future together!

23
aug
0

What is the Future of General Practice?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

We all have questions about the future of general practice. In his latest blog Ben discusses some of these key conundrums and introduces an exciting opportunity where you could be involved in developing some of the answers…

What is the future of general practice? What will it look like? Will we still have local GP practices? Will GPs continue to do what they are doing now? These are big questions, and probably ones we don’t spend enough time thinking through.

For most of us, general practice has always been there. It is one of only two fixed points of our health service (along with hospitals). I have met many GPs who describe themselves as being on a ship that is sinking, and they can’t see any way that disaster can be averted (other than a serious investment of funding, which seems unlikely in this economic environment and with this government). They urge each other to get off the ship (Australia, retirement, locum), and as a result the number of GPs is falling, despite best efforts to increase it by 5000.

The fixed nature of the GP practice means it can be hard to envisage a new future for the service. I have previously argued that general practice requires more than incremental change at the individual practice level, and that a more radical transformation is needed. But what will the nature of this transformation be? We know what we need to change from, but what we need to change into is less clear.

There are different views about the future. I have met some who are 100% certain that scale is the answer to general practice. They talk about it as being self-evident (which isn’t an argument), and say it with such conviction that many go along with them without careful questioning. I have talked about the potential benefits of operating at scale (essentially: lower costs; higher income; ability to manage demand; and readiness for the future), but have always been clear that these benefits are not automatic, and that they only come by making the changes not possible at a smaller scale.

If big really is the answer, then how big? Here we do have a divergence of answers. The primary care home model is clear that populations of 30-50,000 are what is needed. But on the other hand, Mark Newbold, Managing Partner of super practice Our Health Partnership, recently told me that the full benefits of scale required a population of over 400,000. Now, those two models are looking at two different things – the former is about redesigning local care, and the latter about reducing costs (broadly) – but just the diversity of answers to the “how big” question makes the future feel more complicated than simply “bigger”.

Some are adamant that new models of care are the answer. One GP was clear with me on Twitter recently, “ACO/MCP are the future of NHS and community care. Call them what you want but GP HAS to be core and influential within them”. In episode 66 of the General Practice Podcast Tracey Vell, LMC lead in Manchester and intimately involved with the development of the ACO there, started to describe how general practice would look differently within the new models of care. In this scenario, scale is needed primarily for practices to be able to partner with the rest of the system.

And what about the impact of technology? How long will it be before we no longer go to the doctor, but the doctor (virtually) comes to us? We are now tiptoeing over the boundaries between health and social care, through the introduction of social prescribing and the like – is that just the beginning? Will surgeries develop from health centres into something more akin to community centres? Has the general practice practitioner already been replaced by the general practice team? How will the shortage of GPs shape the future of the primary care model?

These are all questions we are going to be discussing in our first ever live event. We are bringing together some of the most interesting guests (see the Programme here) we have had on the podcast to learn from their different experiences of re-shaping general practice, often in very different ways, and to debate what the future of general practice will look like and how it will develop.

If you are interested in understanding what the future of general practice will look like, how we will get there, and in contributing directly to the debate then register for this conference today. The future of general practice remains uncertain, but this is a chance to develop a compelling and coherent view of what that future will be.

16
aug
0

What the new ACO contract means for general practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

It appears NHS England have gone cold on Accountable Care Organisations with the publication of the latest guidance. But what might the new draft contract mean for general practice and what should interested GPs consider doing next? Ben Gowland works his way through the tangle of documents and suggests some of the answers.

NHS England have recently published an updated version of the MCP contract, now termed an Accountable Care Organisation or ACO contract. As ever with NHS England, there are an inordinate number of documents, all of which are inexplicably difficult to find on their website (here). I discussed the original publication of the draft MCP contract in detail previously, and would strongly recommend you take a look at this to understand the key components of the different versions of the model (the “virtual”, the “partially integrated” and the “fully integrated” MCP) and their implications for general practice. In this article I will focus on what is different or has changed in the new publication.

The most noticeable shift is the overall drop in enthusiasm the documents display for the new models. Where previously you had the sense that those producing the documents believed ACOs to represent the next step for the NHS that is now no longer the case. Instead, it has become clear that Accountable Care Systems (ACS’s) are the new black, and ACOs may instead be something of a distraction. Take this paragraph for example, ‘ACO procurements are lengthy and complex, and the development of ACOs relies on a strong underlying approach to care design, engagement and collaboration. For these reasons, most parts of the country are looking to become ACSs before they consider whether to introduce ACOs for some or all of their local population.’

An ACS, for those not familiar with the concept, ‘is an evolved version of an STP, potentially covering a sub–set of an STP’s geography, in which commissioners and providers, in partnership with Local Authorities, take explicit collective responsibility for resources and population health. In return, they will gain greater freedom and control over the operation of their local health system and how funding is deployed’. ACS’s can cover large areas relatively quickly, do not require contractual or legal changes, and represent the quickest route for the NHS out of the current purchaser provider split. ACOs must demonstrate ‘consistency with STP/ACS plans for the future’, and, just so that we are clear, ‘In most places, we expect that ACS development will precede the development of ACOs in order to lay the right foundations.’

The shift from “MCP” to “ACO” has come about whilst previously the draft contract applied only to MCPs, with a separate contract promised for the PACS models, now the contract ‘is usable for accountable care models generally, including MCP and PACS models’. A sceptic might think that given the shift of focus towards ACS’s, and the lack of traction generally for the PACS model, that centrally it was not deemed worth the effort to fulfil the initial promise of a separate PACS contract.

Nevertheless, there have been some interesting developments in the iteration from the original draft. There is confirmation that activity sub-contracted from the ACO to practices will be pensionable. The fully integrated model no longer relies on APMS directions, replaced by less prescriptive directions that offer more local freedom. GPs can sell their premises to the MCP, ‘where the MCP has the capital to buy the property and there is clear value for money’. GPs may be able to buy in as partners or owners of MCPs, but given the cost that is needed to cover (amongst other things) the downside risk of the contract I would suspect it will be beyond the reach of most individuals.

Much has been made in the GP press of the changes to GP practices’ “right to return” (from the fully integrated model back to the original GMS/PMS contract), whereby the patients will not necessarily follow the contract (you can have your contract back but not your list). What it actually says is, ‘If the GP reactivated in the first two years of the ACO Contract the default would be that patients previously on their registered list follow the GP to be re-registered with the practice. If they reactivate after these first two years the patients will remain with the MCP unless they request to follow the GP.’ In reality this means the practice has to decide whether or not it is going to stay or leave within the first two years.

Not all GP practices in the same area have to go down the same route, ‘It’s important that individual GPs have a choice and do not feel pushed into a particular contractual model because it is preferred by the majority. In many of the emerging MCP localities GPs are expressing interest in a range of contractual models in the same locality.’ I assume this is an attempt to move at the pace of the enthusiasts rather than be hampered by those resisting change, but I am not sure how well it will serve general practice going forward to end up in this type of mixed economy.

This version of the ‘GP participation in an MCP’ document is littered with examples and case studies of benefits existing areas have achieved or foresee. I suspect this is in an attempt to make what is essentially a very dry document into something more accessible to GPs. However, the lingering sense left by these is that the majority of the benefits highlighted can be delivered through practices working together, and so do not directly encourage GPs to take the radical step of joining an ACO. It would make sense if they were benefits that could only be achieved as part of an ACO, but by and large this is not the case.

At the same time there a strong reference in the documents to the emerging primary care home model, ‘All accountable models build on strong primary care foundations. In many Vanguards the model is based on local units of integrated primary care provision serving natural communities of 30–50,000 population.’ I think this is an important statement for GP practices trying to find a way through all of this. If ACO development is uncertain whilst Accountable Care Systems come to the fore, and the many of the purported benefits can be delivered by working with others, then developing a clear focus on a local population and building effective working relationships with the other local practices (in whatever form that might take) might be the most pragmatic step for practices to take right now.

9
aug
0

Navigating the podcast: Introducing new roles

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Every week here at Ockham Healthcare we publish a new episode of the General Practice podcast, in which I interview people introducing new ways of working into general practice. Now with over 18 months of episodes in the podcast library there are a whole range of different case studies and individuals to choose from. As a result, the most relevant episode may be increasingly difficult to find. We have introduced a podcast index, but we wanted to create some more useful “maps” to help you find the most relevant episode for you. This week I take a look at where to find the best information about introducing new roles into general practice.

Where do you start? A helpful place is in our recent podcast with Dr Stewart Smith (Episode 75) from St Austell Healthcare. He describes how when thinking about introducing new roles their practice started by undertaking an audit of everything the GPs were doing that could potentially be done by someone else. New roles are not a luxury item in general practice. They are necessary because GP recruitment is becoming increasingly difficult (in some places impossible!), and as the workload becomes increasingly unmanageable new roles are necessary just for practices to remain sustainable. Stewart and his team used the results of the audit to identify locally what work could be taken off the GPs, and who could undertake it.

The headline new roles in general practice are paramedics (Charmi Rogers, Episode 23) who can support GPs with managing the urgent demand as well as undertaking home visits, pharmacists (Karen Acott, Episode 15, and Ravi Sharma, Episode 5) who can undertake medication reviews and run their own clinics, and physiotherapists (Neil Langridge, Episode 17) who can help with the high volume of patients presenting with joint pain. All of these can make a real difference to GP workload, while at the same time improve the quality of care for specific groups of patients.

Also on the rise are physician associates or “PAs”. Initially met with some resistance by the profession (seen as under-qualified for the challenges of general practice) they are now increasingly being welcomed by practices, because of the more general support they can provide to GPs. We ran a podcast mini-series in which I spoke to GP Dr Joanna Munden (Episode 52) about her experience of employing PAs, to Ria Agarwal and Andy King who are PAs working in GP practices about what it is like from their perspective (Episode 40), and to the RCP’s PA lead Jeannie Watkins (Episode 43) who explained that while there may not be many PAs around at present, the pipeline means they will be much more plentiful in a few years’ time.

What Stewart Smith’s audit also found was that it is not just on the clinical side that GP time can be saved. We spoke to Jonathan Serjeant (Episode 46) about how training administrative staff to manage GPs’ post can save each GP half an hour or more a day, and to Nick Sharples (Episode 62) about how work can be triaged away from GPs by trained receptionists in what is known as “active signposting”.

One of the reasons Stewart, and Jonathan Cope at Beacon Medical Group (Episode 57), are worth listening to is because they describe how these different roles can be brought together into one practice, and harnessed to redesign the way on the day appointments are managed, visits are carried out, in fact the way the whole practice operates. I also provide an overview of some of the wider lessons I have gleaned from talking to the experts about the introduction of new roles (Episode 32).

I hope this serves as a useful map to the podcast for those of you seeking more information about the introduction of new roles. If there is any individual role, or aspect of the introduction of new roles that we have missed, or that you think we could cover in more detail, do let me know (ben@ockham.healthcare) and we will try and include it as a future episode!

2
aug
0

Kaizen vs Kaikaku: Does general practice need big bang or incremental change?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Before I moved into the world of general practice, I used to live in the world of service improvement. It was a strange world, with its own language, traditions and practices. I kind of liked it, and look back on it fondly sometimes as you would when you remember a great place you once visited, like that trip to Sydney in 2003 when England won the rugby world cup, where they put beetroot on their burgers and thought calling me “blue” was hilarious on account of my red hair.

Anyway, in the service improvement world there is an ongoing debate about which type of change is best: should you go for small-scale continuous improvements, or a big bang change? In the world of general practice we are now facing the same question: can we adapt the existing model of general practice through incremental improvements into something different, or is a more radical approach required? Evolution versus revolution.

In the improvement world they use the terms “kaizen” (for evolutionary incremental improvement) and “kaikaku” (for revolutionary radical improvement). In the GPFV, high impact action number 10 is; “Develop quality improvement expertise”. Some believe this is the most important of all the actions because it gives practices a mechanism for making the other changes successfully. It includes techniques such as “plan, do, study act cycles” (or “PDSA cycles”) which encourage rapid cycles of testing of changes to enable successful adoption. This, and the techniques like it, are based firmly in the kaizen school of incremental improvement.

I have recently questioned whether the GPFV is failing to have the desired impact because it is trying to tackle each of the problems individually, rather than creating a clear vision for the future. A number of responses have challenged this, suggesting in particular that if all of the 10 high impact actions were implemented in a single practice that in itself would constitute our required vision.

But would it? If every practice implemented each of the 10 high impact actions, in a structured, incremental way, would the current problems of general practice be over? Certainly life would be better, but would it be enough?

Where they got to in the improvement world is that it is not an either/or. Big bang change is needed to break paradigms and elevate the awareness of people to a higher level of understanding. It is needed in addition to continuous improvement, not instead of it. While some problems can be solved by incremental improvement, others do require radical improvement to start with.

The challenge facing general practice is such that I don’t believe incremental improvement on its own will be sufficient. It needs kaikaku as well as kaizen. While the 10 high impact actions are an important part of the transformation needed in general practice, they are not the totality of it. I understand the GPFV is more than the 10 high impact actions, but if they are the element that provide the vision of the future, my contention remains they are not enough and a more radical transformation is needed.

26
jul
0

Is the Primary Care Home the “answer” for general practice?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Recently I have been wondering if we have been going about tackling the challenges in general practice all wrong.

We have been focussing on the problems practices are experiencing now, and trying to systematically tackle them one by one. Logical. But it assumes the cuts are only superficial, and once they are patched up individually general practice will be well.

The General Practice Forward View (GPFV) approach is to identify each of the issues general practice is facing, and to come up with “answers” for all of them. So for example workforce is the issue and 5000 more GPs is the answer. Or infrastructure is the issue and the ETTF (estates and technology transformation fund) is the answer. Or workload is the issue and contract changes to stop secondary care increasing general practice workload is the answer.

You could argue the real issue is underfunding, and that more money is the answer. But despite the rhetoric, there never was an extra £2.4bn for general practice (see here for more detail). In 2016/17 not only was funding flat (taking into account inflation), growth was half that received by acute trusts. We operate in the system we operate in.

But whether or not the “answers” are working individually, they certainly are not working collectively. I don’t think it is a failure of implementation. Rather, the approach was wrong in the first place. Wrong because it started with the problems, not the strengths of general practice. It started with individual challenges, rather than a compelling vision of the future. And it started with the premise of offering more within a system that cannot offer any more.

Compare this with the NAPC’s primary care home initiative. I knew quite a lot about it, but what I couldn’t quite comprehend was how it helps general practice meet its current challenges. I spoke recently to Dr Nav Chana, Chair of NAPC, and asked him about this. What I learnt from that conversation was the starting point of the primary care home is not so much the sustainability of the current organisational infrastructure of general practice, but a desire to improve the health of local populations, to bring increasingly fragmented workforces together, and to put the control of resources for that population into one place.

What that then means for GP practices as organisations they don’t know yet. What they do know is they are building on the strengths general practice currently has, they are making the service attractive to those who work there again, and that by focussing on meeting the needs of the local population the most appropriate future form of general practice will emerge.

It makes sense. A model that meets the needs of a defined local population will solve recruitment problems because it will attract staff to work there, will solve financial challenges because it will attract investment and funding, and will solve workload issues by different staff groups all working effectively as an integrated team.

Of course it will need help to get there. But by using a future focussed and population centred approach, the primary care home initiative has much more chance of providing general practice with a realistic route out of its current malaise than the backward looking, issue based approach of the GPFV.

 

19
jul
0

What GPs should consider if they are thinking about partnership

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

If you are a GP who is thinking about becoming a partner, what questions should you ask to be sure you are making the right decision? In this guest blog (his third for Ockham) mergers expert Robert McCartney introduces a checklist of things you should consider to help you make the right choice. You can download and print off the checklist following the link beneath the blog.

We undertake a lot of work assisting practices in developing plans for the future and redesigning systems which strengthen general practice. However, much of this work is undermined by the simple fact that there are insufficient numbers of GPs willing to be partners.

Exploring this with a range of junior, salaried and locum GPs it has become evident that the biggest issue is a lack of understanding about the potential benefits and opportunities partnership still offers.

Work must continue to tackle the issues facing general practice but, at the same time, we need to highlight the positive side and help develop the vision of what general practice could look like if the independent contractor status is secured for future generations.

Feedback highlights that potential GP partners do not know what questions to ask to make an informed choice about the opportunities within practices. The checklist, which we have made available below, has been produced to help those GPs considering partnership for the first time. It is not a complete list but should help structure your thoughts around the type of information you need to know before agreeing to invest in the practice.

As a general point it is recommended that you obtain support and advice throughout the process. The local LMC and trusted GP partners will be able to assist you in identifying when an opportunity is suitable for you.

Entering partnership includes accepting a degree of responsibility for the management and running of the business and you should therefore invest in gaining some simple business skills. It is not necessary to enter onto a MBA course but finding suitable sessions on understanding accounts, HR responsibilities and the principles of leadership will all help you once you enter partnership.

When you are considering the list remember that the final decision will also come down to whether you feel the ‘fit is right’. The culture, relationships and general environment of the practice must suit you or have the ability to develop with you over time. The empirical data collated will give you confidence that you understand the practice but only through spending time and talking with all members of the practice will you be able to make an informed decision.

Download the checklist here.

Robert is Managing Director of McCartney Healthcare Associates Limited. He is an expert on practice mergers and this is the third in a short series of blogs he has written for Ockham Healthcare. If your practice needs a helping hand with its fledgling relationships, you can contact Robert via e-mail at rm@mccartneyhealth.co.uk or call 0203 287 9336.

12
jul
0

Guest Blog – GP Partnership: A Salaried GP’s view

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Last week Ockham Healthcare hosted an event in central London looking at the rise and fall of the GP partnership model with the aim of encouraging GPs and trainee GPs to consider becoming partners (more information here and a video of the event is available here). One of the attendees was salaried GP Camille Gajria from London who, in a guest blog for us this week, summarises the event and outlines the messages she will be taking away.

On the eve of the NHS’ 70th year, Ockham Healthcare held a live panel event for GPs considering partnership.

GPs chose to be independent contractors when the NHS started. This has often enabled innovation and healthcare tailored to the local population. Although there have been trends towards and away from partnership over the years, currently unprecedented numbers of practices are becoming unviable and closing. So why would anyone want to be a partner now?

Dr Mayur Vibhuti, a GP partner and GP trainer opened by explaining that his role allows him to make tangible improvements to the health of his community. It was interesting to hear how a 7000-patient practice is thriving given the political thrust to work at scale.

Robert McCartney, who runs a primary care mergers consultancy, described practices as community hubs which will always be needed, particularly for people with long-term conditions.

Ockham Healthcare Director, Ben Gowland laid bare the responsibility, risks, and rewards of running a business, including the fact that if the profession became entirely salaried there would be even less control over various aspects of work. He gave a frank explanation on premises and equity- the market shows that GP property is a valuable commodity due to notional rent not being dependent on outcomes, and should ideally be owned by the business. An Ockham podcast published on 10 July has more detail on this.

When choosing a practice, the panel emphasised the importance of finding one with values appropriate to one’s own, identifying risks the practice may be due to face, their plans for the next 5-10 years, and how well they understand their income and expenditure (e.g. do they know at what list size an extra clinical session becomes viable). One point I had previously not considered when looking for a partnership is to assess the relationship with the locality- if one practice is struggling, there would be effects on the others, such as a sudden, unsustainable increase in list size.

There was discussion about how to gain requisite skills for partnership, and where to source help.

The session was expertly chaired by Nish Manek, the National Medical Director’s Clinical Fellow and Teshseen Khan, a Population Health Fellow at NHS Lambeth CCG. They asked and fielded probing questions, both from live and virtual viewers. It was refreshing to have an open discussion about these topics in relation to the current state of general practice, with a diverse and knowledgeable panel and audience.

GPs as independent contractors have been the foundation of the NHS and led innovation throughout its history.  Rather than necessarily having to change models to make partnership more attractive, I left feeling GPs need to be conversant with politics, finance, and management, so that we make informed decisions about our roles and the services we run for patients.

 

5
jul
0

Becoming a GP partner – your questions answered

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

This week’s “blog” is, in fact, a video of last night’s (4th July) live event where an expert panel answered questions on GP partnership. The panel consisted of Ockham Healthcare founder and Director, Ben Gowland, Dr Mayur Vibhuti a GP partner and GP trainer and GP practice mergers expert Robert McCartney. Taking questions from a live audience plus those tweeted in from across the country, the panel discusses the idea of GP partnerships in today’s highly challenged environment for general practice. Should GPs become partners? What makes a good partnership? Should partners own their own premises? What are the risks? How does a partner achieve change with a group of difficult partners? These questions and many more are addressed in this highly topical and unique event…

28
jun
0

General practice at the precipice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

According to a recent article, in as many as 1500 practices (nearly 20% of all practices) the partners are earning less than the salaried doctors. If this is true (and I have no reason to suspect it is not), then it means the business model that has served general practice for so many years has finally run its course.

If salaried GPs earn can earn more than partners, without the responsibility, risk or workload of being a partner, then there is very little incentive for GPs to become partners. Instead there is a strong incentive for existing partners to become salaried.

But the existing business model requires partners in order to continue. If all GPs choose not to be partners, no one is left running the business. The obsessive focus on the total number of GPs is blinding us to the critical demise in the number of GP partners.

There are two schools of thought as to how this developing crisis should be handled. One is to take the line that GP practices are in fact private businesses, and that the NHS should leave it to the market to resolve the challenges of ownership. If GPs no longer want to run their own businesses, then let’s see who does. This will leave us with a smorgasbord of private providers (Virgin and the like), acute trusts (building on the example in Wolverhampton where the acute trust is now running a number of practices via APMS contracts), community trusts (like the Willow Group, in Gosport, Hampshire), general practice “chains” (such as Modality and Lakeside), alongside general practice operating within the new MCPs and PACS of the new models of care.

Is this the future we want? Attempts to introduce a market to the NHS have not impressed to date, and it is hard to believe this diaspora of provision will serve the population well, and provide a solid foundation for the delivery of transformed out of hospital care.

The second school of thought is that there should be some form of intervention. This would require a clear definition of what current/future sustainable general practice looks like, including the business delivery model, and support provided for this to be delivered. We change the model of general practice in order to make partnership attractive again.

The impact of the GPFV has been limited because it has lacked a clear vision for the future of general practice. It has shied away from defining what the future needs to look like – presumably in an attempt to preserve the autonomy of practices (or even the market) – and has not been brave enough in its delivery of support (practices can choose the bits of support they want from whom they want etc).

This is in stark contrast to the Midlands Health Network in New Zealand. Their response to the challenges facing general practice was a to create a very clear model of care, that included patient call centres, a different skill mix, use of technologies, and improvements to the business model. They recognised the management skills in practice were primarily in operations rather than in transformation, and so they provided support to their member practices to introduce the changes over a six month period.

Helen Parker, one of the local leaders, describes this process in more detail here. They called the programme the Health Care Home and practices have to graduate to become a Health Care Home (they can’t simply decide to be one). The programme is systematically creating a sustainable future for the member practices.

The current model of general practice is at the precipice and hanging on by its fingernails, and it won’t be long before it lets go altogether. Carrying on the way we are now is a default decision to allow the market to decide the future form and structure of general practice. Instead, action is urgently required to create our own version of the Health Care Home, to support practices to implement it, and to preserve and strengthen the general practice service that forms the cornerstone of our NHS.

21
jun
0

Get the skills to support primary care collaboration

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

14
jun
0

Guest Blog – My Introduction to Collaborative Working

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Liz Carter is a Locality Manager for NHS Horsham and Mid Sussex CCG. In a guest blog this week she writes about her experiences in trying to develop collaborative working between practices in Haywards Hearth and Burgess Hill – and how she was supported by Ben Gowland and the Ockham Healthcare approach…

I joined both the NHS and Horsham and Mid Sussex CCG in September 2016, having spent most of my working life as a Partnership Manager in a Local Authority. I was to be the new Locality Manager for Haywards Heath and Burgess Hill. At first, I was keen to get started on introducing the Primary Care Home / primary care at scale approach to Haywards Heath and Burgess Hill.

The plan seemed simple enough: bring groups of practices together (with a combined population of between 30,000 – 50,000) and enable them to work collaboratively to address the health needs of the local area.   The practices would benefit from the potential to address common workforce and capacity issues, share best practice, and look at how the new extended access requirements could be met.   The plan also seemed to make perfect sense. This collaborative approach would enable the newly established Communities of Practice (extended primary care teams) to wrap around the practices, providing a joined up approach to health and wellbeing which would ensure that the patient receives the right care from the right person in their town, and GPs could find some breathing space.

And then reality hit. What looks like a sensible plan on paper isn’t necessarily perceived in quite the same way by all!

Ben Gowland was employed by the CCG to support the process of collaborative working and was asked to support the practices in Burgess Hill. When I met Ben I was under some pressure to describe how the towns I work with were planning on meeting the extended access requirements, so I thought that would be the hook we would use to engage the practices. After all, they needed to do it, we needed them to do it, and Ben could help us scope how they’d do it. Again, simple and sensible.

But no, it appears that’s not what works. Ben is against rushing in with ready-made solutions. He avoids the straight forward, ‘here’s the pressing problem and this is the solution’ approach. I learnt that we needed to start with what matters to the practices, not what matters to me. We needed to listen. We needed to understand. We needed to know what they wanted to achieve. We needed to know how they thought they could achieve it.

So how do you do that? We met with all of the practices on an individual basis and talked and listened and reflected back to them what they had said.   We then identified the common issues the practices were facing and provided an opportunity for them to share these issues with their neighbouring practices. This process of building trust and relationships takes time but can’t be bypassed, whatever the CCG deadlines.   The practices met and shared information, and in so doing built new relationships. They considered the common issues they were all facing which gave them a reason to work together. They looked at who was best placed amongst them to drive this work forward and together they chose one Partner from one of the practices and his Practice Manager (paid from the CCG locality budget) to draft a business plan for the town.    Whenever there was dissent or concern, they were brought back to the common issues they had all agreed were troubling them.

During this time I regularly reminded Ben of the CCG deadlines and felt quite anxious about the passing weeks and months. But the end result is that the town identified its own issues, found a common reason to change (not one necessarily based on CCG priorities), identified people within the town to drive it forward, and a way to keep plans on track when there was disagreement. And you’ll never guess what? One of the issues that was highlighted and resolved by the town was how it would address the extended access requirements!

And if you’d like support with introducing collaborative working, don’t forget our Podcast this week which you can find here and information about a new training programme we are running with Kaleidoscope Health which can be found here.

7
jun
0

Without GP partners, general practice will lose its Independence

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

For me, one of the biggest strengths of general practice is its independence. It contracts with the NHS, but is not part of the monolithic NHS structure. For some this may feel like a technical difference (after all GP practices can still access the NHS pension, and they are funded with taxpayer money) but for someone who has spent 20 years working in the NHS like myself the difference feels much more fundamental.

GP practices are bound by the terms of their contract with the NHS. But within the boundaries of those terms they are free to innovate, make changes, and take whatever decisions they want to improve care for their patients and the working lives of their staff. This is in stark contrast to NHS organisations that are bound by NHS-wide restrictions, ways of operating and approval mechanisms that often stifle innovation and directly impact on culture.

It is now widely accepted that GP practices require more money – whether they are funded directly or through a contract. Moving away from the independent contractor model is not the answer; it will not solve the problems of inadequate funding, insufficient GPs, or growing workload. Their independence is not a cause of those problems, but rather is the only reason GP practices have been able to continue the way they have despite the current pressures.

Yet, sadly, the independent contractor model is teetering on a knife’s edge. I visited a practice recently that a year ago was a relatively stable, well-run, 4 partner and 7500 population practice. Within the space of two weeks two of the partners resigned. One was retiring, and one was emigrating to Australia. A few weeks later a third declared they were also resigning as they wanted to become salaried. This left a single GP, who had neither the skills nor the desire to be the sole partner of the practice. She wrote to the CCG informing them of the situation and declared that if a solution was not found she would be forced to hand back the list.

This scenario and others like it are being played out throughout the country. The inability to recruit GP partners is rising to the top of the challenges facing GP practices today. Every resignation of a GP partner creates panic within practices, a sense of being trapped, and a fear of being the one left carrying the costs of closure.

The recent push to secure 5000 new GPs, whilst unlikely to be achieved, has brought new GPs into the profession. But many of these GPs are choosing part time or portfolio careers. The competition for new GPs is pushing up the pay for salaried GPs. The new extended access and A&E based services provide well-paid, flexible alternatives for new GPs, further increasing the challenges of recruitment for practices.

The risk is that, unconsciously, we are creating a system that rewards salaried GPs and punishes GP partners. By not intervening, general practice as a profession is risking its independence. Without GP partners, there are no businesses that can deliver against the contracts, no practices as we know them today. The NHS will have to directly deliver the service. Once independence is gone, it will never be regained.

I do not believe GPs, even new GPs, would actively choose to give up their independence. I believe it is happening below the surface, unnoticed; not as a conscious decision or policy intent, but as an unintended consequence of the way the system now operates (“every system is perfectly designed to get the results it gets” etc.) We have not paid this dilemma enough attention, and must take urgent action before it is too late.

We need to make becoming a GP partner more attractive. We must cherish the independence of general practice, and help the future generation of GPs understand not only the freedom it provides but also what will be lost without it. In a tougher financial environment, we need to make sure GPs are given training and support to be confident to take on the challenge of becoming a partner. The one afternoon designated in the current GP training programme is insufficient.

Here at Ockham we are taking a step (albeit small) to fill this training gap. On Tuesday July 4th at 7pm we are holding a free event in Central London on being a GP partner. Join us in person or on twitter (#gppartners) – find out more details of this unique event here. Unless we take action now, general practice will lose its independence.

5
jun
0

Calling All Future GP Partners!

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

If you are interested in becoming a GP Partner (or perhaps you are already a new GP Partner) then you will not want to miss our live event in July which aims to answer all of your questions. For all the details see below…

31
may
0

Six months is a long time in general practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Christmas may seem like some far-flung memory, but over the last 6 months much has happened in general practice. While much of it might feel familiarly depressing, there are at least flickers of light for some at the end of the tunnel.

In December 2016 NHS England published the draft multispecialty provider contract. We examined what it means for general practice (essentially the fully integrated model means the end of independent general practice as we know it, but only if GPs choose it, which seems unlikely), and what it means for CCGs (another nail in their coffin).

One thing that didn’t change in the last six months was the money (or rather the lack of it). The contract for 2017/18 was finally agreed, but promised additional GPFV money was nowhere to be found. Indeed, despite our campaign to try and find it, no one was really sure where it was, until eventually the NHS England “Next Steps on the Five Year Forward View” document revealed there never really was an additional £2.4bn.

Despite the “highest ever number of GPs in training” (a ministerial phrase we are already growing heartily sick of), the total number of GPs continued to fall. GPs left faster than they were coming off the end of the burgeoning production line. Nick Mattick gave us an expert insight into GP recruitment, as well as a six stage guide for practices to follow, and Dr Mayur Vibhuti told us how he is developing a new generation of GPs.

For many practices, the challenge of recruiting a GP partner has been the biggest recruitment challenge of all. We tentatively suggested what a training programme for GPs considering partnership might look like, and are now working with Dr Mayur Vibhuti to see what we can put in place. Get in touch if you want to know more.

Not only is there a crisis in GP recruitment, there is also a crisis in GP nursing. Mia Skelly outlined the crisis and what needs to be done, and we found out detail from nurses in Lambeth about the tremendous work they are doing to support recruitment and retention of practice nurses.

It is not just nurses who can help GPs. Physician associates are just starting to be accepted as a possible support for practices – Dr Joanna Munden explained the impact they had had in her practice. Paramedic led visiting services may also be the future.

We also discovered the largely hidden work of Community Education Provider Networks (CEPNs) up and down the country, eloquently explained by Tara Humphrey. For those interested in developing the community workforce these are well worth looking into.

Glimmers of hope for the profession have started to emerge. The 10 high impact changes outlined in the GP Forward View are beginning to provide genuine benefit to some practices. In particular workflow optimisation (or GP post being managed by administration staff) is saving some GPs up to an hour a day, and active signposting is shifting up to 25% of patient appointments away from GPs in some practices.

Passionate advocates for general practice have become bolder and more vocal. Dr Jon Griffiths told us about his TedX talk promoting general practice, and Nish Manek inspired us with her passion for the profession.

Unlike MCPs, the “primary care home” movement has grown in popularity. GP of the year Dr Jonathan Cope explained how his practice now functions in what felt like a glimpse into the future of general practice. Adopted by Dr Cope’s practice, Beacon Medical Group, the shift to “hot” and “cold” sites is becoming increasingly common, and was explained to us by Dr Rachel Tyler from Ocean Health. We also had a live commentary from Dr Rebecca Pryse on what it feels like to be in a practice making such a change.

Getting bigger remains a key strategy for practices in trouble. A whole new lexicon of general practice organisations is emerging (do you know your super practice from your practice chain?).  Mergers expert Robert McCartney outlined the key to a successful union between two practices. The rise of the primary care home has led many to believe that reaching a population size of 30,000 is now a magic number for practices to aspire to, and Robert gave us his thoughts on how to get there.

The rays of hope are still, however, few and far between. The profession remains engulfed in crisis, while the government seems more concerned with extending access to GPs and putting GPs into A&E departments. If your practice has reached crisis point and you don’t know where to turn, have a look at our video, in which we examine the options open to GP practices and help you work through which one might be right for you. One thing continues to remain clear – the best hope for general practice remains the changes it can make for itself, not those it waits for others to make for it.

24
may
0

At-scale general practice must stay independent

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The BMA has found GP practices with a higher CQC rating earn more income. My PhD wife regularly pulls me up for mistaking correlation with causation, so I wonder whether outstanding practices earn more income (i.e. the cause is that they are outstanding), or whether they are outstanding because they receive more income (i.e. the cause is that they receive more income).

More research is required to test these hypotheses, but my money would be on the former. I know many areas where the opportunity for income is equal across practices, yet the better practices earn more (through better recovery of QOF income, through delivery of a wider range of enhanced services, and through private income streams).

So in the independent world of general practice, the practices that provide a better service to patients earn more money, while the less well run practices earn less. Independence, of course, means there is no bail out. The risk sits squarely with the GP partners as business owners. Compare this with those leading statutory bodies, such as CCGs. They will earn the same amount of money regardless of how well the CCG does. Salary is not linked to performance. There is no meeting with the accountant where the slow realisation descends on all of the partners that they are going to have to take a pay cut. Instead the CCG goes into deficit and money is spent on management consultants to “help” the CCG get back into balance.

I was fortunate enough recently to spend some time learning about how the system of general practice works in New Zealand. There, a key component is that each practice is part of a network. These networks are not statutory bodies. They were formed by practices nearly 30 years ago, essentially as a protectionist manoeuvre by practices, and their purpose is to strengthen and improve general practice.

The great thing about non-statutory bodies is that they cannot be abolished or reorganised. While in this country we have seen PCGs, PCTs and now (probably) CCGs come and go, in New Zealand over the same period the networks have been constant. They have been able to adapt and thrive over that time, and provide better and better support to their member practices. Indeed, the government has even channelled the contracts for practices through the networks, enabling the networks to take on the role of improving quality across their member practices.

I was the Chief Executive of Nene Commissioning, one of the leading practice based commissioning groups. We were a non-statutory body, but we worked with the PCT, with our member practices, and with many others to drive some impressive innovations across the system. With the advent of CCGs we transitioned into a statutory body. There is no doubt in my mind that becoming part of the NHS system, hounded by layers of hierarchy and regulation, strangled the innovation out of the organisation. It is because CCGs are statutory bodies that ultimately they have not been able to fulfil their promise.

Meanwhile the networks in New Zealand have thrived and continued to innovate. Pinnacle, one of the leading New Zealand networks, has developed an improvement programme for its member practices. It funds it itself, it tests it on practices that it directly manages (the equivalent of our APMS contracts), and is working with its members to make them fit for the future. Not because it has to, not in response to a government initiative, but because its role is to strengthen and improve general practice. It only answers to its member practices, and because it is independent it cannot be abolished or reorganised.

This is an important lesson for us. Moving to at-scale general practice in many areas is the right thing to do. But finding ways to do it that maintain the independence of general practice, and the independence of any at-scale organisations it creates, is absolutely critical. Independence rewards success, and penalises failure. It fosters and encourages innovation. Most important of all, it creates stability and strength for the long term.

17
may
0

How to tackle a crisis in your GP Practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

What do you do when your practice reaches crisis point, and it is no longer clear whether the practice can even continue?  In this presentation Ben Gowland explores the options open to practices, and identifies the avenues practices can pursue who need to consider radical change.

10
may
0

Tackling growing demand – will GPs be the hero or the victim?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Much of the narrative around GP demand puts GPs and practices into the role of helpless victim, beaten down by the relentless growth in demand without the resources to meet it. But it is more helpful to focus on the practical actions practices can take to gain control over demand, and attempt to become the hero of their own story.

Demand on GP practices is growing. The King’s Fund 2016 study, Understanding pressures in general practice found,

“Our analysis of 30 million patient contacts from 177 practices found that consultations grew by more than 15 per cent between 2010/11 and 2014/15. The number of face-to-face consultations grew by 13 per cent and telephone consultations by 63 per cent. Over the same period, the GP workforce grew by 4.75 per cent and the practice nurse workforce by 2.85 per cent. Funding for primary care as a share of the NHS overall budget fell every year in our five-year study period, from 8.3 per cent to just over 7.9 per cent.”

Natasha Curry from the Nuffield Trust, in her article Fact or fiction? Demand for GP appointments is driving the crisis in general-practice, examined where the rise in demand for appointments was coming from, and found,

“While activity in general practice has increased, most of that increase is amongst staff groups other than GPs. Consultations with GPs rose by approximately 2 per cent, whereas consultations with nurses rose by 8 per cent and consultations with ‘other’ staff (a long list of professionals including pharmacists, physiotherapists, and speech therapists) grew by 18 per cent.”

Introducing new roles is clearly one mechanism practices have been using to manage the growth in demand. Introducing telephone appointments is another. Both have added to the complexity and challenge of the work the GPs actually do see face to face.

What else can practices do? The NHS Alliance considered “potentially avoidable” appointments in their report Making Time in General Practice. They found,

“Overall, 27% of GP appointments were judged by respondents to have been potentially avoidable, with changes to the system around them. The most common potentially avoidable consultations were amendable to action by the practice, often with the support of the CCG. The biggest three categories were where the patient would have been better served by being directed to someone else in the wider primary care team, either within the practice, in the pharmacy or a so-called ‘wellbeing worker’ (e.g. care navigator, peer coach, health trainer or befriender). Together, these three, which could be improved by more active signposting and new support services, accounted for 16% of GP appointments. An additional 1% were to inform a patient that their test result was normal and no further action was needed. A further 1% of appointments would not have been necessary if continuity of care or a clear management plan had been established.”

I recently discussed how “active signposting” works on a recent podcast. It is dependent on creating the alternative routes for patients to follow. Training receptionists will not help, unless at the same time places are established for patients to be signposted to.

Even with the same funding some practices cope well with the level of demand, and some do not. It is not only a function of ability to recruit GPs, or the ability to signpost. I have seen a number of examples where the ratio of GP sessions to patient population is the same or higher, but the ability to cope with the workload is significantly worse. When I have looked into why this is, a key factor appears to be GP generated demand.

GP generated demand are those appointments generated by the doctor (“come back in 4 weeks”) as opposed to those initiated by the patient themselves. While CCGs are working up and down the country to cajole practices into reviewing referral rates (in his paper, Does GP growth in referral link directly to growth in inpatient demand? Dr Rod Jones shows that the answer to his own question is no, and that it leads to a perceived need for higher levels of resource than is really the case), practices might be better focussing their attention on internal GP follow up rates. Rates between individual doctors vary, but the benefits of exploring and managing that variation fall directly to the practice.

Much emphasis, rightly, in general practice is given to continuity of care. Where GPs have their own lists, and know the patients better, they can be much more confident in only bringing those patients back when they know they need to be seen. Where patients simply see the next available Doctor the likelihood of follow-up appointments is higher. So the benefits of continuity of care fall to the practice as well as to the patient.

In practices with high levels of part time working the challenge of achieving this continuity can be higher. Practices in this situation that have managed it well have introduced “buddying” systems, whereby part time GPs work to manage a list together. Practices that have not are often drowning under the weight of the demand.

Use of telephone appointments, introducing new roles, active signposting and managing variation in internal follow-up rates are all actions open to all practices to take control of their own demand. When the status quo is unsustainable, becoming the hero is the only option.

3
may
0

Case Study: Introducing a “hot” and “cold” appointment split (Part 1)

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

In this blog, the first of two from Buckingham GP Dr Rebecca Pryse, she takes us through the practical steps to launching a new appointments system split between Same Day and Any Day appointments. Rebecca will be back later in the spring with a second blog looking at how the change has worked.

So it’s the eve of D Day or “s-D-s Day”: the day we launch our new Same Day Service. We’ve had our final partnership “huddle” at our executive meeting last night; we’ve given the final pep talks to the various teams and here we go.

This has been months in the planning for what feels like a military operation. From the Saturday strategy partners meeting one year ago where I led a “we can’t go on like this /something has to change” discussion around our access and appointment systems; to our lead partner Greg poring over stats, models and spreadsheets at his kitchen table to come up with various proposals; to our management team and IT team testing out these proposals against appointment audits and staffing rotas.

In the middle of all this we went through our second merge, a little more “thrust upon us” than the first merge just over a year before that, making us the only practice in town serving about 30,000 patients. This used up a lot of leadership energy but gave us strength in terms of clinicians (we now have 13 partners, 3 salaried doctors and 7 nurses), staff members (we now have 80 staff), population numbers and a third town centre site to work from. This enabled us to move forward in more exciting ways to change our access system.

So we moved onwards taking a proposed appointment system model to our appointments committee. This is a multidisciplinary group of reps from clinicians, management, staff and several patients who have been meeting over the past 10-15 years since we first changed our appointments from completely open access to an advanced access system – quite novel back then. This group meets intermittently to keep an eye on our access stats and patient feedback and to make constructive suggestions for change. Most recently they helped support and test out the introduction of Patient Access to our patients. The new proposal was discussed over several meetings, tweaked and approved.

Next we took the proposal to our annual “State of the Nation” protected learning afternoon. This is an annual whole staff meeting to which we invite the PPG. The new model was presented to the whole team and this was followed by small group work for each staff group to reflect back their hopes, fears and expectations of the system with some useful and constructive suggestions.

So what model did we finally decide upon? We all agreed that there are broadly two types of access required by patients: I need to see a clinician today and it doesn’t matter who I see and I need to see MY doctor or nurse who knows me best and I can wait for this appointment. We also saw a need for signposting patients first to self-care where appropriate and then to the most appropriate clinician for their problem, which does not necessarily mean a face-to-face encounter.

From these principles we have devised an offer of same day appointments (Same Day Service or SDS) or any day appointments (Any Day Service or ADS). Each service will operate from a different site within the town centre. We have calculated the balance of appointments by looking at the statistics of how appointments are currently accessed, proposing that 60% of our appointments will be made available in the Same Day Service. We have also looked to extend the range of clinicians working from this service to ensure the patients are directed to the most appropriate clinician. This means that the SDS is manned by two GP’s called GP1 & GP2, rather reminiscent of Dr Seuss with GP3 on “special days” that we predict will be busier, one or two minor illness nurses or nurse practitioners, with a paramedic to cover acute visit requests and an HCA to provide urgent diagnostics. All our reception staff have been trained as Care Navigators and patients are being asked to give a brief outline of the problem they wish to bring with an initial question of “could this be dealt with over the telephone” being asked or self care advice given as appropriate. Our paramedic and two of our nurses have just completed the minor illness nurse-training course and two of our nurses already prescribe. We have just appointed a minor illness nurse who fulfills her dream of moving from A&E back to primary care.

In our other two sites the Any Day Service will run: the clinicians here will be offering slightly longer appointments which can be booked in advance by patients who benefit from continuity. There will still be some Same Day availability in this service and these GPs will be offering routine, pre planned visits to appropriate patients. It is planned that all urgent and same day work should be absorbed by the Same Day Service allowing the Any Day GP to plan their day more proactively and offer more complex care as needed without being rushed into 10 minute slots. They will of course keep a view of the SDS and be able to offer support if that system is becoming overloaded.   We have recruited a new, additional GP who will start in September. All GPs will work some time in both systems.

In the background all our staff teams have been working hard together to ensure this new system will run smoothly and there is a general buzz of excitement in the practice as sDs-Day has approached, this in itself has felt uplifting to me particularly after they have been through a couple of years of immense change already. So we have all read the protocols and checked the process maps covering all eventualities, looked at the rotas, updated our computer screens ready for tomorrow.

Our practice manager has to be particularly congratulated, as she must be googly-eyed sorting out what has become quite a complex rota. It sounded so simple at the start but when you build in the fact that as well as seeing patients in our three sites, we also run clinics in two boarding schools and one University, we look after 4 nursing homes, we provide one GP session per day to our local community hospital and we are a training practice not only for GPs and practice nurses but for our local Medical school with 2 students in most days seeing patients……… she has politely told us to stop asking if she can sort out any more “tweaks” to her system, just for now, please. But we are keen to work in a PDSA cycle so the snag/learning list will start tomorrow as soon as the front doors open!

Dr Rebecca Pryse is a GP Partner at The Swan Practice in Buckingham. You can contact Rebecca via rebecca.pryse@nhs.net The Practice website is www.theswanpractice.co.uk

26
apr
2

Creating a Training Programme for New GP Partners

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog2 Comments

It is astonishing that despite the huge challenge the lack of GPs wanting to be partners is presenting for general practice, little if any training exists for GPs considering the step up from salaried to partner.

Taking on responsibility for a business, for its staff, for its performance, and for its liabilities, is a big commitment. While in the past GPs took it on because that was the established career route for them, that no longer appears to be the case. Increasingly GPs are opting out of being a partner, and taking on salaried, locum or portfolio careers. Even GPs who had previously become partners are now choosing these alternatives.

This reluctance by some to take on a partnership position, along with the precarious position many practices are now in, is making everyone nervous. Those considering becoming a partner have few places to go to understand exactly what is involved. Dismissing the risks on the basis that others have been able to manage them no longer feels a possibility, and a more considered examination of what is involved is required before such a big decision can be made.

It is into this environment that we are developing a training programme for GP partners. It is for those GPs who are considering becoming a partner, want to understand better what is involved, and want to develop the skills to be a good partner should they choose to make that step. It is also for those GPs who have already made the decision to become a partner, and want training and development to ensure they can be successful in the role.

The programme is in its infancy. We want to develop the programme in partnership with those who need it. Below are all the areas that we are considering including within the programme. What we would like from you is feedback on which areas you think are most important, which areas are not needed, and which areas are missing.

Section 1: Internal – understanding the business

Success Measures: What constitutes success for the practice? Is the practice there to serve patients or to make money? What does independent contractor status really mean?

Partnership: What is a partnership; why partnership agreements are important; what makes a good partnership agreement; building a strong partnership team; “last man standing” and strategies for dealing with it.

People: How to lead people, how to manage people (and understanding the difference!); dealing with difficult people (including other partners!); staff appraisals; staff surveys; team meetings; the importance of coffee.

Finances: Partner financial responsibilities; dealing with accountants; understanding cash flow; how to manage the finances.

Processes: Appointment systems: the good, the bad and the ugly; DNAs; workflow redirection; active signposting. How to implement change within the practice.

Property: Understanding premises; types of ownership of property; leases and rent reimbursement; working with NHS Property Services.

Practice Manager: What to expect from your practice manager; how to get the best out of them; understanding the difference between the role of the practice manager and the role of a GP partner; how to know if you need to change your practice manager and how to do it.

Section 2: External – understanding the environment

NHS: Understanding where GP practices fit within the NHS; the different structures and types of organisation within the NHS and how they impact on GP practices.

Commissioners: Friend or foe? Understanding the GP contract and how it works; understanding the different commissioners; how to build effective relationships with commissioners.

Regulators: The role of the CQC; surviving inspections

Other GP practices: The role of the LMC; why and how to build relationships with other GP practices; overcoming history and other barriers to joint working.

Other external relationships: Should I bother building relationships with other organisations, such as community pharmacy, community trust, local voluntary organisations, local council, local hospital? Who to prioritise; how to do it.

Section 3: Future – understanding the risks

Changing NHS: The changing NHS, including five year forward view, new models of care, STPs.

GP Forward View: What it means now and in the future; how to make the most of it.

Strategic Change: Understanding strategic options for your practice for the future; how to develop them; how to implement them.

Practice mergers: When to consider it, when not to, and how to do it successfully.

Let us know what you think. What do you think the most important training needs are for new GP partners? What would help most for someone about to take on the role? What have we missed? All your feedback greatly appreciated! Please either leave your feedback in the Comment section above or email me ben@ockham.healthcare

19
apr
0

Why £2.4bn is not really £2.4bn

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Hidden away in the latest NHS England publication[1], on page 19, is this graph (above). It is not good news for general practice.

At first glance it would seem to present a positive picture. Spending on general practice has gone up, and is planned to continue to go up until 2021. So what is the problem?

In the General Practice Forward View, published in April 2016, an additional recurrent investment of £2.4bn was promised to general practice. The parlous state of general practice was at last recognised, and (or so it seemed) that recognition was backed with real cash.

But what this graph shows is the additional investment of £2.4bn did not begin on the date of the publication of the paper. It begins around 2013, some three years earlier. A specific highlight is given to the formation of NHS England, to correlate this date with the turnaround in the funding fortunes of general practice.

The implication of this graph is that those awaiting £2.4bn of investment should really only expect less than £1bn between now and 2020/21. The graph also indicates the rate of funding increase will slow compared to the last two years. Worse, £500m of the extra money still to come has been promised for extended access, and at present most of that funding is being awarded via private tender, and not to local practices.

This should not be about headlines or political statements. It should be about properly funding a critical part of our NHS. It is no wonder that GP partners are at breaking point. According to one recent survey more than 90% of GPs have either left, have considered leaving, or have reduced their hours to be able to cope[2]. The additional funding is not a reward for general practice. It is what is necessary to keep it functioning and operating effectively at the front line of the NHS. This graph shows that not only is the funding required not going to materialise, but that the system is also going to pretend that it is.

[1] Next Steps on the NHS Five Year Forward View, March 2017

[2] http://www.weloveourgps.co.uk/

12
apr
0

General practice organisations explained

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

If you don’t know a PACS from an MCP or if you are unsure of the difference between a Super Practice and a Federation then look no further! Click here to see Ockham Healthcare’s interactive guide to the confusing world of general practice organisations. The guide will take you through the eight main general practice organisations with links to the relevant guidance. The guide will open in another window. If you find this guide useful, or if you feel there are any other areas of general practice that would benefit from a similar approach – why not let us know in the comments section above.

 

 

 

 

 

 

5
apr
0

What the “Next Steps on the NHS 5 Year Forward View” means for General Practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Ben Gowland was excited by the promises made in the General Practice Forward View (GPFV) last year but, in this blog at the time, he expressed concern about the lack of any kind of accompanying financial plan. Now the government has published a “next steps” document which outlines the key priorities for the NHS over the next two years; and those concerns appear to be well founded.

There are 6 things general practice need to know about this document:

1. There will be £1bn less investment into General Practice than expected

In a cunning sleight of hand, the document reveals in a graph on p18 the promised £2.4bn additional expenditure into general practice uses a start point of April 2013, not the publication date of the GPFV (April 2016).   As well as leaving a bad taste in the mouth, it means the “extra” from 2016 is closer to £1.4bn, with the rate of growth of increase slowing from 2017 (now) onwards.

2. “5000 additional GPs” will become “the highest number of GPs in training ever”

Instead of saying there will not be an additional 5000 GPs and fronting that out, the document trails what will undoubtedly be the line the government and others will take in future that there are more GPs in training than ever before.

3. Extended Access is all

The one part of the GPFV the government really does care about is extending GP access. “By March 2018, the Mandate requires that 40% of the country will benefit from extended access to GP appointments at evenings and weekends, but we are aiming for 50%. By March 2019 this will extend to 100% of the country” p19. The additional funding for access, meanwhile, does not kick in until April 2019 and April 2020, a fact the document makes no attempt to address.

4. QOF will go, and be “reinvested”

Any practice bruised by the recent PMS reviews or removal of MPIG may be nervous to read the following, “We will seek to develop and agree with relevant stakeholders a successor to QOF, which would allow the reinvestment of £700M a year into improved patient access, professionally-led quality improvement, greater population health management, and patients’ supported self-management, to reduce avoidable demand in secondary care”. GPs are rightly nervous of the term “reinvestment”, as it generally means expecting them to continue doing what they are doing now, as well as undertaking additional activities to earn exactly the same amount of money, or even less if some of that “reinvested” money is siphoned off into networks, hubs, or CCG financial positions.

5. 30-50,000 is definitely the magic number

Most practices are seeing the writing on the wall that getting to this population size is going to be necessary one way or the other, but this document clearly reaffirms it. Badged as encouraging practices to work in networks or hubs, it clarifies (underlined) “the model does not require practice mergers or closures” (p21), while at the same time promising funding incentives to accelerate the move to reach this magic population number.

6. GP-led CCGs will be usurped by more powerful STPs

The whole section on STPs is crafted as a work around legislation to take responsibility away from CCGs and give it to STPs, and in some cases turn them into something called Accountable Care Systems (ACSs). These “will be an evolved version of an STP that is working as a locally integrated health system. They are systems in which NHS organisations (both commissioners and providers), often in partnership with local authorities, choose to take on clear collective responsibility for resources and population health” (p35).

Nearly exactly one year on from the publication of the GPFV it feels like we have just moved two steps backwards from the forward steps of last year. Then it felt like the current plight of general practice was recognised, whereas now that recognition feels absent once again, replaced instead with a simplistic view that operating at scale is a straightforward solution and an almost blinkered focus on extending GP access.

29
mar
0

Putting the pride back into general practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

In his second guest blog for us, mergers expert Robert McCartney argues that general practice will best thrive where there is a good balance of strong leadership and co-operation coupled with independence and the freedom to innovate.

The old expression of ‘herding cats’ was used when I first told people that I would be moving into primary care and working with GPs. Moving from the structures of an NHS trust the initial impression of primary care did feel like this.

Processes would be agreed and targets set but whether they were actioned felt like it depended upon the whim of the individual. As they hold significant power regardless of the position within the practice it was difficult to influence and change this mind set.

It dawned on me that traditional management structures and processes, particularly those largely learnt within the NHS were not appropriate for working with GPs. They are partially based on the belief that teams do need to be controlled and directed as a ‘herd’. Although this does have its place, particularly in larger teams needing to pull in the same direction it is less efficient with smaller groups were individuality is held at a greater value.

When considering the nature and reasons many doctors decide to specialise as GPs it was evident that the analogy of the cat remained relevant. Both are independent, don’t like to be interfered with, enjoy opportunities to explore new avenues whilst always being loyal to their home.

These are strong characteristics and have both positive and negative affects if they are not identified and managed appropriately.

If there are these similarities, then instead of thinking about the ‘herd’ we should be thinking about the ‘pride’. Within the ‘pride’ there is strong leadership, a close-knit family feel to the group and clearly defined roles emphasising the importance of co-operation. They allow independence and encourage exploration, especially of the younger members, whilst ensuring that they work together for the common purpose.

By recognising these qualities and purposes we can improve the structures and relationships needed to continue the success of primary care. Within most practices the traditional partnership model allows this structure to exist. It allows the retention of freedom and independence, whilst clearly defining the boundaries to ensure it ultimately helps the common purpose.

Other professionals who often work in this ‘pride’ mentality include lawyers, IFAs and accountants and they frequently work in variations of the partnership model. Working at scale can and does work with this model.

Partnerships are under-pressure and there are many different alternatives being explored but as long as the principles of strong leadership offering independence with controls are applied these models can succeed.

I would recommend that when GPs, practice managers, commissioners and anyone else look at how primary care can be provided at scale that they do not forget the frequently shared personal traits and ensure new structures maximise the benefits these bring.

Robert is Managing Director of McCartney Healthcare Associates Limited. He is an expert on practice mergers and this is the second in a short series of blogs he will be writing for Ockham Healthcare. If your practice needs a helping hand with its fledgling relationships, you can contact Robert via e-mail at rm@mccartneyhealth.co.uk or call 0203 287 9336.

22
mar
0

Where has the missing GPFV money gone?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

15
mar
0

The Six Stages to Effective GP Recruitment

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

In this week’s Blog, guest blogger Nick Mattick demonstrates that GP recruitment cannot be rushed as he outlines the key stages to effective recruitment and spells out the common mistakes practices often make.

It’s a common misunderstanding in GP recruitment that spreading the net as wide as possible and throwing money around will solve the problem. But, in the current recruitment crisis where there are simply not enough GPs to go round, this is unlikely to be the case.

The reality is that your GP vacancy is only likely to appeal to certain people and to attract those people, you need a clearly defined strategy which outlines who they are and how you can target them. The lack of a strategy, or an ill-defined process may not only fail to deliver you any appropriate candidates – it could even lose you applicants who walk away in frustration.

In this blog I am outlining the six key stages to developing such a strategy. They are:

1.Define your candidate – What does the practice want and who is most likely to apply? Focus on who your candidates are likely to be dependent on the type and location of the job on offer. For instance candidates with young families are most likely to want facilities, infrastructure and flexible hours. Whereas those a little longer in the tooth, with the kids off at university, maybe downsizing and wanting to get away from the busy city.

What qualities might a successful candidate possess and how does the practice make itself more attractive to those candidates? Here, you need to consider how the practice will respond to issues such as work/life balance, portfolio roles, specialist training and, perhaps, opportunities to work with other practices to offer more exciting or innovative roles etc.

2.Candidate Attraction – This means getting your defined applicant to see your advert. Your advert is an excellent way to demonstrate what you have to offer candidates. But too often I see lazy adverts which say something bland like; “we’re a friendly team, this is our list size, our IT system and our opening times – come and work for us.” But adverts like those could be for any practice, anywhere in the country. You must find your unique selling point (your USP) and get applicants to become interested in the story you tell about yourself.

For your advert to stand out amongst all the others, you will need to advertise where your defined applicants are likely to be looking, so consider using Google AdWords, LinkedIn and Facebook; these have great tools to really focus on selling your job to the right people.

3.Candidate Handling – How do you deal with applicants once they have expressed an interest? Communication is key. Always acknowledge a CV and give a timeline for your process. Tell applicants what documents you will want from them, and ask them what they want from you.

Have ready all relevant documentation that applicants are likely to need including, as a minimum, the current Job Description and a Person Specification. But also consider CQC reports, Ofsted reports about local schools etc. Offer applicants informal visits and be prepared to help with estate agents or organising house viewings. And don’t forget to ensure your practice website is up-to-date.

4.The Interview – The interview is not just about candidates selling themselves to you; it is your chance to sell yourself to candidates. So be organized on the day and pre-plan questions; agree who will ask what questions when.

A clean, uncluttered, open and light room will put your candidate at ease. Try going informal – don’t sit behind a desk. Offer a tour of the practice and introduce them to colleagues – but most of all, however you do it, make them feel welcomed.

5.Negotiation – Once you have found your candidate you are aiming to achieve a Win: Win. You probably won’t get exactly what you are looking for and you probably aren’t exactly what the candidate is looking for either; so consider how you will “close the deal” and get both parties as close as possible to what they are looking for. Agree in advance what are “red lines” and what’s up for discussion. Many people, when recruiting, think it’s all about the money – but in most cases it isn’t. Find out what’s really most important to a candidate.

6.On-boarding – This is about getting your candidate to the start line and to hit the ground running. It’s more difficult in GP recruitment because of the long notice periods that lock GPs into jobs – usually for 3-6 months; so make sure you continue to engage with your candidate during this time.

Invite them to practice meetings or social events, offer help with finding somewhere to live, get all the paperwork and compliance done in advance and offer them an induction session before starting. Keep up the communication and start forming relationships early.

If you’re looking for an urgent start consider “buying them out” of their notice period. On Day One make sure you are ready for them to start with email and log-ins available, a list of who’s who and housekeeping issues clear such as how the phones work and how to get refreshments; and even think about, as a particularly nice touch – a welcome gift!

In essence then the key lessons for GP recruitment are:

Recruitment is not something that can be done over a sandwich at your desk – it requires a lot of effort, work and planning.

  • Don’t expect to place an ad in the BMJ and have candidates queuing at the door; you have to work for them.
  • It will take some compromise.
  • Don’t be locked into a mindset of replacing like for like recruitment is an opportunity to change, to freshen things up.
  • Recruitment is all about up-front planning, a clear process, adapting and communicating.
  • Above all – you need to sell, sell, sell!

Nick Mattick is an expert in Clinical Recruitment & Recruitment Strategy. Nick has worked for NHS and private healthcare service providers and recruitment agencies. You can contact Nick:

Call 029 2051 2517 or email Nicolas.mattick@me.com

 www.OliverRose.net

 Recruitment strategy, planning, help, support, advice & experience in all things Clinical Recruitment. We’re not an agency – we help you to avoid having to use one.

8
mar
1

Transforming general practice: The CCG Dilemma

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

CCGs face a choice. They want to support GP practices to make the changes necessary to get out of their current malaise and to play a more active role in change across the wider system. To do this there are two approaches CCGs can take. Their dilemma is which one to choose.

The first approach is the easiest choice to make. CCGs focus on changes that will impact on all practices. So for example this might be creating incentive systems for practices to get involved in things like managing the complex frail elderly. It may even look like offering services for practices working together, for example to offer extended access. The £3 per head for general practice is divided up evenly for all the practices, and everyone gets their fair share. The proposals are acceptable to the practices, the LMC is happy, and they are deemed equitable by all.

The problem is no actual transformation happens. Practices continue to struggle, emergency admissions continue to rise, and the distance between general practice and the rest of the system does not really change.

The second approach is more challenging to implement. CCGs focus on supporting the small number of practices most likely to drive transformation. They do not make funding and development opportunities available to all. Instead they identify the most dynamic and progressive practices, the ones with a track record of making changes, who are actively seeking to grow, and who have leaders who can make things happen. The CCGs invest in these practices. They ask them what support and resources they need, and they provide it. They work with them to develop solutions that work for general practice as well as the whole system.

It is not an approach that will be popular. The majority of practices will be against it because they will see an uneven share of resources flowing to the “favoured few”. CCG board members whose practices are not part of the selected group will be against it, and they will become representatives of practices who not only are struggling but are now not receiving any further investment. LMCs will be against it because they have a responsibility to represent the wishes of all practices.

But popularity of an approach is not a great indicator of its chances of success. The question for CCGs is do they want the changes in general practice to happen at the pace of the quickest, or the pace of the slowest? The problems in general practice require radical change; changes many practices are not prepared to take. Working with those most likely to make these changes is a far more sensible strategy than it might first appear.

Practices who can make change happen can work with CCGs to overcome the initial resistance. The natural GP leaders are by definition already in these practices. With support they can bring the rest of the practices along. It can still be an inclusive strategy – it just has a different starting point.

The stark reality is the transformation of 7800 GP practices will not happen at the same pace. We are already seeing a small number of practices embracing the need for change and making the most of the opportunities that exist to make themselves fit for the future. But many practices are stuck, unable to find a way forward or to overcome the internal resistance to making the necessary changes. I would argue that hanging on the coattails of those who are moving forward, and focussing support, time and energy into them, is the only approach that will actually deliver results.

1
mar
0

10 Surprising Lessons from over 50 Podcast Guests

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

I had just finished an hour long interview (by Skype) for the podcast. The conversation had gone well, and I was excited by the quality of the content. As usual, I started to upload the recording for editing. Only nothing was happening. Panic started to well in the pit of my stomach, as I pressed buttons and searched for the audio file. But the file wasn’t there. The conversation hadn’t recorded.

I am not a technical person. I don’t have a background in radio or recording. I started the podcast as a platform for great practice, new ways of working and innovation in general practice to be shared. Learning how to use the kit has probably been my steepest curve, but I have learned other things (about GPs, about general practice, about podcasts as a platform for sharing) from the many guests I have had the privilege of interviewing. Here are the 10 most surprising:

  1. Very few GPs use Skype. With all the chat about Skype GP consultations this wasn’t a problem I predicted, but I would say over half of the GPs I have spoken to had to set up an account (or ask their teenage children to set up an account for them).
  2.  Academics are rarely given a platform to discuss the implications of their research. When academics produce research they become very clear about what it does and doesn’t prove or say. However, here in the real world we are interested about the application of their research to our daily lives. Some academics have loved the opportunity to explore this, but most feel well outside of their comfort zone!
  3.  The non-GP general practice workforce doesn’t feel heard. When we talk about general practice most of us immediately think GPs. But there is a whole other “hidden” workforce out there of nurses and other clinical staff, as well as the practice managers and administration teams. These groups do not feel well represented, and the podcasts involving these groups have had tremendous support from their peers.
  4. Physician associates can add real value. A year ago when I discussed new clinical roles in general practice with GPs many were quite open to the idea, except for physician associates; the mere mention of whom usually provoked a withering look. However, our occasional podcast series exploring their impact has shown they can add tremendous value to practices.
  5. Locums are not all bad. An even less popular group than physician associates are GP locums. Last year we explored why GPs become locums, and the concept of GP locum chambers, and learned in a world where there are not enough GPs we need to find ways to make the most of this critical resource.
  6. It is not just GP practices that are independent, it is also those providing support to GP practices. We all know there are c7800 GP practices who contract independently with the NHS. Less well known is that what this in turn leads to is a sporadic and independent group of individuals and small companies that provide support to general practice. You won’t find many commissions for the big four consultancy firms from individual practices!
  7. The changes with the biggest impact are not necessarily the most complex. The change that I have seen with the biggest impact is “workflow optimisation” or, alternatively, “keeping the post away from the GPs”. It can save up to an hour of GP time per day.
  8. Great editing can perform miracles. Not everyone who comes onto the podcast is a fluent orator. But listening to the podcast you wouldn’t necessarily know it. On the other hand I have finished recording interviews and wondered whether there will be any tape left that we can actually use, once the stumbling and disjointed sentences have been removed. But out of the editing suite come these coherent, intelligible productions that make both me and the guest sound great.
  9. Being on the podcast creates opportunities for guests. I am not sure I anticipated how positive an experience being on the podcast could be for those being interviewed. For example, I recently received a note from previous guest Mia Skelly who said, “People’s general feedback has been very complimentary and it’s given me some wonderful opportunities to continue to promote general practice nursing”.
  10. The Ben Gowland podcast is not the best name for a general practice podcast. When I came up with the title I thought it sounded good(!), and I have been surprised to learn that 1) the title in no way explains what the podcast is about, and 2) people not knowing what it is about can make it harder to access. As a result, we are going to go for the slightly clearer but less narcissistic title “The General Practice Podcast” from April.

Maybe only some or even none of these things surprise you. But they all surprised me, and I am looking forward to continue being surprised by the second year of the show. Thank you for all your support over the last year, and if there any changes (other than the title!) you think we should be making, please do get in touch.

22
feb
0

Why making change in general practice is difficult

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

I wanted to leave my job as a CCG Chief Executive for a long time. But it took many months until I finally handed in my notice. I was nostalgic about the past, and clung to memories of a time when I had loved the job. My attachment made leaving difficult. Despite the relentless, day to day pressure there was always this nagging concern; if I left I would no longer be needed in the same way. And I was not 100% clear what my new future would look like. In many ways a bleak certainty was easier to cope with than the uncertainty of the unknown.

I don’t think I am alone. Letting go (of control, of certainty, of routine) is difficult for all of us. Unfortunately, nearly all of the things that can make a difference for general practice seem to involve GPs “letting go” in some guise or other. So, for example:

  • Practice mergers. These involve GPs “letting go” of the control of their (smaller) practice for a lower amount of control in a bigger practice.
  • Introducing new roles. Bringing in clinical pharmacists, paramedics, physician associates and the like involves GPs “letting go” of some of their workload so others can take this on.
  • Workflow redirection. If you have not come across this yet you should (listen to this), but effectively it involves GPs “letting go” of their post, and trusting much of it to be handled by others.
  • New models of care. Okay, not yet a common solution but a designated national direction of travel, and it involves GP partners “letting go” of their independence and becoming salaried employees or, at best, board members in an NHS organisation.

This is why making change in general practice is difficult. It is why practices don’t merge, don’t introduce new roles, don’t make changes to how they operate, and don’t jump into bed with the local hospital just because they are under pressure. The changes may be logically sensible to an outsider, but if they are not underpinned by a strong desire to take whatever action is needed they won’t be implemented.

The big mistake made by those trying to lead change in general practice is starting with the solution, with a description of the change that is to be implemented. Taking the desire to actually make the change for granted, on the basis of the parlous state of general practice, is a fast track to failure.

Professor John Kotter, regarded by many as the leading contemporary expert on change, believes[1] assuming people know they are in trouble and need to change, and focussing instead on strategy and solutions, is what kills most change efforts. He differentiates between a “false” sense of urgency whereby people feel anxious, angry and frustrated, and a “true” sense of urgency whereby people have a powerful desire to move, successfully, now. The former does not lead to taking action, but the latter does. GPs feeling under pressure and angry is not the same as GPs wanting to make a change.

Ultimately I made my decision to leave based on a strong desire to create a new future for myself. After many months of anxiety, frustration, and (frankly) inaction, I reached a point of determination to make a change, however hard it would be. It was only then I was able to actually resign. To be successful, those leading change in general practice must first focus on establishing a sense of urgency for change, before ploughing into the details of the uncertain future they want to create for their GP colleagues.

[1] A Sense of Urgency, Kotter J.P. Harvard Business Review Press, 2008

15
feb
0

Why the new GP contract is disappointing

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

There has been a cautiously positive reaction to the GP contract. But for at least one enthusiast for general practice, it doesn’t live up to its promise. Here, Ben Gowland explains his huge disappointment…

The GP Forward View was published in April last year. It promised an additional recurrent investment of £2.4bn into general practice. But for all its rhetoric, the finances have been hard to pin down. After a raft of national pots of money that have all translated into very little at local level, all hopes were pinned on additional money arriving in the core contract.

And has it? Well in 2015/16 the contract was uplifted by £220m, the equivalent of 3.2%. That was pre-GPFV. So what was the outcome of the 2016/17 contract, the first one after the publication of the GPFV? An uplift of £239m, or 3.3%. An almost identical award.

What does it mean for the promised additional £2.4bn? Well at the current rate of uplift, which does not like it will change, an additional £1.3bn will have been added by 2020/21. The global numbers sound a lot, but the reality is last year’s contract award did little to assuage the problems faced by general practice, and there is no reason to believe that similar uplifts next year and for three years afterwards will have a greater impact. The rises continue to be offset by a parallel growth in costs.

The tinkering with the elements of the contract, and moving money from one part of the contract to another, really only acts as a smokescreen for the overall failure to invest. It creates opportunities for people who don’t understand general practice to complain about specific elements (e.g. funding the cost of CQC registration), and leads to odd behaviours (e.g. locums increasing their fees by 2% because of the indemnity reimbursement).

The only significant recurrent additional funding in the GPFV, on top of the contract awards, is the funding for additional access. This is £500m, and we know it translates into £6 per head of population. But it is not funding for individual practices. The sites involved in the prime minister’s challenge fund, which receive the money recurrently from April onwards, have to bid for a large single contract. So it is only really available to large organisations. Plus, individual practices just don’t want to do it. As one GP explained to me, if a practice receives what amounts to £115 per patient for 8 – 6.30 Monday to Friday, why would they extend that to 8 to 8 7 days a week for an additional £6 per patient?

So where is the rest of the GPFV money? £2.4bn has been promised. £1.3bn will be in the core contract. £500m is for extended access. Where is the other £600m? I have not yet met anyone who can answer this. It begs the question as to whether it will ever arrive.

Worse, NHS England are predicting a £70m underspend on primary care and public health budgets this year. An underspend that will offset an overspend in the acute sector. Changes to the tariff have pushed many CCGs into financial difficulties, and it seems unlikely all will be able to meet the requirement to provide £3 a head to general practice in the next 2 years. And it is not official, but I am yet to meet someone who does not believe the promised £900m capital fund (the Estate and Technology Transformation Fund, or ETTF) has been cut.

The GPFV made specific promises about putting funding into general practice. This year’s contract award was the last chance for NHS England to demonstrate it was going to meet these promises. But the contract disappoints, and instead reinforces a growing belief these promises are never going to be met.

8
feb
0

GP Mergers – A Blessed Union?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

In the first of a short series of guest blogs, Robert McCartney warns that the marriage of two practices will only be a success when there is a healthy pre-nuptial agreement between both parties.

Mergers are the ultimate form of marriage between GP practices. When they include the consolidation of the contract into a single patient list it becomes incredibly difficult, maybe impossible, to separate them again. As a consequence, the parties must understand the commitment they are entering into as there is no easy divorce.

During my recent podcast with Ben Gowland at Ockham Healthcare I stated that spending the time understanding and sharing a common vision of the future is essential. This applies to the relationship analogy. The most successful marriages are built upon a shared vision for their future, an understanding that there may be challenges but they will be overcome together and a trust that your partner will support you despite the occasional disagreements.

If the ‘soft’ merger elements linked to developing the relationships, like creating a shared vision and building a framework for the future of the partnership are rushed, the ‘hard’ formal merger steps may still happen but it increases the likelihood that the merger will fail.

Practices are currently under immense pressure and time is not a luxury many GPs have. Whereas a corporate merger may take months or even years to achieve, GP practices are looking to complete the process within a few months.

Fortunately, unlike a marriage there are some firm, definable objectives that all practices will be working towards. By ensuring that the parties focus on these at the earliest possible opportunity the ‘dating’ process can be accelerated with a reduced degree of risk.

The parties need to be willing to be forthcoming and ‘lay their cards on the table’ at an earlier stage than they may otherwise want to do. This openness is essential. In the past year, I have seen proposed mergers fall apart for a range of reasons based on people not being open until far too late in the process. This includes; forgetting significant funding repayment plans on properties; an unrealistic expectation as to equivalent sessional pay; and, despite comments to the contrary in the initial discussions, a complete refusal to consider using allied health professionals.

I have found that practices considering mergers have benefitted from having an independent third party facilitate and structure these discussions. This is especially important where time is of the essence. They are the pre-marriage counsellors focused on ensuring the merged practice is built on firm foundations.

For more information or if you would like support in any merger process you are considering or undertaking please do not hesitate to contact me.

Robert is Managing Director of McCartney Healthcare Associates Limited. He is an expert on practice mergers and this is the first of a short series of blogs he will be writing for Ockham Healthcare. If your practice needs a helping hand with its fledgling relationships, you can contact Robert via e-mail at rm@mccartneyhealth.co.uk or call 0203 287 9336.

 

1
feb
0

The Future of GP Visiting

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

In his latest blog Ben reflects on attempts to set up an outsourced GP visiting service and what it taught him about the way GP practices innovate.

A few years ago, when I was working in a GP federation, we set up a GP visiting service. The basic premise of the service was that, because GPs were so busy, they were not able to meet all the patient requests for visits. As a result, we hypothesised, patients were being admitted to hospital when an admission could potentially have been avoided if a visit had taken place. So we funded a pilot in which the out-of-hours service provided a GP to carry out visits during the day that they would not otherwise have been able to carry out.

Do you think it worked? It didn’t. The service was not fully utilised (despite only one GP being available for 30 practices). Uptake was limited to a relatively small number of practices, with many of the practices rarely, if ever, using the service. It was not possible to produce any correlation between the service itself and emergency admission rates (which instead stubbornly continued to rise), and, unsurprisingly, the pilot was stopped.

Contrast this with a practice I visited recently. There they have paramedics for 6 sessions a week, who carry out 5 or 6 visits a day, for a practice that in total undertakes between 7 and 10 visits a day. There are clear parameters in place for visits the paramedic will undertake and those that are best carried out by a GP, e.g. palliative care visits. The practice is extremely happy with the service and is soon to increase the number of paramedic sessions from 6 to 8.

In Shropshire the local out-of-hours provider Shropdoc has developed an Urgent Care Practitioner role in which staff with a paramedic, nursing or physician associate background are trained to be able to offer (amongst other things) home visits for GP practices. The role is proving extremely popular both with staff and practices alike. You can see a video of the service here.

A visit for a GP, with all of the travel involved, is a time consuming activity. While average consultation times may average 8-10 minutes, the total time required for a visit is at least double that, and often much more. Practices vary considerably in the number of visits they undertake. A recent comparison across five practices working in the same town revealed a fivefold difference in visit rates – varying from an average of 0.2 visits per 1000 patient population per day, to 1 visit per 1000 patient population per day.

So where did I go wrong with the GP visiting service we instituted, and what are others now doing right? I think I failed to fully understand visits are an integral part of the service a GP practice offers. Any attempts to change the way they are carried out must be fully owned and bought into by the GPs in the practice. Trying to “outsource” visits to a separate agency that does not know the patients is unlikely to work. A more successful approach is to use other roles, as long as they operate under the guidance of the GPs and not separate from them.

Equally, success in the redesign of GP visits cannot in isolation be measured by the number of emergency admissions. It is the continuity of care GP practices offer that will ultimately support patients to manage their conditions effectively. Freeing up scarce GP time to be deployed where it is needed most (which, paradoxically, will sometimes be in a patient’s home) is now a critical factor in enabling this, and would have been a much better measure of success.

It is hard to replace the long hours GPs work (at no extra cost) with a paramedic or nurse practitioner in a small, cash-strapped practice. As practices become bigger they have more freedom and more flexibility to experiment with different systems for triaging requests for visits, with the introduction of new roles, and with new ways of working for visits.

In my attempts to set up a visiting service I should have remembered that most successful change in general practice is generated within the practice itself, not imposed from outside. Changing the system for practice visits proved to be no exception. In future, as practices become larger they will have more capacity to test different ways of working and that is one of the reasons I established Ockham Healthcare; to support and promote the many innovations that will inevitably result.

25
jan
0

The New Multispecialty Community Provider (MCP) contract and CCGs

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

In his second summary of the new MCP contract Ben looks at the likely impact on CCGs – and finds it is a case of “out with the new and in with the old”…

What does the new MCP contract mean for CCGs? Well, for all the range of documents published only two target specific groups: general practice (which was not surprising); and commissioners (which was). This was the first major clue that major upheaval is at hand.

The second clue was the way the document on MCPs and the commissioning system starts, “the new models… will not remove the established boundary between commissioning and provision. CCG statutory functions will not change”. You know trouble is coming when a document begins with what is not going to change.

The document then basically says while the statutory duties of CCGs will remain (so no acts of parliament required), most of what they actually do can (and will) be discharged through MCPs. It provides a list which states the only activities CCGs can undertake that MCPs can’t is: produce an annual commissioning plan; develop outcome measures and monitoring for MCPs; take responsibility for the overall performance of the local health care system; and create a contract to spread risk between the MCP and the CCG, as well as have responsibility for providers outside of the scope of the MCP. I.e. not much.

Interestingly it is in the finance document not the commissioning document where it is explicitly stated that management funding will transfer from the CCG to the new MCP: “an assessment will be made of current CCG and CSU spend on activities carried out by the MCP that will support commissioning. The value of this spend will transfer from CCG admin budgets to the MCP whole population budget”.

As a consequence we will need less CCGs, so the residual statutory functions can be carried out at lower cost. To really understand the following quote, insert “will have to” for “may want to” (it is only existing legislation that precludes the document from being more directive), “CCGs may want to consider whether the establishment of a new care model means that it would be appropriate to pool functions and management arrangements with neighbouring CCGs. This may be the case where an MCP or PACS cover the entirety or bulk of the CCG area; and where key CCG staff and capability will transfer to the new provider. In some cases the CCG may want to consider merger with another CCG.”

Even then CCGs won’t operate separately from the MCPs. “CCGs and new care model providers should maximise opportunities for making shared use of administrative resources. For example, creating and operating successful new care models will require a new set of information management and analytical approaches by both CCGs and providers… CCGs and new care model providers should look at how they might work together to develop a shared business intelligence capability rather than invest in potentially more costly separate functions. The same applies to other back office functions e.g. payroll.”

Of course, in the “virtual” MCP model, the changes are not so drastic. When I was looking at the draft of the alliance agreement for the virtual model, at first I was confused by the inclusion of commissioners on the alliance leadership team. Isn’t the point of an MCP that it is an integration of providers, deciding together how to deliver services? But, the document explains, they are included because their role is to make changes to underlying service contracts as a result of agreements within the alliance.

This makes sense in the context of MCPs taking over the lion’s share of what is currently considered commissioning. The only difference is in the virtual model the staff are still employed by the CCG and have not yet transferred their employment. In the partial and fully integrated models these staff will transfer and be responsible for “sub-contracting” between the MCP and its linked providers.

So MCPs carry out a range of commissioning functions, directly provide community services, include public health, and have a relationship based on section 75 agreements with social care. Is there something familiar here? Indeed, there is. The partially integrated model in particular is extremely similar to the (pre-transforming community services) primary care trusts. Everything above, plus a separate national GP contract but an ability to create local enhanced services, GPs as part of the management team (remember PECs?), and a clear role as system leader (integrator). For all the packaging of the new models of care as new and exciting, the new partially integrated model in particular will have to work hard to explain how it will be different from that particular version of the past.

In summary, the impact on commissioners of the formation of a local MCP is the end of a local CCG, and the creation of larger (more distant) CCGs focussed on a much narrower range of functions, and the creation of MCPs as integrated organisations that will undertake many of the existing commissioning functions, and which may or may not look like the old PCTs.

18
jan
1

The New Multispecialty Community Provider (MCP) Contract

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

Just before Christmas NHS England published a draft of the proposed new MCP contract, along with a set of supporting documentation (15 documents in all). In this latest Blog Ben Gowland considers the implications of these documents, and what it all means for general practice.

First, it is important to clarify this is not a new GP contract. The documentation clarifies it thus, “The (MCP) contract itself is not a contract with GP practices. GP participation with the MCP would be underpinned though an alliance agreement or the integration agreement in addition to the existing GMS/PMS/APMS contract, or through moving directly to work as employees for, or sub-contractors to, and MCP”. We will come to “alliance” and “integration” agreements shortly, but for now all talk of a “new GP contract” is misleading, because that is not what this is. Rather it is a contract with a new entity, an “MCP”.

So what is an MCP? It is a new provider, that brings together (“integrates”) existing providers. The range of these providers can vary, but it can include general practice, community trusts, social care, public health and specialised services. There are three different levels of “integration”, and the greater the integration, the greater the loss of independence for the participating organisations, and the greater the autonomy for the new MCP organisation. Along this spectrum there is a virtual MCP, a partially integrated MCP, and a fully integrated MCP. I will explore each of these in more detail below.

Virtual MCP. In this model no new organisation is actually formed and an MCP is not actually created. The existing contracts between commissioners and individual providers remain. The key difference is that an “alliance agreement” is put in place between the providers (including with the GP practices). The aim of this agreement is to “establish an improved financial, governance and contractual framework for the delivery of services”. There is a legal framework for the agreement supplied in the documentation (over 30 pages long), and it contains more specific actions than simply agreeing working together is a good idea. The more interesting things to note about it are: 1) the responsibility for establishing the alliance agreement in the first place lies with the providers wanting to create the virtual MCP; 2) an “alliance leadership team” is required, with representatives from all of the participating organisations that will make decisions in relation to the alliance; and 3) it can allow for GP practice participation in any local gain/loss mechanisms agreed for activity outside of the MCP (i.e. with the acute trust).

So while an MCP is not really created, the alliance agreement is still potentially powerful, as it creates a mechanism for collective decision making binding upon the members of the alliance, and as such represents the first step away from independence for participating GP practices. Equally it enables GP practices to positively benefit from gains made by the different organisations working together.

Partially Integrated MCP. In this model the contracts of the providers, with the exception of primary medical services, are brought together. So this time a new organisation, an MCP, is actually created, but separate contracts are held with general practice.

But it is not quite as simple as that. It is only the core contracts that are held separately from the MCP. The MCP contract requires it to ensure that its services and GMS/PMS are operationally integrated, to deliver seamless care for patients. Non-core income is clearly a mechanism to enable this, a point which is addressed thus, “We recognise that some GPs are concerned about the potential to lose non-core income and whether local enhanced services would be included in the MCP contract scope to ensure that their delivery is managed in an integrated way with other MCP services. If they are, local agreements could well see GPs delivering these, or additional services, as sub-contractors to the MCP. Local discussion will need to take account of these issues as GP participation in the model is agreed, including the maintenance of appropriate practice income”. So where there is a partially integrated MCP, practices will get core income from their existing commissioner (CCG or NHS England depending on level of delegation), and non-core income as a sub-contractor of the MCP.

Other financial impacts on practices are that practices can be offered an alternative to QOF to align practice incentives with that of the MCP. There may also be the opportunity to participate in the gain/loss share arrangements the MCP develops, which are essentially for levels of acute activity. Noteworthy here is that at one point the guidance states, “GPs in some areas are exploring the possibility of agreeing a gain-only agreement with the MCP”.

In this partially integrated model there is what it is described as an “integration agreement” between all the providers who are coming together to form the MCP, including the GP practices who are receiving core services via a separate contract. This is a much more directive document than the alliance agreement in the virtual model. This is because the document exists to ensure there is sufficient involvement of primary care, and what it does is create a framework for shared governance and decision making with the practices, and sets out the primary care contribution to the MCP model. A template integration agreement is included in the set of documents, and it contains elements such as, “all share in the savings generated by reduction in acute activity”, “GPs work towards reducing variation and unnecessary admissions (where appropriate) by agreeing a common set of protocols with the MCP”, “practices will make their booking system accessible to the MCP under local agreed protocols”, and “GPs will work with the MCP to achieve local primary access requirements”.

The partially integrated model therefore marks a further step away from the level of independence practices currently enjoy. The agreement is governed by an “integration leadership team”, on which all participating practices are represented, but which can decide and monitor how integration takes place. And again, “it will be for the MCP contract bidder to demonstrate that agreement has been reached with local practices on the Integration Agreement”.

Fully Integrated MCP. The third and most radical model is a new MCP organisation that includes core general practice, either via termination or a suspension of the current contracts. Immediately the whole ‘right to return’ question for existing GMS/PMS contracts raises its head, and this is dealt with in the document. Practices can reactivate their contracts either at expiry or termination of the MCP contract (which will be 10-15 years in length), or at regular two year intervals throughout its lifetime. The only sting in the tail is that, “A GP considering a return to GMS/PMS will need to articulate how the care the patient will receive from the new practice will compare to the care provided by the MCP”.

GPs and practice staff become salaried employees of the new MCP organisation, the terms of which they must negotiate directly with those leading the new MCP. They will receive rent for their premises via the funding that is first transferred to the MCP, and it will be up to the GPs to agree with the MCP the terms on which these payments will be passed on. The guidance states, “For GPs there may be an option to explore the sale of their premises to the MCP on mutually acceptable terms, though we would expect this to only take place in limited circumstances where there was clear value for money”. And in the fully integrated model indemnity cover for GPs and practice staff will be paid for by the MCP as the employing organisation.

A point to note on the fully integrated model is that the draft contract is based on APMS conditions. This means practices who choose to join will be giving up their existing GMS/PMS conditions and in the new model will be bound by APMS conditions. While you can argue it is the new MCP provider that is technically bound by these terms, the reality is that the expectations of provision of services of the GPs within the new organisation will be the delivery of what is in effect an APMS contract. Now the documentation does have a side note, stating, “In due course all such provisions will be amended to reflect or refer to the appropriate provisions of forthcoming Directions specific to MCP/PACS contracts”. I suspect the development of these terms may be a critical factor in the attractiveness or otherwise of the model, and a process GPs will very much want the GPC to be part of. As this process unfolds it will be interesting to see the extent to which the development of the fully integrated model actually represents a move away from a nationally negotiated GP contract.

So the fully integrated option means the end of independent general practice as we know it. While, as one of the documents states, “some GPs will prefer to move to the MCP as employees to improve their work life balance”, others are undoubtedly going to need some significant persuading.

Even those most evangelical about MCPs recognise the engagement of general practice is both critical and yet at the same time difficult to secure. A dedicated document is included on GP participation in an MCP. It comes up with the following reasons as to why GPs should consider it:

  • It can give GPs a more manageable and rewarding workload
  • It provides a contractual framework to share work between practices
  • It creates wider development opportunities for GPs that enable greater job satisfaction, including the opportunity to influence the wider system
  • It gives GPs greater influence over financial and staff resources, and over community services, and allows resources to be put where they are most needed
  • It gives access to a broader, more in-depth range of services in primary care settings
  • It will enable multidisciplinary team working that reduces handoffs for general practice
  • It has the potential to increase recruitment and improve retention for general practice by providing a structure for a larger primary care team

But with the promises of what the formation of CCGs could offer practices still ringing hollow in the ears of many GPs, and a commitment for much of this to happen anyway through the GPFV, none of this strikes me as overly convincing. It is either going to have provide a way out for practices who have had enough, or a route to really channelling additional resources into general practice if take up at any sort of significant scale is going to happen.

One route that would potentially give GPs more confidence this is going to happen is if the MCP organisation itself is owned by the GPs. This is referenced as an option, as a company limited by shares or a limited liability partnership. But new MCPs will need capital for start-up costs to deliver the infrastructure, working capital to pay salaries etc ahead of receipt of revenues, and contingency reserves. In the cash-strapped environment of the NHS it seems highly unlikely that many, if any, GP-owned models will emerge, as the incentives to put up this type of capital do not seem strong enough. Much more likely is that an existing NHS organisation will own or host the new MCP organisations. At best, we might see joint ventures between GP and NHS organisations.

The documentation refers on a number of occasions to “mixed economies”, where different practices from the same area choose different levels of sign up to the local MCP model, in particular with some choosing the partially integrated relationship and others the fully integrated. Where this happens it will be interesting to see the impact it has on the power of the voice of general practice, and whether it will be diminished. Even where local practices want to move together, it is not hard to envisage a situation where any failing practices or ones that return their list are “fully integrated” by commissioners at the earliest opportunity, meaning mixed economies are created anyway. Once the wheels are in motion, they may become difficult to stop.

GPs, then, will be considering the potential benefits on offer, and deciding whether the MCP route, with its associated costs to independence and the glimpse these documents provide to a future weighed down under the burden of NHS bureaucracy, is the best one for delivering them. Whilst there has been a growing disillusionment with independent practitioner status in recent years, support for it remains at well over 50%. My sense is the energy behind the primary care home movement, and the current shift towards collaboration and federation of practices, may represent not a step towards MCPs, but the creation of a more acceptable alternative to it, one that enables practices to build system relationships, take on new roles, change the way they manage demand, but at the same time maintain control over their own destiny.

Next week Ben will look at the implications of the new contract for CCGs

11
jan
0

Top Five Countdown – Our Most Popular Podcasts of 2016

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Incredibly, the Ben Gowland podcast, a weekly podcast looking at innovation and new ways of working in general practice, is approaching a year old. We are taking this opportunity to count down our Top Five most popular podcasts and so highlight some of those you might have missed. So far, we have published 45 episodes…but which ones make it into the Top Five?

In reverse order, the Top Five are…

At Number 5 it’s Rebecca Rosen with Lessons from large scale general practice

In July the Nuffield Trust published a report, “Is Bigger Better? Lessons for large scale general practice”. I talked to Rebecca Rosen, one of the authors, to try and get underneath the implications of the report. One of the things the report found was the limited impact at scale general practice had on quality, and it begged the question as to whether the current mindset that bigger is necessarily better holds up to closer scrutiny. So I was really interested to find out from Rebecca, a practicing GP herself, whether she herself thinks “bigger” general practice is indeed better.

At Number 4 we find Tracey Vell with Trialling the MCP Contract in Manchester

Much has been made (and continues to be made) about the introduction of the new MCP (multispecialty community provider) contract, and in particular why GP partners would give up their existing contracts for one that is time limited and potentially relegates them to the role of salaried employee. Tracey Vell is a GP, LMC chair in Manchester, and the lead general practice negotiator on the introduction of the MCP contract in Manchester, one of the six pilot areas for the new contract. It was only after this conversation that I really understood why GPs are even considering it.

And at Number 3 sits Neil Langridge with physiotherapists in general practice

The introduction of new roles into general practice makes the first of two appearances in our top five at number three. Neil Langridge, a consultant physiotherapist, describes his experience of working in a GP practice, and explains the value physiotherapists can deliver is not in the direct provision of physiotherapy within practices, but in delivering the initial assessment of patient needs. He explains how not only has he diverted considerable work from the GPs, but also the impact he has made on the referral rate to orthopaedics, making the idea attractive to both practices and CCGs alike.

Straight in at Number 2 with a bullet is Jeannie Watkins with Physician Associates

Despite only being published in December this podcast was the fastest downloaded of all, and in less than 3 weeks still made number 2 on our overall list. Having already spoken to real-life physician associates (PAs) Ria Agarwal and Andy King in episode 40 about their experiences working in general practice, in this episode I spoke to Jeannie Watkins, the RCP lead for PAs, about the pipeline of PAs coming through the system and the opportunities this creates for general practice. It turns out while many GPs find the idea of PAs difficult, those that work with them in practice can’t speak highly enough of them and the contribution they make!

And, at Number 1 we have Stewart Smith with the transformation of general practice in St Austell

The runaway leader in terms of number of downloads in 2016 is Dr Stewart Smith, talking about the amazing transformation of general practice in the Cornish town of St Austell. Trouble beset one of the practices in the town and eventually it had to give back its list. What follows is an incredible story of how the other practices in the town responded, and turned what was a crisis into an opportunity to create real transformation. Stewart describes how all the practices in the town merged and took the failing practice over. They then closed it, refurbished it, and reopened it as an acute care hub using a multidisciplinary team to see all the on the day demand from across the town. All within the space of a year!

It has been a fantastic first year for the podcast, and I have had the chance to talk to some amazing people, and find out that, contrary to what we are regularly told, innovation and new ways of working are alive and well in general practice!

We have some great guests lined up for 2017, including the GP behind one single change that is saving GPs up to an hour a day of administration time! You can subscribe to the podcast on iTunes, or you can become an Ockham subscriber (here) and we will send you the link to the podcast and this blog every week. And if you know of, or even are involved, in any exciting developments in general practice do get in touch, and maybe you can be the next guest on the podcast and find yourself in next year’s Top Five…

 

14
dec
0

Recent Developments in General Practice: Autumn 2016

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

This week Ben Gowland turns his attention to our quarterly review of all that is new in general practice. And what a three months it’s been…

The planning guidance is out there

First off, the release of the NHS planning guidance. You can read our take on what this means for general practice, but essentially its distillation of the GP Forward View (GPFV) was an extra £3 a head for practices from CCGs in either 2017/18 or 2018/19 (or split across the two), and extra money for access from 2018 onwards (£3.34 per head in 2018/19 rising to £6 per head in 2019/20). CCGs have to produce a plan by 23rd December as to how they are going to implement (and fund!) the GPFV locally. We produced some thoughts for CCGs to ponder when crafting these plans, urging them to nurture and build on the seeds of local momentum rather than impose top down change.

Is operating at scale still an answer?

Many of these plans will inevitably include hopes of general practice operating at scale in future. We have seen some notable successes – City and Hackney GP Confederation put on a conference in November to share their achievements, and the country’s largest “super-practice”, Our Health Partnership in Birmingham, shared their progress over the last 6 months. However, all is not rosy in the at-scale garden. Horizon Health Choices Ltd in Bedfordshire, a 54 practice federation, went into liquidation proving yet again that scale itself is not the answer; but how you do it is. Our quick guide to introducing change in general practice will help anyone embarking on that particular journey.

Running with the GPFV

What of the GPFV? Well the latest allocations for the Estates and Technology Transformation Fund were released, and were generally less than expected and given a national prioritisation that differed from (and superseded) those made locally. We took time out to consider the trends in the world of primary care estates, where many GPs are looking for an exit route which the new models of care might just provide!

Interestingly, momentum in the GPFV implementation seems to have mainly come from internal productivity improvements within practices. CCGs received their share of funds for training medical assistants and GP receptionists, and (somewhat surprisingly?) it is having a huge impact. The 10 high impact changes, initially dismissed as a gimmick by most on first reading of the GPFV, are rapidly becoming one of the most useful parts of the document. Maybe even more surprisingly physician associates are starting to show the impact they can have on GP practices.

Collaborating with patients

Social prescribing, meanwhile, is gaining increasing credibility as a way of blurring the boundaries between primary health care and social care. Its most practical (and, in our view, finest) application is the development of leg clubs – using the need for medical treatment to create a sense of community and to tackle the social isolation leg ulcers can bring. New life has even been breathed into the often-dreaded patient participation group (PPG), with the development of virtual PPGs enabling much wider local participation in the practice than the traditional meeting format.

Sustaining and transforming…

The STP plans were also (finally!) published. The main complaint pre-publication was the lack of GP provider involvement on the STP boards. We looked at how general practice should be represented, and argue it is a choice GP practices should make for themselves as opposed to one imposed by the system. Given most of the STPs are reliant on a “transformation” of out of hospital care, lack of early involvement of general practice may be something areas come to rue later on.

New models of care

GP enthusiasm for MCPs has (at best) remained neutral over the last few months. Dudley CCG have published the first specification, but the promised draft MCP contract due in September has been put back until January, with growing murmurings of unrest from some of the practices involved. The second wave of primary care home sites was announced. Despite having no money attached, it was heavily subscribed. Even Simon Stevens acknowledged this is where the enthusiasm in general practice lies.

In fact one of the original primary care home rapid test sites, Beacon Medical Group, houses the newly acclaimed GP of the Year, Dr Jonathan Cope. Richly deserved. If you don’t know what he has been up to you can listen to him explain both how they transformed the way the practice works by introducing new roles , and how the practice has become a system integrator by building an impressive range of partnerships.

The legacy of CCGs

Simon Stevens hasn’t just spoken of the value of primary care homes. At the NAPC conference, as well as saying that QOF “was now nearing the end of its useful life”, he exhorted GPs to make general practice the CCG’s priority. If the legacy of an underfunded general practice remains after the period when GPs have been in charge of the money, and after an extra £2.4bn has been promised nationally, the implication was that it will be on GPs’ own hands.

What do you buy the GP who has everything?

But the highlight of the last few months has undoubtedly been the publication of our first book, “The Future of General Practice”. Described by one reviewer as, “probably the best summary of the options open to general practice that I have seen. It is… packed with examples, tips, lessons and practical guidance… I heartily recommend it to everyone interested in the options for GP development”. Christmas present – sorted.

Have a great Christmas!

7
dec
0

Welcome to the club – the rise of Leg Clubs

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Guest Blog by Amanda Brookes, Locality/Projects Manager – Bradford-On-Avon and Melksham

Anyone working in general practice cannot fail to be aware of the misery that leg ulcers bring to their patients; regular attendances and multiple medications, legs wrapped like the Michelin man, the discomfort and the smell. No wonder so many patients end up with depression and social isolation.

But, as I discovered, it doesn’t have to be that way.

In 2008 the practices I worked for established a provider company and won a bid to provide the Level 2 Leg Ulcer Contract to sixteen practices in West Wiltshire. As we developed our specialist team of nurses and HCAs it became clear to me that the treatment of leg ulcers was a neglected area and that patients were suffering unnecessarily; there had to be an alternative. At the same time, with my Business Manager head on, I was concerned with the costs of multiple attendances and the rising cost of specialist bandaging.

Although I am not a clinician, in 2010 I attended the annual conference of the Lindsay Leg Club Foundation and was immensely inspired by Ellie Lindsay OBE and the model for Leg Clubs which she had developed in the mid-nineties.

Ellie was an ex-District Nurse and had set up around 25 Leg Clubs, led by District Nurses who invite housebound, potentially socially isolated patients into a social setting for care and chat. Her results on healing and recurrence rates were excellent. I invited her to talk to our Leg Ulcer team and we were so impressed we began talks locally on how this model might be made to work in primary care.

For those who don’t know, a Leg Club is an evidence-based initiative which provides community-based treatment, health promotion, education, ongoing care and social activities for people of all age groups who are experiencing leg-related problems.

Following a merger with two smaller practices, our original patient base of 14,000 grew to over 20,000 which resulted in more patients with leg ulcers and a lack of space. This was the ideal push we needed and we began to pursue the Leg Club model in earnest.

The doctors and nurses I worked with were incredibly enthusiastic but it was difficult to gain interest from those who held the purse strings. So we began a very time-consuming and frustrating hunt for sources of money. It was at this time, after running a number of community events with charitable organisations, that I came to the realisation that leg ulcers are not sexy!

It became bit of a running joke with colleagues, every-time I met anyone who could help or would listen, I talked Leg Clubs! I’m afraid I became mildly obsessed and evangelical but it paid off in the end when the Friends of Bradford on Avon Community Health Care gave me £12,000 of funding. Others then followed.

And it turns out the model can very much be made to work in primary care. General practice nurses provide the drop-in clinical support (through six stations) in a local community hall and we have a Doppler machine as part of a patient’s first assessment. A committee made up of Leg Club members is in control of the social side which includes activities such as a Balance and Falls Class, structured short walks program, an arts group, access to a podiatrist, support from a care co-ordinator, dementia advisor and ad hoc speakers such as Carers Support and Age UK – all of which remain accessible to members even once their legs are healed.

We estimate that members coming to the Leg Club have saved the practice around 20 appointments a week. The well-leg regime has no funds attached – but as our recurrence rates fell over two years from 75% to 25% there is evidence that it is a cost effective model. Membership is at 600, and legs are now healed in an average of 12 weeks, whereas in 2014 it was 19-24 weeks.

It is a constant battle to raise funds for the social side but we have regular fund raising events and local industry partners are very important.

The patients love attending the Club and the nurses love it also because they are not constricted by time; consequently the atmosphere is positive and fun. The practice likes it because it has reduced the number of times this group of patients come to the surgery and in many cases, their mental wellbeing has improved.

If you are thinking of setting up a Leg Club yourself then I strongly recommend you contact the Lindsay Leg Club Foundation (information at www.legclub.org– and you’ll see us on there!)

There is a lot of planning, fundraising and awareness-raising to be done before a Leg Club opens. There needs to be a Champion or Lead with the passion to take this project forward; it’s hard work and needs on-going support once the club opens. Nurses need to be trained in the infection control standards for community based care as well as admin staff to learn how the patient record and audits are produced. The Leg Club Foundation carries out an audit once a year by an independent clinical consultant and keeps a check that all the standards are being met and are safe. The Club submits weekly audits and any corrections are fed back to us to rectify.

I know I have become evangelical about Leg Clubs, but for a reason. They do work clinically, they make business sense and they provide a better service for patients. But if you are still not convinced you can either watch our short video on the subject here or contact me via email at amanda.brookes@nhs.net

30
nov
0

Where to start with CCG GPFV plans

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The crisis in general practice has led to individual practices making changes, on their own at first and then increasingly together.  CCGs should be facilitating this process through their GPFV plans rather than introducing big picture change, argues Ben Gowland.

There is something going on in general practice. Change is afoot. While nationally all of the talk and rhetoric is around STPs, new models of care and operating at scale, practices seem to be taking a different approach. CCGs should take note.

At the risk of stating the obvious, general practice is not one organisation. It is 7800 independent, individual business units, all operating in their own way. While the contract they deliver against is (essentially) a national one, how they choose to deliver against that contract is up to them. And it varies significantly. No two practices work in the same way.

Despite its obvious drawbacks, this variation has created a huge opportunity. For every single practice there are better ways they could be doing at least some things. For some practices there are better ways they could be doing most things. And as the crisis in general practice has started to bite, the response has been (as is the way of general practice) pragmatic. Practices are starting to focus on how they do things internally. “How we have always done things around here” is no longer good enough, because it no longer works.

What is starting to emerge are changes with quite astonishing results. Hours of administration time removed because of changes to the way documents are handled. Huge reductions in DNA rates because of changes to the way appointments, and cancellations, are handled. Swathes of clinical work moved from GPs as a result of the introduction of different types of clinician into the practice team. New types of appointment creating more efficient ways of meeting the ever increasing demand. The lives of the duty doctors being literally transformed by internal re-shaping of how appointments are handled.

Making the first real change is always the most difficult. But once achieved it often creates a thirst for more. Practices that were previously impenetrable islands suddenly let the drawbridge down, keen to share their success with others, and are newly open to learning from the success of others. This sharing brings mutual success, builds trust and strengthens relationships that had grown cold through the winter of the crisis.

And out of this trust and these relationships further improvements and changes are found to be possible. Accountancy fees, indemnity fees, regulation costs (and more) are starting to be reduced by practices working together. More new roles are introduced. GP-led multidisciplinary teams enable practices to tackle the workload in different ways, freeing up GP time for the patients who need it most. Once the rock is moving, it develops pace, energy and impact, and more and more is achieved.

All around the country (but not everywhere) this is starting to happen. The hard bit is the first step – recognising there are other ways to do things, and then making the first change happen inside the practice. Talking about big picture change in locality or CCG meetings is not what is important. Arguments about the rights or wrongs of MCPs won’t help. It is only doing something differently at the individual practice level that has an impact, that can get things moving.

Which brings me to CCG GPFV plans. General practice is still in crisis. Don’t turn the plan into a strategic template for the introduction of MCPs, or a way to fulfil a requirement for 7 day working when 5 days is currently out of reach, or the creation of complex bidding processes for limited pots of money in the name of “equity”. Instead, use the plans to help practices take the first step, or if they have taken the first step the second, or the third, or whichever is the next step to build the momentum local practices need to find a way out of their current predicament.

23
nov
0

What the Changes to General Practice Mean for Primary Care Premises

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The secret to what will happen in the future to primary care premises lies in the past. Understanding the current crisis in general practice provides vital clues as to the impact the new models of care and the like will have on estates.

The growth in demand on general practice (the number of consultations per head of population has more than doubled in recent years, in addition to the overall population growth) has not been matched by a similar growth in resources. The general practice estate is no longer big enough. Worse, the growth in regulation and the shift to NHS Property Services means the existing estate is becoming more and more of a cost pressure. Even though new, bigger premises are desirable, they are not necessarily affordable.

There are also less and less GP partners. In the last 10 years the number of GP partners has dropped by 9% while the number of salaried GPs has increased by 260%. As GP partners have become harder to recruit, many places have had to look at how to drop the requirement to buy into the property in order to attract new partners. As a result, GPs and GP practices are increasingly looking to “cash in” their property.

To cope with the pressures, general practice is making changes to the way it operates. New roles, such as pharmacists, physiotherapists and paramedics are being introduced to the practice; but only, of course, where they have the space. Less commonly, but increasingly representing the overall direction of travel, a number of places such as St Austell, Plymouth and Hampshire, are operating an urgent care “hub” – a single site where all of the on the day demand is seen by a multidisciplinary team, freeing up space on the other sites for longer planned and follow up appointments. And bigger practices are considering whether consolidation onto a smaller number of sites is possible in future.

But surely the Estates and Technology Fund has been put in place to address the estates problems in general practice? While the reduction in the match funding requirement is welcome (down from 33% to 0%), few practices so far have been able to benefit from the fund, especially compared to the number who spent hours completing the paperwork to bid for it in the first place.   Revenue consequences of new builds remain a problem for practices and CCGs alike, and the old notion that these simply have to be “absorbed” no longer washes.

The challenges general practice is experiencing mean some are looking to partner with other organisations to more effectively manage the demand. We are seeing more examples of practices joining up with volunteers and voluntary groups to offer more holistic care, and of practices trying to build links with community services. But space is a real barrier for many. Partnership working inevitably means some degree of co-location, and practices are not sat on empty rooms, waiting to be filled.

It may be that as a result of the new Sustainability and Transformation Plans (STPs) we have a reversion to some sensible join up of strategic estates planning, which will incorporate primary care premises. But it will need to happen quickly. In the meantime, the reality is that the new multispecialty community provider (MCP) and Primary and Acute Care Services (PACS) models offer a way out for general practice. When we dig underneath why GP practices are signing up to these new models, it is largely because these new contracts are offering to buy them out of their premises. Without this incentive, it is hard to see much movement towards them.

The pressure on general practice is such at present that if an attractive way out is presented, many are likely to take it. In the future, the trend will be to an increasing split of “hot” and “cold” GP sites, accelerated by the funding on its way for additional GP access. The move to operating at scale will ultimately lead to a reduction rather than an increase in the number of GP practice sites. And the development of MCPs and PACS models will see the estates increasingly owned by the community and acute trusts, within these new organisational forms.

16
nov
0

The one new role every single GP practice should adopt

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

In all the work I have done on new roles in general practice, the role I have probably paid least attention to is that of “medical assistant”. They are tucked away within the Releasing Capacity in General Practice programme, under high impact change number 4, “Develop the team”, bullet point 5. It is small wonder they get overlooked!

Plus they are not really new roles. It is actually training for existing administration staff, specifically those who code, to be able to read, code and action incoming clinical correspondence according to agreed protocols, as opposed to passing everything on to the GPs.

But the impact is huge. I visited a practice recently who had implemented this system, and they were evangelical about the benefits! According to them the new system was saving each GP up to an hour a day. When the biggest pressure on GPs is workload it is not hard to understand why a change that can make a difference like this is so popular.

Not only is the GP time saved, but coding actually improves, and the administration staff undertaking the new way of working enjoy it and feel like they are contributing more to the practice.

Here is how it works. A lead GP from the practice is put in charge of working out how the different mail coming into the practice can be processed. The starting point is a set of protocols, worked out from practices where this has already been introduced. They really just require tweaking to reflect the specific needs of each individual practice, and then reviewing over time to continually refine them. The aim is to reduce the number of letters that need to be processed by a GP.

So for example if there is a letter informing the GP a patient has failed to attend a mental health appointment, the agreed action could be “book telephone appointment with the GP”. Instead of the letter going backwards and forwards between the clerical staff and the GPs, the action is implemented straight away. If the practice wants a different process to be followed for this particular pathway, it can set its own rules for the clerical staff to follow. Meanwhile letters that the GP absolutely needs to see, such as a safeguarding issue or a serious or complex diagnosis, are passed straight on to a doctor.

The other key difference is that instead of the letters going to the GP to outline what needs to be coded, and the letter then coming back to the coders, the clerical team will code directly from the letter. After the initial training, the lead GP audits and checks and feeds back very regularly at first, but then increasingly infrequently, as the clerical team develop the skill set. The wasted GP time is cut out of the loop.

The practice I visited, who had been refining the system in their practice over 3 or 4 months, estimated a reduction of 70 to 80% in the correspondence now going to GPs, compared to before the introduction of the scheme.

This new way of working, which I have seen termed “workflow redirection”, “workflow optimisation” and “document handling”, depends very much on the oversight, governance and audit within the practice from the GP lead for it, and the new skills and new way of working of the administration team, or “medical assistants”. The practice I visited did feel that it increased the administration burden on the clerical team, and they had to increase capacity to absorb the additional requirements. The team in Brighton who first developed the change suggest it requires an additional 3.5 admin hours per day per 5,000 patients. You can see the video they have produced about the change here.

Introducing medical assistants might not be the sexiest of changes developed to support the challenges facing general practice at present, but it may well prove to be one of the most useful. If you are struggling to make any change at all in your practice, I would highly recommend you start with this one. Start with just one GP’s letters. Measure the benefits. Others will soon become interested!

9
nov
0

Who Can Represent General Practice Locally?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

To ensure they are adequately heard in the development of STPs, GP practices need a strong and clear voice. But who will represent them? In his latest blog Ben argues that there are a number of options but ultimately local GPs must decide this for themselves.

There is not always strength in numbers. While there are 7875 GP practices, there are only 154 acute trusts, yet the influence of the latter appears far larger in the development of the 44 local Sustainability and Transformation Plans (STPs). Worse, the numbers work against practices: while it is possible for every acute trust to be represented on STPs (there are an average 3.5 acute trusts per STP), the same is not true for every GP practice (there are an average 179 GP practices per STP).

Does this matter? Is representation important? General practice has left many of these things alone in the past and in the main has avoided what would have been a colossal waste of their time. But the world is shifting. Alongside the ever growing pressure on resources, providers are being asked to come together and decide for themselves how what little money there is should be spent. Instead of a series of bilateral agreements between the different providers and a system arbiter, the STPs are looking for a single agreement across all parties.

In the past general practice could ignore local developments, protected by a single, nationally negotiated contract. But now the NHS is shifting to a series of bespoke, local agreements. Much of the promised additional £2.4bn for general practice is coming outside of the core contract. New, local, multispecialty community provider (MCP) contracts are emerging, with much more room for local negotiation than was ever possible with the national GP contract. It is a brave GP practice that will allow the other providers in the system to determine how much funding, and with what strings, they should receive.

So if we accept it is not possible for 179 practices to all represent themselves in local discussions, even if only for practical and logistical reasons, who should represent them? Insufficient thought and effort has so far been put into resolving this question, not only by local systems but also by practices themselves. In many cases the local system has decided how general practice is to be represented. But if I ran a practice, I would want to make that decision myself, along with my fellow practices.

There are a number of options available. First, the CCG could represent its practices. It is after all a membership organisation and each practice is a member of its local CCG. The problem comes because the remit of CCGs extends across all providers, and they continually have to go to extraordinary lengths to demonstrate they are not favouring their member practices. It is more or less impossible for CCGs to both carry out their role as CCGs and simultaneously represent general practice effectively.

Second, the RCGP could represent general practice. The RCGP has appointed RCGP ambassadors for each of the 44 STP areas, whose role (according to the RCGP website) is to “maximise investment in general practice at a local level, track developments, and make sure that GPs have a very strong voice in the GP Forward View across England”. The RCGP is supposed to focus on improving patient care, clinical standards and GP training, and while I am sure the RCGP ambassadors are a good thing for general practice, it is hard to see them having the mandate or infrastructure to be able to adequately represent practices in local negotiations.

There are two more realistic options. The first is the local LMC. Their explicit purpose is, after all, to represent general practice. There is often resistance to their inclusion, as they are seen more as a trade union than as a reasonable representative of GP practices. Their leaders are rarely viewed, for example, in the same way that an acute trust CEO might be viewed. But they are statutory bodies, funded by a statutory levy on practices. Tracey Vell, leader of the LMCs in Greater Manchester, argues it is essential LMCs talk for GP practices in STP discussions, and also recounts how it was only through grit and determination that she was able to ensure they gained a voice around the table in Manchester.

Second, the local federation(s) could represent general practice. This is tricky because federations vary so significantly in the way they are set up and what they have been established to do. Where their role is to generate and deliver additional services across a group of practices, local practices can become resentful pretty quickly if the local federation leaders are seen to overstep the mark and assume they can talk on behalf of their member practices. But equally where one of the reasons for the local federation is to strengthen the voice of the member practices then this can work really well.

Nothing of course is stopping GP practices setting up a federation just for this purpose. If they don’t feel (for whatever reason) that the way they are being represented is satisfactory, they can create a federation, appoint a spokesperson, and all they would need to fund between them is the cost of that person’s time.

It is also not unreasonable for there to be more than one voice for general practice. If the 3.5 acute trusts in each STP area each have their own voice, then general practice can reasonably expect to have more than one voice. In Manchester they have a “GP Advisory group” which contains the federation and LMC leaders, and then this group has a voice on the main board, mirroring arrangements for the acute trusts.

We are at a point in time when local representation of GP practices, and the establishment of a strong voice for those practices, is more important than ever before. Unusually, GP practices need this representation more than the system needs it. If effective representation has not yet been achieved, it is GP practices themselves who now need to take responsibility for making it happen.

24
oct
0

Make General Practice your CCG’s Priority

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

What will the GPs working in CCGs leave behind when clinical commissioning has been dismantled? Ben Gowland argues that now is the time for them to consider this legacy and to act swiftly and single-mindedly…

This week Simon Stevens exhorted GPs on CCG Governing Bodies to ensure the money promised to general practice reaches its intended destination. He condemned the compounded impact of a decade of disinvestment in primary care, and reaffirmed the necessity of changing the trend to one of investment above the rate of the rest of the NHS. Mr Stevens declared the final destination of the GP Forward View money the responsibility of GPs.

At the same event Professor Steve Field, CQC Chief Inspector of Primary Care, declared an inspectorate for general practice is only needed because local GP leaders have not done their job properly. The CQC is a necessary evil caused only, according to Professor Field, by the failures of local GP leadership.

These declarations will rankle with GPs. CCGs in many areas do not have, and never have had, responsibility for the commissioning of general practice. They are castigated on an almost daily basis for their failure to monitor conflicts of interest thoroughly and effectively, and for allowing their particular part of the system to slide into financial imbalance. And now suddenly we have bewilderment expressed at a national level as to how GPs in the form of CCGs could have been given the purse strings and at the same time allow general practice to fall into its current parlous state.

At the same time, clinical commissioning is being discreetly dismantled. STPs, local accountable care organisations, and devolution are working together to diminish the role of commissioning. Ever since the shift from competition to integration with the publication of the Five Year Forward View, power has been stripped from those attempting to use contractual levers and plurality of provision to effect change. Unachievable financial pressures have been added to CCGs to “even up” the playing field between commissioners and providers, so all can “share the pain equally”.

What is a GP on a CCG Governing Body to make of all of this? What should they do?

It is time to think legacy. It is time to look forward 5 years and think what impact did I have on local general practice? What did I do that made a real difference?

The door has been opened. Simon Stevens and Steve Field are telling you, explicitly, it is your job and your responsibility to support general practice. Take them at their word. Do everything in your power to ensure the GP Forward View money reaches general practice. Reverse the trend of disinvestment and ensure funding for general practice reaches 10 or even 11% of local NHS expenditure.

Hold your own CCG to account for increasing its investment in general practice. Use delegated commissioning to shift the focus of the CCG away from the acute trusts and onto the stated national priority of general practice. Be single minded. Use the opportunity.

Time is limited. You are now being berated at a national, as well as (I assume) a local, level for not using the situation you are in to make a difference to general practice. Stop listening to those who are persuading you the right thing is to forego investment for the sake of financial balance, or that the CCG can’t afford to create its share of the £171m earmarked from core CCG allocations for general practice.

The time for self-sacrifice is over. It is not serving you or your local population. However uncomfortable it feels to say to a room of stakeholders, all desperate for commissioner money, that you have weighed up all their needs and have decided to give it to yourself and your colleagues, that is what you have to do. Putting general practice, primary care and all of out of hospital care first is a national priority. Make it yours.

10
oct
0

How I Discovered the Future of General Practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Looking at solutions for the problems facing general practice and learning from those who have already got it right inspired Ben Gowland and his team at Ockham Healthcare to write a book. In his latest blog Ben explains why the resultant book should be essential reading for anyone with an interest in general practice.

General practice is a difficult problem to solve. Few now dispute the profession is in crisis, and yet despite the publication of the General Practice Forward View (GPFV) we seem no nearer to a consensus on what the future of general practice will look like.

When I left my role in the CCG I started by trying to really understand the problems general practice was experiencing. I visited a range of different practices and spoke to many GPs and found the problems were even worse than I had imagined. You can watch the TV documentary I made about this here.

I then started talking to people; to GPs, practices, and sometimes whole areas, who had found a way through the problems. There are nearly 8000 GP practices in England, and while many are struggling, some have found a way through and are thriving. I wanted to learn from what they had done, and I wanted to share that learning with others. In February this year we started publishing The Ben Gowland Podcast every week – short recordings of conversations I have had with those who have found a way through the problems general practice is experiencing.

As I listened to the experiences of both those who had found answers and those who were struggling, I was struck by the realisation in many cases both had tried to do the same things. Practices who were struggling had joined a federation but it had made no difference. Practices that were thriving had formed a federation and it had had a transformative effect. I realised there is no simple “answer” to general practice, no single solution that can be applied to solve the current crisis. How an answer is implemented is often more important than the answer itself.

So to find a way forward, a future, for general practice, I believe the best place to start is those practices that have made the future a reality already. Rather than starting with a hypothesis and testing whether it will work in general practice, it is better to start with what has worked already and try and capture the learning of how this happened for others. And to this effect we decided to publish a book, one that took real life case studies of what has worked in general practice, and then used those case studies to extract the learning for others.

In the book we have been able to capture the experiences of those who have made operating at scale work, and use these to identify 10 practical steps for other practices to follow. These steps are the difference between practices losing £20,000 each of investment in a new federation that never goes anywhere, to being able to reduce costs, grow income and manage workload better. They are not rocket science. They include things like, for example, ‘being upfront about the commitment needed for each practice’ and ‘ensuring the right motivation’ of each practice who you are going to operate at scale with, but they are critical to ultimate success.

Equally the book contains the same for introducing new roles, introducing new models of care, and it even considers how CCGs and commissioners can have a transformative impact on their local practices. The book starts with the case studies, analyses what they have in common, and distils the learning so that others can do more than find an answer – they can learn how to make the answer work for them.

The Future of General Practice: Real Life Case Studies of Innovation and New Ways of Working is out today (Monday 10th October). You can buy your copy here. The future of general practice requires more than an understanding of what solutions can help. It needs an understanding of how to implement these solutions in a way that will enable a new future to be created. The book provides both.

6
oct
0

Community Engagement and Social Prescribing in General Practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

In a guest blog this week, Sheinaz Stansfield, a Practice Manager from Gateshead, gives an insight into how community engagement and social prescribing is making a real difference in her practice. If you want to read more about Sheinaz’s practice they appear as a case study in our new book “The Future of General Practice; Real Life Case Studies in Innovation and New Ways of Working”. The book can be purchased here

It was snowing in Gateshead at 9am on the Friday before the bank holiday. On leaving the surgery I bumped into Jez, a homeless patient, recently released from prison. I was late for a meeting and he followed me out, cold wet and hungry, when he burst into tears. I gave him some money for breakfast and asked him to wait for me in a local café. By this time, I was also cold, wet and very late – but I had a warm car to escape to.

Working jointly with the 3rd sector, the practice had just won some funding to manage people with complex need; those who were too complex for us to manage in primary care, but not complex enough to fit the criteria for other local services. We have many such patients; those who have GP appointments several times a week, because of social issues impacting on their health and cannot possibly be addressed through the health system alone. People who have nowhere else to go.

At Oxford Terrace and Rawling Road Medical Group in Gateshead, our social prescribing is led by two Primary Care Navigators (HCA’S). Having developed an extensive “dynamic” directory of services, they are well respected and known to all of the statutory and non-statutory services within our GP catchment area. Jez and others like him are also known to them and we have worked with a local charity Fulfilling Lives, and won transformation funding (from the local Authority) to test a new model of care. We were meeting that morning to develop a mobilisation plan.

The meeting was attended by our practice based complex care team, who take a patient-centred approach to case management. The team consists of our frailty nurse, care navigators, occupational therapist and community matron. Between us we were able to identify the first half dozen patients for Alex, the co-ordinator. Jez fitted the bill perfectly. I introduced Alex to him as her first patient!

A core component of this service will be to identify peer mentors as volunteers for befriending and support. Fortuitously, my next engagement was a training session for Practice Health Champions. We have 39, who work with us as volunteers leading various groups including knit ‘n’ natter, reading, walking and others. They also host events for patients including a flu fair, summer health fair and an annual Christmas dinner on Christmas day. A new event for this year will be a veteran’s engagement event and a full WW2 re-enactment on 11th November! Such is the power of unleashing energy to connect patients’ skills and passion with staff commitment.

This morning we were welcoming 10 new volunteers into the fold. The training was developed and led by other champions, facilitated by the practice, hosted by a local charity. Therefore, there was no additional cost to the health and wellbeing system. We were connecting local resources, building alliances around patient need and supporting each other to help the most vulnerable and dispossessed people in our community. There is no funding in the GP contracting mechanism for us to do this work, we do it because we care, it adds value and we are passionate about our people.

We have many Practice Health Champions with enduring mental health problems running these groups. Two champions, recovering alcoholics, run the men’s group and the Practice Facebook page. With training and support, they will become our first two peer mentors, for this new service.

My afternoon was spent back at the desk, trying to navigate my way through the tangled bureaucratic mess that is the transformation fund (GP Premises). I was interrupted by a phone call from a neighbouring Practice Manager, wondering how she was going to manage demand with two partners retiring and no applicants for the vacancies. We talked about social prescribing and the complex care team.

At this point I decided to call it a day. At 6pm as I left the practice, one patient was waiting in the waiting room, the sun was shining. Reflecting on my day, I smiled at the patient on my way out, looking forward to the long weekend ahead. My day job as a Practice Manager is full of “bad” NHS rules that block and frustrate most of our attempts to care for people the way they need to be taken care of. Today though, we had made a difference to at least one person, who might have otherwise spent the long weekend on a park bench, tired, cold and hungry.

To receive the General Practice blog every week, you can subscribe to our weekly newsletter here

29
sep
0

What does the NHS Planning Guidance mean for General Practice?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Every year CCGs receive planning guidance from NHS England, which tells them what needs to be included in their local plans for the coming year. In his latest Blog Ben Gowland explains in detail what this latest round of guidance means and why this year is different – and not all good news.

This year there have been a few changes to the Planning Guidance. The guidance has been produced earlier, in September, and plans and contracts are to be complete and signed by December, and cover 2 years instead of one. Each CCG has to produce a local GP Forward View plan by 23rd December (regardless, it seems, of whether they have chosen to take on delegated responsibility for the direct commissioning of general practice or not).

So what can general practice learn from the newly published guidance? The detail it contains (along with the subsequent local plan) was only ever going to be one part of a 3-piece jigsaw – the other two parts being the national GP contract award and the local STP plan. Combined these three will give us a really good picture of what the real impact of the GPFV is going to be in the coming years. But a few things stand out.

For a start, the headline £2.4bn uplift, so prevalent and heavily featured in the GPFV, does not get a mention. In some ways I understand this as the £2.4bn was set for 2020/21 and the guidance is only until 2018/19, but nonetheless it is a concern.

This concern is exacerbated when the starting point for investment is the NHS England 5 year allocations for primary care. The final per capita growth in 2017/18 is 2.41% (compared to 3.16% in 2016/17), an amount that varies considerably across the country (from 0.45% in NHS South Norfolk CCG to 10% in NHS Islington CCG). In 2018/19 it is lower still, at 1.75%. Across the 5 years these allocations create a £1.1bn recurrent investment in General Practice, which on its own will not be enough to increase the general practice share of total NHS expenditure nor keep up with inflation of expenses in general practice.

That isn’t of course the end of the story. What was exciting about the GPFV was the other recurrent £1.3bn that would make up the £2.4bn, as well as a promised £508M non-recurrent package of investment in the meantime. The new guidance contains more details of both of these.

£500m of the additional recurrent £1.3bn was always going to come for access.   What the guidance says about this is that in 2017/18 and in 2018/19 the GP access fund sites (formerly the Prime Minister’s Challenge Fund sites) will receive £6 per weighted head of population. The CCGs without GP access fund sites will receive £3.34 per head in 2018/19, and £6 per head from 2019/20. This isn’t great news for 2017/18, because according to the GPC £6 per weighted head of population is less than the GP access fund sites currently receive, and if you are not a GP access fund site you won’t be receiving any additional access money until the year after.

For this money, CCGs have to commission services 8am-8pm during the week, and at weekends, “provide access to pre-bookable and same day appointments… to meet local population needs”. At least 8-8 on Saturdays and Sundays has been avoided. In capacity terms they must provide an additional 30 minutes extra consultation capacity per 1000 population, rising to an extra 45 minutes.

Where the remaining £800m of the £1.3bn is going to come from is still something of a mystery. The guidance says further investment will come from:

  • Increases in funding for GP trainees funded by Health Education England
  • Increases in funding for nationally procured GP IT systems
  • Increases in the section 7A funding for public health services, which support payments to GPs for screening and immunisation services
  • 3,000 new fully funded practice-based mental health therapists to help transform the way mental health services are delivered

But none of that feels like real money coming into practices. It will be interesting to see whether money will come to practices to directly employ mental health therapists, but if that was the plan I think more would have been made of it by now. But maybe this gap provides an opportunity for investment into the core contract, or into general practice via the STP plans. We will need the other two pieces of the jigsaw to find that out.

This still leaves the promised non-recurrent investment of £508m. The headline here is that CCGs have to find £171m of it from their core allocations (i.e. they haven’t been given any extra money for it), and this equates to £3 per head. This money is to, “stimulate development of at scale providers for improved access, stimulate implementation of the 10 high impact actions to free up GP time, and secure sustainability of general practice”. CCGs can choose whether to give this to practices in 2017/18 or 2018/19, or spread it across the two years. The guidance also says CCG funding to general practice should increase beyond the level of their core allocations (2.14% in 2017/18 and 2.15% in 2018/19), but I can’t imagine for one minute cash-strapped CCGs will be able to fund this on top of the £3 per head.

This non-recurrent fund also contains a number of other smaller pots:

  • Online general practice consultation software systems – £15m available in 2017/18 and £20m in 2018/19, specification yet to be shared.
  • Training care navigators and medical assistants for all practices – £10m available in each of 17/18 and 18/19, specification yet to be shared
  • General Practice Resilience programme – £8m available in each of 17/18 and 18/19 (compared to £16m this year)
  • Time for Care national development programme – nationally funded, CCGs to identify a senior local leader

At the same time NHS England will be investing (non-recurrently) in international recruitment of GPs, clinical pharmacists in general practice (3 years funding for practices), and expansion of physician associates, medical assistants and physiotherapists. The bids put forward for capital investment are also being considered.

And that is it. The significant investments are essentially those for access and the £3 a head by CCGs. What we are left with is a sense that the two year planning timeframe could work against practices in areas that don’t have a GP access fund site, and so won’t be receiving any additional access money next year, and whose CCG chooses to invest its £3 per head in 2018/19. For them, unless there is significant assistance coming via the STP plan or the national contract negotiation, 2017/18 could well be an even more difficult year than the one we are currently in.

To receive the General Practice blog every week, you can subscribe to our weekly newsletter here

22
sep
0

5 Steps to Introduce Innovation in a GP Practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Knocked back at every turn when you try to introduce innovation into your practice? You are not alone. But, in his latest blog, Ben Gowland clears a bit of wood so you can see the trees and presents five steps to introducing change…

Everyone in general practice agrees things need to be different, but as soon as specific changes are mentioned barriers go up. Words from Sir Sam Everington declaring the need for Skype consultations to become the norm in general practice send shivers down the spine of most GPs. Likewise declarations that the traditional partnership model is dead, and that “super-practices” and their ilk must become the new norm.

GPs readily admit the need for change, for innovation, but not Skype consultations or super-practices. Or telephone consultations. Or physicians associates. Or social prescribing (whatever that is).

How do practices wanting to make change overcome this particular problem? In the flat decision-making structure that makes up most GP partnerships, overcoming this type of resistance is especially challenging, because not everyone wants to take risks, not everyone is on board, and focus on the bigger picture easily gets lost.

Let’s take an example: the employment of a clinical pharmacist by a GP practice. Let’s say one partner is particularly in favour, and puts forward the case. Some partners are not going to want to take the risk. They are going to see the (definite) financial outlay with an only probable financial return. Some will be against the idea on the grounds that a pharmacist can’t possibly do the job of a GP (I know they are not trying to, but you can picture the discussion).

The discussion goes on. The longer it goes on, the less it is about tackling the problem of unmanageable workload, and the more it is about whether taking a risk on a pharmacist is a good idea. The vision is lost, and the focus is on the detail. Eventually, after a long discussion by the partners, the practice decides to pass on the opportunity to employ a pharmacist. Everyone still agrees innovation is needed, just not this one.

It is not always like this. I have spoken to a large number of practices that have successfully introduced innovations and changed the way they have done things. I have asked them how they did it, and how they managed to overcome the barriers others could not. I have grouped what they said into 5 steps to introduce innovation in a GP practice:

  1. Don’t start with the solution, start with the problem. Any practice looking to make changes will be doing so for a reason. If the workload is unmanageable, the workload is unmanageable. Focus the initial discussion on this as the problem, and establish a sense of urgency that something must be done. Be clear that no change is not an option.
  2. Develop options. Giving a choice of options empowers decision makers. Listening to the arguments of those against an option can help develop even better options. In our pharmacist example we could offer a range of different roles, or reduced drawings to fund extra GP sessions, or merger with another practice as ways of coping with the unmanageable workload. Keep the focus on solving the problem, not on any specific solution.
  3. Create a critical mass of support. There will nearly always be someone in any GP practice who is against whatever the change is. Once it has become clear which is the best option it may be that those most in favour of the change need to do some work outside of the meetings to firm up support for the change. It is all too common for one all powerful voice to continually veto the introduction of any meaningful change. Where this is happening others need to work together and plan how to get the final approval required.
  4. Create a worked up solution that reduces risk.  A good way of getting the change to happen is to provide a way out, whether that is a review after 6 months or a short term contract before offering a permanent one. At this point the work of those in favour of the change is only beginning. They need to mentor and support the new recruit, manage their introduction into the practice, support their professional development, and problem solve with them. The experience of those who have done this is that 6 months later the practice can’t imagine how it ever coped without the new member of staff in place.
  5. Use one successful change to enable further change. When practices agree to make one big change, and have a positive experience of it, they are much more likely to take a risk on the next one, and make further and further innovations. It is no coincidence that practices who introduce new roles are often larger, building whole system partnerships, and looking for ways to make the new models of care work for them.

Identifying innovations is relatively easy. Getting them to happen in your practice is not. The innovation problem in general practice is not a lack of ideas, but the difficulty of adoption, and of changing the behaviour that goes with it.

To receive the General Practice blog every week, you can subscribe to our weekly newsletter here

15
sep
1

On the Day Demand

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

We don’t really understand demand in general practice.  The big message from the Kings Fund report earlier in the year, Understanding Pressures in General Practice, was the need to create the ability to measure this demand.  The West of England AHSN published Measuring Demand in General Practice which found,

“A lack of research in this area and a lack of continuity in national projects aimed at supporting GP practices to understand demand… Work with GP practices revealed no definitive or widespread approach to measuring demand in primary care. However, it confirmed that practices and CCGs were struggling to cope with apparently increasing demand and were very keen to engage in further activities that might help understand and manage it better.” p3

We do, however, know some things.  We know the population is growing.  We know people are living longer and morbidity is increasing.  We know people are becoming more demanding.  We know there is a GP recruitment crisis.  We know 71% of GPs identify workload as the top factor negatively impacting on a career in general practice.  We know waiting times for an appointment are going up.

Clearly there are no straightforward answers to the challenge growing demand presents, but is there anything that can help?  In the past we had ‘advanced access’ (you can find the evaluation of this here), then came telephone appointments, and more recently based web-based systems, Skype and e-consultations.

I always find starting with the answer to be a mistake.  Better to understand the problem as best we can, and develop solutions from there.  There is a limited capacity (and shortage) of GPs, which cannot meet the totality of the demand.  Demand is rising faster than the population or its underlying morbidity, which means demand is presenting now that previously patients would have managed themselves.  There is a growing cohort of patients with complex multimorbidity.  Continuity of care is needed for some patients but not for all, but is particularly important for this complex group.  All this suggests efforts to access additional or different capacity to meet the less complex demand, and free up GP time to focus on the more complex demand, are those most likely to be successful.

The other place to look is to see what others are doing.  The practices I have seen that are dealing with the pressures best all seem to split demand into two.  They split the demand that presents on the day (on the day demand) from the demand that comes from the management of patients with ongoing chronic conditions, some of whom are highly complex (ongoing demand).  They find demand for the former constitutes a large proportion of the demand on a practice, and they have found different ways of creating capacity to meet this demand.

Some have introduced new roles in to practices specifically to help meet this demand.  Some have gone as far as creating a multidisciplinary team, led by a GP, for this specific purpose.  Some have used joint working with other practices to enable a collective approach.  They have set up ‘urgent care hubs’ or the like to manage on the day demand across multiple practices in one place, with an extended team and a range of roles.  Some have used partnerships with the local community trust, ambulance service or acute trust to access the additional skills and capacity they need to help meet this demand.

Many of these sites have found by making these changes they have been able to free up more GP time for the ongoing demand, for the more complex patients, and some have been able to increase appointment times for these patients to 15 minutes, or even longer.

Changing how on the day demand is dealt with can do two really important things.  It can ease the overall pressure on the practice, and it can create more capacity for GPs to focus on the ongoing demand and provide continuity of care where it is most needed.  The specific changes individual practices choose to make will always need to be tailored to the individual local circumstances.  But the principles behind the changes remain the same: consider on the day demand and ongoing demand separately, find new ways of creating capacity to meet the on the day demand, and this in turn will free up more expert GP capacity to meet the ongoing demand.

8
sep
0

Recent Developments in General Practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

There has been something of a frenzy of activity over the summer, following the publication of the General Practice Forward View (GPFV) earlier in the year, and if you have been away it is easy to have missed what has been going on!

Arguably the biggest development was the publication of the new MCP (multispecialty community provider) contract framework.  This, potentially, represents the end of the independent contractor model for General Practice.  Our 15-minute guide tells you all you need to know, but essentially it is about creating new organisations that general practice are part of, as opposed to new general practice organisations.

They are entirely voluntary, which begs the question why would GP practices choose to join.  I spoke to Tracey Vell, the LMC GP lead for the implementation of the new contract in Manchester, and she told me practices are falling over themselves to join for three main reasons: a way out of the current pressures; because they will be bought out of their building; and because the new organisation will pick up indemnity.

The publication of the MCP contract guidance, which outlines the new contract length will be 10-15 years, coincided with a resurgence in APMS contracts.  North Derbyshire, Blackpool and elsewhere are now introducing these not as a tool for competition to “market test” general practice, but as an enabler of integration between GP practices and other providers.

For some, the MCP is seen as the lesser of two evils because the alternative new model of care, the Primary and Acute Care System (PACS), is regarded as the takeover of general practice by the local hospital.  However, Dr Berge Balian, the GP lead at Yeovil Hospital for the local PACS, contends instead it provides an opportunity for general practice to be paid for work transferred from the hospital.  As a result, practices in Yeovil are choosing to give up their contracts to join Symphony Healthcare Services, an organisation wholly owned by the hospital.

The big question following the publication of the GPFV is where is the money?  This was brought into even sharper focus following the revelation much of the GPFV money would be allocated via the STP areas (cue the introduction of RCGP ambassadors to each STP area).   I spoke to Maureen Baker about the GPFV money to get her take on where it is and what it will really amount to, and for those still in the dark we have produced our own guide on how to find it.

“Primary care access centres” were trailed in the GPFV as a mechanism for extending GP access.  The BMA has since produced its own document, “Safe Working in General Practice”, renaming them “locality hubs” and describing them as overflow facilities for “full” general practice.  Either way, they amount to the same thing and require practices to work together to create them.  Handily, the Nuffield Trust published “Is Bigger Better? Lessons for Large Scale General Practice”.  They found evidence of improvements in quality lacking, but author Rebecca Rosen did conclude bigger is indeed better as a mechanism for enabling general practices to cope with the current challenges.  For those wanting to up their scale, Jenny Stone gave us a guide to practice mergers, and Nigel Grinstead shared the lessons he has learnt supporting federations and super practices to develop.

Meanwhile, the challenges of recruitment in general practice have not gone away.  We looked at the transformational impact paramedic practitioners have had on one practice, and asked the question more broadly as to whether social workers could form part of the practice team.  However, the action that can make the biggest impact locally in our view is the introduction of a local locum GP chambers.  Chair of NASGP Richard Fieldhouse explains what they are, and we heard from an ex-GP partner, a newly qualified GP, and a GP seeking a portfolio career about the impact chambers had on them.  We explained why you need one, how a CCG can support their development locally  , how a CCG can make the most of one they have, and we tackled the difficult questions and dispelled some of the myths about locums.

Finally, the Kings Fund produced a new report, “Clinical Commissioning: GPs in Charge”.  Author Ruth Robertson revealed they had discovered a frequently fragile relationship between CCGs and local practices, and predicted fewer, larger CCGs in future.  Less clear was whether GP leaders would remain in these bigger CCGs or take up residence in the new models of care.

You are now up to date!  If you want to keep it that way, become an Ockham subscriber and we will send you (free) weekly updates so you don’t a miss a thing.

1
sep
0

Locality Hubs: The Perfect Opportunity?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The BMA has produced a new document, ‘Safe Working in General Practice’. Now you might assume, particularly if you have read the accompanying headlines, this is simply a call for a limit to general practice workload and to establish 15-minute appointment times. But you would be wrong.

The document is actually about the introduction of what it terms ‘locality hubs’. These provide additional primary care capacity in a locality, delivered through multidisciplinary teams, and are created as a result of collaboration between practices. They operate as a place where triage can be managed centrally, and on-the-day demand can be managed across multiple practices in one location using a much wider skill mix.

The concept is not new. It was introduced in the General Practice Forward View (GPFV), where they were described as primary care access centres. The BMA say,

‘The sole initial purpose of locality hubs is the stabilisation and sustainability of general practice. Hubs are not walk-in centres: each hub would help manage demand across a number of practices and their respective patient lists, ensuring that patients in excess of safe working limits can still be seen by a GP or the wider primary care health team.’ p5

While the presentation by the BMA is in terms of a protection of core general practice, the reality is the model they are supporting is highly progressive. It incorporates all the key features of ‘modern’ general practice: the introduction of new roles; general practice operating at scale; the integration of practices with the wider health and social care community; and the development of the new models of care.

There is an unusual alignment in that the profession itself needs exactly what the wider NHS needs, manifested in these locality hubs. At the same time as providing support for core general practice, the system receives better access, more responsiveness, and an ability to deliver more joined up care, particularly between community services and general practice.

The sticking point is normally the funding. But as the BMA rightly point out, the funding has already been identified. The GPFV promises a further £500m per year recurrently from 2020/21 for extended GP access, and £171m between now and then from CCGs to support the development of this capacity. There is no obvious other route for this capacity to be delivered. There are no more GPs. Existing practices cannot take on any more work. This has to be the answer.

In what could be viewed as a once in a lifetime event, the stars are perfectly aligned. The profession wants the hubs, NHS England wants them, they fit perfectly with the introduction of the new models of care, and the funding is already in place. Opportunities like this are exceedingly rare, and must be grasped with both hands. While making the locality hubs a reality will still require conversations, trust, joint working, leadership and hard work, now is the time to do it. Seize the moment, because it may be a long time before another one like this comes along.

25
aug
1

GP Locums – dispelling the myths

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

Locum GPs, are they a low quality and overpaid drain on resources or an underutilised pool of agile talent? Ben Gowland seeks to dispel some of the more prominent myths.

The debate about locum staff has raged for years, but the recent strain on NHS finances has brought it into even sharper focus. GP locums have not escaped: NHS England attempted to introduce practice reporting on any payments made over an ‘indicative maximum rate’ as part of the 2016/17 contract. In response the LMCs passed a motion which rejected ‘any attempt to cap the fees charged by GP locums’, asserting the real problem was the GP recruitment crisis.

Is the use of NHS monies on GP locums a waste of scarce resources? Or is it a valid expenditure, pivotal to enabling a fragile system to continue to operate? I recently debated this with Dr Richard Fieldhouse, Chair of the National Association of Sessional GPs (NASGP). He took the opportunity to dispel a few myths.

Myth 1: GP locums are destroying continuity of care. The reality is very few us will see the same GP each time we visit our local practice. For at least half of us, it doesn’t matter which GP we see. For those where it does, practices are rarely organised to enable this. When a practice employs a locum GP, they are just as likely to be asked to see patients where continuity of care would have made a difference to those where it would not. You can’t blame locum GPs for how practices organise care.

Myth 2: GP locums deliver lower quality care. For a GP to be effective they need to be able to access a range of information, including patient histories, test results and local patient pathways. Practices rarely provide locum GPs with the information they need. It is not that locums deliver lower quality care, it is that practices prevent locums from performing and often make it impossible for them to function effectively.

Myth 3: GP locums earn more than most GP partners. GP partners, who sign the cheque for the invoice, see the gross amount the locum receives. They then compare this with the net amount they take home, and, inevitably, the gross amount is larger. This does not mean the take home pay of the locum is greater! And when a locum GP is employed through an agency, the cost includes a 20% or 30% agency mark up. Money to the agency is not money to the individual locum.

Myth 4: GP locums are a small, greedy minority of the profession. The number of locum GPs stands in the region of 17,000, and represents about a quarter of all GPs. It is not one or two GPs out to make a fast buck. It is an increasingly popular career choice, and, as our recent podcast series has shown, attracts a range of GPs with a range of different motivations. Characterising locum GPs as a drain on resources serves to disempower a substantial, and growing, portion of the total GP workforce.

In future, all GPs may be locums. If the profession does eventually follow through with its threat of mass resignation, local locum GP chambers represent one of the most likely future employment scenarios for GPs. Even if GPs resist the temptation to press that particular nuclear button, the growth of multispecialty community providers (MCPs) may also see a rapid growth in local locum GP chambers, as the historically independent-minded profession seeks to resist a salaried fate.

The time has come for the debate to move on. The focus should no longer be on the validity of locum GPs, but rather on how the system makes best use of what Richard describes as “the rich pool of agile talent” it has at its disposal.

 

18
aug
0

A new lease of life for APMS Contracts

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

General Practice has never really liked Alternative Provider Medical Services (APMS) contracts. This is because they are the only GP contracts that can be negotiated with those who are not NHS GPs, such as foundation trusts and commercial organisations. But, writes Ben Gowland, they may be about to experience a resurgence…

APMS contracts were introduced really as a mechanism to enable NHS commissioners to market test General Practice against the private sector. But fears the APMS contract was going to lead to the privatisation of General Practice proved unfounded. Research by The King’s Fund[1] found use of APMS contracts by PCTs was limited and very few APMS contracts had been awarded to independent providers.

There is no specified maximum contract length for an APMS contract, but they were typically awarded for a five-year period. This is in stark contrast to the unlimited contract length of the main GMS and PMS contracts. This drew criticism from the profession as providers would not make long term investments, or tackle long-standing problems such as premises leases. A 2015 study published in the Journal of the Royal Society of Medicine found APMS practices provided worse quality care than practices on GMS or PMS contracts, even when demographic differences such as age and deprivation were taken into account.

But change is afoot. A hospital foundation trust in Chesterfield has been awarded a 15-year APMS contract to run three GP practices serving more than 20,000 patients in Derbyshire. 15 years, and with an option to extend for a further 3 years! The APMS directions do not specify a maximum contract length and a contract exceeding 5 years can be agreed locally, but even a few years ago this would have been unheard of.

Now, as with all aspects of integration, using the APMS contract in this way creates issues for commissioners. The 2013 APMS directions[2] state the APMS contractor is required to be a member of the CCG. So by deduction Chesterfield Royal Hospital must now be a member of the local CCG. Equally, when the APMS contractor makes a decision to refer a patient it must ‘do so without regard to its own financial interests’. Choice and integration are not easy bedfellows.

But North Derbyshire CCG are not alone. Other CCGs, e.g. Blackpool CCG[3], have also been considering APMS contracts of 10-15 years (interestingly the same length as the new multispecialty provider, or MCP, contract). Clearly, something has changed.

The world has shifted since 2004, when APMS contracts were first introduced. Then the focus was on competition and market testing. In our post-Five-Year-Forward-View-world there is a new game in town: integration. APMS contracts are changing from a tool to enable competition to a tool to enable integration. Hence the sudden shift from short to much longer term contract durations. Blackpool CCG explicitly stated that ‘longer term contracts offer stability and an incentive for providers to participate/engage in CCG strategy, new models of working and integration in neighbourhoods’.

Suddenly APMS contracts have a new lease of life, as an enabler to integration. The 15 year APMS contract award in Chesterfield was met with local LMC approval. General Practice antibodies to the APMS contract appear to be dissipating (although lingering concerns over the contract value relative to GMS/PMS inevitably remain). Extending the term of the APMS contract, keeping it within the NHS ‘family’, and using it as a building block for the new models of care, mean it may be about to become much more prevalent than ever before.

[1] Walsh N, Maybin J, Lewis R (2007). ‘So where are the alternative providers in primary care?’ British Journal of Healthcare Management, vol 13, no 2, pp 43–36.

[2]https://www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/183370/apms_directions_2013_acc.pdf

[3] http://blackpoolccg.nhs.uk/wp-content/uploads/2015/10/Item-6-APMS-Paper-Oct-PCCC.pdf

11
aug
1

How to find the GPFV money

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

The money that sits behind the General Practice Forward View (GPFV) is proving elusive. We seem to be in a place where lots of money has been promised, and in a very British attempt not to appear ungrateful no one is really asking where it is. Instead we are just hoping it will materialise. I have now asked a range of people about it, some in practices, some in CCGs, and some in national roles, and not a single one is clear when or where this money is coming.

So here at Ockham Healthcare towers, we have identified 5 things to watch out for if you want to find the missing millions promised in the GPFV:

  1. Watch out for the 2017/18 core contract rise. This might sound obvious, but this is actually going be the most important announcement for General Practice, as we will get our first sense of how much of the promised additional £2.4bn will actually arrive into core contracts. In NHS England’s business plan published in December last year they had indicated a 4.0% uplift for next year, so that would be a good benchmark to monitor the actual rise against.
  2. Watch out for the publication of the local Sustainability and Transformation Plan (STP). NHS transformation money has been given to the STP areas, and in the guidance sent to them it said the allocated funding included money for, “taking forward the programmes set out in GPFV and delivering extended GP access”. This means GPFV money has been given to the STP areas, and it is their job to say how they are going to use it.
  3. Watch out for how much extra investment goes into the new MCP contract. We now know the multispecialty community provider (MCP) contract is not for General Practice alone, it is for all the providers of community services in an area. If investing in the MCP contract is used synonymously for investing in General Practice, there is a high risk that only a proportion of that money will find its way through to individual practices.
  4. Watch out for your CCGs commissioning intentions and plan for next year. The RCGP are optimistic about this. They believe that over the next 5 years CCGs will invest 10%-20% more in General Practice, reaching somewhere between £184 and £368M by 2020/21. Very crudely that is £1-£2M extra per CCG, which would mean growth of £200k-£400k each year. So review next year’s plan, and see if you can find it.
  5. Watch out for next year’s Better Care Fund (BCF) plan. Again, this was trailed in the GPFV and the RCGP have picked up on it, thinking that more money will come from that fund into General Practice. Next year’s BCF plans will indicate whether the RCGP’s faith in them is justified.

Details from each of these areas will be released in the next 6 months, which means soon (hopefully!) we will know exactly how the money is going to come to General Practice. Then we can make a better assessment of the impact it is going to make.

One tip for practices looking to maximise their own share of the money. There are a lot of different pots of funding. As a minimum we know that practices can potentially access pots of funding for: practice resilience programme; clinical pharmacists; practice manager development; practice nurse development; CCG practice transformational support; on-line consultation implementation; releasing time for patients programme; mental health workers; and further capital allocations. Get together with other practices and identify or employ someone whose job is to look out for pots of money that become available and write bids for all the practices. It won’t take long before they have already paid for themselves!

2
aug
0

The new MCP Contract Framework: more important than the GPFV

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

The recent NHS England document, “The Multispecialty Community Provider (MCP) emerging care model and contract framework” (which you can find here), is in Ben Gowland’s view a more important document about the future of General Practice than the General Practice Forward View (GPFV). He explains why.

The document describes how NHS England sees the future of General Practice. At the same time, the document is not written specifically about General Practice. This is because it is about MCPs, and an MCP is not a form of General Practice. Rather it is a new organisational form that includes General Practice. As such, it potentially represents the end of the independent contractor model of General Practice.

That’s a lot to take in, but I don’t think I am overstating it. I read the document expecting to find out more about the new voluntary GP contract that the then Prime Minister David Cameron had unexpectedly announced last year. But it turns out there is no new GP contract. The new contract is for MCPs, a new form of organisational entity,

“An MCP is what it says it is – a multispecialty, community-based, provider, of a new care model. It is a new type of integrated provider. It is not a new form of practice-based commissioning, total purchasing or GP multi-fund, or the recreation of a primary care trust (PCT). An MCP combines the delivery of primary care and community-based health and care services – not just planning and budgets. It also incorporates a much wider range of services and specialists wherever that is the best thing to do.” p5.

General practice will become only one part of this new bigger organisation. What the document does is work through some of the detail of the new MCPs, and in particular how they will be contracted. While the primary focus of the document is not General Practice, the implications for General Practice are huge.

Now, before panic sets in, the model is entirely voluntary for General Practice. The document clearly states, “Under no outcome would GPs lose their right to continue to provide primary medical services against their will” p29. But that said, what exactly does the document say about the relationship between the new MCPs and General Practice?

First there is what looks like a ‘pre-qualifying’ phase. General Practice has to operate at a population level of at least 30,000, which, the document says, “is a natural first step towards an MCP, for example via super practices or GP federations” p20. It then says, “Working in groups of at least 30,000 patients enables general practice to be commissioned to take on new services and funding set out in the General Practice Forward View. These could include the provision of additional access, co-funding for the introduction of pharmacists within general practice, or infrastructure investment.”

I don’t know what to make of this. It hints the new investment in General Practice is only going to be available to groups operating at this scale, but maybe I am reading too much into it.

There are three types of contractual relationship GPs can have with an MCP. The first is through a “virtual” MCP contract. Here, the existing individual contracts of the GP practices and other providers of community services remain separate, but are then overlaid with what is essentially an agreement between all of them in which, according to the document, they “could establish a shared vision and a commitment to managing resources together, as well as clear governance and gain/risk sharing arrangements, together with an agreement about how services will be delivered operationally” p20.

The second type of MCP contract is described as “partially integrated”. Essentially all provider contracts are brought into a new single MCP contract, except the GP contracts. It could include elements of the GP contract, e.g. QOF, DES’s “by agreement”. These agreements could, “break down barriers and commit GPs to new ways of working (e.g. by working at scale, redesigning the workforce, and developing operational protocols)” p27.

The third and final type of MCP contract is “fully integrated”. All the provider contracts are brought into a new single contract, including the GP contracts. The contract will be 10-15 years in duration, and the DH has been asked to change legislation to create an option to enable GPs to return to G/PMS arrangements (p27). It will have a performance element that replaces QOF and CQUINs of approximately 10% of the contract value. The contract will be for the existing value of the commissioner spend for the services included for the population served. It will have gain/risk share arrangements that are yet to be determined.

Can GPs own and run an MCP organisation, and hold a “fully integrated” MCP contract? It would appear this option will be to open to very few. An MCP can in theory be a Limited Liability Partnership (LLP), a Community Interest Company (CIC), or a limited company. GPs could be partners or shareholders in these organisations, and as such be direct owners of the company. But not on their own, “it is quite likely that many existing organisations that deliver part of the proposed MCP service scope will be unable in isolation to be credible holders of a fully integrated MCP contract, and they will need to forge new partnerships” (p25). Only “stronger” federations or super-practices, the document says, “could then seek to develop into credible bidders” for MCP contracts (p20). The clear implication is very few GP organisations of any type will even be eligible. The document itself concludes, “Given that MCPs will be responsible for out of hospital services, the natural application of this option would be with existing Community Trusts or FTs” (p26).

And in this scenario (established in the document as the most likely) what happens to the GPs? Well, they either become employees of the new MCP, or subcontractors or independent contractors operating under a clinical chambers model. And what will their salary be? That will be up to the MCP, because, “there is no single new “contract” for individual GPs wanting to be part of an MCP arrangement” p28.

At present 8% of the country is covered by MCPs (although it should be said that 0% is currently covered by any sort of MCP contractual agreement). By next year the document states that national coverage will expand to 25%. The expectation is that a quarter of the country, and therefore a quarter of General Practice, will by next year will at least be moving towards these new contractual agreements.

As with any radical new proposal, the document generates more questions than answers. But the overriding question I am left with is where do the incentives lie for General Practice? Remember it is voluntary, so it needs incentives. Maybe the model of an MCP, with its focus on population health and freedom to innovate, will be attractive enough for some. Maybe for others it will provide the way out they have been looking for (“GPs participating in an MCP may leave their current contractual arrangements permanently. They might contribute their existing GP partnership for a share of the MCP partnership or equity” p27). Maybe there will be freedom within the new contractual arrangements for each practice or groups of practices to create an outcome that is beneficial for them. Maybe it will be the only way to access the additional £2.4bn General Practice has been promised and needs to survive. Maybe I have missed something…

The document presents a new future for General Practice, as part of a wider team delivering care for a local population through an MCP. But it is a dense and difficult document, not targeted specifically at GPs – written instead I would say with GPs in mind. General Practice may only be one part of an MCP, but an MCP potentially represents the whole of the future for General Practice, which is why this document is so important.

28
jul
0

How CCGs can partner with locum GP Chambers

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

In the third of our series of articles on CCGs and local locum GP chambers, we explore how CCGs can work with the local chambers once it has been established, and how the partnership between the two can benefit local practices, patients and the wider healthcare system.

Once a chambers has been established locally, CCGs can partner with them to put together a programme to offer training and other services to local practices. This programme can include:

Practice Improvement. The chambers can collect regular feedback on each practice from its GP locums and sensitively provide constructive feedback to help practices improve their working relationship with its clinicians. It can also play an active role in identifying local best practice and spreading it to other areas (e.g. appointment systems, DNA policies and procedures etc.)

Backfill to create GP time for CCG business. GPs often cannot attend CCG meetings because no locums are available. Local locum GP chambers can work in partnership with the CCG and use their local workforce intelligence to ensure these meetings are organised at a date and time when backfill can be arranged.

Practice Manager Training. The Chambers can put on workshops for practice managers on how to make the best use of locum GPs, including elements such as getting their feedback on your practice, how to make sure locums want to keep working at your practice, avoiding risk and complaints, and spreading best practice.

GP Locum Training. The chambers can provide training for locums to include elements such as high quality referrals, improved prescribing, supporting continuity by writing better notes, being involved in clinical governance, increasing effectiveness as a locum by giving better feedback, engaging with the practice, risk management and clinical handover.

Workforce Planning. Commissioners and the chambers working together proactively can ensure an effective use of the local GP locum workforce to help manage and avoid workforce issues, including holidays, sickness, winter, out of hours and weekends.

Service Provision. As with other GPs, many GP locums have specialist skills e.g. women’s health, dermatology etc. As locum GPs these skills are often under-utilised, but within the chambers model, these skills can easily be deployed across the CCG when and where they’re needed.

Direct locum Involvement in CCGs. CCGs and local locum GP chambers can work together to better involve the dedicated pool of flexible locum GPs so that they are more involved with commissioning, especially building on their experience in working in lots of different practices across the patch.

Some local GP locum chambers may be prepared to go a step further, and consider a scheme for the chambers to support local General Practice. In such a scheme the CCG would contribute the administration costs of the running of the chambers (rather than this being paid directly by the locum GPs themselves). In return the locums would offer to meet specific needs the CCG has. The table below provides an illustration of some of the potential elements of this scheme.

GP locums open up their availability five months in advance Often, GP locums will only make themselves available one month in advance. Incentivising them to open their availability to 5 months would enable better and longer term planning by local practices.
Practice-blacklist amnesty A locum agrees a trial of returning to work in a practice they have otherwise chosen not to work in. Appropriate safeguards are agreed in advance, and feedback is given after the assignment to identify issues and solutions.
At busy times (Christmas, Easter etc), enter into a ‘holding pattern’ Typically, well organised practices book well in advance, and struggling practices book when they are ‘desperate’. The ‘holding pattern’ would entail a commitment by the GP locum to work, but the location is only announced when local practices have been assessed on a needs basis by the commissioner.
Minimum commitment Locums agree to a minimum level of service e.g. four sessions per week.
Time ringfence A commitment is made by the locum to give first choice to the sponsoring CCG up until a set time period, after which the locum can make themselves available elsewhere.
Backfill If a practice is in crisis, local experienced partners can be deployed to the failing practice, whilst the chambers deploys a group of chambers locums in the donor practice to reduce loss of continuity.
Attendance at clinical governance meeting Already a requirement of many chambers, regular attendance at internal clinical governance meetings to discuss significant events, complaints and feedback about practices.

 Whilst such a scheme is not currently in existence, the Chairman of the National Association of Sessional GPs (NASGP) Dr Richard Fieldhouse believes the potential of such a scheme to be huge. He says, “As a system we consistently fail to make the most of the opportunity that locum GPs provide. The Chambers model enables effective partnerships to be developed between commissioners and locum GPs, and a scheme like this is the logical next step”.

21
jul
0

Does the PACS model mean the takeover of General Practice by the local hospital?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

When the new models of care were first introduced in the Five Year Forward View, there was concern in some quarters of General Practice that the PACS model (Primary and Acute Care Systems) could herald the takeover of General Practice by local hospitals. Ben observes that this is far from what is actually happening…

When I read of the Symphony Programme in Yeovil, one of the PACS vanguards, it looked like this indeed was what was happening. A number of local practices – initially 3, then 6, and potentially 10 – were reportedly joining a company, Symphony Healthcare Services, which is wholly owned by Yeovil hospital.

I contacted Dr Berge Balian, a GP and the Chair of the South Somerset Symphony Programme Board, to find out whether the rumours were true, and if so why the local GP practices were allowing this to happen. We spoke, and what I discovered was surprising. He kindly agreed that we could use the conversation as a podcast, which you can find here.

The first surprising point is the focus on General Practice, and developing it to play a leading, sustainable role in the delivery of care, through an enhanced primary care model. This includes incorporating health coaches within practices, as well as extending the care team to include mental health, pharmacy, and therapists.

The second is the starting point for working together: both General Practice and the acute hospital are experiencing the same pressures, of demand, recruitment, and finances. There was a realisation in conversations between the two that by combining they could more effectively meet these problems. As Berge puts it, ‘The ultimate outcome is that the hospital is going to shrink’, as it focuses on doing only what it absolutely needs to do. Working together provides the mechanism for moving resources, whether money or personnel, from secondary to primary care, in ways that could alleviate pressure on both sides.

Berge was an LMC chair. He knows General Practice inside out, and has its best interests at heart. Inspired by the vision of the Chief Executive at Yeovil Hospital he took on a role there as Associate Medical Director for Primary Care. Together with the Chief Executive they began building bridges between the hospital and the local practices. Berge knew change in General Practice starts by building trust, and he recounts 18 months of conversations that they had with all of the local practices, strengthening relationships and ironing out problems. A key part of the battle, Berge recounted, was convincing the practices this was not a clandestine way to negatively impact General Practice.

What happened next was most interesting. A number of local practices became so overwhelmed with their own problems they approached the hospital directly wanting to formally merge with them. The hospital considered this, but Berge wanted to ensure the valuable G/PMS contracts, which are contracts in perpetuity, were protected. As a result, they set up a complicated set of arrangements (under the banner of Symphony Healthcare Services) that means the existing contract is preserved, the organisation is at arms-length from the hospital, it is led by primary care clinicians, and the lead partners have a ‘right to return’ to their original contracts in future.

Impressed by the hospital’s commitment to making this work for General Practice, another 6 or 7 practices have expressed an interest in fully integrating with the hospital through Symphony Healthcare Services. And not just the ones in trouble. As Berge says,

“About half are motivated by some challenges they are having, but another half really just see the future of General Practice being in a different model to the historical smaller partnership model.”

The integration of the practices with the hospital is built on what are described as “three pillars”: to preserve the individual identity of each practice; to share administrative and back office functions across the practices and the hospital; and to redesign the healthcare system, through the enhanced primary care model and shifting how care is provided for patients.

When asked about the future, what Berge sees as key is keeping primary care at the centre. His focus is on ensuring that those practices that have chosen not to ‘integrate’ with the hospital will stay at the centre of this work, shaping how resources are shifted from secondary to primary care.

At the end of the conversation I was not left thinking the local hospital had taken over local General Practice. Rather I was impressed by the way the hospital had enabled integration to take place by working to meet the needs of the local practices, and ensuring practices remain in the driving seat.

14
jul
0

Three steps to CCGs supporting the development of local locum GP chambers

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Ockham Healthcare is running a series of podcasts and blogs on local locum GP chambers because of the impact they can have on an area struggling with GP recruitment. In this second blog in our series Ben Gowland calls on CCGs to do what they can to support their development – but warns against trying to control them.

The idea of having a local locum GP Chambers in the patch can be very attractive for Clinical Commissioning Groups (CCGs). The advantages are clear (see my previous blog “10 reasons why your area needs a local locum GP chambers” here.), and it is a tangible way in which CCGs can be seen to be actively supporting local practices cope with the shortage of GPs.

The challenge comes because the establishment of the chambers lies outside of the control of the CCG. It is not as simple as deciding one is needed, and then charging someone within the CCG with setting one up and persuading a few locum GPs to join to get it off the ground.

This is because the chambers will only work if they are owned by the locum GPs themselves. And for them, the CCG-led model is not attractive. GP locum Dr Caroline Chill puts it like this, “If chambers are controlled by CCGs it makes being a locum less attractive, because it almost becomes a zero-hours contract with the terms and conditions being dictated by the practices using the service”.

All, however, is not lost! The idea of local locum GP chambers is attractive. It is attractive to some existing locum GPs who feel isolated and unsupported, to newly qualified GPs wanting to become a locum, and to GPs working in GP practices who for whatever reason do not want to continue in a specific practice but do not want to stop practicing as a GP altogether.

In all of our conversations with locum GPs working in local chambers, they described how they knew they wanted to be able to locum with peer support, but if they did not already know an existing local chambers they had to search to find out about the model. Unless one already exists locally, most GPs still do not know about them.

Step 1: Publicise the model locally. To start off with, you are unlikely to know who the potential GP members of the chambers will be. The aim is to connect those GPs who would like to be part of a local locum GP chambers (but might not know it yet!) with the idea of it. Publicising the model, and presenting it as something that gives locums control (rather than taking it away) will help make that connection.

Creating something from nothing requires a certain type of person. While some like to join something that already exists, there are those whose preference is to create something new and build it from scratch. It requires a certain level of drive and energy, and from our conversations with members of local chambers it is clear that this generally comes from one individual to start off with, who then draws in others along the way.

Step 2: Identify a leader. In order for the model to take off locally, the CCG will need to use all of its networks and contacts within the GP community to find a locum GP who wants to lead its development. Dr Mark Sage, a GP locum who set up the West Kent chambers, suggested the place to look would be either, “the well-established locums in an area, or the more recently qualified doctors, who are looking for a group they can affiliate with”. He suggested Programme Directors on VTS courses are important contacts, as they know the plans of the GPs leaving the course.

To be clear, this individual is not creating the chambers for the CCG, but for themselves. However, setting up something new is difficult as it requires a leap of faith that it is going to work, and can be challenging for someone who has never done anything like this before.

Step 3: Provide support for the leader. When we spoke to those who set up new chambers about the support they needed or received, this was not financial but rather moral support in terms of encouragement that the new model is going to work. The only practical action they described was help with the business case, in particular establishing the level of demand for locums from each of the local practices so that the newly formed chambers could be clear there would be sufficient demand for their business. Every chambers has since found that demand far exceeds the capacity they can provide!

In conclusion, it is clear from our research that, whilst successful locum GP chambers cannot be set-up nor controlled by a CCG, every CCG has a role to play in creating the environment in which they can flourish.

7
jul
0

The future of General Practice is a jigsaw – will all the pieces fit?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

I am worried. I worry that the General Practice Forward View (GPFV) does not fit with everything else that is going on. I worry that while on the one hand there is a small national team desperately trying to do the right thing by General Practice, most people haven’t even read the key document.

Recent events (and not just the obvious) have compounded my fears. Two things have happened. First the new CCG assessment and improvement framework has been published. It is not a fun read. The upshot of it is that there are 57 indicators across 29 areas by which CCGs are going to be assessed. One of these 29 areas is primary medical care, and it has a total of 4 indicators. These are:

  1. Management of long term conditions: unplanned hospitalisation rates for patients with chronic ambulatory care sensitive conditions.
  2. Patient experience of GP services: weighted percentage of people rating their experience of GP services as “fairly good” or “very good”.
  3. Primary care access: percentage of practices within a CCG where patients have the option of accessing pre-bookable appointments outside Monday to Friday 8.30am to 6.30pm. Access may be through a hub or federation rather than the individual practice.
  4. Primary care workforce: number of GPs and practice nurses (full time equivalent) per 1000 weighted patients by CCG.

I won’t waste the next 500 words explaining just why these in no way reflect the ambitions for General Practice outlined in the GPFV (but feel free to get in touch if you want the debate!). Suffice to say the measures by which CCGs are to be judged do not reflect the GPFV stated intentions around investment, workforce, workload, infrastructure and care redesign. Instead it is two steps backwards with tired measures that feel increasingly distant from the reality of most GP practices.

Second is the growing role of Sustainability and Transformation Plans (STPs). Recent guidance on STP allocations stated that this funding, “represents the full amount of funding expected to be available for local health systems from all sources in 20/21. They include an indicative fair share of the sustainability funding, primary care access and transformation funds, and other transformation funds including technology…. This includes taking forward the programmes set out in the General Practice Forward View and delivering extended GP access.”

The guidance goes on to say, “STPs will be the single application and approval process for being accepted onto programmes with transformational funding from 2017/18 onwards. Phasing of funding by areas in years 2017/18 – 2019/20 will be subject to consideration of STP plans submitted and subsequent decisions on how to target and deploy funding”.

The implication is that the financial plan for investment in General Practice actually sits within the local STP plan. While this contains a certain logic, the risk of the General Practice funding not finding its intended target becomes much higher. There is already guidance about the requirement of STP money to be passed through to acute providers, alongside a paucity of core General Practice provision representation in the development of STP plans in many areas.

The GPFV can’t sit in splendid isolation. It needs ownership across the system. It has to be the basis for how CCGs and primary care commissioners are assessed. It has to become the framework for local investment in, and the development of, General Practice. It has to materially impact local STPs. When we see the STPs we will find out exactly how reflective they are of the GPFV, and I really hope I will discover I have been worrying over nothing.

23
jun
0

We need a Financial Plan for the GP Forward View

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Increasing GP cynicism about the Government’s Forward View is understandable, argues Ben Gowland and, without a clear financial plan, the criticisms can only increase.

There is a growing temptation for many GPs following the recent criticism of the GP Forward View (GPFV) to dismiss it completely. However, the GPFV is a published policy document by NHS England. It makes many promises. Regardless of whether or not you believe the promises to be sufficient, they are real, written down promises. As such they need to be identified, monitored and those who made them held to account for keeping them. Especially the financial ones.

The complexity of the GPFV makes unpicking these promises, in particular the financial ones, very difficult to do. The RCGP has recognised the importance of this task, and has taken steps to establish what financial promises have actually been made to General Practice, and in particular how close these come to the RCGP’s campaign for General Practice to receive 11% of NHS funding (you can find this here).

What financial promises have NHS England actually made? What can we monitor and hold NHS England to account for? Ultimately there are only two that I think we should focus on: the promise to increase recurrent expenditure on General Practice by £2.4bn a year by 2020/21; and the (separate) promise to create a £508m “Sustainability and Transformation Package” that will be invested between now and 2020/21.

It is stated in black and white headline terms that recurrent funding for General Practice will increase from £9.6bn a year in 2015/16 to £12bn a year in 2020/21. It is not, however, broken down. The financial plan is missing. This I suppose provides room for manoeuvre, but at the same time is leading to confusion, mistrust and the growing lack of enthusiasm for the whole document.

The text does not help. One headline says that the £2.4bn “includes capital investment amounting to £900m over the next 5 years”. How can it? The capital funding is non-recurrent. The promised £2.4bn is recurrent. Even the one year share of the 5-year capital pot in 2020/21 would presumably have to be replaced or matched the year after anyway in order for it to be classified as recurrent.

And what do you make of this statement on p12, “The additional investment we are making in introducing new care models will benefit general practice too – and this will ensure investment rises at least in line with the plans set out above, and potentially even more.”? Does it mean any extra money from the transformation fund is part of the additional £2.4bn, or is it in addition to it? The RCGP sought clarification on this very point and were told by NHS England that it is additional. By the RCGP’s calculations this means General Practice will be receiving an additional amount between £561m and £842m extra (depending on whether you think General Practice will receive a “conservative” 20% of the Transformation Fund or an “optimistic” 30%) by 2020/21. For clarity, this is on top of the additional £2.4bn.

Suddenly the RCGP’s enthusiasm for the GPFV becomes a bit clearer. The money that is needed has really been promised.

But will it materialise? Really, will it? We hear talk of a national ‘reset’ of NHS finances. The funding problems in General Practice are often lost in talk of huge acute provider deficits. Every day we hear reports about the impact of continuing PMS reviews and cuts, alongside the ongoing removal of MPIG. If this level of extra funding was really coming, wouldn’t the approach shift to one of reduced growth payments as opposed to actual cuts? CCGs, even those with the most delegated of primary care commissioning budgets do not know when this funding is coming, how this funding is coming, or what this funding will look like. Can you blame practices for not sharing the enthusiasm of the RCGP?

We need the financial plan. NHS England would not accept a plan from a CCG without the financial plan attached, and General Practice must insist on seeing the financial plan that underpins the GPFV. NHS England needs to do this to build confidence that it will deliver what it has set out in the GPFV. General Practice needs it so that it can hold them to account for doing just this.

2
jun
0

General Practice Needs a Route Map

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

We know General Practice is in crisis. We know NHS England has published the GP Forward View. We know more money is on its way (despite arguments about how much!). But the curious thing is there is no clear direction for GP practices to follow.

I spoke recently to Dr Maureen Baker, Chair of the RCGP, (you can listen here) and asked her whether GP practices should now be looking to operate at scale. Her response? “I don’t think all practices will have to get bigger”. But some, presumably, will. It depends.

I asked her whether GP practices should be looking to take an active role leading the integration agenda or simply participating as others (such as the local community or acute trust) take a lead. Her response? “I don’t think it matters too much whether GPs are doing it or whether GPs are coming on board… It doesn’t have to be GPs that design it, lead it, run it.” Again, it depends.

Indeed, Dr Baker’s own summary for GP practices was they must look first to their own survival, but then consider that, ‘There is a range of ways of doing things… there is not a best way to do it”.

The GP Forward View (GPFV) in many ways reflects this. There is a huge reluctance to impose change upon General Practice, but at the same time a recognition that change is necessary. From an individual GP practice perspective, it has ended up almost as a smorgasbord of ideas and opportunities that can feel both overwhelming and lack the collective coherence necessary to create a clear plan for the practice.

GP practices have to sit, poised, ready to respond to expected announcements about deadlines for estates proposals, about funding for pharmacists and mental health workers, about the programme for online consultation systems, and about any local investments in extra capacity. Information drips through about each individually, as local commissioners await guidance from on high.

Without doubt, the GPFV brings opportunities for GP practices. But these opportunities do not sit together in a coherent narrative. There is no clear direction, no route map for practices to follow. It just depends.

I was working through with the GP partners of a practice recently to understand how they could tackle the challenges they faced, and what their plan should be. It was hard.   The problems facing General Practice have not gone away, and continue to worsen. Next year looks more challenging than this year for the practice. Opportunities exist, but they feel intangible, opaque, and like they are within the control of someone else and outside the control of the practice.

The partners reflected in the past making these decisions had been easier. There had been clarity from the PCT, or the Health Authority, or whoever the commissioner of the day was, as to the proposed direction for General Practice and what they wanted each practice to do. This does not exist today. Even within the same geographical area GP practices face challenges to lesser or greater extents, and the required response varies. It depends.

But no-one is helping practices work out what their individual response should be.

You could argue the lack of a clear direction is a good thing, as it provides choice and freedom for practices, and empowers practices to be masters of their own destiny. I wonder, however, whether we have taken this too far, and as a result have created an almost impossible task for practices who lack the headroom and time to navigate through such difficult terrain. My sense is many GP practices want and need leadership – someone to say this is the route you have to follow, and if you do this it will be ok. General Practice needs a route map.

19
may
2

Integration and Little Green Fairies

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog2 Comments

Ben Gowland muses on the potential roles for GPs in the integration agenda and finds himself away with the fairies.

I recently asked a GP whether she felt that GPs should play a leading role in integration across the system. She peered at me through her half-rimmed spectacles, and said, “I don’t even have time to go to the loo let alone get involved in Integration. It sounds great in theory but there is more chance of little green fairies doing a magic dance at the bottom of my garden than there is of me taking on any more work.”

So that was me told. The RCGP have produced a new report entitled, ‘The Future of GP Collaborative Working’. You can find it here. The report, as far as I can tell, has two key messages. One is that GPs, as the expert medical generalists, have a key role to play in the integration of services around patients with increasingly complex needs. The second message is that this central role of GPs is often not recognised and that any additional funding generally either falls short of what is needed, or is not maintained over the longer term.

So we are left with something of a conundrum. This is the ‘little green fairy’ problem; GPs now exist under such extremely severe time constraints that the prospect of them taking on more and more system responsibility seems, to many, simply preposterous. There are not enough GPs and no prospect of there being enough any time soon. But, at the same time, the system requires GPs to play a greater role in bringing services together around the needs of patients.

The RCGP Report contains a number of really interesting examples of how GPs have taken a leading role in integration. They are worth a closer look. They fall into three groups. There is one whereby a new service has been created that employs GPs directly into a new service, for example the @home scheme in London and the Memory Assessment Service in Brighton. There is a second whereby a small number of GPs are upskilled in a specific specialty and then work in partnership with a specialist centre to improve the General Practice offering, e.g. the child health hubs/clinics in London and in Lerwick in the Shetland Isles. The third is one whereby the GP practice team is expanded, for example the addition of a prescribing pharmacist as a partner, or employing a mental health therapist.

The analysis required is of the impact of these developments upon General Practice overall. Integration does not replace the need for core General Practice. Rather, it aims to fill the hole that often exists between core General Practice and secondary care, and indeed other services. But filling that hole at the expense of the core General Practice service would clearly be a mistake (a point, I fear, that is missed by some new-models-of-care enthusiasts).

This isn’t wholly scientific, but here is the little green fairy analysis of these three groups of examples:

Group One could either attract new GPs into the profession by creating a new range of options for newly qualified GPs to choose from, or it could pull from an already too small pool and make it smaller. Little green fairy verdict: I’m dancing.

Group Two can enable a small number of GPs to develop an interest, receive proper support, and enable that to be monetised by the practices of those GPs to recruit replacement capacity. At best the impact on GP practices is likely to be neutral. Little green fairy verdict: now you see me, now you don’t.

Group Three involves reshaping core General Practice by incorporating new roles and responsibilities as a driver for integration. This enables core General Practice to develop alongside integration initiatives. Little green fairy verdict: I’m toast.

We need integration; not as a replacement for General Practice but as well as General Practice. GPs have a key role to play. The only way this is going to be realistic at any sort of scale is if the integration work helps, rather than adds to, the delivery of core General Practice by GPs. If it doesn’t, then we would be better off looking at the end of our gardens for the elusive magic dance of the little green fairy.

12
may
0

We need new roles to enable change, not to replace GPs

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Whatever may be inferred from the introduction of new clinical roles into General Practice, Ben Gowland argues that GPs are irreplaceable; no other health professional working in primary care has the depth and breadth of experience and training like a GP. However, the introduction of these other staff groups is, he suggests, a way of ensuring the survival of General Practice.

There is, unquestionably, a shortage of GPs. Practices need to be able to recruit GPs to fill the vacancies they have, and to avoid the financial burden of dependence on high cost locums. But practices with a full establishment of GPs still have a workload that is becoming increasingly unmanageable, and are also facing financial challenges as income has fallen and costs have risen over recent years. They cannot afford more GPs.

The new GP Forward View places the development of new clinical roles centrally alongside renewed efforts to attract and retain more GPs. As a result, the message that many GPs have heard (and rejected) is that somehow lesser-trained, lower-paid clinical professionals can carry out the work of a GP. But that is not why we need new clinical roles in General Practice.

We know that demand from patients has gone up to unmanageable levels and that clinical and non-clinical staff cannot cope with the daily onslaught. A recent study from the Kings Fund showed that the number of consultations has risen by 15% in the last 5 years. Patients are not just getting older, they are becoming much more demanding.

But if demand is up, and capacity (i.e. the number of GPs) cannot be increased to meet this demand, then something else has to change. This is at the heart of the introduction of new clinical roles.

The GP practices getting most on top of this are the ones that have embraced change in tackling on-the-day demand by, for instance, bringing in a multi-disciplinary teams of advanced nurse practitioners, paramedics and pharmacists. They have created in-house ‘urgent care centres’, or the like, that manage the telephone triage and act as the frontline for the practice.

Some GP practices have got together and created these ‘urgent care centres’ across different practices, to make them more affordable. Some have even merged so that they can do this more effectively. Some have teamed up with their local community trust so that they can access the nursing and physiotherapist workforce that they can supply.

The question practices need to address is not, ‘Can other clinical specialties carry out the role of a GP?’ Rather, the questions they need to ask are:

  • How can we re-shape the way that on the day demand is managed, using the skills, experience and expertise of other staff groups that are uniquely placed to be able to do this?
  • How can we meet the challenge that the new profile of demand presents for our practice?
  • How can we make best use of the GP time that we do have, while still meeting the needs of our population?’

If the aim is simply to replace ‘missing’ GPs with other staff groups, then attempts to introduce these staff groups to General Practice may well negatively impact the service practices can offer. But if the aim is to redesign the model of General Practice to better meet the shifting pattern of demand, then new roles can have a transformative effect on everyone working in a GP practice, and for the patients they serve.

 

5
may
0

Time for Action

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Enough with the analysis and breast-beating, pleads Ben Gowland! As the system finally wakes up to the crisis in General Practice he posits that there is at least one reasonably easy solution which no-one has yet tried.

The Kings Fund have published a new report, entitled ‘Understanding Pressures in General Practice’. The immediate reaction in General Practice I am sure will be a weary shrug. They know what the pressures are. Their frustration lies in the amount of time it has taken the system to recognise it, and a prevailing sense that further analysis of the problem does not seem to lead to help and support that makes coping any easier.

There could be a real benefit to the quantification of the problem. There has been a 15% rise in consultations from 2010/11 to 2014/15, based on analysis of over 30 million contacts. This is driven by an increase in the number of consultations per registered patient per year from 4.29 to 4.91 over the same period. The benefit would be if this led to an increase in the funding per registered patient.

But the money has already been promised, through the General Practice Forward View (my take on that here). This report comes two weeks too late. For GP practices, the time now is not for further analysis of the problem, but for the development of solutions. We already know what money is available and what the policy makers are offering.

Ultimately it is now down to GP practices themselves. The GP Forward View is out, and it is decision time. But, realistically, how can GP practices possibly take a grip of this agenda? How will they find the time? When some GPs respond to surveys putting the need to be able to take a toilet break at the top of their wish-list, it is hard to imagine practices being able to create the necessary capacity.

There is one place that help could come to General Practice from. There is a group of GPs who understand the challenges General Practice faces, who know how the system works, who have relationships with different healthcare organisations across the system. These are the GPs working in CCGs.

These GPs work in CCGs because the CCGs pay them to do it. If they returned to General Practice they would lose both the funding and the protected time to really help. So right now the GPs that general practice needs are crusading the cause of CCGs, tackling the problems of the system. But while they are away, home is burning. At this rate, there may be nothing left to come home to.

The time has come for a really practical step. CCGs need to identify a core group of GPs that they will second back to General Practice, and fund these secondments. The job of these GPs will be to work with local practices to help them navigate a way through the post-GP Forward View landscape, and support the development of a strong local General Practice.

If General Practice really is at the heart of local Sustainability and Transformation Plans, it is a perfectly reasonable step for CCGs to take. If GP leaders in CCGs really want to make a difference, then it is time to focus on General Practice itself. Not from within the confines of the CCG offices, but out, hand in hand, with the practices who need the help.

The pressures in General Practice are now understood and documented. It is time for action. As Benjamin Disraeli said, “Action may not always bring happiness, but there is no happiness without action”.

28
apr
2

Unpicking the Finances of the GP Forward View

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog2 Comments

Ben Gowland has read the new GP Forward View a number of times – despite its length! The question on his and everyone else’s lips is “Is there real coffee underneath the froth?”

The new GP Forward view is full of headline promises, but at the same time it is a marathon read (60 pages), repetitive and unwieldy.

Everything hinges on the money. The headline is an additional £2.4bn investment in General Practice. But what is that money, and is it really ‘additional’? How much will practices actually receive? You have to work hard to unpick this from the document, but here is how I think it breaks down:

This year’s GP contract (previously agreed) contains an uplift of 3.2%, totalling £220m. If this is replicated over the next 5 years General Practice will end up with a total funding rise of c£1.1bn. Remember, following the government’s 5-year funding settlement for the NHS at the end of 2015, NHS England had already promised investment in General Practice of 4-5% each year until 2020/21.

Capital investment of £900m. Capital investment promises to General Practice are hard to track. In 2014 £1bn was promised over 4 years from 2015/16 to 2019/20 as the General Practice Infrastructure Fund. This then became the Primary Care Transformation Fund, and then the Estates and Technology Transformation Fund. It looks like £100m of this was spent in 2015/16 (my assumption), and that the existing fund (£1bn less the £100m) has been re-announced as £900m with the deadline extended until 2021. We await the new name…

Recurrent investment of £500m for extra primary care capacity. This money is essentially for 7 day working, and is not for everyone. Hidden away in the document it explains this funding, “will be tested with the current GP access fund sites during 16/17”, meaning (I assume) it includes the funding NHS England has already promised to continue the services at the existing Prime Minister’s Challenge Fund sites. It will be “linked to” investment in 111 and out of hours, raising questions as to whether the money will even make it to core General Practice. This money is only accessible for “groups of local practices and other providers”.

These three pots together make a total uplift of £2.5bn, by my calculations. The promise is for £2.4bn, and the difference must therefore mean that the core expectation of GP practices should be that the annual rise in core contract value will be slightly less than that received this year, over the next 5 years. The only recurrent money that is ‘new’ is the additional funding available to those who pursue the government’s 7 day working agenda. More froth, it seems, than coffee.

This funding “will be supplemented by” a £508m sustainability package. This is essentially non-recurrent funding that will be invested over the next 5 years. It breaks down into 3 distinct pots:

  1. £56m of what is essentially crisis support: £40m to continue the £10m investment that was made into vulnerable practices in 2015/16 for another 4 years (bizarrely it is going to start with £16m investment in 2016/17); and £16m for specialist services for GPs suffering burn out and stress.
  2. £206m for ‘workforce measures’: the part funded pharmacist programme will be extended (£112m); a new Pharmacy Integration Fund (described as “£20m in 2016/17 and rising by £20m each year”) which is essentially for community pharmacy; a £15m practice nurse development programme; a £6m practice manager development programme; £3.5m in “multidisciplinary training hubs” to develop a wider workforce; plus an unspecified investment in GP recruitment and retention measures. 3000 new mental health therapists were also announced, but the document is silent on the source of funding for these.
  3. £246m to ‘support the redesign of services’: £45m to stimulate the uptake of online consultations; a £30m national development programme ‘Releasing Time for Patients’ for all GP practices; plus CCGs to come up with £171m to stimulate providers of extra capacity, to implement the 10 ‘high impact changes’ for General Practice, and to improve in-hours access.

So there you have it: the uplift in core funding over the next four years will be equal to or less than that received this year, the £500m of additional recurrent funding is not really available to the average practice, and at least half of the non-recurrent funding will be focussed on improving access. The lack of clarity in the document I suspect was designed to make the promise of funding look greater than it actually is, and on first reading it did exactly that. Once the reality of what is actually on offer sinks in, there may well be more heartache ahead for both General Practice and the Government.

21
apr
1

What planet are you on?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog1 Comment

After years of studying General Practice, Ben Gowland has achieved something that has eluded many great scientists: he has found empirical evidence that parallel universes exist…

I have recently discovered evidence of a new universe, centred on Planet Alpha. Planet Alpha appears, to all intents and purposes, very much like our own planet. The inhabitants breathe an oxygen/nitrogen-mix, the humans are bi-pedal and no-one can fully explain the attractions of Donald Trump.

But Planet Alpha demonstrates some marked differences from Earth. It is overly endowed with policy wonks and Whitehall mandarins, a disproportionately large percentage of its movers and shakers have never held a real job and, tragically, many of its citizens suffer from selective deafness.

It is in Planet Alpha‘s approach to General Practice that we can really see the differences between them and the planet inhabited by you and me. On Planet Alpha the problems of General Practice are that it is not available 7 days a week, that not every GP surgery is offering Skype appointments and, therefore, not ‘embracing technology’, and that it is not uniformly operating at scale.

On Planet Alpha the push is to “modernise” General Practice using an army of robotic entrepreneurs with unlimited private equity that is hanging around just waiting to be invested in primary care. On Alpha there are huge efficiency savings to be made by using other professionals to support GPs and, ultimately, make them redundant. But, frustratingly for the policy-makers, many of the Alpharian GPs won’t get their acts together by offering more modern services such as 24/7 access to primary care through supermarket-like chains of super-practices stretching across the country.

Things are very different on Planet Beta (also known to scientists as Planet Reality). Beta is inhabited by GPs and practice managers with very different problems. On Beta demand has skyrocketed to unmanageable levels. Staff are leaving and there is nobody to replace them. Indemnity costs, regulation costs and locum costs are forever rising, while PMS reviews and the withdrawal of MPIG protection have stolen income away. Many staff on Planet Beta are at breaking point.

GPs on Beta know their premises are too small, are not DDA compliant and they constantly worry about the future. They look for the queue of investors waiting to sign cheques for them – but it never materialises. Increasingly sick and demanding patients arrive in their surgeries with sheets of conflicting information downloaded from the internet. The GPs want to make changes, but they don’t have time to meet the other GPs in their own practice, let alone anyone from the outside world.

Parallel universe Alpha is a much happier place because Health Ministers there are currently working to manufacture 5,000 new all-singing, all-dancing GPs to populate their alternate world and bring joy and relief to all concerned.

My research has left me reflecting; isn’t it a good job that parallel universes remain parallel and never intersect? Aren’t we lucky that the hard-pressed GPs on our own planet won’t ever have to meet the top-down loving, one-size fits all, single-minded-against-all-the-evidence autocrats on Planet Alpha? Wouldn’t it be truly awful if the Alpharians set the strategy and made the policy decisions for our own GPs to follow?

14
apr
0

A move to the dark side?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, Life After the NHSNo Comments

When Ben Gowland left the NHS to set up his own company he was publicly accused of immorality. He himself questioned whether he would be able to retain his public service values in the “outside” world. Here he reaches a conclusion.

Are people who work in the NHS more value-driven than those who work outside the NHS? This is a question that came quickly to mind when I decided to resign my role as Chief Executive of a CCG and establish my own company. When my decision to quit was announced in the local media, the message board on the Northampton Chronicle and Echo website erupted into life with furious comments condemning me as a villain and a leech. The tone is summed up by this one:

“Ben Gowland has no better morals than the bankers & corrupt politicians of late that we all have witnessed…When are politicians and the media going to wake up and expose these people? Their only desire is to milk us dry and take even more money for themselves…I wish every failure for him and his venture. He’s wrecked our services now he wants to set up a company supplying services back to us to cream off even more monies from the public purse!”

And this was one of the more moderate comments. I must admit to being surprised by the reaction. I wasn’t expecting a ticker-tape parade and dancing in the streets of Wellingborough when I left but, like anyone who has worked hard for a long time, I thought I might just leave with a warm glow and appreciation of a job well done. How naïve!

At the heart of my decision to leave the NHS had been a growing disillusionment with my ability to effect real change from within the Service, and a belief that the freedom of working for myself would make this more possible. Shifting from being paid directly by the NHS as a salaried employee to working alongside the NHS, contracting services in, didn’t feel like a decision to move to the “dark side”. But was it? Had I now become, as owner and only employee of a private company, a person lacking in morals as the comments suggested? Did my new position inevitably place me as a self-interested capitalist, no longer interested in social values?

I found even the suggestion that this might be true to be difficult. It took me several months before I could even read the comments written in the paper in full and they made me variously cringe and become indignant. Deep down I knew that, whatever others might think, I personally could add more social value from outside the NHS than from within it. I understood it was going to take time to prove this to others, particularly those who don’t know me but my whole career has been driven by my values – so prove it, I would.

I started by writing down the mission of Ockham Healthcare, and published it on the website. It finishes like this,

“Ockham Healthcare is here to create practical steps to a better future for healthcare: to support those who embody the ideas of the NHS but that the NHS seems to work against; to help those who want to create a new future for the values underpinning the NHS; and to enable change and innovation in a system without incentive to change.”

The opportunity I now have is to use my position outside of the NHS (and the freedom this brings) to provide help where I think it is needed most, and to focus on areas of my choosing -rather than those chosen by others. Now it is up to me to embrace that opportunity.

The whole experience has actually made me far clearer about my own personal values and about what I am trying to achieve with my life and my career; far clearer than I had been for many years operating within the NHS.

Can one enter the cut-throat world of commerce and remain value-driven? Using my experience as a sample of one, the answer is “yes”. Not only is it proving possible to be value-driven in the private sector I find that, by being single-minded about what I believe in and without the distracting influence of other agendas, my values have led my actions in Ockham Healthcare even more forcefully than when I was in the public sector. And long may that continue.

7
apr
0

How do you solve a problem like General Practice?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

Who has the answer to the crisis facing General Practice? Ben Gowland argues that it is not the politicians, or indeed anyone who believes in an imposed, top-down intervention. The solution has to come from General Practice itself.

We all know General Practice is in crisis. What we seem to be lacking is a sensible plan for how to tackle it.

The Government’s approach is relatively straightforward. They have promised more money (4-5% each year until 2021), more doctors (5000 more by 2020) and less bureaucracy. They are going to encourage GP practices to operate ‘at scale’ by offering a new voluntary contract for practices that cover a population of 30,000 or more. And in return they want 7-day access to GP services.

Sounds simple. But there is a fundamental problem with this approach – we know it is not going to work. The financial problems in General Practice are NOT going to be solved by the additional funding (less than half of GPs think it will have a significant positive impact on the problems they are currently facing). The recruitment problems are NOT going to be solved by the extra GPs: GPs are leaving, retiring and emigrating far faster than new ones are joining. And a huge 90% of GPs think that the introduction of 7-day working will only make their problems significantly worse.

The current crisis in General Practice will NOT be resolved by a new contract, a 10-point plan, or a series of ‘interventions’ from on high. Offering more money to GPs for working harder or longer hours when they are already at breaking point is just likely to send them over the edge. Shouting louder at practices that are struggling or increasing the number of inspections or applying stricter and stricter contract penalties are NOT going to work – they will simply make the situation worse.

So what WILL work? However dire the current situation you can’t just force or manipulate General Practice into changing. A completely different approach is required. It needs leadership that will inspire those working in General Practice (who are variously tired, frustrated and burnt-out) to believe that change for the better is, in fact, possible. The group interest of General Practice (and thus their patients) needs to be set as the priority, as a means of stimulating followership. Change needs to start with, and build on, the values, ideals and needs of General Practice.   And it needs a focus on innovation, on doing things differently and doing different things – rather than the execution of someone else’s plan that no-one really believes will work.

Where this type of approach has been used, we have seen the green shoots of success. I spoke recently with Mark Newbold, the Managing Director of Our Health Partnership, the new ‘super-practice’ formed from 32 previously existing practices in Birmingham. Inspired by the vision presented to them, the member practices committed to the new model. They dissolved their old partnerships and created a new one. The model is working because the organisation has created trust between the leadership and the members. This is because its primary focus is on the needs of the members and their patients and because it is striving to deliver on its promise that the benefits of operating together at scale will outweigh the loss of independence and start-up costs. In Mark’s words, it remains a “grass roots movement”.

But it would be a foolish Whitehall mandarin who interpreted this as meaning that super practices must be the “answer”. What this example demonstrates, though, is that the “answer” must come from locally-led change, focussed on listening, collaboration and leading by example. The plan for General Practice can’t start with the answer. Imposing change on General Practice will make things worse. But a plan that strives to build trust, to create an environment that encourages new ways of working, and to enable and empower GP practices to transform themselves, is the one most likely to succeed.

31
mar
0

A Life Without Meetings

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, Life After the NHSNo Comments

Ben Gowland considers what happens when the meetings stop and you suddenly have time to think.

I was having a drink with an old colleague recently and he asked me what life was like, now that I am working for myself. Frankly, I replied, there are a lot less meetings.

There is something about working in the NHS that draws you into this culture of meeting after endless meeting. I remember a new Finance Director joining an organisation I was at who proudly placed a framed quote on his desk that read, ‘People who enjoy meetings should not be in charge of anything’. Within a few months he was complaining about the meetings just like the rest of us, and the quote mysteriously disappeared.

At a different hospital, when a new HR Director started she announced she would not be having any meetings before 9.30am. That is going to be tough, I thought to myself, given the consultants would only meet you at 7.30 in the morning (or earlier – there seemed to be some sort of competition amongst the general surgeons as to who would arrive the earliest). I remember meeting her six months later, at about 7.45am on a dark winter’s morning in the half mile queue for the coffee shop in the main hospital concourse, and I asked her about her initial pledge. She looked like she had aged 10 years in that time. She had dark circles around her eyes, and that constantly distant look that comes with one too many employment tribunals. She just stared at me and denied all knowledge of anything so idiotic. ‘Double espresso to go’ she barked at the hapless barista…

I have to admit there was a transition, moving from a diary packed from dusk to dawn with meetings to one with virtually none. What do you do? How do you stop yourself checking whether Supermarket Sweep is still on in the mornings? I searched the web for advice. It turns out it requires discipline: only look at emails for half an hour twice a day; focus on the ‘one big thing’ you want to do each day before you do anything else; and don’t, whatever you do, turn on the TV.

Now I like it. Admittedly it took me a while to get used to it, but now I really enjoy being able to spend my time working on the things I want to do. It has meant I was able to ensure that Ockham produced its first White Paper, ‘5 Years to the End of General Practice?’ in February, that we could generate a suite of tools for the ‘Practical Steps’ programme for GP practices, as well as have the capacity to write two regular blogs – this one and one on general practice.

Life without meetings has its own challenges, but in the quest to make a difference it feels like a step in the right direction. And (I know you are wondering) there is currently no sign of Supermarket Sweep anywhere…

 

24
mar
3

Why scale isn’t the answer for General Practice

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog3 Comments

Ben Gowland argues that working at greater scale is not the panacea for General Practice that some would have us believe.

To many outside observers the problems facing General Practice seem quite straightforward. There are nearly 8000 small businesses, many of whom are finding their current business model to be unsustainable. Clearly what is needed is for there to be a consolidation of the businesses, so that there are fewer, each of a bigger size, with greater operational and financial resilience.

But is this really the answer? Reports have emerged recently about a federation in Doncaster going into administration after running into financial difficulties. Not only did operating at scale in this instance fail to provide the answer to the current pressures for this set of practices, but it also cost them as much as £20,000 each to find this out.

Operating at scale can help practices. But it is not a solution in itself. Rather it enables other solutions to be put in place. It means the practice can cope better with staff who want to work part time, it creates the critical mass to introduce new roles, and it enables the provision of sufficient management capacity for further change. Larger practices can access more capital, invest in buildings and technology, and play a much larger role in changes across the whole system.

But these benefits are not automatic. They are not delivered simply because the practice is now operating at a greater scale. If two or three practices merge or form a federation these benefits will not necessarily follow.

This is because the journey is often not straightforward. As one GP put it to me recently, “(these changes) have the potential to help the practice but if they are introduced badly they could also make things worse… Working as a group could definitely improve things if developed well, but could also drain effort and resources without giving enough benefits in return”.

Ultimately it is the way the change is made that is important. Not the practical legal governance issues (these are straightforward enough), but the engagement of hearts and minds, the development of a shared set of values, and the setting of common goals that will determine success or otherwise for those parties deciding to get bigger together.

The right question is not to ask whether operating at scale is an answer for General Practice. Rather it is to ask; are practices capable of changing the scale at which they operate? Does the expertise exist in General Practice to ensure the benefits of getting bigger outweigh the effort and resources required to get there?

In pockets the answer is yes but in general it is no. Some practices can, and have, made changes that have delivered huge benefits for them. But many practices are stuck in a vicious circle of increasing workload and worsening finances, and haven’t the capacity for a discussion about whether to make a change, let alone to implement anything significant. Telling them to operate at scale, or even employ a pharmacist, or introduce web-based triage simply is not going to help. And using a contract to try to force the change misses the point: the issue is capacity and capability to change, not resistance to trying something new.

Operating at scale is an answer for General Practice, but not the answer. The answer is headroom for practices to make changes to the way they operate; it is help with the process of identifying and making these changes; and it is resources to make these changes happen.

17
mar
0

Will Anyone Listen to a Healthcare Podcast? or How Chris Moyles Changed My Life

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, Life After the NHSNo Comments

I was gutted when they announced Chris Moyles was to be axed from the Radio 1 Breakfast Show. He was appealing to the wrong demographic. Radio 1 is apparently supposed to attract 18-25 year olds and yet “old” men in their forties, like me, were clinging onto their youth and still enjoying the daily banter from the larger-than-life Yorkshireman.

So where to go then? I tried Radio 2 (despite his devoted audience Terry Wogan was never going to be for me), Radio 4 (made listening to the radio feel too much like work), Radio 5 Live (all over the place), and even local radio (couldn’t cope with the adverts). It was then that I first came across podcasts. Podcasts are basically pre-recorded radio shows, but the beauty of them is that you can choose exactly what you want to listen to and when. I discovered that on iTunes there are literally thousands available.

So I found ‘Coffee Break Spanish’ and started to learn Español. I discovered The Fantasy Football Scoutcast to feed my unhealthy addiction to fantasy football. And I really enjoyed ‘The Tim Ferriss Show’ because I love his books (‘The Four Hour Work Week’ changed my life, but that’s another story…), and he interviews some fascinating people.

I also looked to see whether there were any good healthcare podcasts. There is Radio 4’s Inside Health and a number of other examples from the “pills and piles” school but I couldn’t find anything for someone like me working in healthcare.

When I started up Ockham Healthcare one of the things I really wanted to do was see if we could create such a podcast: one about the delivery of healthcare specifically targeted at people working in healthcare. I wanted it to provide examples of good practice that could go into more depth than a written summary, which could really get underneath how people were able to make the changes they did, and overcome the resistance that they inevitably faced along the way.

But where do you start? Is making a podcast easy or difficult? Well, it turns out there are various technical challenges, but nothing insurmountable. Yes, I have found myself on the end of a frustrating Skype call with someone miming ‘I can’t hear you!’, and yes I have had to record a 30 minute call in 5 minute bursts because I didn’t realise the ‘free’ version limited you to 5 minutes of recording. But, as it turned out, there was plenty of freely available information on the internet to get me through.

On February 9th 2016 we published on iTunes the first episode of ‘The Ben Gowland Podcast’ – a name which, unsurprisingly, I came up with myself. We publish a new episode every week and I have had the privilege of speaking to some fantastic people along the way. These have, so far, ranged from a practice manager in Gateshead explaining how their work with the local community saw her organising Christmas dinner and a tea dance, to finding out what is going on behind the scenes in the development of the largest ‘super-practice’ in England.

Will anyone listen to a healthcare podcast? It is early days but it is beginning to look like they will. More and more people are listening every week. Have a listen here and let me know what you think. Be brutally honest with me, I want it to get better and I can take it. Plus if you think there is anyone I should be interviewing on the podcast let me know.

In the end I think the controllers of Radio 1 did me a favour when they axed Chris Moyles. It was clearly time for me to recognise I am no longer in my twenties, and to “update” my listening behaviour. If they hadn’t I am not sure I would have even discovered podcasts, let alone have my own show. You could say it changed my life…

10
mar
2

General Practice or CCG: Time for GP Leaders to switch?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice Blog2 Comments

I recently tried to persuade a GP leader (Dr S) to leave his CCG and spend his time helping core General Practice instead. Here is how the conversation went:

Me: The time has come for you, and GPs like you in leadership roles in CCGs, to step down from your CCG role and instead use the skills you’ve developed over the last 6 years to lead General Practice out of its current crisis.

Dr S: I can’t begin to tell you how bad an idea I think that is! First off, I don’t think it is my job to change General Practice.

Me: So whose job do you think it is? Seriously, if it is not your job, whose job is it? NHS England do not think it is their job, and you certainly cannot believe it is the Government’s! Only GPs really understand General Practice. You are now a trained system leader. General Practice needs you.

Dr S: But I‘m needed where I am. CCGs have to be clinically led, and need GPs like me to stay in place. Otherwise they will become just like PCTs.

Me: You yourself are always telling me how serious the crisis in General Practice is. If it really is in such a bad way, why are you not switching your efforts? What is more important, the badge of clinical leadership for CCGs, or the future of General Practice?

Dr S: I have invested a lot in the CCG. I want it to succeed. I don’t want to let down all those I work with in the CCG. I would feel like I am abandoning them.

Me: I understand how you feel, but at the same time you are letting down your GP colleagues, current and future, by not focusing your efforts on General Practice. It is the system’s job to look after the CCG – it is, after all, a statutory body. It is no-one’s job to look after General Practice.

Dr S: But I can do more benefit for General Practice here in the CCG. I control the money here and I can make real change happen.

Me: First, the CCG bureaucracy around conflicts of interest means the change you can effect in General Practice from within the CCG is extremely limited. Second, contractual change is not the answer General Practice needs. It needs to change from the inside, with leaders like you working across practices, winning hearts and minds, finding a way forward.

Dr S: Even if I wanted to leave I couldn’t because my practice needs the CCG money. I won’t get anything for working with General Practice. If I left the CCG I would just have to go back to full time clinical work.

Me: You are right that the incentives in the system encourage GP leaders to remain in CCGs rather than support General Practice to change. At Ockham Healthcare we make the case that the money you earn in the CCG should be transferred with you if you want to make this move, so that you are paid the same for carrying out work to support the development of local General Practice as you are in the CCG. (You can read the report here)

Dr S: But we are talking about over £70K per year. How would this work in practice?

Me: Your CCG could choose to fund you, or indeed any of the GP leaders in your CCG, to work in General Practice by seconding you on full pay on the basis of the benefit this would bring to the system as a whole. You don’t need anyone else other than the CCG itself to agree it.

Dr S: But in the CCG I have a clearly defined leadership role, and everyone understands what it is. What would my role be if I If I left the CCG? Would there even be a role?

Me: There won’t be a marked out role, but there is a huge leadership challenge. You will have to establish your role and gain acceptance from your peers for it. No-one said this would be easy!

Dr S: The problem is I have burnt bridges with many of my colleagues as a result of my CCG role. I am not sure my GP colleagues want my help!

Me: First and foremost you are a GP. You understand General Practice. The fact you have made tough decisions in the past and stood by them in the face of peer resistance shows you are a leader of courage and integrity. You are exactly what General Practice needs. General Practice has to make some difficult decisions about how it is going to change and adapt going forward. Some are not going to like it and the challenge is going to be taking everyone with you.

Dr S: That is very generous, but I am not sure however hard I try that I will be able to persuade my GP colleagues to change.

Me: If you don’t believe that General Practice can get out of the situation it is currently in, do not expect anyone else to. Everyone can change with the right leadership, resources and support. If anyone is capable of helping your colleagues to change, it is you.

Dr S: But where would I go? What would I do? I am not sure I would even know where to start.

Me: You could do worse than following the advice of John Kotter. You would start by listening to your colleagues and really understanding their problems. You would share the experiences and ensure everyone understood the urgency of the situation and the need for change. You would create a change team around you. You would build a vision for the future. You would make sure everyone bought into it, and you would communicate it over and over and over again. You would move to action, creating quick wins to develop momentum. You would build on early successes and make bigger and bigger changes. Eventually you would embed these changes in the way that General Practice operates, completing the transformation.

Dr S: Maybe the idea is not as ridiculous as I first thought! I am not sure what to do

Me: Either General Practice is in trouble or it isn’t. If it is, it needs your help. Don’t leave it to others. Don’t take the easy route of staying put. Take up the challenge. Make the move. Use the skills that you have developed in the CCG to give General Practice a chance. Don’t do it for yourself, do it for your colleagues, do it because you believe in General Practice and the role it plays in the system and the difference it makes to patients. Do it because it is the right thing to do.

Should GP Leaders be leaving CCGs and supporting core General Practice? Let me know what you think: email ben@ockham.healthcare or via twitter @BenXGowland

3
mar
0

An Adventure Outside the NHS

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, Life After the NHSNo Comments

Some of you might know me, but some of you won’t, so let me introduce myself. After working for 20 years in the NHS, in April 2015 I resigned from my job as Chief Executive and Accountable Officer of a Clinical Commissioning Group, and ‘left’ the NHS. I started up a new company, Ockham Healthcare, which is part think tank, part consultancy. But is it possible for someone like me, ‘born and bred’ in the NHS, to build a successful company outside of the NHS?

A colleague said to me a few years ago that public sector executives are not, and never can be, entrepreneurs. He said we lacked whatever it is that is required to make a new company successful. His rationale was that we have all become too indoctrinated by the public sector mentality of days filled with quality committees and audit committees and the like, and of doing whatever we are told from on high, to ever be able to build something from the bottom up.

Maybe he is right. I don’t want to believe it, and in many ways what I am doing now is an experiment in proving the validity (or otherwise!) of his hypothesis. I don’t mind being the guinea pig!

One thing that I can say is that I now earn a lot less money. There is a frightening statistic that 50% of new businesses fail in the first year, and 95% fail within 5 years. So far outgoings have indeed exceeded incomings, but I am told that if I can end the first year even with a small loss I will be doing well. But for me this isn’t the point. The challenge I have set for myself is whether I can put my energy and effort into creating something that I am proud of, that feels like a force for good, and that makes a positive difference to all those that it touches (whether they are staff, clients, partners or patients).

That said, I still have to make a living. I had saved enough to make it through a year. Whether I can make it through two remains to be seen! I plan to share my adventure into the unknown through this column, to share whatever I learn about life after the NHS, and to discover whether it is even possible for me to stay outside the NHS.

My starting point is general practice. I am trying to find ways of providing support that can help general practice get through the genuinely difficult position it is in right now. Whether or not general practice wants my support is another matter, but I am putting together tools to help GP practices who are in real trouble and need to make big changes. If you know GP practices that could benefit from my help please put them in touch – help me make a difference!

My next column will be in two weeks’ time. In the meantime, if there is anything you want to know, experiences that you can share, or advice that you think can help, please get in touch via ben@ockham.healthcare.

26
feb
0

Give us our daily bread

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

I am a bread maker. I know which ingredients I need to make the perfect loaf. I know how long it takes. I know how much the ingredients cost, how much of my time I need to put in, and how many loaves I need to sell at what price to make a living.

As a bread maker, I know my customers. I know if I make really great bread I can sell at a price higher than that in the supermarkets because my customers appreciate great bread. If the cost of the ingredients goes up, I can raise my prices and my customers might not like it but they will understand. I can still make a living.

In the NHS the life of a bread maker is much more complicated. When I sell my bread to the NHS, I am not selling it to my customers (the people who eat my bread). I am selling it to “commissioners”, who are buying that bread on behalf of patients. The job of commissioners is to make sure patients get the best possible value for the money invested by the government in the NHS, and they take this very seriously indeed.

Problems arise when the cost of my ingredients go up. I say to the commissioners, “the cost of flour has gone up, and so I will have to raise my prices”. But according to the commissioners this is my problem. They insist that I make more bread for less money, despite the rise in the cost of ingredients.

So what do I do? I can either make lower quality bread, putting less care and attention into each loaf. Or I can work longer and longer hours making bread, and pay myself less and less money to offset the rise in the cost of ingredients. Eventually, I have to do both.

I go back to the commissioners and say that I can’t carry on. My bread is no longer of the same quality and I am close to burnout.

Finally, they listen. They say they understand the problems I am facing. They say they are going to give me more money for my bread. On one condition: that I make bread 7 days a week. Patients should have fresh bread 7 days a week they tell me, and that is what they want in return for the extra money.

I say, “But I need the extra money because my costs have gone up. My costs will go up even more if I have to make bread 7 days a week. My business will still be in trouble”. “Money is tight for everyone” the commissioners reply, “we need a return for the extra money we are investing”.

I don’t understand this logic. If flour costs more, I need more money to make bread. I cannot absorb the cost and still make great bread and still make a living that will support my family. Sometimes costs go up. Sometimes people have to pay more for the exact same thing. When I sell directly to customers they understand this.

I agree with commissioners that patients should have fresh bread 7 days a week. I am happy to work with my fellow bread makers to work out a way that we can do this between us, and as long as we are reimbursed for the costs of doing it then we can provide it. But not now. Not while my business is facing such severe challenges. If commissioners paid more money so that I could meet the costs of making bread, and I could get my business back on track, then I would be at a point where I could work out how to make fresh bread available 7 days a week. But not right now.

I would be happy to agree to change the way I make bread in return for extra money. I would be happy to explore how I could find different types of labour, work with other bread makers and other organisations, and find ways that would enable me to still make great bread at lower costs. If the commissioner would invest extra money to help me make these changes I would be up for the challenge.

But if nothing changes, I do not think I will be able to make bread for the NHS any more.

8
feb
0

Life after the NHS

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, Life After the NHSNo Comments

Why I Resigned as CEO of a CCG

This article was first published in the Guardian on the 23rd June 2015

At 4pm on Tuesday 13th January this year, less than two weeks after the Christmas break, I walked nervously into the Chair’s office and resigned.

A few hours later, I was sat in a bar with some friends, their faces etched with disbelief, being interrogated about what I had just done.  After finally exhausting the ‘and then what did he say?’ questions, one of the group asked, ‘But what I still don’t understand is why? You are the Chief Executive – why would you walk away from such a well-paid job, with its final salary pension, when you don’t have to? Why?’

The last time I had encountered that degree of questioning from them was twenty years earlier, when having graduated from Oxford I decided to spurn the advances of the city and instead pursue a career in NHS management.  My answer then was that I didn’t want to wake up when I was 40 (40 seeming very old at that point) and discover that what I had achieved was simply earning a pile of money. I wanted to do something more with my life. I wanted to make a difference, and working in the NHS felt like an opportunity to positively impact on the lives of people who need help most.

I have worked in the NHS for 20 years.  And in that time I have met many front line staff who work every day under exceptionally difficult circumstances, and who do, truly, impact upon the lives of patients and their carers. I have always felt my job is to do what I can to make their lives easier, to create systems that work better for them, and to try to solve as many of their problems as I can.

There have been times when I have felt that this was exactly what I was doing, for example when I was able to facilitate the introduction of a Community Elderly Care Service, that had been the brainchild of the local Elderly Care consultants who could see that their expertise was needed more out in the community than in the hospital.

But there have been other times when I have felt like I am not making any difference at all.  The endless meetings, the incessant reporting, the answering to the latest political diktat. The NHS operates from the top down, but what makes sense in Whitehall rarely makes sense to the staff on the front line.

I vividly remember driving home at 8pm one evening when the phone rang.  It was the local regional manager, who wanted information for her manager for 8am the next morning (because he had a meeting with Secretary of State).  I arrived home, called a number of staff and between us we worked until midnight pulling the information together. But for what? We weren’t adding any value, simply feeding a system that demanded it.

So how can I make a difference in the NHS, when this is the environment?  This was the question I had been grappling with for some time.  Finally at Christmas I decided the only way to be free from the directives and the diktats, the imperatives that are well-intentioned but in reality stifle local innovation and prevent change from happening, was to quit.

This is what I explained to my Chair back in January.  He listened, sighed heavily, and said, ‘I can see I am not going to change your mind’.  And he was right. I want to focus on supporting the changes that matter, to provide genuine support to those working on the front line. To do this, I have come to understand, I need to be working with the NHS not in the NHS.

8
feb
0

Is the noise from General Practice rhetoric or reality?

Posted by Ben GowlandBlogs, The General Practice BlogNo Comments

What is really going on with general practice?  Is the noise we hear from GPs every time we turn on the radio or pick up a paper rhetoric or reality?  Are GPs simply feeling the same pressure we are all feeling, or is something more going on? I decided to find out.

Read More

Subscribe Today

Subscribe today to receive our weekly newsletter giving details of each episode of the General Practice Podcast as it is published plus our weekly blog and useful links for anyone interested in general practice innovation. You’ll also receive a free copy of “How to Establish GP Influence Within an Integrated Care System ICS”.

Subscribe Today

CONTACT INFO

Telephone: 07956 348654
E-mail: ben@ockham.healthcare

Recent Posts

  • Podcast – Alex Matheson – Building an Inclusive Future in LGBTQ+ Health
  • Why Engage with Neighbourhoods?
  • Podcast – Rachel Morris – Conquering Stress and Enhancing Communication

Follow Us

Cookie Policy

website acceptable use policy

terms of website use

privacy Policy

Latest Tweets

© Copyright 2016 - 2024 by Ockham Healthcare. All Rights Reserved.
Contact Us
This site uses cookies. By continuing to use this website, you agree to our cookie policyAccept Read More
Privacy & Cookies Policy

Privacy Overview

This website uses cookies to improve your experience while you navigate through the website. Out of these, the cookies that are categorized as necessary are stored on your browser as they are essential for the working of basic functionalities of the website. We also use third-party cookies that help us analyze and understand how you use this website. These cookies will be stored in your browser only with your consent. You also have the option to opt-out of these cookies. But opting out of some of these cookies may affect your browsing experience.
Necessary
Always Enabled
Necessary cookies are absolutely essential for the website to function properly. This category only includes cookies that ensures basic functionalities and security features of the website. These cookies do not store any personal information.
Non-necessary
Any cookies that may not be particularly necessary for the website to function and is used specifically to collect user personal data via analytics, ads, other embedded contents are termed as non-necessary cookies. It is mandatory to procure user consent prior to running these cookies on your website.
SAVE & ACCEPT